Product
Folder
Order
Now
Technical
Documents
Tools &
Software
Support &
Community
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
AM570x Sitara™ Processors
1 Device Overview
1.1
Features
1
• Arm® Cortex®-A15 microprocessor subsystem
• C66x floating-point VLIW DSP
– Fully object-code compatible with C67x and
C64x+
– Up to thirty-two 16 × 16-bit fixed-point multiplies
per cycle
• Up to 512KB of on-chip L3 RAM
• Level 3 (L3) and Level 4 (L4) interconnects
• DDR3/DDR3L Memory Interface (EMIF) module
– Supports up to DDR-1333 (667 MHz)
– Up to 2GB across single chip select
• 2x dual Arm® Cortex®-M4 co-processors (IPU1
and IPU2)
• IVA-HD subsystem
– 4K @ 15fps encode and decode support for
H.264 CODEC
– Other CODECs are up to 1080p60
• Display subsystem
– Full-HD video (1920 × 1080p, 60 fps)
– Multiple video input and video output
– 2D and 3D graphics
– Display controller with DMA engine and up to
three pipelines
– HDMI™ encoder: HDMI 1.4a and DVI 1.0
compliant
• 2x dual-core programmable real-time unit and
industrial communication subsystem (PRU-ICSS)
• Accelerator (BB2D) subsystem
– Vivante® GC320 core
• Video Processing Engine (VPE)
• Available single-core PowerVR™ SGX544 3D
GPU
• Secure boot support
– Hardware-enforced root-of-trust
– Customer programmable keys
– Support for takeover protection, IP protection,
and anti-roll back protection
• Cryptographic acceleration support
– Supports cryptographic cores
– AES – 128/192/256-bits key sizes
– 3DES – 56/112/168-bits key sizes
– MD5, SHA1
– SHA2 – 224/256/384/512
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
– True random number generator
– DMA support
Debug security
– Secure software controlled debug access
– Security aware debugging
Trusted execution environment (TEE) support
– Arm TrustZone™ based TEE
– Extensive firewall support for isolation
– Secure DMA path and interconnect
– Secure watchdog/timer/IPC
One Video Input Port (VIP) module
– Support for up to four multiplexed input ports
General-Purpose Memory Controller (GPMC)
Enhanced Direct Memory Access (EDMA)
controller
Ethernet subsystem
Sixteen 32-bit general-purpose timers
32-bit MPU watchdog timer
Five high-speed inter-integrated circuit (I2C) ports
HDQ™/ 1-wire® interface
Ten configurable UART/IrDA/CIR modules
Four Multichannel Serial Peripheral Interfaces
(McSPI)
Quad SPI Interface (QSPI)
Eight Multichannel Audio Serial Port (McASP)
modules
SuperSpeed USB 3.0 dual-role device
High-Speed USB 2.0 dual-role device
Four MultiMedia Card/Secure Digital/Secure Digital
Input Output Interfaces ( MMC™/ SD®/SDIO)
PCI Express® 3.0 subsystem with 5-Gbps lane
– One 2-lane Gen2-compliant port
– or two 1-lane Gen2-compliant ports
Dual Controller Area Network (DCAN) modules
– CAN 2.0B protocol
MIPI™ CSI-2 camera serial interface
Up to 186 General-Purpose I/O (GPIO) pins
Power, reset, and clock management
On-chip debug with CTools technology
28-nm CMOS technology
17 mm × 17 mm, 0.65-mm pitch, 538-pin BGA
(CBD)
1
An IMPORTANT NOTICE at the end of this data sheet addresses availability, warranty, changes, use in safety-critical applications,
intellectual property matters and other important disclaimers. PRODUCTION DATA.
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
1.2
•
•
•
Applications
Industrial communication
Human Machine Interface (HMI)
Automation and control
1.3
www.ti.com
•
•
High performance applications
Other general use
Description
AM570x Sitara™ processors are Arm applications processors built to meet the intense processing needs
of modern embedded products.
AM570x devices bring high processing performance through the maximum flexibility of a fully integrated
mixed processor solution. The devices also combine programmable video processing with a highly
integrated peripheral set.
Programmability is provided by a single-core Arm Cortex-A15 RISC CPU with Arm Neon™ extensions and
TI C66x VLIW floating-point DSP cores. The Arm processor lets developers keep control functions
separate from vision algorithms programmed on the DSP and coprocessors, thus reducing the complexity
of the system software.
Additionally, TI provides a complete set of development tools for the Arm and C66x DSP, including C
compilers, a DSP assembly optimizer to simplify programming and scheduling, and a debugging interface
for visibility into source code execution.
Cryptographic acceleration is available in all devices. All other supported security features, including
support for secure boot, debug security and support for trusted execution environment are available on
High-Security (HS) devices. For more information about HS devices, contact your TI representative.
Device Information (1)
(1)
2
PART NUMBER
PACKAGE
BODY SIZE
AM5706CBD
FCBGA (538)
17.0 mm × 17.0 mm
AM5708CBD
FCBGA (538)
17.0 mm × 17.0 mm
For more information, see Section 9, Mechanical, Packaging, and Orderable Information.
Device Overview
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
1.4
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Functional Block Diagram
Figure 1-1 is functional block diagram for the device.
AM570x
Display Subsystem
MPU
IVA HD
(1x Arm
Cortex–A15)
1080p Video
Co-Processor
1x GFX Pipeline
LCD2
GPU
BB2D
3x Video Pipeline
LCD3
(1x SGX544 3D)
(GC320 2D)
Blend / Scale
HDMI 1.4a
DSP
(1x C66x
Co-Processor)
IPU1
(2x Cortex–M4)
IPU2
EDMA
VIP x1
MMU x2
sDMA
Secure Boot
Debug
Security
TEE
CSI2 x1
CAL
(2x Cortex–M4)
VPE
(HS devices)
High-Speed Interconnect
System
Connectivity
Spinlock
Timers x16
Mailbox x13
WDT
PWM SS x3
Dual Mode FS/HS/SS
w/ PHY
GPIO x8
KBD
HDQ
USB 2.0
USB 3.0
Dual Mode FS/HS
PHY
PCIeSS x2
GMAC_SW
PRU-ICSS x2
Program/Data Storage
Serial Interfaces
UART x10
QSPI
McSPI x4
McASP x8
DCAN x2
I2C x5
MMC / SD x4
512-KB
OCMC_RAM
w/ ECC
DMM
GPMC / ELM
(NAND/NOR/
Async)
EMIF
1x 32-bit
DDR3(L)
intro-001
Figure 1-1. AM570x Block Diagram
Device Overview
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
3
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table of Contents
1
Device Overview ......................................... 1
6.3
MPU ................................................ 321
1.1
Features .............................................. 1
6.4
DSP Subsystem
1.2
Applications ........................................... 2
6.5
PRU-ICSS.......................................... 328
1.3
Description ............................................ 2
6.6
Memory Subsystem ................................ 329
........................... 3
Revision History ......................................... 5
Device Comparison ..................................... 6
3.1
Related Products ..................................... 8
Terminal Configuration and Functions .............. 9
4.1
Pin Diagram .......................................... 9
4.2
Pin Attributes ......................................... 9
4.3
Signal Descriptions .................................. 66
4.4
Pin Multiplexing .................................... 102
4.5
Connections for Unused Pins ...................... 116
Specifications ......................................... 117
5.1
Absolute Maximum Ratings........................ 118
5.2
ESD Ratings ....................................... 119
5.3
Power on Hours (POH) Limits ..................... 119
5.4
Recommended Operating Conditions ............. 119
5.5
Operating Performance Points ..................... 122
5.6
Power Consumption Summary .................... 142
5.7
Electrical Characteristics ........................... 142
6.7
Interprocessor Communication
6.8
Interrupt Controller ................................. 333
1.4
2
3
4
5
Functional Block Diagram
5.8
5.9
5.10
6
4
7
8
VPP Specifications for One-Time Programmable
(OTP) eFuses ...................................... 150
Thermal Resistance Characteristics for CBD
Package ............................................ 151
Timing Requirements and Switching
Characteristics ..................................... 152
Detailed Description.................................. 319
6.1
Description ......................................... 319
6.2
Functional Block Diagram
.........................
319
....................
324
332
6.9
EDMA .............................................. 334
6.10
Peripherals ......................................... 335
6.11
On-chip Debug ..................................... 352
Applications, Implementation, and Layout ...... 355
7.1
Power Supply Mapping ............................ 355
7.2
DDR3 Board Design and Layout Guidelines....... 356
7.3
7.4
High Speed Differential Signal Routing Guidance . 379
Power Distribution Network Implementation
Guidance ........................................... 379
7.5
Thermal Solution Guidance ........................ 379
7.6
Single-Ended Interfaces
7.7
LJCB_REFN/P Connections ....................... 381
7.8
Clock Routing Guidelines .......................... 382
...........................
379
Device and Documentation Support .............. 383
8.1
Device Nomenclature .............................. 383
8.2
Tools and Software ................................ 385
8.3
Documentation Support ............................ 386
8.4
Related Links
8.5
Support Resources
8.6
8.7
8.8
9
...................................
......................................
................................
Trademarks ........................................
Electrostatic Discharge Caution ...................
Glossary............................................
386
386
386
387
387
Mechanical, Packaging, and Orderable
Information ............................................. 388
9.1
Packaging Information ............................. 388
Table of Contents
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
2 Revision History
Changes from May 16, 2019 to November 15, 2019 (from E Revision (May 2019) to F Revision)
•
Added reminders to disable unused pulls and RX pads in Section 4.2, Pin Attributes
Page
...................................
Revision History
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
10
5
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
3 Device Comparison
Table 3-1 shows a comparison between devices, highlighting the differences.
Table 3-1. Device Comparison
DEVICE
FEATURES
AM5708
AM5706
Features
AM5708: 142 (0x8E) AM5706: 140 (0x8C)
CTRL_WKUP_STD_FUSE_DIE_ID_2[31:24] Base PN register bitfield value(2)
AM5708-E: 143
(0x8F)
AM5706-E: 141
(0x8D)
J
D, J
Processors/Accelerators
Speed Grades
Arm Single Cortex-A15 Microprocessor (MPU) Subsystem
MPU core 0
C66x VLIW DSP
DSP1
BitBLT 2D Hardware Acceleration Engine (BB2D)
BB2D
Yes
Yes
Not Supported(1)
VOUT1
Display Subsystem
VOUT2
Yes
Not Supported(1)
VOUT3
Yes
Not Supported(1)
HDMI
Yes
Not Supported(1)
IPU1
Arm Dual Cortex-M4 Image Processing Unit (IPU)
Not Supported(1)
Yes
Yes
IPU2
Yes
Image Video Accelarator (IVA)
IVA
Yes
Not Supported(1)
SGX544 Single-Core 3D Graphics Processing Unit (GPU)
GPU
Yes
Not Supported(1)
Video Input Port (VIP)
VIP1
Video Processing Engine (VPE)
vin1a
Yes
vin1b
Yes
vin2a
Yes
vin2b
Yes
VPE
Yes
Program/Data Storage
On-Chip Shared Memory (RAM)
OCMC_RAM1
General-Purpose Memory Controller (GPMC)
GPMC
512KB
Yes
DDR3/DDR3L Memory Controller
EMIF1
up to 2GB
Dynamic Memory Manager (DMM)
DMM
Yes
ATL
Not Supported(1)
VCP1
Not Supported(1)
VCP2
Not Supported(1)
Radio Support
Audio Tracking Logic (ATL)
Viterbi Coprocessor (VCP)
Peripherals
Controller Area Network (DCAN) Interface
DCAN1
Yes
DCAN2
Yes
Enhanced DMA (EDMA)
EDMA
Yes
System DMA (DMA_SYSTEM)
DMA_SYSTEM
Yes
Ethernet Subsystem (Ethernet SS)
General-Purpose I/O (GPIO)
GMAC_SW[0]
MII, RMII, or RGMII
GMAC_SW[1]
MII, RMII, or RGMII
GPIO
2
Up to 186
Inter-Integrated Circuit Interface (I C)
I2C
5
System Mailbox Module
MAILBOX
13
Media Local Bus Subsystem (MLBSS)
MLB
6
Device Comparison
Not Supported
(1)
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 3-1. Device Comparison (continued)
DEVICE
FEATURES
Camera Adaptation Layer (CAL) Camera Serial Interface 2 (CSI2)
Multichannel Audio Serial Port (McASP)
MultiMedia Card/Secure Digital/Secure Digital Input Output Interface
(MMC/SD/SDIO)
AM5708
AM5706
CSI2_0
1 CLK + 2 Data
CSI2_1
Not Supported(1)
McASP1
16 serializers
McASP2
16 serializers
McASP3
4 serializers
McASP4
4 serializers
McASP5
4 serializers
McASP6
4 serializers
McASP7
4 serializers
McASP8
2 serializers
MMC1
1x UHSI 4b
MMC2
1x eMMC 8b
MMC3
1x SDIO 8b
MMC4
1x SDIO 4b
PCIe_SS1
Up to two lanes (second lane shared with
PCIe_SS2 and USB1)
PCIe_SS2
Single lane (shared with PCIe_SS1 and
USB1)
PCI Express 3.0 Port with Integrated PHY
2x Programmable Real-Time Unit Subsystem and Industrial
Communication Subsystem (PRU-ICSS)
PRU-ICSS1
Yes
PRU-ICSS2
Yes
Serial Advanced Technology Attachment (SATA)
SATA
Not Supported(1)
Real-Time Clock Subsystem (RTCSS)
RTCSS
Not Supported(1)
Multichannel Serial Peripheral Interface (McSPI)
McSPI
4
HDQ1W
HDQ1W
Yes
Quad SPI (QSPI)
QSPI
Yes
Spinlock Module
SPINLOCK
Yes
Keyboard Controller (KBD)
KBD
Yes
Timers, General-Purpose
TIMERS GP
16
Timer, Watchdog
WD TIMER
Yes
PWMSS1
Yes
PWMSS2
Yes
PWMSS3
Yes
Pulse-Width Modulation Subsystem (PWMSS)
Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART)
UART
Universal Serial Bus (USB3.0)
USB1 (SuperSpeed, Dual-RoleDevice [DRD])
Yes
USB2 (High-Speed,
Dual-Role-Device
[DRD], with
embedded HS PHY)
Yes
USB3 (High-Speed,
OTG2.0, with ULPI)
Not Supported(1)
USB4 (High-Speed,
OTG2.0, with ULPI)
Not Supported(1)
Universal Serial Bus (USB2.0)
10
(1) Features noted as “not supported,” must not be used. Their functionality is not supported by TI for this family of devices. These features
are subject to removal without notice on future device revisions. Any information regarding the unsupported features has been retained
in the documentation solely for the purpose of clarifying signal names or for consistency with previous feature descriptions.
(2) For more details about the CTRL_WKUP_STD_FUSE_DIE_ID_2 register and Base PN bitfield, see the device TRM.
3.1
Related Products
Device Comparison
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
7
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Sitara Processors Scalable processors based on Arm® Cortex®-A cores with flexible peripherals,
connectivity & unified software support – perfect for sensors to servers.
TI's Arm Cortex-A15 Advantage The Arm Cortex-A15 processor is proven in a range of different
markets and is an increasingly popular choice in networking infrastructure, delivering highperformance processing capability combined with low power consumption. The Cortex-A15
processor delivers roughly twice the performance of the Cortex-A9 processor and can
achieve 3.5 DMIPS/MHz.
Sitara Applications Sitara™ processors provide scalable solutions for a wide range of applications from
HMIs and gateways to more complex equipment such as drives and substation automation
equipment. Sitara Arm® processors offer scalability and reliability as well as multi-protocol
support for industrial communication protocols such as EtherCAT, Ethernet/IP and Profinet.
Reference Designs TI provides many reference designs containing ‘building block’ solutions to enable
customers to rapidly development of their unique products and solutions.
Companion Products for AM570x Review products that are frequently purchased or used in conjunction
with this product.
8
Device Comparison
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
4 Terminal Configuration and Functions
4.1
Pin Diagram
Figure 4-1 shows the ball locations for the 538 plastic ball grid array (PBGA) package and isused in
conjunction with Table 4-1 through Table 4-30 to locate signal names and ball grid numbers.
Figure 4-1. CBD S-PBGA-N538 Package (Bottom View)
NOTE
The following bottom balls are not pinned out: AE4 / AE7 / AE10 / AE13 / AD5 / AD8 / AD11
/ AD14 / AC7 / AC9 / AC12 / AC14 / AC17 / AB3 / AB4 / AB5 / AB13 / AB14 / AB17 / AB20 /
AB21 / AB22 / AA14 / AA17 / AA22 / Y22 / W3 / W4 / W5 / W6 / V6 / V21 / V22 / V23 / R3 /
R4 / R5 / R6 / R21 / R22 / R23 / P6 / M3 / M4 / M5 / M6 / M21 / M22 / M23 / J3 / J4 / J5 / J6
/ J21 / J22 / J23 / F4 / F5 / F9 / F12 / F15 / F18 / F21 / F22 / E3 / E4 / E5 / E6 / E9 / E12 /
E15 / E18 / E21 / E22 / E23 / D4 / D5 / D9 / D12 / D15 / D18 / D21 / D22 / C9 / C12 / C15 /
C18.
These balls do not exist on the package.
4.2
Pin Attributes
Table 4-1 describes the terminal characteristics and the signals multiplexed on each ball. The following list
describes the table column headers:
1. BALL NUMBER:This column lists ball numbers on the bottom side associated with each signal on the
bottom.
2. BALL NAME: This column lists mechanical name from package device (name is taken from muxmode
0).
3. SIGNAL NAME:This column lists names of signals multiplexed on each ball (also notice that the name
of the ball is the signal name in muxmode 0).
NOTE
Table 4-1 does not take into account the subsystem multiplexing signals. Subsystem
multiplexing signals are described in Section 4.3, Signal Descriptions.
NOTE
In driver off mode, the buffer is configured in high-impedance.
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
9
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
NOTE
In some cases Table 4-1 may present more than one signal name per muxmode for the
same ball. First signal in the list is the dominant function as selected via
CTRL_CORE_PAD_* register.
All other signals are virtual functions that present alternate multiplexing options. This virtual
functions
are
controlled
via
CTRL_CORE_ALT_SELECT_MUX
or
CTRL_CORE_VIP_MUX_SELECT register. For more information on how to use this options,
please refer to Device TRM, Chapter Control Module, Section Pad Configuration Registers.
4. PN: This column shows if the functionality is applicable for AM5706 device. Note that the Pin Attributes
table presents a functionality of super set. If the cell is empty it means that the signal is available in all
devices.
– Yes - Functionality is presented in AM5706
– No - Functionality is not presented in AM5706
An empty box means Yes.
5. MUXMODE: Multiplexing mode number:
a. MUXMODE 0 is the primary mode; this means that when MUXMODE=0 is set, the function
mapped on the pin corresponds to the name of the pin. The primary muxmode is not necessarily
the default muxmode.
NOTE
The default mode is the mode at the release of the reset; also see the RESET REL.
MUXMODE column.
b. MUXMODE 1 through 15 are possible muxmodes for alternate functions. On each pin, some
muxmodes are effectively used for alternate functions, while some muxmodes are not used. Only
MUXMODE values which correspond to defined functions should be used.
c. An empty box means Not Applicable.
6. TYPE: Signal type and direction:
– I = Input
– O = Output
– IO = Input or Output
– D = Open drain
– DS = Differential Signaling
– A = Analog
– PWR = Power
– GND = Ground
– CAP = LDO Capacitor
NOTE
The RX buffer within the pad logic should be disabled on all pins that are not being used as
an input. For more information, see the Control Module / Control Module Functional
Description / PAD Functional Multiplexing and Configuration section in the device TRM.
7. BALL RESET STATE: The state of the terminal at power-on reset:
– drive 0 (OFF): The buffer drives VOL (pulldown or pullup resistor not activated)
– drive 1 (OFF): The buffer drives VOH (pulldown or pullup resistor not activated)
– OFF: High-impedance
– PD: High-impedance with an active pulldown resistor
– PU: High-impedance with an active pullup resistor
– An empty box means Not Applicable
10
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
NOTE
Designs that contain pullup or pulldown resistors, either on the board or in attached devices
that oppose internal pullup or pulldown resistors, that are active while the device is held in
reset, must not remain in reset for long periods of time.
8. BALL RESET REL. STATE: The state of the terminal at the deactivation of the rstoutn signal (also
mapped to the PRCM SYS_WARM_OUT_RST signal)
– drive 0 (OFF): The buffer drives VOL (pulldown or pullup resistor not activated)
– drive clk (OFF): The buffer drives a toggling clock (pulldown or pullup resistor not activated)
– drive 1 (OFF): The buffer drives VOH (pulldown or pullup resistor not activated)
– OFF: High-impedance
– PD: High-impedance with an active pulldown resistor
– PU: High-impedance with an active pullup resistor
– An empty box means Not Applicable
NOTE
For more information on the CORE_PWRON_RET_RST reset signal and its reset sources,
see the Power, Reset, and Clock Management / PRCM Reset Management Functional
Description section of the Device TRM.
9. BALL RESET REL. MUXMODE: This muxmode is automatically configured at the release of the
rstoutn signal (also mapped to the PRCM SYS_WARM_OUT_RST signal).
An empty box means Not Applicable.
10. IO VOLTAGE VALUE: This column describes the IO voltage value (the corresponding power supply).
An empty box means Not Applicable.
11. POWER: The voltage supply that powers the terminal IO buffers.
An empty box means Not Applicable.
12. HYS: Indicates if the input buffer is with hysteresis:
– Yes: With hysteresis
– No: Without hysteresis
– An empty box: Not Applicable
NOTE
For more information, see the hysteresis values in Section 5.7, Electrical Characteristics.
13. BUFFER TYPE: Drive strength of the associated output buffer.
An empty box means Not Applicable.
NOTE
For programmable buffer strength:
– The default value is given in Table 4-1.
– A note describes all possible values according to the selected muxmode.
14. PULLUP / PULLDOWN TYPE: Denotes the presence of an internal pullup or pulldown resistor.
Pullup and pulldown resistors can be enabled or disabled via software.
– PU: Internal pullup
– PD: Internal pulldown
– PU/PD: Internal pullup and pulldown
– PUx/PDy: Programmable internal pullup and pulldown
– PDy: Programmable internal pulldown
– An empty box means No pull
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
11
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
NOTE
Internal pullup or pulldown resistors must be disabled when opposed by an external pullup or
pulldown resistor on the board or within an attached device.
15. DSIS: The deselected input state (DSIS) indicates the state driven on the peripheral input (logic "0" or
logic "1") when the peripheral pin function is not selected by any of the PINCNTLx registers.
– 0: Logic 0 driven on the peripheral's input signal port.
– 1: Logic 1 driven on the peripheral's input signal port.
– blank: Pin state driven on the peripheral's input signal port.
NOTE
Configuring two pins to the same input signal is not supported as it can yield unexpected
results. This can be easily prevented with the proper software configuration (Hi-Z mode is not
an input signal).
NOTE
When a pad is set into a multiplexing mode which is not defined by pin multiplexing, that
pad’s behavior is undefined. This should be avoided.
NOTE
Some of the EMIF1 signals have an additional state change at the release of porz. The state
that the signals change to at the release of porz is as follows:
drive 0 (OFF) for: ddr1_ck, ddr1_odt[0], ddr1_rst.
drive 1 (OFF) for: ddr1_casn, ddr1_rasn, ddr1_wen, ddr1_nck, ddr1_ba[2:0], ddr1_a[15:0],
ddr1_csn[0], ddr1_cke, ddr1_dqm[3:0]
12
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 4-1. Pin Attributes(1)
BALL NUMBER
[1]
BALL NAME [2]
SIGNAL NAME [3]
PN [4]
MUXMODE
[5]
TYPE [6]
BALL
RESET
STATE [7]
BALL
BALL
I/O
RESET
RESET
VOLTAGE
REL.
REL.
VALUE
MUXMODE
STATE [8]
[10]
[9]
POWER
[11]
HYS [12]
PULL
BUFFER
UP/DOWN
TYPE [13]
TYPE [14]
F8
cap_vbbldo_dsp
cap_vbbldo_dsp
CAP
T7
cap_vbbldo_gpu
cap_vbbldo_gpu
CAP
G14
cap_vbbldo_iva
cap_vbbldo_iva
CAP
F17
cap_vbbldo_mpu
cap_vbbldo_mpu
CAP
U20
cap_vddram_core1
cap_vddram_core1
CAP
K7
cap_vddram_core3
cap_vddram_core3
CAP
G19
cap_vddram_core4
cap_vddram_core4
CAP
L7
cap_vddram_dsp
cap_vddram_dsp
CAP
V7
cap_vddram_gpu
cap_vddram_gpu
CAP
G12
cap_vddram_iva
cap_vddram_iva
CAP
G18
cap_vddram_mpu
cap_vddram_mpu
AC1
csi2_0_dx0
csi2_0_dx0
0
I
1.8
Yes
LVCMOS
CSI2
PU/PD
AD1
csi2_0_dx1
csi2_0_dx1
0
I
1.8
Yes
LVCMOS
CSI2
PU/PD
AE2
csi2_0_dx2
csi2_0_dx2
0
I
1.8
Yes
LVCMOS
CSI2
PU/PD
AB2
csi2_0_dy0
csi2_0_dy0
0
I
1.8
Yes
LVCMOS
CSI2
PU/PD
AC2
csi2_0_dy1
csi2_0_dy1
0
I
1.8
Yes
LVCMOS
CSI2
PU/PD
AD2
csi2_0_dy2
csi2_0_dy2
0
I
1.8
Yes
LVCMOS
CSI2
PU/PD
H23
dcan1_rx
dcan1_rx
0
IO
Yes
2
O
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
uart8_txd
3
I
6
IO
gpio1_15
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
dcan1_tx
0
IO
uart8_rxd
2
I
mmc2_sdcd
3
I
6
IO
gpio1_14
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
CAP
mmc2_sdwp
hdmi1_cec
H22
dcan1_tx
hdmi1_hpd
DSIS [15]
No
No
PU
PU
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv3
1
0
PU
PU
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv3
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
1
1
1
AD16
ddr1_casn
ddr1_casn
0
O
PU
drive 1
(OFF)
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
No
LVCMOS
DDR
PUx/PDy
AD21
ddr1_ck
ddr1_ck
0
O
PD
drive 0
(OFF)
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
No
LVCMOS
DDR
PUx/PDy
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
13
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 4-1. Pin Attributes(1) (continued)
BALL NUMBER
[1]
BALL NAME [2]
SIGNAL NAME [3]
PN [4]
MUXMODE
[5]
TYPE [6]
BALL
RESET
STATE [7]
BALL
BALL
I/O
RESET
RESET
VOLTAGE
REL.
REL.
VALUE
MUXMODE
STATE [8]
[10]
[9]
POWER
[11]
HYS [12]
PULL
BUFFER
UP/DOWN
TYPE [13]
TYPE [14]
AB18
ddr1_cke
ddr1_cke
0
O
PU
drive 1
(OFF)
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
No
LVCMOS
DDR
PUx/PDy
AE21
ddr1_nck
ddr1_nck
0
O
PU
drive 1
(OFF)
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
No
LVCMOS
DDR
PUx/PDy
AD17
ddr1_rasn
ddr1_rasn
0
O
PU
drive 1
(OFF)
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
No
LVCMOS
DDR
PUx/PDy
AE17
ddr1_rst
ddr1_rst
0
O
PD
drive 0
(OFF)
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
No
LVCMOS
DDR
PUx/PDy
AE18
ddr1_wen
ddr1_wen
0
O
PU
drive 1
(OFF)
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
No
LVCMOS
DDR
PUx/PDy
AC18
ddr1_a0
ddr1_a0
0
O
PD
drive 1
(OFF)
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
No
LVCMOS
DDR
PUx/PDy
AE19
ddr1_a1
ddr1_a1
0
O
PD
drive 1
(OFF)
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
No
LVCMOS
DDR
PUx/PDy
AD19
ddr1_a2
ddr1_a2
0
O
PD
drive 1
(OFF)
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
No
LVCMOS
DDR
PUx/PDy
AB19
ddr1_a3
ddr1_a3
0
O
PD
drive 1
(OFF)
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
No
LVCMOS
DDR
PUx/PDy
AD20
ddr1_a4
ddr1_a4
0
O
PD
drive 1
(OFF)
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
No
LVCMOS
DDR
PUx/PDy
AE20
ddr1_a5
ddr1_a5
0
O
PD
drive 1
(OFF)
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
No
LVCMOS
DDR
PUx/PDy
AA18
ddr1_a6
ddr1_a6
0
O
PD
drive 1
(OFF)
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
No
LVCMOS
DDR
PUx/PDy
AA20
ddr1_a7
ddr1_a7
0
O
PD
drive 1
(OFF)
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
No
LVCMOS
DDR
PUx/PDy
Y21
ddr1_a8
ddr1_a8
0
O
PD
drive 1
(OFF)
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
No
LVCMOS
DDR
PUx/PDy
AC20
ddr1_a9
ddr1_a9
0
O
PD
drive 1
(OFF)
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
No
LVCMOS
DDR
PUx/PDy
AA21
ddr1_a10
ddr1_a10
0
O
PD
drive 1
(OFF)
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
No
LVCMOS
DDR
PUx/PDy
AC21
ddr1_a11
ddr1_a11
0
O
PD
drive 1
(OFF)
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
No
LVCMOS
DDR
PUx/PDy
AC22
ddr1_a12
ddr1_a12
0
O
PD
drive 1
(OFF)
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
No
LVCMOS
DDR
PUx/PDy
AC15
ddr1_a13
ddr1_a13
0
O
PD
drive 1
(OFF)
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
No
LVCMOS
DDR
PUx/PDy
AB15
ddr1_a14
ddr1_a14
0
O
PD
drive 1
(OFF)
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
No
LVCMOS
DDR
PUx/PDy
AC16
ddr1_a15
ddr1_a15
0
O
PD
drive 1
(OFF)
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
No
LVCMOS
DDR
PUx/PDy
AE16
ddr1_ba0
ddr1_ba0
0
O
PU
drive 1
(OFF)
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
No
LVCMOS
DDR
PUx/PDy
AA16
ddr1_ba1
ddr1_ba1
0
O
PU
drive 1
(OFF)
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
No
LVCMOS
DDR
PUx/PDy
14
Terminal Configuration and Functions
DSIS [15]
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 4-1. Pin Attributes(1) (continued)
BALL NUMBER
[1]
BALL NAME [2]
SIGNAL NAME [3]
PN [4]
MUXMODE
[5]
TYPE [6]
BALL
RESET
STATE [7]
BALL
BALL
I/O
RESET
RESET
VOLTAGE
REL.
REL.
VALUE
MUXMODE
STATE [8]
[10]
[9]
POWER
[11]
HYS [12]
PULL
BUFFER
UP/DOWN
TYPE [13]
TYPE [14]
AB16
ddr1_ba2
ddr1_ba2
0
O
PU
drive 1
(OFF)
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
No
LVCMOS
DDR
PUx/PDy
AC19
ddr1_csn0
ddr1_csn0
0
O
PU
drive 1
(OFF)
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
No
LVCMOS
DDR
PUx/PDy
AA23
ddr1_d0
ddr1_d0
0
IO
PD
PD
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
No
LVCMOS
DDR
PUx/PDy
AC24
ddr1_d1
ddr1_d1
0
IO
PD
PD
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
No
LVCMOS
DDR
PUx/PDy
AB24
ddr1_d2
ddr1_d2
0
IO
PD
PD
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
No
LVCMOS
DDR
PUx/PDy
AD24
ddr1_d3
ddr1_d3
0
IO
PD
PD
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
No
LVCMOS
DDR
PUx/PDy
AB23
ddr1_d4
ddr1_d4
0
IO
PD
PD
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
No
LVCMOS
DDR
PUx/PDy
AC23
ddr1_d5
ddr1_d5
0
IO
PD
PD
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
No
LVCMOS
DDR
PUx/PDy
AD23
ddr1_d6
ddr1_d6
0
IO
PD
PD
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
No
LVCMOS
DDR
PUx/PDy
AE24
ddr1_d7
ddr1_d7
0
IO
PD
PD
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
No
LVCMOS
DDR
PUx/PDy
AA24
ddr1_d8
ddr1_d8
0
IO
PD
PD
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
No
LVCMOS
DDR
PUx/PDy
W25
ddr1_d9
ddr1_d9
0
IO
PD
PD
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
No
LVCMOS
DDR
PUx/PDy
Y23
ddr1_d10
ddr1_d10
0
IO
PD
PD
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
No
LVCMOS
DDR
PUx/PDy
AD25
ddr1_d11
ddr1_d11
0
IO
PD
PD
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
No
LVCMOS
DDR
PUx/PDy
AC25
ddr1_d12
ddr1_d12
0
IO
PD
PD
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
No
LVCMOS
DDR
PUx/PDy
AB25
ddr1_d13
ddr1_d13
0
IO
PD
PD
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
No
LVCMOS
DDR
PUx/PDy
AA25
ddr1_d14
ddr1_d14
0
IO
PD
PD
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
No
LVCMOS
DDR
PUx/PDy
W24
ddr1_d15
ddr1_d15
0
IO
PD
PD
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
No
LVCMOS
DDR
PUx/PDy
W23
ddr1_d16
ddr1_d16
0
IO
PD
PD
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
No
LVCMOS
DDR
PUx/PDy
U25
ddr1_d17
ddr1_d17
0
IO
PD
PD
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
No
LVCMOS
DDR
PUx/PDy
U24
ddr1_d18
ddr1_d18
0
IO
PD
PD
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
No
LVCMOS
DDR
PUx/PDy
W21
ddr1_d19
ddr1_d19
0
IO
PD
PD
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
No
LVCMOS
DDR
PUx/PDy
T22
ddr1_d20
ddr1_d20
0
IO
PD
PD
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
No
LVCMOS
DDR
PUx/PDy
DSIS [15]
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
15
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 4-1. Pin Attributes(1) (continued)
BALL NUMBER
[1]
BALL NAME [2]
SIGNAL NAME [3]
PN [4]
MUXMODE
[5]
TYPE [6]
BALL
RESET
STATE [7]
BALL
BALL
I/O
RESET
RESET
VOLTAGE
REL.
REL.
VALUE
MUXMODE
STATE [8]
[10]
[9]
POWER
[11]
HYS [12]
PULL
BUFFER
UP/DOWN
TYPE [13]
TYPE [14]
U22
ddr1_d21
ddr1_d21
0
IO
PD
PD
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
No
LVCMOS
DDR
PUx/PDy
U23
ddr1_d22
ddr1_d22
0
IO
PD
PD
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
No
LVCMOS
DDR
PUx/PDy
T21
ddr1_d23
ddr1_d23
0
IO
PD
PD
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
No
LVCMOS
DDR
PUx/PDy
T23
ddr1_d24
ddr1_d24
0
IO
PD
PD
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
No
LVCMOS
DDR
PUx/PDy
T25
ddr1_d25
ddr1_d25
0
IO
PD
PD
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
No
LVCMOS
DDR
PUx/PDy
T24
ddr1_d26
ddr1_d26
0
IO
PD
PD
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
No
LVCMOS
DDR
PUx/PDy
P21
ddr1_d27
ddr1_d27
0
IO
PD
PD
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
No
LVCMOS
DDR
PUx/PDy
N21
ddr1_d28
ddr1_d28
0
IO
PD
PD
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
No
LVCMOS
DDR
PUx/PDy
P22
ddr1_d29
ddr1_d29
0
IO
PD
PD
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
No
LVCMOS
DDR
PUx/PDy
P23
ddr1_d30
ddr1_d30
0
IO
PD
PD
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
No
LVCMOS
DDR
PUx/PDy
P24
ddr1_d31
ddr1_d31
0
IO
PD
PD
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
No
LVCMOS
DDR
PUx/PDy
AE23
ddr1_dqm0
ddr1_dqm0
0
O
PU
drive 1
(OFF)
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
No
LVCMOS
DDR
PUx/PDy
W22
ddr1_dqm1
ddr1_dqm1
0
O
PU
drive 1
(OFF)
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
No
LVCMOS
DDR
PUx/PDy
U21
ddr1_dqm2
ddr1_dqm2
0
O
PU
drive 1
(OFF)
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
No
LVCMOS
DDR
PUx/PDy
P25
ddr1_dqm3
ddr1_dqm3
0
O
PU
drive 1
(OFF)
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
No
LVCMOS
DDR
PUx/PDy
AD22
ddr1_dqs0
ddr1_dqs0
0
IO
PD
PD
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
LVCMOS
DDR
PUx/PDy
Y24
ddr1_dqs1
ddr1_dqs1
0
IO
PD
PD
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
LVCMOS
DDR
PUx/PDy
V24
ddr1_dqs2
ddr1_dqs2
0
IO
PD
PD
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
LVCMOS
DDR
PUx/PDy
R24
ddr1_dqs3
ddr1_dqs3
0
IO
PD
PD
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
LVCMOS
DDR
PUx/PDy
AE22
ddr1_dqsn0
ddr1_dqsn0
0
IO
PU
PU
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
LVCMOS
DDR
PUx/PDy
Y25
ddr1_dqsn1
ddr1_dqsn1
0
IO
PU
PU
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
LVCMOS
DDR
PUx/PDy
V25
ddr1_dqsn2
ddr1_dqsn2
0
IO
PU
PU
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
LVCMOS
DDR
PUx/PDy
R25
ddr1_dqsn3
ddr1_dqsn3
0
IO
PU
PU
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
LVCMOS
DDR
PUx/PDy
16
Terminal Configuration and Functions
DSIS [15]
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 4-1. Pin Attributes(1) (continued)
BALL NUMBER
[1]
BALL NAME [2]
SIGNAL NAME [3]
PN [4]
MUXMODE
[5]
TYPE [6]
BALL
RESET
STATE [7]
BALL
BALL
I/O
RESET
RESET
VOLTAGE
REL.
REL.
VALUE
MUXMODE
STATE [8]
[10]
[9]
POWER
[11]
HYS [12]
PULL
BUFFER
UP/DOWN
TYPE [13]
TYPE [14]
AD18
ddr1_odt0
ddr1_odt0
0
O
PD
drive 0
(OFF)
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
No
LVCMOS
DDR
Y20
ddr1_vref0
ddr1_vref0
0
PWR
OFF
drive 1
(OFF)
1.35/1.5
vdds_ddr1
No
LVCMOS
DDR
C21
emu0
emu0
0
IO
PU
PU
0
1.8/3.3
vddshv3
Yes
14
IO
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
gpio8_30
emu1
0
IO
PU
PU
0
1.8/3.3
vddshv3
Yes
14
IO
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
gpio8_31
C22
emu1
PUx/PDy
E14
emu2
emu2
2
O
PD
PD
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv3
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
F14
emu3
emu3
2
O
PD
PD
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv3
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
F13
emu4
emu4
2
O
PD
PD
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv3
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
Y5
gpio6_10
gpio6_10
0
IO
PU
PU
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv7
Yes
1
O
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
mdio_mclk
i2c3_sda
2
IO
vin2b_hsync1
4
I
vin1a_clk0
9
I
ehrpwm2A
10
O
pr2_mii_mt1_clk
11
I
pr2_pru0_gpi0
12
I
pr2_pru0_gpo0
13
O
gpio6_10
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
gpio6_11
0
IO
mdio_d
1
IO
i2c3_scl
2
IO
vin2b_vsync1
4
I
vin1a_de0
9
I
ehrpwm2B
10
O
pr2_mii1_txen
11
O
pr2_pru0_gpi1
12
I
pr2_pru0_gpo1
13
O
gpio6_11
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
Y6
gpio6_11
DSIS [15]
1
1
0
0
PU
PU
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv7
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
1
1
0
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
17
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 4-1. Pin Attributes(1) (continued)
BALL NUMBER
[1]
H21
K22
K23
M1
BALL NAME [2]
gpio6_14
gpio6_15
gpio6_16
gpmc_a0
SIGNAL NAME [3]
MUXMODE
[5]
TYPE [6]
BALL
RESET
STATE [7]
BALL
BALL
I/O
RESET
RESET
VOLTAGE
REL.
REL.
VALUE
MUXMODE
STATE [8]
[10]
[9]
PU
PU
IO
IO
dcan2_tx
2
IO
1
uart10_rxd
3
I
1
i2c3_sda
9
IO
1
timer1
10
IO
gpio6_14
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
gpio6_15
0
IO
mcasp1_axr9
1
IO
dcan2_rx
2
IO
uart10_txd
3
O
i2c3_scl
9
IO
timer2
10
IO
gpio6_15
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
gpio6_16
0
IO
mcasp1_axr10
1
IO
clkout1
9
O
timer3
10
IO
gpio6_16
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
gpmc_a0
0
O
vin1a_d16
2
I
3
O
vin1b_d0
6
I
0
i2c4_scl
7
IO
1
uart5_rxd
8
I
1
gpio7_3
gpmc_a26
gpmc_a16
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
No
1.8/3.3
vddshv3
Yes
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
DSIS [15]
1
15
vddshv3
PULL
BUFFER
UP/DOWN
TYPE [13]
TYPE [14]
0
PU
1.8/3.3
HYS [12]
mcasp1_axr8
PU
15
POWER
[11]
gpio6_14
vout3_d16
18
PN [4]
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
0
PU/PD
0
1
1
PU
PD
PU
PD
Terminal Configuration and Functions
15
15
1.8/3.3
1.8/3.3
vddshv3
vddshv10
Yes
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
0
0
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 4-1. Pin Attributes(1) (continued)
BALL NUMBER
[1]
M2
BALL NAME [2]
gpmc_a1
SIGNAL NAME [3]
gpmc_a2
gpmc_a3
gpmc_a4
BALL
RESET
STATE [7]
BALL
BALL
I/O
RESET
RESET
VOLTAGE
REL.
REL.
VALUE
MUXMODE
STATE [8]
[10]
[9]
PD
PD
3
O
vin1b_d1
6
I
0
i2c4_sda
7
IO
1
uart5_txd
8
O
gpio7_4
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
gpmc_a2
0
O
vin1a_d18
2
I
3
O
vin1b_d2
6
I
0
uart7_rxd
7
I
1
uart5_ctsn
8
I
1
gpio7_5
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
gpmc_a3
0
O
qspi1_cs2
1
O
vin1a_d19
2
I
3
O
vin1b_d3
6
I
uart7_txd
7
O
uart5_rtsn
8
O
gpio7_6
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
gpmc_a4
0
O
qspi1_cs3
1
O
vin1a_d20
2
I
3
O
vin1b_d4
6
I
0
i2c5_scl
7
IO
1
uart6_rxd
8
I
1
gpio1_26
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
vout3_d20
No
No
No
PD
PD
15
15
1.8/3.3
1.8/3.3
vddshv10
vddshv10
Yes
Yes
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
DSIS [15]
I
PD
vddshv10
PULL
BUFFER
UP/DOWN
TYPE [13]
TYPE [14]
O
PD
1.8/3.3
HYS [12]
2
No
15
POWER
[11]
0
vout3_d19
K3
TYPE [6]
vin1a_d17
vout3_d18
L1
MUXMODE
[5]
gpmc_a1
vout3_d17
L2
PN [4]
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
0
PU/PD
0
PU/PD
1
0
0
PD
PD
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv10
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
1
0
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
19
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 4-1. Pin Attributes(1) (continued)
BALL NUMBER
[1]
K2
BALL NAME [2]
gpmc_a5
SIGNAL NAME [3]
gpmc_a6
gpmc_a7
gpmc_a8
BALL
BALL
I/O
RESET
RESET
VOLTAGE
REL.
REL.
VALUE
MUXMODE
STATE [8]
[10]
[9]
PD
PD
O
vin1b_d5
6
I
0
i2c5_sda
7
IO
1
uart6_txd
8
O
gpio1_27
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
gpmc_a6
0
O
vin1a_d22
2
I
3
O
vin1b_d6
6
I
0
uart8_rxd
7
I
1
uart6_ctsn
8
I
1
gpio1_28
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
gpmc_a7
0
O
vin1a_d23
2
I
3
O
vin1b_d7
6
I
uart8_txd
7
O
uart6_rtsn
8
O
gpio1_29
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
gpmc_a8
0
O
vin1a_hsync0
2
I
3
O
vin1b_hsync1
6
I
timer12
7
IO
spi4_sclk
8
IO
gpio1_30
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
No
No
No
PD
PD
15
15
1.8/3.3
1.8/3.3
vddshv10
vddshv10
Yes
Yes
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
DSIS [15]
3
PD
vddshv10
PULL
BUFFER
UP/DOWN
TYPE [13]
TYPE [14]
I
PD
1.8/3.3
HYS [12]
O
No
15
POWER
[11]
2
vout3_hsync
20
BALL
RESET
STATE [7]
0
vout3_d23
K4
TYPE [6]
vin1a_d21
vout3_d22
K1
MUXMODE
[5]
gpmc_a5
vout3_d21
J1
PN [4]
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
0
PU/PD
0
PU/PD
0
0
PD
PD
Terminal Configuration and Functions
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv10
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
0
0
0
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 4-1. Pin Attributes(1) (continued)
BALL NUMBER
[1]
H1
BALL NAME [2]
gpmc_a9
SIGNAL NAME [3]
gpmc_a10
gpmc_a11
gpmc_a12
BALL
RESET
STATE [7]
BALL
BALL
I/O
RESET
RESET
VOLTAGE
REL.
REL.
VALUE
MUXMODE
STATE [8]
[10]
[9]
PD
PD
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
DSIS [15]
I
3
O
vin1b_vsync1
6
I
timer11
7
IO
spi4_d1
8
IO
gpio1_31
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
gpmc_a10
0
O
vin1a_de0
2
I
3
O
vin1b_clk1
6
I
timer10
7
IO
spi4_d0
8
IO
gpio2_0
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
gpmc_a11
0
O
vin1a_fld0
2
I
3
O
vin1b_de1
6
I
timer9
7
IO
spi4_cs0
8
IO
gpio2_1
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
gpmc_a12
0
O
gpmc_a0
5
O
vin1b_fld1
6
I
timer8
7
IO
spi4_cs1
8
IO
1
dma_evt1
9
I
0
gpio2_2
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
No
vddshv10
PULL
BUFFER
UP/DOWN
TYPE [13]
TYPE [14]
O
No
1.8/3.3
HYS [12]
2
No
15
POWER
[11]
0
vout3_fld
G1
TYPE [6]
vin1a_vsync0
vout3_de
L3
MUXMODE
[5]
gpmc_a9
vout3_vsync
J2
PN [4]
PU/PD
0
0
0
PD
PD
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv10
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
0
0
0
PD
PD
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv10
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
0
0
1
PD
PD
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv10
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
0
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
21
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 4-1. Pin Attributes(1) (continued)
BALL NUMBER
[1]
H3
H4
K6
K5
G2
F2
A4(10)
22
BALL NAME [2]
gpmc_a13
gpmc_a14
gpmc_a15
gpmc_a16
gpmc_a17
gpmc_a18
gpmc_a19
SIGNAL NAME [3]
PN [4]
MUXMODE
[5]
TYPE [6]
BALL
RESET
STATE [7]
BALL
BALL
I/O
RESET
RESET
VOLTAGE
REL.
REL.
VALUE
MUXMODE
STATE [8]
[10]
[9]
PD
PD
O
1
I
timer7
7
IO
spi4_cs2
8
IO
1
dma_evt2
9
I
0
gpio2_3
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
gpmc_a14
0
O
qspi1_d3
1
IO
timer6
7
IO
spi4_cs3
8
IO
gpio2_4
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
gpmc_a15
0
O
qspi1_d2
1
IO
timer5
7
IO
gpio2_5
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
gpmc_a16
0
O
qspi1_d0
1
IO
gpio2_6
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
gpmc_a17
0
O
qspi1_d1
1
IO
gpio2_7
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
gpmc_a18
0
O
qspi1_sclk
1
IO
gpio2_8
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
gpmc_a19
0
O
mmc2_dat4
1
IO
gpmc_a13
2
O
vin2b_d0
6
I
gpio2_9
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
1.8/3.3
vddshv10
Yes
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
DSIS [15]
0
15
vddshv10
PULL
BUFFER
UP/DOWN
TYPE [13]
TYPE [14]
qspi1_rtclk
PD
1.8/3.3
HYS [12]
gpmc_a13
PD
15
POWER
[11]
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
0
PU/PD
0
1
PD
PD
PD
PD
PD
PD
15
15
15
1.8/3.3
1.8/3.3
1.8/3.3
vddshv10
vddshv10
vddshv10
Yes
Yes
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
0
0
0
PD
PD
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv10
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
PD
PD
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv11
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
Terminal Configuration and Functions
1
0
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 4-1. Pin Attributes(1) (continued)
BALL NUMBER
[1]
E7(10)
D6(10)
C5(10)
B5
D7(10)
C6(10)
BALL NAME [2]
gpmc_a20
gpmc_a21
gpmc_a22
gpmc_a23
gpmc_a24
gpmc_a25
SIGNAL NAME [3]
PN [4]
MUXMODE
[5]
TYPE [6]
gpmc_a20
0
O
mmc2_dat5
1
IO
gpmc_a14
2
O
vin2b_d1
6
I
gpio2_10
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
gpmc_a21
0
O
mmc2_dat6
1
IO
gpmc_a15
2
O
vin2b_d2
6
I
gpio2_11
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
gpmc_a22
0
O
mmc2_dat7
1
IO
gpmc_a16
2
O
vin2b_d3
6
I
gpio2_12
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
gpmc_a23
0
O
mmc2_clk
1
IO
gpmc_a17
2
O
vin2b_d4
6
I
gpio2_13
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
gpmc_a24
0
O
mmc2_dat0
1
IO
gpmc_a18
2
O
vin2b_d5
6
I
gpio2_14
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
gpmc_a25
0
O
mmc2_dat1
1
IO
gpmc_a19
2
O
vin2b_d6
6
I
gpio2_15
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
BALL
RESET
STATE [7]
BALL
BALL
I/O
RESET
RESET
VOLTAGE
REL.
REL.
VALUE
MUXMODE
STATE [8]
[10]
[9]
PD
PD
15
1.8/3.3
POWER
[11]
vddshv11
HYS [12]
Yes
PULL
BUFFER
UP/DOWN
TYPE [13]
TYPE [14]
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
DSIS [15]
PU/PD
1
0
PD
PD
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv11
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
1
0
PD
PD
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv11
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
1
0
PD
PD
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv11
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
1
0
PD
PD
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv11
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
1
0
PD
PD
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv11
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
1
0
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
23
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 4-1. Pin Attributes(1) (continued)
BALL NUMBER
[1]
A5(10)
B6(10)
F1
BALL NAME [2]
gpmc_a26
gpmc_a27
gpmc_ad0
SIGNAL NAME [3]
gpmc_ad1
gpmc_ad2
0
O
1
IO
gpmc_a20
2
O
vin2b_d7
6
I
gpio2_16
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
gpmc_a27
0
O
mmc2_dat3
1
IO
gpmc_a21
2
O
vin2b_hsync1
6
I
gpio2_17
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
gpmc_ad0
0
IO
vin1a_d0
2
I
3
O
gpio1_6
14
IO
sysboot0
15
I
gpmc_ad1
0
IO
vin1a_d1
2
I
3
O
gpio1_7
14
IO
sysboot1
15
I
gpmc_ad2
0
IO
vin1a_d2
2
I
3
O
gpio1_8
14
IO
sysboot2
15
I
gpmc_ad3
0
IO
vin1a_d3
2
I
3
O
gpio1_9
14
IO
sysboot3
15
I
gpmc_ad4
0
IO
vin1a_d4
2
I
3
O
gpio1_10
14
IO
sysboot4
15
I
vout3_d2
C1
gpmc_ad3
vout3_d3
D1
gpmc_ad4
vout3_d4
24
TYPE [6]
mmc2_dat2
vout3_d1
E1
MUXMODE
[5]
gpmc_a26
vout3_d0
E2
PN [4]
No
No
No
No
No
BALL
RESET
STATE [7]
BALL
BALL
I/O
RESET
RESET
VOLTAGE
REL.
REL.
VALUE
MUXMODE
STATE [8]
[10]
[9]
PD
PD
15
1.8/3.3
POWER
[11]
vddshv11
HYS [12]
Yes
PULL
BUFFER
UP/DOWN
TYPE [13]
TYPE [14]
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
DSIS [15]
PU/PD
1
0
PD
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
PD
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Terminal Configuration and Functions
15
15
15
15
15
15
1.8/3.3
1.8/3.3
1.8/3.3
1.8/3.3
1.8/3.3
1.8/3.3
vddshv11
vddshv10
vddshv10
vddshv10
vddshv10
vddshv10
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 4-1. Pin Attributes(1) (continued)
BALL NUMBER
[1]
D2
BALL NAME [2]
gpmc_ad5
SIGNAL NAME [3]
gpmc_ad6
gpmc_ad7
0
IO
2
I
3
O
gpio1_11
14
IO
sysboot5
15
I
gpmc_ad6
0
IO
vin1a_d6
2
I
3
O
gpio1_12
14
IO
sysboot6
15
I
gpmc_ad7
0
IO
vin1a_d7
2
I
3
O
gpio1_13
14
IO
sysboot7
15
I
gpmc_ad8
0
IO
vin1a_d8
2
I
3
O
gpio7_18
14
IO
sysboot8
15
I
gpmc_ad9
0
IO
vin1a_d9
2
I
3
O
gpio7_19
14
IO
sysboot9
15
I
gpmc_ad10
0
IO
vin1a_d10
2
I
3
O
gpio7_28
14
IO
sysboot10
15
I
gpmc_ad11
0
IO
vin1a_d11
2
I
3
O
gpio7_29
14
IO
sysboot11
15
I
vout3_d7
C2
gpmc_ad8
vout3_d8
D3
gpmc_ad9
vout3_d9
A2
gpmc_ad10
vout3_d10
B3
gpmc_ad11
TYPE [6]
vin1a_d5
vout3_d6
B2
MUXMODE
[5]
gpmc_ad5
vout3_d5
B1
PN [4]
vout3_d11
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
BALL
RESET
STATE [7]
BALL
BALL
I/O
RESET
RESET
VOLTAGE
REL.
REL.
VALUE
MUXMODE
STATE [8]
[10]
[9]
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
1.8/3.3
1.8/3.3
1.8/3.3
1.8/3.3
1.8/3.3
1.8/3.3
1.8/3.3
POWER
[11]
vddshv10
vddshv10
vddshv10
vddshv10
vddshv10
vddshv10
vddshv10
HYS [12]
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
PULL
BUFFER
UP/DOWN
TYPE [13]
TYPE [14]
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
DSIS [15]
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
25
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 4-1. Pin Attributes(1) (continued)
BALL NUMBER
[1]
C3
BALL NAME [2]
gpmc_ad12
SIGNAL NAME [3]
gpmc_ad13
gpmc_ad14
gpmc_ad15
26
gpmc_advn_ale
BALL
BALL
I/O
RESET
RESET
VOLTAGE
REL.
REL.
VALUE
MUXMODE
STATE [8]
[10]
[9]
OFF
OFF
O
gpio1_18
14
IO
sysboot12
15
I
gpmc_ad13
0
IO
vin1a_d13
2
I
3
O
gpio1_19
14
IO
sysboot13
15
I
gpmc_ad14
0
IO
vin1a_d14
2
I
3
O
gpio1_20
14
IO
sysboot14
15
I
gpmc_ad15
0
IO
vin1a_d15
2
I
3
O
gpio1_21
14
IO
sysboot15
15
I
gpmc_advn_ale
0
O
gpmc_cs6
1
O
clkout2
2
O
gpmc_wait1
3
I
gpmc_a2
5
O
gpmc_a23
6
O
timer3
7
IO
i2c3_sda
8
IO
1
dma_evt2
9
I
0
gpio2_23
gpmc_a19
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
No
No
No
OFF
OFF
PU
OFF
OFF
PU
Terminal Configuration and Functions
15
15
15
15
1.8/3.3
1.8/3.3
1.8/3.3
1.8/3.3
vddshv10
vddshv10
vddshv10
vddshv10
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
DSIS [15]
3
OFF
vddshv10
PULL
BUFFER
UP/DOWN
TYPE [13]
TYPE [14]
I
OFF
1.8/3.3
HYS [12]
IO
No
15
POWER
[11]
2
vout3_d15
H5
BALL
RESET
STATE [7]
0
vout3_d14
B4
TYPE [6]
vin1a_d12
vout3_d13
A3
MUXMODE
[5]
gpmc_ad12
vout3_d12
C4
PN [4]
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 4-1. Pin Attributes(1) (continued)
BALL NUMBER
[1]
H2
H6
L4
F3
A6
BALL NAME [2]
gpmc_ben0
gpmc_ben1
gpmc_clk
gpmc_cs0
gpmc_cs1
SIGNAL NAME [3]
PN [4]
MUXMODE
[5]
TYPE [6]
BALL
RESET
STATE [7]
BALL
BALL
I/O
RESET
RESET
VOLTAGE
REL.
REL.
VALUE
MUXMODE
STATE [8]
[10]
[9]
PU
PU
15
1.8/3.3
POWER
[11]
vddshv10
HYS [12]
Yes
PULL
BUFFER
UP/DOWN
TYPE [13]
TYPE [14]
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
DSIS [15]
gpmc_ben0
0
O
gpmc_cs4
1
O
PU/PD
vin2b_de1
6
I
timer2
7
IO
dma_evt3
9
I
gpio2_26
gpmc_a21
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
gpmc_ben1
0
O
gpmc_cs5
1
O
vin2b_clk1
4
I
gpmc_a3
5
O
vin2b_fld1
6
I
timer1
7
IO
dma_evt4
9
I
gpio2_27
gpmc_a22
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
gpmc_clk
0
IO
gpmc_cs7
1
O
clkout1
2
O
gpmc_wait1
3
I
vin2b_clk1
6
I
timer4
7
IO
i2c3_scl
8
IO
1
dma_evt1
9
I
0
gpio2_22
gpmc_a20
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
gpmc_cs0
0
O
gpio2_19
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
gpmc_cs1
0
O
mmc2_cmd
1
IO
gpmc_a22
2
O
vin2b_vsync1
6
I
gpio2_18
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
0
PU
PU
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv10
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
0
PU
PU
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv10
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
0
1
PU
PU
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv10
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
PU
PU
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv11
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
1
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
27
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 4-1. Pin Attributes(1) (continued)
BALL NUMBER
[1]
G4
G3
BALL NAME [2]
gpmc_cs2
gpmc_cs3
SIGNAL NAME [3]
F6
G6
gpmc_oen_ren
gpmc_wait0
gpmc_wen
MUXMODE
[5]
TYPE [6]
gpmc_cs2
0
O
qspi1_cs0
1
IO
gpio2_20
gpmc_a23
gpmc_a13
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
gpmc_cs3
0
O
qspi1_cs1
1
O
vin1a_clk0
2
I
3
O
gpmc_a1
5
O
gpio2_21
gpmc_a24
gpmc_a14
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
gpmc_oen_ren
0
O
gpio2_24
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
gpmc_wait0
0
I
gpio2_28
gpmc_a25
gpmc_a15
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
gpmc_wen
0
O
gpio2_25
14
IO
vout3_clk
G5
PN [4]
No
Driver off
BALL
RESET
STATE [7]
BALL
BALL
I/O
RESET
RESET
VOLTAGE
REL.
REL.
VALUE
MUXMODE
STATE [8]
[10]
[9]
PU
PU
PU
PU
15
15
1.8/3.3
1.8/3.3
POWER
[11]
vddshv10
vddshv10
HYS [12]
Yes
Yes
PULL
BUFFER
UP/DOWN
TYPE [13]
TYPE [14]
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
1
1
0
PU
PU
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv10
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
PU
PU
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv10
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
PU
PU
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv10
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
15
I
AE9
hdmi1_clockx
hdmi1_clockx
No
0
O
1.8
vdda_hdmi
HDMIPHY
Pdy
AD10
hdmi1_clocky
hdmi1_clocky
No
0
O
1.8
vdda_hdmi
HDMIPHY
Pdy
AE11
hdmi1_data0x
hdmi1_data0x
No
0
O
1.8
vdda_hdmi
HDMIPHY
Pdy
AD12
hdmi1_data0y
hdmi1_data0y
No
0
O
1.8
vdda_hdmi
HDMIPHY
Pdy
AE12
hdmi1_data1x
hdmi1_data1x
No
0
O
1.8
vdda_hdmi
HDMIPHY
Pdy
AD13
hdmi1_data1y
hdmi1_data1y
No
0
O
1.8
vdda_hdmi
HDMIPHY
Pdy
AE14
hdmi1_data2x
hdmi1_data2x
No
0
O
1.8
vdda_hdmi
HDMIPHY
Pdy
AD15
hdmi1_data2y
hdmi1_data2y
No
0
O
1.8
vdda_hdmi
HDMIPHY
Pdy
G22
i2c1_scl
i2c1_scl
0
IO
1.8/3.3
vddshv3
Yes
PU/PD
Driver off
15
I
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
I2C
i2c1_sda
0
IO
1.8/3.3
vddshv3
Yes
15
I
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
I2C
PU/PD
Driver off
G23
28
i2c1_sda
DSIS [15]
Terminal Configuration and Functions
1
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 4-1. Pin Attributes(1) (continued)
BALL NUMBER
[1]
G21
BALL NAME [2]
i2c2_scl
SIGNAL NAME [3]
i2c2_scl
i2c2_sda
MUXMODE
[5]
TYPE [6]
0
IO
1
IO
Driver off
15
I
i2c2_sda
0
IO
1
IO
hdmi1_ddc_sda
F23
PN [4]
hdmi1_ddc_scl
No
No
BALL
RESET
STATE [7]
BALL
BALL
I/O
RESET
RESET
VOLTAGE
REL.
REL.
VALUE
MUXMODE
STATE [8]
[10]
[9]
POWER
[11]
HYS [12]
PULL
BUFFER
UP/DOWN
TYPE [13]
TYPE [14]
DSIS [15]
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv3
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
I2C
PU/PD
1
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv3
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
I2C
PU/PD
1
PU/PD
0
Driver off
15
I
AB9
ljcb_clkn
ljcb_clkn
0
IO
1.8
vdda_pcie
AC8
ljcb_clkp
ljcb_clkp
0
IO
1.8
vdda_pcie
D16
mcasp1_aclkr
mcasp1_aclkr
0
IO
1.8/3.3
vddshv3
mcasp7_axr2
1
IO
i2c4_sda
10
IO
gpio5_0
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
mcasp1_aclkx
0
IO
vin1a_fld0
7
I
i2c3_sda
10
IO
pr2_mdio_mdclk
11
O
pr2_pru1_gpi7
12
I
pr2_pru1_gpo7
13
O
gpio7_31
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
mcasp1_fsr
0
IO
mcasp7_axr3
1
IO
i2c4_scl
10
IO
gpio5_1
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
mcasp1_fsx
0
IO
vin1a_de0
7
I
i2c3_scl
10
IO
1
pr2_mdio_data
11
IO
1
gpio7_30
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
C16
D17
C17
mcasp1_aclkx
mcasp1_fsr
mcasp1_fsx
PD
PD
15
LJCB
LJCB
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
0
1
PD
PD
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv3
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
0
0
1
PD
PD
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv3
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
0
0
1
PD
PD
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv3
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
0
0
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
29
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 4-1. Pin Attributes(1) (continued)
BALL NUMBER
[1]
E19
D19
A22
A23
30
BALL NAME [2]
mcasp2_aclkx
mcasp2_fsx
mcasp3_aclkx
mcasp3_fsx
SIGNAL NAME [3]
PN [4]
MUXMODE
[5]
TYPE [6]
BALL
RESET
STATE [7]
BALL
BALL
I/O
RESET
RESET
VOLTAGE
REL.
REL.
VALUE
MUXMODE
STATE [8]
[10]
[9]
PD
PD
15
1.8/3.3
POWER
[11]
vddshv3
HYS [12]
Yes
PULL
BUFFER
UP/DOWN
TYPE [13]
TYPE [14]
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
DSIS [15]
mcasp2_aclkx
0
IO
vin1a_d7
7
I
0
pr2_mii0_rxd2
11
I
pr2_pru0_gpi18
12
I
pr2_pru0_gpo18
13
O
Driver off
15
I
mcasp2_fsx
0
IO
vin1a_d6
7
I
pr2_mii0_rxd1
11
I
pr2_pru0_gpi19
12
I
pr2_pru0_gpo19
13
O
Driver off
15
I
mcasp3_aclkx
0
IO
mcasp3_aclkr
1
IO
mcasp2_axr12
2
IO
0
uart7_rxd
3
I
1
vin1a_d3
7
I
0
pr2_mii0_crs
11
I
0
pr2_pru0_gpi12
12
I
pr2_pru0_gpo12
13
O
gpio5_13
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
mcasp3_fsx
0
IO
mcasp3_fsr
1
IO
mcasp2_axr13
2
IO
uart7_txd
3
O
vin1a_d2
7
I
0
pr2_mii0_col
11
I
0
pr2_pru0_gpi13
12
I
pr2_pru0_gpo13
13
O
gpio5_14
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
0
0
PD
PD
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv3
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
0
0
0
PD
PD
PD
PD
Terminal Configuration and Functions
15
15
1.8/3.3
1.8/3.3
vddshv3
vddshv3
Yes
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
PU/PD
0
0
0
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 4-1. Pin Attributes(1) (continued)
BALL NUMBER
[1]
C23
B25
AC3
U6
D14
BALL NAME [2]
mcasp4_aclkx
mcasp4_fsx
mcasp5_aclkx
mcasp5_fsx
mcasp1_axr0
SIGNAL NAME [3]
PN [4]
MUXMODE
[5]
TYPE [6]
BALL
RESET
STATE [7]
BALL
BALL
I/O
RESET
RESET
VOLTAGE
REL.
REL.
VALUE
MUXMODE
STATE [8]
[10]
[9]
PD
PD
IO
1
IO
spi3_sclk
2
IO
0
uart8_rxd
3
I
1
i2c4_sda
4
IO
1
Driver off
15
I
mcasp4_fsx
0
IO
mcasp4_fsr
1
IO
spi3_d1
2
IO
uart8_txd
3
O
i2c4_scl
4
IO
Driver off
15
I
mcasp5_aclkx
0
IO
mcasp5_aclkr
1
IO
spi4_sclk
2
IO
0
uart9_rxd
3
I
1
i2c5_sda
4
IO
1
pr2_pru1_gpi1
12
I
pr2_pru1_gpo1
13
O
Driver off
15
I
mcasp5_fsx
0
IO
mcasp5_fsr
1
IO
spi4_d1
2
IO
uart9_txd
3
O
i2c5_scl
4
IO
pr2_pru1_gpi2
12
I
pr2_pru1_gpo2
13
O
Driver off
15
I
mcasp1_axr0
0
IO
uart6_rxd
3
I
vin1a_vsync0
7
I
0
i2c5_sda
10
IO
1
pr2_mii0_rxer
11
I
0
pr2_pru1_gpi8
12
I
pr2_pru1_gpo8
13
O
gpio5_2
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
1.8/3.3
vddshv3
Yes
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
DSIS [15]
0
15
vddshv3
PULL
BUFFER
UP/DOWN
TYPE [13]
TYPE [14]
mcasp4_aclkr
PD
1.8/3.3
HYS [12]
mcasp4_aclkx
PD
15
POWER
[11]
PU/PD
0
0
0
1
PD
PD
PD
PD
15
15
1.8/3.3
1.8/3.3
vddshv7
vddshv7
Yes
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
PU/PD
0
0
0
1
PD
PD
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv3
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
0
1
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
31
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 4-1. Pin Attributes(1) (continued)
BALL NUMBER
[1]
B14
C14
B15
A15
A14
A17
A16
32
BALL NAME [2]
mcasp1_axr1
mcasp1_axr2
mcasp1_axr3
mcasp1_axr4
mcasp1_axr5
mcasp1_axr6
mcasp1_axr7
SIGNAL NAME [3]
PN [4]
MUXMODE
[5]
TYPE [6]
BALL
RESET
STATE [7]
BALL
BALL
I/O
RESET
RESET
VOLTAGE
REL.
REL.
VALUE
MUXMODE
STATE [8]
[10]
[9]
PD
PD
IO
3
O
vin1a_hsync0
7
I
0
i2c5_scl
10
IO
1
pr2_mii_mt0_clk
11
I
0
pr2_pru1_gpi9
12
I
pr2_pru1_gpo9
13
O
gpio5_3
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
mcasp1_axr2
0
IO
mcasp6_axr2
1
IO
uart6_ctsn
3
I
gpio5_4
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
mcasp1_axr3
0
IO
mcasp6_axr3
1
IO
uart6_rtsn
3
O
gpio5_5
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
mcasp1_axr4
0
IO
mcasp4_axr2
1
IO
gpio5_6
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
mcasp1_axr5
0
IO
mcasp4_axr3
1
IO
gpio5_7
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
mcasp1_axr6
0
IO
mcasp5_axr2
1
IO
gpio5_8
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
mcasp1_axr7
0
IO
mcasp5_axr3
1
IO
timer4
10
IO
gpio5_9
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
1.8/3.3
vddshv3
Yes
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
DSIS [15]
0
15
vddshv3
PULL
BUFFER
UP/DOWN
TYPE [13]
TYPE [14]
uart6_txd
PD
1.8/3.3
HYS [12]
mcasp1_axr1
PD
15
POWER
[11]
PU/PD
0
0
0
1
PD
PD
PD
PD
PD
PD
PD
PD
PD
PD
Terminal Configuration and Functions
15
15
15
15
15
1.8/3.3
1.8/3.3
1.8/3.3
1.8/3.3
1.8/3.3
vddshv3
vddshv3
vddshv3
vddshv3
vddshv3
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 4-1. Pin Attributes(1) (continued)
BALL NUMBER
[1]
A18
B17
B16
BALL NAME [2]
mcasp1_axr8
mcasp1_axr9
mcasp1_axr10
SIGNAL NAME [3]
PN [4]
MUXMODE
[5]
TYPE [6]
BALL
RESET
STATE [7]
BALL
BALL
I/O
RESET
RESET
VOLTAGE
REL.
REL.
VALUE
MUXMODE
STATE [8]
[10]
[9]
PD
PD
IO
1
IO
spi3_sclk
3
IO
0
vin1a_d15
7
I
0
timer5
10
IO
pr2_mii0_txen
11
O
pr2_pru1_gpi10
12
I
pr2_pru1_gpo10
13
O
gpio5_10
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
mcasp1_axr9
0
IO
mcasp6_axr1
1
IO
spi3_d1
3
IO
0
vin1a_d14
7
I
0
timer6
10
IO
pr2_mii0_txd3
11
O
pr2_pru1_gpi11
12
I
pr2_pru1_gpo11
13
O
gpio5_11
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
mcasp1_axr10
0
IO
mcasp6_aclkx
1
IO
mcasp6_aclkr
2
IO
spi3_d0
3
IO
0
vin1a_d13
7
I
0
timer7
10
IO
pr2_mii0_txd2
11
O
pr2_pru1_gpi12
12
I
pr2_pru1_gpo12
13
O
gpio5_12
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
PD
PD
15
1.8/3.3
1.8/3.3
vddshv3
vddshv3
Yes
Yes
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
DSIS [15]
0
15
vddshv3
PULL
BUFFER
UP/DOWN
TYPE [13]
TYPE [14]
mcasp6_axr0
PD
1.8/3.3
HYS [12]
mcasp1_axr8
PD
15
POWER
[11]
0
0
PU/PD
0
0
PU/PD
0
0
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
33
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 4-1. Pin Attributes(1) (continued)
BALL NUMBER
[1]
B18
A19
E17
34
BALL NAME [2]
mcasp1_axr11
mcasp1_axr12
mcasp1_axr13
SIGNAL NAME [3]
PN [4]
MUXMODE
[5]
TYPE [6]
BALL
RESET
STATE [7]
BALL
BALL
I/O
RESET
RESET
VOLTAGE
REL.
REL.
VALUE
MUXMODE
STATE [8]
[10]
[9]
PD
PD
IO
1
IO
mcasp6_fsr
2
IO
spi3_cs0
3
IO
1
vin1a_d12
7
I
0
timer8
10
IO
pr2_mii0_txd1
11
O
pr2_pru1_gpi13
12
I
pr2_pru1_gpo13
13
O
gpio4_17
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
mcasp1_axr12
0
IO
mcasp7_axr0
1
IO
spi3_cs1
3
IO
1
vin1a_d11
7
I
0
timer9
10
IO
pr2_mii0_txd0
11
O
pr2_pru1_gpi14
12
I
pr2_pru1_gpo14
13
O
gpio4_18
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
mcasp1_axr13
0
IO
mcasp7_axr1
1
IO
vin1a_d10
7
I
timer10
10
IO
pr2_mii_mr0_clk
11
I
pr2_pru1_gpi15
12
I
pr2_pru1_gpo15
13
O
gpio6_4
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
PD
PD
Terminal Configuration and Functions
15
1.8/3.3
1.8/3.3
vddshv3
vddshv3
Yes
Yes
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
DSIS [15]
0
15
vddshv3
PULL
BUFFER
UP/DOWN
TYPE [13]
TYPE [14]
mcasp6_fsx
PD
1.8/3.3
HYS [12]
mcasp1_axr11
PD
15
POWER
[11]
0
0
PU/PD
0
0
PU/PD
0
0
0
0
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 4-1. Pin Attributes(1) (continued)
BALL NUMBER
[1]
E16
F16
A20
B19
A21
BALL NAME [2]
mcasp1_axr14
mcasp1_axr15
mcasp2_axr0
mcasp2_axr1
mcasp2_axr2
SIGNAL NAME [3]
PN [4]
MUXMODE
[5]
TYPE [6]
BALL
RESET
STATE [7]
BALL
BALL
I/O
RESET
RESET
VOLTAGE
REL.
REL.
VALUE
MUXMODE
STATE [8]
[10]
[9]
PD
PD
15
1.8/3.3
POWER
[11]
vddshv3
HYS [12]
Yes
PULL
BUFFER
UP/DOWN
TYPE [13]
TYPE [14]
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
DSIS [15]
mcasp1_axr14
0
IO
mcasp7_aclkx
1
IO
0
mcasp7_aclkr
2
IO
vin1a_d9
7
I
timer11
10
IO
pr2_mii0_rxdv
11
I
pr2_pru1_gpi16
12
I
pr2_pru1_gpo16
13
O
gpio6_5
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
mcasp1_axr15
0
IO
mcasp7_fsx
1
IO
mcasp7_fsr
2
IO
vin1a_d8
7
I
timer12
10
IO
pr2_mii0_rxd3
11
I
pr2_pru0_gpi20
12
I
pr2_pru0_gpo20
13
O
gpio6_6
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
mcasp2_axr0
0
IO
Driver off
15
I
mcasp2_axr1
0
IO
Driver off
15
I
mcasp2_axr2
0
IO
mcasp3_axr2
1
IO
vin1a_d5
7
I
0
pr2_mii0_rxd0
11
I
0
pr2_pru0_gpi16
12
I
pr2_pru0_gpo16
13
O
gpio6_8
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
0
0
0
PD
PD
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv3
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
0
0
0
0
PD
PD
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv3
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
0
PD
PD
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv3
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
0
PD
PD
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv3
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
0
0
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
35
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 4-1. Pin Attributes(1) (continued)
BALL NUMBER
[1]
B21
B20
C19
D20
C20
B22
36
BALL NAME [2]
mcasp2_axr3
mcasp2_axr4
mcasp2_axr5
mcasp2_axr6
mcasp2_axr7
mcasp3_axr0
SIGNAL NAME [3]
PN [4]
MUXMODE
[5]
TYPE [6]
BALL
RESET
STATE [7]
BALL
BALL
I/O
RESET
RESET
VOLTAGE
REL.
REL.
VALUE
MUXMODE
STATE [8]
[10]
[9]
PD
PD
IO
1
IO
vin1a_d4
7
I
0
pr2_mii0_rxlink
11
I
0
pr2_pru0_gpi17
12
I
pr2_pru0_gpo17
13
O
gpio6_9
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
mcasp2_axr4
0
IO
mcasp8_axr0
1
IO
gpio1_4
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
mcasp2_axr5
0
IO
mcasp8_axr1
1
IO
gpio6_7
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
mcasp2_axr6
0
IO
mcasp8_aclkx
1
IO
mcasp8_aclkr
2
IO
gpio2_29
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
mcasp2_axr7
0
IO
mcasp8_fsx
1
IO
mcasp8_fsr
2
IO
gpio1_5
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
mcasp3_axr0
0
IO
mcasp2_axr14
2
IO
uart7_ctsn
3
I
1
uart5_rxd
4
I
1
vin1a_d1
7
I
0
pr2_mii1_rxer
11
I
0
pr2_pru0_gpi14
12
I
pr2_pru0_gpo14
13
O
Driver off
15
I
PD
PD
PD
PD
PD
PD
PD
PD
Terminal Configuration and Functions
15
15
15
15
1.8/3.3
1.8/3.3
1.8/3.3
1.8/3.3
1.8/3.3
vddshv3
vddshv3
vddshv3
vddshv3
vddshv3
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
DSIS [15]
0
15
vddshv3
PULL
BUFFER
UP/DOWN
TYPE [13]
TYPE [14]
mcasp3_axr3
PD
1.8/3.3
HYS [12]
mcasp2_axr3
PD
15
POWER
[11]
0
0
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 4-1. Pin Attributes(1) (continued)
BALL NUMBER
[1]
B23
A24
D23
AA5
AC4
BALL NAME [2]
mcasp3_axr1
mcasp4_axr0
mcasp4_axr1
mcasp5_axr0
mcasp5_axr1
SIGNAL NAME [3]
PN [4]
MUXMODE
[5]
TYPE [6]
BALL
RESET
STATE [7]
BALL
BALL
I/O
RESET
RESET
VOLTAGE
REL.
REL.
VALUE
MUXMODE
STATE [8]
[10]
[9]
PD
PD
IO
2
IO
uart7_rtsn
3
O
uart5_txd
4
O
vin1a_d0
7
I
0
pr2_mii1_rxlink
11
I
0
pr2_pru0_gpi15
12
I
pr2_pru0_gpo15
13
O
Driver off
15
I
mcasp4_axr0
0
IO
spi3_d0
2
IO
uart8_ctsn
3
I
1
uart4_rxd
4
I
1
Driver off
15
I
mcasp4_axr1
0
IO
spi3_cs0
2
IO
uart8_rtsn
3
O
uart4_txd
4
O
pr2_pru1_gpi0
12
I
pr2_pru1_gpo0
13
O
Driver off
15
I
mcasp5_axr0
0
IO
spi4_d0
2
IO
uart9_ctsn
3
I
1
uart3_rxd
4
I
1
pr2_mdio_mdclk
11
O
pr2_pru1_gpi3
12
I
pr2_pru1_gpo3
13
O
Driver off
15
I
mcasp5_axr1
0
IO
spi4_cs0
2
IO
uart9_rtsn
3
O
uart3_txd
4
O
pr2_mdio_data
11
IO
pr2_pru1_gpi4
12
I
pr2_pru1_gpo4
13
O
Driver off
15
I
PD
PD
PD
PD
PD
PD
15
15
15
1.8/3.3
1.8/3.3
1.8/3.3
1.8/3.3
vddshv3
vddshv3
vddshv7
vddshv7
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
DSIS [15]
0
15
vddshv3
PULL
BUFFER
UP/DOWN
TYPE [13]
TYPE [14]
mcasp2_axr15
PD
1.8/3.3
HYS [12]
mcasp3_axr1
PD
15
POWER
[11]
0
PU/PD
0
0
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
0
0
1
0
0
PU/PD
0
1
1
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
37
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 4-1. Pin Attributes(1) (continued)
BALL NUMBER
[1]
L6
L5
BALL NAME [2]
mdio_d
mdio_mclk
SIGNAL NAME [3]
PN [4]
MUXMODE
[5]
TYPE [6]
BALL
RESET
STATE [7]
BALL
BALL
I/O
RESET
RESET
VOLTAGE
REL.
REL.
VALUE
MUXMODE
STATE [8]
[10]
[9]
PU
PU
IO
1
I
mii0_txer
3
O
0
vin2a_d0
4
I
0
vin1b_d0
5
I
0
pr1_mii0_rxlink
11
I
0
pr2_pru1_gpi1
12
I
pr2_pru1_gpo1
13
O
gpio5_16
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
mdio_mclk
0
O
uart3_rtsn
1
O
mii0_col
3
I
vin2a_clk0
4
I
vin1b_clk1
5
I
0
pr1_mii0_col
11
I
0
pr2_pru1_gpi0
12
I
pr2_pru1_gpo0
13
O
gpio5_15
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
1.8/3.3
vddshv9
Yes
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
DSIS [15]
0
15
vddshv9
PULL
BUFFER
UP/DOWN
TYPE [13]
TYPE [14]
uart3_ctsn
PU
1.8/3.3
HYS [12]
mdio_d
PU
15
POWER
[11]
1
1
PU/PD
1
0
U1
mlbp_clk_n
mlbp_clk_n
0
I
vdds_mlbp No
BMLB18
U2
mlbp_clk_p
mlbp_clk_p
0
I
vdds_mlbp No
BMLB18
T1
mlbp_dat_n
mlbp_dat_n
0
IO
OFF
OFF
vdds_mlbp No
BMLB18
T2
mlbp_dat_p
mlbp_dat_p
0
IO
OFF
OFF
vdds_mlbp No
BMLB18
U4
mlbp_sig_n
mlbp_sig_n
0
IO
OFF
OFF
vdds_mlbp No
BMLB18
T3
mlbp_sig_p
mlbp_sig_p
0
IO
OFF
OFF
vdds_mlbp No
BMLB18
U3
mmc1_clk
mmc1_clk
0
IO
PU
PU
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv8
Yes
14
IO
SDIO2KV1 Pux/PDy
833
1
gpio6_21
Driver off
15
I
mmc1_cmd
0
IO
PU
PU
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv8
Yes
14
IO
SDIO2KV1 Pux/PDy
833
1
gpio6_22
Driver off
15
I
mmc1_sdcd
0
I
PU
PU
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv8
Yes
3
I
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
1
uart6_rxd
i2c4_sda
4
IO
gpio6_27
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
V4
U5
38
mmc1_cmd
mmc1_sdcd
Terminal Configuration and Functions
PU/PD
1
1
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 4-1. Pin Attributes(1) (continued)
BALL NUMBER
[1]
V5
Y2
Y1
V3
V2
W1
V1
BALL NAME [2]
mmc1_sdwp
mmc3_clk
mmc3_cmd
mmc1_dat0
mmc1_dat1
mmc1_dat2
mmc1_dat3
SIGNAL NAME [3]
PN [4]
MUXMODE
[5]
TYPE [6]
BALL
RESET
STATE [7]
BALL
BALL
I/O
RESET
RESET
VOLTAGE
REL.
REL.
VALUE
MUXMODE
STATE [8]
[10]
[9]
PD
PD
15
1.8/3.3
POWER
[11]
vddshv8
HYS [12]
Yes
PULL
BUFFER
UP/DOWN
TYPE [13]
TYPE [14]
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
DSIS [15]
mmc1_sdwp
0
I
uart6_txd
3
O
0
i2c4_scl
4
IO
gpio6_28
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
mmc3_clk
0
IO
vin2b_d7
4
I
vin1a_d7
9
I
0
ehrpwm2_tripzone_input
10
IO
0
pr2_mii1_txd3
11
O
pr2_pru0_gpi2
12
I
pr2_pru0_gpo2
13
O
gpio6_29
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
mmc3_cmd
0
IO
spi3_sclk
1
IO
vin2b_d6
4
I
0
vin1a_d6
9
I
0
eCAP2_in_PWM2_out
10
IO
0
pr2_mii1_txd2
11
O
pr2_pru0_gpi3
12
I
pr2_pru0_gpo3
13
O
gpio6_30
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
mmc1_dat0
0
IO
gpio6_23
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
mmc1_dat1
0
IO
gpio6_24
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
mmc1_dat2
0
IO
gpio6_25
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
mmc1_dat3
0
IO
gpio6_26
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
1
PU
PU
PU
PU
15
15
1.8/3.3
1.8/3.3
vddshv7
vddshv7
Yes
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
1
0
PU/PD
1
0
PU
PU
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv8
Yes
SDIO2KV1 Pux/PDy
833
1
PU
PU
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv8
Yes
SDIO2KV1 Pux/PDy
833
1
PU
PU
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv8
Yes
SDIO2KV1 Pux/PDy
833
1
PU
PU
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv8
Yes
SDIO2KV1 Pux/PDy
833
1
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
39
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 4-1. Pin Attributes(1) (continued)
BALL NUMBER
[1]
Y4
AA2
AA3
40
BALL NAME [2]
mmc3_dat0
mmc3_dat1
mmc3_dat2
SIGNAL NAME [3]
PN [4]
MUXMODE
[5]
TYPE [6]
BALL
RESET
STATE [7]
BALL
BALL
I/O
RESET
RESET
VOLTAGE
REL.
REL.
VALUE
MUXMODE
STATE [8]
[10]
[9]
PU
PU
IO
1
IO
uart5_rxd
2
I
1
vin2b_d5
4
I
0
vin1a_d5
9
I
0
eQEP3A_in
10
I
0
pr2_mii1_txd1
11
O
pr2_pru0_gpi4
12
I
pr2_pru0_gpo4
13
O
gpio6_31
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
mmc3_dat1
0
IO
spi3_d0
1
IO
uart5_txd
2
O
vin2b_d4
4
I
0
vin1a_d4
9
I
0
eQEP3B_in
10
I
0
pr2_mii1_txd0
11
O
pr2_pru0_gpi5
12
I
pr2_pru0_gpo5
13
O
gpio7_0
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
mmc3_dat2
0
IO
spi3_cs0
1
IO
uart5_ctsn
2
I
1
vin2b_d3
4
I
0
vin1a_d3
9
I
0
eQEP3_index
10
IO
0
pr2_mii_mr1_clk
11
I
0
pr2_pru0_gpi6
12
I
pr2_pru0_gpo6
13
O
gpio7_1
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
PU
PU
Terminal Configuration and Functions
15
1.8/3.3
1.8/3.3
vddshv7
vddshv7
Yes
Yes
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
DSIS [15]
0
15
vddshv7
PULL
BUFFER
UP/DOWN
TYPE [13]
TYPE [14]
spi3_d1
PU
1.8/3.3
HYS [12]
mmc3_dat0
PU
15
POWER
[11]
1
0
PU/PD
1
0
PU/PD
1
1
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 4-1. Pin Attributes(1) (continued)
BALL NUMBER
[1]
W2
Y3
AA1
BALL NAME [2]
mmc3_dat3
mmc3_dat4
mmc3_dat5
SIGNAL NAME [3]
PN [4]
MUXMODE
[5]
TYPE [6]
BALL
RESET
STATE [7]
BALL
BALL
I/O
RESET
RESET
VOLTAGE
REL.
REL.
VALUE
MUXMODE
STATE [8]
[10]
[9]
PU
PU
IO
1
IO
uart5_rtsn
2
O
vin2b_d2
4
I
0
vin1a_d2
9
I
0
eQEP3_strobe
10
IO
0
pr2_mii1_rxdv
11
I
0
pr2_pru0_gpi7
12
I
pr2_pru0_gpo7
13
O
gpio7_2
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
mmc3_dat4
0
IO
spi4_sclk
1
IO
uart10_rxd
2
I
1
vin2b_d1
4
I
0
vin1a_d1
9
I
0
ehrpwm3A
10
O
pr2_mii1_rxd3
11
I
pr2_pru0_gpi8
12
I
pr2_pru0_gpo8
13
O
gpio1_22
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
mmc3_dat5
0
IO
spi4_d1
1
IO
uart10_txd
2
O
vin2b_d0
4
I
0
vin1a_d0
9
I
0
ehrpwm3B
10
O
pr2_mii1_rxd2
11
I
pr2_pru0_gpi9
12
I
pr2_pru0_gpo9
13
O
gpio1_23
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
1.8/3.3
vddshv7
Yes
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
DSIS [15]
0
15
vddshv7
PULL
BUFFER
UP/DOWN
TYPE [13]
TYPE [14]
spi3_cs1
PU
1.8/3.3
HYS [12]
mmc3_dat3
PU
15
POWER
[11]
1
1
PU/PD
1
0
0
PU
PU
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv7
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
1
0
0
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
41
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 4-1. Pin Attributes(1) (continued)
BALL NUMBER
[1]
AA4
AB1
BALL NAME [2]
mmc3_dat6
mmc3_dat7
SIGNAL NAME [3]
PN [4]
MUXMODE
[5]
TYPE [6]
BALL
RESET
STATE [7]
BALL
BALL
I/O
RESET
RESET
VOLTAGE
REL.
REL.
VALUE
MUXMODE
STATE [8]
[10]
[9]
PU
PU
15
1.8/3.3
POWER
[11]
vddshv7
HYS [12]
Yes
PULL
BUFFER
UP/DOWN
TYPE [13]
TYPE [14]
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
mmc3_dat6
0
IO
spi4_d0
1
IO
uart10_ctsn
2
I
1
vin2b_de1
4
I
vin1a_hsync0
9
I
0
ehrpwm3_tripzone_input
10
IO
0
pr2_mii1_rxd1
11
I
0
pr2_pru0_gpi10
12
I
pr2_pru0_gpo10
13
O
gpio1_24
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
mmc3_dat7
0
IO
spi4_cs0
1
IO
uart10_rtsn
2
O
vin2b_clk1
4
I
vin1a_vsync0
9
I
0
eCAP3_in_PWM3_out
10
IO
0
pr2_mii1_rxd0
11
I
0
pr2_pru0_gpi11
12
I
pr2_pru0_gpo11
13
O
gpio1_25
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
0
1
PU
PU
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv7
Yes
0
I
PD
PD
1.8/3.3
vddshv3
AE6
pcie_rxn0
pcie_rxn0
0
I
OFF
OFF
1.8
vdda_pcie
SERDES
AD7
pcie_rxp0
pcie_rxp0
0
I
OFF
OFF
1.8
vdda_pcie
SERDES
AE8
pcie_txn0
pcie_txn0
0
O
1.8
vdda_pcie
SERDES
AD9
pcie_txp0
pcie_txp0
0
O
1.8
vdda_pcie
F19
porz
porz
0
I
1.8/3.3
vddshv3
Yes
IHHV1833
PU/PD
K24
resetn
resetn
0
I
1.8/3.3
vddshv3
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
Terminal Configuration and Functions
1
1
nmin_dsp
PU
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
nmin_dsp
PU
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
L24
42
DSIS [15]
PU/PD
SERDES
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 4-1. Pin Attributes(1) (continued)
BALL NUMBER
[1]
N2
P2
T4
BALL NAME [2]
rgmii0_rxc
rgmii0_rxctl
rgmii0_txc
SIGNAL NAME [3]
PN [4]
MUXMODE
[5]
TYPE [6]
BALL
RESET
STATE [7]
BALL
BALL
I/O
RESET
RESET
VOLTAGE
REL.
REL.
VALUE
MUXMODE
STATE [8]
[10]
[9]
PD
PD
I
2
O
mii0_txclk
3
I
0
vin2a_d5
4
I
0
vin1b_d5
5
I
0
pr1_mii_mt0_clk
11
I
0
pr2_pru1_gpi11
12
I
pr2_pru1_gpo11
13
O
gpio5_26
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
rgmii0_rxctl
0
I
rmii1_txd1
2
O
mii0_txd3
3
O
vin2a_d6
4
I
0
vin1b_d6
5
I
0
pr1_mii0_txd3
11
O
pr2_pru1_gpi12
12
I
pr2_pru1_gpo12
13
O
gpio5_27
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
rgmii0_txc
0
O
uart3_ctsn
1
I
rmii1_rxd1
2
I
0
mii0_rxd3
3
I
0
vin2a_d3
4
I
0
vin1b_d3
5
I
0
spi3_d0
7
IO
0
spi4_cs2
8
IO
1
pr1_mii0_rxd3
11
I
0
pr2_pru1_gpi5
12
I
pr2_pru1_gpo5
13
O
gpio5_20
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
PD
PD
15
1.8/3.3
1.8/3.3
vddshv9
vddshv9
Yes
Yes
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
DSIS [15]
0
15
vddshv9
PULL
BUFFER
UP/DOWN
TYPE [13]
TYPE [14]
rmii1_txen
PD
1.8/3.3
HYS [12]
rgmii0_rxc
PD
15
POWER
[11]
PU/PD
0
0
PU/PD
1
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
43
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 4-1. Pin Attributes(1) (continued)
BALL NUMBER
[1]
T5
N4
N3
44
BALL NAME [2]
rgmii0_txctl
rgmii0_rxd0
rgmii0_rxd1
SIGNAL NAME [3]
PN [4]
MUXMODE
[5]
TYPE [6]
BALL
RESET
STATE [7]
BALL
BALL
I/O
RESET
RESET
VOLTAGE
REL.
REL.
VALUE
MUXMODE
STATE [8]
[10]
[9]
PD
PD
O
1
O
rmii1_rxd0
2
I
0
mii0_rxd2
3
I
0
vin2a_d4
4
I
0
vin1b_d4
5
I
0
spi3_cs0
7
IO
1
spi4_cs3
8
IO
1
pr1_mii0_rxd2
11
I
0
pr2_pru1_gpi6
12
I
pr2_pru1_gpo6
13
O
gpio5_21
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
rgmii0_rxd0
0
I
rmii0_txd0
1
O
mii0_txd0
3
O
vin2a_fld0
4
I
vin1b_fld1
5
I
pr1_mii0_txd0
11
O
pr2_pru1_gpi16
12
I
pr2_pru1_gpo16
13
O
gpio5_31
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
rgmii0_rxd1
0
I
rmii0_txd1
1
O
mii0_txd1
3
O
vin2a_d9
4
I
pr1_mii0_txd1
11
O
pr2_pru1_gpi15
12
I
pr2_pru1_gpo15
13
O
gpio5_30
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
1.8/3.3
vddshv9
Yes
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
DSIS [15]
0
15
vddshv9
PULL
BUFFER
UP/DOWN
TYPE [13]
TYPE [14]
uart3_rtsn
PD
1.8/3.3
HYS [12]
rgmii0_txctl
PD
15
POWER
[11]
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
PU/PD
0
0
PD
PD
Terminal Configuration and Functions
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv9
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
0
0
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 4-1. Pin Attributes(1) (continued)
BALL NUMBER
[1]
P1
N1
R1
BALL NAME [2]
rgmii0_rxd2
rgmii0_rxd3
rgmii0_txd0
SIGNAL NAME [3]
PN [4]
MUXMODE
[5]
TYPE [6]
BALL
RESET
STATE [7]
BALL
BALL
I/O
RESET
RESET
VOLTAGE
REL.
REL.
VALUE
MUXMODE
STATE [8]
[10]
[9]
PD
PD
15
1.8/3.3
POWER
[11]
vddshv9
HYS [12]
Yes
PULL
BUFFER
UP/DOWN
TYPE [13]
TYPE [14]
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
DSIS [15]
rgmii0_rxd2
0
I
rmii0_txen
1
O
0
mii0_txen
3
O
vin2a_d8
4
I
pr1_mii0_txen
11
O
pr2_pru1_gpi14
12
I
pr2_pru1_gpo14
13
O
gpio5_29
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
rgmii0_rxd3
0
I
rmii1_txd0
2
O
mii0_txd2
3
O
vin2a_d7
4
I
0
vin1b_d7
5
I
0
pr1_mii0_txd2
11
O
pr2_pru1_gpi13
12
I
pr2_pru1_gpo13
13
O
gpio5_28
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
rgmii0_txd0
0
O
rmii0_rxd0
1
I
mii0_rxd0
3
I
0
vin2a_d10
4
I
0
spi4_cs0
7
IO
1
uart4_rtsn
8
O
pr1_mii0_rxd0
11
I
pr2_pru1_gpi10
12
I
pr2_pru1_gpo10
13
O
gpio5_25
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
0
PD
PD
PD
PD
15
15
1.8/3.3
1.8/3.3
vddshv9
vddshv9
Yes
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
0
PU/PD
0
0
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
45
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 4-1. Pin Attributes(1) (continued)
BALL NUMBER
[1]
R2
P3
P4
46
BALL NAME [2]
rgmii0_txd1
rgmii0_txd2
rgmii0_txd3
SIGNAL NAME [3]
PN [4]
MUXMODE
[5]
TYPE [6]
BALL
RESET
STATE [7]
BALL
BALL
I/O
RESET
RESET
VOLTAGE
REL.
REL.
VALUE
MUXMODE
STATE [8]
[10]
[9]
PD
PD
15
1.8/3.3
POWER
[11]
vddshv9
HYS [12]
Yes
PULL
BUFFER
UP/DOWN
TYPE [13]
TYPE [14]
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
DSIS [15]
rgmii0_txd1
0
O
rmii0_rxd1
1
I
PU/PD
mii0_rxd1
3
I
vin2a_vsync0
4
I
vin1b_vsync1
5
I
0
spi4_d0
7
IO
0
uart4_ctsn
8
IO
1
pr1_mii0_rxd1
11
I
0
pr2_pru1_gpi9
12
I
pr2_pru1_gpo9
13
O
gpio5_24
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
rgmii0_txd2
0
O
rmii0_rxer
1
I
mii0_rxer
3
I
vin2a_hsync0
4
I
vin1b_hsync1
5
I
0
spi4_d1
7
IO
0
uart4_txd
8
O
pr1_mii0_rxer
11
I
pr2_pru1_gpi8
12
I
pr2_pru1_gpo8
13
O
gpio5_23
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
rgmii0_txd3
0
O
rmii0_crs
1
I
mii0_crs
3
I
vin2a_de0
4
I
vin1b_de1
5
I
0
spi4_sclk
7
IO
0
uart4_rxd
8
I
1
pr1_mii0_crs
11
I
0
pr2_pru1_gpi7
12
I
pr2_pru1_gpo7
13
O
gpio5_22
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
0
0
PD
PD
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv9
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
0
0
0
PD
PD
Terminal Configuration and Functions
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv9
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
0
0
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 4-1. Pin Attributes(1) (continued)
BALL NUMBER
[1]
P5
BALL NAME [2]
RMII_MHZ_50_CLK
SIGNAL NAME [3]
PN [4]
MUXMODE
[5]
TYPE [6]
RMII_MHZ_50_CLK
0
IO
vin2a_d11
4
I
pr2_pru1_gpi2
12
I
pr2_pru1_gpo2
13
O
gpio5_17
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
BALL
RESET
STATE [7]
BALL
BALL
I/O
RESET
RESET
VOLTAGE
REL.
REL.
VALUE
MUXMODE
STATE [8]
[10]
[9]
PD
PD
15
1.8/3.3
POWER
[11]
vddshv9
HYS [12]
Yes
PULL
BUFFER
UP/DOWN
TYPE [13]
TYPE [14]
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
DSIS [15]
0
0
E20
rstoutn
rstoutn
0
O
PD
PD
K25
rtck
rtck
0
O
PU
OFF
gpio8_29
14
IO
spi1_sclk
0
IO
PD
gpio7_7
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
spi2_sclk
0
IO
PD
uart3_rxd
1
I
gpio7_14
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
spi1_cs0
0
IO
gpio7_10
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
spi1_cs1
0
IO
spi2_cs1
3
IO
gpio7_11
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
spi1_cs2
0
IO
uart4_rxd
1
I
mmc3_sdcd
2
I
1
spi2_cs2
3
IO
1
dcan2_tx
4
IO
1
mdio_mclk
5
O
1
6
IO
gpio7_12
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
C24
G25
B24
C25
E24
spi1_sclk
spi2_sclk
spi1_cs0
spi1_cs1
spi1_cs2
hdmi1_hpd
No
1.8/3.3
vddshv3
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
0
1.8/3.3
vddshv3
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
PD
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv3
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
0
PD
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv3
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
0
1
PU
PU
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv3
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
1
PU
PU
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv3
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
1
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
PU
PU
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv3
Yes
1
1
1
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
47
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 4-1. Pin Attributes(1) (continued)
BALL NUMBER
[1]
E25
BALL NAME [2]
spi1_cs3
SIGNAL NAME [3]
D24
F24
G24
F25
spi1_d0
spi1_d1
spi2_cs0
spi2_d0
spi2_d1
MUXMODE
[5]
TYPE [6]
BALL
RESET
STATE [7]
BALL
BALL
I/O
RESET
RESET
VOLTAGE
REL.
REL.
VALUE
MUXMODE
STATE [8]
[10]
[9]
PU
PU
1.8/3.3
vddshv3
HYS [12]
Yes
PULL
BUFFER
UP/DOWN
TYPE [13]
TYPE [14]
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
0
IO
1
O
mmc3_sdwp
2
I
0
spi2_cs3
3
IO
1
dcan2_rx
4
IO
1
mdio_d
5
IO
1
6
IO
gpio7_13
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
spi1_d0
0
IO
gpio7_9
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
spi1_d1
0
IO
gpio7_8
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
spi2_cs0
0
IO
uart3_rtsn
1
O
uart5_txd
2
O
gpio7_17
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
spi2_d0
0
IO
uart3_ctsn
1
I
uart5_rxd
2
I
gpio7_16
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
spi2_d1
0
IO
uart3_txd
1
O
gpio7_15
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
PD
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv3
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
0
PD
PD
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv3
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
0
PU
PU
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv3
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
1
PD
PD
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv3
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
0
1
1
PD
PD
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv3
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
tclk
tclk
0
I
PU
PU
0
1.8/3.3
vddshv3
Yes
IQ1833
PU/PD
L23
tdi
tdi
0
I
PU
PU
0
1.8/3.3
vddshv3
Yes
PU/PD
gpio8_27
14
I
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
tdo
0
O
PU
PU
0
1.8/3.3
vddshv3
Yes
14
IO
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
gpio8_28
tms
0
I
PU
PU
0
1.8/3.3
vddshv3
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
L21
48
tdo
tms
1
PD
K21
J20
DSIS [15]
uart4_txd
No
15
POWER
[11]
spi1_cs3
hdmi1_cec
D25
PN [4]
Terminal Configuration and Functions
0
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 4-1. Pin Attributes(1) (continued)
BALL NUMBER
[1]
BALL NAME [2]
SIGNAL NAME [3]
PN [4]
MUXMODE
[5]
TYPE [6]
BALL
RESET
STATE [7]
BALL
BALL
I/O
RESET
RESET
VOLTAGE
REL.
REL.
VALUE
MUXMODE
STATE [8]
[10]
[9]
POWER
[11]
HYS [12]
PULL
BUFFER
UP/DOWN
TYPE [13]
TYPE [14]
L22
trstn
trstn
0
I
PD
PD
L20
uart1_ctsn
uart1_ctsn
0
I
PU
PU
uart9_rxd
2
I
mmc4_clk
3
IO
gpio7_24
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
uart1_rtsn
0
O
uart9_txd
2
O
mmc4_cmd
3
IO
gpio7_25
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
uart1_rxd
0
I
mmc4_sdcd
3
I
gpio7_22
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
uart1_txd
0
O
mmc4_sdwp
3
I
gpio7_23
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
uart2_ctsn
0
I
uart3_rxd
2
I
mmc4_dat2
3
IO
1
uart10_rxd
4
I
1
uart1_dtrn
5
O
gpio1_16
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
uart2_rtsn
0
O
uart3_txd
1
O
uart3_irtx
2
O
mmc4_dat3
3
IO
uart10_txd
4
O
uart1_rin
5
I
gpio1_17
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
M24
L25
M25
N22
N24
uart1_rtsn
uart1_rxd
uart1_txd
uart2_ctsn
uart2_rtsn
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv3
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
1.8/3.3
vddshv4
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
DSIS [15]
1
1
1
PU
PU
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv4
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
1
PU
PU
PU
PU
PU
PU
PU
PU
15
15
15
15
1.8/3.3
1.8/3.3
1.8/3.3
1.8/3.3
vddshv4
vddshv4
vddshv4
vddshv4
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
1
1
0
1
1
PU/PD
1
1
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
49
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 4-1. Pin Attributes(1) (continued)
BALL NUMBER
[1]
N23
N25
N5
50
BALL NAME [2]
uart2_rxd
uart2_txd
uart3_rxd
SIGNAL NAME [3]
PN [4]
MUXMODE
[5]
TYPE [6]
BALL
RESET
STATE [7]
BALL
BALL
I/O
RESET
RESET
VOLTAGE
REL.
REL.
VALUE
MUXMODE
STATE [8]
[10]
[9]
PU
PU
I
1
I
uart3_rctx
2
O
mmc4_dat0
3
IO
1
uart2_rxd
4
I
1
uart1_dcdn
5
I
1
gpio7_26
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
uart2_txd
0
O
uart3_rtsn
1
O
uart3_sd
2
O
mmc4_dat1
3
IO
uart2_txd
4
O
uart1_dsrn
5
I
gpio7_27
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
uart3_rxd
0
I
rmii1_crs
2
I
mii0_rxdv
3
I
0
vin2a_d1
4
I
0
vin1b_d1
5
I
0
spi3_sclk
7
IO
0
pr1_mii0_rxdv
11
I
0
pr2_pru1_gpi3
12
I
pr2_pru1_gpo3
13
O
gpio5_18
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
1.8/3.3
vddshv4
Yes
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
DSIS [15]
0
15
vddshv4
PULL
BUFFER
UP/DOWN
TYPE [13]
TYPE [14]
uart3_ctsn
PU
1.8/3.3
HYS [12]
uart2_rxd
PU
15
POWER
[11]
1
1
PU/PD
1
0
PD
PD
Terminal Configuration and Functions
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv9
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
1
0
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 4-1. Pin Attributes(1) (continued)
BALL NUMBER
[1]
N6
BALL NAME [2]
uart3_txd
SIGNAL NAME [3]
PN [4]
MUXMODE
[5]
TYPE [6]
BALL
RESET
STATE [7]
BALL
BALL
I/O
RESET
RESET
VOLTAGE
REL.
REL.
VALUE
MUXMODE
STATE [8]
[10]
[9]
PD
PD
15
1.8/3.3
POWER
[11]
vddshv9
HYS [12]
Yes
PULL
BUFFER
UP/DOWN
TYPE [13]
TYPE [14]
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
uart3_txd
0
O
rmii1_rxer
2
I
mii0_rxclk
3
I
0
vin2a_d2
4
I
0
vin1b_d2
5
I
0
spi3_d1
7
IO
0
spi4_cs1
8
IO
1
pr1_mii_mr0_clk
11
I
0
pr2_pru1_gpi4
12
I
pr2_pru1_gpo4
13
O
gpio5_19
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
AB7
usb1_dm
usb1_dm
0
IO
OFF
OFF
3.3
vdda33v_u
sb1
USBPHY
AC6
usb1_dp
usb1_dp
0
IO
OFF
OFF
3.3
vdda33v_u
sb1
USBPHY
AD3
usb1_drvvbus
usb1_drvvbus
0
O
PD
PD
1.8/3.3
timer16
7
IO
vdda33v_u Yes
sb2
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
gpio6_12
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
15
AC5
usb2_dm
usb2_dm
0
IO
3.3
vdda33v_u No
sb2
USBPHY
AB6
usb2_dp
usb2_dp
0
IO
3.3
vdda33v_u No
sb2
USBPHY
AA6
usb2_drvvbus
usb2_drvvbus
0
O
1.8/3.3
timer15
7
IO
vdda33v_u Yes
sb2
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
gpio6_13
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
usb_rxn0
0
I
pcie_rxn1
1
I
usb_rxp0
0
I
pcie_rxp1
1
I
usb_txn0
0
O
pcie_txn1
1
O
usb_txp0
0
O
pcie_txp1
1
O
AE5
AD6
AE3
AD4
usb_rxn0
usb_rxp0
usb_txn0
usb_txp0
DSIS [15]
PD
PD
15
OFF
OFF
1.8
vdda_usb1
SERDES
OFF
OFF
1.8
vdda_usb1
SERDES
1.8
vdda_usb1
SERDES
1.8
vdda_usb1
SERDES
PU/PD
0
PU/PD
PU/PD
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
51
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 4-1. Pin Attributes(1) (continued)
BALL NUMBER
[1]
BALL NAME [2]
SIGNAL NAME [3]
PN [4]
MUXMODE
[5]
TYPE [6]
J15, J16, J18, K12, vdd
K18, L12, L17,
M11, M13, M15,
M17, N11, N13,
N15, N18, P10,
P12, P14, P16,
P18, R10, R12,
R14, R16, R17,
T11, T13, T15,
T17, T9, U11, U13,
U15, U18, U9,
V10, V12, V14,
V16, V18, W10,
W12, W14, W16
vdd
PWR
F20
vpp
vpp(11)
PWR
AA10
vdda33v_usb1
vdda33v_usb1
PWR
Y10
vdda33v_usb2
vdda33v_usb2
PWR
L9
vdda_core_gmac
vdda_core_gmac
PWR
T6
vdda_csi
vdda_csi
PWR
R20
vdda_ddr
vdda_ddr
PWR
N10
vdda_debug
vdda_debug
PWR
K10, L10
vdda_dsp_iva
vdda_dsp_iva
PWR
N9
vdda_gpu
vdda_gpu
PWR
W15, Y15
vdda_hdmi
vdda_hdmi
PWR
K16, L16
vdda_mpu_abe
vdda_mpu_abe
PWR
W13, Y13
vdda_osc
vdda_osc
PWR
W11, Y11
vdda_pcie
vdda_pcie
PWR
M10
vdda_per
vdda_per
PWR
W8
vdda_usb1
vdda_usb1
PWR
Y8
vdda_usb2
vdda_usb2
PWR
Y9
vdda_usb3
vdda_usb3
PWR
K14, L14
vdda_video
vdda_video
PWR
G11, H20, W7,
Y18
vdds18v
vdds18v
PWR
AA19, P20, Y19
vdds18v_ddr1
vdds18v_ddr1
PWR
G10, G9
vddshv1
vddshv1
PWR
G15, G17, H15,
H17, J19, K19
vddshv3
vddshv3
PWR
M19, N19
vddshv4
vddshv4
PWR
U7, U8
vddshv7
vddshv7
PWR
N8, P8
vddshv8
vddshv8
PWR
M7, N7
vddshv9
vddshv9
PWR
J7, J8, K8
vddshv10
vddshv10
PWR
52
BALL
RESET
STATE [7]
BALL
BALL
I/O
RESET
RESET
VOLTAGE
REL.
REL.
VALUE
MUXMODE
STATE [8]
[10]
[9]
Terminal Configuration and Functions
POWER
[11]
HYS [12]
PULL
BUFFER
UP/DOWN
TYPE [13]
TYPE [14]
DSIS [15]
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 4-1. Pin Attributes(1) (continued)
BALL NUMBER
[1]
BALL NAME [2]
SIGNAL NAME [3]
PN [4]
MUXMODE
[5]
TYPE [6]
F7, G7, H7
vddshv11
vddshv11
PWR
T19, T20, V20,
W17, W18, W20
vdds_ddr1
vdds_ddr1
PWR
P7, R7
vdds_mlbp
vdds_mlbp
PWR
H11, H13, H9, J11, vdd_dsp
J13, J9
vdd_dsp
PWR
D8
vin2a_clk0
vin2a_clk0
vin2a_d0
BALL
BALL
I/O
RESET
RESET
VOLTAGE
REL.
REL.
VALUE
MUXMODE
STATE [8]
[10]
[9]
PD
PD
emu5
5
O
kbd_row0
9
I
0
eQEP1A_in
10
I
0
pr1_edio_data_in0
12
I
0
pr1_edio_data_out0
13
O
gpio3_28
gpmc_a27
gpmc_a17
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
vin2a_d0
0
I
4
O
emu10
5
O
uart9_ctsn
7
I
1
spi4_d0
8
IO
0
kbd_row4
9
I
0
ehrpwm1B
10
O
pr1_uart0_rxd
11
I
1
pr1_edio_data_in5
12
I
0
pr1_edio_data_out5
13
O
gpio4_1
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
PD
PD
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv1
Yes
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
DSIS [15]
O
No
vddshv1
PULL
BUFFER
UP/DOWN
TYPE [13]
TYPE [14]
I
vout2_d23
1.8/3.3
HYS [12]
4
No
15
POWER
[11]
0
vout2_fld
C8
BALL
RESET
STATE [7]
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
PU/PD
0
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
53
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 4-1. Pin Attributes(1) (continued)
BALL NUMBER
[1]
B9
BALL NAME [2]
vin2a_d1
SIGNAL NAME [3]
vin2a_d1
vin2a_d2
vin2a_d3
BALL
RESET
STATE [7]
BALL
BALL
I/O
RESET
RESET
VOLTAGE
REL.
REL.
VALUE
MUXMODE
STATE [8]
[10]
[9]
PD
PD
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
DSIS [15]
5
O
uart9_rtsn
7
O
spi4_cs0
8
IO
1
kbd_row5
9
I
0
ehrpwm1_tripzone_input
10
IO
0
pr1_uart0_txd
11
O
pr1_edio_data_in6
12
I
pr1_edio_data_out6
13
O
gpio4_2
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
vin2a_d2
0
I
4
O
emu12
5
O
uart10_rxd
8
I
1
kbd_row6
9
I
0
eCAP1_in_PWM1_out
10
IO
0
pr1_ecap0_ecap_capin_apwm_o
11
IO
0
pr1_edio_data_in7
12
I
0
pr1_edio_data_out7
13
O
gpio4_3
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
vin2a_d3
0
I
4
O
emu13
5
O
uart10_txd
8
O
kbd_col0
9
O
ehrpwm1_synci
10
I
0
pr1_edc_latch0_in
11
I
0
pr1_pru1_gpi0
12
I
pr1_pru1_gpo0
13
O
gpio4_4
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
No
vddshv1
PULL
BUFFER
UP/DOWN
TYPE [13]
TYPE [14]
emu11
No
1.8/3.3
HYS [12]
O
No
15
POWER
[11]
I
vout2_d20
54
TYPE [6]
4
vout2_d21
A9
MUXMODE
[5]
0
vout2_d22
A7
PN [4]
0
0
PD
PD
PD
PD
Terminal Configuration and Functions
15
15
1.8/3.3
1.8/3.3
vddshv1
vddshv1
Yes
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
PU/PD
0
0
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 4-1. Pin Attributes(1) (continued)
BALL NUMBER
[1]
A8
BALL NAME [2]
vin2a_d4
SIGNAL NAME [3]
vin2a_d4
vin2a_d5
vin2a_d6
TYPE [6]
BALL
RESET
STATE [7]
BALL
BALL
I/O
RESET
RESET
VOLTAGE
REL.
REL.
VALUE
MUXMODE
STATE [8]
[10]
[9]
PD
PD
5
O
uart10_ctsn
8
I
kbd_col1
9
O
ehrpwm1_synco
10
O
pr1_edc_sync0_out
11
O
pr1_pru1_gpi1
12
I
pr1_pru1_gpo1
13
O
gpio4_5
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
vin2a_d5
0
I
4
O
emu15
5
O
uart10_rtsn
8
O
kbd_col2
9
O
eQEP2A_in
10
I
pr1_edio_sof
11
O
pr1_pru1_gpi2
12
I
pr1_pru1_gpo2
13
O
gpio4_6
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
vin2a_d6
0
I
4
O
emu16
5
O
mii1_rxd1
8
I
kbd_col3
9
O
eQEP2B_in
10
I
0
pr1_mii_mt1_clk
11
I
0
pr1_pru1_gpi3
12
I
pr1_pru1_gpo3
13
O
gpio4_7
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
No
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
DSIS [15]
emu14
vout2_d17
vddshv1
PULL
BUFFER
UP/DOWN
TYPE [13]
TYPE [14]
O
No
1.8/3.3
HYS [12]
I
No
15
POWER
[11]
4
vout2_d18
F10
MUXMODE
[5]
0
vout2_d19
A11
PN [4]
0
1
PD
PD
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv1
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
0
0
PD
PD
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv1
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
0
0
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
55
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 4-1. Pin Attributes(1) (continued)
BALL NUMBER
[1]
A10
BALL NAME [2]
vin2a_d7
SIGNAL NAME [3]
vin2a_d7
vin2a_d8
vin2a_d9
I
O
emu17
5
O
mii1_rxd2
8
I
kbd_col4
9
O
eQEP2_index
10
IO
pr1_mii1_txen
11
O
pr1_pru1_gpi4
12
I
pr1_pru1_gpo4
13
O
gpio4_8
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
vin2a_d8
0
I
4
O
emu18
5
O
mii1_rxd3
8
I
kbd_col5
9
O
eQEP2_strobe
10
IO
pr1_mii1_txd3
11
O
pr1_pru1_gpi5
12
I
pr1_pru1_gpo5
13
O
gpio4_9
gpmc_a26
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
vin2a_d9
0
I
4
O
emu19
5
O
mii1_rxd0
8
I
kbd_col6
9
O
ehrpwm2A
10
O
pr1_mii1_txd2
11
O
pr1_pru1_gpi6
12
I
pr1_pru1_gpo6
13
O
gpio4_10
gpmc_a25
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
vout2_d14
56
TYPE [6]
4
vout2_d15
E10
MUXMODE
[5]
0
vout2_d16
B10
PN [4]
No
No
No
BALL
RESET
STATE [7]
BALL
BALL
I/O
RESET
RESET
VOLTAGE
REL.
REL.
VALUE
MUXMODE
STATE [8]
[10]
[9]
PD
PD
15
1.8/3.3
POWER
[11]
vddshv1
HYS [12]
Yes
PULL
BUFFER
UP/DOWN
TYPE [13]
TYPE [14]
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
DSIS [15]
0
0
0
PD
PD
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv1
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
0
0
0
PD
PD
Terminal Configuration and Functions
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv1
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
0
0
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 4-1. Pin Attributes(1) (continued)
BALL NUMBER
[1]
D10
BALL NAME [2]
vin2a_d10
SIGNAL NAME [3]
vin2a_d11
vin2a_d12
TYPE [6]
BALL
RESET
STATE [7]
BALL
BALL
I/O
RESET
RESET
VOLTAGE
REL.
REL.
VALUE
MUXMODE
STATE [8]
[10]
[9]
PD
PD
O
4
O
kbd_col7
9
O
ehrpwm2B
10
O
pr1_mdio_mdclk
11
O
pr1_pru1_gpi7
12
I
pr1_pru1_gpo7
13
O
gpio4_11
gpmc_a24
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
vin2a_d11
0
I
mdio_d
3
IO
4
O
kbd_row7
9
I
0
ehrpwm2_tripzone_input
10
IO
0
pr1_mdio_data
11
IO
1
pr1_pru1_gpi8
12
I
pr1_pru1_gpo8
13
O
gpio4_12
gpmc_a23
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
vin2a_d12
0
I
rgmii1_txc
3
O
vout2_d11
No
4
O
mii1_rxclk
No
8
I
kbd_col8
9
O
eCAP2_in_PWM2_out
10
IO
pr1_mii1_txd1
11
O
pr1_pru1_gpi9
12
I
pr1_pru1_gpo9
13
O
gpio4_13
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
PD
PD
15
15
1.8/3.3
1.8/3.3
vddshv1
vddshv1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
DSIS [15]
I
PD
vddshv1
PULL
BUFFER
UP/DOWN
TYPE [13]
TYPE [14]
3
PD
1.8/3.3
HYS [12]
0
No
15
POWER
[11]
mdio_mclk
vout2_d12
B11
MUXMODE
[5]
vin2a_d10
vout2_d13
C10
PN [4]
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
0
1
0
1
PU/PD
0
0
0
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
57
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 4-1. Pin Attributes(1) (continued)
BALL NUMBER
[1]
D11
BALL NAME [2]
vin2a_d13
SIGNAL NAME [3]
vin2a_d14
vin2a_d15
0
I
3
O
No
BALL
RESET
STATE [7]
BALL
BALL
I/O
RESET
RESET
VOLTAGE
REL.
REL.
VALUE
MUXMODE
STATE [8]
[10]
[9]
PD
PD
15
1.8/3.3
POWER
[11]
vddshv1
HYS [12]
Yes
PULL
BUFFER
UP/DOWN
TYPE [13]
TYPE [14]
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
DSIS [15]
0
4
O
mii1_rxdv
8
I
0
kbd_row8
9
I
0
eQEP3A_in
10
I
0
pr1_mii1_txd0
11
O
pr1_pru1_gpi10
12
I
pr1_pru1_gpo10
13
O
gpio4_14
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
vin2a_d14
0
I
rgmii1_txd3
3
O
No
PD
PD
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv1
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
0
4
O
mii1_txclk
8
I
0
eQEP3B_in
10
I
0
pr1_mii_mr1_clk
11
I
0
pr1_pru1_gpi11
12
I
pr1_pru1_gpo11
13
O
gpio4_15
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
vin2a_d15
0
I
rgmii1_txd2
3
O
vout2_d8
58
TYPE [6]
rgmii1_txctl
vout2_d9
B12
MUXMODE
[5]
vin2a_d13
vout2_d10
C11
PN [4]
No
PD
PD
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv1
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
0
4
O
mii1_txd0
8
O
eQEP3_index
10
IO
0
pr1_mii1_rxdv
11
I
0
pr1_pru1_gpi12
12
I
pr1_pru1_gpo12
13
O
gpio4_16
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 4-1. Pin Attributes(1) (continued)
BALL NUMBER
[1]
A12
BALL NAME [2]
vin2a_d16
SIGNAL NAME [3]
vin2a_d17
vin2a_d18
TYPE [6]
0
I
vin2b_d7
2
I
rgmii1_txd1
3
O
No
BALL
RESET
STATE [7]
BALL
BALL
I/O
RESET
RESET
VOLTAGE
REL.
REL.
VALUE
MUXMODE
STATE [8]
[10]
[9]
PD
PD
15
1.8/3.3
POWER
[11]
vddshv1
HYS [12]
Yes
PULL
BUFFER
UP/DOWN
TYPE [13]
TYPE [14]
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
DSIS [15]
0
0
4
O
mii1_txd1
8
O
eQEP3_strobe
10
IO
0
pr1_mii1_rxd3
11
I
0
pr1_pru1_gpi13
12
I
pr1_pru1_gpo13
13
O
gpio4_24
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
vin2a_d17
0
I
vin2b_d6
2
I
rgmii1_txd0
3
O
vout2_d6
E11
MUXMODE
[5]
vin2a_d16
vout2_d7
A13
PN [4]
4
O
mii1_txd2
8
O
ehrpwm3A
10
O
pr1_mii1_rxd2
11
I
pr1_pru1_gpi14
12
I
pr1_pru1_gpo14
13
O
gpio4_25
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
vin2a_d18
0
I
vin2b_d5
2
I
rgmii1_rxc
3
I
4
O
mii1_txd3
8
O
ehrpwm3B
10
O
pr1_mii1_rxd1
11
I
pr1_pru1_gpi15
12
I
pr1_pru1_gpo15
13
O
gpio4_26
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
vout2_d5
No
No
PD
PD
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv1
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
0
0
0
PD
PD
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv1
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
0
0
0
0
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
59
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 4-1. Pin Attributes(1) (continued)
BALL NUMBER
[1]
F11
BALL NAME [2]
vin2a_d19
SIGNAL NAME [3]
vin2a_d20
vin2a_d21
BALL
RESET
STATE [7]
BALL
BALL
I/O
RESET
RESET
VOLTAGE
REL.
REL.
VALUE
MUXMODE
STATE [8]
[10]
[9]
PD
PD
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
DSIS [15]
I
rgmii1_rxctl
3
I
4
O
mii1_txer
8
O
0
ehrpwm3_tripzone_input
10
IO
0
pr1_mii1_rxd0
11
I
0
pr1_pru1_gpi16
12
I
pr1_pru1_gpo16
13
O
gpio4_27
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
vin2a_d20
0
I
vin2b_d3
2
I
rgmii1_rxd3
3
I
4
O
mii1_rxer
8
I
0
eCAP3_in_PWM3_out
10
IO
0
pr1_mii1_rxer
11
I
0
pr1_pru1_gpi17
12
I
pr1_pru1_gpo17
13
O
gpio4_28
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
vin2a_d21
0
I
vin2b_d2
2
I
rgmii1_rxd2
3
I
4
O
mii1_col
8
I
0
pr1_mii1_rxlink
11
I
0
pr1_pru1_gpi18
12
I
pr1_pru1_gpo18
13
O
gpio4_29
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
No
vddshv1
PULL
BUFFER
UP/DOWN
TYPE [13]
TYPE [14]
I
No
1.8/3.3
HYS [12]
2
No
15
POWER
[11]
0
vout2_d2
60
TYPE [6]
vin2b_d4
vout2_d3
E13
MUXMODE
[5]
vin2a_d19
vout2_d4
B13
PN [4]
0
0
0
PD
PD
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv1
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
0
0
0
PD
PD
Terminal Configuration and Functions
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv1
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
0
0
0
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 4-1. Pin Attributes(1) (continued)
BALL NUMBER
[1]
C13
BALL NAME [2]
vin2a_d22
SIGNAL NAME [3]
vin2a_d23
vin2a_de0
TYPE [6]
BALL
RESET
STATE [7]
BALL
BALL
I/O
RESET
RESET
VOLTAGE
REL.
REL.
VALUE
MUXMODE
STATE [8]
[10]
[9]
PD
PD
I
rgmii1_rxd1
3
I
4
O
mii1_crs
8
I
0
pr1_mii1_col
11
I
0
pr1_pru1_gpi19
12
I
pr1_pru1_gpo19
13
O
gpio4_30
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
vin2a_d23
0
I
vin2b_d0
2
I
rgmii1_rxd0
3
I
4
O
mii1_txen
8
O
pr1_mii1_crs
11
I
pr1_pru1_gpi20
12
I
pr1_pru1_gpo20
13
O
gpio4_31
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
vin2a_de0
0
I
vin2a_fld0
1
I
vin2b_fld1
2
I
vin2b_de1
3
I
4
O
emu6
5
O
kbd_row1
9
I
0
eQEP1B_in
10
I
0
pr1_edio_data_in1
12
I
0
pr1_edio_data_out1
13
O
gpio3_29
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
No
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
DSIS [15]
I
vout2_de
vddshv1
PULL
BUFFER
UP/DOWN
TYPE [13]
TYPE [14]
2
No
1.8/3.3
HYS [12]
0
No
15
POWER
[11]
vin2b_d1
vout2_d0
B7
MUXMODE
[5]
vin2a_d22
vout2_d1
D13
PN [4]
0
0
0
PD
PD
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv1
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
0
0
0
0
PD
PD
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv1
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
61
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 4-1. Pin Attributes(1) (continued)
BALL NUMBER
[1]
C7
BALL NAME [2]
vin2a_fld0
SIGNAL NAME [3]
vin2a_hsync0
vin2a_vsync0
0
I
2
I
No
BALL
RESET
STATE [7]
BALL
BALL
I/O
RESET
RESET
VOLTAGE
REL.
REL.
VALUE
MUXMODE
STATE [8]
[10]
[9]
PD
PD
15
1.8/3.3
POWER
[11]
vddshv1
HYS [12]
Yes
PULL
BUFFER
UP/DOWN
TYPE [13]
TYPE [14]
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
DSIS [15]
PU/PD
4
O
emu7
5
O
eQEP1_index
10
IO
0
pr1_edio_data_in2
12
I
0
pr1_edio_data_out2
13
O
gpio3_30
gpmc_a27
gpmc_a18
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
vin2a_hsync0
0
I
vin2b_hsync1
3
I
No
PD
PD
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv1
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
4
O
emu8
5
O
uart9_rxd
7
I
1
spi4_sclk
8
IO
0
kbd_row2
9
I
0
eQEP1_strobe
10
IO
0
pr1_uart0_cts_n
11
I
1
pr1_edio_data_in3
12
I
0
pr1_edio_data_out3
13
O
gpio3_31
gpmc_a27
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
vin2a_vsync0
0
I
vin2b_vsync1
3
I
vout2_vsync
62
TYPE [6]
vin2b_clk1
vout2_hsync
B8
MUXMODE
[5]
vin2a_fld0
vout2_clk
E8
PN [4]
No
PD
PD
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv1
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
4
O
emu9
5
O
uart9_txd
7
O
spi4_d1
8
IO
0
kbd_row3
9
I
0
ehrpwm1A
10
O
pr1_uart0_rts_n
11
O
pr1_edio_data_in4
12
I
pr1_edio_data_out4
13
O
gpio4_0
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
Terminal Configuration and Functions
0
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 4-1. Pin Attributes(1) (continued)
BALL NUMBER
[1]
BALL NAME [2]
SIGNAL NAME [3]
PN [4]
MUXMODE
[5]
TYPE [6]
A1, A25, AA13,
vss
AA15, AA7, AA8,
AA9, AB8, AC13,
AE1, AE15, AE25,
G13, G16, G8,
H10, H12, H14,
H16, H18, H19,
H8, J10, J12, J14,
J17, K11, K13,
K15, K17, K9, L11,
L13, L15, L18, L8,
M12, M14, M16,
M18, M20, M8, M9,
N12, N14, N16,
N17, N20, P11,
P13, P15, P17,
P19, P9, R11, R13,
R15, R18, R19,
R8, R9, T10, T12,
T14, T16, T18, T8,
U10, U12, U14,
U16, U17, U19,
V11, V13, V15,
V17, V19, V8, V9,
W19, W9, Y14,
Y16, Y17, Y7
vss
GND
AA12
vssa_osc0
vssa_osc0
GND
AB11
vssa_osc1
vssa_osc1
AC10
Wakeup0
dcan1_rx
1
I
gpio1_0
sys_nirq2
14
I
Driver off
15
I
sys_nirq1
1
I
gpio1_3
dcan2_rx
14
I
AB10
Wakeup3
BALL
RESET
STATE [7]
BALL
BALL
I/O
RESET
RESET
VOLTAGE
REL.
REL.
VALUE
MUXMODE
STATE [8]
[10]
[9]
POWER
[11]
HYS [12]
PULL
BUFFER
UP/DOWN
TYPE [13]
TYPE [14]
DSIS [15]
GND
15
1.8/3.3
vdda33v_u Yes
sb1
IHHV1833
PU/PD
15
1.8/3.3
vdda33v_u Yes
sb1
IHHV1833
PU/PD
Driver off
15
I
Y12
xi_osc0
xi_osc0
0
I
1.8
vdda_osc
No
LVCMOS
Analog
AC11
xi_osc1
xi_osc1
0
I
1.8
vdda_osc
No
LVCMOS
Analog
AB12
xo_osc0
xo_osc0
0
O
1.8
vdda_osc
No
LVCMOS
Analog
AA11
xo_osc1
xo_osc1
0
A
1.8
vdda_osc
No
LVCMOS
Analog
1
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
63
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 4-1. Pin Attributes(1) (continued)
BALL NUMBER
[1]
J25
J24
H24
64
BALL NAME [2]
xref_clk0
xref_clk1
xref_clk2
SIGNAL NAME [3]
PN [4]
MUXMODE
[5]
TYPE [6]
BALL
RESET
STATE [7]
BALL
BALL
I/O
RESET
RESET
VOLTAGE
REL.
REL.
VALUE
MUXMODE
STATE [8]
[10]
[9]
PD
PD
15
1.8/3.3
POWER
[11]
vddshv3
HYS [12]
Yes
PULL
BUFFER
UP/DOWN
TYPE [13]
TYPE [14]
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
DSIS [15]
xref_clk0
0
I
mcasp2_axr8
1
IO
PU/PD
mcasp1_axr4
2
IO
mcasp1_ahclkx
3
O
mcasp5_ahclkx
4
O
vin1a_d0
7
I
0
hdq0
8
IO
1
clkout2
9
O
timer13
10
IO
pr2_mii1_col
11
I
pr2_pru1_gpi5
12
I
pr2_pru1_gpo5
13
O
gpio6_17
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
xref_clk1
0
I
mcasp2_axr9
1
IO
mcasp1_axr5
2
IO
mcasp2_ahclkx
3
O
mcasp6_ahclkx
4
O
vin1a_clk0
7
I
timer14
10
IO
pr2_mii1_crs
11
I
pr2_pru1_gpi6
12
I
pr2_pru1_gpo6
13
O
gpio6_18
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
xref_clk2
0
I
mcasp2_axr10
1
IO
mcasp1_axr6
2
IO
mcasp3_ahclkx
3
O
mcasp7_ahclkx
4
O
timer15
10
IO
gpio6_19
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
0
0
0
PD
PD
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv3
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
0
0
0
0
PD
PD
Terminal Configuration and Functions
15
1.8/3.3
vddshv3
Yes
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
PU/PD
0
0
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 4-1. Pin Attributes(1) (continued)
BALL NUMBER
[1]
H25
BALL NAME [2]
xref_clk3
SIGNAL NAME [3]
PN [4]
MUXMODE
[5]
TYPE [6]
xref_clk3
0
I
mcasp2_axr11
1
IO
mcasp1_axr7
2
IO
mcasp4_ahclkx
3
O
mcasp8_ahclkx
4
O
hdq0
7
IO
clkout3
9
O
timer16
10
IO
gpio6_20
14
IO
Driver off
15
I
BALL
RESET
STATE [7]
BALL
BALL
I/O
RESET
RESET
VOLTAGE
REL.
REL.
VALUE
MUXMODE
STATE [8]
[10]
[9]
PD
PD
15
1.8/3.3
POWER
[11]
vddshv3
HYS [12]
Yes
PULL
BUFFER
UP/DOWN
TYPE [13]
TYPE [14]
Dual
Voltage
LVCMOS
DSIS [15]
PU/PD
0
0
1
(1) NA in this table stands for Not Applicable.
(2) For more information on recommended operating conditions, see Section 5.4, Recommended Operating Conditions.
(3) The pullup or pulldown block strength is equal to: minimum = 50 μA, typical = 100 μA, maximum = 250 μA.
(4) The output impedance settings of this IO cell are programmable; by default, the value is DS[1:0] = 10, this means 40 Ω. For more information on DS[1:0] register configuration, see the
Device TRM.
(5) IO drive strength for usb1_dp, usb1_dm, usb2_dp and usb2_dm: minimum 18.3 mA, maximum 89 mA (for a power supply vdda33v_usb1 and vdda33v_usb2 = 3.46 V).
(6) Minimum PU = 900 Ω, maximum PU = 3.090 kΩ and minimum PD = 14.25 kΩ, maximum PD = 24.8 kΩ.
For more information, see chapter 7 of the USB2.0 specification, in particular section Signaling / Device Speed Identification.
(7) This function will not be supported on some pin-compatible roadmap devices. Pin compatibility can be maintained in the future by not using these GPIO signals.
(8) In PUx / PDy, x and y = 60 to 200 μA.
The output impedance settings (or drive strengths) of this IO are programmable (34 Ω, 40 Ω, 48 Ω, 60 Ω, 80 Ω) depending on the values of the I[2:0] registers.
(9) The IHHV1833 buffer exists in the dual-voltage IO logic that can be powered by either 1.8V or 3.3V provided by vddshv3. However, the vddshv3 supply is only used for input protection
circuitry, not for logic functionality. The logic in this buffer operates entirely on the vdds18v supply. Therefore, these input buffers are fully functional whenever vdds18v is valid.
(10) The internal pull resistors for balls A4, E7, D6, C5, D7, C6, A5, B6 are permanently disabled when sysboot15 is set to 0 as described in the section Sysboot Configuration of the Device
TRM. If internal pull-up/down resistors are desired on these balls then sysboot15 should be set to 1. If gpmc boot mode is used with SYSBOOT15=0 (not recommended) then external
pull-downs should be implemented to keep the address bus at logic-1 value during boot since the gpmc ms-address bits are high-z during boot.
(11) This signal is valid only for High-Security devices. For more details, see Section 5.8, VPP Specification for One-Time Programmable (OTP) eFUSEs. For General Purpose devices do not
connect any signal, test point, or board trace to this signal.
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
65
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
4.3
www.ti.com
Signal Descriptions
Many signals are available on multiple pins, according to the software configuration of the pin multiplexing
options.
1. SIGNAL NAME: The name of the signal passing through the pin.
NOTE
The subsystem multiplexing signals are not described in Table 4-1 and Table 4-31.
2. DESCRIPTION: Description of the signal
3. TYPE: Signal direction and type:
– I = Input
– O = Output
– IO = Input or output
– D = Open Drain
– DS = Differential
– A = Analog
– PWR = Power
– GND = Ground
4. BALL: Associated ball(s) bottom
NOTE
For more information, see the Control Module / Control Module Register Manual section of
the Device TRM.
4.3.1
VIP
NOTE
For more information, see the Video Input Port (VIP) section of the Device TRM.
Table 4-2. VIP Signal Descriptions
SIGNAL NAME
DESCRIPTION
TYPE
BALL
Video Input 1 Port A Clock input.Input clock for 8-bit 16-bit or 24-bit Port A video
capture. Input data is sampled on the CLK0 edge.
I
G3, J24, Y5
vin1a_d0
Video Input 1 Port A Data input
I
AA1, B23, F1, J25
vin1a_d1
Video Input 1 Port A Data input
I
B22, E2, Y3
vin1a_d2
Video Input 1 Port A Data input
I
A23, E1, W2
vin1a_d3
Video Input 1 Port A Data input
I
A22, AA3, C1
vin1a_d4
Video Input 1 Port A Data input
I
AA2, B21, D1
vin1a_d5
Video Input 1 Port A Data input
I
A21, D2, Y4
vin1a_d6
Video Input 1 Port A Data input
I
B1, D19, Y1
vin1a_d7
Video Input 1 Port A Data input
I
B2, E19, Y2
vin1a_d8
Video Input 1 Port A Data input
I
C2, F16
Video Input 1
vin1a_clk0
66
vin1a_d9
Video Input 1 Port A Data input
I
D3, E16
vin1a_d10
Video Input 1 Port A Data input
I
A2, E17
vin1a_d11
Video Input 1 Port A Data input
I
A19, B3
vin1a_d12
Video Input 1 Port A Data input
I
B18, C3
vin1a_d13
Video Input 1 Port A Data input
I
B16, C4
vin1a_d14
Video Input 1 Port A Data input
I
A3, B17
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 4-2. VIP Signal Descriptions (continued)
SIGNAL NAME
TYPE
BALL
vin1a_d15
DESCRIPTION
Video Input 1 Port A Data input
I
A18, B4
vin1a_d16
Video Input 1 Port A Data input
I
M1
vin1a_d17
Video Input 1 Port A Data input
I
M2
vin1a_d18
Video Input 1 Port A Data input
I
L2
vin1a_d19
Video Input 1 Port A Data input
I
L1
vin1a_d20
Video Input 1 Port A Data input
I
K3
vin1a_d21
Video Input 1 Port A Data input
I
K2
vin1a_d22
Video Input 1 Port A Data input
I
J1
vin1a_d23
Video Input 1 Port A Data input
I
K1
vin1a_de0
Video Input 1 Port A Field ID input
I
C17, J2, Y6
vin1a_fld0
Video Input 1 Port A Field ID input
I
C16, L3
vin1a_hsync0
Video Input 1 Port A Horizontal Sync input
I
AA4, B14, K4
vin1a_vsync0
Video Input 1 Port A Vertical Sync input
I
AB1, D14, H1
vin1b_clk1
Video Input 1 Port B Clock input
I
J2, L5
vin1b_d0
Video Input 1 Port B Data input
I
L6, M1
vin1b_d1
Video Input 1 Port B Data input
I
M2, N5
vin1b_d2
Video Input 1 Port B Data input
I
L2, N6
vin1b_d3
Video Input 1 Port B Data input
I
L1, T4
vin1b_d4
Video Input 1 Port B Data input
I
K3, T5
vin1b_d5
Video Input 1 Port B Data input
I
K2, N2
vin1b_d6
Video Input 1 Port B Data input
I
J1, P2
K1, N1
vin1b_d7
Video Input 1 Port B Data input
I
vin1b_de1
Video Input 1 Port B Field ID input
I
L3, P4
vin1b_fld1
Video Input 1 Port B Field ID input
I
G1, N4
vin1b_hsync1
Video Input 1 Port B Horizontal Sync input
I
K4, P3
vin1b_vsync1
Video Input 1 Port B Vertical Sync input
I
H1, R2
D8, L5
Video Input 2
vin2a_clk0
Video Input 2 Port A Clock input.
I
vin2a_d0
Video Input 2 Port A Data input
I
C8, L6
vin2a_d1
Video Input 2 Port A Data input
I
B9, N5
vin2a_d2
Video Input 2 Port A Data input
I
A7, N6
vin2a_d3
Video Input 2 Port A Data input
I
A9, T4
vin2a_d4
Video Input 2 Port A Data input
I
A8, T5
vin2a_d5
Video Input 2 Port A Data input
I
A11, N2
vin2a_d6
Video Input 2 Port A Data input
I
F10, P2
vin2a_d7
Video Input 2 Port A Data input
I
A10, N1
vin2a_d8
Video Input 2 Port A Data input
I
B10, P1
vin2a_d9
Video Input 2 Port A Data input
I
E10, N3
vin2a_d10
Video Input 2 Port A Data input
I
D10, R1
vin2a_d11
Video Input 2 Port A Data input
I
C10, P5
vin2a_d12
Video Input 2 Port A Data input
I
B11
vin2a_d13
Video Input 2 Port A Data input
I
D11
vin2a_d14
Video Input 2 Port A Data input
I
C11
vin2a_d15
Video Input 2 Port A Data input
I
B12
vin2a_d16
Video Input 2 Port A Data input
I
A12
vin2a_d17
Video Input 2 Port A Data input
I
A13
vin2a_d18
Video Input 2 Port A Data input
I
E11
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
67
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 4-2. VIP Signal Descriptions (continued)
SIGNAL NAME
TYPE
BALL
vin2a_d19
DESCRIPTION
Video Input 2 Port A Data input
I
F11
vin2a_d20
Video Input 2 Port A Data input
I
B13
vin2a_d21
Video Input 2 Port A Data input
I
E13
vin2a_d22
Video Input 2 Port A Data input
I
C13
vin2a_d23
Video Input 2 Port A Data input
I
D13
vin2a_de0
Video Input 2 Port A Field ID input
I
B7, P4
vin2a_fld0
Video Input 2 Port A Field ID input
I
B7, C7, N4
vin2a_hsync0
Video Input 2 Port A Horizontal Sync input
I
E8, P3
vin2a_vsync0
Video Input 2 Port A Vertical Sync input
I
B8, R2
vin2b_clk1
Video Input 2 Port B Clock input
I
AB1, C7, L4, H6
vin2b_d0
Video Input 2 Port B Data input
I
AA1, D13, A4
vin2b_d1
Video Input 2 Port B Data input
I
C13, Y3, E7
vin2b_d2
Video Input 2 Port B Data input
I
E13, W2, D6
vin2b_d3
Video Input 2 Port B Data input
I
AA3, B13, C5
vin2b_d4
Video Input 2 Port B Data input
I
AA2, F11, B5
vin2b_d5
Video Input 2 Port B Data input
I
E11, Y4, D7
vin2b_d6
Video Input 2 Port B Data input
I
A13, Y1, C6
vin2b_d7
Video Input 2 Port B Data input
I
A12, Y2, A5
vin2b_de1
Video Input 2 Port B Field ID input
I
AA4, B7, H2
vin2b_fld1
Video Input 2 Port B Field ID input
I
B7, H6
vin2b_hsync1
Video Input 2 Port B Horizontal Sync input
I
E8, Y5, B6
vin2b_vsync1
Video Input 2 Port B Vertical Sync input
I
B8, Y6, A6
4.3.2
DSS
Table 4-3. DSS Signal Descriptions
SIGNAL NAME
DESCRIPTION
TYPE
BALL
DPI Video Output 2
68
vout2_clk
Video Output 2 Clock output
O
C7
vout2_d0
Video Output 2 Data output
O
D13
vout2_d1
Video Output 2 Data output
O
C13
vout2_d2
Video Output 2 Data output
O
E13
vout2_d3
Video Output 2 Data output
O
B13
vout2_d4
Video Output 2 Data output
O
F11
vout2_d5
Video Output 2 Data output
O
E11
vout2_d6
Video Output 2 Data output
O
A13
vout2_d7
Video Output 2 Data output
O
A12
vout2_d8
Video Output 2 Data output
O
B12
vout2_d9
Video Output 2 Data output
O
C11
vout2_d10
Video Output 2 Data output
O
D11
vout2_d11
Video Output 2 Data output
O
B11
vout2_d12
Video Output 2 Data output
O
C10
vout2_d13
Video Output 2 Data output
O
D10
vout2_d14
Video Output 2 Data output
O
E10
vout2_d15
Video Output 2 Data output
O
B10
vout2_d16
Video Output 2 Data output
O
A10
vout2_d17
Video Output 2 Data output
O
F10
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 4-3. DSS Signal Descriptions (continued)
SIGNAL NAME
TYPE
BALL
vout2_d18
DESCRIPTION
Video Output 2 Data output
O
A11
vout2_d19
Video Output 2 Data output
O
A8
vout2_d20
Video Output 2 Data output
O
A9
vout2_d21
Video Output 2 Data output
O
A7
vout2_d22
Video Output 2 Data output
O
B9
vout2_d23
Video Output 2 Data output
O
C8
vout2_de
Video Output 2 Data Enable output
O
B7
vout2_fld
Video Output 2 Field ID output. This signal is not used for embedded sync modes.
O
D8
vout2_hsync
Video Output 2 Horizontal Sync output. This signal is not used for embedded sync
modes.
O
E8
vout2_vsync
Video Output 2 Vertical Sync output. This signal is not used for embedded sync modes.
O
B8
vout3_clk
Video Output 3 Clock output
O
G3
vout3_d0
Video Output 3 Data output
O
F1
vout3_d1
Video Output 3 Data output
O
E2
vout3_d2
Video Output 3 Data output
O
E1
vout3_d3
Video Output 3 Data output
O
C1
vout3_d4
Video Output 3 Data output
O
D1
vout3_d5
Video Output 3 Data output
O
D2
vout3_d6
Video Output 3 Data output
O
B1
vout3_d7
Video Output 3 Data output
O
B2
vout3_d8
Video Output 3 Data output
O
C2
vout3_d9
Video Output 3 Data output
O
D3
vout3_d10
Video Output 3 Data output
O
A2
vout3_d11
Video Output 3 Data output
O
B3
vout3_d12
Video Output 3 Data output
O
C3
vout3_d13
Video Output 3 Data output
O
C4
vout3_d14
Video Output 3 Data output
O
A3
vout3_d15
Video Output 3 Data output
O
B4
vout3_d16
Video Output 3 Data output
O
M1
vout3_d17
Video Output 3 Data output
O
M2
vout3_d18
Video Output 3 Data output
O
L2
vout3_d19
Video Output 3 Data output
O
L1
vout3_d20
Video Output 3 Data output
O
K3
vout3_d21
Video Output 3 Data output
O
K2
vout3_d22
Video Output 3 Data output
O
J1
vout3_d23
Video Output 3 Data output
O
K1
vout3_de
Video Output 3 Data Enable output
O
J2
DPI Video Output 3
vout3_fld
Video Output 3 Field ID output. This signal is not used for embedded sync modes.
O
L3
vout3_hsync
Video Output 3 Horizontal Sync output. This signal is not used for embedded sync
modes.
O
K4
vout3_vsync
Video Output 3 Vertical Sync output. This signal is not used for embedded sync modes.
O
H1
4.3.3
HDMI
NOTE
For more information, see the Display Subsystem / Display Subsystem Overview of the
Device TRM.
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
69
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 4-4. HDMI Signal Descriptions
SIGNAL NAME
DESCRIPTION
hdmi1_cec
HDMI consumer electronic control
hdmi1_hpd
HDMI display hot plug detect
hdmi1_ddc_scl
HDMI display data channel clock
hdmi1_ddc_sda
TYPE
BALL
IOD
E25, H23
IO
E24, H22
IOD
F23
G21
HDMI display data channel data
IOD
hdmi1_clockx
HDMI clock differential positive or negative
ODS
AE9
hdmi1_clocky
HDMI clock differential positive or negative
ODS
AD10
hdmi1_data2x
HDMI data 2 differential positive or negative
ODS
AE14
hdmi1_data2y
HDMI data 2 differential positive or negative
ODS
AD15
hdmi1_data1x
HDMI data 1 differential positive or negative
ODS
AE12
hdmi1_data1y
HDMI data 1 differential positive or negative
ODS
AD13
hdmi1_data0x
HDMI data 0 differential positive or negative
ODS
AE11
hdmi1_data0y
HDMI data 0 differential positive or negative
ODS
AD12
4.3.4
CSI2
NOTE
For more information, see the CAL Subsystem / CAL Subsystem Overview of the Device
TRM.
Table 4-5. CSI 2 Signal Descriptions
SIGNAL NAME
TYPE
BALL
csi2_0_dx0
Serial data/clock input - lane 0 (position 1)
I
AC1
csi2_0_dy0
Serial data/clock input - lane 0 (position 1)
I
AB2
csi2_0_dx1
Serial data/clock input - lane 1 (position 2)
I
AD1
csi2_0_dy1
Serial data/clock input - lane 1 (position 2)
I
AC2
csi2_0_dx2
Serial data/clock input - lane 2 (position 3)
I
AE2
csi2_0_dy2
Serial data/clock input - lane 2 (position 3)
I
AD2
4.3.5
DESCRIPTION
EMIF
NOTE
For more information, see the Memory Subsystem / EMIF Controller section of the Device
TRM.
NOTE
The index number 1 which is part of the EMIF1 signal prefixes (ddr1_*) listed in Table 4-6,
EMIF Signal Descriptions, column "SIGNAL NAME" not to be confused with DDR1 type of
SDRAM memories.
Table 4-6. EMIF Signal Descriptions
SIGNAL NAME
70
TYPE
BALL
ddr1_csn0
DESCRIPTION
EMIF1 Chip Select 0
O
AC19
ddr1_cke
EMIF1 Clock Enable
O
AB18
AD21
ddr1_ck
EMIF1 Clock
O
ddr1_nck
EMIF1 Negative Clock
O
AE21
ddr1_odt0
EMIF1 On-Die Termination for Chip Select 0
O
AD18
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 4-6. EMIF Signal Descriptions (continued)
SIGNAL NAME
TYPE
BALL
ddr1_casn
DESCRIPTION
EMIF1 Column Address Strobe
O
AD16
ddr1_rasn
EMIF1 Row Address Strobe
O
AD17
ddr1_wen
EMIF1 Write Enable
O
AE18
ddr1_rst
EMIF1 Reset output (DDR3-SDRAM only)
O
AE17
ddr1_ba0
EMIF1 Bank Address
O
AE16
ddr1_ba1
EMIF1 Bank Address
O
AA16
ddr1_ba2
EMIF1 Bank Address
O
AB16
ddr1_a0
EMIF1 Address Bus
O
AC18
ddr1_a1
EMIF1 Address Bus
O
AE19
ddr1_a2
EMIF1 Address Bus
O
AD19
ddr1_a3
EMIF1 Address Bus
O
AB19
ddr1_a4
EMIF1 Address Bus
O
AD20
ddr1_a5
EMIF1 Address Bus
O
AE20
ddr1_a6
EMIF1 Address Bus
O
AA18
ddr1_a7
EMIF1 Address Bus
O
AA20
ddr1_a8
EMIF1 Address Bus
O
Y21
ddr1_a9
EMIF1 Address Bus
O
AC20
ddr1_a10
EMIF1 Address Bus
O
AA21
ddr1_a11
EMIF1 Address Bus
O
AC21
ddr1_a12
EMIF1 Address Bus
O
AC22
ddr1_a13
EMIF1 Address Bus
O
AC15
ddr1_a14
EMIF1 Address Bus
O
AB15
ddr1_a15
EMIF1 Address Bus
O
AC16
ddr1_d0
EMIF1 Data Bus
IO
AA23
ddr1_d1
EMIF1 Data Bus
IO
AC24
ddr1_d2
EMIF1 Data Bus
IO
AB24
ddr1_d3
EMIF1 Data Bus
IO
AD24
ddr1_d4
EMIF1 Data Bus
IO
AB23
ddr1_d5
EMIF1 Data Bus
IO
AC23
ddr1_d6
EMIF1 Data Bus
IO
AD23
ddr1_d7
EMIF1 Data Bus
IO
AE24
ddr1_d8
EMIF1 Data Bus
IO
AA24
ddr1_d9
EMIF1 Data Bus
IO
W25
ddr1_d10
EMIF1 Data Bus
IO
Y23
ddr1_d11
EMIF1 Data Bus
IO
AD25
ddr1_d12
EMIF1 Data Bus
IO
AC25
ddr1_d13
EMIF1 Data Bus
IO
AB25
ddr1_d14
EMIF1 Data Bus
IO
AA25
ddr1_d15
EMIF1 Data Bus
IO
W24
ddr1_d16
EMIF1 Data Bus
IO
W23
ddr1_d17
EMIF1 Data Bus
IO
U25
ddr1_d18
EMIF1 Data Bus
IO
U24
ddr1_d19
EMIF1 Data Bus
IO
W21
ddr1_d20
EMIF1 Data Bus
IO
T22
ddr1_d21
EMIF1 Data Bus
IO
U22
ddr1_d22
EMIF1 Data Bus
IO
U23
ddr1_d23
EMIF1 Data Bus
IO
T21
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
71
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 4-6. EMIF Signal Descriptions (continued)
SIGNAL NAME
DESCRIPTION
TYPE
BALL
ddr1_d24
EMIF1 Data Bus
IO
T23
ddr1_d25
EMIF1 Data Bus
IO
T25
ddr1_d26
EMIF1 Data Bus
IO
T24
ddr1_d27
EMIF1 Data Bus
IO
P21
ddr1_d28
EMIF1 Data Bus
IO
N21
ddr1_d29
EMIF1 Data Bus
IO
P22
ddr1_d30
EMIF1 Data Bus
IO
P23
ddr1_d31
EMIF1 Data Bus
IO
P24
ddr1_dqm0
EMIF1 Data Mask
O
AE23
ddr1_dqm1
EMIF1 Data Mask
O
W22
ddr1_dqm2
EMIF1 Data Mask
O
U21
ddr1_dqm3
EMIF1 Data Mask
O
P25
ddr1_dqs0
Data strobe 0 input/output for byte 0 of the 32-bit data bus. This signal is output to the
EMIF1 memory when writing and input when reading.
IO
AD22
ddr1_dqsn0
Data strobe 0 invert
IO
AE22
ddr1_dqs1
Data strobe 1 input/output for byte 1 of the 32-bit data bus. This signal is output to the
EMIF1 memory when writing and input when reading.
IO
Y24
ddr1_dqsn1
Data strobe 1 invert
IO
Y25
ddr1_dqs2
Data strobe 2 input/output for byte 2 of the 32-bit data bus. This signal is output to the
EMIF1 memory when writing and input when reading.
IO
V24
ddr1_dqsn2
Data strobe 2 invert
IO
V25
ddr1_dqs3
Data strobe 3 input/output for byte 3 of the 32-bit data bus. This signal is output to the
EMIF1 memory when writing and input when reading.
IO
R24
ddr1_dqsn3
Data strobe 3 invert
IO
R25
ddr1_vref0
Reference Power Supply EMIF1
A
Y20
4.3.6
GPMC
NOTE
For more information, see the Memory Subsystem / General-Purpose Memory Controller
section of the Device TRM.
Table 4-7. GPMC Signal Descriptions
SIGNAL NAME
72
TYPE
BALL
gpmc_ad0
DESCRIPTION
GPMC Data 0 in A/D nonmultiplexed mode and additionally Address 1
in A/D multiplexed mode
IO
F1
gpmc_ad1
GPMC Data 1 in A/D nonmultiplexed mode and additionally Address 2
in A/D multiplexed mode
IO
E2
gpmc_ad2
GPMC Data 2 in A/D nonmultiplexed mode and additionally Address 3
in A/D multiplexed mode
IO
E1
gpmc_ad3
GPMC Data 3 in A/D nonmultiplexed mode and additionally Address 4
in A/D multiplexed mode
IO
C1
gpmc_ad4
GPMC Data 4 in A/D nonmultiplexed mode and additionally Address 5
in A/D multiplexed mode
IO
D1
gpmc_ad5
GPMC Data 5 in A/D nonmultiplexed mode and additionally Address 6
in A/D multiplexed mode
IO
D2
gpmc_ad6
GPMC Data 6 in A/D nonmultiplexed mode and additionally Address 7
in A/D multiplexed mode
IO
B1
gpmc_ad7
GPMC Data 7 in A/D nonmultiplexed mode and additionally Address 8
in A/D multiplexed mode
IO
B2
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 4-7. GPMC Signal Descriptions (continued)
SIGNAL NAME
TYPE
BALL
gpmc_ad8
DESCRIPTION
GPMC Data 8 in A/D nonmultiplexed mode and additionally Address 9
in A/D multiplexed mode
IO
C2
gpmc_ad9
GPMC Data 9 in A/D nonmultiplexed mode and additionally Address 10
in A/D multiplexed mode
IO
D3
gpmc_ad10
GPMC Data 10 in A/D nonmultiplexed mode and additionally Address
11 in A/D multiplexed mode
IO
A2
gpmc_ad11
GPMC Data 11 in A/D nonmultiplexed mode and additionally Address
12 in A/D multiplexed mode
IO
B3
gpmc_ad12
GPMC Data 12 in A/D nonmultiplexed mode and additionally Address
13 in A/D multiplexed mode
IO
C3
gpmc_ad13
GPMC Data 13 in A/D nonmultiplexed mode and additionally Address
14 in A/D multiplexed mode
IO
C4
gpmc_ad14
GPMC Data 14 in A/D nonmultiplexed mode and additionally Address
15 in A/D multiplexed mode
IO
A3
gpmc_ad15
GPMC Data 15 in A/D nonmultiplexed mode and additionally Address
16 in A/D multiplexed mode
IO
B4
gpmc_a0
GPMC Address 0. Only used to effectively address 8-bit data
nonmultiplexed memories
O
G1, M1
gpmc_a1
GPMC address 1 in A/D nonmultiplexed mode and Address 17 in A/D
multiplexed mode
O
G3, M2
gpmc_a2
GPMC address 2 in A/D nonmultiplexed mode and Address 18 in A/D
multiplexed mode
O
H5, L2
gpmc_a3
GPMC address 3 in A/D nonmultiplexed mode and Address 19 in A/D
multiplexed mode
O
H6, L1
gpmc_a4
GPMC address 4 in A/D nonmultiplexed mode and Address 20 in A/D
multiplexed mode
O
K3
gpmc_a5
GPMC address 5 in A/D nonmultiplexed mode and Address 21 in A/D
multiplexed mode
O
K2
gpmc_a6
GPMC address 6 in A/D nonmultiplexed mode and Address 22 in A/D
multiplexed mode
O
J1
gpmc_a7
GPMC address 7 in A/D nonmultiplexed mode and Address 23 in A/D
multiplexed mode
O
K1
gpmc_a8
GPMC address 8 in A/D nonmultiplexed mode and Address 24 in A/D
multiplexed mode
O
K4
gpmc_a9
GPMC address 9 in A/D nonmultiplexed mode and Address 25 in A/D
multiplexed mode
O
H1
gpmc_a10
GPMC address 10 in A/D nonmultiplexed mode and Address 26 in A/D
multiplexed mode
O
J2
gpmc_a11
GPMC address 11 in A/D nonmultiplexed mode and unused in A/D
multiplexed mode
O
L3
gpmc_a12
GPMC address 12 in A/D nonmultiplexed mode and unused in A/D
multiplexed mode
O
G1
gpmc_a13
GPMC address 13 in A/D nonmultiplexed mode and unused in A/D
multiplexed mode
O
A4, H3, G4
gpmc_a14
GPMC address 14 in A/D nonmultiplexed mode and unused in A/D
multiplexed mode
O
E7, H4, G3
gpmc_a15
GPMC address 15 in A/D nonmultiplexed mode and unused in A/D
multiplexed mode
O
D6, K6, F6
gpmc_a16
GPMC address 16 in A/D nonmultiplexed mode and unused in A/D
multiplexed mode
O
C5, K5, M1
gpmc_a17
GPMC address 17 in A/D nonmultiplexed mode and unused in A/D
multiplexed mode
O
B5, G2, D8
gpmc_a18
GPMC address 18 in A/D nonmultiplexed mode and unused in A/D
multiplexed mode
O
D7, F2, C7
gpmc_a19
GPMC address 19 in A/D nonmultiplexed mode and unused in A/D
multiplexed mode
O
A4(3), C6, H5
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
73
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 4-7. GPMC Signal Descriptions (continued)
SIGNAL NAME
TYPE
BALL
gpmc_a20
GPMC address 20 in A/D nonmultiplexed mode and unused in A/D
multiplexed mode
O
A5, E7(3), L4
gpmc_a21
GPMC address 21 in A/D nonmultiplexed mode and unused in A/D
multiplexed mode
O
B6, D6(3), H2
gpmc_a22
GPMC address 22 in A/D nonmultiplexed mode and unused in A/D
multiplexed mode
O
A6, C5(3), H6
gpmc_a23
GPMC address 23 in A/D nonmultiplexed mode and unused in A/D
multiplexed mode
O
B5, H5, C10, G4
gpmc_a24
GPMC address 24 in A/D nonmultiplexed mode and unused in A/D
multiplexed mode
O
D7(3), D10, G3
gpmc_a25
GPMC address 25 in A/D nonmultiplexed mode and unused in A/D
multiplexed mode
O
C6(3), F6, E10
gpmc_a26
GPMC address 26 in A/D nonmultiplexed mode and unused in A/D
multiplexed mode
O
A5(3), M1, B10
gpmc_a27
GPMC address 27 in A/D nonmultiplexed mode and Address 27 in A/D
multiplexed mode
O
B6(3), D8, C7, E8
gpmc_cs0
GPMC Chip Select 0 (active low)
O
F3
gpmc_cs1
GPMC Chip Select 1 (active low)
O
A6
gpmc_cs2
GPMC Chip Select 2 (active low)
O
G4
gpmc_cs3
GPMC Chip Select 3 (active low)
O
G3
gpmc_cs4
GPMC Chip Select 4 (active low)
O
H2
gpmc_cs5
GPMC Chip Select 5 (active low)
O
H6
gpmc_cs6
GPMC Chip Select 6 (active low)
O
H5
gpmc_cs7
GPMC Chip Select 7 (active low)
O
L4
GPMC Clock output
IO
L4
gpmc_advn_ale
GPMC address valid active low or address latch enable
O
H5
gpmc_oen_ren
GPMC output enable active low or read enable
O
G5
gpmc_clk(1)(2)
DESCRIPTION
gpmc_wen
GPMC write enable active low
O
G6
gpmc_ben0
GPMC lower-byte enable active low
O
H2
H6
gpmc_ben1
GPMC upper-byte enable active low
O
gpmc_wait0
GPMC external indication of wait 0
I
F6
gpmc_wait1
GPMC external indication of wait 1
I
H5, L4
(1) This clock signal is implemented as 'pad loopback' inside the device - the output signal is looped back through the input buffer to serve
as the internal reference signal. Series termination is recommended (as close to device pin as possible) to improve signal integrity of the
clock input. Any nonmonotonicity in voltage that occurs at the pad loopback clock pin between VIH and VIL must be less than VHYS.
(2) The gpio6_16.clkout1 signal can be used as an “always-on” alternative to gpmc_clk provided that the external device can support the
associated timing. See Table 5-49, GPMC/NOR Flash Interface Switching Characteristics - Synchronous Mode - Default and Table 5-51
GPMC/NOR Flash Interface Switching Characteristics - Synchronous Mode - Alternate for timing information.
(3) The internal pull resistors for balls A4, E7, D6, C5, D7, C6, A5, B6 are permanently disabled when sysboot15 is set to 0 as described in
the section Sysboot Configuration of the Device TRM. If internal pull-up/down resistors are desired on these balls then sysboot15 should
be set to 1. If gpmc boot mode is used with SYSBOOT15=0 (not recommended) then external pull-downs should be implemented to
keep the address bus at logic-1 value during boot since the gpmc ms-address bits are high-z during boot.
4.3.7
Timers
NOTE
For more information, see the Timers section of the Device TRM.
Table 4-8. Timers Signal Descriptions
SIGNAL NAME
timer1
74
DESCRIPTION
PWM output/event trigger input
Terminal Configuration and Functions
TYPE
BALL
IO
H21, H6
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 4-8. Timers Signal Descriptions (continued)
SIGNAL NAME
TYPE
BALL
timer2
DESCRIPTION
PWM output/event trigger input
IO
H2, K22
timer3
PWM output/event trigger input
IO
H5, K23
timer4
PWM output/event trigger input
IO
A16, L4
timer5
PWM output/event trigger input
IO
A18, K6
timer6
PWM output/event trigger input
IO
B17, H4
timer7
PWM output/event trigger input
IO
B16, H3
timer8
PWM output/event trigger input
IO
B18, G1
A19, L3
timer9
PWM output/event trigger input
IO
timer10
PWM output/event trigger input
IO
E17, J2
timer11
PWM output/event trigger input
IO
E16, H1
timer12
PWM output/event trigger input
IO
F16, K4
timer13
PWM output/event trigger input
IO
J25
timer14
PWM output/event trigger input
IO
J24
timer15
PWM output/event trigger input
IO
AA6, H24
timer16
PWM output/event trigger input
IO
AD3, H25
4.3.8
I2C
NOTE
For more information, see the Serial Communication Interface / Multimaster High-Speed I2C
Controller / HS I2C Environment / HS I2C in I2C Mode section of the Device TRM.
NOTE
I2C1 and I2C2 do NOT support HS-mode.
Table 4-9. I2C Signal Descriptions
SIGNAL NAME
DESCRIPTION
TYPE
BALL
Inter-Integrated Circuit Interface 1 (I2C1)
i2c1_scl
I2C1 Clock
IOD
G22
i2c1_sda
I2C1 Data
IOD
G23
Inter-Integrated Circuit Interface 2 (I2C2)
i2c2_scl
I2C2 Clock
IOD
G21
i2c2_sda
I2C2 Data
IOD
F23
Inter-Integrated Circuit Interface 3 (I2C3)
i2c3_scl
I2C3 Clock
IOD
C17, K22, L4, Y6
i2c3_sda
I2C3 Data
IOD
C16, H21, H5, Y5
Inter-Integrated Circuit Interface 4 (I2C4)
i2c4_scl
I2C4 Clock
IOD
B25, D17, M1, V5
i2c4_sda
I2C4 Data
IOD
C23, D16, M2, U5
Inter-Integrated Circuit Interface 5 (I2C5)
i2c5_scl
I2C5 Clock
IOD
B14, K3, U6
i2c5_sda
I2C5 Data
IOD
AC3, D14, K2
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
75
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
4.3.9
www.ti.com
HDQ1W
NOTE
For more information, see the Serial Communication Interface / HDQ/1-Wire section of the
Device TRM.
Table 4-10. HDQ / 1-Wire Signal Descriptions
SIGNAL NAME
hdq0
DESCRIPTION
HDQ or 1-wire protocol single interface pin
TYPE
BALL
IOD
H25, J25
4.3.10 UART
NOTE
For more information about UART booting, see the Initialization / Device Initialization by
ROM Code / Perypheral Booting / Initialization Phase for UART Boot section of the Device
TRM.
Table 4-11. UART Signal Descriptions
SIGNAL NAME
DESCRIPTION
TYPE
BALL
Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter 1 (UART1)
uart1_dcdn
UART1 Data Carrier Detect active low
I
N23
uart1_dsrn
UART1 Data Set Ready Active Low
I
N25
uart1_dtrn
UART1 Data Terminal Ready Active Low
O
N22
uart1_rin
UART1 Ring Indicator
I
N24
uart1_rxd
UART1 Receive Data
I
L25
uart1_txd
UART1 Transmit Data
O
M25
uart1_ctsn
UART1 clear to send active low
I
L20
uart1_rtsn
UART1 request to send active low
O
M24
Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter 2 (UART2)
uart2_rxd
UART2 Receive Data
I
N23
uart2_txd
UART2 Transmit Data
O
N25
uart2_ctsn
UART2 clear to send active low
I
N22
uart2_rtsn
UART2 request to send active low
O
N24
Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter 3 (UART3)/IrDA
uart3_rxd
UART3 Receive Data
I
AA5, G25, N22, N5
uart3_txd
UART3 Transmit Data
O
AC4, F25, N24, N6
uart3_ctsn
UART3 clear to send active low
I
G24, L6, N23, T4
uart3_rtsn
UART3 request to send active low
O
F24, L5, N25, T5
uart3_rctx
Remote control data
O
N23
uart3_sd
Infrared transceiver configure/shutdown
O
N25
uart3_irtx
Infrared data output
O
N24
Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter 4 (UART4)
uart4_rxd
UART4 Receive Data
I
A24, E24, P4
uart4_txd
UART4 Transmit Data
O
D23, E25, P3
uart4_ctsn
UART4 clear to send active low
I
R2
uart4_rtsn
UART4 request to send active low
O
R1
I
B22, G24, M1, Y4
Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter 5 (UART5)
uart5_rxd
76
UART5 Receive Data
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 4-11. UART Signal Descriptions (continued)
SIGNAL NAME
DESCRIPTION
TYPE
BALL
O
AA2, B23, F24, M2
UART5 clear to send active low
I
AA3, L2
UART5 request to send active low
O
L1, W2
uart5_txd
UART5 Transmit Data
uart5_ctsn
uart5_rtsn
Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter 6 (UART6)
uart6_rxd
UART6 Receive Data
I
D14, K3, U5
uart6_txd
UART6 Transmit Data
O
B14, K2, V5
uart6_ctsn
UART6 clear to send active low
I
C14, J1
uart6_rtsn
UART6 request to send active low
O
B15, K1
Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter 7 (UART7)
uart7_rxd
UART7 Receive Data
I
A22, L2
uart7_txd
UART7 Transmit Data
O
A23, L1
uart7_ctsn
UART7 clear to send active low
I
B22
uart7_rtsn
UART7 request to send active low
O
B23
Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter 8 (UART8)
uart8_rxd
UART8 Receive Data
I
C23, H22, J1
uart8_txd
UART8 Transmit Data
O
B25, H23, K1
uart8_ctsn
UART8 clear to send active low
I
A24
uart8_rtsn
UART8 request to send active low
O
D23
Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter 9 (UART9)
uart9_rxd
UART9 Receive Data
I
AC3, E8, L20
uart9_txd
UART9 Transmit Data
O
B8, M24, U6
uart9_ctsn
UART9 clear to send active low
I
AA5, C8
uart9_rtsn
UART9 request to send active low
O
AC4, B9
Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter 10 (UART10)
uart10_rxd
UART10 Receive Data
I
A7, H21, N22, Y3
uart10_txd
UART10 Transmit Data
O
A9, AA1, K22, N24
uart10_ctsn
UART10 clear to send active low
I
A8, AA4
uart10_rtsn
UART10 request to send active low
O
A11, AB1
4.3.11 McSPI
NOTE
For more information, see the Serial Communication Interface / Multichannel Serial
Peripheral Interface (McSPI) section of the Device TRM.
Table 4-12. SPI Signal Descriptions
SIGNAL NAME
DESCRIPTION
TYPE
BALL
Serial Peripheral Interface 1
spi1_sclk(1)
SPI1 Clock
IO
C24
spi1_d1
SPI1 Data. Can be configured as either MISO or MOSI.
IO
D24
spi1_d0
SPI1 Data. Can be configured as either MISO or MOSI.
IO
D25
spi1_cs0
SPI1 Chip Select
IO
B24
spi1_cs1
SPI1 Chip Select
IO
C25
spi1_cs2
SPI1 Chip Select
IO
E24
spi1_cs3
SPI1 Chip Select
IO
E25
IO
G25
Serial Peripheral Interface 2
spi2_sclk(1)
SPI2 Clock
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
77
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 4-12. SPI Signal Descriptions (continued)
SIGNAL NAME
TYPE
BALL
spi2_d1
DESCRIPTION
SPI2 Data. Can be configured as either MISO or MOSI.
IO
F25
G24
spi2_d0
SPI2 Data. Can be configured as either MISO or MOSI.
IO
spi2_cs0
SPI2 Chip Select
IO
F24
spi2_cs1
SPI2 Chip Select
IO
C25
spi2_cs2
SPI2 Chip Select
IO
E24
spi2_cs3
SPI2 Chip Select
IO
E25
A18, C23, N5, Y1
Serial Peripheral Interface 3
spi3_sclk(1)
SPI3 Clock
IO
spi3_d1
SPI3 Data. Can be configured as either MISO or MOSI.
IO
B17, B25, N6, Y4
spi3_d0
SPI3 Data. Can be configured as either MISO or MOSI.
IO
A24, AA2, B16, T4
spi3_cs0
SPI3 Chip Select
IO
AA3, B18, D23, T5
spi3_cs1
SPI3 Chip Select
IO
A19, W2
SPI4 Clock
IO
AC3, E8, K4, P4, Y3
spi4_d1
SPI4 Data. Can be configured as either MISO or MOSI.
IO
AA1, B8, H1, P3, U6
spi4_d0
SPI4 Data. Can be configured as either MISO or MOSI.
IO
AA4, AA5, C8, J2,
R2
spi4_cs0
SPI4 Chip Select
IO
AB1, AC4, B9, L3,
R1
spi4_cs1
SPI4 Chip Select
IO
G1, N6
spi4_cs2
SPI4 Chip Select
IO
H3, T4
spi4_cs3
SPI4 Chip Select
IO
H4, T5
Serial Peripheral Interface 4
spi4_sclk(1)
(1) This clock signal is implemented as 'pad loopback' inside the device - the output signal is looped back through the input buffer to serve
as the internal reference signal. Series termination is recommended (as close to device pin as possible) to improve signal integrity of the
clock input. Any nonmonotonicity in voltage that occurs at the pad loopback clock pin between VIH and VIL must be less than VHYS.
4.3.12 QSPI
NOTE
For more information about UART booting, see the Initialization / Device Initialization by
ROM Code / Memory Booting / SPI/QSPI Flash Devices section of the Device TRM.
Table 4-13. QSPI Signal Descriptions
SIGNAL NAME
78
DESCRIPTION
TYPE
BALL
qspi1_sclk
QSPI1 Serial Clock
IO
F2
qspi1_rtclk
QSPI1 Return Clock Input. Must be connected from QSPI1_SCLK on PCB. Refer
to PCB Guidelines for QSPI1
I
H3
qspi1_d0
QSPI1 Data[0]. This pin is output data for all commands/writes and for dual read
and quad read modes it becomes input data pin during read phase.
IO
K5
qspi1_d1
QSPI1 Data[1]. Input read data in all modes.
IO
G2
qspi1_d2
QSPI1 Data[2]. This pin is used only in quad read mode as input data pin during
read phase
IO
K6
qspi1_d3
QSPI1 Data[3]. This pin is used only in quad read mode as input data pin during
read phase
IO
H4
qspi1_cs0
QSPI1 Chip Select[0]. This pin is Used for QSPI1 boot modes.
IO
G4
qspi1_cs1
QSPI1 Chip Select[1]
O
G3
qspi1_cs2
QSPI1 Chip Select[2]
O
L1
qspi1_cs3
QSPI1 Chip Select[3]
O
K3
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
4.3.13 McASP
NOTE
For more information, see the Serial Communication Interface / Multichannel Audio Serial
Port (McASP) section of the Device TRM.
Table 4-14. MCASP Signal Descriptions
SIGNAL NAME
DESCRIPTION
TYPE
BALL
D14
Multichannel Audio Serial Port 1
mcasp1_axr0
McASP1 Transmit/Receive Data
IO
mcasp1_axr1
McASP1 Transmit/Receive Data
IO
B14
mcasp1_axr2
McASP1 Transmit/Receive Data
IO
C14
mcasp1_axr3
McASP1 Transmit/Receive Data
IO
B15
mcasp1_axr4
McASP1 Transmit/Receive Data
IO
A15, J25
mcasp1_axr5
McASP1 Transmit/Receive Data
IO
A14, J24
mcasp1_axr6
McASP1 Transmit/Receive Data
IO
A17, H24
mcasp1_axr7
McASP1 Transmit/Receive Data
IO
A16, H25
mcasp1_axr8
McASP1 Transmit/Receive Data
IO
A18, H21
mcasp1_axr9
McASP1 Transmit/Receive Data
IO
B17, K22
mcasp1_axr10
McASP1 Transmit/Receive Data
IO
B16, K23
mcasp1_axr11
McASP1 Transmit/Receive Data
IO
B18
mcasp1_axr12
McASP1 Transmit/Receive Data
IO
A19
mcasp1_axr13
McASP1 Transmit/Receive Data
IO
E17
mcasp1_axr14
McASP1 Transmit/Receive Data
IO
E16
mcasp1_axr15
McASP1 Transmit/Receive Data
IO
F16
mcasp1_fsx
McASP1 Transmit Frame Sync
IO
C17
McASP1 Receive Bit Clock
IO
D16
McASP1 Receive Frame Sync
IO
D17
mcasp1_aclkr(1)
mcasp1_fsr
mcasp1_ahclkx
McASP1 Transmit High-Frequency Master Clock
O
J25
mcasp1_aclkx(1)
McASP1 Transmit Bit Clock
IO
C16
Multichannel Audio Serial Port 2
mcasp2_axr0
McASP2 Transmit/Receive Data
IO
A20
mcasp2_axr1
McASP2 Transmit/Receive Data
IO
B19
mcasp2_axr2
McASP2 Transmit/Receive Data
IO
A21
mcasp2_axr3
McASP2 Transmit/Receive Data
IO
B21
mcasp2_axr4
McASP2 Transmit/Receive Data
IO
B20
mcasp2_axr5
McASP2 Transmit/Receive Data
IO
C19
mcasp2_axr6
McASP2 Transmit/Receive Data
IO
D20
mcasp2_axr7
McASP2 Transmit/Receive Data
IO
C20
mcasp2_axr8
McASP2 Transmit/Receive Data
IO
J25
mcasp2_axr9
McASP2 Transmit/Receive Data
IO
J24
mcasp2_axr10
McASP2 Transmit/Receive Data
IO
H24
mcasp2_axr11
McASP2 Transmit/Receive Data
IO
H25
mcasp2_axr12
McASP2 Transmit/Receive Data
IO
A22
mcasp2_axr13
McASP2 Transmit/Receive Data
IO
A23
mcasp2_axr14
McASP2 Transmit/Receive Data
IO
B22
mcasp2_axr15
McASP2 Transmit/Receive Data
IO
B23
mcasp2_fsx
McASP2 Transmit Frame Sync
IO
D19
McASP2 Transmit High-Frequency Master Clock
O
J24
mcasp2_ahclkx
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
79
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 4-14. MCASP Signal Descriptions (continued)
SIGNAL NAME
DESCRIPTION
mcasp2_aclkx(1)
McASP2 Transmit Bit Clock
TYPE
BALL
IO
E19
Multichannel Audio Serial Port 3
mcasp3_axr0
McASP3 Transmit/Receive Data
IO
B22
mcasp3_axr1
McASP3 Transmit/Receive Data
IO
B23
mcasp3_axr2
McASP3 Transmit/Receive Data
IO
A21
mcasp3_axr3
McASP3 Transmit/Receive Data
IO
B21
mcasp3_fsx
McASP3 Transmit Frame Sync
IO
A23
mcasp3_ahclkx
McASP3 Transmit High-Frequency Master Clock
O
H24
mcasp3_aclkx(1)
McASP3 Transmit Bit Clock
IO
A22
mcasp3_aclkr(1)
McASP3 Receive Bit Clock
IO
A22
McASP3 Receive Frame Sync
IO
A23
mcasp3_fsr
Multichannel Audio Serial Port 4
mcasp4_axr0
McASP4 Transmit/Receive Data
IO
A24
mcasp4_axr1
McASP4 Transmit/Receive Data
IO
D23
mcasp4_axr2
McASP4 Transmit/Receive Data
IO
A15
mcasp4_axr3
McASP4 Transmit/Receive Data
IO
A14
mcasp4_fsx
McASP4 Transmit Frame Sync
IO
B25
mcasp4_ahclkx
McASP4 Transmit High-Frequency Master Clock
O
H25
mcasp4_aclkx(1)
McASP4 Transmit Bit Clock
IO
C23
mcasp4_aclkr(1)
McASP4 Receive Bit Clock
IO
C23
McASP4 Receive Frame Sync
IO
B25
mcasp4_fsr
Multichannel Audio Serial Port 5
mcasp5_axr0
McASP5 Transmit/Receive Data
IO
AA5
mcasp5_axr1
McASP5 Transmit/Receive Data
IO
AC4
mcasp5_axr2
McASP5 Transmit/Receive Data
IO
A17
mcasp5_axr3
McASP5 Transmit/Receive Data
IO
A16
mcasp5_fsx
McASP5 Transmit Frame Sync
IO
U6
mcasp5_ahclkx
McASP5 Transmit High-Frequency Master Clock
O
J25
mcasp5_aclkx(1)
McASP5 Transmit Bit Clock
IO
AC3
mcasp5_aclkr(1)
McASP5 Receive Bit Clock
IO
AC3
McASP5 Receive Frame Sync
IO
U6
mcasp5_fsr
Multichannel Audio Serial Port 6
mcasp6_axr0
McASP6 Transmit/Receive Data
IO
A18
mcasp6_axr1
McASP6 Transmit/Receive Data
IO
B17
mcasp6_axr2
McASP6 Transmit/Receive Data
IO
C14
mcasp6_axr3
McASP6 Transmit/Receive Data
IO
B15
McASP6 Transmit High-Frequency Master Clock
O
J24
McASP6 Transmit Bit Clock
IO
B16
McASP6 Transmit Frame Sync
IO
B18
McASP6 Receive Bit Clock
IO
B16
McASP6 Receive Frame Sync
IO
B18
mcasp6_ahclkx
(1)
mcasp6_aclkx
mcasp6_fsx
mcasp6_aclkr(1)
mcasp6_fsr
Multichannel Audio Serial Port 7
80
mcasp7_aclkr(1)
McASP7 Receive Bit Clock
IO
E16
mcasp7_aclkx(1)
McASP7 Transmit Bit Clock
IO
E16
mcasp7_ahclkx
McASP7 Transmit High-Frequency Master Clock
O
H24
mcasp7_axr0
McASP7 Transmit/Receive Data
IO
A19
mcasp7_axr1
McASP7 Transmit/Receive Data
IO
E17
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 4-14. MCASP Signal Descriptions (continued)
SIGNAL NAME
TYPE
BALL
mcasp7_axr2
DESCRIPTION
McASP7 Transmit/Receive Data
IO
D16
mcasp7_axr3
McASP7 Transmit/Receive Data
IO
D17
mcasp7_fsr
McASP7 Receive Frame Sync
IO
F16
mcasp7_fsx
McASP7 Transmit Frame Sync
IO
F16
Multichannel Audio Serial Port 8
mcasp8_aclkr(1)
McASP8 Receive Bit Clock
IO
D20
mcasp8_aclkx(1)
McASP8 Transmit Bit Clock
IO
D20
mcasp8_ahclkx
H25
McASP8 Transmit High-Frequency Master Clock
O
mcasp8_axr0
McASP8 Transmit/Receive Data
IO
B20
mcasp8_axr1
McASP8 Transmit/Receive Data
IO
C19
mcasp8_fsr
McASP8 Receive Frame Sync
IO
C20
mcasp8_fsx
McASP8 Transmit Frame Sync
IO
C20
(1) This clock signal is implemented as 'pad loopback' inside the device - the output signal is looped back through the input buffer to serve
as the internal reference signal. Series termination is recommended (as close to device pin as possible) to improve signal integrity of the
clock input. Any nonmonotonicity in voltage that occurs at the pad loopback clock pin between VIH and VIL must be less than VHYS.
4.3.14 USB
NOTE
For more information, see: Serial Communication Interface / SuperSpeed USB DRD
Subsystem section of the Device TRM.
Table 4-15. Universal Serial Bus Signal Descriptions
SIGNAL NAME
DESCRIPTION
TYPE
BALL
usb1_dm
USB1 USB2.0 differential signal pair (negative)
IODS
AB7
usb1_dp
USB1 USB2.0 differential signal pair (positive)
IODS
AC6
O
AD3
Universal Serial Bus 1
usb1_drvvbus
USB1 Drive VBUS signal
usb_rxn0(1)
USB1 USB3.0 receiver negative lane
IDS
AE5
usb_rxp0(1)
USB1 USB3.0 receiver positive lane
IDS
AD6
usb_txn0(1)
USB1 USB3.0 transmitter negative lane
ODS
AE3
USB1 USB3.0 transmitter positive lane
ODS
AD4
usb_txp0
(1)
Universal Serial Bus 2
usb2_dm
USB2 USB2.0 differential signal pair (negative)
IO
AC5
usb2_dp
USB2 USB2.0 differential signal pair (positive)
IO
AB6
USB2 Drive VBUS signal
O
AA6
usb2_drvvbus
(1) Signals are enabled by selecting the correct field in the PCIE_B1C0_MODE_SEL register. There are no CTRL_CORE_PAD* register
involved.
4.3.15 PCIe
NOTE
For more information, see the Serial Communication Interfaces / PCIe Controllers and the
Shared PHY Component Subsystems / PCIe Shared PHY Subsystem sections of the Device
TRM.
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
81
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 4-16. PCIe Signal Descriptions
SIGNAL NAME
DESCRIPTION
TYPE
BALL
pcie_rxn0
PCIe1_PHY_RX Receive Data Lane 0 (negative) - mapped to PCIe_SS1 only.
IDS
AE6
pcie_rxp0
PCIe1_PHY_RX Receive Data Lane 0 (positive) - mapped to PCIe_SS1 only.
IDS
AD7
pcie_txn0
PCIe1_PHY_TX Transmit Data Lane 0 (negative) - mapped to PCIe_SS1 only.
ODS
AE8
pcie_txp0
PCIe1_PHY_TX Transmit Data Lane 0 (positive) - mapped to PCIe_SS1 only.
ODS
AD9
pcie_rxn1
PCIe2_PHY_RX Receive Data Lane 1 (negative) - mapped to either PCIe_SS1
(dual lane- mode) or PCIe_SS2 (single lane- mode)
IDS
AE5
pcie_rxp1
PCIe2_PHY_RX Receive Data Lane 1 (positive) - mapped to either PCIe_SS1
(dual lane- mode) or PCIe_SS2 (single lane- mode)
IDS
AD6
pcie_txn1
PCIe2_PHY_TX Transmit Data Lane 1 (negative) - mapped to either PCIe_SS1
(dual lane- mode) or PCIe_SS2 (single lane- mode)
ODS
AE3
pcie_txp1
PCIe2_PHY_TX Transmit Data Lane 1 (positive) - mapped to either PCIe_SS1
(dual lane- mode) or PCIe_SS2 (single lane- mode)
ODS
AD4
ljcb_clkn
PCIe1_PHY shared Reference Clock Input / Output Differential Pair (negative)
IODS
AB9
ljcb_clkp
PCIe1_PHY shared Reference Clock Input / Output Differential Pair (positive)
IODS
AC8
4.3.16 DCAN
NOTE
For more information, see the Serial Communication Interface / DCAN section of the Device
TRM.
Table 4-17. DCAN Signal Descriptions
SIGNAL NAME
DESCRIPTION
TYPE
BALL
DCAN 1
dcan1_rx
DCAN1 receive data pin
IO
H23, AC10
dcan1_tx
DCAN1 transmit data pin
IO
H22
dcan2_rx
DCAN2 receive data pin
IO
E25, K22, AB10
dcan2_tx
DCAN2 transmit data pin
IO
E24, H21
DCAN 2
4.3.17 GMAC_SW
NOTE
For more information, see the Serial Communication Interfaces / Ethernet Controller section
of the Device TRM.
Table 4-18. GMAC Signal Descriptions
SIGNAL NAME
82
TYPE
BALL
rgmii0_rxc
DESCRIPTION
RGMII0 Receive Clock
I
N2
rgmii0_rxctl
RGMII0 Receive Control
I
P2
rgmii0_rxd0
RGMII0 Receive Data
I
N4
rgmii0_rxd1
RGMII0 Receive Data
I
N3
rgmii0_rxd2
RGMII0 Receive Data
I
P1
rgmii0_rxd3
RGMII0 Receive Data
I
N1
rgmii0_txc
RGMII0 Transmit Clock
O
T4
rgmii0_txctl
RGMII0 Transmit Enable
O
T5
rgmii0_txd0
RGMII0 Transmit Data
O
R1
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 4-18. GMAC Signal Descriptions (continued)
SIGNAL NAME
TYPE
BALL
rgmii0_txd1
DESCRIPTION
RGMII0 Transmit Data
O
R2
rgmii0_txd2
RGMII0 Transmit Data
O
P3
rgmii0_txd3
RGMII0 Transmit Data
O
P4
rgmii1_rxc
RGMII1 Receive Clock
I
E11
rgmii1_rxctl
RGMII1 Receive Control
I
F11
rgmii1_rxd0
RGMII1 Receive Data
I
D13
rgmii1_rxd1
RGMII1 Receive Data
I
C13
rgmii1_rxd2
RGMII1 Receive Data
I
E13
rgmii1_rxd3
RGMII1 Receive Data
I
B13
rgmii1_txc
RGMII1 Transmit Clock
O
B11
rgmii1_txctl
RGMII1 Transmit Enable
O
D11
rgmii1_txd0
RGMII1 Transmit Data
O
A13
rgmii1_txd1
RGMII1 Transmit Data
O
A12
rgmii1_txd2
RGMII1 Transmit Data
O
B12
rgmii1_txd3
C11
RGMII1 Transmit Data
O
mii1_col
MII1 Collision Detect (Sense)
I
E13
mii1_crs
MII1 Carrier Sense
I
C13
mii1_rxclk
MII1 Receive Clock
I
B11
mii1_rxd0
MII1 Receive Data
I
E10
mii1_rxd1
MII1 Receive Data
I
F10
mii1_rxd2
MII1 Receive Data
I
A10
mii1_rxd3
MII1 Receive Data
I
B10
mii1_rxdv
MII1 Receive Data Valid
I
D11
mii1_rxer
MII1 Receive Data Error
I
B13
mii1_txclk
MII1 Transmit Clock
I
C11
mii1_txd0
MII1 Transmit Data
O
B12
mii1_txd1
MII1 Transmit Data
O
A12
mii1_txd2
MII1 Transmit Data
O
A13
mii1_txd3
MII1 Transmit Data
O
E11
mii1_txen
MII1 Transmit Data Enable
O
D13
mii1_txer
MII1 Transmit Error
O
F11
mii0_col
MII0 Collision Detect (Sense)
I
L5
mii0_crs
MII0 Carrier Sense
I
P4
mii0_rxclk
MII0 Receive Clock
I
N6
mii0_rxd0
MII0 Receive Data
I
R1
mii0_rxd1
MII0 Receive Data
I
R2
mii0_rxd2
MII0 Receive Data
I
T5
mii0_rxd3
MII0 Receive Data
I
T4
mii0_rxdv
MII0 Receive Data Valid
I
N5
mii0_rxer
MII0 Receive Data Error
I
P3
mii0_txclk
MII0 Transmit Clock
I
N2
mii0_txd0
MII0 Transmit Data
O
N4
mii0_txd1
MII0 Transmit Data
O
N3
mii0_txd2
MII0 Transmit Data
O
N1
mii0_txd3
MII0 Transmit Data
O
P2
mii0_txen
MII0 Transmit Data Enable
O
P1
mii0_txer
MII0 Transmit Error
O
L6
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
83
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 4-18. GMAC Signal Descriptions (continued)
SIGNAL NAME
TYPE
BALL
rmii1_crs
DESCRIPTION
RMII1 Carrier Sense
I
N5
rmii1_rxd0
RMII1 Receive Data
I
T5
rmii1_rxd1
RMII1 Receive Data
I
T4
rmii1_rxer
RMII1 Receive Data Error
I
N6
rmii1_txd0
RMII1 Transmit Data
O
N1
rmii1_txd1
RMII1 Transmit Data
O
P2
rmii1_txen
RMII1 Transmit Data Enable
O
N2
rmii0_crs
RMII0 Carrier Sense
I
P4
rmii0_rxd0
RMII0 Receive Data
I
R1
rmii0_rxd1
RMII0 Receive Data
I
R2
rmii0_rxer
RMII0 Receive Data Error
I
P3
rmii0_txd0
RMII0 Transmit Data
O
N4
rmii0_txd1
RMII0 Transmit Data
O
N3
rmii0_txen
RMII0 Transmit Data Enable
O
P1
mdio_mclk
Management Data Serial Clock
O
D10, E24, L5, Y5
Management Data
IO
C10, E25, L6, Y6
mdio_d
4.3.18 MLB
NOTE
Media Local Bus (MLB) is not available on this device, and must be left unconnected.
Table 4-19. MLB Signal Descriptions
SIGNAL NAME
TYPE
BALL
mlbp_clk_n
DESCRIPTION
Media Local Bus (MLB) Subsystem clock differential pair (negative)
IDS
U1
mlbp_clk_p
Media Local Bus (MLB) Subsystem clock differential pair (positive)
IDS
U2
mlbp_dat_n
Media Local Bus (MLB) Subsystem data differential pair (negative)
IODS
T1
mlbp_dat_p
Media Local Bus (MLB) Subsystem data differential pair (positive)
IODS
T2
mlbp_sig_n
Media Local Bus (MLB) Subsystem signal differential pair (negative)
IODS
U4
mlbp_sig_p
Media Local Bus (MLB) Subsystem signal differential pair (positive)
IODS
T3
TYPE
BALL
4.3.19 eMMC/SD/SDIO
NOTE
For more information, see the HS MMC/SDIO section of the Device TRM.
Table 4-20. eMMC/SD/SDIO Signal Descriptions
SIGNAL NAME
DESCRIPTION
Multi Media Card 1
84
mmc1_clk(1)
MMC1 clock
IO
U3
mmc1_cmd
MMC1 command
IO
V4
mmc1_dat0
MMC1 data bit 0
IO
V3
mmc1_dat1
MMC1 data bit 1
IO
V2
mmc1_dat2
MMC1 data bit 2
IO
W1
mmc1_dat3
MMC1 data bit 3
IO
V1
mmc1_sdcd
MMC1 Card Detect
I
U5
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 4-20. eMMC/SD/SDIO Signal Descriptions (continued)
SIGNAL NAME
mmc1_sdwp
DESCRIPTION
MMC1 Write Protect
TYPE
BALL
I
V5
Multi Media Card 2
mmc2_clk(1)
MMC2 clock
IO
B5
mmc2_cmd
MMC2 command
IO
A6
mmc2_dat0
MMC2 data bit 0
IO
D7
mmc2_dat1
MMC2 data bit 1
IO
C6
mmc2_dat2
MMC2 data bit 2
IO
A5
mmc2_dat3
MMC2 data bit 3
IO
B6
mmc2_dat4
MMC2 data bit 4
IO
A4
mmc2_dat5
MMC2 data bit 5
IO
E7
mmc2_dat6
MMC2 data bit 6
IO
D6
mmc2_dat7
MMC2 data bit 7
IO
C5
mmc2_sdcd
MMC2 Card Detect
I
H22
mmc2_sdwp
MMC2 Write Protect
I
H23
Multi Media Card 3
mmc3_clk(1)
MMC3 clock
IO
Y2
mmc3_cmd
MMC3 command
IO
Y1
mmc3_dat0
MMC3 data bit 0
IO
Y4
mmc3_dat1
MMC3 data bit 1
IO
AA2
mmc3_dat2
MMC3 data bit 2
IO
AA3
mmc3_dat3
MMC3 data bit 3
IO
W2
mmc3_dat4
MMC3 data bit 4
IO
Y3
mmc3_dat5
MMC3 data bit 5
IO
AA1
mmc3_dat6
MMC3 data bit 6
IO
AA4
mmc3_dat7
MMC3 data bit 7
IO
AB1
mmc3_sdcd
MMC3 Card Detect
I
E24
mmc3_sdwp
MMC3 Write Protect
I
E25
Multi Media Card 4
mmc4_clk(1)
MMC4 clock
IO
L20
mmc4_cmd
MMC4 command
IO
M24
mmc4_sdcd
MMC4 Card Detect
I
L25
mmc4_sdwp
MMC4 Write Protect
I
M25
mmc4_dat0
MMC4 data bit 0
IO
N23
mmc4_dat1
MMC4 data bit 1
IO
N25
mmc4_dat2
MMC4 data bit 2
IO
N22
mmc4_dat3
MMC4 data bit 3
IO
N24
(1) By default, this clock signal is implemented as 'pad loopback' inside the device - the output signal is looped back through the input buffer
to serve as the internal reference signal. mmc1_clk and mmc2_clk have an optional software programmable setting to use an 'internal
loopback clock' instead of the default 'pad loopback clock'. If the 'pad loopback clock' is used, series termination is recommended (as
close to device pin as possible) to improve signal integrity of the clock input. Any nonmonotonicity in voltage that occurs at the pad
loopback clock pin between VIH and VIL must be less than VHYS.
4.3.20 GPIO
NOTE
For more information, see the General-Purpose Interface section of the Device TRM.
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
85
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 4-21. GPIOs Signal Descriptions
SIGNAL NAME
DESCRIPTION
TYPE
BALL
GPIO 1
gpio1_0
General-Purpose Input
I
AC10
gpio1_3
General-Purpose Input
I
AB10
gpio1_4
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
B20
gpio1_5
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
C20
gpio1_6
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
F1
gpio1_7
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
E2
gpio1_8
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
E1
gpio1_9
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
C1
gpio1_10
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
D1
gpio1_11
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
D2
gpio1_12
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
B1
gpio1_13
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
B2
gpio1_14
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
H22
gpio1_15
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
H23
gpio1_16
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
N22
gpio1_17
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
N24
gpio1_18
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
C3
gpio1_19
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
C4
gpio1_20
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
A3
gpio1_21
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
B4
gpio1_22
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
Y3
gpio1_23
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
AA1
gpio1_24
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
AA4
gpio1_25
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
AB1
gpio1_26
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
K3
gpio1_27
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
K2
gpio1_28
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
J1
gpio1_29
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
K1
gpio1_30
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
K4
gpio1_31
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
H1
gpio2_0
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
J2
gpio2_1
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
L3
gpio2_2
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
G1
gpio2_3
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
H3
gpio2_4
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
H4
gpio2_5
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
K6
gpio2_6
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
K5
gpio2_7
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
G2
gpio2_8
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
F2
gpio2_9
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
A4
gpio2_10
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
E7
gpio2_11
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
D6
gpio2_12
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
C5
gpio2_13
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
B5
gpio2_14
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
D7
GPIO2
86
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 4-21. GPIOs Signal Descriptions (continued)
SIGNAL NAME
TYPE
BALL
gpio2_15
DESCRIPTION
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
C6
gpio2_16
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
A5
gpio2_17
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
B6
gpio2_18
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
A6
gpio2_19
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
F3
gpio2_20
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
G4
gpio2_21
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
G3
gpio2_22
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
L4
gpio2_23
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
H5
gpio2_24
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
G5
gpio2_25
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
G6
gpio2_26
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
H2
gpio2_27
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
H6
gpio2_28
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
F6
gpio2_29
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
D20
gpio3_28
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
D8
gpio3_29
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
B7
gpio3_30
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
C7
gpio3_31
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
E8
gpio4_0
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
B8
gpio4_1
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
C8
gpio4_2
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
B9
gpio4_3
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
A7
gpio4_4
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
A9
gpio4_5
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
A8
gpio4_6
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
A11
gpio4_7
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
F10
gpio4_8
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
A10
gpio4_9
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
B10
gpio4_10
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
E10
gpio4_11
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
D10
gpio4_12
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
C10
gpio4_13
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
B11
gpio4_14
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
D11
gpio4_15
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
C11
gpio4_16
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
B12
gpio4_17
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
B18
gpio4_18
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
A19
gpio4_24
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
A12
gpio4_25
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
A13
gpio4_26
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
E11
gpio4_27
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
F11
gpio4_28
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
B13
gpio4_29
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
E13
gpio4_30
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
C13
GPIO 3
GPIO 4
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
87
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 4-21. GPIOs Signal Descriptions (continued)
SIGNAL NAME
TYPE
BALL
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
D13
gpio5_0
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
D16
gpio5_1
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
D17
gpio5_2
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
D14
gpio5_3
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
B14
gpio5_4
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
C14
gpio5_5
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
B15
gpio5_6
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
A15
gpio5_7
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
A14
gpio5_8
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
A17
gpio4_31
DESCRIPTION
GPIO 5
gpio5_9
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
A16
gpio5_10
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
A18
gpio5_11
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
B17
gpio5_12
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
B16
gpio5_13
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
A22
gpio5_14
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
A23
gpio5_15
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
L5
gpio5_16
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
L6
gpio5_17
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
P5
gpio5_18
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
N5
gpio5_19
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
N6
gpio5_20
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
T4
gpio5_21
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
T5
gpio5_22
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
P4
gpio5_23
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
P3
gpio5_24
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
R2
gpio5_25
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
R1
gpio5_26
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
N2
gpio5_27
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
P2
gpio5_28
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
N1
gpio5_29
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
P1
gpio5_30
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
N3
gpio5_31
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
N4
gpio6_4
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
E17
gpio6_5
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
E16
gpio6_6
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
F16
gpio6_7
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
C19
gpio6_8
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
A21
gpio6_9
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
B21
gpio6_10
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
Y5
gpio6_11
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
Y6
gpio6_12
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
AD3
gpio6_13
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
AA6
gpio6_14
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
H21
gpio6_15
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
K22
GPIO 6
88
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 4-21. GPIOs Signal Descriptions (continued)
SIGNAL NAME
TYPE
BALL
gpio6_16
DESCRIPTION
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
K23
gpio6_17
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
J25
gpio6_18
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
J24
gpio6_19
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
H24
gpio6_20
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
H25
gpio6_21
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
U3
gpio6_22
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
V4
gpio6_23
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
V3
gpio6_24
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
V2
gpio6_25
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
W1
gpio6_26
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
V1
gpio6_27
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
U5
gpio6_28
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
V5
gpio6_29
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
Y2
gpio6_30
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
Y1
gpio6_31
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
Y4
gpio7_0
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
AA2
gpio7_1
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
AA3
gpio7_2
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
W2
gpio7_3
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
M1
gpio7_4
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
M2
gpio7_5
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
L2
gpio7_6
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
L1
gpio7_7
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
C24
gpio7_8
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
D24
gpio7_9
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
D25
gpio7_10
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
B24
gpio7_11
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
C25
gpio7_12
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
E24
gpio7_13
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
E25
gpio7_14
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
G25
gpio7_15
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
F25
gpio7_16
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
G24
gpio7_17
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
F24
gpio7_18
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
C2
gpio7_19
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
D3
gpio7_22
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
L25
gpio7_23
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
M25
gpio7_24
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
L20
gpio7_25
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
M24
gpio7_26
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
N23
gpio7_27
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
N25
gpio7_28
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
A2
gpio7_29
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
B3
gpio7_30
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
C17
gpio7_31
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
C16
GPIO 7
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
89
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 4-21. GPIOs Signal Descriptions (continued)
SIGNAL NAME
DESCRIPTION
TYPE
BALL
I
L23
GPIO 8
gpio8_27
General-Purpose Input
gpio8_28
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
J20
gpio8_29
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
K25
gpio8_30(1)
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
C21
gpio8_31(1)
General-Purpose Input/Output
IO
C22
(1) gpio8_30 is multiplexed with EMU0 and gpio8_31 is multiplexed with EMU1. These pins will be sampled at reset release by the test and
emulation logic. Therefore, if they are used as GPIO pins, they must return to the high state whenever the device enters reset. This can
be controlled by logic driven from rstoutn. After the device exits reset (indicated by rstoutn rising), these can return to GPIO mode.
4.3.21 KBD
NOTE
For more information, see Keyboard Controller section of the Device TRM.
Table 4-22. Keyboard Signal Descriptions
SIGNAL NAME
TYPE
BALL
kbd_row0
DESCRIPTION
Keypad row 0
I
D8
kbd_row1
Keypad row 1
I
B7
kbd_row2
Keypad row 2
I
E8
kbd_row3
Keypad row 3
I
B8
kbd_row4
Keypad row 4
I
C8
kbd_row5
Keypad row 5
I
B9
kbd_row6
Keypad row 6
I
A7
kbd_row7
Keypad row 7
I
C10
kbd_row8
Keypad row 8
I
D11
kbd_col0
Keypad column 0
O
A9
kbd_col1
Keypad column 1
O
A8
kbd_col2
Keypad column 2
O
A11
kbd_col3
Keypad column 3
O
F10
kbd_col4
Keypad column 4
O
A10
kbd_col5
Keypad column 5
O
B10
kbd_col6
Keypad column 6
O
E10
kbd_col7
Keypad column 7
O
D10
kbd_col8
Keypad column 8
O
B11
4.3.22 PWM
NOTE
For more information, see the Pulse-Width Modulation (PWM) SS section of the Device
TRM.
Table 4-23. PWM Signal Descriptions
SIGNAL NAME
DESCRIPTION
TYPE
BALL
IO
A7
PWMSS1
eCAP1_in_PWM1_out ECAP1 Capture Input / PWM Output
90
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 4-23. PWM Signal Descriptions (continued)
SIGNAL NAME
DESCRIPTION
ehrpwm1_synci
EHRPWM1 Sync Input
TYPE
BALL
I
A9
ehrpwm1_synco
EHRPWM1 Sync Output
O
A8
EHRPWM1 Trip Zone Input
IO
B9
ehrpwm1A
EHRPWM1 Output A
O
B8
ehrpwm1B
EHRPWM1 Output B
O
C8
eQEP1_index
EQEP1 Index Input
IO
C7
eQEP1_strobe
EQEP1 Strobe Input
IO
E8
ehrpwm1_tripzone_in
put
eQEP1A_in
EQEP1 Quadrature Input A
I
D8
eQEP1B_in
EQEP1 Quadrature Input B
I
B7
PWMSS2
eCAP2_in_PWM2_out ECAP2 Capture Input / PWM Output
IO
B11, Y1
ehrpwm2_tripzone_in
put
EHRPWM2 Trip Zone Input
IO
C10, Y2
ehrpwm2A
EHRPWM2 Output A
O
E10, Y5
ehrpwm2B
EHRPWM2 Output B
O
D10, Y6
eQEP2_index
EQEP2 Index Input
IO
A10
eQEP2_strobe
EQEP2 Strobe Input
IO
B10
eQEP2A_in
EQEP2 Quadrature Input A
I
A11
eQEP2B_in
EQEP2 Quadrature Input B
I
F10
eCAP3_in_PWM3_out ECAP3 Capture Input / PWM Output
IO
AB1, B13
ehrpwm3_tripzone_in
put
EHRPWM3 Trip Zone Input
IO
AA4, F11
ehrpwm3A
EHRPWM3 Output A
O
A13, Y3
ehrpwm3B
PWMSS3
EHRPWM3 Output B
O
AA1, E11
eQEP3_index
EQEP3 Index Input
IO
AA3, B12
eQEP3_strobe
EQEP3 Strobe Input
IO
A12, W2
eQEP3A_in
EQEP3 Quadrature Input A
I
D11, Y4
eQEP3B_in
EQEP3 Quadrature Input B
I
AA2, C11
4.3.23 PRU-ICSS
NOTE
For more information, see the Programmable Real-Time Unit Subsystem and Industrial
Communication Subsystem section of the Device TRM.
Table 4-24. PRU-ICSS Signal Descriptions
SIGNAL NAME
DESCRIPTION
TYPE
BALL
pr1_ecap0_ecap_capin Capture Input / PWM output
_apwm_o
IO
A7
pr1_edc_sync0_out
SYNC 0 Output
O
A8
pr1_edio_data_in0
Ethernet Digital Input
I
D8
pr1_edio_data_in1
Ethernet Digital Input
I
B7
pr1_edio_data_in2
Ethernet Digital Input
I
C7
pr1_edio_data_in3
Ethernet Digital Input
I
E8
pr1_edio_data_in4
Ethernet Digital Input
I
B8
PRU-ICSS1
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
91
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 4-24. PRU-ICSS Signal Descriptions (continued)
TYPE
BALL
pr1_edio_data_in5
SIGNAL NAME
Ethernet Digital Input
I
C8
pr1_edio_data_in6
Ethernet Digital Input
I
B9
pr1_edio_data_in7
Ethernet Digital Input
I
A7
pr1_edio_data_out0
Ethernet Digital Output
O
D8
pr1_edio_data_out1
Ethernet Digital Output
O
B7
pr1_edio_data_out2
Ethernet Digital Output
O
C7
pr1_edio_data_out3
Ethernet Digital Output
O
E8
pr1_edio_data_out4
Ethernet Digital Output
O
B8
pr1_edio_data_out5
Ethernet Digital Output
O
C8
pr1_edio_data_out6
Ethernet Digital Output
O
B9
pr1_edio_data_out7
Ethernet Digital Output
O
A7
pr1_edio_sof
Start Of Frame
O
A11
pr1_mdio_data
MDIO Data
IO
C10
pr1_mdio_mdclk
MDIO Clock
O
D10
pr1_edc_latch0_in
Latch Input 0
I
A9
pr1_mii0_col
MII0 Collision Detect
I
L5
pr1_mii0_crs
MII0 Carrier Sense
I
P4
pr1_mii0_rxd0
MII0 Receive Data
I
R1
pr1_mii0_rxd1
MII0 Receive Data
I
R2
pr1_mii0_rxd2
MII0 Receive Data
I
T5
pr1_mii0_rxd3
MII0 Receive Data
I
T4
pr1_mii0_rxdv
MII0 Data Valid
I
N5
pr1_mii0_rxer
MII0 Receive Error
I
P3
pr1_mii0_rxlink
MII0 Receive Link
I
L6
pr1_mii0_txd0
MII0 Transmit Data
O
N4
pr1_mii0_txd1
MII0 Transmit Data
O
N3
pr1_mii0_txd2
MII0 Transmit Data
O
N1
pr1_mii0_txd3
MII0 Transmit Data
O
P2
pr1_mii0_txen
MII0 Transmit Enable
O
P1
pr1_mii1_col
MII1 Collision Detect
I
C13
pr1_mii1_crs
MII1 Carrier Sense
I
D13
pr1_mii1_rxd0
MII1 Receive Data
I
F11
pr1_mii1_rxd1
MII1 Receive Data
I
E11
pr1_mii1_rxd2
MII1 Receive Data
I
A13
pr1_mii1_rxd3
MII1 Receive Data
I
A12
pr1_mii1_rxdv
MII1 Data Valid
I
B12
pr1_mii1_rxer
MII1 Receive Error
I
B13
pr1_mii1_rxlink
MII1 Receive Link
I
E13
pr1_mii1_txd0
MII1 Transmit Data
O
D11
pr1_mii1_txd1
MII1 Transmit Data
O
B11
pr1_mii1_txd2
MII1 Transmit Data
O
E10
pr1_mii1_txd3
MII1 Transmit Data
O
B10
pr1_mii1_txen
MII1 Transmit Enable
O
A10
pr1_mii_mr0_clk
MII0 Master Receive Clock
I
N6
pr1_mii_mr1_clk
MII1 Master Receive Clock
I
C11
pr1_mii_mt0_clk
MII0 Master Transmit Clock
I
N2
pr1_mii_mt1_clk
MII1 Master Transmit Clock
I
F10
92
DESCRIPTION
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 4-24. PRU-ICSS Signal Descriptions (continued)
TYPE
BALL
pr1_pru1_gpi0
SIGNAL NAME
PRU1 General-Purpose Input
DESCRIPTION
I
A9
pr1_pru1_gpi1
PRU1 General-Purpose Input
I
A8
pr1_pru1_gpi2
PRU1 General-Purpose Input
I
A11
pr1_pru1_gpi3
PRU1 General-Purpose Input
I
F10
pr1_pru1_gpi4
PRU1 General-Purpose Input
I
A10
pr1_pru1_gpi5
PRU1 General-Purpose Input
I
B10
pr1_pru1_gpi6
PRU1 General-Purpose Input
I
E10
pr1_pru1_gpi7
PRU1 General-Purpose Input
I
D10
pr1_pru1_gpi8
PRU1 General-Purpose Input
I
C10
pr1_pru1_gpi9
PRU1 General-Purpose Input
I
B11
pr1_pru1_gpi10
PRU1 General-Purpose Input
I
D11
pr1_pru1_gpi11
PRU1 General-Purpose Input
I
C11
pr1_pru1_gpi12
PRU1 General-Purpose Input
I
B12
pr1_pru1_gpi13
PRU1 General-Purpose Input
I
A12
pr1_pru1_gpi14
PRU1 General-Purpose Input
I
A13
pr1_pru1_gpi15
PRU1 General-Purpose Input
I
E11
pr1_pru1_gpi16
PRU1 General-Purpose Input
I
F11
pr1_pru1_gpi17
PRU1 General-Purpose Input
I
B13
pr1_pru1_gpi18
PRU1 General-Purpose Input
I
E13
pr1_pru1_gpi19
PRU1 General-Purpose Input
I
C13
pr1_pru1_gpi20
PRU1 General-Purpose Input
I
D13
pr1_pru1_gpo0
PRU1 General-Purpose Output
O
A9
pr1_pru1_gpo1
PRU1 General-Purpose Output
O
A8
pr1_pru1_gpo2
PRU1 General-Purpose Output
O
A11
pr1_pru1_gpo3
PRU1 General-Purpose Output
O
F10
pr1_pru1_gpo4
PRU1 General-Purpose Output
O
A10
pr1_pru1_gpo5
PRU1 General-Purpose Output
O
B10
pr1_pru1_gpo6
PRU1 General-Purpose Output
O
E10
pr1_pru1_gpo7
PRU1 General-Purpose Output
O
D10
pr1_pru1_gpo8
PRU1 General-Purpose Output
O
C10
pr1_pru1_gpo9
PRU1 General-Purpose Output
O
B11
pr1_pru1_gpo10
PRU1 General-Purpose Output
O
D11
pr1_pru1_gpo11
PRU1 General-Purpose Output
O
C11
pr1_pru1_gpo12
PRU1 General-Purpose Output
O
B12
pr1_pru1_gpo13
PRU1 General-Purpose Output
O
A12
pr1_pru1_gpo14
PRU1 General-Purpose Output
O
A13
pr1_pru1_gpo15
PRU1 General-Purpose Output
O
E11
pr1_pru1_gpo16
PRU1 General-Purpose Output
O
F11
pr1_pru1_gpo17
PRU1 General-Purpose Output
O
B13
pr1_pru1_gpo18
PRU1 General-Purpose Output
O
E13
pr1_pru1_gpo19
PRU1 General-Purpose Output
O
C13
pr1_pru1_gpo20
PRU1 General-Purpose Output
O
D13
pr1_uart0_cts_n
UART Clear-To-Send
I
E8
pr1_uart0_rts_n
UART Ready-To-Send
O
B8
pr1_uart0_rxd
UART Receive Data
I
C8
pr1_uart0_txd
UART Transmit Data
O
B9
PRU-ICSS 2
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
93
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 4-24. PRU-ICSS Signal Descriptions (continued)
TYPE
BALL
pr2_mdio_data
SIGNAL NAME
MDIO Data
IO
AC4, C17
pr2_mdio_mdclk
MDIO Clock
O
AA5, C16
pr2_mii0_col
MII0 Collision Detect
I
A23
pr2_mii0_crs
MII0 Carrier Sense
I
A22
pr2_mii0_rxd0
MII0 Receive Data
I
A21
pr2_mii0_rxd1
MII0 Receive Data
I
D19
pr2_mii0_rxd2
MII0 Receive Data
I
E19
pr2_mii0_rxd3
MII0 Receive Data
I
F16
pr2_mii0_rxdv
MII0 Data Valid
I
E16
pr2_mii0_rxer
MII0 Receive Error
I
D14
pr2_mii0_rxlink
MII0 Receive Link
I
B21
pr2_mii0_txd0
MII0 Transmit Data
O
A19
pr2_mii0_txd1
MII0 Transmit Data
O
B18
pr2_mii0_txd2
MII0 Transmit Data
O
B16
pr2_mii0_txd3
MII0 Transmit Data
O
B17
pr2_mii0_txen
MII0 Transmit Enable
O
A18
pr2_mii1_col
MII1 Collision Detect
I
J25
pr2_mii1_crs
MII1 Carrier Sense
I
J24
pr2_mii1_rxd0
MII1 Receive Data
I
AB1
pr2_mii1_rxd1
MII1 Receive Data
I
AA4
pr2_mii1_rxd2
MII1 Receive Data
I
AA1
pr2_mii1_rxd3
MII1 Receive Data
I
Y3
pr2_mii1_rxdv
MII1 Data Valid
I
W2
pr2_mii1_rxer
MII1 Receive Error
I
B22
pr2_mii1_rxlink
MII1 Receive Link
I
B23
pr2_mii1_txd0
MII1 Transmit Data
O
AA2
pr2_mii1_txd1
MII1 Transmit Data
O
Y4
pr2_mii1_txd2
MII1 Transmit Data
O
Y1
pr2_mii1_txd3
MII1 Transmit Data
O
Y2
pr2_mii1_txen
MII1 Transmit Enable
O
Y6
pr2_mii_mr0_clk
MII0 Master Receive Clock
I
E17
pr2_mii_mr1_clk
MII1 Master Receive Clock
I
AA3
pr2_mii_mt0_clk
MII0 Master Transmit Clock
I
B14
pr2_mii_mt1_clk
MII1 Master Transmit Clock
I
Y5
pr2_pru0_gpi0
PRU0 General-Purpose Input
I
Y5
pr2_pru0_gpi1
PRU0 General-Purpose Input
I
Y6
pr2_pru0_gpi2
PRU0 General-Purpose Input
I
Y2
pr2_pru0_gpi3
PRU0 General-Purpose Input
I
Y1
pr2_pru0_gpi4
PRU0 General-Purpose Input
I
Y4
pr2_pru0_gpi5
PRU0 General-Purpose Input
I
AA2
pr2_pru0_gpi6
PRU0 General-Purpose Input
I
AA3
pr2_pru0_gpi7
PRU0 General-Purpose Input
I
W2
pr2_pru0_gpi8
PRU0 General-Purpose Input
I
Y3
pr2_pru0_gpi9
PRU0 General-Purpose Input
I
AA1
pr2_pru0_gpi10
PRU0 General-Purpose Input
I
AA4
pr2_pru0_gpi11
PRU0 General-Purpose Input
I
AB1
pr2_pru0_gpi12
PRU0 General-Purpose Input
I
A22
94
DESCRIPTION
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 4-24. PRU-ICSS Signal Descriptions (continued)
TYPE
BALL
pr2_pru0_gpi13
SIGNAL NAME
PRU0 General-Purpose Input
DESCRIPTION
I
A23
pr2_pru0_gpi14
PRU0 General-Purpose Input
I
B22
pr2_pru0_gpi15
PRU0 General-Purpose Input
I
B23
pr2_pru0_gpi16
PRU0 General-Purpose Input
I
A21
pr2_pru0_gpi17
PRU0 General-Purpose Input
I
B21
pr2_pru0_gpi18
PRU0 General-Purpose Input
I
E19
pr2_pru0_gpi19
PRU0 General-Purpose Input
I
D19
pr2_pru0_gpi20
PRU0 General-Purpose Input
I
F16
pr2_pru0_gpo0
PRU0 General-Purpose Output
O
Y5
pr2_pru0_gpo1
PRU0 General-Purpose Output
O
Y6
pr2_pru0_gpo2
PRU0 General-Purpose Output
O
Y2
pr2_pru0_gpo3
PRU0 General-Purpose Output
O
Y1
pr2_pru0_gpo4
PRU0 General-Purpose Output
O
Y4
pr2_pru0_gpo5
PRU0 General-Purpose Output
O
AA2
pr2_pru0_gpo6
PRU0 General-Purpose Output
O
AA3
pr2_pru0_gpo7
PRU0 General-Purpose Output
O
W2
pr2_pru0_gpo8
PRU0 General-Purpose Output
O
Y3
pr2_pru0_gpo9
PRU0 General-Purpose Output
O
AA1
pr2_pru0_gpo10
PRU0 General-Purpose Output
O
AA4
pr2_pru0_gpo11
PRU0 General-Purpose Output
O
AB1
pr2_pru0_gpo12
PRU0 General-Purpose Output
O
A22
pr2_pru0_gpo13
PRU0 General-Purpose Output
O
A23
pr2_pru0_gpo14
PRU0 General-Purpose Output
O
B22
pr2_pru0_gpo15
PRU0 General-Purpose Output
O
B23
pr2_pru0_gpo16
PRU0 General-Purpose Output
O
A21
pr2_pru0_gpo17
PRU0 General-Purpose Output
O
B21
pr2_pru0_gpo18
PRU0 General-Purpose Output
O
E19
pr2_pru0_gpo19
PRU0 General-Purpose Output
O
D19
pr2_pru0_gpo20
PRU0 General-Purpose Output
O
F16
pr2_pru1_gpi0
PRU1 General-Purpose Input
I
D23, L5
pr2_pru1_gpi1
PRU1 General-Purpose Input
I
AC3, L6
pr2_pru1_gpi2
PRU1 General-Purpose Input
I
U6, P5
pr2_pru1_gpi3
PRU1 General-Purpose Input
I
AA5, N5
pr2_pru1_gpi4
PRU1 General-Purpose Input
I
AC4, N6
pr2_pru1_gpi5
PRU1 General-Purpose Input
I
J25, T4
pr2_pru1_gpi6
PRU1 General-Purpose Input
I
J24, T5
pr2_pru1_gpi7
PRU1 General-Purpose Input
I
C16, P4
pr2_pru1_gpi8
PRU1 General-Purpose Input
I
D14, P3
pr2_pru1_gpi9
PRU1 General-Purpose Input
I
B14, R2
pr2_pru1_gpi10
PRU1 General-Purpose Input
I
A18, R1
pr2_pru1_gpi11
PRU1 General-Purpose Input
I
B17, N2
pr2_pru1_gpi12
PRU1 General-Purpose Input
I
B16, P2
pr2_pru1_gpi13
PRU1 General-Purpose Input
I
B18, N1
pr2_pru1_gpi14
PRU1 General-Purpose Input
I
A19, P1
pr2_pru1_gpi15
PRU1 General-Purpose Input
I
E17, N3
pr2_pru1_gpi16
PRU1 General-Purpose Input
I
E16, N4
pr2_pru1_gpo0
PRU1 General-Purpose Output
O
D23, L5
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
95
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 4-24. PRU-ICSS Signal Descriptions (continued)
TYPE
BALL
pr2_pru1_gpo1
SIGNAL NAME
PRU1 General-Purpose Output
DESCRIPTION
O
AC3, L6
pr2_pru1_gpo2
PRU1 General-Purpose Output
O
U6, P5
pr2_pru1_gpo3
PRU1 General-Purpose Output
O
AA5, N5
pr2_pru1_gpo4
PRU1 General-Purpose Output
O
AC4, N6
pr2_pru1_gpo5
PRU1 General-Purpose Output
O
J25, T4
pr2_pru1_gpo6
PRU1 General-Purpose Output
O
J24, T5
pr2_pru1_gpo7
PRU1 General-Purpose Output
O
C16, P4
pr2_pru1_gpo8
PRU1 General-Purpose Output
O
D14, P3
pr2_pru1_gpo9
PRU1 General-Purpose Output
O
B14, R2
pr2_pru1_gpo10
PRU1 General-Purpose Output
O
A18, R1
pr2_pru1_gpo11
PRU1 General-Purpose Output
O
B17, N2
pr2_pru1_gpo12
PRU1 General-Purpose Output
O
B16, P2
pr2_pru1_gpo13
PRU1 General-Purpose Output
O
B18, N1
pr2_pru1_gpo14
PRU1 General-Purpose Output
O
A19, P1
pr2_pru1_gpo15
PRU1 General-Purpose Output
O
E17, N3
pr2_pru1_gpo16
PRU1 General-Purpose Output
O
E16, N4
NOTE
PRU-ICSS has an internal wrapper multiplexing that allows MII_RT, EnDAT, and Sigma
Delta functionality to be muxed with the PRU GPI/O signals. See PRU-ICSS I/O Interface in
device TRM. Additionally, the EGPIO module can also be configured to export additional
functions to EGPIO pins in place of simple GPIO. See Enhanced General-Purpose
Module/Serial Capture Unit in Device TRM.
4.3.24 Emulation and Debug Subsystem
NOTE
For more information, see the On-Chip Debug Support / Debug Ports section of the Device
TRM.
Table 4-25. Debug Signal Descriptions
SIGNAL NAME
96
DESCRIPTION
TYPE
BALL
IO
L21
JTAG test data
I
L23
tms
JTAG test port mode select. An external pullup resistor should be used on this
ball.
tdi
tdo
JTAG test port data
O
J20
tclk
JTAG test clock
I
K21
trstn
JTAG test reset
I
L22
rtck
JTAG return clock
O
K25
emu0(1)
Emulator pin 0
IO
C21
emu1(1)
Emulator pin 1
IO
C22
emu2
Emulator pin 2
IO
E14
emu3
Emulator pin 3
IO
F14
emu4
Emulator pin 4
IO
F13
emu5
Emulator pin 5
O
D8
emu6
Emulator pin 6
O
B7
emu7
Emulator pin 7
O
C7
emu8
Emulator pin 8
O
E8
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 4-25. Debug Signal Descriptions (continued)
SIGNAL NAME
DESCRIPTION
TYPE
BALL
emu9
Emulator pin 9
O
B8
emu10
Emulator pin 10
O
C8
emu11
Emulator pin 11
O
B9
emu12
Emulator pin 12
O
A7
emu13
Emulator pin 13
O
A9
emu14
Emulator pin 14
O
A8
emu15
Emulator pin 15
O
A11
emu16
Emulator pin 16
O
F10
emu17
Emulator pin 17
O
A10
emu18
Emulator pin 18
O
B10
emu19
Emulator pin 19
O
E10
(1) EMU0 and EMU1 are multiplexed with GPIO. These pins will be sampled at reset release by the test and emulation logic. Therefore, if
they are used as GPIO pins, they must return to the high state whenever the device enters reset. This can be controlled by logic driven
from rstoutn. After the device exits reset (indicated by rstoutn rising), these can return to GPIO mode.
4.3.25 System and Miscellaneous
4.3.25.1 Sysboot
NOTE
For more information, see the Initialization (ROM Code) section of the Device TRM.
Table 4-26. Sysboot Signal Descriptions
SIGNAL NAME
TYPE
BALL
sysboot0
DESCRIPTION
Boot Mode Configuration 0. The value latched on this pin upon porz reset release
will determine the boot mode configuration of the device.
I
F1
sysboot1
Boot Mode Configuration 1. The value latched on this pin upon porz reset release
will determine the boot mode configuration of the device.
I
E2
sysboot2
Boot Mode Configuration 2. The value latched on this pin upon porz reset release
will determine the boot mode configuration of the device.
I
E1
sysboot3
Boot Mode Configuration 3. The value latched on this pin upon porz reset release
will determine the boot mode configuration of the device.
I
C1
sysboot4
Boot Mode Configuration 4. The value latched on this pin upon porz reset release
will determine the boot mode configuration of the device.
I
D1
sysboot5
Boot Mode Configuration 5. The value latched on this pin upon porz reset release
will determine the boot mode configuration of the device.
I
D2
sysboot6
Boot Mode Configuration 6. The value latched on this pin upon porz reset release
will determine the boot mode configuration of the device.
I
B1
sysboot7
Boot Mode Configuration 7. The value latched on this pin upon porz reset release
will determine the boot mode configuration of the device.
I
B2
sysboot8
Boot Mode Configuration 8. The value latched on this pin upon porz reset release
will determine the boot mode configuration of the device.
I
C2
sysboot9
Boot Mode Configuration 9. The value latched on this pin upon porz reset release
will determine the boot mode configuration of the device.
I
D3
sysboot10
Boot Mode Configuration 10. The value latched on this pin upon porz reset release
will determine the boot mode configuration of the device.
I
A2
sysboot11
Boot Mode Configuration 11. The value latched on this pin upon porz reset release
will determine the boot mode configuration of the device.
I
B3
sysboot12
Boot Mode Configuration 12. The value latched on this pin upon porz reset release
will determine the boot mode configuration of the device.
I
C3
sysboot13
Boot Mode Configuration 13. The value latched on this pin upon porz reset release
will determine the boot mode configuration of the device.
I
C4
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
97
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 4-26. Sysboot Signal Descriptions (continued)
SIGNAL NAME
TYPE
BALL
sysboot14
DESCRIPTION
Boot Mode Configuration 14. The value latched on this pin upon porz reset release
will determine the boot mode configuration of the device.
I
A3
sysboot15
Boot Mode Configuration 15. The value latched on this pin upon porz reset release
will determine the boot mode configuration of the device.
I
B4
TYPE
BALL
4.3.25.2 Power, Reset, and Clock Management (PRCM)
NOTE
For more information, see PRCM section of the Device TRM.
Table 4-27. PRCM Signal Descriptions
SIGNAL NAME
DESCRIPTION
clkout1
Device Clock output 1. Can be used externally for devices with noncritical timing requirements, or for debug, or as a reference clock on
GPMC as described in Table 5-49, GPMC/NOR Flash Interface
Switching Characteristics - Synchronous Mode - Default and Table 551, GPMC/NOR Flash Interface Switching Characteristics Synchronous Mode - Alternate.
O
K23, L4
clkout2
Device Clock output 2. Can be used externally for devices with noncritical timing requirements, or for debug.
O
H5, J25
clkout3
Device Clock output 3. Can be used xternally for devices with noncritical timing requirements, or for debug.
O
H25
porz
Power on Reset (active low). This pin must be asserted low until all
device supplies are valid (see reset sequence/requirements)
I
F19
resetn
Device Reset Input
I
K24
rstoutn
Reset out (active low). This pin asserts low in response to any global
reset condition on the device.(2)
O
E20
xi_osc0
System Oscillator OSC0 Crystal input / LVCMOS clock input.
Functions as the input connection to a crystal when the internal
oscillator OSC0 is used. Functions as an LVCMOS-compatible input
clock when an external oscillator is used.
I
Y12
xi_osc1
Auxiliary Oscillator OSC1 Crystal input / LVCMOS clock input.
Functions as the input connection to a crystal when the internal
oscillator OSC1 is used. Functions as an LVCMOS-compatible input
clock when an external oscillator is used
I
AC11
xo_osc0
System Oscillator OSC0 Crystal output
O
AB12
xo_osc1
Auxiliary Oscillator OSC1 Crystal output
O
AA11
xref_clk0
External Reference Clock 0. For Audio and other Peripherals.
I
J25
xref_clk1
External Reference Clock 1. For Audio and other Peripherals.
I
J24
xref_clk2
External Reference Clock 2. For Audio and other Peripherals.
I
H24
External Reference Clock 3. For Audio and other Peripherals.
I
H25
IO
P5
xref_clk3
(1)
RMII_MHZ_50_CLK
RMII Reference Clock (50MHz). This pin is an input when external
reference is used or output when internal reference is used.
(1) This clock signal is implemented as 'pad loopback' inside the device - the output signal is looped back through the input buffer to serve
as the internal reference signal. Series termination is recommended (as close to device pin as possible) to improve signal integrity of the
clock input. Any nonmonotonicity in voltage that occurs at the pad loopback clock pin between VIH and VIL must be less than VHYS.
(2) Note that rstoutn is only valid after vddshv3 is valid. If the rstoutn signal will be used as a reset into other devices attached to the SoC, it
must be AND'ed with porz. This will prevent glitches occurring during supply ramping being propagated.
4.3.25.3 System Direct Memory Access (SDMA)
NOTE
For more information, see the DMA Controllers / System DMA section of the Device TRM.
98
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 4-28. SDMA Signal Descriptions
SIGNAL NAME
TYPE
BALL
dma_evt1
DESCRIPTION
System DMA Event Input 1
I
G1, L4
dma_evt2
System DMA Event Input 2
I
H3, H5
dma_evt3
System DMA Event Input 3
I
H2
dma_evt4
System DMA Event Input 4
I
H6
4.3.25.4 Interrupt Controllers (INTC)
NOTE
For more information, see the Interrupt Controllers section of the Device TRM.
Table 4-29. INTC Signal Descriptions
SIGNAL NAME
TYPE
BALL
nmin_dsp
DESCRIPTION
Non maskable interrupt input, active-low. This pin can be optionally routed to the
DSP NMI input or as generic input to the Arm cores. Note that by default this pin
has an internal pulldown resistor enabled. This internal pulldown should be disabled
or countered by a stronger external pullup resistor before routing to the DSP or Arm
processors.
I
L24
sys_nirq2
External interrupt event to any device INTC
I
AC10
sys_nirq1
External interrupt event to any device INTC
I
AB10
4.3.26 Power Supplies
NOTE
For more information, see Power, Reset, and Clock Management / PRCM Subsystem
Environment / External Voltage Inputs section of the Device TRM.
Table 4-30. Power Supply Signal Descriptions
SIGNAL NAME
vdd
vpp(2)
DESCRIPTION
TYPE
BALL
PWR
J15, J16, J18, K12,
K18, L12, L17, M11,
M13, M15, M17, N11,
N13, N15, N18, P10,
P12, P14, P16, P18,
R10, R12, R14, R16,
R17, T11, T13, T15,
T17, T9, U11, U13,
U15, U18, U9, V10,
V12, V14, V16, V18,
W10, W12, W14, W16
PWR
F20
Core voltage domain supply
eFuse power supply
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
99
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 4-30. Power Supply Signal Descriptions (continued)
SIGNAL NAME
DESCRIPTION
vss
BALL
GND
A1, A25, AA13, AA15,
AA7, AA8, AA9, AB8,
AC13, AE1, AE15,
AE25, G13, G16, G8,
H10, H12, H14, H16,
H18, H19, H8, J10,
J12, J14, J17, K11,
K13, K15, K17, K9,
L11, L13, L15, L18,
L8, M12, M14, M16,
M18, M20, M8, M9,
N12, N14, N16, N17,
N20, P11, P13, P15,
P17, P19, P9, R11,
R13, R15, R18, R19,
R8, R9, T10, T12,
T14, T16, T18, T8,
U10, U12, U14, U16,
U17, U19, V11, V13,
V15, V17, V19, V8,
V9, W19, W9, Y14,
Y16, Y17, Y7
Ground
cap_vbbldo_gpu (1)
MM (SGX) Back bias supply
CAP
T7
cap_vbbldo_iva (1)
IVA Back bias supply
CAP
G14
cap_vbbldo_mpu (1)
MPU back bias supply
CAP
F17
External capacitor connection for the DSP vbb ldo output
CAP
F8
cap_vddram_core1(1)
SRAM array supply for core memories
CAP
U20
cap_vddram_core3 (1)
SRAM array supply for core memories
CAP
K7
(1)
G19
cap_vbbldo_dsp
(1)
cap_vddram_core4
SRAM array supply for core memories
CAP
cap_vddram_gpu
(1)
SRAM array supply for SGX (MM) memories
CAP
V7
cap_vddram_iva
(1)
SRAM array supply for IVA memories
CAP
G12
cap_vddram_dsp (1)
External capacitor connection for the DSP
CAP
L7
cap_vddram_mpu (1)
External capacitor connection for the MPU SRAM array ldo output
CAP
G18
vdda33v_usb1
HS USB1 3p3 supply
PWR
AA10
vdda33v_usb2
HS USB1 3p3 supply
PWR
Y10
DPLL_CORE and CORE HSDIVIDER analog power supply
PWR
L9
CSI Interface 1.8v Supply
PWR
T6
DSP PLL and IVA PLL analog power supply
PWR
K10, L10
MPU_ABE PLL analog power supply
PWR
K16, L16
DPLL_ABE, DPLL_PER, and PER HSDIVIDER analog power supply
PWR
M10
vdda_usb2
HS USB2 1.8V analog power supply
PWR
Y8
vdds_mlbp
vdda_core_gmac
vdda_csi
vdda_dsp_iva
vdda_mpu_abe
vdda_per
MLBP IO power supply
PWR
P7, R7
vdd_dsp
DSP voltage domain supply
PWR
H11, H13, H9, J11,
J13, J9
vdda_ddr
DDR PLL and DDR HSDIVIDER analog power supply
PWR
R20
Debug PLL inside IOSC PLL supply
PWR
N10
vdda_gpu
GPU (SGX) PLL analog power supply
PWR
N9
vdda_hdmi
HDMI PLL and HDMI analog power supply
PWR
W15, Y15
vdda_debug
vdda_osc
HFOSC - 1.8v vdds supply
PWR
W13, Y13
vdda_pcie
PCIe PLL analog power supply
PWR
W11, Y11
vdda_usb1
USB2 PLL analog power supply
PWR
W8
vdda_usb3
USB3 PLL analog power supply
PWR
Y9
vdda_video
VIDEO1 and VIDEO2 PLL analog power supply
PWR
K14, L14
1.8V bump added for atestv esd supply
PWR
G11, H20, W7, Y18
vdds18v
100
TYPE
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 4-30. Power Supply Signal Descriptions (continued)
SIGNAL NAME
DESCRIPTION
TYPE
BALL
DDR2 - 1.8v bias supply
PWR
AA19, P20, Y19
vddshv1
VIN2 domain - 1.8/3.3 mode voltage Power cell - secondary power
supply
PWR
G10, G9
vddshv3
GENERAL Domain - 1.8/3.3 mode voltage Power cell - secondary
power supply
PWR
G15, G17, H15, H17,
J19, K19
vddshv4
MMC4 Domain (UART4) - 1.8/3.3 mode voltage Power cell - secondary
power supply
PWR
M19, N19
vddshv7
WIFI Power Group (MMC3/MCASP5) - 1.8/3.3 mode voltage Power cell
- secondary power supply
PWR
U7, U8
vddshv8
Dual Voltage (1.8V or 3.3V) power supply for the MMC1 Power Group
pins
PWR
N8, P8
vddshv9
RGMII - 1.8/3.3 mode voltage Power cell - secondary power supply
PWR
M7, N7
vddshv10
GPMC - 1.8/3.3 mode voltage Power cell - secondary power supply
PWR
J7, J8, K8
vddshv11
MMC2 - 1.8/3.3 mode voltage Power cell - secondary power supply
PWR
F7, G7, H7
vdds_ddr1
DDR2 - vdds2 can be 1.8 (ddr2)/1.5(ddr3) - secondary power supply
PWR
T19, T20, V20, W17,
W18, W20
vssa_osc0
OSC0 Analog ground
GND
AA12
vssa_osc1
OSC1 Analog ground
GND
AB11
vdds18v_ddr1
(1) This pin must always be connected via a 1-µF capacitor to vss.
(2) This signal is valid only for High-Security devices. For more details, see Section 5.8, VPP Specification for One-Time Programmable
(OTP) eFUSEs. For General Purpose devices do not connect any signal, test point, or board trace to this signal.
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
101
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
4.4
www.ti.com
Pin Multiplexing
Table 4-31 describes the device pin multiplexing (no characteristics are provided in this table).
NOTE
Table 4-31, Pin Multiplexing doesn't take into account subsystem multiplexing signals. Subsystem multiplexing signals are described in
Section 4.3, Signal Descriptions.
NOTE
For more information, see the Control Module / Control Module Functional Description / PAD Functional Multiplexing and Configuration
section of the Device TRM.
NOTE
Configuring two pins to the same input signal is not supported as it can yield unexpected results. This can be easily prevented with the
proper software configuration (Hi-Z mode is not an input signal).
NOTE
When a pad is set into a pin multiplexing mode which is not defined, that pad’s behavior is undefined. This should be avoided.
NOTE
In some cases Table 4-31 may present more than one signal per muxmode for the same ball. First signal in the list is the dominant
function as selected via CTRL_CORE_PAD_* register.
All other signals are virtual functions that present alternate multiplexing options. This virtual functions are controlled via
CTRL_CORE_ALT_SELECT_MUX or CTRL_CORE_VIP_MUX_SELECT register. For more information on how to use this options,
please refer to Device TRM, Chapter Control Module, Section Pad Configuration Registers.
CAUTION
The I/O timings provided in Section 5.10, Timing Requirements and Switching Characteristics are valid only if signals
within a single IOSET are used. The IOSETs are defined in the corresponding tables.
102
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 4-31. Pin Multiplexing
ADDRESS REGISTER NAME
BALL
NUMBER
MUXMODE FIELD SETTINGS (CTRL_CORE_PAD_*[3:0])
0
P25
ddr1_dqm3
Y23
ddr1_d10
P21
ddr1_d27
T3
mlbp_sig_p
U25
ddr1_d17
AA20
ddr1_a7
V25
ddr1_dqsn2
AB16
ddr1_ba2
T25
ddr1_d25
N21
ddr1_d28
AB25
ddr1_d13
AE9
hdmi1_cloc
kx
W23
ddr1_d16
AC24
ddr1_d1
AD16
ddr1_casn
AA23
ddr1_d0
AD18
ddr1_odt0
AE19
ddr1_a1
AC20
ddr1_a9
U21
ddr1_dqm2
AA24
ddr1_d8
U4
mlbp_sig_n
AC11
xi_osc1
AD1
csi2_0_dx1
AE3
usb_txn0
AC6
usb1_dp
AD6
usb_rxp0
AA16
ddr1_ba1
Y12
xi_osc0
AB15
ddr1_a14
AC18
ddr1_a0
AE11
hdmi1_data
0x
R25
ddr1_dqsn3
Y24
ddr1_dqs1
Y21
ddr1_a8
W21
ddr1_d19
AD20
ddr1_a4
1
2
3*
4*
5*
6*
7
8*
9
10
11
12
13
14*
15
pcie_txn1
pcie_rxp1
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
103
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 4-31. Pin Multiplexing (continued)
ADDRESS REGISTER NAME
104
BALL
NUMBER
MUXMODE FIELD SETTINGS (CTRL_CORE_PAD_*[3:0])
0
AA25
ddr1_d14
AD13
hdmi1_data
1y
AB9
ljcb_clkn
AC25
ddr1_d12
U22
ddr1_d21
AB23
ddr1_d4
AB24
ddr1_d2
AE16
ddr1_ba0
T22
ddr1_d20
T21
ddr1_d23
AB19
ddr1_a3
AE24
ddr1_d7
AC15
ddr1_a13
AC21
ddr1_a11
AD17
ddr1_rasn
AB12
xo_osc0
AD23
ddr1_d6
AD9
pcie_txp0
V24
ddr1_dqs2
U1
mlbp_clk_n
U23
ddr1_d22
T1
mlbp_dat_n
AC22
ddr1_a12
AD24
ddr1_d3
AC8
ljcb_clkp
AE21
ddr1_nck
Y20
ddr1_vref0
AD7
pcie_rxp0
T2
mlbp_dat_p
AE23
ddr1_dqm0
AD21
ddr1_ck
Y25
ddr1_dqsn1
AA11
xo_osc1
AE17
ddr1_rst
W22
ddr1_dqm1
AE12
hdmi1_data
1x
AE14
hdmi1_data
2x
1
2
3*
4*
5*
6*
7
Terminal Configuration and Functions
8*
9
10
11
12
13
14*
15
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 4-31. Pin Multiplexing (continued)
ADDRESS REGISTER NAME
MUXMODE FIELD SETTINGS (CTRL_CORE_PAD_*[3:0])
BALL
NUMBER
0
AB2
csi2_0_dy0
AB18
ddr1_cke
AB6
usb2_dp
AC1
csi2_0_dx0
AE8
pcie_txn0
AC19
ddr1_csn0
AA21
ddr1_a10
AE6
pcie_rxn0
AB7
usb1_dm
F19
porz
W25
ddr1_d9
P24
ddr1_d31
AD22
ddr1_dqs0
P22
ddr1_d29
U24
ddr1_d18
AD2
csi2_0_dy2
AE18
ddr1_wen
AE20
ddr1_a5
W24
ddr1_d15
T24
ddr1_d26
R24
ddr1_dqs3
AD15
hdmi1_data
2y
AE22
ddr1_dqsn0
AA18
ddr1_a6
U2
mlbp_clk_p
AC2
csi2_0_dy1
AD12
hdmi1_data
0y
T23
ddr1_d24
AD10
hdmi1_cloc
ky
AE5
usb_rxn0
AE2
csi2_0_dx2
P23
ddr1_d30
AC5
usb2_dm
AC23
ddr1_d5
AD19
ddr1_a2
AC16
ddr1_a15
AD25
ddr1_d11
1
2
3*
4*
5*
6*
7
8*
9
10
11
12
13
14*
15
pcie_rxn1
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
105
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 4-31. Pin Multiplexing (continued)
ADDRESS REGISTER NAME
BALL
NUMBER
AD4
MUXMODE FIELD SETTINGS (CTRL_CORE_PAD_*[3:0])
0
usb_txp0
1
2
3*
4*
5*
6*
7
8*
9
10
11
12
13
14*
15
pcie_txp1
0x1400
CTRL_CORE_PAD F1
_GPMC_AD0
gpmc_ad0
vin1a_d0
vout3_d0
gpio1_6
sysboot0
0x1404
CTRL_CORE_PAD E2
_GPMC_AD1
gpmc_ad1
vin1a_d1
vout3_d1
gpio1_7
sysboot1
0x1408
CTRL_CORE_PAD E1
_GPMC_AD2
gpmc_ad2
vin1a_d2
vout3_d2
gpio1_8
sysboot2
0x140C
CTRL_CORE_PAD C1
_GPMC_AD3
gpmc_ad3
vin1a_d3
vout3_d3
gpio1_9
sysboot3
0x1410
CTRL_CORE_PAD D1
_GPMC_AD4
gpmc_ad4
vin1a_d4
vout3_d4
gpio1_10
sysboot4
0x1414
CTRL_CORE_PAD D2
_GPMC_AD5
gpmc_ad5
vin1a_d5
vout3_d5
gpio1_11
sysboot5
0x1418
CTRL_CORE_PAD B1
_GPMC_AD6
gpmc_ad6
vin1a_d6
vout3_d6
gpio1_12
sysboot6
0x141C
CTRL_CORE_PAD B2
_GPMC_AD7
gpmc_ad7
vin1a_d7
vout3_d7
gpio1_13
sysboot7
0x1420
CTRL_CORE_PAD C2
_GPMC_AD8
gpmc_ad8
vin1a_d8
vout3_d8
gpio7_18
sysboot8
0x1424
CTRL_CORE_PAD D3
_GPMC_AD9
gpmc_ad9
vin1a_d9
vout3_d9
gpio7_19
sysboot9
0x1428
CTRL_CORE_PAD A2
_GPMC_AD10
gpmc_ad10
vin1a_d10
vout3_d10
gpio7_28
sysboot10
0x142C
CTRL_CORE_PAD B3
_GPMC_AD11
gpmc_ad11
vin1a_d11
vout3_d11
gpio7_29
sysboot11
0x1430
CTRL_CORE_PAD C3
_GPMC_AD12
gpmc_ad12
vin1a_d12
vout3_d12
gpio1_18
sysboot12
0x1434
CTRL_CORE_PAD C4
_GPMC_AD13
gpmc_ad13
vin1a_d13
vout3_d13
gpio1_19
sysboot13
0x1438
CTRL_CORE_PAD A3
_GPMC_AD14
gpmc_ad14
vin1a_d14
vout3_d14
gpio1_20
sysboot14
0x143C
CTRL_CORE_PAD B4
_GPMC_AD15
gpmc_ad15
vin1a_d15
vout3_d15
gpio1_21
sysboot15
0x1440
CTRL_CORE_PAD M1
_GPMC_A0
gpmc_a0
vin1a_d16
vout3_d16
vin1b_d0
i2c4_scl
uart5_rxd
gpio7_3
gpmc_a26
gpmc_a16
Driver off
0x1444
CTRL_CORE_PAD M2
_GPMC_A1
gpmc_a1
vin1a_d17
vout3_d17
vin1b_d1
i2c4_sda
uart5_txd
gpio7_4
Driver off
0x1448
CTRL_CORE_PAD L2
_GPMC_A2
gpmc_a2
vin1a_d18
vout3_d18
vin1b_d2
uart7_rxd
uart5_ctsn
gpio7_5
Driver off
0x144C
CTRL_CORE_PAD L1
_GPMC_A3
gpmc_a3
qspi1_cs2
vin1a_d19
vout3_d19
vin1b_d3
uart7_txd
uart5_rtsn
gpio7_6
Driver off
0x1450
CTRL_CORE_PAD K3
_GPMC_A4
gpmc_a4
qspi1_cs3
vin1a_d20
vout3_d20
vin1b_d4
i2c5_scl
uart6_rxd
gpio1_26
Driver off
0x1454
CTRL_CORE_PAD K2
_GPMC_A5
gpmc_a5
vin1a_d21
vout3_d21
vin1b_d5
i2c5_sda
uart6_txd
gpio1_27
Driver off
0x1458
CTRL_CORE_PAD J1
_GPMC_A6
gpmc_a6
vin1a_d22
vout3_d22
vin1b_d6
uart8_rxd
uart6_ctsn
gpio1_28
Driver off
106
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 4-31. Pin Multiplexing (continued)
ADDRESS REGISTER NAME
BALL
NUMBER
MUXMODE FIELD SETTINGS (CTRL_CORE_PAD_*[3:0])
0
1
2
3*
0x145C
CTRL_CORE_PAD K1
_GPMC_A7
gpmc_a7
vin1a_d23
0x1460
CTRL_CORE_PAD K4
_GPMC_A8
gpmc_a8
vin1a_hsyn vout3_hsyn
c0
c
0x1464
CTRL_CORE_PAD H1
_GPMC_A9
gpmc_a9
0x1468
CTRL_CORE_PAD J2
_GPMC_A10
0x146C
4*
5*
vout3_d23
6*
vin1b_d7
7
8*
9
10
11
12
13
14*
15
uart6_rtsn
gpio1_29
Driver off
vin1b_hsyn timer12
c1
spi4_sclk
gpio1_30
Driver off
vin1a_vsyn vout3_vsyn
c0
c
vin1b_vsyn timer11
c1
spi4_d1
gpio1_31
Driver off
gpmc_a10
vin1a_de0
vout3_de
vin1b_clk1
timer10
spi4_d0
gpio2_0
Driver off
CTRL_CORE_PAD L3
_GPMC_A11
gpmc_a11
vin1a_fld0
vout3_fld
vin1b_de1
timer9
spi4_cs0
gpio2_1
Driver off
0x1470
CTRL_CORE_PAD G1
_GPMC_A12
gpmc_a12
vin1b_fld1
timer8
spi4_cs1
dma_evt1
gpio2_2
Driver off
0x1474
CTRL_CORE_PAD H3
_GPMC_A13
gpmc_a13
qspi1_rtclk
timer7
spi4_cs2
dma_evt2
gpio2_3
Driver off
0x1478
CTRL_CORE_PAD H4
_GPMC_A14
gpmc_a14
qspi1_d3
timer6
spi4_cs3
gpio2_4
Driver off
0x147C
CTRL_CORE_PAD K6
_GPMC_A15
gpmc_a15
qspi1_d2
timer5
gpio2_5
Driver off
0x1480
CTRL_CORE_PAD K5
_GPMC_A16
gpmc_a16
qspi1_d0
gpio2_6
Driver off
0x1484
CTRL_CORE_PAD G2
_GPMC_A17
gpmc_a17
qspi1_d1
gpio2_7
Driver off
0x1488
CTRL_CORE_PAD F2
_GPMC_A18
gpmc_a18
qspi1_sclk
gpio2_8
Driver off
0x148C
CTRL_CORE_PAD A4
_GPMC_A19
gpmc_a19
mmc2_dat4 gpmc_a13
vin2b_d0
gpio2_9
Driver off
0x1490
CTRL_CORE_PAD E7
_GPMC_A20
gpmc_a20
mmc2_dat5 gpmc_a14
vin2b_d1
gpio2_10
Driver off
0x1494
CTRL_CORE_PAD D6
_GPMC_A21
gpmc_a21
mmc2_dat6 gpmc_a15
vin2b_d2
gpio2_11
Driver off
0x1498
CTRL_CORE_PAD C5
_GPMC_A22
gpmc_a22
mmc2_dat7 gpmc_a16
vin2b_d3
gpio2_12
Driver off
0x149C
CTRL_CORE_PAD B5
_GPMC_A23
gpmc_a23
mmc2_clk
gpmc_a17
vin2b_d4
gpio2_13
Driver off
0x14A0
CTRL_CORE_PAD D7
_GPMC_A24
gpmc_a24
mmc2_dat0 gpmc_a18
vin2b_d5
gpio2_14
Driver off
0x14A4
CTRL_CORE_PAD C6
_GPMC_A25
gpmc_a25
mmc2_dat1 gpmc_a19
vin2b_d6
gpio2_15
Driver off
0x14A8
CTRL_CORE_PAD A5
_GPMC_A26
gpmc_a26
mmc2_dat2 gpmc_a20
vin2b_d7
gpio2_16
Driver off
0x14AC
CTRL_CORE_PAD B6
_GPMC_A27
gpmc_a27
mmc2_dat3 gpmc_a21
vin2b_hsyn
c1
gpio2_17
Driver off
0x14B0
CTRL_CORE_PAD A6
_GPMC_CS1
gpmc_cs1
mmc2_cmd gpmc_a22
vin2b_vsyn
c1
gpio2_18
Driver off
0x14B4
CTRL_CORE_PAD F3
_GPMC_CS0
gpmc_cs0
gpio2_19
Driver off
gpmc_a0
uart8_txd
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
107
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 4-31. Pin Multiplexing (continued)
ADDRESS REGISTER NAME
BALL
NUMBER
MUXMODE FIELD SETTINGS (CTRL_CORE_PAD_*[3:0])
0
1
2
3*
0x14B8
CTRL_CORE_PAD G4
_GPMC_CS2
gpmc_cs2
qspi1_cs0
0x14BC
CTRL_CORE_PAD G3
_GPMC_CS3
gpmc_cs3
qspi1_cs1
vin1a_clk0
vout3_clk
0x14C0
CTRL_CORE_PAD L4
_GPMC_CLK
gpmc_clk
gpmc_cs7
clkout1
gpmc_wait1
0x14C4
CTRL_CORE_PAD H5
_GPMC_ADVN_AL
E
gpmc_advn gpmc_cs6
_ale
clkout2
gpmc_wait1
0x14C8
CTRL_CORE_PAD G5
_GPMC_OEN_RE
N
0x14CC
4*
5*
6*
7
8*
9
10
11
gpmc_a1
12
13
14*
15
gpio2_20
gpmc_a23
gpmc_a13
Driver off
gpio2_21
gpmc_a24
gpmc_a14
Driver off
vin2b_clk1
timer4
i2c3_scl
dma_evt1
gpio2_22
gpmc_a20
Driver off
gpmc_a23
timer3
i2c3_sda
dma_evt2
gpio2_23
gpmc_a19
Driver off
gpmc_oen_
ren
gpio2_24
Driver off
CTRL_CORE_PAD G6
_GPMC_WEN
gpmc_wen
gpio2_25
Driver off
0x14D0
CTRL_CORE_PAD H2
_GPMC_BEN0
gpmc_ben0 gpmc_cs4
0x14D4
CTRL_CORE_PAD H6
_GPMC_BEN1
gpmc_ben1 gpmc_cs5
0x14D8
CTRL_CORE_PAD F6
_GPMC_WAIT0
gpmc_wait0
0x1554
CTRL_CORE_PAD D8
_VIN2A_CLK0
vin2a_clk0
0x1558
CTRL_CORE_PAD B7
_VIN2A_DE0
vin2a_de0
0x155C
CTRL_CORE_PAD C7
_VIN2A_FLD0
vin2a_fld0
0x1560
CTRL_CORE_PAD E8
_VIN2A_HSYNC0
vin2a_hsyn
c0
vin2b_hsyn vout2_hsyn emu8
c1
c
uart9_rxd
spi4_sclk
0x1564
CTRL_CORE_PAD B8
_VIN2A_VSYNC0
vin2a_vsyn
c0
vin2b_vsyn vout2_vsyn emu9
c1
c
uart9_txd
0x1568
CTRL_CORE_PAD C8
_VIN2A_D0
vin2a_d0
vout2_d23
emu10
0x156C
CTRL_CORE_PAD B9
_VIN2A_D1
vin2a_d1
vout2_d22
emu11
0x1570
CTRL_CORE_PAD A7
_VIN2A_D2
vin2a_d2
vout2_d21
0x1574
CTRL_CORE_PAD A9
_VIN2A_D3
vin2a_d3
0x1578
CTRL_CORE_PAD A8
_VIN2A_D4
0x157C
CTRL_CORE_PAD A11
_VIN2A_D5
108
gpmc_a2
vin2b_clk1
gpmc_a3
vin2b_de1
timer2
dma_evt3
gpio2_26
gpmc_a21
Driver off
vin2b_fld1
timer1
dma_evt4
gpio2_27
gpmc_a22
Driver off
gpio2_28
gpmc_a25
gpmc_a15
Driver off
vout2_fld
emu5
kbd_row0
eQEP1A_in
pr1_edio_d pr1_edio_d gpio3_28
ata_in0
ata_out0
gpmc_a27
gpmc_a17
Driver off
vout2_de
emu6
kbd_row1
eQEP1B_in
pr1_edio_d pr1_edio_d gpio3_29
ata_in1
ata_out1
Driver off
vout2_clk
emu7
eQEP1_ind
ex
pr1_edio_d pr1_edio_d gpio3_30
ata_in2
ata_out2
gpmc_a27
gpmc_a18
Driver off
kbd_row2
eQEP1_str pr1_uart0_c pr1_edio_d pr1_edio_d gpio3_31
obe
ts_n
ata_in3
ata_out3
gpmc_a27
Driver off
spi4_d1
kbd_row3
ehrpwm1A
pr1_uart0_r pr1_edio_d pr1_edio_d gpio4_0
ts_n
ata_in4
ata_out4
Driver off
uart9_ctsn
spi4_d0
kbd_row4
ehrpwm1B
pr1_uart0_r pr1_edio_d pr1_edio_d gpio4_1
xd
ata_in5
ata_out5
Driver off
uart9_rtsn
spi4_cs0
kbd_row5
ehrpwm1_tr pr1_uart0_t pr1_edio_d pr1_edio_d gpio4_2
ipzone_inpu xd
ata_in6
ata_out6
t
Driver off
emu12
uart10_rxd
kbd_row6
eCAP1_in_ pr1_ecap0_ pr1_edio_d pr1_edio_d gpio4_3
PWM1_out ecap_capin ata_in7
ata_out7
_apwm_o
Driver off
vout2_d20
emu13
uart10_txd
kbd_col0
ehrpwm1_s pr1_edc_lat pr1_pru1_g pr1_pru1_g gpio4_4
ynci
ch0_in
pi0
po0
Driver off
vin2a_d4
vout2_d19
emu14
uart10_ctsn kbd_col1
ehrpwm1_s pr1_edc_sy pr1_pru1_g pr1_pru1_g gpio4_5
ynco
nc0_out
pi1
po1
Driver off
vin2a_d5
vout2_d18
emu15
uart10_rtsn kbd_col2
eQEP2A_in pr1_edio_s pr1_pru1_g pr1_pru1_g gpio4_6
of
pi2
po2
Driver off
vin2a_fld0
vin2b_fld1
vin2b_clk1
vin2b_de1
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 4-31. Pin Multiplexing (continued)
ADDRESS REGISTER NAME
BALL
NUMBER
MUXMODE FIELD SETTINGS (CTRL_CORE_PAD_*[3:0])
0
1
2
3*
4*
5*
6*
7
8*
9
10
11
12
13
14*
15
0x1580
CTRL_CORE_PAD F10
_VIN2A_D6
vin2a_d6
vout2_d17
emu16
mii1_rxd1
kbd_col3
eQEP2B_in pr1_mii_mt pr1_pru1_g pr1_pru1_g gpio4_7
1_clk
pi3
po3
Driver off
0x1584
CTRL_CORE_PAD A10
_VIN2A_D7
vin2a_d7
vout2_d16
emu17
mii1_rxd2
kbd_col4
eQEP2_ind pr1_mii1_tx pr1_pru1_g pr1_pru1_g gpio4_8
ex
en
pi4
po4
Driver off
0x1588
CTRL_CORE_PAD B10
_VIN2A_D8
vin2a_d8
vout2_d15
emu18
mii1_rxd3
kbd_col5
eQEP2_str pr1_mii1_tx pr1_pru1_g pr1_pru1_g gpio4_9
obe
d3
pi5
po5
gpmc_a26
Driver off
0x158C
CTRL_CORE_PAD E10
_VIN2A_D9
vin2a_d9
vout2_d14
emu19
mii1_rxd0
kbd_col6
ehrpwm2A
pr1_mii1_tx pr1_pru1_g pr1_pru1_g gpio4_10
d2
pi6
po6
gpmc_a25
Driver off
0x1590
CTRL_CORE_PAD D10
_VIN2A_D10
vin2a_d10
mdio_mclk
vout2_d13
kbd_col7
ehrpwm2B
pr1_mdio_
mdclk
pr1_pru1_g pr1_pru1_g gpio4_11
pi7
po7
gpmc_a24
Driver off
0x1594
CTRL_CORE_PAD C10
_VIN2A_D11
vin2a_d11
mdio_d
vout2_d12
kbd_row7
ehrpwm2_tr pr1_mdio_d pr1_pru1_g pr1_pru1_g gpio4_12
ipzone_inpu ata
pi8
po8
gpmc_a23
t
Driver off
0x1598
CTRL_CORE_PAD B11
_VIN2A_D12
vin2a_d12
rgmii1_txc
vout2_d11
mii1_rxclk
kbd_col8
eCAP2_in_ pr1_mii1_tx pr1_pru1_g pr1_pru1_g gpio4_13
PWM2_out d1
pi9
po9
Driver off
0x159C
CTRL_CORE_PAD D11
_VIN2A_D13
vin2a_d13
rgmii1_txctl vout2_d10
mii1_rxdv
kbd_row8
eQEP3A_in pr1_mii1_tx pr1_pru1_g pr1_pru1_g gpio4_14
d0
pi10
po10
Driver off
0x15A0
CTRL_CORE_PAD C11
_VIN2A_D14
vin2a_d14
rgmii1_txd3 vout2_d9
mii1_txclk
eQEP3B_in pr1_mii_mr pr1_pru1_g pr1_pru1_g gpio4_15
1_clk
pi11
po11
Driver off
0x15A4
CTRL_CORE_PAD B12
_VIN2A_D15
vin2a_d15
rgmii1_txd2 vout2_d8
mii1_txd0
eQEP3_ind pr1_mii1_rx pr1_pru1_g pr1_pru1_g gpio4_16
ex
dv
pi12
po12
Driver off
0x15A8
CTRL_CORE_PAD A12
_VIN2A_D16
vin2a_d16
vin2b_d7
rgmii1_txd1 vout2_d7
mii1_txd1
eQEP3_str pr1_mii1_rx pr1_pru1_g pr1_pru1_g gpio4_24
obe
d3
pi13
po13
Driver off
0x15AC
CTRL_CORE_PAD A13
_VIN2A_D17
vin2a_d17
vin2b_d6
rgmii1_txd0 vout2_d6
mii1_txd2
ehrpwm3A
pr1_mii1_rx pr1_pru1_g pr1_pru1_g gpio4_25
d2
pi14
po14
Driver off
0x15B0
CTRL_CORE_PAD E11
_VIN2A_D18
vin2a_d18
vin2b_d5
rgmii1_rxc
vout2_d5
mii1_txd3
ehrpwm3B
pr1_mii1_rx pr1_pru1_g pr1_pru1_g gpio4_26
d1
pi15
po15
Driver off
0x15B4
CTRL_CORE_PAD F11
_VIN2A_D19
vin2a_d19
vin2b_d4
rgmii1_rxctl vout2_d4
mii1_txer
ehrpwm3_tr pr1_mii1_rx pr1_pru1_g pr1_pru1_g gpio4_27
ipzone_inpu d0
pi16
po16
t
Driver off
0x15B8
CTRL_CORE_PAD B13
_VIN2A_D20
vin2a_d20
vin2b_d3
rgmii1_rxd3 vout2_d3
mii1_rxer
eCAP3_in_ pr1_mii1_rx pr1_pru1_g pr1_pru1_g gpio4_28
PWM3_out er
pi17
po17
Driver off
0x15BC
CTRL_CORE_PAD E13
_VIN2A_D21
vin2a_d21
vin2b_d2
rgmii1_rxd2 vout2_d2
mii1_col
pr1_mii1_rx pr1_pru1_g pr1_pru1_g gpio4_29
link
pi18
po18
Driver off
0x15C0
CTRL_CORE_PAD C13
_VIN2A_D22
vin2a_d22
vin2b_d1
rgmii1_rxd1 vout2_d1
mii1_crs
pr1_mii1_c pr1_pru1_g pr1_pru1_g gpio4_30
ol
pi19
po19
Driver off
0x15C4
CTRL_CORE_PAD D13
_VIN2A_D23
vin2a_d23
vin2b_d0
rgmii1_rxd0 vout2_d0
mii1_txen
pr1_mii1_cr pr1_pru1_g pr1_pru1_g gpio4_31
s
pi20
po20
Driver off
0x15E4
CTRL_CORE_PAD E14
_VOUT1_D2
emu2
0x1604
CTRL_CORE_PAD F14
_VOUT1_D10
emu3
0x1624
CTRL_CORE_PAD F13
_VOUT1_D18
emu4
0x163C
CTRL_CORE_PAD L5
_MDIO_MCLK
mdio_mclk
uart3_rtsn
mii0_col
vin2a_clk0
vin1b_clk1
pr1_mii0_c pr2_pru1_g pr2_pru1_g gpio5_15
ol
pi0
po0
Driver off
0x1640
CTRL_CORE_PAD L6
_MDIO_D
mdio_d
uart3_ctsn
mii0_txer
vin2a_d0
vin1b_d0
pr1_mii0_rx pr2_pru1_g pr2_pru1_g gpio5_16
link
pi1
po1
Driver off
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
109
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 4-31. Pin Multiplexing (continued)
ADDRESS REGISTER NAME
BALL
NUMBER
MUXMODE FIELD SETTINGS (CTRL_CORE_PAD_*[3:0])
0
1
2
3*
4*
5*
6*
7
0x1644
CTRL_CORE_PAD P5
_RMII_MHZ_50_CL
K
RMII_MHZ_
50_CLK
0x1648
CTRL_CORE_PAD N5
_UART3_RXD
uart3_rxd
rmii1_crs
mii0_rxdv
vin2a_d1
vin1b_d1
spi3_sclk
0x164C
CTRL_CORE_PAD N6
_UART3_TXD
uart3_txd
rmii1_rxer
mii0_rxclk
vin2a_d2
vin1b_d2
spi3_d1
0x1650
CTRL_CORE_PAD T4
_RGMII0_TXC
rgmii0_txc
uart3_ctsn
rmii1_rxd1
mii0_rxd3
vin2a_d3
vin1b_d3
0x1654
CTRL_CORE_PAD T5
_RGMII0_TXCTL
rgmii0_txctl uart3_rtsn
rmii1_rxd0
mii0_rxd2
vin2a_d4
0x1658
CTRL_CORE_PAD P4
_RGMII0_TXD3
rgmii0_txd3 rmii0_crs
mii0_crs
vin2a_de0
0x165C
CTRL_CORE_PAD P3
_RGMII0_TXD2
rgmii0_txd2 rmii0_rxer
mii0_rxer
0x1660
CTRL_CORE_PAD R2
_RGMII0_TXD1
rgmii0_txd1 rmii0_rxd1
0x1664
CTRL_CORE_PAD R1
_RGMII0_TXD0
rgmii0_txd0 rmii0_rxd0
0x1668
CTRL_CORE_PAD N2
_RGMII0_RXC
rgmii0_rxc
0x166C
CTRL_CORE_PAD P2
_RGMII0_RXCTL
0x1670
8*
9
10
11
12
13
14*
15
pr2_pru1_g pr2_pru1_g gpio5_17
pi2
po2
Driver off
pr1_mii0_rx pr2_pru1_g pr2_pru1_g gpio5_18
dv
pi3
po3
Driver off
spi4_cs1
pr1_mii_mr pr2_pru1_g pr2_pru1_g gpio5_19
0_clk
pi4
po4
Driver off
spi3_d0
spi4_cs2
pr1_mii0_rx pr2_pru1_g pr2_pru1_g gpio5_20
d3
pi5
po5
Driver off
vin1b_d4
spi3_cs0
spi4_cs3
pr1_mii0_rx pr2_pru1_g pr2_pru1_g gpio5_21
d2
pi6
po6
Driver off
vin1b_de1
spi4_sclk
uart4_rxd
pr1_mii0_cr pr2_pru1_g pr2_pru1_g gpio5_22
s
pi7
po7
Driver off
vin2a_hsyn vin1b_hsyn
c0
c1
spi4_d1
uart4_txd
pr1_mii0_rx pr2_pru1_g pr2_pru1_g gpio5_23
er
pi8
po8
Driver off
mii0_rxd1
vin2a_vsyn vin1b_vsyn
c0
c1
spi4_d0
uart4_ctsn
pr1_mii0_rx pr2_pru1_g pr2_pru1_g gpio5_24
d1
pi9
po9
Driver off
mii0_rxd0
vin2a_d10
spi4_cs0
uart4_rtsn
pr1_mii0_rx pr2_pru1_g pr2_pru1_g gpio5_25
d0
pi10
po10
Driver off
rmii1_txen
mii0_txclk
vin2a_d5
vin1b_d5
pr1_mii_mt pr2_pru1_g pr2_pru1_g gpio5_26
0_clk
pi11
po11
Driver off
rgmii0_rxctl
rmii1_txd1
mii0_txd3
vin2a_d6
vin1b_d6
pr1_mii0_tx pr2_pru1_g pr2_pru1_g gpio5_27
d3
pi12
po12
Driver off
CTRL_CORE_PAD N1
_RGMII0_RXD3
rgmii0_rxd3
rmii1_txd0
mii0_txd2
vin2a_d7
vin1b_d7
pr1_mii0_tx pr2_pru1_g pr2_pru1_g gpio5_28
d2
pi13
po13
Driver off
0x1674
CTRL_CORE_PAD P1
_RGMII0_RXD2
rgmii0_rxd2 rmii0_txen
mii0_txen
vin2a_d8
pr1_mii0_tx pr2_pru1_g pr2_pru1_g gpio5_29
en
pi14
po14
Driver off
0x1678
CTRL_CORE_PAD N3
_RGMII0_RXD1
rgmii0_rxd1 rmii0_txd1
mii0_txd1
vin2a_d9
pr1_mii0_tx pr2_pru1_g pr2_pru1_g gpio5_30
d1
pi15
po15
Driver off
0x167C
CTRL_CORE_PAD N4
_RGMII0_RXD0
rgmii0_rxd0 rmii0_txd0
mii0_txd0
vin2a_fld0
pr1_mii0_tx pr2_pru1_g pr2_pru1_g gpio5_31
d0
pi16
po16
Driver off
0x1680
CTRL_CORE_PAD AD3
_USB1_DRVVBUS
usb1_drvvb
us
timer16
gpio6_12
Driver off
0x1684
CTRL_CORE_PAD AA6
_USB2_DRVVBUS
usb2_drvvb
us
timer15
gpio6_13
Driver off
0x1688
CTRL_CORE_PAD H21
_GPIO6_14
gpio6_14
mcasp1_ax dcan2_tx
r8
uart10_rxd
i2c3_sda
timer1
gpio6_14
Driver off
0x168C
CTRL_CORE_PAD K22
_GPIO6_15
gpio6_15
mcasp1_ax dcan2_rx
r9
uart10_txd
i2c3_scl
timer2
gpio6_15
Driver off
0x1690
CTRL_CORE_PAD K23
_GPIO6_16
gpio6_16
mcasp1_ax
r10
clkout1
timer3
gpio6_16
Driver off
0x1694
CTRL_CORE_PAD J25
_XREF_CLK0
xref_clk0
mcasp2_ax mcasp1_ax mcasp1_ah mcasp5_ah
r8
r4
clkx
clkx
vin1a_d0
clkout2
timer13
pr2_mii1_c pr2_pru1_g pr2_pru1_g gpio6_17
ol
pi5
po5
Driver off
0x1698
CTRL_CORE_PAD J24
_XREF_CLK1
xref_clk1
mcasp2_ax mcasp1_ax mcasp2_ah mcasp6_ah
r9
r5
clkx
clkx
vin1a_clk0
timer14
pr2_mii1_cr pr2_pru1_g pr2_pru1_g gpio6_18
s
pi6
po6
Driver off
0x169C
CTRL_CORE_PAD H24
_XREF_CLK2
xref_clk2
mcasp2_ax mcasp1_ax mcasp3_ah mcasp7_ah
r10
r6
clkx
clkx
timer15
gpio6_19
Driver off
110
vin2a_d11
vin1b_fld1
hdq0
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 4-31. Pin Multiplexing (continued)
ADDRESS REGISTER NAME
BALL
NUMBER
MUXMODE FIELD SETTINGS (CTRL_CORE_PAD_*[3:0])
0
1
2
3*
4*
mcasp2_ax mcasp1_ax mcasp4_ah mcasp8_ah
r11
r7
clkx
clkx
5*
6*
7
hdq0
8*
9
10
clkout3
timer16
11
0x16A0
CTRL_CORE_PAD H25
_XREF_CLK3
xref_clk3
0x16A4
CTRL_CORE_PAD C16
_MCASP1_ACLKX
mcasp1_acl
kx
vin1a_fld0
i2c3_sda
pr2_mdio_
mdclk
0x16A8
CTRL_CORE_PAD C17
_MCASP1_FSX
mcasp1_fsx
vin1a_de0
i2c3_scl
pr2_mdio_d
ata
0x16AC
CTRL_CORE_PAD D16
_MCASP1_ACLKR
mcasp1_acl mcasp7_ax
kr
r2
0x16B0
CTRL_CORE_PAD D17
_MCASP1_FSR
mcasp1_fsr mcasp7_ax
r3
0x16B4
CTRL_CORE_PAD D14
_MCASP1_AXR0
mcasp1_ax
r0
uart6_rxd
vin1a_vsyn
c0
0x16B8
CTRL_CORE_PAD B14
_MCASP1_AXR1
mcasp1_ax
r1
uart6_txd
vin1a_hsyn
c0
0x16BC
CTRL_CORE_PAD C14
_MCASP1_AXR2
mcasp1_ax mcasp6_ax
r2
r2
0x16C0
CTRL_CORE_PAD B15
_MCASP1_AXR3
mcasp1_ax mcasp6_ax
r3
r3
0x16C4
CTRL_CORE_PAD A15
_MCASP1_AXR4
0x16C8
12
13
14*
15
gpio6_20
Driver off
pr2_pru1_g pr2_pru1_g gpio7_31
pi7
po7
Driver off
gpio7_30
Driver off
i2c4_sda
gpio5_0
Driver off
i2c4_scl
gpio5_1
Driver off
i2c5_sda
pr2_mii0_rx pr2_pru1_g pr2_pru1_g gpio5_2
er
pi8
po8
Driver off
i2c5_scl
pr2_mii_mt pr2_pru1_g pr2_pru1_g gpio5_3
0_clk
pi9
po9
Driver off
uart6_ctsn
gpio5_4
Driver off
uart6_rtsn
gpio5_5
Driver off
mcasp1_ax mcasp4_ax
r4
r2
gpio5_6
Driver off
CTRL_CORE_PAD A14
_MCASP1_AXR5
mcasp1_ax mcasp4_ax
r5
r3
gpio5_7
Driver off
0x16CC
CTRL_CORE_PAD A17
_MCASP1_AXR6
mcasp1_ax mcasp5_ax
r6
r2
gpio5_8
Driver off
0x16D0
CTRL_CORE_PAD A16
_MCASP1_AXR7
mcasp1_ax mcasp5_ax
r7
r3
gpio5_9
Driver off
0x16D4
CTRL_CORE_PAD A18
_MCASP1_AXR8
mcasp1_ax mcasp6_ax
r8
r0
spi3_sclk
vin1a_d15
timer5
pr2_mii0_tx pr2_pru1_g pr2_pru1_g gpio5_10
en
pi10
po10
Driver off
0x16D8
CTRL_CORE_PAD B17
_MCASP1_AXR9
mcasp1_ax mcasp6_ax
r9
r1
spi3_d1
vin1a_d14
timer6
pr2_mii0_tx pr2_pru1_g pr2_pru1_g gpio5_11
d3
pi11
po11
Driver off
0x16DC
CTRL_CORE_PAD B16
_MCASP1_AXR10
mcasp1_ax mcasp6_acl mcasp6_acl spi3_d0
r10
kx
kr
vin1a_d13
timer7
pr2_mii0_tx pr2_pru1_g pr2_pru1_g gpio5_12
d2
pi12
po12
Driver off
0x16E0
CTRL_CORE_PAD B18
_MCASP1_AXR11
mcasp1_ax mcasp6_fsx mcasp6_fsr spi3_cs0
r11
vin1a_d12
timer8
pr2_mii0_tx pr2_pru1_g pr2_pru1_g gpio4_17
d1
pi13
po13
Driver off
0x16E4
CTRL_CORE_PAD A19
_MCASP1_AXR12
mcasp1_ax mcasp7_ax
r12
r0
vin1a_d11
timer9
pr2_mii0_tx pr2_pru1_g pr2_pru1_g gpio4_18
d0
pi14
po14
Driver off
0x16E8
CTRL_CORE_PAD E17
_MCASP1_AXR13
mcasp1_ax mcasp7_ax
r13
r1
vin1a_d10
timer10
pr2_mii_mr pr2_pru1_g pr2_pru1_g gpio6_4
0_clk
pi15
po15
Driver off
0x16EC
CTRL_CORE_PAD E16
_MCASP1_AXR14
mcasp1_ax mcasp7_acl mcasp7_acl
r14
kx
kr
vin1a_d9
timer11
pr2_mii0_rx pr2_pru1_g pr2_pru1_g gpio6_5
dv
pi16
po16
Driver off
0x16F0
CTRL_CORE_PAD F16
_MCASP1_AXR15
mcasp1_ax mcasp7_fsx mcasp7_fsr
r15
vin1a_d8
timer12
pr2_mii0_rx pr2_pru0_g pr2_pru0_g gpio6_6
d3
pi20
po20
Driver off
0x16F4
CTRL_CORE_PAD E19
_MCASP2_ACLKX
mcasp2_acl
kx
vin1a_d7
pr2_mii0_rx pr2_pru0_g pr2_pru0_g
d2
pi18
po18
Driver off
0x16F8
CTRL_CORE_PAD D19
_MCASP2_FSX
mcasp2_fsx
vin1a_d6
pr2_mii0_rx pr2_pru0_g pr2_pru0_g
d1
pi19
po19
Driver off
0x1704
CTRL_CORE_PAD A20
_MCASP2_AXR0
mcasp2_ax
r0
timer4
spi3_cs1
Driver off
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
111
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 4-31. Pin Multiplexing (continued)
ADDRESS REGISTER NAME
BALL
NUMBER
MUXMODE FIELD SETTINGS (CTRL_CORE_PAD_*[3:0])
0
1
2
3*
4*
5*
6*
7
8*
9
10
11
12
13
14*
15
0x1708
CTRL_CORE_PAD B19
_MCASP2_AXR1
mcasp2_ax
r1
0x170C
CTRL_CORE_PAD A21
_MCASP2_AXR2
mcasp2_ax mcasp3_ax
r2
r2
vin1a_d5
pr2_mii0_rx pr2_pru0_g pr2_pru0_g gpio6_8
d0
pi16
po16
Driver off
0x1710
CTRL_CORE_PAD B21
_MCASP2_AXR3
mcasp2_ax mcasp3_ax
r3
r3
vin1a_d4
pr2_mii0_rx pr2_pru0_g pr2_pru0_g gpio6_9
link
pi17
po17
Driver off
0x1714
CTRL_CORE_PAD B20
_MCASP2_AXR4
mcasp2_ax mcasp8_ax
r4
r0
gpio1_4
Driver off
0x1718
CTRL_CORE_PAD C19
_MCASP2_AXR5
mcasp2_ax mcasp8_ax
r5
r1
gpio6_7
Driver off
0x171C
CTRL_CORE_PAD D20
_MCASP2_AXR6
mcasp2_ax mcasp8_acl mcasp8_acl
r6
kx
kr
gpio2_29
Driver off
0x1720
CTRL_CORE_PAD C20
_MCASP2_AXR7
mcasp2_ax mcasp8_fsx mcasp8_fsr
r7
gpio1_5
Driver off
0x1724
CTRL_CORE_PAD A22
_MCASP3_ACLKX
mcasp3_acl mcasp3_acl mcasp2_ax uart7_rxd
kx
kr
r12
vin1a_d3
pr2_mii0_cr pr2_pru0_g pr2_pru0_g gpio5_13
s
pi12
po12
Driver off
0x1728
CTRL_CORE_PAD A23
_MCASP3_FSX
mcasp3_fsx mcasp3_fsr mcasp2_ax uart7_txd
r13
vin1a_d2
pr2_mii0_c pr2_pru0_g pr2_pru0_g gpio5_14
ol
pi13
po13
Driver off
0x172C
CTRL_CORE_PAD B22
_MCASP3_AXR0
mcasp3_ax
r0
mcasp2_ax uart7_ctsn
r14
uart5_rxd
vin1a_d1
pr2_mii1_rx pr2_pru0_g pr2_pru0_g
er
pi14
po14
Driver off
0x1730
CTRL_CORE_PAD B23
_MCASP3_AXR1
mcasp3_ax
r1
mcasp2_ax uart7_rtsn
r15
uart5_txd
vin1a_d0
pr2_mii1_rx pr2_pru0_g pr2_pru0_g
link
pi15
po15
Driver off
0x1734
CTRL_CORE_PAD C23
_MCASP4_ACLKX
mcasp4_acl mcasp4_acl spi3_sclk
kx
kr
uart8_rxd
i2c4_sda
Driver off
0x1738
CTRL_CORE_PAD B25
_MCASP4_FSX
mcasp4_fsx mcasp4_fsr spi3_d1
uart8_txd
i2c4_scl
Driver off
0x173C
CTRL_CORE_PAD A24
_MCASP4_AXR0
mcasp4_ax
r0
spi3_d0
uart8_ctsn
uart4_rxd
Driver off
0x1740
CTRL_CORE_PAD D23
_MCASP4_AXR1
mcasp4_ax
r1
spi3_cs0
uart8_rtsn
uart4_txd
pr2_pru1_g pr2_pru1_g
pi0
po0
Driver off
0x1744
CTRL_CORE_PAD AC3
_MCASP5_ACLKX
mcasp5_acl mcasp5_acl spi4_sclk
kx
kr
uart9_rxd
i2c5_sda
pr2_pru1_g pr2_pru1_g
pi1
po1
Driver off
0x1748
CTRL_CORE_PAD U6
_MCASP5_FSX
mcasp5_fsx mcasp5_fsr spi4_d1
uart9_txd
i2c5_scl
pr2_pru1_g pr2_pru1_g
pi2
po2
Driver off
0x174C
CTRL_CORE_PAD AA5
_MCASP5_AXR0
mcasp5_ax
r0
spi4_d0
uart9_ctsn
uart3_rxd
pr2_mdio_
mdclk
pr2_pru1_g pr2_pru1_g
pi3
po3
Driver off
0x1750
CTRL_CORE_PAD AC4
_MCASP5_AXR1
mcasp5_ax
r1
spi4_cs0
uart9_rtsn
uart3_txd
pr2_mdio_d pr2_pru1_g pr2_pru1_g
ata
pi4
po4
Driver off
0x1754
CTRL_CORE_PAD U3
_MMC1_CLK
mmc1_clk
gpio6_21
Driver off
0x1758
CTRL_CORE_PAD V4
_MMC1_CMD
mmc1_cmd
gpio6_22
Driver off
0x175C
CTRL_CORE_PAD V3
_MMC1_DAT0
mmc1_dat0
gpio6_23
Driver off
0x1760
CTRL_CORE_PAD V2
_MMC1_DAT1
mmc1_dat1
gpio6_24
Driver off
0x1764
CTRL_CORE_PAD W1
_MMC1_DAT2
mmc1_dat2
gpio6_25
Driver off
112
Driver off
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 4-31. Pin Multiplexing (continued)
ADDRESS REGISTER NAME
BALL
NUMBER
MUXMODE FIELD SETTINGS (CTRL_CORE_PAD_*[3:0])
0
1
2
3*
4*
5*
6*
7
8*
9
0x1768
CTRL_CORE_PAD V1
_MMC1_DAT3
mmc1_dat3
0x176C
CTRL_CORE_PAD U5
_MMC1_SDCD
mmc1_sdcd
uart6_rxd
0x1770
CTRL_CORE_PAD V5
_MMC1_SDWP
mmc1_sdw
p
uart6_txd
0x1774
CTRL_CORE_PAD Y5
_GPIO6_10
gpio6_10
mdio_mclk
i2c3_sda
vin2b_hsyn
c1
vin1a_clk0
0x1778
CTRL_CORE_PAD Y6
_GPIO6_11
gpio6_11
mdio_d
i2c3_scl
vin2b_vsyn
c1
0x177C
CTRL_CORE_PAD Y2
_MMC3_CLK
mmc3_clk
0x1780
CTRL_CORE_PAD Y1
_MMC3_CMD
mmc3_cmd spi3_sclk
0x1784
CTRL_CORE_PAD Y4
_MMC3_DAT0
mmc3_dat0 spi3_d1
0x1788
CTRL_CORE_PAD AA2
_MMC3_DAT1
0x178C
10
11
12
13
14*
15
gpio6_26
Driver off
i2c4_sda
gpio6_27
Driver off
i2c4_scl
gpio6_28
Driver off
ehrpwm2A
pr2_mii_mt pr2_pru0_g pr2_pru0_g gpio6_10
1_clk
pi0
po0
Driver off
vin1a_de0
ehrpwm2B
pr2_mii1_tx pr2_pru0_g pr2_pru0_g gpio6_11
en
pi1
po1
Driver off
vin2b_d7
vin1a_d7
ehrpwm2_tr pr2_mii1_tx pr2_pru0_g pr2_pru0_g gpio6_29
ipzone_inpu d3
pi2
po2
t
Driver off
vin2b_d6
vin1a_d6
eCAP2_in_ pr2_mii1_tx pr2_pru0_g pr2_pru0_g gpio6_30
PWM2_out d2
pi3
po3
Driver off
uart5_rxd
vin2b_d5
vin1a_d5
eQEP3A_in pr2_mii1_tx pr2_pru0_g pr2_pru0_g gpio6_31
d1
pi4
po4
Driver off
mmc3_dat1 spi3_d0
uart5_txd
vin2b_d4
vin1a_d4
eQEP3B_in pr2_mii1_tx pr2_pru0_g pr2_pru0_g gpio7_0
d0
pi5
po5
Driver off
CTRL_CORE_PAD AA3
_MMC3_DAT2
mmc3_dat2 spi3_cs0
uart5_ctsn
vin2b_d3
vin1a_d3
eQEP3_ind pr2_mii_mr pr2_pru0_g pr2_pru0_g gpio7_1
ex
1_clk
pi6
po6
Driver off
0x1790
CTRL_CORE_PAD W2
_MMC3_DAT3
mmc3_dat3 spi3_cs1
uart5_rtsn
vin2b_d2
vin1a_d2
eQEP3_str pr2_mii1_rx pr2_pru0_g pr2_pru0_g gpio7_2
obe
dv
pi7
po7
Driver off
0x1794
CTRL_CORE_PAD Y3
_MMC3_DAT4
mmc3_dat4 spi4_sclk
uart10_rxd
vin2b_d1
vin1a_d1
ehrpwm3A
pr2_mii1_rx pr2_pru0_g pr2_pru0_g gpio1_22
d3
pi8
po8
Driver off
0x1798
CTRL_CORE_PAD AA1
_MMC3_DAT5
mmc3_dat5 spi4_d1
uart10_txd
vin2b_d0
vin1a_d0
ehrpwm3B
pr2_mii1_rx pr2_pru0_g pr2_pru0_g gpio1_23
d2
pi9
po9
Driver off
0x179C
CTRL_CORE_PAD AA4
_MMC3_DAT6
mmc3_dat6 spi4_d0
uart10_ctsn
vin2b_de1
vin1a_hsyn ehrpwm3_tr pr2_mii1_rx pr2_pru0_g pr2_pru0_g gpio1_24
c0
ipzone_inpu d1
pi10
po10
t
Driver off
0x17A0
CTRL_CORE_PAD AB1
_MMC3_DAT7
mmc3_dat7 spi4_cs0
uart10_rtsn
vin2b_clk1
vin1a_vsyn eCAP3_in_ pr2_mii1_rx pr2_pru0_g pr2_pru0_g gpio1_25
c0
PWM3_out d0
pi11
po11
Driver off
0x17A4
CTRL_CORE_PAD C24
_SPI1_SCLK
spi1_sclk
gpio7_7
Driver off
0x17A8
CTRL_CORE_PAD D24
_SPI1_D1
spi1_d1
gpio7_8
Driver off
0x17AC
CTRL_CORE_PAD D25
_SPI1_D0
spi1_d0
gpio7_9
Driver off
0x17B0
CTRL_CORE_PAD B24
_SPI1_CS0
spi1_cs0
gpio7_10
Driver off
0x17B4
CTRL_CORE_PAD C25
_SPI1_CS1
spi1_cs1
gpio7_11
Driver off
0x17B8
CTRL_CORE_PAD E24
_SPI1_CS2
spi1_cs2
uart4_rxd
mmc3_sdcd spi2_cs2
dcan2_tx
mdio_mclk
hdmi1_hpd
gpio7_12
Driver off
0x17BC
CTRL_CORE_PAD E25
_SPI1_CS3
spi1_cs3
uart4_txd
mmc3_sdw spi2_cs3
p
dcan2_rx
mdio_d
hdmi1_cec
gpio7_13
Driver off
0x17C0
CTRL_CORE_PAD G25
_SPI2_SCLK
spi2_sclk
uart3_rxd
gpio7_14
Driver off
spi2_cs1
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
113
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 4-31. Pin Multiplexing (continued)
ADDRESS REGISTER NAME
MUXMODE FIELD SETTINGS (CTRL_CORE_PAD_*[3:0])
BALL
NUMBER
0
1
2
3*
4*
5*
6*
7
8*
9
10
11
12
13
14*
15
0x17C4
CTRL_CORE_PAD F25
_SPI2_D1
spi2_d1
uart3_txd
0x17C8
CTRL_CORE_PAD G24
_SPI2_D0
spi2_d0
uart3_ctsn
0x17CC
CTRL_CORE_PAD F24
_SPI2_CS0
spi2_cs0
uart3_rtsn
0x17D0
CTRL_CORE_PAD H22
_DCAN1_TX
dcan1_tx
uart8_rxd
mmc2_sdcd
0x17D4
CTRL_CORE_PAD H23
_DCAN1_RX
dcan1_rx
uart8_txd
mmc2_sdw
p
0x17E0
CTRL_CORE_PAD L25
_UART1_RXD
uart1_rxd
0x17E4
CTRL_CORE_PAD M25
_UART1_TXD
uart1_txd
0x17E8
CTRL_CORE_PAD L20
_UART1_CTSN
uart1_ctsn
0x17EC
CTRL_CORE_PAD M24
_UART1_RTSN
uart1_rtsn
0x17F0
CTRL_CORE_PAD N23
_UART2_RXD
uart2_rxd
0x17F4
CTRL_CORE_PAD N25
_UART2_TXD
uart2_txd
0x17F8
CTRL_CORE_PAD N22
_UART2_CTSN
uart2_ctsn
0x17FC
CTRL_CORE_PAD N24
_UART2_RTSN
uart2_rtsn
0x1800
CTRL_CORE_PAD G23
_I2C1_SDA
i2c1_sda
Driver off
0x1804
CTRL_CORE_PAD G22
_I2C1_SCL
i2c1_scl
Driver off
0x1808
CTRL_CORE_PAD F23
_I2C2_SDA
i2c2_sda
hdmi1_ddc
_scl
Driver off
0x180C
CTRL_CORE_PAD G21
_I2C2_SCL
i2c2_scl
hdmi1_ddc
_sda
Driver off
0x1818
CTRL_CORE_PAD AC10
_WAKEUP0
dcan1_rx
gpio1_0
sys_nirq2
Driver off
0x1824
CTRL_CORE_PAD AB10
_WAKEUP3
sys_nirq1
gpio1_3
dcan2_rx
Driver off
0x1830
CTRL_CORE_PAD L21
_TMS
tms
0x1834
CTRL_CORE_PAD L23
_TDI
tdi
gpio8_27
0x1838
CTRL_CORE_PAD J20
_TDO
tdo
gpio8_28
0x183C
CTRL_CORE_PAD K21
_TCLK
tclk
0x1840
CTRL_CORE_PAD L22
_TRSTN
trstn
114
gpio7_15
Driver off
uart5_rxd
gpio7_16
Driver off
uart5_txd
gpio7_17
Driver off
hdmi1_hpd
gpio1_14
Driver off
hdmi1_cec
gpio1_15
Driver off
mmc4_sdcd
gpio7_22
Driver off
mmc4_sdw
p
gpio7_23
Driver off
uart9_rxd
mmc4_clk
gpio7_24
Driver off
uart9_txd
mmc4_cmd
gpio7_25
Driver off
uart3_ctsn
uart3_rctx
mmc4_dat0 uart2_rxd
uart1_dcdn
gpio7_26
Driver off
uart3_rtsn
uart3_sd
mmc4_dat1 uart2_txd
uart1_dsrn
gpio7_27
Driver off
uart3_rxd
mmc4_dat2 uart10_rxd
uart1_dtrn
gpio1_16
Driver off
uart3_irtx
mmc4_dat3 uart10_txd
uart1_rin
gpio1_17
Driver off
uart3_txd
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 4-31. Pin Multiplexing (continued)
ADDRESS REGISTER NAME
MUXMODE FIELD SETTINGS (CTRL_CORE_PAD_*[3:0])
BALL
NUMBER
0
1
2
3*
4*
5*
6*
7
8*
9
10
11
12
13
14*
0x1844
CTRL_CORE_PAD K25
_RTCK
rtck
gpio8_29
0x1848
CTRL_CORE_PAD C21
_EMU0
emu0
gpio8_30
0x184C
CTRL_CORE_PAD C22
_EMU1
emu1
gpio8_31
0x185C
CTRL_CORE_PAD K24
_RESETN
resetn
0x1860
CTRL_CORE_PAD L24
_NMIN_DSP
nmin_dsp
0x1864
CTRL_CORE_PAD E20
_RSTOUTN
rstoutn
15
1. NA in table stands for Not Applicable.
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
115
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
4.5
www.ti.com
Connections for Unused Pins
This section describes the connection requirements of the unused and reserved balls.
NOTE
The following balls are reserved: K20, L19, G20
These balls must be left unconnected.
NOTE
All unused power supply balls must be supplied with the voltages specified in the
Section 5.4, Recommended Operating Conditions, unless alternative tie-off options are
included in Section 4.3, Signal Descriptions.
Table 4-32. Unused Balls Specific Connection Requirements
BALLS
CONNECTION REQUIREMENTS
Y12 / AC11 / L22 / AC10 / AB10 / AD22 / Y24 / V24 / R24
These balls must be connected to GND through an external pull
resistor if unused.
K21 / L24 / K24 / G22 / G23 / L21 / G21 / F23 / AE22 / Y25 / V25 /
R25
These balls must be connect to the corresponding power supply
through an external pull resistor if unused.
F20 (vpp)
This ball must be left unconnected if unused.
NOTE
All other unused signal balls with a Pad Configuration register can be left unconnected with
their internal pullup or pulldown resistor enabled.
NOTE
All other unused signal balls without a Pad Configuration register can be left unconnected.
116
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
5 Specifications
NOTE
For more information, see Power, Reset, and Clock Management / PRCM Subsystem
Environment / External Voltage Inputs or Initialization / Preinitialization / Power Requirements
section of the Device TRM.
NOTE
The index number 1 which is part of the EMIF1 signal prefixes (ddr1_*) listed in Table 4-6,
EMIF Signal Descriptions, column "SIGNAL NAME" not to be confused with DDR1 type of
SDRAM memories.
NOTE
Audio Back End (ABE) module is not supported for this family of devices, but “ABE” name is
still present in some clock or DPLL names.
CAUTION
All IO Cells are NOT Fail-safe compliant and should not be externally driven in
absence of their IO supply.
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
117
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
5.1
www.ti.com
Absolute Maximum Ratings
over operating free-air temperature range (unless otherwise noted) (1)
PARAMETER(1)
VSUPPLY (Steady-State)
VIO (Steady-State)
SR
VIO (Transient Overshoot /
Undershoot)
Supply Voltage Ranges (SteadyState)
Input and Output Voltage Ranges
(Steady-State)
MIN
MAX
UNIT
Core (vdd, vdd_dsp)
-0.3
1.5
V
Analog (vdda_usb1, vdda_usb2,
vdda_per, vdda_ddr, vdda_debug,
vdda_mpu_abe, vdda_usb3,
vdda_csi, vdda_core_gmac,
vdda_gpu, dda_hdmi, vdda_pcie,
vdda_video, vdda_osc)
-0.3
2.0
V
Analog 3.3V (vdda33v_usb1,
vdda33v_usb2)
-0.3
3.8
V
vdds18v, vdds18v_ddr1,
vdds_mlbp, vdds_ddr1
-0.3
2.1
V
vddshv1, vddshv3, vddshv4,
vddshv7-11 (1.8V mode)
-0.3
2.1
V
vddshv1, vddshv3, vddshv4,
vddshv7, vddshv9-11 (3.3V mode)
-0.3
3.8
V
vddshv8 (3.3V mode)
-0.3
3.6
V
Core I/Os
-0.3
1.5
V
Analog I/Os (except HDMI)
-0.3
2.0
V
HDMI I/Os
-0.3
3.5
V
I/O 1.35V
-0.3
1.65
V
I/O 1.5V
-0.3
1.8
V
1.8V I/Os
-0.3
2.1
V
3.3V I/Os (except those powered by
vddshv8)
-0.3
3.8
V
3.3V I/Os (powered by vddshv8)
-0.3
3.6
V
5
Maximum slew rate, all supplies
Input and Output Voltage Ranges (Transient Overshoot/Undershoot)
Note: valid for up to 20% of the signal period. See Figure 5-1, IO transient
voltage ranges.
10
V/s
0.2 ×
VDD (4)
V
TSTG
Storage temperature range after soldered onto PC Board
-55
+150
°C
Latch-up I-Test
I-test(5), All I/Os (if different levels then one line per level)
-100
100
mA
Over-voltage Test(6), All supplies (if different levels then one line per level)
N/A
1.5 ×
Vsupply
max
V
Latch-up OV-Test
(1) Stresses beyond those listed as absolute maximum ratings may cause permanent damage to the device. These are stress ratings only,
and functional operation of the device at these or any other conditions beyond those listed under Section 5.4, Recommended Operating
Conditions, is not implied. Exposure to absolute maximum rated conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability.
(2) All voltage values are with respect to VSS, unless otherwise noted.
(3) See I/Os supplied by this power pin in Table 4-1 Pin Attributes
(4) VDD is the voltage on the corresponding power-supply pin(s) for the IO.
(5) Per JEDEC JESD78 at 125°C with specified I/O pin injection current and clamp voltage of 1.5 times maximum recommended I/O
voltage and negative 0.5 times maximum recommended I/O voltage.
(6) Per JEDEC JESD78 at 125°C.
(7) The maximum valid input voltage on an IO pin cannot exceed 0.3 volts when the supply powering the IO is turned off. This requirement
applies to all the IO pins which are not fail-safe and for all values of IO supply voltage. Special attention should be applied anytime
peripheral devices are not powered from the same power sources used to power the respective IO supply. It is important the attached
peripheral never sources a voltage outside the valid input voltage range, including power supply ramp-up and ramp-down sequences.
118
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Overshoot = 20% of nominal
IO supply voltage
Tovershoot
Nominal IO
supply voltage
Tperiod
Tundershoot
VSS
Undershoot = 20% of nominal
IO supply voltage
osus_sprs851
(1)
Tovershoot + Tundershoot < 20% of Tperiod
Figure 5-1. IO transient voltage ranges
5.2
ESD Ratings
VALUE
VESD Electrostatic discharge
Human-body model (HBM), per ANSI/ESDA/JEDEC
JS-001(1)
±1000
Charged-device model (CDM), per JEDEC
specification JESD22-C101 (2)
±250
UNIT
V
(1) JEDEC document JEP155 states that 500-V HBM allows safe manufacturing with a standard ESD control process.
(2) JEDEC document JEP157 states that 250-V CDM allows safe manufacturing with a standard ESD control process.
5.3
Power on Hours (POH) Limits
The information in the section below is provided solely for your convenience and does not extend or
modify the warranty provided under TI’s standard terms and conditions for TI semiconductor products.
NOTE
POH is a function of voltage, temperature and time. Usage at higher voltages and
temperatures will result in a reduction in POH.
Table 5-1. Power on Hour (POH) Limits(1)
OPERATING CONDITION
COMMERCIAL JUNCTION
TEMP RANGE 0°C ~ 90°C
EXTENDED JUNCTION TEMP RANGE -40°C ~ 105°C
OPP
HDMI
JUNCTION
TEMP (Tj)
LIFETIME
(POH)
JUNCTION
TEMP (Tj)
LIFETIME
(POH)
JUNCTION
TEMP (Tj)
LIFETIME
(POH)
ALL
Not Used
90°C
100k
100°C
100k
105°C
100k (3)
Used(2)
90°C
100k
100°C
63k
105°C
45k
(1) Unless specified in Table 5-1, all voltage domains and operating conditions are supported in the device at the noted temperatures.
(2) Power-on hours (POH) assume HDMI is used at the maximum supported bit rate continuously and/or operating the device continuously
at the VD_MPU operating point (OPP) noted.
(3) 90k POH only if SuperSpeed USB 3.0 Dual-Role-Device (at 5 Gbps) or PCIe in Gen-II mode (at 5 Gbps) are used.
5.4
Recommended Operating Conditions
over operating free-air temperature range (unless otherwise noted)
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
MIN (2)
NOM
MAX DC (3)
MAX (2)
UNIT
Input Power Supply Voltage Range
vdd
Core voltage domain supply
See Section 5.5
V
vdd_dsp
DSP voltage domain supply
See Section 5.5
V
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
119
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Recommended Operating Conditions (continued)
over operating free-air temperature range (unless otherwise noted)
PARAMETER
vdda_usb1
DESCRIPTION
DPLL_USB and HS USB1 1.8V
analog power supply
MIN (2)
NOM
MAX DC (3)
MAX (2)
1.71
1.80
1.836
1.89
1.71
1.80
1.836
1.89
Maximum noise (peak-peak)
vdda_usb2
HS USB2 1.8V analog power supply
50
Maximum noise (peak-peak)
vdda33v_usb1(5)
HS USB1 3.3V analog power supply
3.135
vdda33v_usb2(5)
HS USB2 3.3V analog power supply
3.135
PER PLL and PER HSDIVIDER
analog power supply
DPLL_DDR and DDR HSDIVIDER
analog power supply
1.71
DPLL_DEBUG analog power supply
DPLL_CORE and CORE HSDIVIDER
analog power supply
1.80
1.71
1.80
1.71
1.80
DPLL_GPU analog power supply
1.71
1.80
vdda_hdmi
PLL_HDMI and HDMI analog power
supply
DPLL_PCIe_REF and PCIe analog
power supply
1.71
1.80
1.71
1.80
DPLL_USB_OTG_SS and USB3.0
RX/TX analog power supply
1.71
1.80
DPLL_VIDEO1 analog power supply
MLBP IO power supply
1.71
1.80
DPLL_MPU analog power supply
HFOSC analog power supply
CSI Interface 1.8v Supply
1.80
1.71
1.80
1.8V power supply
EMIF1 bias power supply
1.71
1.80
1.71
1.80
1.89
1.836
1.89
Specifications
1.80
50
V
mVPPmax
V
mVPPmax
1.836
1.89
1.836
1.89
1.836
1.89
1.836
1.89
V
mVPPmax
V
mVPPmax
V
mVPPmax
V
mVPPmax
1.89
V
mVPPmax
1.836
1.89
V
mVPPmax
1.89
V
mVPPmax
1.836
1.89
1.836
1.89
V
mVPPmax
50
1.71
V
mVPPmax
50
Maximum noise (peak-peak)
120
1.836
V
mVPPmax
50
Maximum noise (peak-peak)
vdds18v_ddr1
1.89
50
Maximum noise (peak-peak)
vdds18v
1.836
1.80
1.71
Maximum noise (peak-peak)
vdda_csi
1.89
50
Maximum noise (peak-peak)
vdda_osc
1.836
50
1.71
V
mVPPmax
50
Maximum noise (peak-peak)
vdda_mpu_abe
1.89
50
Maximum noise (peak-peak)
vdds_mlbp
1.836
50
Maximum noise (peak-peak)
vdda_video
V
mVPPmax
50
Maximum noise (peak-peak)
vdda_usb3
3.465
50
Maximum noise (peak-peak)
vdda_pcie
3.366
50
Maximum noise (peak-peak)
V
mVPPmax
50
Maximum noise (peak-peak)
vdda_gpu
1.80
1.71
Maximum noise (peak-peak)
vdda_core_gmac
3.465
50
Maximum noise (peak-peak)
vdda_debug
3.366
50
Maximum noise (peak-peak)
vdda_ddr
3.3
V
mVPPmax
50
Maximum noise (peak-peak)
vdda_per
3.3
V
mVPPmax
50
Maximum noise (peak-peak)
UNIT
V
mVPPmax
1.836
1.89
V
mVPPmax
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Recommended Operating Conditions (continued)
over operating free-air temperature range (unless otherwise noted)
PARAMETER
vdds_ddr1
DESCRIPTION
MIN (2)
NOM
MAX DC (3)
MAX (2)
EMIF1 power supply
(1.5V for DDR3 mode /
1.35V DDR3L mode)
1.35-V
Mode
1.28
1.35
1.377
1.42
1.5-V Mode
1.43
1.50
1.53
1.57
Maximum noise (peakpeak)
1.35-V
Mode
50
UNIT
V
mVPPmax
1.5-V Mode
vddshv1
vddshv10
vddshv11
vddshv3
vddshv4
vddshv7
vddshv8
vddshv9
Dual Voltage (1.8V or
3.3V) power supply for
the VIN2 Power Group
pins
1.8-V Mode
1.71
1.80
1.836
1.89
3.3-V Mode
3.135
3.30
3.366
3.465
Maximum noise (peakpeak)
1.8-V Mode
50
V
mVPPmax
3.3-V Mode
Dual Voltage (1.8V or
1.8-V Mode
3.3V) power supply for
3.3-V Mode
the GPMC Power Group
pins
1.71
1.80
1.836
1.89
3.135
3.30
3.366
3.465
Maximum noise (peakpeak)
1.8-V Mode
50
Dual Voltage (1.8V or
3.3V) power supply for
the MMC2 Power Group
pins
1.8-V Mode
1.71
1.80
1.836
1.89
3.3-V Mode
3.135
3.30
3.366
3.465
Maximum noise (peakpeak)
1.8-V Mode
Dual Voltage (1.8V or
3.3V) power supply for
the GENERAL Power
Group pins
1.8-V Mode
1.71
1.80
1.836
1.89
3.3-V Mode
3.135
3.30
3.366
3.465
Maximum noise (peakpeak)
1.8-V Mode
Dual Voltage (1.8V or
3.3V) power supply for
the MMC4 Power Group
pins
1.8-V Mode
1.71
1.80
1.836
1.89
3.3-V Mode
3.135
3.30
3.366
3.465
Maximum noise (peakpeak)
1.8-V Mode
Dual Voltage (1.8V or
3.3V) power supply for
the WIFI Power Group
pins
1.8-V Mode
1.71
1.80
1.836
1.89
3.3-V Mode
3.135
3.30
3.366
3.465
Maximum noise (peakpeak)
1.8-V Mode
Dual Voltage (1.8V or
3.3V) power supply for
the MMC1 Power Group
pins
1.8-V Mode
1.71
1.80
1.836
1.89
3.3-V Mode
3.135
3.30
3.366
3.465
Maximum noise (peakpeak)
1.8-V Mode
Dual Voltage (1.8V or
3.3V) power supply for
the RGMII Power Group
pins
1.8-V Mode
1.71
1.80
1.836
1.89
3.3-V Mode
3.135
3.30
3.366
3.465
Maximum noise (peakpeak)
1.8-V Mode
V
mVPPmax
3.3-V Mode
50
V
mVPPmax
3.3-V Mode
50
V
mVPPmax
3.3-V Mode
50
V
mVPPmax
3.3-V Mode
50
V
mVPPmax
3.3-V Mode
50
V
mVPPmax
3.3-V Mode
50
V
mVPPmax
3.3-V Mode
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
121
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Recommended Operating Conditions (continued)
over operating free-air temperature range (unless otherwise noted)
PARAMETER
MIN (2)
DESCRIPTION
NOM
MAX DC (3)
MAX (2)
UNIT
vss
Ground supply
0
V
vssa_osc0
OSC0 analog ground
0
V
vssa_osc1
OSC1 analog ground
TJ(1)
Operating junction
temperature range
ddr1_vref0
0
Commercial
Extended
V
0
90
-40
105
Reference Power Supply EMIF1
0.5 × vdds_ddr1
°C
V
(1) Refer to Power on Hours table for limitations.
(2) The voltage at the device ball should never be below the MIN voltage or above the MAX voltage for any amount of time. This
requirement includes dynamic voltage events such as AC ripple, voltage transients, voltage dips, etc.
(3) The DC voltage at the device ball should never be above the MAX DC voltage to avoid impact on device reliability and lifetime POH
(Power-On-Hours). The MAX DC voltage is defined as the highest allowed DC regulated voltage, without transients, seen at the ball.
(4) Logic functions and parameter values are not assured out of the range specified in the recommended operating conditions.
(5) USB Analog supply also powers digital IO buffers. This supply cannot be tied to VSS if USB is unused since digital IO buffers must be
powered during device operation.
5.5
Operating Performance Points
This section describes the operating conditions of the device. This section also contains the description of
each OPP (operating performance point) for processor clocks and device core clocks.
Table 5-2 describes the maximum supported frequency per speed grade for AM570x devices.
Table 5-2. Speed Grade Maximum Frequency(1)(2)
DEVICE SPEED
MAXIMUM FREQUENCY (MHz)
MPU
DSP
IPU
IVA
GPU
L3
DDR3 / DDR3L
AM5708xxJ
1000
750
212.8
532
425
266
667 (DDR3-1333)
AM5706xxJ
1000
750
212.8
N/A
N/A
266
667 (DDR3-1333)
AM5706xxD
500
500
212.8
N/A
N/A
266
533 (DDR3-1066)
(1) N/A stands for Not Applicable.
(2) If the corresponding core is not available in the respective subdevice, the value shall be read as N/A. For more information, see Table 31, Device Comparison.
5.5.1
AVS and ABB Requirements
Adaptive Voltage Scaling (AVS) and Adaptive Body Biasing (ABB) are required on most of the vdd_*
supplies as defined in Table 5-3.
Table 5-3. AVS and ABB Requirements per vdd_* Supply
SUPPLY
VOLTAGE DOMAIN
AVS REQUIRED?
vdd
VD_CORE
Yes, for all OPPs
No
VD_SGX
Yes, for all OPPs
Yes, for all OPPs
VD_MPU
Yes, for all OPPs
Yes, for all OPPs
VD_DSP
Yes, for all OPPs
Yes, for all OPPs
VD_IVA
Yes, for all OPPs
Yes, for all OPPs
vdd_dsp
5.5.2
ABB REQUIRED?
Voltage And Core Clock Specifications
Table 5-4 shows the recommended OPP per voltage domain.
122
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 5-4. Voltage Domains Operating Performance Points (1)
DOMAIN
CONDITION
VD_CORE (V)
VD_DSP (V)
(8)
(9)
OPP_NOM
OPP_HIGH
MIN (3)
NOM (2)
MAX (3)
MIN (3)
NOM (2)
MAX DC (4)
BOOT (Before AVS is
enabled) (5)
1.11
1.15
1.2
Not Applicable
After AVS is enabled (5)
AVS
Voltage
(6)
– 3.5%
AVS
Voltage
1.2
Not Applicable
BOOT (Before AVS is
enabled) (5)
1.02
1.06
1.16
Not Applicable
After AVS is enabled (5)
AVS
Voltage(6)
– 3.5%
AVS
Voltage
1.2
MAX (3)
(6)
(6)
AVS
Voltage(6)
– 3.5%
AVS
Voltage (6)
AVS
Voltage (6)
+2%
AVS
Voltage(6)
+ 5%
(1) The voltage ranges in this table are preliminary, and final voltage ranges may be different than shown. Systems should be designed with
the ability to modify the voltage to comply with future recommendations.
(2) In a typical implementation, the power supply should target the NOM voltage.
(3) The voltage at the device ball should never be below the MIN voltage or above the MAX voltage for any amount of time. This
requirement includes dynamic voltage events such as AC ripple, voltage transients, voltage dips, etc.
(4) The DC voltage at the device ball should never be above the MAX DC voltage to avoid impact on device reliability and lifetime POH
(Power-On-Hours). The MAX DC voltage is defined as the highest allowed DC regulated voltage, without transients, seen at the ball.
(5) For all OPPs, AVS must be enabled to avoid impact on device reliability, lifetime POH (Power-On-Hours), and device power.
(6) The AVS voltages are device-dependent, voltage domain-dependent, and OPP-dependent. They must be read from the
STD_FUSE_OPP Registers. For information about STD_FUSE_OPP Registers address, please refer to Control Module Section of the
TRM. The power supply should be adjustable over the following ranges for each required OPP:
– OPP_NOM for DSP: 0.85 V – 1.15 V
– OPP_NOM for CORE: 0.85 V - 1.15 V
– OPP_HIGH: 1.01 V - 1.25 V
The AVS voltages will be within the above specified ranges.
(7) The power supply must be programmed with the AVS voltages for the CORE voltage domain, either just after the ROM boot or at the
earliest possible time in the secondary boot loader before there is significant activity seen on these domains.
(8) The package routes VD_CORE (vdd) to the VD_MPU, VD_SGX, VD_CORE and VD_RTC domains on the die.
(9) The package routes VD_DSP (vdd_dsp) to the VD_DSPEVE and VD_IVA domains on the die.
Table 5-5 describes the standard processor clocks speed characteristics vs OPP of the device.
Table 5-5. Supported OPP vs Max Frequency (2)
DESCRIPTION
OPP_NOM
OPP_HIGH
MAXIMUM FREQUENCY (MHz)
MAXIMUM FREQUENCY (MHz)
MPU_CLK
1000
N/A
VD_CORE
GPU_CLK
425.6
N/A
CORE_IPUx_CLK
212.8
N/A
L3_CLK
266
N/A
DDR3 / DDR3L
667 (DDR3-1333)
N/A
IVA_GCLK
388.3
532
DSP_CLK
600
750
VD_DSP
(1) N/A stands for Not Applicable.
(2) Maximum supported frequency is limited according to the Device Speed Grade (see Table 5-2).
5.5.3
Maximum Supported Frequency
Device modules either receive their clock directly from an external clock input, directly from a PLL, or from
a PRCM. Table 5-6 lists the clock source options for each module on this device, along with the maximum
frequency that module can accept. To ensure proper module functionality, the device PLLs and dividers
must be programmed not to exceed the maximum frequencies listed in this table.
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
123
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 5-6. Maximum Supported Frequency
MODULE
CLOCK SOURCES
INSTANCE NAME
INPUT CLOCK
NAME
CLOCK
TYPE
MAX. CLOCK
ALLOWED
(MHz)
AES1
AES1_L3_CLK
Int
266
L4SEC_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
AES2
AES2_L3_CLK
Int
266
L4SEC_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
BB2D
BB2D_FCLK
Func
354.6
BB2D_GFCLK
BB2D_GFCLK
DPLL_CORE
BB2D_ICLK
Int
266
DSS_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
COUNTER_32K
COUNTER_32K_FC
LK
Func
0.032
FUNC_32K_CLK
SYS_CLK1/610
OSC0
COUNTER_32K_ICL
K
Int
38.4
WKUPAON_GICLK
SYS_CLK1
OSC0
DPLL_ABE_X2_CL
K
DPLL_ABE
CTRL_MODULE_B L3INSTR_TS_GCLK
ANDGAP
Int
SYS_CLK1
OSC0
DPLL_ABE_X2_CL
K
DPLL_ABE
CTRL_MODULE_C
ORE
L4CFG_L4_GICLK
Int
133
L4CFG_L4_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
CTRL_MODULE_
WKUP
WKUPAON_GICLK
Int
38.4
WKUPAON_GICLK
DCAN1
DCAN1_FCLK
Func
38.4
DCAN1_SYS_CLK
DCAN1_ICLK
Int
266
WKUPAON_GICLK
DCAN2
4.8
PRCM CLOCK NAME
PLL / OSC /
SOURCE CLOCK
NAME
PLL / OSC /
SOURCE NAME
L3INSTR_TS_GCLK
SYS_CLK1
OSC0
DPLL_ABE_X2_CL
K
DPLL_ABE
SYS_CLK1
OSC0
SYS_CLK2
OSC1
SYS_CLK1
OSC0
DPLL_ABE_X2_CL
K
DPLL_ABE
DCAN2_FCLK
Func
38.4
DCAN2_SYS_CLK
SYS_CLK1
OSC0
DCAN2_ICLK
Int
266
L4PER2_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
DES3DES
DES_CLK_L3
Int
266
L4SEC_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
DLL
EMIF_DLL_FCLK
Func
EMIF_DLL_FC
LK
EMIF_DLL_GCLK
EMIF_DLL_GCLK
DPLL_DDR
DLL_AGING
FCLK
Int
38.4
L3INSTR_DLL_AGING
_GCLK
SYS_CLK1
OSC0
DPLL_ABE_X2_CL
K
DPLL_ABE
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
DMM
DMM_CLK
Int
266
EMIF_L3_GICLK
DPLL_DEBUG
SYSCLK
Int
38.4
EMU_SYS_CLK
SYS_CLK1
OSC0
DSP1
DSP1_FICLK
Int &
Func
DSP_CLK
DSP1_GFCLK
DSP_GFCLK
DPLL_DSP
124
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 5-6. Maximum Supported Frequency (continued)
MODULE
INSTANCE NAME
DSS
INPUT CLOCK
NAME
CLOCK
TYPE
DSS_HDMI_CEC_C
LK
Func
0.032
HDMI_CEC_GFCLK
SYS_CLK1/610
OSC0
DSS_HDMI_PHY_C
LK
Func
48
HDMI_PHY_GFCLK
FUNC_192M_CLK
DPLL_PER
DSS_CLK
Func
192
DSS_GFCLK
DSS_CLK
DPLL_PER
HDMI_CLKINP
Func
38.4
HDMI_DPLL_CLK
SYS_CLK1
OSC0
PRCM CLOCK NAME
PLL / OSC /
SOURCE CLOCK
NAME
PLL / OSC /
SOURCE NAME
SYS_CLK2
OSC1
DSS_L3_ICLK
Int
266
DSS_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
VIDEO1_CLKINP
Func
38.4
VIDEO1_DPLL_CLK
SYS_CLK1
OSC0
SYS_CLK2
OSC1
SYS_CLK1
OSC0
SYS_CLK2
OSC1
VIDEO2_CLKINP
DSS DISPC
CLOCK SOURCES
MAX. CLOCK
ALLOWED
(MHz)
Func
DPLL_DSI1_A_CLK
1
Func
DPLL_DSI1_B_CLK
1
Func
38.4
209.3
209.3
209.3
VIDEO2_DPLL_CLK
N/A
N/A
N/A
HDMI_CLK
DPLL_HDMI
VIDEO1_CLKOUT
1
DPLL_VIDEO1
VIDEO1_CLKOUT
3
DPLL_VIDEO1
HDMI_CLK
DPLL_HDMI
DPLL_ABE_X2_CL
K
DPLL_ABE
DPLL_DSI1_C_CLK
1
Func
HDMI_CLK
DPLL_HDMI
VIDEO1_CLKOUT
3
DPLL_VIDEO1
DPLL_HDMI_CLK1
Func
185.6
N/A
HDMI_CLK
DPLL_HDMI
LCD1_CLK
Func
209.3
N/A
DPLL_DSI1_A_CL
K1
See DSS data in
the rows above
LCD2_CLK
Func
209.3
N/A
DPLL_DSI1_B_CL
K1
LCD3_CLK
Func
209.3
N/A
DPLL_DSI1_C_CL
K1
DSS_CLK
DSS_CLK
DSS_CLK
F_CLK
Func
209.3
N/A
DPLL_DSI1_A_CL
K1
DPLL_DSI1_B_CL
K1
DPLL_DSI1_C_CL
K1
DSS_CLK
DPLL_HDMI_CLK1
EFUSE_CTRL_CU
ST
ocp_clk
Int
133
CUSTEFUSE_L4_GICL
K
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
sys_clk
Func
38.4
CUSTEFUSE_SYS_GF
CLK
SYS_CLK1
OSC0
ELM
ELM_ICLK
Int
266
L4PER_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
EMIF_OCP_FW
L3_CLK
Int
266
EMIF_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
EMIF_PHY1
EMIF_PHY1_FCLK
Func
DDR
EMIF_PHY_GCLK
EMIF_PHY_GCLK
DPLL_DDR
EMIF1
EMIF1_ICLK
Int
266
EMIF_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
125
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 5-6. Maximum Supported Frequency (continued)
MODULE
CLOCK SOURCES
INSTANCE NAME
INPUT CLOCK
NAME
CLOCK
TYPE
MAX. CLOCK
ALLOWED
(MHz)
GMAC_SW
CPTS_RFT_CLK
Func
266
GPIO1
GPIO3
GPIO4
GPIO5
GPIO6
GPIO7
GPIO8
GPMC
126
GMAC_RFT_CLK
PLL / OSC /
SOURCE CLOCK
NAME
PLL / OSC /
SOURCE NAME
PER_ABE_X1_GF
CLK
DPLL_ABE
VIDEO1_CLK
DPLL_VIDEO1
HDMI_CLK
DPLL_HDMI
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
MAIN_CLK
Int
125
GMAC_MAIN_CLK
GMAC_250M_CLK
DPLL_GMAC
MHZ_250_CLK
Func
250
GMII_250MHZ_CLK
GMII_250MHZ_CL
K
DPLL_GMAC
MHZ_5_CLK
Func
5
RGMII_5MHZ_CLK
GMAC_RMII_HS_
CLK
DPLL_GMAC
MHZ_50_CLK
Func
50
RMII_50MHZ_CLK
GMAC_RMII_HS_
CLK
DPLL_GMAC
RMII1_MHZ_50_CL
K
Func
50
RMII_50MHZ_CLK
GMAC_RMII_HS_
CLK
DPLL_GMAC
RMII2_MHZ_50_CL
K
Func
50
RMII_50MHZ_CLK
GMAC_RMII_HS_
CLK
DPLL_GMAC
GPIO1_ICLK
Int
38.4
WKUPAON_GICLK
GPIO1_DBCLK
GPIO2
PRCM CLOCK NAME
Func
0.032
WKUPAON_SYS_GFC
LK
SYS_CLK1
OSC0
DPLL_ABE_X2_CL
K
DPLL_ABE
WKUPAON_32K_
GFCLK
OSC0
GPIO2_ICLK
Int
266
L4PER_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
GPIO2_DBCLK
Func
0.032
GPIO_GFCLK
FUNC_32K_CLK
OSC0
DPLL_CORE
GPIO3_ICLK
Int
266
L4PER_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
GPIO3_DBCLK
Func
0.032
GPIO_GFCLK
FUNC_32K_CLK
OSC0
GPIO4_ICLK
Int
266
L4PER_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
GPIO4_DBCLK
Func
0.032
GPIO_GFCLK
FUNC_32K_CLK
OSC0
PIDBCLK
Func
0.032
GPIO_GFCLK
GPIO5_ICLK
Int
266
L4PER_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
GPIO5_DBCLK
Func
0.032
GPIO_GFCLK
FUNC_32K_CLK
OSC0
PIDBCLK
Func
0.032
GPIO_GFCLK
GPIO6_ICLK
Int
266
L4PER_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
GPIO6_DBCLK
Func
0.032
GPIO_GFCLK
FUNC_32K_CLK
OSC0
PIDBCLK
Func
0.032
GPIO_GFCLK
GPIO7_ICLK
Int
266
L4PER_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
GPIO7_DBCLK
Func
0.032
GPIO_GFCLK
FUNC_32K_CLK
OSC0
PIDBCLK
Func
0.032
GPIO_GFCLK
GPIO8_ICLK
Int
266
L4PER_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
GPIO8_DBCLK
Func
0.032
GPIO_GFCLK
FUNC_32K_CLK
OSC0
PIDBCLK
Func
0.032
GPIO_GFCLK
GPMC_FCLK
Int
266
L3MAIN1_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 5-6. Maximum Supported Frequency (continued)
MODULE
CLOCK SOURCES
INSTANCE NAME
INPUT CLOCK
NAME
CLOCK
TYPE
MAX. CLOCK
ALLOWED
(MHz)
GPU
GPU_FCLK1
Func
GPU_CLK
GPU_FCLK2
Func
GPU_CLK
PRCM CLOCK NAME
PLL / OSC /
SOURCE CLOCK
NAME
PLL / OSC /
SOURCE NAME
GPU_CORE_GCLK
CORE_GPU_CLK
DPLL_CORE
GPU_HYD_GCLK
PER_GPU_CLK
DPLL_PER
GPU_GCLK
DPLL_GPU
CORE_GPU_CLK
DPLL_CORE
PER_GPU_CLK
DPLL_PER
GPU_GCLK
DPLL_GPU
GPU_ICLK
Int
266
GPU_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
HDMI PHY
DSS_HDMI_PHY_C
LK
Func
38.4
HDMI_PHY_GFCLK
FUNC_192M_CLK
DPLL_PER
HDQ1W
HDQ1W_ICLK
Int &
Func
266
L4PER_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
HDQ1W_FCLK
Func
12
PER_12M_GFCLK
FUNC_192M_CLK
DPLL_PER
DPLL_CORE
I2C1
I2C2
I2C3
I2C4
I2C1_ICLK
Int
266
L4PER_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
I2C1_FCLK
Func
96
PER_96M_GFCLK
FUNC_192M_CLK
DPLL_PER
I2C2_ICLK
Int
266
L4PER_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
I2C2_FCLK
Func
96
PER_96M_GFCLK
FUNC_192M_CLK
DPLL_PER
I2C3_ICLK
Int
266
L4PER_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
I2C3_FCLK
Func
96
PER_96M_GFCLK
FUNC_192M_CLK
DPLL_PER
DPLL_CORE
I2C4_ICLK
Int
266
L4PER_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
I2C4_FCLK
Func
96
PER_96M_GFCLK
FUNC_192M_CLK
DPLL_PER
I2C5_ICLK
Int
266
IPU_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
I2C5_FCLK
Func
96
IPU_96M_GFCLK
FUNC_192M_CLK
DPLL_PER
IEEE1500_2_OCP
PI_L3CLK
Int &
Func
266
L3INIT_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
IPU1
IPU1_GFCLK
Int &
Func
425.6
IPU1_GFCLK
DPLL_ABE_X2_CL
K
DPLL_ABE
CORE_IPU_ISS_B
OOST_CLK
DPLL_CORE
CORE_IPU_ISS_B
OOST_CLK
DPLL_CORE
I2C5
IPU2
IPU2_GFCLK
Int &
Func
425.6
IPU2_GFCLK
IVA
IVA_GCLK
Int
IVA_GCLK
IVA_GCLK
IVA_GFCLK
DPLL_IVA
KBD
KBD_FCLK
Func
0.032
WKUPAON_SYS_GFC
LK
WKUPAON_32K_
GFCLK
OSC0
PICLKKBD
Func
0.032
WKUPAON_SYS_GFC
LK
KBD_ICLK
Int
38.4
WKUPAON_GICLK
SYS_CLK1
OSC0
PICLKOCP
Int
38.4
WKUPAON_GICLK
DPLL_ABE_X2_CL
K
DPLL_ABE
L3_INSTR
L3_CLK
Int
L3_CLK
L3INSTR_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
L3_MAIN
L3_CLK1
Int
L3_CLK
L3MAIN1_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
L3_CLK2
Int
L3_CLK
L3INSTR_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
L4_CFG
L4_CFG_CLK
Int
133
L4CFG_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
L4_PER1
L4_PER1_CLK
Int
133
L4PER_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
L4_PER2
L4_PER2_CLK
Int
133
L4PER2_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
L4_PER3
L4_PER3_CLK
Int
133
L4PER3_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
L4_WKUP
L4_WKUP_CLK
Int
38.4
WKUPAON_GICLK
SYS_CLK1
OSC0
DPLL_ABE_X2_CL
K
DPLL_ABE
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
127
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 5-6. Maximum Supported Frequency (continued)
MODULE
CLOCK SOURCES
INSTANCE NAME
INPUT CLOCK
NAME
CLOCK
TYPE
MAX. CLOCK
ALLOWED
(MHz)
MAILBOX1
MAILBOX1_FLCK
Int
266
L4CFG_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
MAILBOX2
MAILBOX2_FLCK
Int
266
L4CFG_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
MAILBOX3
MAILBOX3_FLCK
Int
266
L4CFG_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
MAILBOX4
MAILBOX4_FLCK
Int
266
L4CFG_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
MAILBOX5
MAILBOX5_FLCK
Int
266
L4CFG_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
MAILBOX6
MAILBOX6_FLCK
Int
266
L4CFG_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
MAILBOX7
MAILBOX7_FLCK
Int
266
L4CFG_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
MAILBOX8
MAILBOX8_FLCK
Int
266
L4CFG_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
128
PRCM CLOCK NAME
PLL / OSC /
SOURCE CLOCK
NAME
PLL / OSC /
SOURCE NAME
MAILBOX9
MAILBOX9_FLCK
Int
266
L4CFG_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
MAILBOX10
MAILBOX10_FLCK
Int
266
L4CFG_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
MAILBOX11
MAILBOX11_FLCK
Int
266
L4CFG_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
MAILBOX12
MAILBOX12_FLCK
Int
266
L4CFG_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
MAILBOX13
MAILBOX13_FLCK
Int
266
L4CFG_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 5-6. Maximum Supported Frequency (continued)
MODULE
CLOCK SOURCES
INSTANCE NAME
INPUT CLOCK
NAME
CLOCK
TYPE
MAX. CLOCK
ALLOWED
(MHz)
McASP1
MCASP1_AHCLKR
Func
100
MCASP1_AHCLKX
MCASP1_FCLK
MCASP1_ICLK
Func
Func
Int
100
192
266
PRCM CLOCK NAME
PLL / OSC /
SOURCE CLOCK
NAME
PLL / OSC /
SOURCE NAME
MCASP1_AHCLKR
ABE_24M_GFCLK
DPLL_ABE
MCASP1_AHCLKX
MCASP1_AUX_GFCLK
IPU_L3_GICLK
ABE_SYS_CLK
OSC0
FUNC_24M_GFCL
K
DPLL_PER
ATL_CLK0
Module ATL
ATL_CLK1
Module ATL
ATL_CLK2
Module ATL
ATL_CLK3
Module ATL
SYS_CLK2
OSC1
XREF_CLK0
XREF_CLK0
XREF_CLK1
XREF_CLK1
XREF_CLK2
XREF_CLK2
XREF_CLK3
XREF_CLK3
MLB_CLK
Module MLB
MLBP_CLK
Module MLB
ABE_24M_GFCLK
DPLL_ABE
ABE_SYS_CLK
OSC0
FUNC_24M_GFCL
K
DPLL_PER
ATL_CLK0
Module ATL
ATL_CLK1
Module ATL
ATL_CLK2
Module ATL
ATL_CLK3
Module ATL
SYS_CLK2
OSC1
XREF_CLK0
XREF_CLK0
XREF_CLK1
XREF_CLK1
XREF_CLK2
XREF_CLK2
XREF_CLK3
XREF_CLK3
MLB_CLK
Module MLB
MLBP_CLK
Module MLB
PER_ABE_X1_GF
CLK
DPLL_ABE
VIDEO1_CLK
DPLL_VIDEO1
HDMI_CLK
DPLL_HDMI
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
129
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 5-6. Maximum Supported Frequency (continued)
MODULE
CLOCK SOURCES
INSTANCE NAME
INPUT CLOCK
NAME
CLOCK
TYPE
MAX. CLOCK
ALLOWED
(MHz)
McASP2
MCASP2_AHCLKR
Func
100
MCASP2_AHCLKX
MCASP2_FCLK
MCASP2_ICLK
130
Func
Func
Int
100
192
266
PRCM CLOCK NAME
PLL / OSC /
SOURCE CLOCK
NAME
PLL / OSC /
SOURCE NAME
MCASP2_AHCLKR
ABE_24M_GFCLK
DPLL_ABE
MCASP2_AHCLKX
MCASP2_AUX_GFCLK
L4PER2_L3_GICLK
Specifications
ABE_SYS_CLK
OSC0
FUNC_24M_GFCL
K
DPLL_PER
ATL_CLK0
Module ATL
ATL_CLK1
Module ATL
ATL_CLK2
Module ATL
ATL_CLK3
Module ATL
SYS_CLK2
OSC1
XREF_CLK0
XREF_CLK0
XREF_CLK1
XREF_CLK1
XREF_CLK2
XREF_CLK2
XREF_CLK3
XREF_CLK3
MLB_CLK
Module MLB
MLBP_CLK
Module MLB
ABE_24M_GFCLK
DPLL_ABE
ABE_SYS_CLK
OSC0
FUNC_24M_GFCL
K
DPLL_PER
ATL_CLK0
Module ATL
ATL_CLK1
Module ATL
ATL_CLK2
Module ATL
ATL_CLK3
Module ATL
SYS_CLK2
OSC1
XREF_CLK0
XREF_CLK0
XREF_CLK1
XREF_CLK1
XREF_CLK2
XREF_CLK2
XREF_CLK3
XREF_CLK3
MLB_CLK
Module MLB
MLBP_CLK
Module MLB
PER_ABE_X1_GF
CLK
DPLL_ABE
VIDEO1_CLK
DPLL_VIDEO1
HDMI_CLK
DPLL_HDMI
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 5-6. Maximum Supported Frequency (continued)
MODULE
CLOCK SOURCES
INSTANCE NAME
INPUT CLOCK
NAME
CLOCK
TYPE
MAX. CLOCK
ALLOWED
(MHz)
McASP3
MCASP3_AHCLKX
Func
100
MCASP3_FCLK
McASP4
Func
192
PRCM CLOCK NAME
PLL / OSC /
SOURCE CLOCK
NAME
PLL / OSC /
SOURCE NAME
MCASP3_AHCLKX
ABE_24M_GFCLK
DPLL_ABE
MCASP3_AUX_GFCLK
ABE_SYS_CLK
OSC0
FUNC_24M_GFCL
K
DPLL_PER
ATL_CLK0
Module ATL
ATL_CLK1
Module ATL
ATL_CLK2
Module ATL
ATL_CLK3
Module ATL
SYS_CLK2
OSC1
XREF_CLK0
XREF_CLK0
XREF_CLK1
XREF_CLK1
XREF_CLK2
XREF_CLK2
XREF_CLK3
XREF_CLK3
MLB_CLK
Module MLB
MLBP_CLK
Module MLB
PER_ABE_X1_GF
CLK
DPLL_ABE
VIDEO1_CLK
DPLL_ABE
HDMI_CLK
DPLL_HDMI
MCASP3_ICLK
Int
266
L4PER2_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
MCASP4_AHCLKX
Func
100
MCASP4_AHCLKX
ABE_24M_GFCLK
DPLL_ABE
ABE_SYS_CLK
OSC0
FUNC_24M_GFCL
K
DPLL_PER
ATL_CLK0
Module ATL
ATL_CLK1
Module ATL
ATL_CLK2
Module ATL
ATL_CLK3
Module ATL
SYS_CLK2
OSC1
XREF_CLK0
XREF_CLK0
XREF_CLK1
XREF_CLK1
XREF_CLK2
XREF_CLK2
XREF_CLK3
XREF_CLK3
MLB_CLK
Module MLB
MLBP_CLK
Module MLB
PER_ABE_X1_GF
CLK
DPLL_ABE
MCASP4_FCLK
MCASP4_ICLK
Func
Int
192
266
MCASP4_AUX_GFCLK
L4PER2_L3_GICLK
VIDEO1_CLK
DPLL_ABE
HDMI_CLK
DPLL_HDMI
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
131
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 5-6. Maximum Supported Frequency (continued)
MODULE
CLOCK SOURCES
INSTANCE NAME
INPUT CLOCK
NAME
CLOCK
TYPE
MAX. CLOCK
ALLOWED
(MHz)
McASP5
MCASP5_AHCLKX
Func
100
MCASP5_FCLK
McASP6
192
PLL / OSC /
SOURCE CLOCK
NAME
PLL / OSC /
SOURCE NAME
MCASP5_AHCLKX
ABE_24M_GFCLK
DPLL_ABE
MCASP5_AUX_GFCLK
MCASP5_ICLK
Int
266
L4PER2_L3_GICLK
MCASP6_AHCLKX
Func
100
MCASP6_AHCLKX
MCASP6_FCLK
MCASP6_ICLK
132
Func
PRCM CLOCK NAME
Func
Int
192
266
MCASP6_AUX_GFCLK
L4PER2_L3_GICLK
Specifications
ABE_SYS_CLK
OSC0
FUNC_24M_GFCL
K
DPLL_PER
ATL_CLK0
Module ATL
ATL_CLK1
Module ATL
ATL_CLK2
Module ATL
ATL_CLK3
Module ATL
SYS_CLK2
OSC1
XREF_CLK0
XREF_CLK0
XREF_CLK1
XREF_CLK1
XREF_CLK2
XREF_CLK2
XREF_CLK3
XREF_CLK3
MLB_CLK
Module MLB
MLBP_CLK
Module MLB
PER_ABE_X1_GF
CLK
DPLL_ABE
VIDEO1_CLK
DPLL_ABE
HDMI_CLK
DPLL_HDMI
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
ABE_24M_GFCLK
DPLL_ABE
FUNC_24M_GFCL
K
DPLL_PER
ATL_CLK0
Module ATL
ATL_CLK1
Module ATL
ATL_CLK2
Module ATL
ATL_CLK3
Module ATL
MLB_CLK
Module MLB
MLBP_CLK
Module MLB
ABE_SYS_CLK
OSC0
SYS_CLK2
OSC1
XREF_CLK0
XREF_CLK0
XREF_CLK1
XREF_CLK1
XREF_CLK2
XREF_CLK2
XREF_CLK3
XREF_CLK3
PER_ABE_X1_GF
CLK
DPLL_ABE
VIDEO1_CLK
DPLL_ABE
HDMI_CLK
DPLL_HDMI
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 5-6. Maximum Supported Frequency (continued)
MODULE
CLOCK SOURCES
INSTANCE NAME
INPUT CLOCK
NAME
CLOCK
TYPE
MAX. CLOCK
ALLOWED
(MHz)
McASP7
MCASP7_AHCLKX
Func
100
MCASP7_FCLK
McASP8
McSPI2
McSPI3
192
PLL / OSC /
SOURCE CLOCK
NAME
PLL / OSC /
SOURCE NAME
MCASP7_AHCLKX
ABE_24M_GFCLK
DPLL_ABE
MCASP7_AUX_GFCLK
ABE_SYS_CLK
OSC0
FUNC_24M_GFCL
K
DPLL_PER
ATL_CLK0
Module ATL
ATL_CLK1
Module ATL
ATL_CLK2
Module ATL
ATL_CLK3
Module ATL
SYS_CLK2
OSC1
XREF_CLK0
XREF_CLK0
XREF_CLK1
XREF_CLK1
XREF_CLK2
XREF_CLK2
XREF_CLK3
XREF_CLK3
MLB_CLK
Module MLB
MLBP_CLK
Module MLB
PER_ABE_X1_GF
CLK
DPLL_ABE
VIDEO1_CLK
DPLL_ABE
HDMI_CLK
DPLL_HDMI
MCASP7_ICLK
Int
266
L4PER2_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
MCASP8_AHCLKX
Func
100
MCASP8_AHCLKX
ABE_24M_GFCLK
DPLL_ABE
ABE_SYS_CLK
OSC0
FUNC_24M_GFCL
K
DPLL_PER
ATL_CLK0
Module ATL
ATL_CLK1
Module ATL
ATL_CLK2
Module ATL
ATL_CLK3
Module ATL
SYS_CLK2
OSC1
XREF_CLK0
XREF_CLK0
XREF_CLK1
XREF_CLK1
XREF_CLK2
XREF_CLK2
XREF_CLK3
XREF_CLK3
MLB_CLK
Module MLB
MLBP_CLK
Module MLB
PER_ABE_X1_GF
CLK
DPLL_ABE
MCASP8_FCLK
McSPI1
Func
PRCM CLOCK NAME
Func
192
MCASP8_AUX_GFCLK
VIDEO1_CLK
DPLL_ABE
HDMI_CLK
DPLL_HDMI
MCASP8_ICLK
Int
266
L4PER2_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
SPI1_ICLK
Int
266
L4PER_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
SPI1_FCLK
Func
48
PER_48M_GFCLK
PER_48M_GFCLK
DPLL_PER
DPLL_CORE
SPI2_ICLK
Int
266
L4PER_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
SPI2_FCLK
Func
48
PER_48M_GFCLK
PER_48M_GFCLK
DPLL_PER
SPI3_ICLK
Int
266
L4PER_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
SPI3_FCLK
Func
48
PER_48M_GFCLK
PER_48M_GFCLK
DPLL_PER
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
133
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 5-6. Maximum Supported Frequency (continued)
MODULE
CLOCK SOURCES
INSTANCE NAME
INPUT CLOCK
NAME
CLOCK
TYPE
MAX. CLOCK
ALLOWED
(MHz)
McSPI4
SPI4_ICLK
Int
266
SPI4_FCLK
Func
48
PER_48M_GFCLK
PER_48M_GFCLK
DPLL_PER
MLB_SS
MLB_L3_ICLK
Int
266
MLB_SHB_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
MLB_L4_ICLK
Int
133
MLB_SPB_L4_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
MLB_FCLK
Func
266
MLB_SYS_L3_GFCLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
CTRLCLK
Int &
Func
96
LVDSRX_96M_GFCLK
FUNC_192M_CLK
DPLL_PER
CAL_FCLK
Int &
Func
266
CAL_GICLK
CORE_ISS_MAIN_
CLK
DPLL_CORE
L3_ICLK
CM_CORE_AON
MMC1_CLK_32K
Func
0.032
L3INIT_32K_GFCLK
FUNC_32K_CLK
OSC0
MMC1_FCLK
Func
192
MMC1_GFCLK
FUNC_192M_CLK
DPLL_PER
FUNC_256M_CLK
DPLL_PER
MMC1_ICLK1
Int
266
L3INIT_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
MMC1_ICLK2
Int
133
L3INIT_L4_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
MMC2_CLK_32K
Func
0.032
L3INIT_32K_GFCLK
FUNC_32K_CLK
OSC0
MMC2_FCLK
Func
192
MMC2_GFCLK
FUNC_192M_CLK
DPLL_PER
FUNC_256M_CLK
DPLL_PER
CSI2_0
MMC1
PRCM CLOCK NAME
PLL / OSC /
SOURCE CLOCK
NAME
PLL / OSC /
SOURCE NAME
L4PER_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
128
MMC2
128
MMC3
MMC2_ICLK1
Int
266
L3INIT_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
MMC2_ICLK2
Int
133
L3INIT_L4_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
MMC3_ICLK
Int
266
L4PER_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
MMC3_CLK_32K
Func
0.032
L4PER_32K_GFCLK
FUNC_32K_CLK
OSC0
MMC3_FCLK
Func
48
MMC3_GFCLK
FUNC_192M_CLK
DPLL_PER
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
192
MMC4
MMC4_ICLK
Int
266
L4PER_L3_GICLK
MMC4_CLK_32K
Func
0.032
L4PER_32K_GFCLK
FUNC_32K_CLK
OSC0
MMC4_FCLK
Func
48
MMC4_GFCLK
FUNC_192M_CLK
DPLL_PER
192
MMU_EDMA
MMU1_CLK
Int
266
L3MAIN1_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
MMU_PCIESS
MMU2_CLK
Int
266
L3MAIN1_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
MPU
MPU_CLK
Int &
Func
MPU_CLK
MPU_GCLK
MPU_GCLK
DPLL_MPU
MPU_EMU_DBG
FCLK
Int
38.4
EMU_SYS_CLK
SYS_CLK1
OSC0
MPU_GCLK
DPLL_MPU
OCMC_RAM1
OCMC1_L3_CLK
Int
266
L3MAIN1_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
OCMC_ROM
OCMC_L3_CLK
Int
266
L3MAIN1_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
OCP_WP_NOC
PICLKOCPL3
Int
266
L3INSTR_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
OCP2SCP1
L4CFG1_ADAPTER
_CLKIN
Int
133
L3INIT_L4_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
OCP2SCP2
L4CFG2_ADAPTER
_CLKIN
Int
133
L4CFG_L4_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
OCP2SCP3
L4CFG3_ADAPTER
_CLKIN
Int
133
L3INIT_L4_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
134
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 5-6. Maximum Supported Frequency (continued)
MODULE
INSTANCE NAME
PCIe_SS1
PCIe_SS2
PRCM_MPU
CLOCK SOURCES
INPUT CLOCK
NAME
CLOCK
TYPE
MAX. CLOCK
ALLOWED
(MHz)
PCIE1_PHY_WKUP
_CLK
Func
0.032
PRCM CLOCK NAME
PLL / OSC /
SOURCE CLOCK
NAME
PLL / OSC /
SOURCE NAME
PCIE_32K_GFCLK
FUNC_32K_CLK
DPLL_CORE
PCIe_SS1_FICLK
Int
266
PCIE_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
PCIEPHY_CLK
Func
2500
PCIE_PHY_GCLK
PCIE_PHY_GCLK
APLL_PCIE
PCIEPHY_CLK_DIV
Func
1250
PCIE_PHY_DIV_GCLK
PCIE_PHY_DIV_G
CLK
APLL_PCIE
PCIE1_REF_CLKIN
Func
34.3
PCIE_REF_GFCLK
CORE_USB_OTG_
SS_LFPS_TX_CLK
DPLL_CORE
PCIE1_PWR_CLK
Func
38.4
PCIE_SYS_GFCLK
SYS_CLK1
OSC0
PCIE2_PHY_WKUP
_CLK
Func
0.032
PCIE_32K_GFCLK
FUNC_32K_CLK
DPLL_CORE
PCIe_SS2_FICLK
Int
266
PCIE_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
PCIEPHY_CLK
Func
2500
PCIE_PHY_GCLK
PCIE_PHY_GCLK
APLL_PCIE
PCIEPHY_CLK_DIV
Func
1250
PCIE_PHY_DIV_GCLK
PCIE_PHY_DIV_G
CLK
APLL_PCIE
PCIE2_REF_CLKIN
Func
34.3
PCIE_REF_GFCLK
CORE_USB_OTG_
SS_LFPS_TX_CLK
DPLL_CORE
PCIE2_PWR_CLK
Func
38.4
PCIE_SYS_GFCLK
SYS_CLK1
OSC0
32K_CLK
Func
0.032
FUNC_32K_CLK
SYS_CLK1/610
OSC0
SYS_CLK
Func
38.4
WKUPAON_ICLK
SYS_CLK1
OSC0
DPLL_ABE_X2_CL
K
DPLL_ABE
PWMSS1
PWMSS1_GICLK
Int &
Func
266
L4PER2_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
PWMSS2
PWMSS2_GICLK
Int &
Func
266
L4PER2_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
PWMSS3
PWMSS3_GICLK
Int &
Func
266
L4PER2_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
QSPI
QSPI_ICLK
Int
266
L4PER2_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
QSPI_FCLK
Func
128
QSPI_GFCLK
FUNC_256M_CLK
DPLL_PER
PER_QSPI_CLK
DPLL_PER
RNG
RNG_ICLK
Int
266
L4SEC_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
SAR_ROM
PRCM_ROM_CLOC
K
Int
266
L4CFG_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
SDMA
SDMA_FCLK
Int &
Func
266
DMA_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
SHA2MD51
SHAM_1_CLK
Int
266
L4SEC_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
SHA2MD52
SHAM_2_CLK
Int
266
L4SEC_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
SL2
IVA_GCLK
Int
IVA_GCLK
IVA_GCLK
IVA_GFCLK
DPLL_IVA
SMARTREFLEX_C
ORE
MCLK
Int
133
COREAON_L4_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
SYSCLK
Func
38.4
WKUPAON_ICLK
SMARTREFLEX_D
SP
MCLK
Int
133
COREAON_L4_GICLK
SYSCLK
Func
38.4
WKUPAON_ICLK
SYS_CLK1
OSC0
DPLL_ABE_X2_CL
K
DPLL_ABE
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
SYS_CLK1
OSC0
DPLL_ABE_X2_CL
K
DPLL_ABE
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
135
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 5-6. Maximum Supported Frequency (continued)
MODULE
INSTANCE NAME
SMARTREFLEX_G
PU
SMARTREFLEX_I
VAHD
SMARTREFLEX_M
PU
INPUT CLOCK
NAME
CLOCK
TYPE
MCLK
Int
133
COREAON_L4_GICLK
SYSCLK
Func
38.4
WKUPAON_ICLK
PRCM CLOCK NAME
PLL / OSC /
SOURCE CLOCK
NAME
PLL / OSC /
SOURCE NAME
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
MCLK
Int
133
COREAON_L4_GICLK
SYSCLK
Func
38.4
WKUPAON_ICLK
SYS_CLK1
OSC0
DPLL_ABE_X2_CL
K
DPLL_ABE
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
SYS_CLK1
OSC0
DPLL_ABE_X2_CL
K
DPLL_ABE
DPLL_CORE
MCLK
Int
133
COREAON_L4_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
SYSCLK
Func
38.4
WKUPAON_ICLK
SYS_CLK1
OSC0
DPLL_ABE_X2_CL
K
DPLL_ABE
DPLL_CORE
SPINLOCK
SPINLOCK_ICLK
Int
266
L4CFG_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
TIMER1
TIMER1_ICLK
Int
38.4
WKUPAON_GICLK
SYS_CLK1
OSC0
DPLL_ABE_X2_CL
K
DPLL_ABE
TIMER1_FCLK
TIMER2
136
CLOCK SOURCES
MAX. CLOCK
ALLOWED
(MHz)
Func
100
TIMER1_GFCLK
SYS_CLK1
OSC0
FUNC_32K_CLK
OSC0
SYS_CLK2
OSC1
XREF_CLK0
XREF_CLK0
XREF_CLK1
XREF_CLK1
XREF_CLK2
XREF_CLK2
XREF_CLK3
XREF_CLK3
DPLL_ABE_X2_CL
K
DPLL_ABE
VIDEO1_CLK
DPLL_VIDEO1
HDMI_CLK
DPLL_HDMI
TIMER2_ICLK
Int
266
L4PER_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
TIMER2_FCLK
Func
100
TIMER2_GFCLK
SYS_CLK1
OSC0
FUNC_32K_CLK
OSC0
Specifications
SYS_CLK2
OSC1
XREF_CLK0
XREF_CLK0
XREF_CLK1
XREF_CLK1
XREF_CLK2
XREF_CLK2
XREF_CLK3
XREF_CLK3
DPLL_ABE_X2_CL
K
DPLL_ABE
VIDEO1_CLK
DPLL_VIDEO1
HDMI_CLK
DPLL_HDMI
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 5-6. Maximum Supported Frequency (continued)
MODULE
CLOCK SOURCES
INSTANCE NAME
INPUT CLOCK
NAME
CLOCK
TYPE
MAX. CLOCK
ALLOWED
(MHz)
TIMER3
TIMER3_ICLK
Int
266
L4PER_L3_GICLK
TIMER3_FCLK
Func
100
TIMER3_GFCLK
TIMER4
TIMER5
PRCM CLOCK NAME
PLL / OSC /
SOURCE CLOCK
NAME
PLL / OSC /
SOURCE NAME
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
SYS_CLK1
OSC0
FUNC_32K_CLK
OSC0
SYS_CLK2
OSC1
XREF_CLK0
XREF_CLK0
XREF_CLK1
XREF_CLK1
XREF_CLK2
XREF_CLK2
XREF_CLK3
XREF_CLK3
DPLL_ABE_X2_CL
K
DPLL_ABE
VIDEO1_CLK
DPLL_VIDEO1
HDMI_CLK
DPLL_HDMI
TIMER4_ICLK
Int
266
L4PER_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
TIMER4_FCLK
Func
100
TIMER4_GFCLK
SYS_CLK1
OSC0
FUNC_32K_CLK
OSC0
TIMER5_ICLK
Int
266
IPU_L3_GICLK
TIMER5_FCLK
Func
100
TIMER5_GFCLK
SYS_CLK2
OSC1
XREF_CLK0
XREF_CLK0
XREF_CLK1
XREF_CLK1
XREF_CLK2
XREF_CLK2
XREF_CLK3
XREF_CLK3
DPLL_ABE_X2_CL
K
DPLL_ABE
VIDEO1_CLK
DPLL_VIDEO1
HDMI_CLK
DPLL_HDMI
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
SYS_CLK1
OSC0
FUNC_32K_CLK
OSC0
SYS_CLK2
OSC1
XREF_CLK0
XREF_CLK0
XREF_CLK1
XREF_CLK1
XREF_CLK2
XREF_CLK2
XREF_CLK3
XREF_CLK3
DPLL_ABE_X2_CL
K
DPLL_ABE
VIDEO1_CLK
DPLL_VIDEO1
HDMI_CLK
DPLL_HDMI
CLKOUTMUX[0]
CLKOUTMUX[0]
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
137
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 5-6. Maximum Supported Frequency (continued)
MODULE
CLOCK SOURCES
INSTANCE NAME
INPUT CLOCK
NAME
CLOCK
TYPE
MAX. CLOCK
ALLOWED
(MHz)
TIMER6
TIMER6_ICLK
Int
266
IPU_L3_GICLK
TIMER6_FCLK
Func
100
TIMER6_GFCLK
TIMER7
TIMER8
138
PRCM CLOCK NAME
PLL / OSC /
SOURCE CLOCK
NAME
PLL / OSC /
SOURCE NAME
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
SYS_CLK1
OSC0
FUNC_32K_CLK
OSC0
SYS_CLK2
OSC1
XREF_CLK0
XREF_CLK0
XREF_CLK1
XREF_CLK1
XREF_CLK2
XREF_CLK2
XREF_CLK3
XREF_CLK3
DPLL_ABE_X2_CL
K
DPLL_ABE
VIDEO1_CLK
DPLL_VIDEO1
HDMI_CLK
DPLL_HDMI
CLKOUTMUX[0]
CLKOUTMUX[0]
TIMER7_ICLK
Int
266
IPU_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
TIMER7_FCLK
Func
100
TIMER7_GFCLK
SYS_CLK1
OSC0
FUNC_32K_CLK
OSC0
SYS_CLK2
OSC1
XREF_CLK0
XREF_CLK0
XREF_CLK1
XREF_CLK1
XREF_CLK2
XREF_CLK2
XREF_CLK3
XREF_CLK3
DPLL_ABE_X2_CL
K
DPLL_ABE
VIDEO1_CLK
DPLL_VIDEO1
HDMI_CLK
DPLL_HDMI
CLKOUTMUX[0]
CLKOUTMUX[0]
TIMER8_ICLK
Int
266
IPU_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
TIMER8_FCLK
Func
100
TIMER8_GFCLK
SYS_CLK1
OSC0
FUNC_32K_CLK
OSC0
Specifications
SYS_CLK2
OSC1
XREF_CLK0
XREF_CLK0
XREF_CLK1
XREF_CLK1
XREF_CLK2
XREF_CLK2
XREF_CLK3
XREF_CLK3
DPLL_ABE_X2_CL
K
DPLL_ABE
VIDEO1_CLK
DPLL_VIDEO1
HDMI_CLK
DPLL_HDMI
CLKOUTMUX[0]
CLKOUTMUX[0]
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 5-6. Maximum Supported Frequency (continued)
MODULE
CLOCK SOURCES
INSTANCE NAME
INPUT CLOCK
NAME
CLOCK
TYPE
MAX. CLOCK
ALLOWED
(MHz)
TIMER9
TIMER9_ICLK
Int
266
L4PER_L3_GICLK
TIMER9_FCLK
Func
100
TIMER9_GFCLK
TIMER10
TIMER11
TIMER12
PRCM CLOCK NAME
PLL / OSC /
SOURCE CLOCK
NAME
PLL / OSC /
SOURCE NAME
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
SYS_CLK1
OSC0
FUNC_32K_CLK
OSC0
SYS_CLK2
OSC1
XREF_CLK0
XREF_CLK0
XREF_CLK1
XREF_CLK1
XREF_CLK2
XREF_CLK2
XREF_CLK3
XREF_CLK3
DPLL_ABE_X2_CL
K
DPLL_ABE
VIDEO1_CLK
DPLL_VIDEO1
HDMI_CLK
DPLL_HDMI
TIMER10_ICLK
Int
266
L4PER_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
TIMER10_FCLK
Func
100
TIMER10_GFCLK
SYS_CLK1
OSC0
FUNC_32K_CLK
OSC0
TIMER11_ICLK
Int
266
L4PER_L3_GICLK
TIMER11_FCLK
Func
100
TIMER11_GFCLK
TIMER12_ICLK
TIMER12_FCLK
Int
Func
38.4
0.032
WKUPAON_GICLK
OSC_32K_CLK
SYS_CLK2
OSC1
XREF_CLK0
XREF_CLK0
XREF_CLK1
XREF_CLK1
XREF_CLK2
XREF_CLK2
XREF_CLK3
XREF_CLK3
DPLL_ABE_X2_CL
K
DPLL_ABE
VIDEO1_CLK
DPLL_VIDEO1
HDMI_CLK
DPLL_HDMI
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
SYS_CLK1
OSC0
FUNC_32K_CLK
OSC0
SYS_CLK2
OSC1
XREF_CLK0
XREF_CLK0
XREF_CLK1
XREF_CLK1
XREF_CLK2
XREF_CLK2
XREF_CLK3
XREF_CLK3
DPLL_ABE_X2_CL
K
DPLL_ABE
VIDEO1_CLK
DPLL_VIDEO1
HDMI_CLK
DPLL_HDMI
SYS_CLK1
OSC0
DPLL_ABE_X2_CL
K
DPLL_ABE
RC_CLK
RC oscillator
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
139
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 5-6. Maximum Supported Frequency (continued)
MODULE
CLOCK SOURCES
INSTANCE NAME
INPUT CLOCK
NAME
CLOCK
TYPE
MAX. CLOCK
ALLOWED
(MHz)
TIMER13
TIMER13_ICLK
Int
266
L4PER3_L3_GICLK
TIMER13_FCLK
Func
100
TIMER13_GFCLK
TIMER14
TIMER15
140
PRCM CLOCK NAME
PLL / OSC /
SOURCE CLOCK
NAME
PLL / OSC /
SOURCE NAME
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
SYS_CLK1
OSC0
FUNC_32K_CLK
OSC0
SYS_CLK2
OSC1
XREF_CLK0
XREF_CLK0
XREF_CLK1
XREF_CLK1
XREF_CLK2
XREF_CLK2
XREF_CLK3
XREF_CLK3
DPLL_ABE_X2_CL
K
DPLL_ABE
VIDEO1_CLK
DPLL_VIDEO1
HDMI_CLK
DPLL_HDMI
TIMER14_ICLK
Int
266
L4PER3_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
TIMER14_FCLK
Func
100
TIMER14_GFCLK
SYS_CLK1
OSC0
FUNC_32K_CLK
OSC0
TIMER15_ICLK
Int
266
L4PER3_L3_GICLK
TIMER15_FCLK
Func
100
TIMER15_GFCLK
Specifications
SYS_CLK2
OSC1
XREF_CLK0
XREF_CLK0
XREF_CLK1
XREF_CLK1
XREF_CLK2
XREF_CLK2
XREF_CLK3
XREF_CLK3
DPLL_ABE_X2_CL
K
DPLL_ABE
VIDEO1_CLK
DPLL_VIDEO1
HDMI_CLK
DPLL_HDMI
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
SYS_CLK1
OSC0
FUNC_32K_CLK
OSC0
SYS_CLK2
OSC1
XREF_CLK0
XREF_CLK0
XREF_CLK1
XREF_CLK1
XREF_CLK2
XREF_CLK2
XREF_CLK3
XREF_CLK3
DPLL_ABE_X2_CL
K
DPLL_ABE
VIDEO1_CLK
DPLL_VIDEO1
HDMI_CLK
DPLL_HDMI
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 5-6. Maximum Supported Frequency (continued)
MODULE
CLOCK SOURCES
INSTANCE NAME
INPUT CLOCK
NAME
CLOCK
TYPE
MAX. CLOCK
ALLOWED
(MHz)
PRCM CLOCK NAME
PLL / OSC /
SOURCE CLOCK
NAME
PLL / OSC /
SOURCE NAME
TIMER16
TIMER16_ICLK
Int
266
L4PER3_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
TIMER16_FCLK
Func
100
TIMER16_GFCLK
SYS_CLK1
OSC0
FUNC_32K_CLK
OSC0
SYS_CLK2
OSC1
XREF_CLK0
XREF_CLK0
XREF_CLK1
XREF_CLK1
XREF_CLK2
XREF_CLK2
XREF_CLK3
XREF_CLK3
DPLL_ABE_X2_CL
K
DPLL_ABE
VIDEO1_CLK
DPLL_VIDEO1
HDMI_CLK
DPLL_HDMI
TPCC
TPCC_GCLK
Int
266
L3MAIN1_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
TPTC1
TPTC0_GCLK
Int
266
L3MAIN1_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
TPTC2
TPTC1_GCLK
Int
266
L3MAIN1_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
UART1
UART1_FCLK
Func
48
UART1_GFCLK
FUNC_192M_CLK
DPLL_PER
UART1_ICLK
Int
266
L4PER_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
UART2
UART2_FCLK
Func
48
UART2_GFCLK
FUNC_192M_CLK
DPLL_PER
UART2_ICLK
Int
266
L4PER_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
UART3
UART3_FCLK
Func
48
UART3_GFCLK
FUNC_192M_CLK
DPLL_PER
UART3_ICLK
Int
266
L4PER_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
UART4
UART4_FCLK
Func
48
UART4_GFCLK
FUNC_192M_CLK
DPLL_PER
UART4_ICLK
Int
266
L4PER_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
UART5
UART5_FCLK
Func
48
UART5_GFCLK
FUNC_192M_CLK
DPLL_PER
UART5_ICLK
Int
266
L4PER_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
UART6_FCLK
Func
48
UART6_GFCLK
FUNC_192M_CLK
DPLL_PER
UART6_ICLK
Int
266
IPU_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
UART7
UART7_FCLK
Func
48
UART7_GFCLK
FUNC_192M_CLK
DPLL_PER
UART7_ICLK
Int
266
L4PER2_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
UART8
UART8_FCLK
Func
48
UART8_GFCLK
FUNC_192M_CLK
DPLL_PER
UART8_ICLK
Int
266
L4PER2_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
UART9
UART9_FCLK
Func
48
UART9_GFCLK
FUNC_192M_CLK
DPLL_PER
UART9_ICLK
Int
266
L4PER2_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
UART10
UART10_FCLK
Func
48
UART10_GFCLK
FUNC_192M_CLK
DPLL_PER
UART10_ICLK
Int
38.4
WKUPAON_GICLK
SYS_CLK1
OSC0
DPLL_ABE_X2_CL
K
DPLL_ABE
UART6
USB1
USB1_MICLK
Int
266
L3INIT_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
USB3PHY_REF_CL
K
Func
34.3
USB_LFPS_TX_GFCL
K
CORE_USB_OTG_
SS_LFPS_TX_CLK
DPLL_CORE
USB2PHY1_TREF_
CLK
Func
38.4
USB_OTG_SS_REF_C
LK
SYS_CLK1
OSC0
USB2PHY1_REF_C
LK
Func
960
L3INIT_960M_GFCLK
L3INIT_960_GFCL
K
DPLL_USB
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
141
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 5-6. Maximum Supported Frequency (continued)
MODULE
CLOCK SOURCES
INSTANCE NAME
INPUT CLOCK
NAME
CLOCK
TYPE
MAX. CLOCK
ALLOWED
(MHz)
USB2
USB2_MICLK
Int
266
L3INIT_L3_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
USB2PHY2_TREF_
CLK
Func
38.4
USB_OTG_SS_REF_C
LK
SYS_CLK1
OSC0
USB2PHY2_REF_C
LK
Func
960
L3INIT_960M_GFCLK
L3INIT_960_GFCL
K
DPLL_USB
USB_PHY1_CORE USB2PHY1_WKUP_
CLK
Func
0.032
COREAON_32K_GFCL
K
SYS_CLK1/610
OSC0
USB_PHY2_CORE USB2PHY2_WKUP_
CLK
Func
0.032
COREAON_32K_GFCL
K
SYS_CLK1/610
OSC0
L3_CLK_PROC_CL
K
Int &
Func
266
VIP1_GCLK
L3_CLK_PROC_CL
K
Int &
Func
300
VIP1
VPE
WD_TIMER1
WD_TIMER2
PIOCPCLK
38.4
PLL / OSC /
SOURCE CLOCK
NAME
PLL / OSC /
SOURCE NAME
VPE_GCLK
WKUPAON_GICLK
CORE_X2_CLK
DPLL_CORE
CORE_ISS_MAIN_
CLK
DPLL_CORE
CORE_ISS_MAIN_
CLK
DPLL_CORE
VIDEO1_CLKOUT
4
DPLL_VIDEO1
SYS_CLK1
OSC0
DPLL_ABE_X2_CL
K
DPLL_ABE
RC oscillator
PITIMERCLK
Func
0.032
OSC_32K_CLK
RC_CLK
WD_TIMER2_ICLK
Int
38.4
WKUPAON_GICLK
SYS_CLK1
OSC0
DPLL_ABE_X2_CL
K
DPLL_ABE
WD_TIMER2_FCLK
5.6
Int
PRCM CLOCK NAME
Func
0.032
WKUPAON_SYS_GFC
LK
WKUPAON_32K_
GFCLK
Power Consumption Summary
NOTE
Maximum power consumption for this SoC depends on the specific use conditions for the
end system. Contact your TI representative for assistance in estimating maximum power
consumption for the end system use case.
5.7
Electrical Characteristics
NOTE
The data specified in Section 5.7 through Section 5.7.3 are subject to change.
NOTE
The interfaces or signals described in Section 5.7 through Section 5.7.3 correspond to the
interfaces or signals available in multiplexing mode 0 (Function 1).
All interfaces or signals multiplexed on the balls described in these tables have the same DC
electrical characteristics, unless multiplexing involves a PHY/GPIO combination in which
case different DC electrical characteristics are specified for the different multiplexing modes
(Functions).
142
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
NOTE
For more information on the I/O cell configurations (i[2:0], sr[1:0]), see the Chapter Control
Module of the Device TRM.
Table 5-7. LVCMOS DDR DC Electrical Characteristics
over operating free-air temperature range (unless otherwise noted)
PARAMETER
MIN
NOM
MAX
UNIT
Signal Names in MUXMODE 0 (Single-Ended Signals): ddr1_d[31:0], ddr1_a[15:0], ddr1_dqm[3:0], ddr1_ba[2:0], ddr1_csn0, ddr1_cke,
ddr1_odt0, ddr1_casn, ddr1_rasn, ddr1_wen, ddr1_rst
Balls: AA23 / AC24 / AB24 / AD24 / AB23 / AC23 / AD23 / AE24 / AA24 / W25 / Y23 / AD25 / AC25 / AB25 / AA25 / W24 / W23 / U25 /
U24 / W21 / T22 / U22 / U23 / T21 / T23 / T25 / T24 / P21 / N21 / P22 / P23 / P24 / AC18 / AE19 / AD19 / AB19 / AD20 / AE20 / AA18 /
AA20 / Y21 / AC20 / AA21 / AC21 / AC22 / AC15 / AB15 / AC16 / AE23 / W22 / U21 / P25 / AE16 / AA16 / AB16 / AC19 / AB18 / AD18 /
AD16 / AD17 / AE18 / AE17
Driver Mode
VOH
High-level output threshold (IOH = 0.1 mA)
VOL
Low-level output threshold (IOL = 0.1 mA)
CPAD
Pad capacitance (including package capacitance)
ZO
Output impedance (drive
strength)
0.9 × VDDS
V
l[2:0] = 000
(Imp80)
80
l[2:0] = 001
(Imp60)
60
l[2:0] = 010
(Imp48)
48
l[2:0] = 011
(Imp40)
40
l[2:0] = 100
(Imp34)
34
0.1 × VDDS
V
3
pF
Ω
Single-Ended Receiver Mode
VIH
High-level input threshold
DDR3/DDR3L
VREF+0.1
VDDS+0.2
V
VIL
Low-level input threshold
DDR3/DDR3L
-0.2
VREF-0.1
V
VCM
Input common-mode voltage
VREF
-10%vdds
VREF+
10%vdds
V
CPAD
Pad capacitance (including package capacitance)
3
pF
Signal Names in MUXMODE 0 (Differential Signals): ddr1_ck, ddr1_nck, ddr1_dqs[3:0], ddr1_dqsn[3:0]
Bottom Balls: AD21 / AE21 / AD22 / AE22 / Y24 / Y25 / V24 / V25 / R24 / R25
Driver Mode
VOH
High-level output threshold (IOH = 0.1 mA)
VOL
Low-level output threshold (IOL = 0.1 mA)
CPAD
Pad capacitance (including package capacitance)
ZO
Output impedance (drive
strength)
0.9 × VDDS
V
l[2:0] = 000
(Imp80)
80
l[2:0] = 001
(Imp60)
60
l[2:0] = 010
(Imp48)
48
l[2:0] = 011
(Imp40)
40
l[2:0] = 100
(Imp34)
34
0.1 × VDDS
V
3
pF
Ω
Single-Ended Receiver Mode
VIH
High-level input threshold
DDR3/DDR3L
VREF+0.1
VDDS+0.2
V
VIL
Low-level input threshold
DDR3/DDR3L
-0.2
VREF-0.1
V
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
143
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 5-7. LVCMOS DDR DC Electrical Characteristics (continued)
over operating free-air temperature range (unless otherwise noted)
PARAMETER
MIN
VCM
Input common-mode voltage
CPAD
Pad capacitance (including package capacitance)
NOM
VREF
-10%vdds
MAX
UNIT
VREF+
10%vdds
V
3
pF
0.2
vdds+0.4
V
VREF
-10%vdds
VREF+
10%vdds
V
3
pF
Differential Receiver Mode
VSWING
Input voltage swing
DDR3/DDR3L
VCM
Input common-mode voltage
CPAD
Pad capacitance (including package capacitance)
(1) VDDS stands for corresponding power supply (that is, vdds_ddr1). For more information on the power supply name and the
corresponding ball, see Table 4-1, POWER [11] column.
(2) VREF in this table stands for corresponding Reference Power Supply (that is, ddr1_vref0). For more information on the power supply
name and the corresponding ball, see Table 4-1, POWER [11] column.
Table 5-8. Dual Voltage LVCMOS I2C DC Electrical Characteristics
over operating free-air temperature range (unless otherwise noted)
PARAMETER
MIN
NOM
MAX
UNIT
Signal Names in MUXMODE 0: i2c1_scl; i2c1_sda; i2c2_scl; i2c2_sda
Balls: G22 / G23 / G21 / F23
I2C Standard Mode – 1.8 V
VIH
Input high-level threshold
VIL
Input low-level threshold
Vhys
Hysteresis
0.7 × VDDS
V
0.3 × VDDS
0.1 × VDDS
V
V
IIN
Input current at each I/O pin with an input voltage
between 0.1 × VDDS to 0.9 × VDDS
12
µA
IOZ
IOZ(IPAD Current) for BIDI cell. This current is
contributed by the tristated driver leakage + input
current of the Rx + weak pullup/pulldown leakage.
PAD is swept from 0 to VDDS and the Max(I(PAD))
is measured and is reported as IOZ
12
µA
CIN
Input capacitance
10
pF
0.2 × VDDS
V
VOL3
Output low-level threshold open-drain at 3-mA
sink current
IOLmin
Low-level output current @VOL=0.2 × VDDS
tOF
3
Output fall time from VIHmin to VILmax with a bus
capacitance CB from 5 pF to 400 pF
mA
250
ns
I2C Fast Mode – 1.8 V
VIH
Input high-level threshold
VIL
Input low-level threshold
Vhys
Hysteresis
V
0.3 × VDDS
V
0.1 × VDDS
V
IIN
Input current at each I/O pin with an input voltage
between 0.1 × VDDS to 0.9 × VDDS
12
µA
IOZ
IOZ(IPAD Current) for BIDI cell. This current is
contributed by the tristated driver leakage + input
current of the Rx + weak pullup/pulldown leakage.
PAD is swept from 0 to VDDS and the Max(I(PAD))
is measured and is reported as IOZ
12
µA
CIN
Input capacitance
10
pF
0.2 × VDDS
V
VOL3
Output low-level threshold open-drain at 3-mA
sink current
IOLmin
Low-level output current @VOL=0.2 × VDDS
tOF
144
0.7 × VDDS
Output fall time from VIHmin to VILmax with a bus
capacitance CB from 10 pF to 400 pF
3
20+0.1 × Cb
Specifications
mA
250
ns
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 5-8. Dual Voltage LVCMOS I2C DC Electrical Characteristics (continued)
over operating free-air temperature range (unless otherwise noted)
PARAMETER
MIN
NOM
MAX
UNIT
I2C Standard Mode – 3.3 V
VIH
Input high-level threshold
VIL
Input low-level threshold
Vhys
Hysteresis
0.7 × VDDS
V
0.3 × VDDS
V
0.05 × VDDS
V
IIN
Input current at each I/O pin with an input voltage
between 0.1 × VDDS to 0.9 × VDDS
31
80
µA
IOZ
IOZ(IPAD Current) for BIDI cell. This current is
contributed by the tristated driver leakage + input
current of the Rx + weak pullup/pulldown leakage.
PAD is swept from 0 to VDDS and the Max(I(PAD))
is measured and is reported as IOZ
31
80
µA
CIN
Input capacitance
10
pF
VOL3
Output low-level threshold open-drain at 3-mA
sink current
0.4
V
IOLmin
Low-level output current @VOL=0.4V
3
mA
IOLmin
Low-level output current @VOL=0.6V for full drive
load (400pF/400KHz)
6
mA
tOF
Output fall time from VIHmin to VILmax with a bus
capacitance CB from 5 pF to 400 pF
250
ns
I2C Fast Mode – 3.3 V
VIH
Input high-level threshold
VIL
Input low-level threshold
Vhys
Hysteresis
0.7 × VDDS
V
0.3 × VDDS
V
0.05 × VDDS
V
IIN
Input current at each I/O pin with an input voltage
between 0.1 × VDDS to 0.9 × VDDSS
31
80
µA
IOZ
IOZ(IPAD Current) for BIDI cell. This current is
contributed by the tristated driver leakage + input
current of the Rx + weak pullup/pulldown leakage.
PAD is swept from 0 to VDDS and the Max(I(PAD))
is measured and is reported as IOZ
31
80
µA
CIN
Input capacitance
10
pF
VOL3
Output low-level threshold open-drain at 3-mA
sink current
0.4
V
IOLmin
Low-level output current @VOL=0.4V
3
mA
IOLmin
Low-level output current @VOL=0.6V for full drive
load (400pF/400KHz)
6
mA
tOF
Output fall time from VIHmin to VILmax with a bus
capacitance CB from 10 pF to 200 pF (Proper
External Resistor Value should be used as per
I2C spec)
20+0.1 × Cb
250
Output fall time from VIHmin to VILmax with a bus
capacitance CB from 300 pF to 400 pF (Proper
External Resistor Value should be used as per
I2C spec)
40
290
ns
(1) VDDS stands for corresponding power supply (that is, vddshv3). For more information on the power supply name and the corresponding
ball, see Table 4-1, POWER [11] column.
(2) For more information on the I/O cell configurations, see the Control Module section of the Device TRM.
Table 5-9. IQ1833 Buffers DC Electrical Characteristics
over operating free-air temperature range (unless otherwise noted)
PARAMETER
MIN
NOM
MAX
UNIT
Signal Names in MUXMODE 0: tclk
Balls: K21
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
145
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 5-9. IQ1833 Buffers DC Electrical Characteristics (continued)
over operating free-air temperature range (unless otherwise noted)
PARAMETER
MIN
NOM
MAX
UNIT
1.8-V Mode
VIH
Input high-level threshold (Does not meet JEDEC VIH)
VIL
Input low-level threshold (Does not meet JEDEC VIL)
VHYS
Input hysteresis voltage
IIN
Input current at each I/O pin
CPAD
Pad capacitance (including package capacitance)
0.75 ×
VDDS
V
0.25 ×
VDDS
100
V
mV
2
11
µA
1
pF
3.3-V Mode
VIH
Input high-level threshold (Does not meet JEDEC VIH)
VIL
Input low-level threshold (Does not meet JEDEC VIL)
VHYS
Input hysteresis voltage
IIN
Input current at each I/O pin
CPAD
Pad capacitance (including package capacitance)
2.0
V
0.6
400
V
mV
5
11
µA
1
pF
(1) VDDS stands for corresponding power supply (that is, vddshv3). For more information on the power supply name and the corresponding
ball, see Table 4-1, POWER [11] column.
Table 5-10. IHHV1833 Buffers DC Electrical Characteristics
over operating free-air temperature range (unless otherwise noted)
PARAMETER
MIN
NOM
MAX
UNIT
Signal Names in MUXMODE 0: porz / wakeup3 / wakeup0
Balls: AB10/ AC10/ F19
1.8-V Mode
VIH
Input high-level threshold
VIL
Input low-level threshold
VHYS
Input hysteresis voltage
IIN
Input current at each I/O pin
CPAD
Pad capacitance (including package capacitance)
1.2(1)
V
0.4
40
V
mV
0.02
1
µA
1
pF
3.3-V Mode
VIH
Input high-level threshold
VIL
Input low-level threshold
VHYS
Input hysteresis voltage
IIN
Input current at each I/O pin
CPAD
Pad capacitance (including package capacitance)
1.2(1)
V
0.4
40
V
mV
5
8
µA
1
pF
(1) The IHHV1833 buffer exists in the dual-voltage IO logic that can be powered by either 1.8V or 3.3V provided by vddshv3. However, the
vddshv3 supply is only used for input protection circuitry, not for logic functionality. The logic in this buffer operates entirely on the
vdds18v supply. Therefore, these input buffers are fully functional whenever vdds18v is valid.
Table 5-11. LVCMOS CSI2 DC Electrical Characteristics
over operating free-air temperature range (unless otherwise noted)
PARAMETER
MIN
NOM
MAX
UNIT
Signals MUXMODE 0: csi2_0_dx[2:0] / csi2_0_dy[2:0]
Bottom Balls: AC1 / AB2 / AD1 / AC2 / AE2 / AD2
MIPI D-PHY Mode Low-Power Receiver (LP-RX)
146
VIH
Input high-level voltage
1350
mV
VIL
Input low-level voltage
880
550
mV
VITH
Input high-level threshold(1)
880
mV
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 5-11. LVCMOS CSI2 DC Electrical Characteristics (continued)
over operating free-air temperature range (unless otherwise noted)
PARAMETER
VITL
Input low-level threshold(2)
VHYS
Input hysteresis(3)
MIN
NOM
MAX
UNIT
550
mV
25
mV
MIPI D-PHY Mode Ultralow Power Receiver (ULP-RX)
VIL
Input low-level voltage
VITL
Input low-level threshold(4)
VHYS
300
mV
300
mV
25
mV
(3)
Input hysteresis
MIPI D-PHY Mode High-Speed Receiver (HS-RX)
VIDTH
Differential input high-level threshold
VIDTL
Differential input low-level threshold
70
mV
(7)
–70
mV
VIDMAX
Maximum differential input voltage
270
mV
VIHHS
Single-ended input high voltage(5)
460
mV
VILHS
Single-ended input low voltage(5)
VCMRXDC
ZID
–40
(5)(6)
Differential input common-mode voltage
70
Differential input impedance
80
mV
100
330
mV
125
Ω
(1) VITH is the voltage at which the receiver is required to detect a high state in the input signal.
(2) VITL is the voltage at which the receiver is required to detect a low state in the input signal. VITL is larger than the maximum single-ended
line high voltage during HS transmission. Therefore, both low-power (LP) receivers will detect low during HS signaling.
(3) To reduce noise sensitivity on the received signal, the LP receiver is required to incorporate a hysteresis, VHYST. VHYST is the difference
between the VITH threshold and the VITL threshold.
(4) VITL is the voltage at which the receiver is required to detect a low state in the input signal. Specification is relaxed for detecting 0 during
ultralow power (ULP) state. The LP receiver is not required to detect HS single-ended voltage as 0 in this state.
(5) Excluding possible additional RF interference of 200 mVPP beyond 450 MHz.
(6) This value includes a ground difference of 50 mV between the transmitter and the receiver, the static common-mode level tolerance and
variations below 450 MHz.
(7) This number corresponds to the VODMAX transmitter.
(8) Common mode is defined as the average voltage level of X and Y: VCMRX = (VX + VY) / 2.
(9) Common mode ripple may be due to tR or tF and transmission line impairments in the PCB.
(10) For more information regarding the pin name (or ball name) and corresponding signal name, see Table 4-5, CSI 2 Signal Descriptions.
Table 5-12. BMLB18 Buffers DC Electrical Characteristics
over operating free-air temperature range (unless otherwise noted)
PARAMETER
MIN
NOM
MAX
UNIT
Signal Names in MUXMODE 0: mlbp_dat_n / mlbp_dat_p / mlbp_sig_n / mlbp_sig_p / mlbp_clk_n / mlbp_clk_p
Balls: T1 / T2 / U4 / T3 / U1 / U2
1.8-V Mode
VIH/VIL
Input high-level threshold
VHYS
Input hysteresis voltage
VOD
Differential output voltage (measured with 50Ω resistor
between PAD and PADN)
VCM
Common mode output voltage
CPAD
Pad capacitance (including package capacitance)
VCM ±
50mV
V
NONE
mV
300
500
mV
1
1.5
V
4
pF
Table 5-13. Dual Voltage SDIO1833 DC Electrical Characteristics
over operating free-air temperature range (unless otherwise noted)
PARAMETER
MIN
NOM
MAX
UNIT
Signal Names in Mode 0: mmc1_clk, mmc1_cmd, mmc1_data[3:0]
Bottom Balls: U3 / V4 / V3 / V2 / W1 / V1
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
147
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 5-13. Dual Voltage SDIO1833 DC Electrical Characteristics (continued)
over operating free-air temperature range (unless otherwise noted)
PARAMETER
MIN
NOM
MAX
UNIT
1.8-V Mode
VIH
Input high-level threshold
VIL
Input low-level threshold
VHYS
Input hysteresis voltage
IIN
Input current at each I/O pin
30
µA
IOZ
IOZ(IPAD Current) for BIDI cell. This current is contributed by the
tristated driver leakage + input current of the Rx + weak
pullup/pulldown leakage. PAD is swept from 0 to VDDS and the
Max(I(PAD)) is measured and is reported as IOZ
30
µA
IIN with
Input current at each I/O pin with weak pulldown enabled
measured when PAD = VDDS
50
120
210
µA
Input current at each I/O pin with weak pullup enabled measured
when PAD = 0
60
120
200
µA
5
pF
pulldown
enabled
IIN with
pullup
1.27
V
0.58
50
(2)
V
mV
enabled
CPAD
Pad capacitance (including package capacitance)
VOH
Output high-level threshold (IOH = 2 mA)
VOL
Output low-level threshold (IOL = 2 mA)
1.4
V
0.45
V
3.3-V Mode
VIH
Input high-level threshold
VIL
Input low-level threshold
VHYS
Input hysteresis voltage
IIN
Input current at each I/O pin
110
µA
IOZ
IOZ(IPAD Current) for BIDI cell. This current is contributed by the
tristated driver leakage + input current of the Rx + weak
pullup/pulldown leakage. PAD is swept from 0 to VDDS and the
Max(I(PAD)) is measured and is reported as IOZ
110
µA
IIN with
Input current at each I/O pin with weak pulldown enabled
measured when PAD = VDDS
40
100
290
µA
Input current at each I/O pin with weak pullup enabled measured
when PAD = 0
10
100
290
µA
5
pF
pulldown
enabled
IIN with
pullup
enabled
0.625 ×
VDDS
V
0.25 × VDDS
40
CPAD
Pad capacitance (including package capacitance)
VOH
Output high-level threshold (IOH = 2 mA)
VOL
Output low-level threshold (IOL = 2 mA)
(2)
V
mV
0.75 × VDDS
V
0.125 ×
VDDS
V
(1) VDDS stands for corresponding power supply (that is, vddshv8). For more information on the power supply name and the corresponding
ball, see Table 4-1, POWER [11] column.
(2) Hysteresis is enabled/disabled with CTRL_CORE_CONTROL_HYST_1.SDCARD_HYST register.
Table 5-14. Dual Voltage LVCMOS DC Electrical Characteristics
over operating free-air temperature range (unless otherwise noted)
PARAMETER
MIN
NOM
MAX
UNIT
1.8-V Mode
VIH
Input high-level threshold
VIL
Input low-level threshold
VHYS
Input hysteresis voltage
VOH
Output high-level threshold (IOH = 2 mA)
VOL
Output low-level threshold (IOL = 2 mA)
148
0.65 × VDDS
V
0.35 × VDDS
100
mV
VDDS-0.45
Specifications
V
V
0.45
V
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 5-14. Dual Voltage LVCMOS DC Electrical Characteristics (continued)
over operating free-air temperature range (unless otherwise noted)
PARAMETER
MIN
NOM
MAX
Pin Drive strength at PAD Voltage = 0.45V or
VDDS-0.45V
IIN
Input current at each I/O pin
16
µA
IOZ
IOZ(IPAD Current) for BIDI cell. This current is
contributed by the tristated driver leakage + input
current of the Rx + weak pullup/pulldown leakage.
PAD is swept from 0 to VDDS and the Max(I(PAD))
is measured and is reported as IOZ
16
µA
IIN with pulldown
Input current at each I/O pin with weak pulldown
enabled measured when PAD = VDDS
50
120
210
µA
Input current at each I/O pin with weak pullup
enabled measured when PAD = 0
60
120
200
µA
enabled
CPAD
Pad capacitance (including package capacitance)
4
pF
ZO
Output impedance (drive strength)
enabled
IIN with pullup
6
UNIT
IDRIVE
mA
40
Ω
3.3-V Mode
VIH
Input high-level threshold
VIL
Input low-level threshold
VHYS
Input hysteresis voltage
VOH
Output high-level threshold (IOH = 100 µA)
VOL
Output low-level threshold (IOL = 100 µA)
IDRIVE
Pin Drive strength at PAD Voltage = 0.45V or
VDDS-0.45V
IIN
Input current at each I/O pin
65
µA
IOZ
IOZ(IPAD Current) for BIDI cell. This current is
contributed by the tristated driver leakage + input
current of the Rx + weak pullup/pulldown leakage.
PAD is swept from 0 to VDDS and the Max(I(PAD))
is measured and is reported as IOZ
65
µA
IIN with pulldown
Input current at each I/O pin with weak pulldown
enabled measured when PAD = VDDS
40
100
200
µA
Input current at each I/O pin with weak pullup
enabled measured when PAD = 0
10
100
290
µA
enabled
CPAD
Pad capacitance (including package capacitance)
4
pF
ZO
Output impedance (drive strength)
enabled
IIN with pullup
2
V
0.8
200
V
mV
VDDS-0.2
V
0.2
6
V
mA
40
Ω
(1) VDDS stands for corresponding power supply. For more information on the power supply name and the corresponding ball, see Table 41, POWER [11] column.
5.7.1
USBPHY DC Electrical Characteristics
NOTE
USB1 instance is compliant with the USB3.0 SuperSpeed Transmitter and Receiver
Normative Electrical Parameters as defined in the USB3.0 Specification Rev 1.0 dated Jun 6,
2011.
NOTE
USB1 and USB2 Electrical Characteristics are compliant with USB2.0 Specification Rev 2.0
dated April 27, 2000 including ECNs and Errata as applicable.
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
149
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
5.7.2
www.ti.com
HDMIPHY DC Electrical Characteristics
The HDMIPHY DC Electrical Characteristics are compliant with the HDMI 1.4a specification and are not
reproduced here.
5.7.3
PCIEPHY DC Electrical Characteristics
NOTE
The PCIe interfaces are compliant with the electrical parameters specified in PCI Express®
Base Specification Revision 3.0.
5.8
VPP Specifications for One-Time Programmable (OTP) eFuses
This section specifies the operating conditions required for programming the OTP eFuses and is
applicable only for High-Security Devices.
Table 5-15. Recommended Operating Conditions for OTP eFuse Programming
over operating free-air temperature range (unless otherwise noted)
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
vdd
Supply voltage range for the core domain
during OTP operation
vpp
Supply voltage range for the eFuse ROM
domain during normal operation
MIN
NOM
MAX
1.11
1.15
1.2
NC
Supply voltage range for the eFuse ROM
domain during OTP programming(1)(2)
Temperature (junction)
1.8
0
V
V
I(vpp)
Tj
UNIT
25
V
100
mA
85
ºC
(1) Supply voltage range includes DC errors and peak-to-peak noise. TI power management solutions TLV70718 from the TLV707x family
meet the supply voltage range needed for vpp.
(2) During normal operation, no voltage should be applied to vpp. This can be typically achieved by disabling the regulator attached to the
vpp terminal. For more details, see TLV707, TLV707P 200-mA, Low-IQ, Low-Noise, Low-Dropout Regulator for Portable Devices.
5.8.1
Hardware Requirements
The following hardware requirements must be met when programming keys in the OTP eFuses:
• The vpp power supply must be disabled when not programming OTP registers.
• The vpp power supply must be ramped up after the proper device power-up sequence (for more
details, see Section 5.10.3).
5.8.2
Programming Sequence
Programming sequence for OTP eFuses:
1. Power on the board per the power-up sequencing. No voltage should be applied on the vpp terminal
during power up and normal operation.
2. Load the OTP write software required to program the eFuse (contact your local TI representative for
the OTP software package).
3. Apply the voltage on the vpp terminal according to the specification in Table 5-15.
4. Run the software that programs the OTP registers.
5. After validating the content of the OTP registers, remove the voltage from the vpp terminal.
150
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
5.8.3
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Impact to Your Hardware Warranty
You accept that e-Fusing the TI Devices with security keys permanently alters them. You acknowledge
that the e-Fuse can fail, for example, due to incorrect or aborted program sequence or if you omit a
sequence step. Further the TI Device may fail to secure boot if the error code correction check fails for the
Production Keys or if the image is not signed and optionally encrypted with the current active Production
Keys. These types of situations will render the TI Device inoperable and TI will be unable to confirm
whether the TI Devices conformed to their specifications prior to the attempted e-Fuse.
CONSEQUENTLY, TI WILL HAVE NO LIABILITY (WARRANTY OR OTHERWISE) FOR ANY TI
DEVICES THAT HAVE BEEN e-FUSED WITH SECURITY KEYS.
5.9
Thermal Resistance Characteristics for CBD Package
For reliability and operability concerns, the maximum junction temperature of the Device has to be at or
below the TJ value identified in Section 5.4, Recommended Operating Conditions.
It is recommended to perform thermal simulations at the system level with the worst case device power
consumption.
5.9.1
Package Thermal Characteristics
Table 5-16 provides the thermal resistance characteristics for the package used on this device.
NOTE
Power dissipation of 3.0 W and an ambient temperature of 85ºC is assumed for CBD
package.
Table 5-16. Thermal Resistance Characteristics
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
°C/W(1)
AIR FLOW (m/s)(2)
T1
RΘJC
Junction-to-case
0.23
N/A
T2
RΘJB
Junction-to-board
3.65
N/A
Junction-to-free air
12.8
0
10.4
0.5
9.6
1
8.8
2
T7
8.3
3
T8
0.1
0
T9
0.1
0.5
NO.
T3
T4
T5
RΘJA
T6
T10
Junction-to-moving air
0.1
1
T11
0.1
2
T12
0.1
3
T13
3.7
0
T14
3.7
0.5
T15
ΨJT
Junction-to-package top
3.6
1
T16
3.6
2
T17
3.5
3
ΨJB
Junction-to-board
(1) These measurements were conducted in a JEDEC defined 2S2P system (with the exception of the Theta JC [RΘJC] measurement,
which was conducted in a JEDEC defined 1S0P system) and will change based on environment as well as application. For more
information, see these EIA/JEDEC standards:
– JESD51-2, Integrated Circuits Thermal Test Method Environment Conditions - Natural Convection (Still Air)
– JESD51-3, Low Effective Thermal Conductivity Test Board for Leaded Surface Mount Packages
– JESD51-7, High Effective Thermal Conductivity Test Board for Leaded Surface Mount Packages
– JESD51-9, Test Boards for Area Array Surface Mount Packages
(2) m/s = meters per second
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
151
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
5.10 Timing Requirements and Switching Characteristics
5.10.1 Timing Parameters and Information
The timing parameter symbols used in the timing requirement and switching characteristic tables are
created in accordance with JEDEC Standard 100. To shorten the symbols, some of pin names and other
related terminologies have been abbreviated as follows:
Table 5-17. Timing Parameters
SUBSCRIPTS
152
SYMBOL
PARAMETER
c
Cycle time (period)
d
Delay time
dis
Disable time
en
Enable time
h
Hold time
su
Setup time
START
Start bit
t
Transition time
v
Valid time
w
Pulse duration (width)
X
Unknown, changing, or don't care level
F
Fall time
H
High
L
Low
R
Rise time
V
Valid
IV
Invalid
AE
Active Edge
FE
First Edge
LE
Last Edge
Z
High impedance
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
5.10.1.1 Parameter Information
Tester Pin Electronics
42 Ω
3.5 nH
Transmission Line
Z0 = 50 Ω
(see Note)
4.0 pF
1.85 pF
Data Sheet Timing Reference Point
Output
Under
Test
Device Pin
(see Note)
NOTE: The data sheet provides timing at the device pin. For output timing analysis, the tester pin electronics and its transmission line effects must be
taken into account. A transmission line with a delay of 2 ns can be used to produce the desired transmission line effect. The transmission line is
intended as a load only. It is not necessary to add or subtract the transmission line delay (2 ns) from the data sheet timings.
Input requirements in this data sheet are tested with an input slew rate of < 4 Volts per nanosecond (4 V/ns) at the device pin.
pm_tstcirc_prs403
Figure 5-2. Test Load Circuit for AC Timing Measurements
The load capacitance value stated is only for characterization and measurement of AC timing signals.
This load capacitance value does not indicate the maximum load the device is capable of driving.
5.10.1.1.1 1.8 V and 3.3 V Signal Transition Levels
All input and output timing parameters are referenced to Vref for both "0" and "1" logic levels. Vref = (VDD
I/O)/2.
Vref
pm_io_volt_prs403
Figure 5-3. Input and Output Voltage Reference Levels for AC Timing Measurements
All rise and fall transition timing parameters are referenced to VIL MAX and VIH MIN for input clocks, VOL
MAX and VOH MIN for output clocks.
Vref = VIH MIN (or VOH MIN)
Vref = VIL MAX (or VOL MAX)
pm_transvolt_prs403
Figure 5-4. Rise and Fall Transition Time Voltage Reference Levels
5.10.1.1.2 1.8 V and 3.3 V Signal Transition Rates
The default SLEWCONTROL settings in each pad configuration register must be used to ensure timings,
unless specific instructions otherwise are given in the individual timing subsections of the datasheet.
All timings are tested with an input edge rate of 4 volts per nanosecond (4 V/ns).
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
153
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
5.10.1.1.3 Timing Parameters and Board Routing Analysis
The timing parameter values specified in this data manual do not include delays by board routes. As a
good board design practice, such delays must always be taken into account. Timing values may be
adjusted by increasing/decreasing such delays. TI recommends using the available I/O buffer information
specification (IBIS) models to analyze the timing characteristics correctly. To properly use IBIS models to
attain accurate timing analysis for a given system, see the Using IBIS Models for timing Analysis
application report. If needed, external logic hardware such as buffers may be used to compensate any
timing differences.
5.10.2 Interface Clock Specifications
5.10.2.1 Interface Clock Terminology
The interface clock is used at the system level to sequence the data and/or to control transfers accordingly
with the interface protocol.
5.10.2.2 Interface Clock Frequency
The two interface clock characteristics are:
• The maximum clock frequency
• The maximum operating frequency
The interface clock frequency documented in this document is the maximum clock frequency, which
corresponds to the maximum frequency programmable on this output clock. This frequency defines the
maximum limit supported by the Device IC and does not take into account any system consideration
(PCB, peripherals).
The system designer will have to consider these system considerations and the Device IC timing
characteristics as well to define properly the maximum operating frequency that corresponds to the
maximum frequency supported to transfer the data on this interface.
5.10.3 Power Supply Sequences
This section describes the power-up and power-down sequence required to ensure proper device
operation. The power supply names described in this section comprise a superset of a family of
compatible devices. Some members of this family will not include a subset of these power supplies and
their associated device modules. Refer to the Section 4.2, Pin Attributes of the Section 4, Terminal
Configuration and Functions to determine which power supplies are applicable.
154
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Figure 5-5 and Figure 5-6, describe the device Power Sequencing.
Note 3
vdds18v, vdds_mlbp, vdds18v_ddr1
vdda_per, vdda_ddr, vdda_debug,
vdda_core_gmac, vdda_gpu,
vdda_video, vdda_osc,
vdda_mpu_abe
vdds_ddr1, ddr1_vref0
(12)
VD_CORE BOOT voltage
vdd
VD_DSP BOOT voltage
vdd_dsp
vdda_usb1, vdda_usb2, vdda_hdmi,
vdda_csi, vdda_pcie, vdda_usb3
Note 13
vddshv1, vddshv3, vddshv4,
vddshv7, vddshv9,
vddshv10, vddshv11
Note 4
vdda33v_usb1, vdda33v_usb2
Note 5
vddshv8
xi_osc0
Note 7
resetn/porz
Note 8
sysboot[15:0]
Note 9
Valid Config
Note 10
rstoutn
SPRS960_ELCH_04
Figure 5-5. Power-Up Sequencing
(1) Grey shaded areas are windows where it is valid to ramp the voltage rail.
(2) Blue dashed lines are not valid windows but show alternate ramp possibilities based on the associated note.
(3) vdd must ramp before or at the same time as vdd_dsp.
(4) If any of the vddshv1, vddshv3, vddshv4, vddshv7, vddshv[9-11] rails (not including vddshv8) are used as 1.8V only, then these rails can
be combined with vdds18v.
(5) vddshv8 is separated out to show support for dual voltage. If single voltage is used then vddshv8 can be combined with other vddshvn
rails but vddshv8 must ramp after vdd.
(6) vdds and vdda rails must not be combined together.
(7) porz must remain asserted low until all of the following conditions are met:
– All device supply rails reach stable operational levels.
– xi_osc0 is stable and at a valid frequency.
– Minimum of 12P after both of the above conditions are met, where P = 1 / (SYS_CLK1/610), units in ns.
resetn must be high prior to, or rise simultaneous with, porz but not before its power supply, vddshv3, rising.
(8) Setup time: sysboot[15:0] pins must be valid 2P(11) before porz is de-asserted high.
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
155
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
(9) Hold time: sysboot[15:0] pins must be valid 15P(11) after porz is de-asserted high.
(10) rstoutn will be asserted low when porz is low, and de-asserted following an internal 2ms delay. rstoutn is only valid after vddshv3
reaches an operational level. If used as a peripheral component reset, it should be AND gated with porz to avoid possible reset glitches
during power up.
(11) P = 1/(SYS_CLK1/610) frequency in ns.
(12) ddr1_vref0 may rise coincident with vdds_ddr1 or at a later time. However, it must be valid before porz rising.
(13) vdda_usb1, vdda_usb2, vdda_hdmi, vdda_pcie, vdda_usb3 can be energized concurrently or after vdda33v_usb1, vdda33v_usb2.
Note 4
porz
Note 6
vddshv8
vdda33v_usb1, vdda33v_usb2
Note 5
vddshv1, vddshv3, vddshv4,
vddshv7, vddshv9,
vddshv10, vddshv11
Note 7
vdda_usb1, vdda_usb2, vdda_hdmi,
vdda_csi, vdda_pcie, vdda_usb3
vdd_dsp
vdd
(10)
vdds_ddr1, ddr1_vref0
vdda_per, vdda_ddr, vdda_debug,
vdda_core_gmac, vdda_gpu,
vdda_video, vdda_osc,
vdda_mpu_abe
vdds18v, vdds_mlbp, vdds18v_ddr1
xi_osc0
SPRS960_ELCH_05
Figure 5-6. Power-Down Sequencing
(8)(9)
(1) Grey shaded areas are windows where it is valid to ramp the voltage rail.
(2) Blue dashed lines are not valid windows but show alternate ramp possibilities based on the associated note.
(3) xi_osc0 can be turned off anytime after porz assertion and must be turned off before vdda_osc voltage rail is shutdown.
(4) vdd must ramp after or at the same time as vdd_dsp.
(5) If any of the vddshv1, vddshv3, vddshv4, vddshv7, vddshv[9-11] rails (not including vddshv8) are used as 1.8V only, then these rails can
be combined with vdds18v.
– vddshv1, vddshv3, vddshv4, vddshv7, vddshv[9-11] is allowed to ramp down at either of the two points shown in the timing diagram
in either 1.8V mode or in 3.3V mode.
– If vddshv1, vddshv3, vddshv4, vddshv7, vddshv[9-11] ramps down at the later time in the diagram then the board design must
ensure that the vddshv[1, 3-4, 7, 9-11] rail is never higher than 2.0 V above the vdds18v rail.
(6) vddshv8 is separated out to show support for dual voltage. If a dedicated LDO/supply source is used for vddshv8, then vddshv8 ramp
down should occur at one of the two earliest points in the timing diagram. If vddshv8 is powered by the same supply source as the other
vddshvn rails, then it is allowed to ramp down at either of the last two points in the timing diagram.
(7) The 1.8V vdda_* supplies can either ramp down at the earlier time period shown or can be delayed to ramp down after the core supplies
156
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
coincident with the vdds18v supply as long as porz is asserted (low) during the power down sequence.
(8) The power down sequence shown is the most general case and is always valid. An accelerated power down sequence is also available
but is only valid when porz is asserted (low). This accelerated power down sequence has been implemented in the companion PMIC
that is recommended for use with this SoC. The accelerated sequence has porz go low first followed immediately by 3.3V vddshvx
supplies and vddshv8 simultaneously second, 1.8V PHY, 3.3V USB and core supplies simultaneously third, DDR supplies, DDR
references and 1.8V PLL supplies simultaneously fourth and all other 1.8V supplies simultaneously last.
(9) Ramped Down is defined as reaching a voltage level of no more than 0.6V.
(10) ddr1_vref0 may fall coincident with vdds_ddr1, or at a prior time but after porz is asserted low.
Figure 5-7 describes vddshv[1, 3-4, 7, 9-11] Supplies Falling Before vdds18v Supplies Delta.
vddshv1, vddshv3,
vddshv4, vddshv7,
vddshv9, vddshv10,
(Note 2)
vddshv11, vddshv8
vdds18v
Vdelta
(Note1)
SPRS85v_ELCH_06
Figure 5-7. vddshv* Supplies Falling After vdds18v Supplies Delta
(1) Vdelta MAX = 2V
(2) If vddshv8 is powered by the same supply source as the other vddshv[1, 3-4, 7, 9-11] rails.
5.10.4 Clock Specifications
NOTE
For more information, see Power Reset and Clock Management / PRCM Environment /
External Clock Signal and Power Reset / PRCM Functional Description / PRCM Clock
Manager Functional Description section of the Device TRM.
NOTE
Audio Back End (ABE) module is not supported for this family of devices, but “ABE” name is
still present in some clock or DPLL names.
The device operation requires the following clocks:
• The system clocks, SYS_CLK1 (Mandatory) and SYS_CLK2 (Optional) are the main clock sources of
the device. They supply the reference clock to the DPLLs as well as functional clock to several
modules.
The Device also embeds an internal free-running 32-kHz oscillator that is always active as long as the the
wake-up (WKUP) domain is supplied.
Figure 5-8 shows the external input clock sources and the output clocks to peripherals.
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
157
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
DEVICE
rstoutn
Warm reset output.
resetn
Device reset input.
porz
xi_osc0
Power ON Reset.
From quartz (19.2, 20 or 27 MHz)
or from CMOS square clock source (19.2, 20 or 27MHz).
xo_osc0
To quartz (from oscillator output).
xi_osc1
From quartz (range from 19.2 to 32 MHz)
or from CMOS square clock source(range from 12 to 38.4 MHz).
xo_osc1
To quartz (from oscillator output).
clkout1
clkout2
Output clkout[3:1] clocks come from:
• Either the input system clock and alternate clock (xi_osc0 or xi_osc1)
• Or a CORE clock (from CORE output)
• Or a 192-MHz clock (from PER DPLL output).
clkout3
xref_clk0
xref_clk1
External Reference Clock [3:0].
For Audio and other Peripherals
xref_clk2
xref_clk3
sysboot[15:0]
Boot Mode Configuration
Figure 5-8. Clock Interface
5.10.4.1 Input Clocks / Oscillators
•
•
The source of the internal system clock (SYS_CLK1) could be either:
– A CMOS clock that enters on the xi_osc0 ball (with xo_osc0 left unconnected on the CMOS clock
case).
– A crystal oscillator clock managed by xi_osc0 and xo_osc0.
The source of the internal system clock (SYS_CLK2) could be either:
– A CMOS clock that enters on the xi_osc1 ball (with xo_osc1 left unconnected on the CMOS clock
case).
– A crystal oscillator clock managed by xi_osc1 and xo_osc1.
SYS_CLK1 is received directly from oscillator OSC0. For more information about SYS_CLK1 see Device
TRM, Chapter: Power, Reset, and Clock Management.
5.10.4.1.1 OSC0 External Crystal
An external crystal is connected to the device pins. Figure 5-9 describes the crystal implementation.
158
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Device
xo_osc0
xi_osc0
vssa_osc0
Rd
(Optional)
Crystal
Rd
(Optional)
Cf2
Cf1
Figure 5-9. OSC0 Crystal Implementation
NOTE
The load capacitors, Cf1 and Cf2 in Figure 5-9, should be chosen such that the below
equation is satisfied. CL in the equation is the load specified by the crystal manufacturer. All
discrete components used to implement the oscillator circuit should be placed as close as
possible to the associated oscillator xi_osc0, xo_osc0, and vssa_osc0 pins.
CL=
Cf1Cf2
(Cf1+Cf2)
Figure 5-10. Load Capacitance Equation
The crystal must be in the fundamental mode of operation and parallel resonant. Table 5-18 summarizes
the required electrical constraints.
Table 5-18. OSC0 Crystal Electrical Characteristics
NAME
fp
DESCRIPTION
MIN
Parallel resonance crystal frequency
TYP
MAX
19.2, 20, 27
UNIT
MHz
Cf1
Cf1 load capacitance for crystal parallel resonance with Cf1 = Cf2
12
24
pF
Cf2
Cf2 load capacitance for crystal parallel resonance with Cf1 = Cf2
12
24
pF
100
Ω
19.2 MHz, 20 MHz, 27 MHz
7
pF
19.2 MHz, 20 MHz
7
pF
27 MHz
5
pF
19.2 MHz, 20 MHz
7
pF
5
pF
3
pF
ESR(Cf1,Cf2)
(1)
Crystal ESR
ESR = 30 Ω
ESR = 40 Ω
ESR = 50 Ω
CO
Crystal shunt capacitance
ESR = 60 Ω
ESR = 80 Ω
ESR = 100 Ω
LM
Crystal motional inductance for fp = 20 MHz
CM
Crystal motional capacitance
27 MHz
Not Supported
19.2 MHz, 20 MHz
27 MHz
Not Supported
19.2 MHz, 20 MHz
27 MHz
-
Not Supported
10.16
mH
3.42
fF
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
-
159
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 5-18. OSC0 Crystal Electrical Characteristics (continued)
NAME
DESCRIPTION
MIN
TYP
MAX
Ethernet and MLB not used
tj(xiosc0)
Frequency accuracy(1), xi_osc0
UNIT
±200
Ethernet RGMII and RMII
using derived clock
±50
Ethernet MII using derived
clock
±100
ppm
(1) Crystal characteristics should account for tolerance+stability+aging.
When selecting a crystal, the system design must consider the temperature and aging characteristics of a
based on the worst case environment and expected life expectancy of the system.
Table 5-19 details the switching characteristics of the oscillator and the requirements of the input clock.
Table 5-19. Oscillator Switching Characteristics—Crystal Mode
NAME
DESCRIPTION
fp
Oscillation frequency
tsX
Start-up time
MIN
TYP
MAX
19.2, 20, 27 MHz
UNIT
MHz
4
ms
5.10.4.1.2 OSC0 Input Clock
A 1.8-V LVCMOS-Compatible Clock Input can be used instead of the internal oscillator to provide the
SYS_CLK1 clock input to the system. The external connections to support this are shown in Figure 5-11.
The xi_osc0 pin is connected to the 1.8-V LVCMOS-Compatible clock source. The xi_osc0 pin is left
unconnected. The vssa_osc0 pin is connected to board ground (VSS).
Device
xi_osc0
xo_osc0
vssa_osc0
NC
SPRS906_CLK_04
Figure 5-11. 1.8-V LVCMOS-Compatible Clock Input
Table 5-20 summarizes the OSC0 input clock electrical characteristics.
Table 5-20. OSC0 Input Clock Electrical Characteristics—Bypass Mode
NAME
f
160
DESCRIPTION
MIN
Frequency
CIN
Input capacitance
IIN
Input current (3.3V mode)
TYP
MAX
19.2, 20, 27
UNIT
MHz
2.184
2.384
2.584
pF
4
6
10
µA
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 5-21 details the OSC0 input clock timing requirements.
Table 5-21. OSC0 Input Clock Timing Requirements
NAME
CK0
CK1
DESCRIPTION
1/
tc(xiosc0)
MIN
Frequency, xi_osc0
TYP
19.2, 20, 27
UNIT
MHz
0.55 ×
tc(xiosc0)
ns
0.01 ×
tc(xiosc0)
ns
Rise time, xi_osc0
5
ns
Fall time, xi_osc0
5
ns
tw(xiosc0)
Pulse duration, xi_osc0 low or high
tj(xiosc0)
Period jitter(1), xi_osc0
tR(xiosc0)
tF(xiosc0)
0.45
×
tc(xiosc0)
Ethernet and MLB not used
tj(xiosc0)
MAX
Frequency accuracy(2), xi_osc0
±200
Ethernet RGMII and RMII
using derived clock
±50
Ethernet MII using derived
clock
±100
ppm
(1) Period jitter is meant here as follows:
– The maximum value is the difference between the longest measured clock period and the expected clock period
– The minimum value is the difference between the shortest measured clock period and the expected clock period
(2) Crystal characteristics should account for tolerance+stability+aging.
CK0
CK1
CK1
xi_osc0
SPRS906_CLK_05
Figure 5-12. xi_osc0 Input Clock
5.10.4.1.3 Auxiliary Oscillator OSC1 Input Clock
SYS_CLK2 is received directly from oscillator OSC1. For more information about SYS_CLK2 see Device
TRM, Chapter: Power, Reset, and Clock Management.
5.10.4.1.3.1 OSC1 External Crystal
An external crystal is connected to the device pins. Figure 5-13 describes the crystal implementation.
Device
xo_osc1
xi_osc1
vssa_osc1
Rd
(Optional)
Crystal
Cf2
Cf1
Rd
(Optional)
Figure 5-13. Crystal Implementation
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
161
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
NOTE
The load capacitors, Cf1 and Cf2 in Figure 5-13, should be chosen such that the below
equation is satisfied. CL in the equation is the load specified by the crystal manufacturer. All
discrete components used to implement the oscillator circuit should be placed as close as
possible to the associated oscillator xi_osc1, xo_osc1, and vssa_osc1 pins.
CL=
Cf1Cf2
(Cf1+Cf2)
Figure 5-14. Load Capacitance Equation
The crystal must be in the fundamental mode of operation and parallel resonant. Table 5-22 summarizes
the required electrical constraints.
Table 5-22. OSC1 Crystal Electrical Characteristics
NAME
fp
DESCRIPTION
MIN
Parallel resonance crystal frequency
TYP
MAX
Range from 19.2 to 32
UNIT
MHz
Cf1
Cf1 load capacitance for crystal parallel resonance with Cf1 = Cf2
12
24
pF
Cf2
Cf2 load capacitance for crystal parallel resonance with Cf1 = Cf2
12
24
pF
100
Ω
ESR(Cf1,Cf2) Crystal ESR
ESR = 30 Ω
19.2 MHz ≤ fp ≤ 32 MHz
7
pF
ESR = 40 Ω
19.2 MHz ≤ fp ≤ 32 MHz
5
pF
19.2 MHz ≤ fp ≤ 25 MHz
7
pF
5
pF
7
pF
5
pF
19.2 MHz ≤ fp ≤ 23 MHz
5
pF
23 MHz ≤ fp ≤ 25 MHz
3
pF
3
pF
ESR = 50 Ω
25 MHz < fp ≤ 27 MHz
27 MHz < fp ≤ 32 MHz
Not Supported
-
19.2 MHz ≤ fp ≤ 23 MHz
CO
Crystal shunt capacitance
ESR = 60 Ω
23 MHz < fp ≤ 25 MHz
25 MHz < fp ≤ 32 MHz
ESR = 80 Ω
Not Supported
25 MHz < fp ≤ 32 MHz
ESR = 100 Ω
LM
Crystal motional inductance for fp = 20 MHz
CM
Crystal motional capacitance
Not Supported
-
19.2 MHz ≤ fp ≤ 20 MHz
20 MHz < fp ≤ 32 MHz
Not Supported
-
10.16
mH
3.42
Ethernet and MLB not used
tj(xiosc1)
-
Frequency accuracy(1), xi_osc1
fF
±200
Ethernet RGMII and RMII
using derived clock
±50
Ethernet MII using derived
clock
±100
ppm
(1) Crystal characteristics should account for tolerance+stability+aging.
When selecting a crystal, the system design must take into account the temperature and aging
characteristics of a crystal versus the user environment and expected lifetime of the system.
Table 5-23 details the switching characteristics of the oscillator and the requirements of the input clock.
Table 5-23. Oscillator Switching Characteristics—Crystal Mode
NAME
162
DESCRIPTION
fp
Oscillation frequency
tsX
Start-up time
MIN
TYP
MAX
Range from 19.2 to 32
MHz
4
Specifications
UNIT
ms
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
5.10.4.1.3.2 OSC1 Input Clock
A 1.8-V LVCMOS-Compatible Clock Input can be used instead of the internal oscillator to provide the
SYS_CLK2 clock input to the system. The external connections to support this are shown in, Figure 5-15.
The xi_osc1 pin is connected to the 1.8-V LVCMOS-Compatible clock sources. The xo_osc1 pin is left
unconnected. The vssa_osc1 pin is connected to board ground (vss).
Device
xi_osc1
xo_osc1
vssa_osc1
NC
SPRS906_CLK_07
Figure 5-15. 1.8-V LVCMOS-Compatible Clock Input
Table 5-24 summarizes the OSC1 input clock electrical characteristics.
Table 5-24. OSC1 Input Clock Electrical Characteristics—Bypass Mode
NAME
f
DESCRIPTION
MIN
Frequency
TYP
MAX
UNIT
Range from 12 to 38.4
CIN
Input capacitance
IIN
Input current (3.3V mode)
tsX
Start-up time(1)
MHz
2.819
3.019
3.219
pF
4
6
10
µA
See(2)
ms
(1) To switch from bypass mode to crystal or from crystal mode to bypass mode, there is a waiting time about 100 μs; however, if the chip
comes from bypass mode to crystal mode the crystal will start-up after time mentioned in Table 5-23, tsX parameter.
(2) Before the processor boots up and the oscillator is set to bypass mode, there is a waiting time when the internal oscillator is in
application mode and receives a wave. The switching time in this case is about 100 μs.
Table 5-25 details the OSC1 input clock timing requirements.
Table 5-25. OSC1 Input Clock Timing Requirements
NAME
CK0
CK1
DESCRIPTION
1/
tc(xiosc1)
MIN
Frequency, xi_osc1
MAX
Range from 12 to 38.4
MHz
ns
0.01 ×
tc(xiosc1)
ns
Rise time, xi_osc1
5
ns
Fall time, xi_osc1
5
ns
Pulse duration, xi_osc1 low or high
tj(xiosc1)
Period jitter(1), xi_osc1
tR(xiosc1)
tF(xiosc1)
0.45 ×
tc(xiosc1)
UNIT
0.55 ×
tc(xiosc1)
tw(xiosc1)
(3)
Ethernet and MLB not used
tj(xiosc1)
TYP
Frequency accuracy(2), xi_osc1
±200
Ethernet RGMII and RMII
using derived clock
±50
Ethernet MII using derived
clock
±100
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
ppm
163
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
(1) Period jitter is meant here as follows:
– The maximum value is the difference between the longest measured clock period and the expected clock period
– The minimum value is the difference between the shortest measured clock period and the expected clock period
(2) Crystal characteristics should account for tolerance+stability+aging.
(3) The Period jitter requirement for osc1 can be relaxed to 0.02 × tc(xiosc1) under the following constraints:
a.The osc1/SYS_CLK2 clock bypasses all device PLLs
b.The osc1/SYS_CLK2 clock is only used to source the DSS pixel clock outputs
CK0
CK1
CK1
xi_osc1
SPRS906_CLK_08
Figure 5-16. xi_osc1 Input Clock
5.10.4.1.4 RC On-die Oscillator Clock
NOTE
The OSC_32K_CLK clock, provided by the On-die 32K RC oscillator, inside of the SoC, is
not accurate 32kHz clock.
The frequency may significantly vary with temperature and silicon characteristics.
For more information about OSC_32K_CLK see the Device TRM, Chapter: Power, Reset, and Clock
Management.
5.10.4.2 Output Clocks
The device provides three output clocks. Summary of these output clocks are as follows:
• clkout1 - Device Clock output 1. Can be used as a system clock for other devices. The source of the
clkout1 could be either:
– The input system clock and alternate clock (xi_osc0 or xi_osc1)
– CORE clock (from CORE output)
– 192-MHz clock (from PER DPLL output)
• clkout2 - Device Clock output 2. Can be used as a system clock for other devices. The source of the
clkout2 could be either:
– The input system clock and alternate clock (xi_osc0 or xi_osc1)
– CORE clock (from CORE output)
– 192-MHz clock (from PER DPLL output)
• clkout3 - Device Clock output 3. Can be used as a system clock for other devices. The source of the
clkout3 could be either:
– The input system clock and alternate clock (xi_osc0 or xi_osc1)
– CORE clock (from CORE output)
– 192-MHz clock (from PER DPLL output)
For more information about Output Clocks see Device TRM, Chapter: Power, Reset, and Clock
Management.
164
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
5.10.4.3 DPLLs, DLLs
NOTE
For more information, see:
• Power, Reset, and Clock Management / Clock Management Functional / Internal Clock
Sources / Generators / Generic DPLL Overview Section
and
• Display Subsystem / Display Subsystem Overview section of the Device TRM.
To generate high-frequency clocks, the device supports multiple on-chip DPLLs controlled directly by the
PRCM module. They are of two types: type A and type B DPLLs.
•
They have their own independent power domain (each one embeds its own switch and can be
controlled as an independent functional power domain)
• They are fed with ALWAYS ON system clock, with independent control per DPLL.
The different DPLLs managed by the PRCM are listed below:
• DPLL_MPU: It supplies the MPU subsystem clocking internally.
• DPLL_IVA: It feeds the IVA subsystem clocking.
• DPLL_CORE: It supplies all interface clocks and also few module functional clocks.
• DPLL_PER: It supplies several clock sources: a 192-MHz clock for the display functional clock, a
96-MHz functional clock to subsystems and peripherals.
• DPLL_ABE: It provides clocks to various modules within the device.
• DPLL_USB: It provides 960M clock for USB modules (USB1/2/3/4).
• DPLL_GMAC: It supplies several clocks for the Gigabit Ethernet Switch (GMAC_SW).
• DPLL_DSP: It feeds the DSP Subsystem clocking.
• DPLL_GPU: It supplies clock for the GPU Subsystem.
• DPLL_DDR: It generates clocks for the two External Memory Interface (EMIF) controllers and their
associated EMIF PHYs.
• DPLL_PCIE_REF: It provides reference clock for the APLL_PCIE in PCIE Subsystem.
• APLL_PCIE: It feeds clocks for the device Peripheral Component Interconnect Express (PCIe)
controllers.
NOTE
The following DPLLs are controlled by the clock manager located in the always-on Core
power domain (CM_CORE_AON):
• DPLL_MPU, DPLL_IVA, DPLL_CORE, DPLL_ABE, DPLL_DDR, DPLL_GMAC,
DPLL_PCIE_REF, DPLL_PER, DPLL_USB, DPLL_DSP, DPLL_GPU, APLL_PCIE_REF.
For more information on CM_CORE_AON and CM_CORE or PRCM DPLLs, see the Power, Reset, and
Clock Management (PRCM) chapter of the Device TRM.
The following DPLLs are not managed by the PRCM:
•
•
•
•
DPLL_VIDEO1; (It is controlled from DSS)
DPLL_HDMI; (It is controlled from DSS)
DPLL_DEBUG; (It is controlled from DEBUGSS)
DPLL_USB_OTG_SS; (It is controlled from OCP2SCP1)
NOTE
For more information for not controlled from PRCM DPLL’s see the related chapters in TRM.
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
165
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
5.10.4.3.1 DPLL Characteristics
The DPLL has three relevant input clocks. One of them is the reference clock (CLKINP) used to generated
the synthesized clock but can also be used as the bypass clock whenever the DPLL enters a bypass
mode. It is therefore mandatory. The second one is a fast bypass clock (CLKINPULOW) used when
selected as the bypass clock and is optional. The third clock (CLKINPHIF) is explained in the next
paragraph.
The DPLL has three output clocks (namely CLKOUT, CLKOUTX2, and CLKOUTHIF). CLKOUT and
CLKOUTX2 run at the bypass frequency whenever the DPLL enters a bypass mode. Both of them are
generated from the lock frequency divided by a post-divider (namely M2 post-divider). The third clock,
CLKOUTHIF, has no automatic bypass capability. It is an output of a post-divider (M3 post-divider) with
the input clock selectable between the internal lock clock (Fdpll) and CLKINPHIF input of the PLL through
an asynchronous multplexing.
For more information, see the Power Reset Controller Management chapter of the Device TRM.
Table 5-26 summarizes DPLL type described in Section 5.10.4.3, DPLLs, DLLs Specifications
introduction.
Table 5-26. DPLL Control Type
DPLL NAME
TYPE
CONTROLLED BY PRCM
DPLL_ABE
Table 5-27 (Type A)
Yes(1)
DPLL_CORE
Table 5-27 (Type A)
Yes(1)
DPLL_DEBUGSS
Table 5-27 (Type A)
No(2)
DPLL_DSP
Table 5-27 (Type A)
Yes(1)
DPLL_GMAC
Table 5-27 (Type A)
Yes(1)
DPLL_HDMI
Table 5-28 (Type B)
No(2)
DPLL_IVA
Table 5-27 (Type A)
Yes(1)
DPLL_MPU
Table 5-27 (Type A)
Yes(1)
DPLL_PER
Table 5-27 (Type A)
Yes(1)
APLL_PCIE
Table 5-27 (Type A)
Yes(1)
DPLL_PCIE_REF
Table 5-28 (Type B)
Yes(1)
DPLL_USB
Table 5-28 (Type B)
Yes(1)
DPLL_USB_OTG_SS
Table 5-28 (Type B)
No(2)
DPLL_VIDEO1
Table 5-27 (Type A)
No(2)
DPLL_DDR
Table 5-27 (Type A)
Yes(1)
DPLL_GPU
Table 5-27 (Type A)
Yes(1)
(1) DPLL is in the always-on domain.
(2) DPLL is not controlled by the PRCM.
Table 5-27 and Table 5-28 summarize the DPLL characteristics and assume testing over recommended
operating conditions.
Table 5-27. DPLL Type A Characteristics
NAME
finput
MIN
TYP
0.032
MAX
UNIT
52
MHz
FINP
COMMENTS
finternal
Internal reference frequency
0.15
52
MHz
REFCLK
fCLKINPHIF
CLKINPHIF input frequency
10
1400
MHz
FINPHIF
0.001
600
MHz
Bypass mode: fCLKOUT =
fCLKINPULOW / (M1 + 1) if
ulowclken = 1(6)
20(1)
1800(2)
MHz
[M / (N + 1)] × FINP × [1 / M2]
(in locked condition)
fCLKINPULOW
fCLKOUT
166
DESCRIPTION
CLKINP input frequency
CLKINPULOW input frequency
CLKOUT output frequency
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 5-27. DPLL Type A Characteristics (continued)
NAME
fCLKOUTx2
DESCRIPTION
MIN
CLKOUTx2 output frequency
TYP
MAX
UNIT
COMMENTS
40(1)
2200(2)
MHz
2 × [M / (N + 1)] × FINP × [1 /
M2] (in locked condition)
20
(4)
1400
MHz
FINPHIF / M3 if clkinphifsel = 1
40(3)
2200(4)
MHz
2 × [M / (N + 1)] × FINP × [1 /
M3] if clkinphifsel = 0
40
2800
MHz
2 × [M / (N + 1)] × FINP (in
locked condition)
(3)
fCLKOUTHIF
CLKOUTHIF output frequency
fCLKDCOLDO
DCOCLKLDO output
frequency
tlock
Frequency lock time
6 + 350 ×
REFCLK
µs
plock
Phase lock time
6 + 500 ×
REFCLK
µs
6 + 70 ×
REFCLK
µs
DPLL in LP relock time:
lowcurrstdby = 1
6 + 120 ×
REFCLK
µs
DPLL in LP relock time:
lowcurrstdby = 1
3.55 + 70 ×
REFCLK
µs
DPLL in fast relock time:
lowcurrstdby = 0
3.55 + 120 ×
REFCLK
µs
DPLL in fast relock time:
lowcurrstdby = 0
trelock-L
Relock time—Frequency
lock(5) (LP relock time from
bypass)
prelock-L
Relock time—Phase lock(5)
(LP relock time from bypass)
trelock-F
Relock time—Frequency
lock(5) (fast relock time from
bypass)
prelock-F
Relock time—Phase lock(5)
(fast relock time from bypass)
(1) The minimum frequencies on CLKOUT and CLKOUTX2 are assuming M2 = 1.
For M2 > 1, the minimum frequency on these clocks will further scale down by factor of M2.
(2) The maximum frequencies on CLKOUT and CLKOUTX2 are assuming M2 = 1.
(3) The minimum frequency on CLKOUTHIF is assuming M3 = 1. For M3 > 1, the minimum frequency on this clock will further scale down
by factor of M3.
(4) The maximum frequency on CLKOUTHIF is assuming M3 = 1.
(5) Relock time assumes typical operating conditions, 10°C maximum temperature drift.
(6) Bypass mode: fCLKOUT = FINP if ulowclken = 0. For more information, see the Device TRM.
Table 5-28. DPLL Type B Characteristics
NAME
MAX
UNIT
CLKINP input clock frequency
0.62
60
MHz
FINP
finternal
REFCLK internal reference
clock frequency
0.62
2.5
MHz
[1 / (N + 1)] × FINP
fCLKINPULOW
CLKINPULOW bypass input
clock frequency
0.001
600
MHz
Bypass mode: fCLKOUT =
fCLKINPULOW / (M1 + 1) If
ulowclken = 1(4)
fCLKLDOOUT
CLKOUTLDO output clock
frequency
20(1)(5)
2500(2)(5)
MHz
M / (N + 1)] × FINP × [1 / M2]
(in locked condition)
CLKOUT output clock
frequency
20(1)(5)
1450(2)(5)
MHz
[M / (N + 1)] × FINP × [1 / M2]
(in locked condition)
750(5)
finput
fCLKOUT
fCLKDCOLDO
DESCRIPTION
MIN
Internal oscillator (DCO) output
clock frequency
TYP
1500(5)
MHz
(5)
2500(5)
MHz
–2.5%
2.5%
1250
COMMENTS
[M / (N + 1)] × FINP (in locked
condition)
CLKOUTLDO period jitter
tJ
CLKOUT period jitter
The period jitter at the output
clocks is ± 2.5% peak to peak
CLKDCOLDO period jitter
tlock
Frequency lock time
350 ×
REFCLKs
µs
plock
Phase lock time
500 ×
REFCLKs
µs
9 + 30 ×
REFCLKs
µs
(3)
trelock-L
Relock time—Frequency lock
(LP relock time from bypass)
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
167
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 5-28. DPLL Type B Characteristics (continued)
NAME
DESCRIPTION
prelock-L
Relock time—Phase lock(3) (LP
relock time from bypass)
MIN
TYP
MAX
UNIT
9 + 125 ×
REFCLKs
COMMENTS
µs
(1) The minimum frequency on CLKOUT is assuming M2 = 1.
For M2 > 1, the minimum frequency on this clock will further scale down by factor of M2.
(2) The maximum frequency on CLKOUT is assuming M2 = 1.
(3) Relock time assumes typical operating conditions, 10°C maximum temperature drift.
(4) Bypass mode: fCLKOUT = FINP if ULOWCLKEN = 0. For more information, see the Device TRM.
(5) For output clocks, there are two frequency ranges according to the SELFREQDCO setting. For more information, see the Device TRM.
5.10.4.3.2 DLL Characteristics
Table 5-29 summarizes the DLL characteristics and assumes testing over recommended operating
conditions.
Table 5-29. DLL Characteristics
NAME
DESCRIPTION
MIN
TYP
MAX
UNIT
finput
Input clock frequency (EMIF_DLL_FCLK)
333
MHz
tlock
Lock time
50k
cycles
Relock time (a change of the DLL frequency implies that DLL must relock)
50k
cycles
trelock
5.10.5 Recommended Clock and Control Signal Transition Behavior
All clocks and control signals must transition between VIH and VIL (or between VIL and VIH) in a monotonic
manner. Monotonic transitions are more easily ensured with faster switching signals. Slower input
transitions are more susceptible to glitches due to noise and special care should be taken for slow input
clocks.
5.10.6 Peripherals
5.10.6.1 Timing Test Conditions
All timing requirements and switching characteristics are valid over the recommended operating conditions
unless otherwise specified.
5.10.6.2 Virtual and Manual I/O Timing Modes
Some of the timings described in the following sections require the use of Virtual or Manual I/O Timing
Modes. Table 5-30 provides a summary of the Virtual and Manual I/O Timing Modes across all device
interfaces. The individual interface timing sections found later in this document provide the full description
of each applicable Virtual and Manual I/O Timing Mode. Refer to the "Pad Configuration" section of the
TRM for the procedure on implementing the Virtual and Manual Timing Modes in a system.
Table 5-30. Modes Summary
Virtual or Manual IO Mode Name
Data Manual Timing Mode
DPI Video Output
No Virtual or Manual IO Timing Mode Required
DPI3 Video Output Default Timings - Rising-edge Clock Reference
DSS_VIRTUAL1
DPI3 Video Output Default Timings - Falling-edge Clock Reference
VOUT2_IOSET1_MANUAL1
DPI2 Video Output IOSET1 Alternate Timings
VOUT2_IOSET1_MANUAL2
DPI2 Video Output IOSET1 Default Timings - Rising-edge Clock Reference
VOUT2_IOSET1_MANUAL3
DPI2 Video Output IOSET1 Default Timings - Falling-edge Clock Reference
VOUT2_IOSET1_MANUAL4
DPI2 Video Output IOSET1 MANUAL4 Timings
VOUT2_IOSET1_MANUAL5
DPI2 Video Output IOSET1 MANUAL5 Timings
168
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 5-30. Modes Summary (continued)
Virtual or Manual IO Mode Name
Data Manual Timing Mode
VOUT3_MANUAL1
DPI3 Video Output Alternate Timings
VOUT3_MANUAL4
DPI3 Video Output MANUAL4 Timings
VOUT3_MANUAL5
DPI3 Video Output MANUAL5 Timings
GPMC
No Virtual or Manual IO Timing Mode Required
GPMC Asynchronous Mode Timings and Synchronous Mode - Default Timings
GPMC_VIRTUAL1
GPMC Synchronous Mode - Alternate Timings
McASP
No Virtual or Manual IO Timing Mode Required
McASP1 Asynchronous and Synchronous Transmit Timings
MCASP1_VIRTUAL1_SYNC_RX
See Table 5-78
MCASP1_VIRTUAL2_ASYNC_RX
See Table 5-78
No Virtual or Manual IO Timing Mode Required
McASP2 Asynchronous and Synchronous Transmit Timings
MCASP2_VIRTUAL1_SYNC_RX_80M
See Table 5-79
MCASP2_VIRTUAL2_ASYNC_RX
See Table 5-79
MCASP2_VIRTUAL3_SYNC_RX
See Table 5-79
MCASP2_VIRTUAL4_ASYNC_RX_80M
See Table 5-79
No Virtual or Manual IO Timing Mode Required
McASP3 Synchronous Transmit Timings
MCASP3_VIRTUAL2_SYNC_RX
See Table 5-80
No Virtual or Manual IO Timing Mode Required
McASP4 Synchronous Transmit Timings
MCASP4_VIRTUAL1_SYNC_RX
See Table 5-81
No Virtual or Manual IO Timing Mode Required
McASP5 Synchronous Transmit Timings
MCASP5_VIRTUAL1_SYNC_RX
See Table 5-82
No Virtual or Manual IO Timing Mode Required
McASP6 Synchronous Transmit Timings
MCASP6_VIRTUAL1_SYNC_RX
See Table 5-83
No Virtual or Manual IO Timing Mode Required
McASP7 Synchronous Transmit Timings
MCASP7_VIRTUAL2_SYNC_RX
See Table 5-84
No Virtual or Manual IO Timing Mode Required
McASP8 Synchronous Transmit Timings
MCASP8_VIRTUAL1_SYNC_RX
See Table 5-85
eMMC/SD/SDIO
No Virtual or Manual IO Timing Mode Required
MMC1 DS (Pad Loopback), HS (Internal Loopback and Pad Loopback), SDR12
(Internal Loopback and Pad Loopback), and SDR25 Timings (Internal Loopback and
Pad Loopback) Timings
MMC1_VIRTUAL1
MMC1 SDR50 (Pad Loopback) Timings
MMC1_VIRTUAL4
MMC1 DS (Internal Loopback) Timings
MMC1_VIRTUAL5
MMC1 SDR50 (Internal Loopback) Timings
MMC1_VIRTUAL6
MMC1 DDR50 (Internal Loopback) Timings
MMC1_MANUAL1
MMC1 DDR50 (Pad Loopback) Timings
MMC1_MANUAL2
MMC1 SDR104 Timings
No Virtual or Manual IO Timing Mode Required
MMC2 Standard (Pad Loopback), High Speed (Pad Loopback) Timings
MMC2_VIRTUAL2
MMC2 Standard (Internal Loopback), High Speed (Internal Loopback) Timings
MMC2_MANUAL1
MMC2 DDR (Pad Loopback) Timings
MMC2_MANUAL2
MMC2 DDR (Internal Loopback Manual) Timings
MMC2_MANUAL3
MMC2 HS200 Timings
No Virtual or Manual IO Timing Mode Required
MMC3 DS, SDR12, HS, SDR25 Timings
MMC3_MANUAL1
MMC3 SDR50 Timings
No Virtual or Manual IO Timing Mode Required
MMC4 DS, SDR12, HS, SDR25 Timings
QSPI
No Virtual or Manual IO Timing Mode Required
QSPI Mode 3 Timings
QSPI1_MANUAL1
QSPI Mode 0 Timings
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
169
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 5-30. Modes Summary (continued)
Virtual or Manual IO Mode Name
Data Manual Timing Mode
GMAC
No Virtual or Manual IO Timing Mode Required
GMAC MII0/1 Timings
GMAC_RGMII0_MANUAL1
GMAC RGMII0 with Transmit Clock Internal Delay Enabled
GMAC_RGMII1_MANUAL1
GMAC RGMII1 with Transmit Clock Internal Delay Enabled
GMAC_RMII0_MANUAL1
GMAC RMII0 Timings
GMAC_RMII1_MANUAL1
GMAC RMII1 Timings
VIP
VIP_MANUAL3
VIN2A (IOSET4/5/6) Rise-Edge Capture Mode Timings
VIP_MANUAL4
VIN2B (IOSET7/8/9) Rise-Edge Capture Mode Timings
VIP_MANUAL5
VIN2A (IOSET4/5/6) Fall-Edge Capture Mode Timings
VIP_MANUAL6
VIN2B (IOSET7/8/9) Fall-Edge Capture Mode Timings
VIP_MANUAL7
VIN1A (IOSET2) and VIN2B (IOSET1/10) Rise-Edge Capture Mode Timings
VIP_MANUAL9
VIN1B (IOSET6/7) Rise-Edge Capture Mode Timings
VIP_MANUAL10
VIN2B (IOSET2/11) Rise-Edge Capture Mode Timings
VIP_MANUAL11
VIN2B (IOSET2/11) Fall-Edge Capture Mode Timings
VIP_MANUAL12
VIN1A (IOSET2) and VIN2B (IOSET1/10) Fall-Edge Capture Mode Timings
VIP_MANUAL14
VIN1B (IOSET6/7) Fall-Edge Capture Mode Timings
VIP_MANUAL15
VIN1A (IOSET8/9/10) Rise-Edge Capture Mode Timings
VIP_MANUAL16
VIN1A (IOSET8/9/10) Fall-Edge Capture Mode Timings
PRU-ICSS
No Virtual or Manual IO Timing Mode Required
All PRU_ICSS Modes not covered below
PR1_PRU1_DIR_IN_MANUAL
PRU-ICSS1 PRU1 Direct Input Mode Timings
PR1_PRU1_DIR_OUT_MANUAL
PRU-ICSS1 PRU1 Direct Output Mode Timings
PR1_PRU1_PAR_CAP_MANUAL
PRU-ICSS1 PRU1 Parallel Capture Mode Timings
PR2_PRU0_DIR_IN_MANUAL2
PRU-ICSS2 PRU0 IOSET2 Direct Input Mode Timings
PR2_PRU0_DIR_OUT_MANUAL2
PRU-ICSS2 PRU0 IOSET2 Direct Output Mode Timings
PR2_PRU1_DIR_IN_MANUAL1
PRU-ICSS2 PRU1 IOSET1 Direct Input Mode Timings
PR2_PRU1_DIR_IN_MANUAL2
PRU-ICSS2 PRU1 IOSET2 Direct Input Mode Timings
PR2_PRU1_DIR_OUT_MANUAL1
PRU-ICSS2 PRU1 IOSET1 Direct Output Mode Timings
PR2_PRU1_DIR_OUT_MANUAL2
PRU-ICSS2 PRU1 IOSET2 Direct Output Mode Timings
PR2_PRU0_PAR_CAP_MANUAL2
PRU-ICSS2 PRU0 IOSET2 Parallel Capture Mode Timings
PR2_PRU1_PAR_CAP_MANUAL1
PRU-ICSS2 PRU1 IOSET1 Parallel Capture Mode Timings
PR2_PRU1_PAR_CAP_MANUAL2
PRU-ICSS2 PRU1 IOSET2 Parallel Capture Mode Timings
HDMI, EMIF, Timers, I2C, HDQ/1-Wire, UART, McSPI, USB, PCIe, DCAN, GPIO, KBD, PWM, JTAG, TPIU, SDMA, INTC
No Virtual or Manual IO Timing Mode Required
All Modes
5.10.6.3 VIP
The Device includes 1 Video Input Port (VIP).
Table 5-31, Figure 5-17 and Figure 5-18 present timings and switching characteristics of the VIP.
CAUTION
The I/O timings provided in this section are valid only for VIN1 and VIN2 if
signals within a single IOSET are used. The IOSETs are defined in Table 5-32.
170
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 5-31. Timing Requirements for VIP (3)(4)(5)
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
V1
tc(CLK)
Cycle time, vinx_clki (3) (5)
MIN
V2
tw(CLKH)
V3
MAX
UNIT
(2)
ns
Pulse duration, vinx_clki high (3) (5)
0.45 × P
ns
tw(CLKL)
Pulse duration, vinx_clki low (3) (5)
0.45 × P
ns
V4
tsu(CTL/DATA-CLK)
Input setup time, Control (vinx_dei, vinx_vsynci, vinx_fldi,
vinx_hsynci) and Data (vinx_dn) valid to vinx_clki transition (3) (4) (5)
(2)
ns
V6
th(CLK-CTL/DATA)
Input hold time, Control (vinx_dei, vinx_vsynci, vinx_fldi, vinx_hsynci)
and Data (vinx_dn) valid from vinx_clki transition (3) (4) (5)
-0.05 (2)
ns
6.06
(2)
(2)
3.11
(1) For maximum frequency of 165 MHz.
(2) P = vinx_clki period.
(3) x in vinx = 1a, 1b, 2a, 2b.
(4) n in dn = 0 to 7 when x = 1b, 2b.
n = 0 to 23 when x = 1a, 2a.
(5) i in clki, dei, vsynci, hsynci and fldi = 0 or 1.
V3
V2
V1
vinx_clki
SPRS906_TIMING_VIP_01
Figure 5-17. Video Input Ports clock signal
vinx_clki
(positive-edge clocking)
vinx_clki
(negative-edge clocking)
V5
V4
vinx_d[23:0]/sig
SPRS8xx_VIP_02
Figure 5-18. Video Input Ports timings
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
171
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
In Table 5-32 and Table 5-33 are presented the specific groupings of signals (IOSET) for use with vin1 and vin2.
Table 5-32. VIN1 IOSETs
SIGNALS
IOSET6 (1)
IOSET2
BALL
MUX
BALL
MUX
IOSET7 (1)
BALL
MUX
IOSET8
IOSET9
IOSET10
BALL
MUX
BALL
MUX
BALL
MUX
J24
7
J24
7
vin1a
vin1a_clk0
172
G3
2
Y5
9
vin1a_hsync0
K4
2
AA4
9
B14
7
B14
7
vin1a_vsync0
H1
2
AB1
9
D14
7
D14
7
vin1a_fld0
L3
2
C16
7
C16
7
vin1a_de0
J2
2
Y6
9
C17
7
C17
7
vin1a_d0
F1
2
AA1
9
J25
7
B23
7
vin1a_d1
E2
2
Y3
9
B22
7
B22
7
vin1a_d2
E1
2
W2
9
A23
7
A23
7
vin1a_d3
C1
2
AA3
9
A22
7
A22
7
vin1a_d4
D1
2
AA2
9
B21
7
B21
7
vin1a_d5
D2
2
Y4
9
A21
7
A21
7
vin1a_d6
B1
2
Y1
9
D19
7
D19
7
vin1a_d7
B2
2
Y2
9
E19
7
E19
7
vin1a_d8
C2
2
F16
7
F16
7
vin1a_d9
D3
2
E16
7
E16
7
vin1a_d10
A2
2
E17
7
E17
7
vin1a_d11
B3
2
A19
7
A19
7
vin1a_d12
C3
2
B18
7
B18
7
vin1a_d13
C4
2
B16
7
B16
7
vin1a_d14
A3
2
B17
7
B17
7
vin1a_d15
B4
2
A18
7
A18
7
vin1a_d16
M1
2
vin1a_d17
M2
2
vin1a_d18
L2
2
vin1a_d19
L1
2
vin1a_d20
K3
2
vin1a_d21
K2
2
vin1a_d22
J1
2
vin1a_d23
K1
2
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 5-32. VIN1 IOSETs (continued)
SIGNALS
IOSET6 (1)
IOSET2
BALL
MUX
BALL
IOSET7 (1)
MUX
BALL
IOSET8
MUX
BALL
IOSET9
MUX
BALL
IOSET10
MUX
BALL
MUX
vin1b
vin1b_clk1
L5
5
J2
6
vin1b_hsync1
P3
vin1b_vsync1
R2
5
K4
6
5
H1
vin1b_fld1
6
N4
5
G1
6
vin1b_de1
P4
5
L3
6
vin1b_d0
L6
5
M1
6
vin1b_d1
N5
5
M2
6
vin1b_d2
N6
5
L2
6
vin1b_d3
T4
5
L1
6
vin1b_d4
T5
5
K3
6
vin1b_d5
N2
5
K2
6
vin1b_d6
P2
5
J1
6
vin1b_d7
N1
5
K1
6
(1) The IOSET under this column is only applicable for pins with alternate functionality which allows either VIN1 or VIN2 signals to be mapped to the pins. These alternate functions are
controlled via CTRL_CORE_VIP_MUX_SELECT register. For more information on how to use these options, please refer to Device TRM, Chapter Control Module, Section Pad
Configuration Registers.
Table 5-33. VIN2 IOSETs
SIGNALS
IOSET1
BALL
MUX
IOSET2
BALL
MUX
IOSET4
BALL
IOSET5
MUX
BALL
IOSET7 (1)
IOSET6
MUX
BALL
MUX
L5
4
BALL
MUX
IOSET8 (1)
BALL
MUX
IOSET9 (1)
BALL
MUX
vin2a
vin2a_clk0
D8
0
D8
0
vin2a_hsync0
E8
0
E8
0
P3
4
vin2a_vsync0
B8
0
B8
0
R2
4
vin2a_fld0
C7
0
B7
1
N4
4
vin2a_de0
B7
0
P4
4
vin2a_d0
C8
0
C8
0
L6
4
vin2a_d1
B9
0
B9
0
N5
4
vin2a_d2
A7
0
A7
0
N6
4
vin2a_d3
A9
0
A9
0
T4
4
vin2a_d4
A8
0
A8
0
T5
4
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
173
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 5-33. VIN2 IOSETs (continued)
SIGNALS
IOSET1
BALL
IOSET2
MUX
BALL
IOSET4
MUX
IOSET5
IOSET7 (1)
IOSET6
BALL
MUX
BALL
MUX
BALL
MUX
vin2a_d5
A11
0
A11
0
N2
4
vin2a_d6
F10
0
F10
0
P2
4
vin2a_d7
A10
0
A10
0
N1
4
vin2a_d8
B10
0
B10
0
P1
4
vin2a_d9
E10
0
E10
0
N3
4
vin2a_d10
D10
0
D10
0
R1
4
vin2a_d11
C10
0
C10
0
P5
4
vin2a_d12
B11
0
B11
0
vin2a_d13
D11
0
D11
0
vin2a_d14
C11
0
C11
0
vin2a_d15
B12
0
B12
0
vin2a_d16
A12
0
A12
0
vin2a_d17
A13
0
A13
0
vin2a_d18
E11
0
E11
0
vin2a_d19
F11
0
F11
0
vin2a_d20
B13
0
B13
0
vin2a_d21
E13
0
E13
0
vin2a_d22
C13
0
C13
0
vin2a_d23
D13
0
D13
0
IOSET8 (1)
IOSET9 (1)
BALL
MUX
BALL
MUX
BALL
MUX
vin2b
vin2b_clk1
L4
6
H6
4
C7
2
C7
2
AB1
4
vin2b_hsync1
B6
6
B6
6
E8
3
E8
3
Y5
4
vin2b_vsync1
A6
6
A6
6
B8
3
B8
3
Y6
4
vin2b_fld1
H6
6
B7
2
vin2b_de1
H2
6
H2
6
B7
3
AA4
4
vin2b_d0
A4
6
A4
6
D13
2
D13
2
AA1
4
vin2b_d1
E7
6
E7
6
C13
2
C13
2
Y3
4
vin2b_d2
D6
6
D6
6
E13
2
E13
2
W2
4
vin2b_d3
C5
6
C5
6
B13
2
B13
2
AA3
4
vin2b_d4
B5
6
B5
6
F11
2
F11
2
AA2
4
vin2b_d5
D7
6
D7
6
E11
2
E11
2
Y4
4
vin2b_d6
C6
6
C6
6
A13
2
A13
2
Y1
4
174
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 5-33. VIN2 IOSETs (continued)
SIGNALS
vin2b_d7
IOSET1
IOSET2
IOSET4
BALL
MUX
BALL
MUX
A5
6
A5
6
BALL
MUX
IOSET5
BALL
MUX
IOSET7 (1)
IOSET6
BALL
MUX
IOSET8 (1)
IOSET9 (1)
BALL
MUX
BALL
MUX
BALL
MUX
A12
2
A12
2
Y2
4
(1) The IOSET under this column is only applicable for pins with alternate functionality which allows either VIN1 or VIN2 signals to be mapped to the pins. These alternate functions are
controlled via CTRL_CORE_VIP_MUX_SELECT register. For more information on how to use these options, please refer to Device TRM, Chapter Control Module, Section Pad
Configuration Registers.
NOTE
To configure the desired Manual IO Timing Mode the user must follow the steps described in section "Manual IO Timing Modes" of the
Device TRM.
The associated registers to configure are listed in the CFG REGISTER column. For more information please see the Control Module
Chapter in the Device TRM.
Manual IO Timings Modes must be used to ensure some IO timings for VIP1. See Table 5-30, Modes Summary for a list of IO timings requiring the
use of Manual IO Timings Modes. See Table 5-34, Manual Functions Mapping for VIN2A (IOSET4/5/6) for a definition of the Manual modes.
Table 5-34 lists the A_DELAY and G_DELAY values needed to calculate the correct values to be set in the CFG_x registers.
Table 5-34. Manual Functions Mapping for VIN2A (IOSET4/5/6)
BALL
BALL NAME
VIP_MANUAL3
VIP_MANUAL5
A_DELAY (ps)
G_DELAY (ps)
A_DELAY (ps)
G_DELAY (ps)
RMII_MHZ_50_CL
K
2616
1379
2798
1294
L6
mdio_d
2558
1105
2790
L5
mdio_mclk
998
463
1029
N2
rgmii0_rxc
2658
862
2896
P2
rgmii0_rxctl
2658
1628
2844
N4
rgmii0_rxd0
2638
1123
2856
N3
rgmii0_rxd1
2641
1737
P1
rgmii0_rxd2
2641
1676
N1
rgmii0_rxd3
2644
T4
rgmii0_txc
P5
CFG REGISTER
MUXMODE
0
1
4
CFG_RMII_MHZ_50_CLK_IN
-
-
vin2a_d11
954
CFG_MDIO_D_IN
-
-
vin2a_d0
431
CFG_MDIO_MCLK_IN
-
-
vin2a_clk0
651
CFG_RGMII0_RXC_IN
-
-
vin2a_d5
1518
CFG_RGMII0_RXCTL_IN
-
-
vin2a_d6
888
CFG_RGMII0_RXD0_IN
-
-
vin2a_fld0
2804
1702
CFG_RGMII0_RXD1_IN
-
-
vin2a_d9
2801
1652
CFG_RGMII0_RXD2_IN
-
-
vin2a_d8
1828
2807
1790
CFG_RGMII0_RXD3_IN
-
-
vin2a_d7
2638
1454
2835
1396
CFG_RGMII0_TXC_IN
-
-
vin2a_d3
T5
rgmii0_txctl
2672
1663
2831
1640
CFG_RGMII0_TXCTL_IN
-
-
vin2a_d4
R1
rgmii0_txd0
2604
1442
2764
1417
CFG_RGMII0_TXD0_IN
-
-
vin2a_d10
R2
rgmii0_txd1
2683
1598
2843
1600
CFG_RGMII0_TXD1_IN
-
-
vin2a_vsync0
P3
rgmii0_txd2
2563
1483
2816
1344
CFG_RGMII0_TXD2_IN
-
-
vin2a_hsync0
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
175
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 5-34. Manual Functions Mapping for VIN2A (IOSET4/5/6) (continued)
BALL
BALL NAME
VIP_MANUAL3
VIP_MANUAL5
CFG REGISTER
MUXMODE
A_DELAY (ps)
G_DELAY (ps)
A_DELAY (ps)
G_DELAY (ps)
0
1
4
P4
rgmii0_txd3
2717
1461
2913
1310
CFG_RGMII0_TXD3_IN
-
-
vin2a_de0
N5
uart3_rxd
2445
1145
2743
923
CFG_UART3_RXD_IN
-
-
vin2a_d1
N6
uart3_txd
2650
1197
2842
1080
CFG_UART3_TXD_IN
-
-
vin2a_d2
D8
vin2a_clk0
0
0
0
0
CFG_VIN2A_CLK0_IN
vin2a_clk0
-
-
C8
vin2a_d0
1812
102
1936
0
CFG_VIN2A_D0_IN
vin2a_d0
-
-
B9
vin2a_d1
1701
439
2229
10
CFG_VIN2A_D1_IN
vin2a_d1
-
-
D10
vin2a_d10
1720
215
2031
0
CFG_VIN2A_D10_IN
vin2a_d10
-
-
C10
vin2a_d11
1622
0
1702
0
CFG_VIN2A_D11_IN
vin2a_d11
-
-
B11
vin2a_d12
1350
412
1819
0
CFG_VIN2A_D12_IN
vin2a_d12
-
-
D11
vin2a_d13
1613
147
1476
260
CFG_VIN2A_D13_IN
vin2a_d13
-
-
C11
vin2a_d14
1149
516
1701
0
CFG_VIN2A_D14_IN
vin2a_d14
-
-
B12
vin2a_d15
1530
450
2021
0
CFG_VIN2A_D15_IN
vin2a_d15
-
-
A12
vin2a_d16
1512
449
2044
11
CFG_VIN2A_D16_IN
vin2a_d16
-
-
A13
vin2a_d17
1293
488
1839
5
CFG_VIN2A_D17_IN
vin2a_d17
-
-
E11
vin2a_d18
2140
371
2494
0
CFG_VIN2A_D18_IN
vin2a_d18
-
-
F11
vin2a_d19
2041
275
1699
611
CFG_VIN2A_D19_IN
vin2a_d19
-
-
A7
vin2a_d2
1675
35
1736
0
CFG_VIN2A_D2_IN
vin2a_d2
-
-
B13
vin2a_d20
1972
441
2412
88
CFG_VIN2A_D20_IN
vin2a_d20
-
-
E13
vin2a_d21
1957
556
2391
161
CFG_VIN2A_D21_IN
vin2a_d21
-
-
C13
vin2a_d22
2011
433
2446
102
CFG_VIN2A_D22_IN
vin2a_d22
-
-
D13
vin2a_d23
1962
523
2395
145
CFG_VIN2A_D23_IN
vin2a_d23
-
-
A9
vin2a_d3
1457
361
1943
0
CFG_VIN2A_D3_IN
vin2a_d3
-
-
A8
vin2a_d4
1535
0
1601
0
CFG_VIN2A_D4_IN
vin2a_d4
-
-
A11
vin2a_d5
1676
271
2052
0
CFG_VIN2A_D5_IN
vin2a_d5
-
-
F10
vin2a_d6
1513
0
1571
0
CFG_VIN2A_D6_IN
vin2a_d6
-
-
A10
vin2a_d7
1616
141
1855
0
CFG_VIN2A_D7_IN
vin2a_d7
-
-
B10
vin2a_d8
1286
437
1224
618
CFG_VIN2A_D8_IN
vin2a_d8
-
-
E10
vin2a_d9
1544
265
1373
509
CFG_VIN2A_D9_IN
vin2a_d9
-
-
B7
vin2a_de0
1732
208
1949
0
CFG_VIN2A_DE0_IN
vin2a_de0
vin2a_fld0
-
C7
vin2a_fld0
1461
562
1983
151
CFG_VIN2A_FLD0_IN
vin2a_fld0
-
-
E8
vin2a_hsync0
1877
0
1943
0
CFG_VIN2A_HSYNC0_IN
vin2a_hsync0
-
-
B8
vin2a_vsync0
1566
0
1612
0
CFG_VIN2A_VSYNC0_IN
vin2a_vsync0
-
-
176
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Manual IO Timings Modes must be used to ensure some IO timings for VIP1. See Table 5-30, Modes Summary for a list of IO timings requiring the
use of Manual IO Timings Modes. See Table 5-35, Manual Functions Mapping for VIN2B (IOSET7/8/9) for a definition of the Manual modes.
Table 5-35 lists the A_DELAY and G_DELAY values needed to calculate the correct values to be set in the CFG_x registers.
Table 5-35. Manual Functions Mapping for VIN2B (IOSET7/8/9)
BALL
BALL NAME
VIP_MANUAL4
VIP_MANUAL6
CFG REGISTER
A_DELAY (ps)
G_DELAY (ps)
A_DELAY (ps)
G_DELAY (ps)
gpio6_10
2829
884
3009
892
Y6
gpio6_11
2648
1033
2890
Y2
mmc3_clk
2794
1074
2997
Y1
mmc3_cmd
2789
1162
Y5
MUXMODE
2
3
4
CFG_GPIO6_10_IN
-
-
vin2b_hsync1
1096
CFG_GPIO6_11_IN
-
-
vin2b_vsync1
1089
CFG_MMC3_CLK_IN
-
-
vin2b_d7
2959
1210
CFG_MMC3_CMD_IN
-
-
vin2b_d6
Y4
mmc3_dat0
2689
1180
2897
1269
CFG_MMC3_DAT0_IN
-
-
vin2b_d5
AA2
mmc3_dat1
2605
1219
2891
1219
CFG_MMC3_DAT1_IN
-
-
vin2b_d4
AA3
mmc3_dat2
2616
703
2947
590
CFG_MMC3_DAT2_IN
-
-
vin2b_d3
W2
mmc3_dat3
2760
1235
2931
1342
CFG_MMC3_DAT3_IN
-
-
vin2b_d2
Y3
mmc3_dat4
2757
880
2979
891
CFG_MMC3_DAT4_IN
-
-
vin2b_d1
AA1
mmc3_dat5
2688
1177
2894
1262
CFG_MMC3_DAT5_IN
-
-
vin2b_d0
AA4
mmc3_dat6
2638
1165
2894
1187
CFG_MMC3_DAT6_IN
-
-
vin2b_de1
AB1
mmc3_dat7
995
182
1202
107
CFG_MMC3_DAT7_IN
-
-
vin2b_clk1
A12
vin2a_d16
1423
0
1739
0
CFG_VIN2A_D16_IN
vin2b_d7
-
-
A13
vin2a_d17
1253
0
1568
0
CFG_VIN2A_D17_IN
vin2b_d6
-
-
E11
vin2a_d18
2080
0
2217
0
CFG_VIN2A_D18_IN
vin2b_d5
-
-
F11
vin2a_d19
1849
0
2029
0
CFG_VIN2A_D19_IN
vin2b_d4
-
-
B13
vin2a_d20
1881
50
2202
0
CFG_VIN2A_D20_IN
vin2b_d3
-
-
E13
vin2a_d21
1917
167
2313
0
CFG_VIN2A_D21_IN
vin2b_d2
-
-
C13
vin2a_d22
1955
79
2334
0
CFG_VIN2A_D22_IN
vin2b_d1
-
-
D13
vin2a_d23
1899
145
2288
0
CFG_VIN2A_D23_IN
vin2b_d0
-
-
B7
vin2a_de0
1568
261
2048
0
CFG_VIN2A_DE0_IN
vin2b_fld1
vin2b_de1
-
C7
vin2a_fld0
0
0
0
0
CFG_VIN2A_FLD0_IN
vin2b_clk1
-
-
E8
vin2a_hsync0
1793
0
2011
0
CFG_VIN2A_HSYNC0_IN
-
vin2b_hsync1
-
B8
vin2a_vsync0
1382
0
1632
0
CFG_VIN2A_VSYNC0_IN
-
vin2b_vsync1
-
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
177
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Manual IO Timings Modes must be used to ensure some IO timings for VIP1. See Table 5-30, Modes Summary for a list of IO timings requiring the
use of Manual IO Timings Modes. See Table 5-36, Manual Functions Mapping for VIN1A (IOSET2) and VIN2B (IOSET1/10) for a definition of the
Manual modes.
Table 5-36 lists the A_DELAY and G_DELAY values needed to calculate the correct values to be set in the CFG_x registers.
Table 5-36. Manual Functions Mapping for VIN1A (IOSET2) and VIN2B (IOSET1/10)
BALL
BALL NAME
VIP_MANUAL7
VIP_MANUAL12
CFG REGISTER
MUXMODE
A_DELAY (ps)
G_DELAY (ps)
A_DELAY (ps)
G_DELAY (ps)
2
6
M1
gpmc_a0
3080
1792
3376
1632
CFG_GPMC_A0_IN
vin1a_d16
-
M2
gpmc_a1
2958
1890
3249
1749
CFG_GPMC_A1_IN
vin1a_d17
-
J2
gpmc_a10
3073
1653
3388
1433
CFG_GPMC_A10_IN
vin1a_de0
L3
gpmc_a11
3014
1784
3290
1693
CFG_GPMC_A11_IN
vin1a_fld0
-
A4
gpmc_a19
1385
0
1246
0
CFG_GPMC_A19_IN
-
vin2b_d0
L2
gpmc_a2
3041
1960
3322
1850
CFG_GPMC_A2_IN
vin1a_d18
-
E7
gpmc_a20
859
0
720
0
CFG_GPMC_A20_IN
-
vin2b_d1
D6
gpmc_a21
1465
0
1334
0
CFG_GPMC_A21_IN
-
vin2b_d2
C5
gpmc_a22
1210
0
1064
0
CFG_GPMC_A22_IN
-
vin2b_d3
B5
gpmc_a23
1111
0
954
0
CFG_GPMC_A23_IN
-
vin2b_d4
D7
gpmc_a24
1137
0
1051
0
CFG_GPMC_A24_IN
-
vin2b_d5
C6
gpmc_a25
1402
0
1283
0
CFG_GPMC_A25_IN
-
vin2b_d6
A5
gpmc_a26
1298
0
1153
0
CFG_GPMC_A26_IN
-
vin2b_d7
B6
gpmc_a27
934
0
870
0
CFG_GPMC_A27_IN
-
vin2b_hsync1
L1
gpmc_a3
3019
2145
3296
2050
CFG_GPMC_A3_IN
vin1a_d19
-
K3
gpmc_a4
3063
1981
3357
1829
CFG_GPMC_A4_IN
vin1a_d20
-
K2
gpmc_a5
3021
1954
3304
1840
CFG_GPMC_A5_IN
vin1a_d21
-
J1
gpmc_a6
3062
1716
3348
1592
CFG_GPMC_A6_IN
vin1a_d22
-
K1
gpmc_a7
3260
1889
3583
1631
CFG_GPMC_A7_IN
vin1a_d23
-
K4
gpmc_a8
3033
1702
3328
1547
CFG_GPMC_A8_IN
vin1a_hsync0
-
H1
gpmc_a9
2991
1905
3281
1766
CFG_GPMC_A9_IN
vin1a_vsync0
-
F1
gpmc_ad0
2907
1342
3181
1255
CFG_GPMC_AD0_IN
vin1a_d0
-
E2
gpmc_ad1
2858
1321
3132
1234
CFG_GPMC_AD1_IN
vin1a_d1
-
A2
gpmc_ad10
2920
1384
3223
1204
CFG_GPMC_AD10_IN
vin1a_d10
-
B3
gpmc_ad11
2719
1310
3019
1198
CFG_GPMC_AD11_IN
vin1a_d11
-
C3
gpmc_ad12
2845
1135
3160
917
CFG_GPMC_AD12_IN
vin1a_d12
-
C4
gpmc_ad13
2765
1225
3045
1119
CFG_GPMC_AD13_IN
vin1a_d13
-
178
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 5-36. Manual Functions Mapping for VIN1A (IOSET2) and VIN2B (IOSET1/10) (continued)
BALL
BALL NAME
VIP_MANUAL7
VIP_MANUAL12
CFG REGISTER
MUXMODE
A_DELAY (ps)
G_DELAY (ps)
A_DELAY (ps)
G_DELAY (ps)
2
6
A3
gpmc_ad14
2845
1150
3153
952
CFG_GPMC_AD14_IN
vin1a_d14
-
B4
gpmc_ad15
2766
1453
3044
1355
CFG_GPMC_AD15_IN
vin1a_d15
-
E1
gpmc_ad2
2951
1296
3226
1209
CFG_GPMC_AD2_IN
vin1a_d2
-
C1
gpmc_ad3
2825
1154
3121
997
CFG_GPMC_AD3_IN
vin1a_d3
-
D1
gpmc_ad4
2927
1245
3246
1014
CFG_GPMC_AD4_IN
vin1a_d4
-
D2
gpmc_ad5
2923
1251
3217
1098
CFG_GPMC_AD5_IN
vin1a_d5
-
B1
gpmc_ad6
2958
1342
3238
1239
CFG_GPMC_AD6_IN
vin1a_d6
-
B2
gpmc_ad7
2900
1244
3174
1157
CFG_GPMC_AD7_IN
vin1a_d7
-
C2
gpmc_ad8
2845
1585
3125
1482
CFG_GPMC_AD8_IN
vin1a_d8
-
D3
gpmc_ad9
2779
1343
3086
1223
CFG_GPMC_AD9_IN
vin1a_d9
-
H2
gpmc_ben0
1555
0
1425
0
CFG_GPMC_BEN0_IN
-
vin2b_de1
H6
gpmc_ben1
1501
0
1397
0
CFG_GPMC_BEN1_IN
-
vin2b_fld1
L4
gpmc_clk
0
0
0
0
CFG_GPMC_CLK_IN
-
vin2b_clk1
A6
gpmc_cs1
1192
0
1102
0
CFG_GPMC_CS1_IN
-
vin2b_vsync1
G3
gpmc_cs3
1324
374
1466
353
CFG_GPMC_CS3_IN
vin1a_clk0
-
Manual IO Timings Modes must be used to ensure some IO timings for VIP1. See Table 5-30, Modes Summary for a list of IO timings requiring the
use of Manual IO Timings Modes. See Table 5-37, Manual Functions Mapping for VIN1B (IOSET6/7) for a definition of the Manual modes.
Table 5-37 lists the A_DELAY and G_DELAY values needed to calculate the correct values to be set in the CFG_x registers.
Table 5-37. Manual Functions Mapping for VIN1B (IOSET6/7)
BALL
BALL NAME
VIP_MANUAL9
VIP_MANUAL14
CFG REGISTER
A_DELAY (ps)
G_DELAY (ps)
A_DELAY (ps)
G_DELAY (ps)
MUXMODE
5
6
vin1b_d0
M1
gpmc_a0
1873
702
2202
441
CFG_GPMC_A0_IN
-
M2
gpmc_a1
1629
772
2057
413
CFG_GPMC_A1_IN
-
vin1b_d1
J2
gpmc_a10
0
0
0
0
CFG_GPMC_A10_IN
-
vin1b_clk1
L3
gpmc_a11
1851
1011
2126
856
CFG_GPMC_A11_IN
-
vin1b_de1
G1
gpmc_a12
2009
601
2289
327
CFG_GPMC_A12_IN
-
vin1b_fld1
L2
gpmc_a2
1734
898
2131
573
CFG_GPMC_A2_IN
-
vin1b_d2
L1
gpmc_a3
1757
1076
2106
812
CFG_GPMC_A3_IN
-
vin1b_d3
K3
gpmc_a4
1794
893
2164
559
CFG_GPMC_A4_IN
-
vin1b_d4
K2
gpmc_a5
1726
853
2120
523
CFG_GPMC_A5_IN
-
vin1b_d5
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
179
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 5-37. Manual Functions Mapping for VIN1B (IOSET6/7) (continued)
BALL
BALL NAME
VIP_MANUAL9
VIP_MANUAL14
CFG REGISTER
MUXMODE
A_DELAY (ps)
G_DELAY (ps)
A_DELAY (ps)
G_DELAY (ps)
5
6
J1
gpmc_a6
1792
612
2153
338
CFG_GPMC_A6_IN
-
vin1b_d6
K1
gpmc_a7
2117
610
2389
304
CFG_GPMC_A7_IN
-
vin1b_d7
K4
gpmc_a8
1758
653
2140
308
CFG_GPMC_A8_IN
-
vin1b_hsync1
H1
gpmc_a9
1705
899
2067
646
CFG_GPMC_A9_IN
-
vin1b_vsync1
L6
mdio_d
1945
671
2265
414
CFG_MDIO_D_IN
vin1b_d0
-
L5
mdio_mclk
255
119
337
0
CFG_MDIO_MCLK_IN
vin1b_clk1
-
N2
rgmii0_rxc
2057
909
2341
646
CFG_RGMII0_RXC_IN
vin1b_d5
-
P2
rgmii0_rxctl
2121
1139
2323
988
CFG_RGMII0_RXCTL_IN
vin1b_d6
-
N4
rgmii0_rxd0
2070
655
2336
340
CFG_RGMII0_RXD0_IN
vin1b_fld1
-
N1
rgmii0_rxd3
2092
1357
2306
1216
CFG_RGMII0_RXD3_IN
vin1b_d7
-
T4
rgmii0_txc
2088
1205
2328
1079
CFG_RGMII0_TXC_IN
vin1b_d3
-
T5
rgmii0_txctl
2143
1383
2312
1311
CFG_RGMII0_TXCTL_IN
vin1b_d4
-
R2
rgmii0_txd1
2078
1189
2324
1065
CFG_RGMII0_TXD1_IN
vin1b_vsync1
-
P3
rgmii0_txd2
1928
1125
2306
763
CFG_RGMII0_TXD2_IN
vin1b_hsync1
-
P4
rgmii0_txd3
2255
971
2401
846
CFG_RGMII0_TXD3_IN
vin1b_de1
-
N5
uart3_rxd
1829
747
2220
400
CFG_UART3_RXD_IN
vin1b_d1
-
N6
uart3_txd
2030
837
2324
568
CFG_UART3_TXD_IN
vin1b_d2
-
Manual IO Timings Modes must be used to ensure some IO timings for VIP1. See Table 5-30, Modes Summary for a list of IO timings requiring the
use of Manual IO Timings Modes. See Table 5-38, Manual Functions Mapping for VIN2B (IOSET2/11) for a definition of the Manual modes.
Table 5-38 lists the A_DELAY and G_DELAY values needed to calculate the correct values to be set in the CFG_x registers.
Table 5-38. Manual Functions Mapping for VIN2B (IOSET2/11)
BALL
BALL NAME
VIP_MANUAL10
VIP_MANUAL11
A_DELAY (ps)
G_DELAY (ps)
A_DELAY (ps)
G_DELAY (ps)
943
2023
477
A4
gpmc_a19
1600
CFG REGISTER
MUXMODE
4
6
CFG_GPMC_A19_IN
-
vin2b_d0
E7
gpmc_a20
1440
621
1875
136
CFG_GPMC_A20_IN
-
vin2b_d1
D6
gpmc_a21
1602
1066
2021
604
CFG_GPMC_A21_IN
-
vin2b_d2
C5
gpmc_a22
1395
983
1822
519
CFG_GPMC_A22_IN
-
vin2b_d3
B5
gpmc_a23
1571
716
2045
200
CFG_GPMC_A23_IN
-
vin2b_d4
D7
gpmc_a24
1463
832
1893
396
CFG_GPMC_A24_IN
-
vin2b_d5
C6
gpmc_a25
1426
1166
1842
732
CFG_GPMC_A25_IN
-
vin2b_d6
180
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 5-38. Manual Functions Mapping for VIN2B (IOSET2/11) (continued)
BALL
BALL NAME
VIP_MANUAL10
VIP_MANUAL11
CFG REGISTER
MUXMODE
A_DELAY (ps)
G_DELAY (ps)
A_DELAY (ps)
G_DELAY (ps)
4
6
A5
gpmc_a26
1362
1094
1797
584
CFG_GPMC_A26_IN
-
vin2b_d7
B6
gpmc_a27
1283
809
1760
338
CFG_GPMC_A27_IN
-
vin2b_hsync1
H2
gpmc_ben0
1978
780
2327
389
CFG_GPMC_BEN0_IN
-
vin2b_de1
H6
gpmc_ben1
0
0
0
0
CFG_GPMC_BEN1_IN
vin2b_clk1
-
A6
gpmc_cs1
1411
982
1857
536
CFG_GPMC_CS1_IN
-
vin2b_vsync1
Manual IO Timings Modes must be used to ensure some IO timings for VIP1. See Table 5-30, Modes Summary for a list of IO timings requiring the
use of Manual IO Timings Modes. See Table 5-39, Manual Functions Mapping for VIN1A (IOSET8/9/10) for a definition of the Manual modes.
Table 5-39 lists the A_DELAY and G_DELAY values needed to calculate the correct values to be set in the CFG_x registers.
Table 5-39. Manual Functions Mapping for VIN1A (IOSET8/9/10)
BALL
BALL NAME
VIP_MANUAL15
VIP_MANUAL16
CFG REGISTER
A_DELAY (ps)
G_DELAY (ps)
A_DELAY (ps)
G_DELAY (ps)
MUXMODE
7
9
Y5
gpio6_10
2131
2198
2170
2180
CFG_GPIO6_10_IN
-
vin1a_clk0
Y6
gpio6_11
3720
2732
4106
2448
CFG_GPIO6_11_IN
-
vin1a_de0
C16
mcasp1_aclkx
2447
0
3042
0
CFG_MCASP1_ACLKX_IN
vin1a_fld0
-
D14
mcasp1_axr0
3061
0
3380
292
CFG_MCASP1_AXR0_IN
vin1a_vsync0
-
B14
mcasp1_axr1
3113
0
3396
304
CFG_MCASP1_AXR1_IN
vin1a_hsync0
-
B16
mcasp1_axr10
2803
0
3362
0
CFG_MCASP1_AXR10_IN
vin1a_d13
-
B18
mcasp1_axr11
3292
0
3357
546
CFG_MCASP1_AXR11_IN
vin1a_d12
-
A19
mcasp1_axr12
2854
0
3145
320
CFG_MCASP1_AXR12_IN
vin1a_d11
-
E17
mcasp1_axr13
2813
0
3229
196
CFG_MCASP1_AXR13_IN
vin1a_d10
-
E16
mcasp1_axr14
2471
0
3053
0
CFG_MCASP1_AXR14_IN
vin1a_d9
-
F16
mcasp1_axr15
2815
0
3225
201
CFG_MCASP1_AXR15_IN
vin1a_d8
-
A18
mcasp1_axr8
2965
0
3427
83
CFG_MCASP1_AXR8_IN
vin1a_d15
-
B17
mcasp1_axr9
3082
0
3253
440
CFG_MCASP1_AXR9_IN
vin1a_d14
-
C17
mcasp1_fsx
2898
0
3368
139
CFG_MCASP1_FSX_IN
vin1a_de0
-
E19
mcasp2_aclkx
2413
0
2972
0
CFG_MCASP2_ACLKX_IN
vin1a_d7
-
A21
mcasp2_axr2
2478
0
3062
0
CFG_MCASP2_AXR2_IN
vin1a_d5
-
B21
mcasp2_axr3
2806
0
3175
242
CFG_MCASP2_AXR3_IN
vin1a_d4
-
D19
mcasp2_fsx
2861
78
2936
599
CFG_MCASP2_FSX_IN
vin1a_d6
-
A22
mcasp3_aclkx
1583
0
1878
0
CFG_MCASP3_ACLKX_IN
vin1a_d3
-
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
181
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 5-39. Manual Functions Mapping for VIN1A (IOSET8/9/10) (continued)
BALL
BALL NAME
VIP_MANUAL15
VIP_MANUAL16
CFG REGISTER
MUXMODE
A_DELAY (ps)
G_DELAY (ps)
A_DELAY (ps)
G_DELAY (ps)
7
9
B22
mcasp3_axr0
2873
0
3109
375
CFG_MCASP3_AXR0_IN
vin1a_d1
-
B23
mcasp3_axr1
1625
1400
2072
1023
CFG_MCASP3_AXR1_IN
vin1a_d0
-
A23
mcasp3_fsx
2792
0
3146
257
CFG_MCASP3_FSX_IN
vin1a_d2
-
Y2
mmc3_clk
3907
2744
4260
2450
CFG_MMC3_CLK_IN
-
vin1a_d7
Y1
mmc3_cmd
3892
2768
4242
2470
CFG_MMC3_CMD_IN
-
vin1a_d6
Y4
mmc3_dat0
3786
2765
4156
2522
CFG_MMC3_DAT0_IN
-
vin1a_d5
AA2
mmc3_dat1
3673
2961
4053
2667
CFG_MMC3_DAT1_IN
-
vin1a_d4
AA3
mmc3_dat2
3818
2447
4209
2096
CFG_MMC3_DAT2_IN
-
vin1a_d3
W2
mmc3_dat3
3902
2903
4259
2672
CFG_MMC3_DAT3_IN
-
vin1a_d2
vin1a_d1
Y3
mmc3_dat4
3905
2622
4259
2342
CFG_MMC3_DAT4_IN
-
AA1
mmc3_dat5
3807
2824
4167
2595
CFG_MMC3_DAT5_IN
-
vin1a_d0
AA4
mmc3_dat6
3724
2818
4123
2491
CFG_MMC3_DAT6_IN
-
vin1a_hsync0
AB1
mmc3_dat7
3775
2481
4159
2161
CFG_MMC3_DAT7_IN
-
vin1a_vsync0
J25
xref_clk0
1971
0
2472
0
CFG_XREF_CLK0_IN
vin1a_d0
-
J24
xref_clk1
0
192
0
603
CFG_XREF_CLK1_IN
vin1a_clk0
-
182
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
5.10.6.4 DSS
Two Display Parallel Interfaces (DPI) channels are available in DSS named DPI Video Output 2 and DPI
Video Output 3.
NOTE
The DPI Video Output i (i = 2, 3) interface is also referred to as VOUTi.
Every VOUT interface consists of:
• 24-bit data bus (data[23:0])
• Horizontal synchronization signal (HSYNC)
• Vertical synchronization signal (VSYNC)
• Data enable (DE)
• Field ID (FID)
• Pixel clock (CLK)
NOTE
For more information, see the Display Subsystem chapter of the Device TRM.
CAUTION
The I/O timings provided in this section are valid only if signals within a single
IOSET are used. The IOSETs are defined in Table 5-44.
CAUTION
The I/O Timings provided in this section are valid only for some DSS usage
modes when the corresponding Virtual I/O Timings or Manual I/O Timings are
configured as described in the tables found in this section.
CAUTION
All pads/balls configured as vouti_* signals must be programmed to use slow
slew rate by setting the corresponding CTRL_CORE_PAD_*[SLEWCONTROL]
register field to SLOW (0b1).
Table 5-40, Table 5-41 and Figure 5-19 assume testing over the recommended operating conditions and
electrical characteristic conditions.
Table 5-40. DPI Video Output i (i = 2, 3) Default Switching Characteristics(1)(2)
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
MODE
MIN
DPI2/3
11.76
ns
Pulse duration, output pixel clock vouti_clk low
P × 0.51 (1)
ns
Pulse duration, output pixel clock vouti_clk high
P × 0.51 (1)
ns
D1
tc(clk)
Cycle time, output pixel clock vouti_clk
D2
tw(clkL)
D3
tw(clkH)
MAX
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
UNIT
183
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 5-40. DPI Video Output i (i = 2, 3) Default Switching Characteristics(1)(2) (continued)
NO.
MODE
MIN
MAX
D5
td(clk-ctlV)
PARAMETER
Delay time, output pixel clock vouti_clk transition to
output data vouti_d[23:0] valid
DESCRIPTION
DPI2 (vin2a_fld0 clock
reference)
-2.5
2.5
UNIT
ns
D6
td(clk-dV)
Delay time, output pixel clock vouti_clk transition to
output control signals vouti_vsync, vouti_hsync,
vouti_de, and vouti_fld valid
DPI2 (vin2a_fld0 clock
reference)
-2.5
2.5
ns
D5
td(clk-ctlV)
Delay time, output pixel clock vouti_clk transition to
output data vouti_d[23:0] valid
DPI3
-2.5
2.5
ns
D6
td(clk-dV)
Delay time, output pixel clock vouti_clk transition to
output control signals vouti_vsync, vouti_hsync,
vouti_de, and vouti_fld valid
DPI3
-2.5
2.5
ns
(1) P = output vouti_clk period in ns.
(2) All pads/balls configured as vouti_* signals must be programmed to use slow slew rate by setting the corresponding
CTRL_CORE_PAD_*[SLEWCONTROL] register field to SLOW (0b1).
(3) SERDES transceivers may be sensitive to the jitter profile of vouti_clk. See Application Note Optimizing DRA7xx and TDA2xx
Processors for Use With Video Display SerDes for additional guidance.
Table 5-41. DPI Video Output i (i = 2, 3) Alternate Switching Characteristics(2)
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
MODE
D1
tc(clk)
Cycle time, output pixel clock vouti_clk
6.06
ns
D2
tw(clkL)
Pulse duration, output pixel clock vouti_clk low
P × 0.51 (1)
ns
D3
tw(clkH)
Pulse duration, output pixel clock vouti_clk high
P × 0.51 (1)
ns
D5
td(clk-ctlV)
Delay time, output pixel clock vouti_clk transition to
output data vouti_d[23:0] valid
DPI2 (vin2a_fld0 clock
reference)
1.51
4.55
ns
D6
td(clk-dV)
Delay time, output pixel clock vouti_clk transition to
output control signals vouti_vsync, vouti_hsync, vouti_de,
and vouti_fld valid
DPI2 (vin2a_fld0 clock
reference)
1.51
4.55
ns
D5
td(clk-ctlV)
Delay time, output pixel clock vouti_clk transition to
output data vouti_d[23:0] valid
DPI3
1.51
4.55
ns
D6
td(clk-dV)
Delay time, output pixel clock vouti_clk transition to
output control signals vouti_vsync, vouti_hsync, vouti_de,
and vouti_fld valid
DPI3
1.51
4.55
ns
DPI2/3
MIN
MAX
UNIT
(1) P = output vouti_clk period in ns.
(2) All pads/balls configured as vouti_* signals must be programmed to use slow slew rate by setting the corresponding
CTRL_CORE_PAD_*[SLEWCONTROL] register field to SLOW (0b1).
(3) SERDES transceivers may be sensitive to the jitter profile of vouti_clk. See Application Note Optimizing DRA7xx and TDA2xx
Processors for Use With Video Display SerDes for additional guidance.
Table 5-42. DPI Video Output i (i = 2, 3) MANUAL4 Switching Characteristics
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
(2)
MODE
MIN
DPI2/3
(3)
ns
UNIT
D1
tc(clk)
Cycle time, output pixel clock vouti_clk
D2
tw(clkL)
Pulse duration, output pixel clock vouti_clk low
P*0.5-1
ns
D3
tw(clkH)
Pulse duration, output pixel clock vouti_clk high
P*0.5-1
ns
D5
td(clk-ctlV)
Delay time, output pixel clock vouti_clk transition to
output data vouti_d[23:0] valid
DPI1
2.85
5.56
ns
D6
td(clk-dV)
Delay time, output pixel clock vouti_clk transition to
output control signals vouti_vsync, vouti_hsync,
vouti_de, and vouti_fld valid
DPI1
2.85
5.56
ns
D5
td(clk-ctlV)
Delay time, output pixel clock vouti_clk transition to
output data vouti_d[23:0] valid
DPI2 (vin2a_fld0 clock
reference)
2.85
5.56
ns
184
6.06
MAX
(1)
(1)
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 5-42. DPI Video Output i (i = 2, 3) MANUAL4 Switching Characteristics
(2)
(continued)
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
MODE
MIN
MAX
UNIT
D6
td(clk-dV)
Delay time, output pixel clock vouti_clk transition to
output control signals vouti_vsync, vouti_hsync,
vouti_de, and vouti_fld valid
DPI2 (vin2a_fld0 clock
reference)
2.85
5.56
ns
D5
td(clk-ctlV)
Delay time, output pixel clock vouti_clk transition to
output data vouti_d[23:0] valid
DPI2 (xref_clk2 clock
reference)
2.85
5.56
ns
D6
td(clk-dV)
Delay time, output pixel clock vouti_clk transition to
output control signals vouti_vsync, vouti_hsync,
vouti_de, and vouti_fld valid
DPI2 (xref_clk2 clock
reference)
2.85
5.56
ns
D5
td(clk-ctlV)
Delay time, output pixel clock vouti_clk transition to
output data vouti_d[23:0] valid
DPI3
2.85
5.56
ns
D6
td(clk-dV)
Delay time, output pixel clock vouti_clk transition to
output control signals vouti_vsync, vouti_hsync,
vouti_de, and vouti_fld valid
DPI3
2.85
5.56
ns
(1) P = output vouti_clk period in ns.
(2) All pads/balls configured as vouti_* signals must be programmed to use slow slew rate by setting the corresponding
CTRL_CORE_PAD_*[SLEWCONTROL] register field to SLOW (0b1).
(3) SERDES transceivers may be sensitive to the jitter profile of vouti_clk. See Application Note Optimizing DRA7xx and TDA2xx
Processors for Use With Video Display SerDes for additional guidance.
Table 5-43. DPI Video Output i (i = 2, 3) MANUAL5 Switching Characteristics
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
MODE
D1
tc(clk)
Cycle time, output pixel clock vouti_clk
DPI2/3
D2
tw(clkL)
D3
(2)
MIN
MAX
UNIT
(3)
ns
Pulse duration, output pixel clock vouti_clk low
P*0.5-1
ns
tw(clkH)
Pulse duration, output pixel clock vouti_clk high
P*0.5-1
ns
D5
td(clk-ctlV)
Delay time, output pixel clock vouti_clk transition to
output data vouti_d[23:0] valid
DPI1
3.55
6.61
ns
D6
td(clk-dV)
Delay time, output pixel clock vouti_clk transition to
output control signals vouti_vsync, vouti_hsync,
vouti_de, and vouti_fld valid
DPI1
3.55
6.61
ns
D5
td(clk-ctlV)
Delay time, output pixel clock vouti_clk transition to
output data vouti_d[23:0] valid
DPI2 (vin2a_fld0 clock
reference)
3.55
6.61
ns
D6
td(clk-dV)
Delay time, output pixel clock vouti_clk transition to
output control signals vouti_vsync, vouti_hsync,
vouti_de, and vouti_fld valid
DPI2 (vin2a_fld0 clock
reference)
3.55
6.61
ns
D5
td(clk-ctlV)
Delay time, output pixel clock vouti_clk transition to
output data vouti_d[23:0] valid
DPI2 (xref_clk2 clock
reference)
3.55
6.61
ns
D6
td(clk-dV)
Delay time, output pixel clock vouti_clk transition to
output control signals vouti_vsync, vouti_hsync,
vouti_de, and vouti_fld valid
DPI2 (xref_clk2 clock
reference)
3.55
6.61
ns
D5
td(clk-ctlV)
Delay time, output pixel clock vouti_clk transition to
output data vouti_d[23:0] valid
DPI3
3.55
6.61
ns
D6
td(clk-dV)
Delay time, output pixel clock vouti_clk transition to
output control signals vouti_vsync, vouti_hsync,
vouti_de, and vouti_fld valid
DPI3
3.55
6.61
ns
6.06
(1)
(1)
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
185
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
(1) P = output vouti_clk period in ns.
(2) All pads/balls configured as vouti_* signals must be programmed to use slow slew rate by setting the corresponding
CTRL_CORE_PAD_*[SLEWCONTROL] register field to SLOW (0b1).
(3) SERDES transceivers may be sensitive to the jitter profile of vouti_clk. See Application Note Optimizing DRA7xx and TDA2xx
Processors for Use With Video Display SerDes for additional guidance.
D2
D1
D3
D4
Falling-edge Clock Reference
vouti_clk
D6
Rising-edge Clock Reference
vouti_clk
vouti_vsync
D6
vouti_hsync
D5
vouti_d[23:0]
data_1 data_2
data_n
D6
vouti_de
D6
vouti_fld
even
odd
SWPS049-018
(1)(2)(3)
Figure 5-19. DPI Video Output
(1) The configuration of assertion of the data can be programmed on the falling or rising edge of the pixel clock.
(2) The polarity and the pulse width of vouti_hsync and vouti_vsync are programmable, refer to the DSS section of the Device TRM.
(3) The vouti_clk frequency can be configured, refer to the DSS section of the Device TRM.
In Table 5-44 are presented the specific groupings of signals (IOSET) for use with VOUT2.
Table 5-44. VOUT2 IOSETs
SIGNALS
186
IOSET1
BALL
MUX
vout2_d23
C8
4
vout2_d22
B9
4
vout2_d21
A7
4
vout2_d20
A9
4
vout2_d19
A8
4
vout2_d18
A11
4
vout2_d17
F10
4
vout2_d16
A10
4
vout2_d15
B10
4
vout2_d14
E10
4
vout2_d13
D10
4
vout2_d12
C10
4
vout2_d11
B11
4
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 5-44. VOUT2 IOSETs (continued)
SIGNALS
IOSET1
BALL
MUX
vout2_d10
D11
4
vout2_d9
C11
4
vout2_d8
B12
4
vout2_d7
A12
4
vout2_d6
A13
4
vout2_d5
E11
4
vout2_d4
F11
4
vout2_d3
B13
4
vout2_d2
E13
4
vout2_d1
C13
4
vout2_d0
D13
4
vout2_vsync
B8
4
vout2_hsync
E8
4
vout2_clk
C7
4
vout2_fld
D8
4
vout2_de
B7
4
In are presented the specific groupings of signals (IOSET) for use with VOUT3.
NOTE
To configure the desired virtual mode the user must set MODESELECT bit and
DELAYMODE bitfield for each corresponding pad control register.
The pad control registers are presented in Table 4-31 and described in Device TRM, Control
Module Chapter.
Virtual IO Timings Modes must be used to ensure some IO timings for VOUT3. See Table 5-30, Modes
Summary for a list of IO timings requiring the use of Virtual IO Timings Modes. See Table 5-45, Virtual
Functions Mapping for VOUT3 for a definition of the Virtual modes.
Table 5-45 presents the values for DELAYMODE bitfield.
Table 5-45. Virtual Functions Mapping for DSS VOUT3
BALL
B4
BALL NAME
Delay Mode Value
MUXMODE
DSS_VIRTUAL1
3
gpmc_ad15
14
vout3_d15
K4
gpmc_a8
15
vout3_hsync
D1
gpmc_ad4
14
vout3_d4
F1
gpmc_ad0
14
vout3_d0
C4
gpmc_ad13
14
vout3_d13
vout3_d18
L2
gpmc_a2
15
E2
gpmc_ad1
14
vout3_d1
K3
gpmc_a4
15
vout3_d20
J1
gpmc_a6
15
vout3_d22
A3
gpmc_ad14
14
vout3_d14
M2
gpmc_a1
15
vout3_d17
G3
gpmc_cs3
15
vout3_clk
H1
gpmc_a9
15
vout3_vsync
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
187
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 5-45. Virtual Functions Mapping for DSS VOUT3 (continued)
BALL
BALL NAME
Delay Mode Value
MUXMODE
DSS_VIRTUAL1
3
B3
gpmc_ad11
14
vout3_d11
B1
gpmc_ad6
14
vout3_d6
E1
gpmc_ad2
14
vout3_d2
C1
gpmc_ad3
14
vout3_d3
K1
gpmc_a7
15
vout3_d23
L1
gpmc_a3
15
vout3_d19
A2
gpmc_ad10
14
vout3_d10
B2
gpmc_ad7
14
vout3_d7
J2
gpmc_a10
15
vout3_de
K2
gpmc_a5
15
vout3_d21
C2
gpmc_ad8
14
vout3_d8
D2
gpmc_ad5
14
vout3_d5
M1
gpmc_a0
15
vout3_d16
C3
gpmc_ad12
14
vout3_d12
L3
gpmc_a11
15
vout3_fld
D3
gpmc_ad9
14
vout3_d9
NOTE
To configure the desired Manual IO Timing Mode the user must follow the steps described in
section "Manual IO Timing Modes" of the Device TRM.
The associated registers to configure are listed in the CFG REGISTER column. For more
information please see the Control Module Chapter in the Device TRM.
Manual IO Timings Modes must be used to ensure some IO timings for VOUT2. See Table 5-30, Modes
Summary for a list of IO timings requiring the use of Manual IO Timings Modes. See Table 5-46, Manual
Functions Mapping for DSS VOUT2 IOSET1 for a definition of the Manual modes.
Table 5-46 lists the A_DELAY and G_DELAY values needed to calculate the correct values to be set in
the CFG_x registers.
188
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 5-46. Manual Functions Mapping for DSS VOUT2 IOSET1
BALL
BALL
NAME
VOUT2_IOSET1
_MANUAL1
VOUT2_IOSET1
_MANUAL2
VOUT2_IOSET1
_MANUAL3
VOUT2_IOSET1
_MANUAL4
VOUT2_IOSET1
_MANUAL5
A_DELAY
(ps)
G_DELAY
(ps)
A_DELAY
(ps)
G_DELAY
(ps)
A_DELAY
(ps)
G_DELAY
(ps)
A_DELAY
(ps)
G_DELAY
(ps)
A_DELAY
(ps)
G_DELAY
(ps)
CFG REGISTER
MUXMODE
4
D8
vin2a_clk0
2571
0
1059
0
1025
0
4110
0
4980
0
CFG_VIN2A_CLK0_OUT
vout2_fld
C8
vin2a_d0
2124
0
589
0
577
0
3613
0
4483
0
CFG_VIN2A_D0_OUT
vout2_d23
B9
vin2a_d1
2103
0
568
0
557
0
3442
0
4312
0
CFG_VIN2A_D1_OUT
vout2_d22
D10
vin2a_d10
2091
0
557
0
545
0
3430
0
4200
0
CFG_VIN2A_D10_OUT
vout2_d13
C10
vin2a_d11
2142
0
608
0
596
0
3481
0
4251
0
CFG_VIN2A_D11_OUT
vout2_d12
B11
vin2a_d12
2920
385
1816
255
1783
276
3943
601
4713
601
CFG_VIN2A_D12_OUT
vout2_d11
D11
vin2a_d13
2776
322
1872
192
1838
213
3799
538
4669
538
CFG_VIN2A_D13_OUT
vout2_d10
C11
vin2a_d14
2904
0
1769
0
1757
0
3869
174
4739
174
CFG_VIN2A_D14_OUT
vout2_d9
B12
vin2a_d15
2670
257
1665
127
1632
148
3792
473
4662
473
CFG_VIN2A_D15_OUT
vout2_d8
A12
vin2a_d16
2814
155
1908
31
1878
43
3837
371
4707
371
CFG_VIN2A_D16_OUT
vout2_d7
A13
vin2a_d17
3002
199
1897
69
1865
89
4024
415
4894
415
CFG_VIN2A_D17_OUT
vout2_d6
E11
vin2a_d18
1893
0
358
0
347
0
3432
0
4302
0
CFG_VIN2A_D18_OUT
vout2_d5
F11
vin2a_d19
1698
0
163
0
151
0
3237
0
4007
0
CFG_VIN2A_D19_OUT
vout2_d4
A7
vin2a_d2
2193
0
658
0
646
0
3531
0
4401
0
CFG_VIN2A_D2_OUT
vout2_d21
B13
vin2a_d20
1736
0
202
0
190
0
3075
0
3945
0
CFG_VIN2A_D20_OUT
vout2_d3
E13
vin2a_d21
1636
0
101
0
89
0
3074
0
3944
0
CFG_VIN2A_D21_OUT
vout2_d2
C13
vin2a_d22
1628
0
93
0
81
0
3266
0
4036
0
CFG_VIN2A_D22_OUT
vout2_d1
D13
vin2a_d23
1538
0
0
0
0
0
2968
0
3838
0
CFG_VIN2A_D23_OUT
vout2_d0
A9
vin2a_d3
1997
0
462
0
450
0
3335
0
4205
0
CFG_VIN2A_D3_OUT
vout2_d20
A8
vin2a_d4
2528
0
993
0
982
0
3867
0
4537
0
CFG_VIN2A_D4_OUT
vout2_d19
A11
vin2a_d5
2038
0
503
0
492
0
3577
0
4347
0
CFG_VIN2A_D5_OUT
vout2_d18
F10
vin2a_d6
1746
0
211
0
200
0
3285
0
4055
0
CFG_VIN2A_D6_OUT
vout2_d17
A10
vin2a_d7
2213
0
678
0
666
0
3552
0
4272
0
CFG_VIN2A_D7_OUT
vout2_d16
B10
vin2a_d8
2268
0
733
0
721
0
3607
0
4277
0
CFG_VIN2A_D8_OUT
vout2_d15
E10
vin2a_d9
2170
0
635
0
623
0
3509
0
4379
0
CFG_VIN2A_D9_OUT
vout2_d14
B7
vin2a_de0
2102
0
568
0
556
0
3841
0
4611
0
CFG_VIN2A_DE0_OUT
vout2_de
C7
vin2a_fld0
0
983
1398
1185
1385
1202
0
994
0
994
CFG_VIN2A_FLD0_OUT
vout2_clk
E8
vin2a_hsy
nc0
2482
0
974
0
936
0
4021
0
4891
0
CFG_VIN2A_HSYNC0_
OUT
vout2_hsync
B8
vin2a_vsy
nc0
2296
0
784
0
750
0
3935
0
4805
0
CFG_VIN2A_VSYNC0_O vout2_vsync
UT
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
189
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
190
www.ti.com
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Manual IO Timings Modes must be used to ensure some IO timings for VOUT3. See Table 5-30, Modes
Summary for a list of IO timings requiring the use of Manual IO Timings Modes. See Table 5-47, Manual
Functions Mapping for DSS VOUT3 for a definition of the Manual modes.
Table 5-47 lists the A_DELAY and G_DELAY values needed to calculate the correct values to be set in
the CFG_x registers.
Table 5-47. Manual Functions Mapping for DSS VOUT3
BALL
BALL
NAME
VOUT3_MANUAL1
VOUT3_MANUAL4
VOUT3_MANUAL5
CFG REGISTER
MUXMODE
A_DELAY G_DELAY A_DELAY G_DELAY A_DELAY G_DELAY
(ps)
(ps)
(ps)
(ps)
(ps)
(ps)
3
M1
gpmc_a0
2395
0
3909
0
4779
0
CFG_GPMC_A0_OUT
vout3_d16
M2
gpmc_a1
2412
0
3957
0
4827
0
CFG_GPMC_A1_OUT
vout3_d17
J2
gpmc_a10
2473
0
3980
0
4850
0
CFG_GPMC_A10_OUT
vout3_de
L3
gpmc_a11
2906
0
4253
0
5123
0
CFG_GPMC_A11_OUT
vout3_fld
L2
gpmc_a2
2360
0
3873
0
4743
0
CFG_GPMC_A2_OUT
vout3_d18
L1
gpmc_a3
2391
0
4112
0
4982
0
CFG_GPMC_A3_OUT
vout3_d19
K3
gpmc_a4
2626
0
4336
0
5206
0
CFG_GPMC_A4_OUT
vout3_d20
K2
gpmc_a5
2338
0
3840
0
4710
0
CFG_GPMC_A5_OUT
vout3_d21
J1
gpmc_a6
2374
0
3913
0
4783
0
CFG_GPMC_A6_OUT
vout3_d22
K1
gpmc_a7
2432
0
3947
0
4817
0
CFG_GPMC_A7_OUT
vout3_d23
K4
gpmc_a8
3155
0
4309
105
5179
105
CFG_GPMC_A8_OUT
vout3_hsync
H1
gpmc_a9
2309
0
3842
0
4712
0
CFG_GPMC_A9_OUT
vout3_vsync
F1
gpmc_ad0
2360
0
3652
0
4522
0
CFG_GPMC_AD0_OUT
vout3_d0
E2
gpmc_ad1
2420
0
3762
0
4632
0
CFG_GPMC_AD1_OUT
vout3_d1
A2
gpmc_ad10
2235
0
3456
0
4326
0
CFG_GPMC_AD10_OUT
vout3_d10
B3
gpmc_ad11
2253
0
3584
0
4454
0
CFG_GPMC_AD11_OUT
vout3_d11
C3
gpmc_ad12
1949
427
3589
0
4459
0
CFG_GPMC_AD12_OUT
vout3_d12
C4
gpmc_ad13
2318
0
3547
0
4417
0
CFG_GPMC_AD13_OUT
vout3_d13
A3
gpmc_ad14
2123
0
3302
0
4172
0
CFG_GPMC_AD14_OUT
vout3_d14
B4
gpmc_ad15
2195
29
3532
0
4402
0
CFG_GPMC_AD15_OUT
vout3_d15
E1
gpmc_ad2
2617
0
3859
0
4729
0
CFG_GPMC_AD2_OUT
vout3_d2
C1
gpmc_ad3
2350
0
3590
0
4460
0
CFG_GPMC_AD3_OUT
vout3_d3
D1
gpmc_ad4
2324
0
3534
0
4404
0
CFG_GPMC_AD4_OUT
vout3_d4
D2
gpmc_ad5
2371
0
3609
0
4479
0
CFG_GPMC_AD5_OUT
vout3_d5
B1
gpmc_ad6
2231
0
3416
0
4286
0
CFG_GPMC_AD6_OUT
vout3_d6
B2
gpmc_ad7
2440
0
3661
0
4531
0
CFG_GPMC_AD7_OUT
vout3_d7
C2
gpmc_ad8
2479
0
3714
0
4584
0
CFG_GPMC_AD8_OUT
vout3_d8
D3
gpmc_ad9
2355
0
3593
0
4463
0
CFG_GPMC_AD9_OUT
vout3_d9
G3
gpmc_cs3
0
641
0
905
0
905
CFG_GPMC_CS3_OUT
vout3_clk
5.10.6.5 HDMI
The High-Definition Multimedia Interface is provided for transmitting digital television audiovisual signals
from DVD players, set-top boxes and other audiovisual sources to television sets, projectors and other
video displays. The HDMI interface is aligned with the HDMI TMDS single stream standard v1.4a (720p
@60Hz to 1080p @24Hz) and the HDMI v1.3 (1080p @60Hz): 3 data channels, plus 1 clock channel is
supported (differential).
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
191
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
NOTE
For more information, see the High-Definition Multimedia Interface chapter of the Device
TRM.
5.10.6.6 CSI2
NOTE
For more information, see the Camera Serial Interface 2 CAL Bridge chapter of the Device
TRM.
The camera adaptation layer (CAL) deals with the processing of the pixel data coming from an external
image sensor, data from memory. The CAL is a key component for the following multimedia applications:
camera viewfinder, video record, and still image capture. The CAL has two serial camera interfaces
(primary and secondary):
• The primary serial interface (CSI2 Port A) is compliant with MIPI CSI-2 protocol with data lanes.
5.10.6.6.1 CSI-2 MIPI D-PHY
The CSI-2 port A is compliant with the MIPI D-PHY RX specification v1.00.00 and the MIPI CSI-2
specification v1.00, with 2 data differential lanes plus 1 clock differential lane in synchronous mode,
double data rate:
• 1.5 Gbps (750 MHz) @OPP_NOM for each lane.
5.10.6.7 EMIF
The device has a dedicated interface to DDR3 and DDR3L SDRAM. It supports JEDEC standard
compliant DDR3 and DDR3L SDRAM devices with the following features:
• 16-bit or 32-bit data path to external SDRAM memory
• Memory device capacity: 128Mb, 256Mb, 512Mb, 1Gb, 2Gb, 4Gb and 8Gb devices
• One interface with associated DDR3/DDR3L PHYs
NOTE
For more information, see the EMIF Controller section of the Device TRM.
5.10.6.8 GPMC
The GPMC is the unified memory controller that interfaces external memory devices such as:
• Asynchronous SRAM-like memories and ASIC devices
• Asynchronous page mode and synchronous burst NOR flash
• NAND flash
NOTE
For more information, see the General-Purpose Memory Controller section of the Device
TRM.
192
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
5.10.6.8.1 GPMC/NOR Flash Interface Synchronous Timing
CAUTION
The I/O Timings provided in this section are valid only for some GPMC usage
modes when the corresponding Virtual I/O Timings or Manual I/O Timings are
configured as described in the tables found in this section.
Table 5-48 and Table 5-49 assume testing over the recommended operating conditions and electrical
characteristic conditions below (see Figure 5-20, Figure 5-21, Figure 5-22, Figure 5-23, Figure 5-24 and
Figure 5-25).
Table 5-48. GPMC/NOR Flash Interface Timing Requirements - Synchronous Mode - Default
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
F12
tsu(dV-clkH)
Setup time, read gpmc_ad[15:0] valid before gpmc_clk high
F13
th(clkH-dV)
F21
F22
MIN
MAX
UNIT
3
ns
Hold time, read gpmc_ad[15:0] valid after gpmc_clk high
1.1
ns
tsu(waitV-clkH)
Setup time, gpmc_wait[1:0] valid before gpmc_clk high
2.5
ns
th(clkH-waitV)
Hold Time, gpmc_wait[1:0] valid after gpmc_clk high
1.3
ns
NOTE
Wait monitoring support is limited to a WaitMonitoringTime value > 0. For a full description of
wait monitoring feature, see the Device TRM.
Table 5-49. GPMC/NOR Flash Interface Switching Characteristics - Synchronous Mode - Default
NO.
PARAMETER
F0
tc(clk)
Cycle time, output clock gpmc_clk period
DESCRIPTION
F2
td(clkH-nCSV)
Delay time, gpmc_clk rising edge to gpmc_cs[7:0] transition
MIN
MAX
11.3
F-1.7
(7)
(6)
F3
td(clkH-nCSIV)
Delay time, gpmc_clk rising edge to gpmc_cs[7:0] invalid
E-1.7
F4
td(ADDV-clk)
Delay time, gpmc_a[27:0] address bus valid to gpmc_clk first edge
B-1.8 (3)
F5
td(clkH-ADDIV)
Delay time, gpmc_clk rising edge to gpmc_a[27:0] gpmc address bus invalid
ns
F+4.3
(7)
ns
E+4.2
(6)
ns
B+4.3 (3)
ns
-1.8
(3)
UNIT
ns
(3)
F6
td(nBEV-clk)
Delay time, gpmc_ben[1:0] valid to gpmc_clk rising edge
B-4.3
B+1.5
ns
F7
td(clkH-nBEIV)
Delay time, gpmc_clk rising edge to gpmc_ben[1:0] invalid
D-1.5(5)
D+4.3(5)
ns
F8
td(clkH-nADV)
Delay time, gpmc_clk rising edge to gpmc_advn_ale transition
G-1.3 (8)
G+4.2 (8)
ns
(5)
(5)
ns
F9
td(clkH-nADVIV)
Delay time, gpmc_clk rising edge to gpmc_advn_ale invalid
D-1.3
F10
td(clkH-nOE)
Delay time, gpmc_clk rising edge to gpmc_oen_ren transition
H-1.0 (9)
H+3.2 (9)
ns
F11
td(clkH-nOEIV)
Delay time, gpmc_clk rising edge to gpmc_oen_ren invalid
E-1.0 (6)
E+3.2 (6)
ns
F14
td(clkH-nWE)
Delay time, gpmc_clk rising edge to gpmc_wen transition
I-0.9 (10)
I+4.2 (10)
ns
J+4.6
(11)
ns
J+4.3
(11)
ns
F15
td(clkH-Data)
Delay time, gpmc_clk rising edge to gpmc_ad[15:0] data bus transition
J-2.1
(11)
F17
td(clkH-nBE)
Delay time, gpmc_clk rising edge to gpmc_ben[1:0] transition
J-1.5
(11)
F18
tw(nCSV)
Pulse duration, gpmc_cs[7:0] low
F19
tw(nBEV)
Pulse duration, gpmc_ben[1:0] low
F20
tw(nADVV)
Pulse duration, gpmc_advn_ale low
F23
td(CLK-GPIO)
Delay time, gpmc_clk transition to gpio6_16 transition
G+4.2
A
(2)
ns
C
(4)
ns
K
(12)
0.5
ns
7.5
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
ns
193
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 5-50. GPMC/NOR Flash Interface Timing Requirements - Synchronous Mode - Alternate(1)
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
MIN
MAX
UNIT
F12
tsu(dV-clkH)
Setup time, read gpmc_ad[15:0] valid before gpmc_clk high
2.5
ns
F13
th(clkH-dV)
Hold time, read gpmc_ad[15:0] valid after gpmc_clk high
1.9
ns
F21
tsu(waitV-clkH)
Setup time, gpmc_wait[1:0] valid before gpmc_clk high
2.5
ns
F22
th(clkH-waitV)
Hold Time, gpmc_wait[1:0] valid after gpmc_clk high
1.9
ns
(1) Total GPMC load on any signal at 3.3V must not exceed 10pF.
Table 5-51. GPMC/NOR Flash Interface Switching Characteristics - Synchronous Mode - Alternate(1)
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
MIN
(13)
F0
tc(clk)
Cycle time, output clock gpmc_clk period
F2
td(clkH-nCSV)
Delay time, gpmc_clk rising edge to gpmc_cs[7:0] transition
F+0.6
F3
td(clkH-nCSIV)
Delay time, gpmc_clk rising edge to gpmc_cs[7:0] invalid
MAX
15.04
ns
(7)
ns
E+0.6 (6)
E+7.0 (6)
ns
(3)
(3)
ns
B-0.7
(7)
UNIT
F+7.0
F4
td(ADDV-clk)
Delay time, gpmc_a[27:0] address bus valid to gpmc_clk first edge
F5
td(clkH-ADDIV)
Delay time, gpmc_clk rising edge to gpmc_a[27:0] gpmc address bus invalid
B+7.0
F6
td(nBEV-clk)
Delay time, gpmc_ben[1:0] valid to gpmc_clk rising edge
B-7.0
B+0.4
ns
F7
td(clkH-nBEIV)
Delay time, gpmc_clk rising edge to gpmc_ben[1:0] invalid
D-0.4
D+7.0
ns
(8)
(8)
ns
-0.7
ns
F8
td(clkH-nADV)
Delay time, gpmc_clk rising edge to gpmc_advn_ale transition
G+0.7
F9
td(clkH-nADVIV)
Delay time, gpmc_clk rising edge to gpmc_advn_ale invalid
D+0.7 (5)
D+6.1 (5)
ns
F10
td(clkH-nOE)
Delay time, gpmc_clk rising edge to gpmc_oen_ren transition
H+0.7 (9)
H+5.1 (9)
ns
(6)
(6)
ns
I+6.1 (10)
ns
J+4.9
(11)
ns
J+4.9
(11)
ns
F11
td(clkH-nOEIV)
Delay time, gpmc_clk rising edge to gpmc_oen_ren invalid
E+0.7
F14
td(clkH-nWE)
Delay time, gpmc_clk rising edge to gpmc_wen transition
I+0.7 (10)
F15
td(clkH-Data)
Delay time, gpmc_clk rising edge to gpmc_ad[15:0] data bus transition
J-0.4
(11)
J-0.4
(11)
G+6.1
E+5.1
F17
td(clkH-nBE)
Delay time, gpmc_clk rising edge to gpmc_ben[1:0] transition
F18
tw(nCSV)
Pulse duration, gpmc_cs[7:0] low
A
(2)
ns
F19
tw(nBEV)
Pulse duration, gpmc_ben[1:0] low
C
(4)
ns
F20
tw(nADVV)
Pulse duration, gpmc_advn_ale low
(12)
ns
F23
td(CLK-GPIO)
Delay time, gpmc_clk transition to gpio6_16.clkout1 transition
K
(14)
0.5
7.5
ns
(1) Total GPMC load on any signal at 3.3V must not exceed 10pF.
(2) For single read: A = (CSRdOffTime - CSOnTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × GPMC_FCLK period
For burst read: A = (CSRdOffTime - CSOnTime + (n - 1) × PageBurstAccessTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × GPMC_FCLK period
For burst write: A = (CSWrOffTime - CSOnTime + (n - 1) × PageBurstAccessTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × GPMC_FCLK period
with n the page burst access number.
(3) B = ClkActivationTime × GPMC_FCLK
(4) For single read: C = RdCycleTime × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × GPMC_FCLK
For burst read: C = (RdCycleTime + (n - 1) × PageBurstAccessTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × GPMC_FCLK
For Burst write: C = (WrCycleTime + (n - 1) × PageBurstAccessTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × GPMC_FCLK with n the page burst
access number.
(5) For single read: D = (RdCycleTime - AccessTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × GPMC_FCLK
For burst read: D = (RdCycleTime - AccessTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × GPMC_FCLK
For burst write: D = (WrCycleTime - AccessTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × GPMC_FCLK
(6) For single read: E = (CSRdOffTime - AccessTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × GPMC_FCLK
For burst read: E = (CSRdOffTime - AccessTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × GPMC_FCLK
For burst write: E = (CSWrOffTime - AccessTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × GPMC_FCLK
(7) For nCS falling edge (CS activated):
Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 0 :
F = 0.5 × CSExtraDelay × GPMC_FCLK Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 1:
F = 0.5 × CSExtraDelay × GPMC_FCLK if (ClkActivationTime and CSOnTime are odd) or (ClkActivationTime and CSOnTime are even)
F = (1 + 0.5 × CSExtraDelay) × GPMC_FCLK otherwise
Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 2:
F = 0.5 × CSExtraDelay × GPMC_FCLK if ((CSOnTime - ClkActivationTime) is a multiple of 3)
F = (1 + 0.5 × CSExtraDelay) × GPMC_FCLK if ((CSOnTime - ClkActivationTime - 1) is a multiple of 3)
F = (2 + 0.5 × CSExtraDelay) × GPMC_FCLK if ((CSOnTime - ClkActivationTime - 2) is a multiple of 3)
Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 3:
194
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
F
F
F
F
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
= 0.5 × CSExtraDelay × GPMC_FCLK if ((CSOnTime - ClkActivationTime) is a multiple of 4)
= (1 + 0.5 × CSExtraDelay) × GPMC_FCLK if ((CSOnTime - ClkActivationTime - 1) is a multiple of 4)
= (2 + 0.5 × CSExtraDelay) × GPMC_FCLK if ((CSOnTime - ClkActivationTime - 2) is a multiple of 4)
= (3 + 0.5 × CSExtraDelay) × GPMC_FCLK if ((CSOnTime - ClkActivationTime - 3) is a multiple of 4)
(8) For ADV falling edge (ADV activated):
Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 0 :
G = 0.5 × ADVExtraDelay × GPMC_FCLK
Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 1:
G = 0.5 × ADVExtraDelay × GPMC_FCLK if (ClkActivationTime and ADVOnTime are odd) or (ClkActivationTime and ADVOnTime are
even)
G = (1 + 0.5 × ADVExtraDelay) × GPMC_FCLK otherwise
Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 2:
G = 0.5 × ADVExtraDelay × GPMC_FCLK if ((ADVOnTime - ClkActivationTime) is a multiple of 3)
G = (1 + 0.5 × ADVExtraDelay) × GPMC_FCLK if ((ADVOnTime - ClkActivationTime - 1) is a multiple of 3)
G = (2 + 0.5 × ADVExtraDelay) × GPMC_FCLK if ((ADVOnTime - ClkActivationTime - 2) is a multiple of 3)
For ADV rising edge (ADV desactivated) in Reading mode:
Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 0:
G = 0.5 × ADVExtraDelay × GPMC_FCLK
Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 1:
G = 0.5 × ADVExtraDelay × GPMC_FCLK if (ClkActivationTime and ADVRdOffTime are odd) or (ClkActivationTime and ADVRdOffTime
are even)
G = (1 + 0.5 × ADVExtraDelay) × GPMC_FCLK otherwise
Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 2:
G = 0.5 × ADVExtraDelay × GPMC_FCLK if ((ADVRdOffTime - ClkActivationTime) is a multiple of 3)
G = (1 + 0.5 × ADVExtraDelay) × GPMC_FCLK if ((ADVRdOffTime - ClkActivationTime - 1) is a multiple of 3)
G = (2 + 0.5 × ADVExtraDelay) × GPMC_FCLK if ((ADVRdOffTime - ClkActivationTime - 2) is a multiple of 3)
Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 3:
G = 0.5 × ADVExtraDelay × GPMC_FCLK if ((ADVRdOffTime - ClkActivationTime) is a multiple of 4)
G = (1 + 0.5 × ADVExtraDelay) × GPMC_FCLK if ((ADVRdOffTime - ClkActivationTime - 1) is a multiple of 4)
G = (2 + 0.5 × ADVExtraDelay) × GPMC_FCLK if ((ADVRdOffTime - ClkActivationTime - 2) is a multiple of 4)
G = (3 + 0.5 × ADVExtraDelay) × GPMC_FCLK if ((ADVRdOffTime - ClkActivationTime - 3) is a multiple of 4)
For ADV rising edge (ADV desactivated) in Writing mode:
Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 0:
G = 0.5 × ADVExtraDelay × GPMC_FCLK
Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 1:
G = 0.5 × ADVExtraDelay × GPMC_FCLK if (ClkActivationTime and ADVWrOffTime are odd) or (ClkActivationTime and ADVWrOffTime
are even)
G = (1 + 0.5 × ADVExtraDelay) × GPMC_FCLK otherwise
Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 2:
G = 0.5 × ADVExtraDelay × GPMC_FCLK if ((ADVWrOffTime - ClkActivationTime) is a multiple of 3)
G = (1 + 0.5 × ADVExtraDelay) × GPMC_FCLK if ((ADVWrOffTime - ClkActivationTime - 1) is a multiple of 3)
G = (2 + 0.5 × ADVExtraDelay) × GPMC_FCLK if ((ADVWrOffTime - ClkActivationTime - 2) is a multiple of 3)
Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 3:
G = 0.5 × ADVExtraDelay × GPMC_FCLK if ((ADVWrOffTime - ClkActivationTime) is a multiple of 4)
G = (1 + 0.5 × ADVExtraDelay) × GPMC_FCLK if ((ADVWrOffTime - ClkActivationTime - 1) is a multiple of 4)
G = (2 + 0.5 × ADVExtraDelay) × GPMC_FCLK if ((ADVWrOffTime - ClkActivationTime - 2) is a multiple of 4)
G = (3 + 0.5 × ADVExtraDelay) × GPMC_FCLK if ((ADVWrOffTime - ClkActivationTime - 3) is a multiple of 4)
(9) For OE falling edge (OE activated):
Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 0:
- H = 0.5 × OEExtraDelay × GPMC_FCLK
Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 1:
- H = 0.5 × OEExtraDelay × GPMC_FCLK if (ClkActivationTime and OEOnTime are odd) or (ClkActivationTime and OEOnTime are
even)
- H = (1 + 0.5 × OEExtraDelay) × GPMC_FCLK otherwise
Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 2:
- H = 0.5 × OEExtraDelay × GPMC_FCLK if ((OEOnTime - ClkActivationTime) is a multiple of 3)
- H = (1 + 0.5 × OEExtraDelay) × GPMC_FCLK if ((OEOnTime - ClkActivationTime - 1) is a multiple of 3)
- H = (2 + 0.5 × OEExtraDelay) × GPMC_FCLK if ((OEOnTime - ClkActivationTime - 2) is a multiple of 3)
Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 3:
- H = 0.5 × OEExtraDelay × GPMC_FCLK if ((OEOnTime - ClkActivationTime) is a multiple of 4)
- H = (1 + 0.5 × OEExtraDelay) × GPMC_FCLK if ((OEOnTime - ClkActivationTime - 1) is a multiple of 4)
- H = (2 + 0.5 × OEExtraDelay) × GPMC_FCLK if ((OEOnTime - ClkActivationTime - 2) is a multiple of 4)
- H = (3 + 0.5 × OEExtraDelay)) × GPMC_FCLK if ((OEOnTime - ClkActivationTime - 3) is a multiple of 4)
For OE rising edge (OE desactivated):
Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 0:
- H = 0.5 × OEExtraDelay × GPMC_FCLK
Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 1:
- H = 0.5 × OEExtraDelay × GPMC_FCLK if (ClkActivationTime and OEOffTime are odd) or (ClkActivationTime and OEOffTime are
even)
- H = (1 + 0.5 × OEExtraDelay) × GPMC_FCLK otherwise
Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 2:
- H = 0.5 × OEExtraDelay × GPMC_FCLK if ((OEOffTime - ClkActivationTime) is a multiple of 3)
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
195
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
- H = (1 + 0.5 × OEExtraDelay) × GPMC_FCLK if ((OEOffTime - ClkActivationTime - 1) is a multiple of 3)
- H = (2 + 0.5 × OEExtraDelay) × GPMC_FCLK if ((OEOffTime - ClkActivationTime - 2) is a multiple of 3)
Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 3:
- H = 0.5 × OEExtraDelay × GPMC_FCLK if ((OEOffTime - ClkActivationTime) is a multiple of 4)
- H = (1 + 0.5 × OEExtraDelay) × GPMC_FCLK if ((OEOffTime - ClkActivationTime - 1) is a multiple of 4)
- H = (2 + 0.5 × OEExtraDelay) × GPMC_FCLK if ((OEOffTime - ClkActivationTime - 2) is a multiple of 4)
- H = (3 + 0.5 × OEExtraDelay) × GPMC_FCLK if ((OEOffTime - ClkActivationTime - 3) is a multiple of 4)
(10) For WE falling edge (WE activated):
Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 0:
- I = 0.5 × WEExtraDelay × GPMC_FCLK
Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 1:
- I = 0.5 × WEExtraDelay × GPMC_FCLK if (ClkActivationTime and WEOnTime are odd) or (ClkActivationTime and WEOnTime are
even)
- I = (1 + 0.5 × WEExtraDelay) × GPMC_FCLK otherwise
Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 2:
- I = 0.5 × WEExtraDelay × GPMC_FCLK if ((WEOnTime - ClkActivationTime) is a multiple of 3)
- I = (1 + 0.5 × WEExtraDelay) × GPMC_FCLK if ((WEOnTime - ClkActivationTime - 1) is a multiple of 3)
- I = (2 + 0.5 × WEExtraDelay) × GPMC_FCLK if ((WEOnTime - ClkActivationTime - 2) is a multiple of 3)
Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 3:
- I = 0.5 × WEExtraDelay × GPMC_FCLK if ((WEOnTime - ClkActivationTime) is a multiple of 4)
- I = (1 + 0.5 × WEExtraDelay) × GPMC_FCLK if ((WEOnTime - ClkActivationTime - 1) is a multiple of 4)
- I = (2 + 0.5 × WEExtraDelay) × GPMC_FCLK if ((WEOnTime - ClkActivationTime - 2) is a multiple of 4)
- I = (3 + 0.5 × WEExtraDelay) × GPMC_FCLK if ((WEOnTime - ClkActivationTime - 3) is a multiple of 4)
For WE rising edge (WE desactivated):
Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 0:
- I = 0.5 × WEExtraDelay × GPMC_FCLK
Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 1:
- I = 0.5 × WEExtraDelay × GPMC_FCLK if (ClkActivationTime and WEOffTime are odd) or (ClkActivationTime and WEOffTime are
even)
- I = (1 + 0.5 × WEExtraDelay) × GPMC_FCLK otherwise
Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 2:
- I = 0.5 × WEExtraDelay × GPMC_FCLK if ((WEOffTime - ClkActivationTime) is a multiple of 3)
- I = (1 + 0.5 × WEExtraDelay) × GPMC_FCLK if ((WEOffTime - ClkActivationTime - 1) is a multiple of 3)
- I = (2 + 0.5 × WEExtraDelay) × GPMC_FCLK if ((WEOffTime - ClkActivationTime - 2) is a multiple of 3)
Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 3:
- I = 0.5 × WEExtraDelay × GPMC_FCLK if ((WEOffTime - ClkActivationTime) is a multiple of 4)
- I = (1 + 0.5 × WEExtraDelay) × GPMC_FCLK if ((WEOffTime - ClkActivationTime - 1) is a multiple of 4)
- I = (2 + 0.5 × WEExtraDelay) × GPMC_FCLK if ((WEOffTime - ClkActivationTime - 2) is a multiple of 4)
- I = (3 + 0.5 × WEExtraDelay) × GPMC_FCLK if ((WEOffTime - ClkActivationTime - 3) is a multiple of 4)
(11) J = GPMC_FCLK period, where GPMC_FCLK is the General Purpose Memory Controller internal functional clock
(12) For read:
K = (ADVRdOffTime - ADVOnTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × GPMC_FCLK
For write: K = (ADVWrOffTime - ADVOnTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × GPMC_FCLK
(13) The gpmc_clk output clock maximum and minimum frequency is programmable in the I/F module by setting the GPMC_CONFIG1_CSx
configuration register bit fields GpmcFCLKDivider
(14) gpio6_16 programmed to MUXMODE=9 (clkout1), CM_CLKSEL_CLKOUTMUX1 programmed to 7 (CORE_DPLL_OUT_DCLK),
CM_CLKSEL_CORE_DPLL_OUT_CLK_CLKOUTMUX programmed to 1.
(15) CSEXTRADELAY = 0, ADVEXTRADELAY = 0, WEEXTRADELAY = 0, OEEXTRADELAY = 0. Extra half-GPMC_FCLK cycle delay
mode is not timed.
196
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
F1
F0
F1
gpmc_clk
F2
F3
F18
gpmc_csi
F4
Address (MSB)
gpmc_a[10:1]
gpmc_a[27]
F6
F7
F19
gpmc_ben1
F6
F7
F19
gpmc_ben0
F8
F8
F20
F9
gpmc_advn_ale
F10
F11
gpmc_oen_ren
F13
F4
gpmc_ad[15:0]
F5
F12
Address (LSB)
D0
F22
F21
gpmc_waitj
F23
F23
gpio6_16.clkout1
GPMC_01
Figure 5-20. GPMC / Multiplexed 16bits NOR Flash - Synchronous Single Read (GpmcFCLKDivider = 0)(1)(2)
(1) In gpmc_csi, i = 0 to 7.
(2) In gpmc_waitj, j = 0 to 1.
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
197
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
F1
F0
F1
gpmc_clk
F2
F3
F18
gpmc_csi
F4
gpmc_a[27:1]
Address
F6
F7
F19
gpmc_ben1
F6
F7
F19
gpmc_ben0
F8
F8
F9
F20
gpmc_advn_ale
F10
F11
gpmc_oen_ren
F13
F12
D0
gpmc_ad[15:0]
F22
F21
gpmc_waitj
F23
F23
gpio6_16.clkout1
GPMC_02
Figure 5-21. GPMC / Nonmultiplexed 16bits NOR Flash - Synchronous Single Read (GpmcFCLKDivider = 0)(1)(2)
(1) In gpmc_csi, i = 0 to 7.
(2) In gpmc_waitj, j = 0 to 1.
198
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
F1
F1
F0
gpmc_clk
F2
F3
F18
gpmc_csi
F4
gpmc_a[10:1]
gpmc_a[27]
Address (MSB)
F7
F6
F19
Valid
gpmc_ben1
F7
F6
F19
Valid
gpmc_ben0
F8
F8
F9
F20
gpmc_advn_ale
F10
F11
gpmc_oen_ren
F12
F4
gpmc_ad[15:0]
F5
F13
D0
Address (LSB)
F22
D1
F12
D2
D3
F21
gpmc_waitj
F23
F23
gpio6_16.clkout1
GPMC_03
Figure 5-22. GPMC / Multiplexed 16bits NOR Flash - Synchronous Burst Read 4x16 bits (GpmcFCLKDivider = 0)(1)(2)
(1) In gpmc_csi, i= 0 to 7.
(2) In gpmc_waitj, j = 0 to 1.
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
199
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
F1
F1
F0
gpmc_clk
F2
F3
F18
gpmc_csi
F4
gpmc_a[27:1]
Address
F7
F6
F19
Valid
gpmc_ben1
F7
F6
F19
Valid
gpmc_ben0
F8
F8
F20
F9
gpmc_advn_ale
F10
F11
gpmc_oen_ren
F12
F13
gpmc_ad[15:0]
D0
D1
F12
D2
D3
F21
F22
gpmc_waitj
F23
F23
gpio6_16.clkout1
GPMC_04
Figure 5-23. GPMC / Nonmultiplexed 16bits NOR Flash - Synchronous Burst Read 4x16 bits (GpmcFCLKDivider = 0)(1)(2)
(1) In gpmc_csi, i = 0 to 7.
(2) In gpmc_waitj, j = 0 to 1.
200
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
F1
F1
F0
gpmc_clk
F2
F3
F18
gpmc_csi
F4
gpmc_a[10:1]
gpmc_a[27]
Address (MSB)
F17
F6
F17
F6
F17
F17
gpmc_ben1
F17
F17
gpmc_ben0
F8
F8
F20
F9
gpmc_advn_ale
F14
F14
gpmc_wen
F15
gpmc_ad[15:0]
Address (LSB)
D0
F22
D1
F15
D2
F15
D3
F21
gpmc_waitj
F23
F23
gpio6_16.clkout1
GPMC_05
Figure 5-24. GPMC / Multiplexed 16bits NOR Flash - Synchronous Burst Write 4x16bits (GpmcFCLKDivider = 0)(1)(2)
(1) In “gpmc_csi”, i = 0 to 7.
(2) In “gpmc_waitj”, j = 0 to 1.
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
201
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
F1
F1
F0
gpmc_clk
F2
F3
F18
gpmc_csi
F4
Address
gpmc_a[27:1]
F17
F6
F17
F17
gpmc_ben1
F17
F6
F17
F17
gpmc_ben0
F8
F8
F20
F9
gpmc_advn_ale
F14
F14
gpmc_wen
F15
gpmc_ad[15:0]
D0
D1
F15
F15
D2
D3
F21
F22
gpmc_waitj
F23
F23
gpio6_16.clkout1
GPMC_06
Figure 5-25. GPMC / Nonmultiplexed 16bits NOR Flash - Synchronous Burst Write 4x16bits (GpmcFCLKDivider = 0)(1)(2)
(1) In “gpmc_csi”, i = 1 to 7.
(2) In “gpmc_waitj”, j = 0 to 1.
5.10.6.8.2 GPMC/NOR Flash Interface Asynchronous Timing
CAUTION
The I/O Timings provided in this section are valid only for some GPMC usage
modes when the corresponding Virtual I/O Timings or Manual I/O Timings are
configured as described in the tables found in this section.
Table 5-52 and Table 5-53 assume testing over the recommended operating conditions and electrical
characteristic conditions below (see Figure 5-26, Figure 5-27, Figure 5-28, Figure 5-29, Figure 5-30 and
Figure 5-31).
Table 5-52. GPMC/NOR Flash Interface Timing Requirements - Asynchronous Mode
NO.
FA5
202
PARAMETER
tacc(DAT)
DESCRIPTION
Data Maximum Access Time (GPMC_FCLK cycles)
Specifications
MIN
MAX
UNIT
(1)
cycles
H
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 5-52. GPMC/NOR Flash Interface Timing Requirements - Asynchronous Mode (continued)
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
FA20
tacc1-pgmode(DAT)
Page Mode Successive Data Maximum Access Time (GPMC_FCLK
cycles)
FA21
tacc2-pgmode(DAT)
Page Mode First Data Maximum Access Time (GPMC_FCLK cycles)
-
tsu(DV-OEH)
Setup time, read gpmc_ad[15:0] valid before gpmc_oen_ren high
-
th(OEH-DV)
Hold time, read gpmc_ad[15:0] valid after gpmc_oen_ren high
MIN
MAX
UNIT
P
(2)
cycles
H
(1)
cycles
1.9
ns
1
ns
(1) H = Access Time × (TimeParaGranularity + 1)
(2) P = PageBurstAccessTime × (TimeParaGranularity + 1)
Table 5-53. GPMC/NOR Flash Interface Switching Characteristics - Asynchronous Mode
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
MIN
MAX
UNIT
-
tr(DO)
Rising time, gpmc_ad[15:0] output data
0.447
4.067
ns
-
tf(DO)
Fallling time, gpmc_ad[15:0] output data
0.43
4.463
ns
FA0
tw(nBEV)
Pulse duration, gpmc_ben[1:0] valid time
N
(1)
ns
FA1
tw(nCSV)
Pulse duration, gpmc_cs[7:0] low
A
(2)
ns
FA3
td(nCSV-nADVIV)
Delay time, gpmc_cs[7:0] valid to gpmc_advn_ale invalid
B-2
(3)
B+4
(3)
ns
FA4
td(nCSV-nOEIV)
Delay time, gpmc_cs[7:0] valid to gpmc_oen_ren invalid (Single read)
C-2
(4)
C+4
(4)
ns
FA9
td(AV-nCSV)
Delay time, address bus valid to gpmc_cs[7:0] valid
J-2
(5)
J+4
(5)
ns
FA10 td(nBEV-nCSV)
Delay time, gpmc_ben[1:0] valid to gpmc_cs[7:0] valid
J-2
(5)
J+4
(5)
ns
FA12 td(nCSV-nADVV)
Delay time, gpmc_cs[7:0] valid to gpmc_advn_ale valid
K-2
(6)
K+4
(6)
ns
FA13 td(nCSV-nOEV)
Delay time, gpmc_cs[7:0] valid to gpmc_oen_ren valid
L-2
(7)
L+4
(7)
ns
FA16 tw(AIV)
Pulse duration, address invalid between 2 successive R/W accesses
G
(8)
FA18 td(nCSV-nOEIV)
Delay time, gpmc_cs[7:0] valid to gpmc_oen_ren invalid (Burst read)
I-2
(9)
I+4
(9)
FA20 tw(AV)
Pulse duration, address valid : 2nd, 3rd and 4th accesses
FA25 td(nCSV-nWEV)
ns
ns
D
(10)
Delay time, gpmc_cs[7:0] valid to gpmc_wen valid
E-2
(11)
E+4
(11)
ns
FA27 td(nCSV-nWEIV)
Delay time, gpmc_cs[7:0] valid to gpmc_wen invalid
F-2
(12)
F+4
(12)
ns
FA28 td(nWEV-DV)
Delay time, gpmc_ wen valid to data bus valid
2
ns
FA29 td(DV-nCSV)
Delay time, data bus valid to gpmc_cs[7:0] valid
(5)
ns
FA37 td(nOEV-AIV)
Delay time, gpmc_oen_ren valid to gpmc_ad[15:0] multiplexed address bus
phase end
2
ns
J-2
ns
(5)
J+4
(1) For single read: N = RdCycleTime × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × GPMC_FCLK
For single write: N = WrCycleTime × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × GPMC_FCLK
For burst read: N = (RdCycleTime + (n - 1) × PageBurstAccessTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × GPMC_FCLK
For burst write: N = (WrCycleTime + (n - 1) × PageBurstAccessTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × GPMC_FCLK
(2) For single read: A = (CSRdOffTime - CSOnTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × GPMC_FCLK
For single write: A = (CSWrOffTime - CSOnTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × GPMC_FCLK
For burst read: A = (CSRdOffTime - CSOnTime + (n - 1) × PageBurstAccessTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × GPMC_FCLK
For burst write: A = (CSWrOffTime - CSOnTime + (n - 1) × PageBurstAccessTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × GPMC_FCLK
(3) For reading: B = ((ADVRdOffTime - CSOnTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) + 0.5 × (ADVExtraDelay - CSExtraDelay)) × GPMC_FCLK
For writing: B = ((ADVWrOffTime - CSOnTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) + 0.5 × (ADVExtraDelay - CSExtraDelay)) × GPMC_FCLK
(4) C = ((OEOffTime - CSOnTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) + 0.5 × (OEExtraDelay - CSExtraDelay)) × GPMC_FCLK
(5) J = (CSOnTime × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) + 0.5 × CSExtraDelay) × GPMC_FCLK
(6) K = ((ADVOnTime - CSOnTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) + 0.5 × (ADVExtraDelay - CSExtraDelay)) × GPMC_FCLK
(7) L = ((OEOnTime - CSOnTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) + 0.5 × (OEExtraDelay - CSExtraDelay)) × GPMC_FCLK
(8) G = Cycle2CycleDelay × GPMC_FCLK × (TimeParaGranularity +1)
(9) I = ((OEOffTime + (n - 1) × PageBurstAccessTime - CSOnTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) + 0.5 × (OEExtraDelay - CSExtraDelay)) ×
GPMC_FCLK
(10) D = PageBurstAccessTime × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × GPMC_FCLK
(11) E = ((WEOnTime - CSOnTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) + 0.5 × (WEExtraDelay - CSExtraDelay)) × GPMC_FCLK
(12) F = ((WEOffTime - CSOnTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) + 0.5 × (WEExtraDelay - CSExtraDelay)) × GPMC_FCLK
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
203
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
GPMC_FCLK
gpmc_clk
FA5
FA1
gpmc_csi
FA9
Valid Address
gpmc_a[27:1]
FA0
FA10
gpmc_ben0
Valid
gpmc_ben1
Valid
FA0
FA10
FA3
FA12
gpmc_advn_ale
FA4
FA13
gpmc_oen_ren
gpmc_ad[15:0]
Data IN 0
Data IN 0
gpmc_waitj
FA15
FA14
OUT
DIR
IN
OUT
GPMC_07
Figure 5-26. GPMC / NOR Flash - Asynchronous Read - Single Word Timing(1)(2)(3)
(1) In gpmc_csi, i = 0 to 7. In gpmc_waitj, j = 0 to 1.
(2) FA5 parameter illustrates amount of time required to internally sample input data. It is expressed in number of GPMC functional clock
cycles. From start of read cycle and after FA5 functional clock cycles, input Data will be internally sampled by active functional clock
edge. FA5 value must be stored inside AccessTime register bits field.
(3) GPMC_FCLK is an internal clock (GPMC functional clock) not provided externally.
(4) The "DIR" (direction control) output signal is NOT pinned out on any of the device pads. It is an internal signal only representing a signal
direction on the GPMC data bus.
204
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
GPMC_FCLK
gpmc_clk
FA5
FA5
FA1
FA1
gpmc_csi
FA16
FA9
FA9
gpmc_a[27:1]
Address 0
Address 1
FA0
FA0
FA10
FA10
gpmc_ben0
Valid
FA0
FA0
gpmc_ben1
Valid
Valid
Valid
FA10
FA10
FA3
FA3
FA12
FA12
gpmc_advn_ale
FA4
FA4
FA13
FA13
gpmc_oen_ren
gpmc_ad[15:0]
Data Upper
gpmc_waitj
FA15
FA15
FA14
DIR
FA14
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
GPMC_08
(1)(2)(3)
Figure 5-27. GPMC / NOR Flash - Asynchronous Read - 32-bit Timing
(1) In “gpmc_csi”, i = 0 to 7. In “gpmc_waitj”, j = 0 to 1.
(2) FA5 parameter illustrates amount of time required to internally sample input Data. It is expressed in number of GPMC functional clock
cycles. From start of read cycle and after FA5 functional clock cycles, input Data will be internally sampled by active functional clock
edge. FA5 value should be stored inside AccessTime register bits field
(3) GPMC_FCLK is an internal clock (GPMC functional clock) not provided externally
(4) The "DIR" (direction control) output signal is NOT pinned out on any of the device pads. It is an internal signal only representing a signal
direction on the GPMC data bus.
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
205
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
GPMC_FCLK
gpmc_clk
FA21
FA20
FA20
FA20
FA1
gpmc_csi
FA9
Add0
gpmc_a[27:1]
Add1
Add2
Add3
D0
D1
D2
Add4
FA0
FA10
gpmc_ben0
FA0
FA10
gpmc_ben1
FA12
gpmc_advn_ale
FA18
FA13
gpmc_oen_ren
gpmc_ad[15:0]
D3
D3
gpmc_waitj
FA15
FA14
DIR
OUT
IN
OUT
SPRS91v_GPMC_09
Figure 5-28. GPMC / NOR Flash - Asynchronous Read - Page Mode 4x16-bit Timing(1)(2)(3)(4)
(1) In “gpmc_csi”, i = 0 to 7. In “gpmc_waitj”, j = 0 to 1
(2) FA21 parameter illustrates amount of time required to internally sample first input Page Data. It is expressed in number of GPMC
functional clock cycles. From start of read cycle and after FA21 functional clock cycles, First input Page Data will be internally sampled
by active functional clock edge. FA21 calculation is detailled in a separated application note and should be stored inside AccessTime
register bits field.
(3) FA20 parameter illustrates amount of time required to internally sample successive input Page Data. It is expressed in number of GPMC
functional clock cycles. After each access to input Page Data, next input Page Data will be internally sampled by active functional clock
edge after FA20 functional clock cycles. FA20 is also the duration of address phases for successive input Page Data (excluding first
input Page Data). FA20 value should be stored in PageBurstAccessTime register bits field.
(4) GPMC_FCLK is an internal clock (GPMC functional clock) not provided externally
(5) The "DIR" (direction control) output signal is NOT pinned out on any of the device pads. It is an internal signal only representing a signal
direction on the GPMC data bus.
206
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
gpmc_fclk
gpmc_clk
FA1
gpmc_csi
FA9
Valid Address
gpmc_a[27:1]
FA0
FA10
gpmc_ben0
FA0
FA10
gpmc_ben1
FA3
FA12
gpmc_advn_ale
FA27
FA25
gpmc_wen
FA29
Data OUT
gpmc_ad[15:0]
gpmc_waitj
DIR
OUT
GPMC_10
Figure 5-29. GPMC / NOR Flash - Asynchronous Write - Single Word Timing(1)
(1) In “gpmc_csi”, i = 0 to 7. In “gpmc_waitj”, j = 0 to 1.
(2) The "DIR" (direction control) output signal is NOT pinned out on any of the device pads. It is an internal signal only representing a signal
direction on the GPMC data bus.
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
207
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
GPMC_FCLK
gpmc_clk
FA1
FA5
gpmc_csi
FA9
gpmc_a27
gpmc_a[10:1]
Address (MSB)
FA0
FA10
gpmc_ben0
Valid
FA0
FA10
Valid
gpmc_ben1
FA3
FA12
gpmc_advn_ale
FA4
FA13
gpmc_oen_ren
FA29
gpmc_ad[15:0]
FA37
Address (LSB)
Data IN
Data IN
FA15
FA14
DIR
OUT
IN
OUT
gpmc_waitj
GPMC_11
Figure 5-30. GPMC / Multiplexed NOR Flash - Asynchronous Read - Single Word Timing(1)(2)(3)
(1) In “gpmc_csi”, i = 0 to 7. In “gpmc_waitj”, j = 0 to 1
(2) FA5 parameter illustrates amount of time required to internally sample input Data. It is expressed in number of GPMC functional clock
cycles. From start of read cycle and after FA5 functional clock cycles, input Data will be internally sampled by active functional clock
edge. FA5 value should be stored inside AccessTime register bits field.
(3) GPMC_FCLK is an internal clock (GPMC functional clock) not provided externally
(4) The "DIR" (direction control) output signal is NOT pinned out on any of the device pads. It is an internal signal only representing a signal
direction on the GPMC data bus.
208
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
gpmc_fclk
gpmc_clk
FA1
gpmc_csi
FA9
gpmc_a27
gpmc_a[10:1]
Address (MSB)
FA0
FA10
gpmc_ben0
FA0
FA10
gpmc_ben1
FA3
FA12
gpmc_advn_ale
FA27
FA25
gpmc_wen
FA29
FA28
Valid Address (LSB)
gpmc_ad[15:0]
Data OUT
gpmc_waitj
OUT
DIR
GPMC_12
Figure 5-31. GPMC / Multiplexed NOR Flash - Asynchronous Write - Single Word Timing(1)
(1) In “gpmc_csi”, i = 0 to 7. In “gpmc_waitj”, j = 0 to 1.
(2) The "DIR" (direction control) output signal is NOT pinned out on any of the device pads. It is an internal signal only representing a signal
direction on the GPMC data bus.
5.10.6.8.3 GPMC/NAND Flash Interface Asynchronous Timing
CAUTION
The I/O Timings provided in this section are valid only for some GPMC usage
modes when the corresponding Virtual I/O Timings or Manual I/O Timings are
configured as described in the tables found in this section.
Table 5-54 and Table 5-55 assume testing over the recommended operating conditions and electrical
characteristic conditions below (see Figure 5-32, Figure 5-33, Figure 5-34 and Figure 5-35).
Table 5-54. GPMC/NAND Flash Interface Timing Requirements
NO.
GNF12
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
tacc(DAT)
Data maximum access time (GPMC_FCLK Cycles)
-
tsu(DV-OEH)
Setup time, read gpmc_ad[15:0] valid before
gpmc_oen_ren high
-
th(OEH-DV)
Hold time, read gpmc_ad[15:0] valid after
gpmc_oen_ren high
MIN
MAX
UNIT
(1)
cycles
J
1.9
ns
1
ns
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
209
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
(1) J = AccessTime × (TimeParaGranularity + 1)
Table 5-55. GPMC/NAND Flash Interface Switching Characteristics
NO.
MIN
MAX
UNIT
-
tr(DO)
PARAMETER
Rising time, gpmc_ad[15:0] output data
DESCRIPTION
0.447
4.067
ns
-
0.43
4.463
ns
A
(1)
ns
B+4
(2)
ns
ns
tf(DO)
Fallling time, gpmc_ad[15:0] output data
GNF0
tw(nWEV)
Pulse duration, gpmc_wen valid time
GNF1
td(nCSV-nWEV)
Delay time, gpmc_cs[7:0] valid to gpmc_wen valid
B-2
(2)
GNF2
td(CLEH-nWEV)
Delay time, gpmc_ben[1:0] high to gpmc_wen valid
C-2
(3)
C+4
(3)
GNF3
td(nWEV-DV)
Delay time, gpmc_ad[15:0] valid to gpmc_wen valid
D-2
(4)
D+4
(4)
ns
GNF4
td(nWEIV-DIV)
Delay time, gpmc_wen invalid to gpmc_ad[15:0] invalid
E-2
(5)
E+4
(5)
ns
GNF5
td(nWEIV-CLEIV)
Delay time, gpmc_wen invalid to gpmc_ben[1:0] invalid
F-2
(6)
F+4
(6)
ns
ns
GNF6
td(nWEIV-nCSIV)
Delay time, gpmc_wen invalid to gpmc_cs[7:0] invalid
G-2
(7)
G+4
(7)
GNF7
td(ALEH-nWEV)
Delay time, gpmc_advn_ale high to gpmc_wen valid
C-2
(3)
C+4
(3)
ns
GNF8
td(nWEIV-ALEIV)
Delay time, gpmc_wen invalid to gpmc_advn_ale invalid
F-2
(6)
F+4
(6)
ns
H
(8)
ns
I+4
(9)
ns
K
(10)
ns
L
(11)
ns
M+4
(12)
ns
GNF9
tc(nWE)
Cycle time, write cycle time
GNF10 td(nCSV-nOEV)
Delay time, gpmc_cs[7:0] valid to gpmc_oen_ren valid
GNF13 tw(nOEV)
Pulse duration, gpmc_oen_ren valid time
GNF14 tc(nOE)
Cycle time, read cycle time
GNF15 td(nOEIV-nCSIV)
Delay time, gpmc_oen_ren invalid to gpmc_cs[7:0] invalid
I-2
M-2
(9)
(12)
(1) A = (WEOffTime – WEOnTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × GPMC_FCLK
(2) B = ((WEOnTime – CSOnTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) + 0.5 × (WEExtraDelay – CSExtraDelay)) × GPMC_FCLK
(3) C = ((WEOnTime – ADVOnTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) + 0.5 × (WEExtraDelay – ADVExtraDelay)) × GPMC_FCLK
(4) D = (WEOnTime × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) + 0.5 × WEExtraDelay ) × GPMC_FCLK
(5) E = (WrCycleTime – WEOffTime × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) – 0.5 × WEExtraDelay ) × GPMC_FCLK
(6) F = (ADVWrOffTime – WEOffTime × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) + 0.5 × (ADVExtraDelay – WEExtraDelay ) × GPMC_FCLK
(7) G = (CSWrOffTime – WEOffTime × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) + 0.5 × (CSExtraDelay – WEExtraDelay ) × GPMC_FCLK
(8) H = WrCycleTime × (1 + TimeParaGranularity) × GPMC_FCLK
(9) I = ((OEOffTime + (n – 1) × PageBurstAccessTime – CSOnTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) + 0.5 × (OEExtraDelay – CSExtraDelay))
× GPMC_FCLK
(10) K = (OEOffTime – OEOnTime) × (1 + TimeParaGranularity) × GPMC_FCLK
(11) L = RdCycleTime × (1 + TimeParaGranularity) × GPMC_FCLK
(12) M = (CSRdOffTime – OEOffTime × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) + 0.5 × (CSExtraDelay – OEExtraDelay ) × GPMC_FCLK
210
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
GPMC_FCLK
GNF1
GNF6
GNF2
GNF5
gpmc_csi
gpmc_ben0
gpmc_advn_ale
gpmc_oen_ren
GNF0
gpmc_wen
GNF3
GNF4
Command
gpmc_ad[15:0]
GPMC_13
(1)
Figure 5-32. GPMC / NAND Flash - Command Latch Cycle Timing
(1) In gpmc_csi, i = 0 to 7.
GPMC_FCLK
GNF1
GNF6
GNF7
GNF8
gpmc_csi
gpmc_ben0
gpmc_advn_ale
gpmc_oen_ren
GNF9
GNF0
gpmc_wen
GNF3
gpmc_ad[15:0]
GNF4
Address
GPMC_14
Figure 5-33. GPMC / NAND Flash - Address Latch Cycle Timing(1)
(1) In gpmc_csi, i = 0 to 7.
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
211
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
GPMC_FCLK
GNF12
GNF10
GNF15
gpmc_csi
gpmc_ben0
gpmc_advn_ale
GNF14
GNF13
gpmc_oen_ren
gpmc_ad[15:0]
DATA
gpmc_waitj
GPMC_15
Figure 5-34. GPMC / NAND Flash - Data Read Cycle Timing(1)(2)(3)
(1) GNF12 parameter illustrates amount of time required to internally sample input Data. It is expressed in number of GPMC functional
clock cycles. From start of read cycle and after GNF12 functional clock cycles, input data will be internally sampled by active functional
clock edge. GNF12 value must be stored inside AccessTime register bits field.
(2) GPMC_FCLK is an internal clock (GPMC functional clock) not provided externally.
(3) In gpmc_csi, i = 0 to 7. In gpmc_waitj, j = 0 to 1.
GPMC_FCLK
GNF1
GNF6
gpmc_csi
gpmc_ben0
gpmc_advn_ale
gpmc_oen_ren
GNF9
GNF0
gpmc_wen
GNF3
GNF4
gpmc_ad[15:0]
DATA
GPMC_16
(1)
Figure 5-35. GPMC / NAND Flash - Data Write Cycle Timing
(1) In gpmc_csi, i = 0 to 7.
NOTE
To configure the desired virtual mode the user must set MODESELECT bit and
DELAYMODE bitfield for each corresponding pad control register.
The pad control registers are presented in Table 4-31 and described in Device TRM, Control
Module Chapter.
212
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Virtual IO Timings Modes must be used to ensure some IO timings for GPMC. See Table 5-30 Modes Summary for a list of IO timings requiring
the use of Virtual IO Timings Modes. See Table 5-56 Virtual Functions Mapping for GPMC for a definition of the Virtual modes.
Table 5-56 presents the values for DELAYMODE bitfield.
Table 5-56. Virtual Functions Mapping for GPMC
BALL
BALL NAME
Delay Mode Value
MUXMODE
GPMC_VIRTUAL1
0
1
gpmc_cs6
H5
gpmc_advn_al
e
15
gpmc_advn_al
e
B4
gpmc_ad15
13
gpmc_ad15
B1
gpmc_ad6
13
gpmc_ad6
E1
gpmc_ad2
13
gpmc_ad2
E10
vin2a_d9
9
G6
gpmc_wen
15
gpmc_wen
A3
gpmc_ad14
13
gpmc_ad14
H3
gpmc_a13
15
gpmc_a13
K4
gpmc_a8
14
gpmc_a8
gpmc_a14
15
gpmc_a14
D1
gpmc_ad4
13
gpmc_ad4
A5
gpmc_a26
15
gpmc_a26
F1
gpmc_ad0
13
gpmc_ad0
F6
gpmc_wait0
15
gpmc_wait0
C10
vin2a_d11
9
E2
gpmc_ad1
13
gpmc_ad1
gpmc_ad13
13
gpmc_ad13
L2
gpmc_a2
14
gpmc_a2
gpmc_ad5
gpmc_ad5
13
vin2a_d8
9
F3
gpmc_cs0
15
E8
vin2a_hsync0
9
5
6
gpmc_wait1
gpmc_a2
gpmc_a23
14(1)
14(1)
gpmc_a20
gpmc_a23
C4
D2
3
gpmc_a25
H4
B10
2
gpmc_a26
gpmc_cs0
gpmc_a27
K3
gpmc_a4
14
gpmc_a4
H2
gpmc_ben0
15
gpmc_ben0
J1
gpmc_a6
14
gpmc_a6
K6
gpmc_a15
15
gpmc_a15
B3
gpmc_ad11
13
gpmc_ad11
gpmc_cs4
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
213
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 5-56. Virtual Functions Mapping for GPMC (continued)
BALL
214
BALL NAME
Delay Mode Value
MUXMODE
GPMC_VIRTUAL1
0
1
2
K5
gpmc_a16
15
gpmc_a16
M2
gpmc_a1
14
gpmc_a1
D7
gpmc_a24
15
gpmc_a24
gpmc_a18
B5
gpmc_a23
15
gpmc_a23
gpmc_a17
C2
gpmc_ad8
13
gpmc_ad8
A2
gpmc_ad10
13
gpmc_ad10
C3
gpmc_ad12
13
gpmc_ad12
E7
gpmc_a20
15
gpmc_a20
D10
vin2a_d10
9
G3
gpmc_cs3
14
gpmc_cs3
G5
gpmc_oen_ren
15
gpmc_oen_ren
H1
gpmc_a9
14
gpmc_a9
3
5
6
14(1)
14(1)
gpmc_a14
gpmc_a24
gpmc_a1
A6
gpmc_cs1
15
gpmc_cs1
C1
gpmc_ad3
13
gpmc_ad3
B2
gpmc_ad7
13
gpmc_ad7
K1
gpmc_a7
14
gpmc_a7
L1
gpmc_a3
14
gpmc_a3
H6
gpmc_ben1
15
gpmc_ben1
gpmc_cs5
L4
gpmc_clk
15
gpmc_clk
gpmc_cs7
C5
gpmc_a22
15
gpmc_a22
G4
gpmc_cs2
15
gpmc_cs2
C7
vin2a_fld0
11
gpmc_a22
gpmc_a3
gpmc_wait1
gpmc_a16
gpmc_a27
J2
gpmc_a10
14
gpmc_a10
G1
gpmc_a12
15
gpmc_a12
G2
gpmc_a17
15
gpmc_a17
gpmc_a18
gpmc_a0
K2
gpmc_a5
14
gpmc_a5
D6
gpmc_a21
15
gpmc_a21
gpmc_a15
B6
gpmc_a27
15
gpmc_a27
gpmc_a21
D3
gpmc_ad9
13
gpmc_ad9
A4
gpmc_a19
15
gpmc_a19
gpmc_a13
C6
gpmc_a25
15
gpmc_a25
gpmc_a19
M1
gpmc_a0
14
gpmc_a0
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 5-56. Virtual Functions Mapping for GPMC (continued)
BALL
BALL NAME
Delay Mode Value
GPMC_VIRTUAL1
MUXMODE
0
D8
vin2a_clk0
11
F2
gpmc_a18
15
gpmc_a18
L3
gpmc_a11
14
gpmc_a11
1
2
3
5
6
14(1)
14(1)
gpmc_a27
gpmc_a17
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
215
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
(1) Some signals listed are virtual functions that present alternate multiplexing options. These virtual functions are controlled via
CTRL_CORE_ALT_SELECT_MUX or CTRL_CORE_VIP_MUX_SELECT registers. For more information on how to use these options,
please refer to Device TRM, Chapter Control Module, Section Pad Configuration Registers.
5.10.6.9 Timers
The device has 16 general-purpose (GP) timers (TIMER1 - TIMER16), two watchdog timers, and a 32-kHz
synchronized timer (COUNTER_32K) that have the following features:
• Dedicated input trigger for capture mode and dedicated output trigger/pulse width modulation (PWM)
signal
• Interrupts generated on overflow, compare, and capture
• Free-running 32-bit upward counter
• Supported modes:
– Compare and capture modes
– Auto-reload mode
– Start-stop mode
• On-the-fly read/write register (while counting)
The device has two system watchdog timer (WD_TIMER1 and WD_TIMER2) that have the following
features:
• Free-running 32-bit upward counter
• On-the-fly read/write register (while counting)
• Reset upon occurrence of a timer overflow condition
The device includes one instance of the 32-bit watchdog timer: WD_TIMER2, also called the MPU
watchdog timer.
The watchdog timer is used to provide a recovery mechanism for the device in the event of a fault
condition, such as a non-exiting code loop.
In are presented the specific groupings of signals (IOSET) for use with TIMERS.
NOTE
For additional information on the Timer Module, see the Device TRM.
5.10.6.10 I2C
The device includes 5 inter-integrated circuit (I2C) modules which provide an interface to other devices
compliant with Philips Semiconductors Inter-IC bus (I2C-bus™) specification version 2.1. External
components attached to this 2-wire serial bus can transmit/receive 8-bit data to/from the device through
the I2C module.
NOTE
Note that, on I2C1 and I2C2, due to characteristics of the open drain IO cells, HS mode is
not supported.
NOTE
Inter-integrated circuit i (i=1 to 5) module is also referred to as I2Ci.
216
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
NOTE
For more information, see the Multimaster High-Speed I2C Controller section of the Device
TRM.
Table 5-57, Table 5-58 and Figure 5-36 assume testing over the recommended operating conditions and
electrical characteristic conditions below.
Table 5-57. Timing Requirements for I2C Input Timings(1)
NO.
1
PARAMETER
STANDARD MODE
DESCRIPTION
MIN
FAST MODE
MAX
MIN
MAX
UNIT
tc(SCL)
Cycle time, SCL
10
2.5
µs
2
tsu(SCLH-SDAL)
Setup time, SCL high before SDA low (for a
repeated START condition)
4.7
0.6
µs
3
th(SDAL-SCLL)
Hold time, SCL low after SDA low (for a START
and a repeated START condition)
4
0.6
µs
4
tw(SCLL)
Pulse duration, SCL low
4.7
1.3
µs
5
tw(SCLH)
Pulse duration, SCL high
4
0.6
µs
(2)
6
tsu(SDAV-SCLH)
Setup time, SDA valid before SCL high
250
7
th(SCLL-SDAV)
Hold time, SDA valid after SCL low
0(3)
100
8
tw(SDAH)
Pulse duration, SDA high between STOP and
START conditions
4.7
9
tr(SDA)
Rise time, SDA
1000
20 + 0.1Cb
300(3)
ns
10
tr(SCL)
Rise time, SCL
1000
20 + 0.1Cb
300(3)
ns
11
tf(SDA)
Fall time, SDA
300
20 + 0.1Cb
300(3)
ns
12
tf(SCL)
Fall time, SCL
300
20 + 0.1Cb
300(3)
ns
13
tsu(SCLH-SDAH)
Setup time, SCL high before SDA high (for
STOP condition)
14
tw(SP)
Pulse duration, spike (must be suppressed)
15
Cb (5)
Capacitive load for each bus line
3.45(4)
0(3)
ns
0.9(4)
1.3
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
4
µs
0.6
0
400
µs
µs
50
ns
400
pF
(1) The I2C pins SDA and SCL do not feature fail-safe I/O buffers. These pins could potentially draw current when the device is powered
down.
(2) A Fast-mode I2C-bus™ device can be used in a Standard-mode I2C-bus system, but the requirement tsu(SDA-SCLH)≥ 250 ns must then be
met. This will automatically be the case if the device does not stretch the LOW period of the SCL signal. If such a device does stretch
the LOW period of the SCL signal, it must output the next data bit to the SDA line tr max + tsu(SDA-SCLH)= 1000 + 250 = 1250 ns
(according to the Standard-mode I2C-Bus Specification) before the SCL line is released.
(3) A device must internally provide a hold time of at least 300 ns for the SDA signal (referred to the VIHmin of the SCL signal) to bridge the
undefined region of the falling edge of SCL.
(4) The maximum th(SDA-SCLL) has only to be met if the device does not stretch the low period [tw(SCLL)] of the SCL signal.
(5) Cb = total capacitance of one bus line in pF. If mixed with HS-mode devices, faster fall-times are allowed.
Table 5-58. Timing Requirements for I2C HS-Mode (I2C3/4/5 Only)(1)
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
Cb = 400 pF (2)
Cb = 100 pF MAX
MIN
MAX
MIN
UNIT
MAX
1
tc(SCL)
Cycle time, SCL
0.294
0.588
µs
2
tsu(SCLH-SDAL)
Set-up time, SCL high before
SDA low (for a repeated START
condition)
160
160
ns
3
th(SDAL-SCLL)
Hold time, SCL low after SDA
low (for a repeated START
condition)
160
160
ns
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
217
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 5-58. Timing Requirements for I2C HS-Mode (I2C3/4/5 Only)(1) (continued)
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
Cb = 400 pF (2)
Cb = 100 pF MAX
MIN
MAX
UNIT
MIN
MAX
4
tw(SCLL)
LOW period of the SCLH clock
160
320
ns
5
tw(SCLH)
HIGH period of the SCLH clock
60
120
ns
6
tsu(SDAV-SCLH)
Setup time, SDA valid vefore
SCL high
10
10
ns
7
th(SCLL-SDAV)
Hold time, SDA valid after SCL
low
0
13
tsu(SCLH-SDAH)
Setup time, SCL high before
SDA high (for a STOP condition)
160
14
tw(SP)
Pulse duration, spike (must be
suppressed)
15
Cb (2)
Capacitive load for SDAH and
SCLH lines
16
Cb
Capacitive load for SDAH + SDA
line and SCLH + SCL line
(3)
70
0
(3)
150
160
0
10
ns
ns
0
10
ns
100
400
pF
400
400
pF
(1) I2C HS-Mode is only supported on I2C3/4/5. I2C HS-Mode is not supported on I2C1/2.
(2) For bus line loads Cb between 100 and 400 pF the timing parameters must be linearly interpolated.
(3) A device must internally provide a Data hold time to bridge the undefined part between VIH and VIL of the falling edge of the SCLH
signal. An input circuit with a threshold as low as possible for the falling edge of the SCLH signal minimizes this hold time.
9
11
I2Ci_SDA
6
8
14
4
13
5
10
I2Ci_SCL
1
12
3
7
2
3
Stop
Start
Repeated
Start
Stop
SPRS906_TIMING_I2C_01
Figure 5-36. I2C Receive Timing
Table 5-59 and Figure 5-37 assume testing over the recommended operating conditions and electrical
characteristic conditions below.
Table 5-59. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for I2C Output Timings(2)
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
STANDARD MODE
MIN
MAX
FAST MODE
MIN
MAX
UNIT
16
tc(SCL)
Cycle time, SCL
10
2.5
µs
17
tsu(SCLH-SDAL)
Setup time, SCL high before SDA low (for a
repeated START condition)
4.7
0.6
µs
18
th(SDAL-SCLL)
Hold time, SCL low after SDA low (for a
START and a repeated START condition)
4
0.6
µs
19
tw(SCLL)
Pulse duration, SCL low
4.7
1.3
µs
20
tw(SCLH)
Pulse duration, SCL high
4
0.6
µs
21
tsu(SDAV-SCLH)
Setup time, SDA valid before SCL high
250
100
ns
218
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 5-59. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for I2C Output
Timings(2) (continued)
NO.
PARAMETER
STANDARD MODE
DESCRIPTION
FAST MODE
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
0
3.45
0
0.9
UNIT
22
th(SCLL-SDAV)
Hold time, SDA valid after SCL low (for I2C
bus devices)
23
tw(SDAH)
Pulse duration, SDA high between STOP and
START conditions
24
tr(SDA)
Rise time, SDA
1000
20 + 0.1Cb
300(3)
ns
25
tr(SCL)
Rise time, SCL
1000
20 + 0.1Cb
300(3)
ns
26
tf(SDA)
Fall time, SDA
300
20 + 0.1Cb
300(3)
ns
27
tf(SCL)
Fall time, SCL
300
20 + 0.1Cb
300(3)
ns
28
tsu(SCLH-SDAH)
Setup time, SCL high before SDA high (for
STOP condition)
29
Cp
Capacitance for each I2C pin
4.7
1.3
µs
(1) (3)
(1) (3)
(1) (3)
4
µs
(1) (3)
0.6
µs
10
10
pF
(1) Cb = total capacitance of one bus line in pF. If mixed with HS-mode devices, faster fall-times are allowed.
(2) Software must properly configure the I2C module registers to achieve the timings shown in this table. See the Device TRM for details.
(3) These timings apply only to I2C1 and I2C2. I2C3, I2C4, and I2C5 use standard LVCMOS buffers to emulate open-drain buffers and their
rise/fall times should be referenced in the device IBIS model.
NOTE
I2C emulation is achieved by configuring the LVCMOS buffers to output Hi-Z instead of
driving high when transmitting logic-1.
24
26
I2Ci_SDA
21
23
19
28
20
25
I2Ci_SCL
27
16
18
22
17
18
Stop
Start
Repeated
Start
Stop
SPRS906_TIMING_I2C_02
Figure 5-37. I2C Transmit Timing
5.10.6.11 HDQ1W
The module is intended to work with both HDQ and 1-Wire protocols. The protocols use a single wire to
communicate between the master and the slave. The protocols employ an asynchronous return to one
mechanism where, after any command, the line is pulled high.
NOTE
For more information, see the HDQ / 1-Wire section of the Device TRM.
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
219
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
5.10.6.11.1 HDQ / 1-Wire — HDQ Mode
Table 5-60 and Table 5-61 assume testing over the recommended operating conditions and electrical
characteristic conditions below (see Figure 5-38, Figure 5-39, Figure 5-40 and Figure 5-41).
Table 5-60. HDQ/1-Wire Timing Requirements—HDQ Mode
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
MIN
MAX
UNIT
190
250
µs
Read one data valid after HDQ low
32(2)
66(2)
µs
Read zero data hold after HDQ low
70(2)
145(2)
µs
190
320
µs
1
tCYCH
Read bit window timing
2
tHW1
3
tHW0
4
tRSPS
Response time from HDQ slave device
(1)
(1) Defined by software.
(2) If the HDQ slave device drives a logic-low state after tHW0 maximum, it can be interpreted as a break pulse. For more information see
"HDQ / 1-Wire Switching Characteristics - HDQ Mode" and the HDQ/1-Wire chapter of the TRM.
Table 5-61. HDQ / 1-Wire Switching Characteristics - HDQ Mode
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
MIN
MAX
UNIT
5
tB
Break timing
6
tBR
Break recovery time
7
tCYCD
Write bit windows timing
190
8
tDW1
Write one data valid after HDQ low
0.5
50
µs
9
tDW0
Write zero data hold after HDQ low
86
145
µs
tB
190
µs
40
µs
µs
tBR
HDQ
SPRS906_TIMING_HDQ1W_01
Figure 5-38. HDQ Break and Break Recovery Timing — HDQ Interface Writing to Slave
tCYCH
tHW0
tHW1
HDQ
SPRS906_TIMING_HDQ1W_02
Figure 5-39. Device HDQ Interface Bit Read Timing (Data)
tCYCD
tDW0
tDW1
HDQ
SPRS906_TIMING_HDQ1W_03
Figure 5-40. Device HDQ Interface Bit Write Timing (Command / Address or Data)
220
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Command_byte_written
Data_byte_received
tRSPS
0_(LSB)
Break
1
6
1
7_(MSB)
0_(LSB)
6
HDQ
SPRS906_TIMING_HDQ1W_04
Figure 5-41. HDQ Communication Timing
5.10.6.11.2 HDQ/1-Wire—1-Wire Mode
Table 5-62 and Table 5-63 assume testing over the recommended operating conditions and electrical
characteristic conditions below (see Figure 5-42, Figure 5-43 and Figure 5-44).
Table 5-62. HDQ / 1-Wire Timing Requirements - 1-Wire Mode
NO.
MIN
MAX
10
tPDH
PARAMETER
Presence pulse delay high
DESCRIPTION
15
60
UNIT
µs
11
tPDL
Presence pulse delay low
60
240
µs
12
tRDV
Read data valid time
tLOWR
15
µs
13
tREL
Read data release time
0
45
µs
Table 5-63. HDQ / 1-Wire Switching Characteristics - 1-Wire Mode
NO.
MIN
MAX
UNIT
14
tRSTL
Reset time low
480
960
µs
15
tRSTH
Reset time high
480
16
tSLOT
Bit cycle time
17
tLOW1
Write bit-one time
18
tLOW0
Write bit-zero time(2)
19
tREC
Recovery time
20
PARAMETER
tLOWR
DESCRIPTION
µs
60
120
µs
1
15
µs
60
120
µs
1
(1)
Read bit strobe time
1
µs
15
µs
(1) tLOWR (low pulse sent by the master) must be short as possible to maximize the master sampling window.
(2) tLOWR must be less than tSLOT.
tRSTH
tRTSL
tPDH
tPDL
1-WIRE
SPRS906_TIMING_HDQ1W_05
Figure 5-42. 1-Wire—Break (Reset)
tSLOT_and_tREC
tRDV_and_tREL
tLOWR
1-WIRE
SPRS906_TIMING_HDQ1W_06
Figure 5-43. 1-Wire—Read Bit (Data)
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
221
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
tSLOT_and_tREC
tLOW0
tLOW1
1-WIRE
SPRS906_TIMING_HDQ1W_07
Figure 5-44. 1-Wire—Write Bit-One Timing (Command / Address or Data)
5.10.6.12 UART
The UART performs serial-to-parallel conversions on data received from a peripheral device and parallelto-serial conversion on data received from the CPU. There are 10 UART modules in the device. Only one
UART supports IrDA features. Each UART can be used for configuration and data exchange with a
number of external peripheral devices or interprocessor communication between devices
The UARTi (where i = 1 to 10) include the following features:
• 16C750 compatibility
• 64-byte FIFO buffer for receiver and 64-byte FIFO for transmitter
• Baud generation based on programmable divisors N (where N = 1…16 384) operating from a fixed
functional clock of 48 MHz or 192 MHz
• Break character detection and generation
• Configurable data format:
– Data bit: 5, 6, 7, or 8 bits
– Parity bit: Even, odd, none
– Stop-bit: 1, 1.5, 2 bit(s)
• Flow control: Hardware (RTS/CTS) or software (XON/XOFF)
• Only UART1 module has extended modem control signals (CD, RI, DTR, DSR)
• Only UART3 supports IrDA
NOTE
For more information, see the UART section of the Device TRM.
Table 5-64, Table 5-65 and Figure 5-45 assume testing over the recommended operating conditions and
electrical characteristic conditions below.
Table 5-64. Timing Requirements for UART
NO.
MIN
MAX
4
tw(RX)
PARAMETER
Pulse width, receive data bit, 15/30/100pF high or low
DESCRIPTION
0.96U(1)
1.05U(1)
UNIT
ns
5
tw(CTS)
Pulse width, receive start bit, 15/30/100pF high or low
0.96U(1)
1.05U(1)
ns
(2)
ns
ns
td(RTS-TX)
Delay time, transmit start bit to transmit data
P
td(CTS-TX)
Delay time, receive start bit to transmit data
P(2)
(1) U = UART baud time = 1/programmed baud rate
(2) P = Clock period of the reference clock (FCLK, usually 48 MHz or 192MHz).
Table 5-65. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for UART
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
MIN
15 pF
f(baud)
2
222
tw(TX)
Maximum programmable baud rate
MAX
30 pF
0.23
100 pF
0.115
Pulse width, transmit data bit, 15/30/100 pF high or low
Specifications
UNIT
12
U - 2(1)
U + 2(1)
MHz
ns
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 5-65. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for UART (continued)
NO.
3
PARAMETER
tw(RTS)
DESCRIPTION
Pulse width, transmit start bit, 15/30/100 pF high or low
MIN
MAX
U - 2(1)
U + 2(1)
UNIT
ns
(1) U = UART baud time = 1/programmed baud rate
2
1
UART_TXD
Start
Bit
Data Bits
3
4
UART_RXD
Start
Bit
Data Bits
SPRS961_TIMING_UART_01
Figure 5-45. UART Timing
In are presented the specific groupings of signals (IOSET) for use with UART.
5.10.6.13 McSPI
The McSPI is a master/slave synchronous serial bus. There are four separate McSPI modules (SPI1,
SPI2, SPI3, and SPI4) in the device. All these four modules support up to four external devices (four chip
selects) and are able to work as both master and slave.
The McSPI modules include the following main features:
• Serial clock with programmable frequency, polarity, and phase for each channel
• Wide selection of SPI word lengths, ranging from 4 to 32 bits
• Up to four master channels, or single channel in slave mode
• Master multichannel mode:
– Full duplex/half duplex
– Transmit-only/receive-only/transmit-and-receive modes
– Flexible input/output (I/O) port controls per channel
– Programmable clock granularity
– SPI configuration per channel. This means, clock definition, polarity enabling and word width
• Power management through wake-up capabilities
• Programmable timing control between chip select and external clock generation
• Built-in FIFO available for a single channel.
• Each SPI module supports multiple chip select pins spim_cs[i], where i = 1 to 4.
NOTE
For more information, see the Serial Communication Interface section of the Device TRM.
NOTE
The McSPIm module (m = 1 to 4) is also referred to as SPIm.
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
223
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
CAUTION
The I/O timings provided in this section are applicable for all combinations of
signals for SPI1 and SPI2. However, the timings are valid only for SPI3 and
SPI4 if signals within a single IOSET are used. The IOSETS are defined in
Table 5-68.
Table 5-66, Figure 5-46 and Figure 5-47 present Timing Requirements for McSPI - Master Mode.
Table 5-66. Timing Requirements for SPI - Master Mode (1)
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
MODE
(1) (2)
SM1
tc(SPICLK)
Cycle time, spi_sclk
SPI1/2/3/
4
SM2
tw(SPICLKL)
Typical Pulse duration, spi_sclk low
SM3
tw(SPICLKH)
Typical Pulse duration, spi_sclk high
SM4
tsu(MISO-SPICLK)
Setup time, spi_d[x] valid before spi_sclk active edge (1)
(1)
MIN
MAX
ns
0.5 × P-1
ns
0.5 × P-1
ns
3.5
ns
20.8
(4)
(1)
(4)
(1)
SM5
th(SPICLK-MISO)
Hold time, spi_d[x] valid after spi_sclk active edge
SM6
td(SPICLK-SIMO)
Delay time, spi_sclk active edge to spi_d[x] transition
3.7
(1)
SM7
td(CS-SIMO)
Delay time, spi_cs[x] active edge to spi_d[x] transition
SM8
td(CS-SPICLK)
Delay time, spi_cs[x] active to spi_sclk first edge (1)
UNIT
(3)
ns
SPI1
-3.57
4.1
ns
SPI2
-3.9
3.6
ns
SPI3
-4.9
4.7
ns
SPI4
-4.3
4.5
ns
5
ns
MASTER
_PHA0
B-4.2 (6)
ns
MASTER
_PHA1
A-4.2 (7)
ns
MASTER
_PHA0
A-4.2 (7)
ns
MASTER
_PHA1
B-4.2 (6)
ns
(5)
(5)
SM9
td(SPICLK-CS)
Delay time, spi_sclk last edge to spi_cs[x] inactive
(1)
(5)
(5)
(1) This timing applies to all configurations regardless of SPI_CLK polarity and which clock edges are used to drive output data and capture
input data.
(2) Related to the SPI_CLK maximum frequency.
(3) 20.8ns cycle time = 48MHz
(4) P = SPICLK period.
(5) SPI_CLK phase is programmable with the PHA bit of the SPI_CH(i)CONF register.
(6) B = (TCS + 0.5) × TSPICLKREF × Fratio, where TCS is a bit field of the SPI_CH(i)CONF register and Fratio = Even ≥2.
(7) When P = 20.8 ns, A = (TCS + 1) × TSPICLKREF, where TCS is a bit field of the SPI_CH(i)CONF register. When P > 20.8 ns, A = (TCS
+ 0.5) × Fratio × TSPICLKREF, where TCS is a bit field of the SPI_CH(i)CONF register.
224
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
PHA=0
EPOL=1
spim_cs(OUT)
SM1
SM3
SM8
spim_sclk(OUT)
SM2
SM9
POL=0
SM1
SM3
SM2
POL=1
spim_sclk(OUT)
SM7
SM6
Bit n-1
spim_d(OUT)
SM6
Bit n-2
Bit n-3
Bit n-4
Bit 0
PHA=1
EPOL=1
spim_cs(OUT)
SM1
SM2
SM8
spim_sclk(OUT)
SM3
SM9
POL=0
SM1
SM2
SM3
POL=1
spim_sclk(OUT)
SM6
Bit n-1
spim_d(OUT)
SM6
Bit n-2
SM6
SM6
Bit n-3
Bit 1
Bit0
SPRS906_TIMING_McSPI_01
Figure 5-46. McSPI - Master Mode Transmit
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
225
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
PHA=0
EPOL=1
spim_cs(OUT)
SM1
SM3
SM8
spim_sclk(OUT)
SM2
SM9
POL=0
SM1
SM3
SM2
POL=1
spim_sclk(OUT)
SM5
SM5
spim_d(IN)
SM4
SM4
Bit n-1
Bit n-2
Bit n-3
Bit n-4
Bit 0
PHA=1
EPOL=1
spim_cs(OUT)
SM2
SM1
SM8
spim_sclk(OUT)
SM3
SM9
POL=0
SM1
SM2
SM3
POL=1
spim_sclk(OUT)
SM5
SM4
SM4
Bit n-1
spim_d(IN)
SM5
Bit n-2
Bit n-3
Bit 1
Bit 0
SPRS906_TIMING_McSPI_02
Figure 5-47. McSPI - Master Mode Receive
Table 5-67, Figure 5-48 and Figure 5-49 present Timing Requirements for McSPI - Slave Mode.
Table 5-67. Timing Requirements for SPI - Slave Mode
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
SS1 (1)
NO.
tc(SPICLK)
Cycle time, spi_sclk
MODE
SS2 (1)
tw(SPICLKL)
SS3 (1)
MIN
MAX
UNIT
(2)
(3)
ns
Typical Pulse duration, spi_sclk low
0.45 × P
ns
tw(SPICLKH)
Typical Pulse duration, spi_sclk high
0.45 × P
ns
SS4 (1)
tsu(SIMO-SPICLK)
Setup time, spi_d[x] valid before spi_sclk active edge
5
ns
SS5 (1)
th(SPICLK-SIMO)
Hold time, spi_d[x] valid after spi_sclk active edge
5
ns
(1)
td(SPICLK-SOMI)
Delay time, spi_sclk active edge to mcspi_somi transition
SS6
226
Specifications
62.5
(4)
(4)
SPI1/2/3
2
26.6
ns
SPI4
2
20.1
ns
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 5-67. Timing Requirements for SPI - Slave Mode (continued)
NO.
SS7 (5)
SS8
(1)
SS9 (1)
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
td(CS-SOMI)
Delay time, spi_cs[x] active edge to mcspi_somi transition
MODE
tsu(CS-SPICLK)
Setup time, spi_cs[x] valid before spi_sclk first edge
th(SPICLK-CS)
Hold time, spi_cs[x] valid after spi_sclk last edge
MIN
MAX
UNIT
20.95
ns
5
ns
5
ns
SPI3
7.5
ns
SPI4
6
ns
SPI1/2
(1) This timing applies to all configurations regardless of SPI_CLK polarity and which clock edges are used to drive output data and capture
input data.
(2) When operating the SPI interface in RX-only mode, the minimum Cycle time is 26ns (38.4MHz)
(3) 62.5ns Cycle time = 16 MHz
(4) P = SPICLK period.
(5) PHA = 0; SPI_CLK phase is programmable with the PHA bit of the SPI_CH(i)CONF register.
PHA=0
EPOL=1
spim_cs(IN)
SS1
SS2
SS8
spim_sclk(IN)
SS3
SS9
POL=0
SS1
SS2
SS3
POL=1
spim_sclk(IN)
SS7
SS6
Bit n-1
spim_d(OUT)
SS6
Bit n-2
Bit n-3
Bit n-4
Bit 0
PHA=1
EPOL=1
spim_cs(IN)
SS1
SS2
SS8
spim_sclk(IN)
SS3
SS9
POL=0
SS1
SS3
SS2
POL=1
spim_sclk(IN)
SS6
Bit n-1
spim_d(OUT)
SS6
Bit n-2
SS6
SS6
Bit n-3
Bit 1
Bit 0
SPRS906_TIMING_McSPI_03
Figure 5-48. McSPI - Slave Mode Transmit
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
227
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
PHA=0
EPOL=1
spim_cs(IN)
SS1
SS2
SS8
spim_sclk(IN)
SS3
SS9
POL=0
SS1
SS2
SS3
POL=1
spim_sclk(IN)
SS5
SS4
SS4
SS5
Bit n-1
spim_d(IN)
Bit n-2
Bit n-3
Bit n-4
Bit 0
PHA=1
EPOL=1
spim_cs(IN)
SS1
SS2
SS8
spim_sclk(IN)
SS3
SS9
POL=0
SS1
SS3
SS2
POL=1
spim_sclk(IN)
SS4
SS5
spim_d(IN)
SS4
SS5
Bit n-1
Bit n-2
Bit n-3
Bit 1
Bit 0
SPRS906_TIMING_McSPI_04
Figure 5-49. McSPI - Slave Mode Receive
In Table 5-68 are presented the specific groupings of signals (IOSET) for use with SPI3 and SPI4.
Table 5-68. McSPI3/4 IOSETs
SIGNALS
IOSET1
BALL
IOSET2
MUX
IOSET3
BALL
MUX
spi3_cs0
T5
7
spi3_cs1
W2
1
spi3_d0
T4
spi3_d1
N6
spi3_sclk
BALL
IOSET4
IOSET5
MUX
BALL
MUX
BALL
MUX
B18
3
D23
2
AA3
1
A19
3
W2
1
7
B16
3
A24
2
AA2
1
7
B17
3
B25
2
Y4
1
N5
7
A18
3
C23
2
Y1
1
McSPI3
McSPI4
spi4_cs0
L3
8
B9
8
R1
7
AC4
2
AB1
1
spi4_cs1
G1
8
G1
8
N6
8
N6
8
N6
8
spi4_cs2
H3
8
H3
8
T4
8
T4
8
T4
8
228
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 5-68. McSPI3/4 IOSETs (continued)
SIGNALS
IOSET1
IOSET2
IOSET3
BALL
MUX
BALL
MUX
spi4_cs3
H4
8
H4
spi4_d0
J2
8
C8
spi4_d1
H1
8
spi4_sclk
K4
8
IOSET4
BALL
MUX
8
T5
8
R2
B8
8
E8
8
IOSET5
BALL
MUX
BALL
MUX
8
T5
7
AA5
8
T5
8
2
AA4
P3
7
1
U6
2
AA1
1
P4
7
AC3
2
Y3
1
5.10.6.14 QSPI
The Quad SPI (QSPI) module is a type of SPI module that allows single, dual or quad read access to
external SPI devices. This module has a memory mapped register interface, which provides a direct
interface for accessing data from external SPI devices and thus simplifying software requirements. It
works as a master only. There is one QSPI module in the device and it is primary intended for fast
booting from quad-SPI flash memories.
General SPI features:
• Programmable clock divider
• Six pin interface (DCLK, CS_N, DOUT, DIN, QDIN1, QDIN2)
• 4 external chip select signals
• Support for 3-, 4- or 6-pin SPI interface
• Programmable CS_N to DOUT delay from 0 to 3 DCLKs
• Programmable signal polarities
• Programmable active clock edge
• Software controllable interface allowing for any type of SPI transfer
NOTE
For more information, see the Quad Serial Peripheral Interface section of the Device TRM.
CAUTION
The I/O Timings provided in this section are only valid when all QSPI Chip
Selects used in a system are configured to use the same Clock Mode (either
Clock Mode 0 or Clock Mode 3).
CAUTION
The I/O Timings provided in this section are valid only for some QSPI usage
modes when the corresponding Virtual I/O Timings or Manual I/O Timings are
configured as described in the tables found in this section.
Table 5-69 and Table 5-70 Present Timing and Switching Characteristics for Quad SPI Interface.
Table 5-69. Switching Characteristics for QSPI
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
MODE
Q1
tc(SCLK)
Cycle time, sclk
Default Timing Mode,
Clock Mode 0
11.71
MIN
MAX
ns
Default Timing Mode,
Clock Mode 3
20.8
ns
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
UNIT
229
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 5-69. Switching Characteristics for QSPI (continued)
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
Q2
tw(SCLKL)
Pulse duration, sclk low
MODE
Y × P-1
MIN
ns
Q3
tw(SCLKH)
Pulse duration, sclk high
Y × P-1
ns
Q4
td(CS-SCLK)
Delay time, sclk falling edge to cs active edge, CS3:0
(1)
(1)
Default Timing Mode
td(SCLK-CS)
Delay time, sclk falling edge to cs inactive edge,
CS3:0
Default Timing Mode
Default Timing Mode
Q6
td(SCLK-D0)
Delay time, sclk falling edge to d[0] transition
Q7
tena(CS-D0LZ)
Enable time, cs active edge to d[0] driven (lo-z)
Q8
tdis(CS-D0Z)
Disable time, cs active edge to d[0] tri-stated (hi-z)
Q9
td(SCLK-D0)
Delay time, sclk first falling edge to first d[0] transition
UNIT
-M × P1.6 (2)
-M ×
P+2.6
ns
N × P1.6 (2)
N×
P+2.6
ns
-1.6
2.6
ns
-P-3.5
-P+2.5
ns
-P-2.5
-P+2.0
ns
-1.6P(2)
2.6-P(2)
ns
(3)
Q5
MAX
(3)
PHA=0 Only, Default
Timing Mode
(2) (3)
(2) (3)
(1) The Y parameter is defined as follows:
If DCLK_DIV is 0 or ODD then, Y equals 0.5.
If DCLK_DIV is EVEN then, Y equals (DCLK_DIV/2) / (DCLK_DIV+1).
For best performance, it is recommended to use a DCLK_DIV of 0 or ODD to minimize the duty cycle distortion. The HSDIVIDER on
CLKOUTX2_H13 output of DPLL_PER can be used to achieve the desired clock divider ratio. All required details about clock division
factor DCLK_DIV can be found in the device-specific Technical Reference Manual.
(2) P = SCLK period.
(3) M=QSPI_SPI_DC_REG.DDx + 1 when Clock Mode 0.
M=QSPI_SPI_DC_REG.DDx when Clock Mode 3.
N = 2 when Clock Mode 0.
N = 3 when Clock Mode 3.
cs
Q5
PHA=1
POL=1
Q1
Q4
Q3
Q2
sclk
Q15
Q14
Q7
d[0]
Q6
Q6
Command
Bit n-1
Command
Bit n-2
Q12 Q13
Read Data
Bit 1
Read Data
Bit 0
Q15
d[3:1]
Q12 Q13
Read Data
Bit 1
Q14
Read Data
Bit 0
SPRS91v_QSPI_01
Figure 5-50. QSPI Read (Clock Mode 3)
230
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
cs
Q5
Q4
PHA=0
POL=0
Q1
Q2
Q3
sclk
POL=0
rtclk
Q7
d[0]
Q6
Q9
Command
Command
Bit n-1
Bit n-2
Q12 Q13
Read Data
Bit 1
Q12 Q13
Read Data
Bit 0
Q12 Q13
Read Data
Bit 1
d[3:1]
Q12 Q13
Read Data
Bit 0
SPRS91v_QSPI_02
Figure 5-51. QSPI Read (Clock Mode 0)
CAUTION
The I/O Timings provided in this section are valid only for some QSPI usage
modes when the corresponding Virtual I/O Timings or Manual I/O Timings are
configured as described in the tables found in this section.
Table 5-70. Timing Requirements for QSPI(3)(2)
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
MODE
MIN
Q12
tsu(D-RTCLK)
Setup time, d[3:0] valid before falling rtclk edge
Default Timing Mode,
Clock Mode 0
4.6
ns
tsu(D-SCLK)
Setup time, d[3:0] valid before falling sclk edge
Default Timing Mode,
Clock Mode 3
12.3
ns
th(RTCLK-D)
Hold time, d[3:0] valid after falling rtclk edge
Default Timing Mode,
Clock Mode 0
-0.1
ns
th(SCLK-D)
Hold time, d[3:0] valid after falling sclk edge
Default Timing Mode,
Clock Mode 3
0.1
ns
Q14
tsu(D-SCLK)
Setup time, final d[3:0] bit valid before final falling sclk
edge
Default Timing Mode,
Clock Mode 3
12.3-P
ns
Q15
th(SCLK-D)
Hold time, final d[3:0] bit valid after final falling sclk
edge
Default Timing Mode,
Clock Mode 3
0.1+P
ns
Q13
MAX
(1)
(1)
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
UNIT
231
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
(1) P = SCLK period.
(2) Clock Modes 1 and 2 are not supported.
(3) The Device captures data on the falling clock edge in Clock Mode 0 and 3, as opposed to the traditional rising clock edge. Although
non-standard, the falling-edge-based setup and hold time timings have been designed to be compatible with standard SPI devices that
launch data on the falling edge in Clock Modes 0 and 3.
cs
Q5
PHA=1
POL=1
Q1
Q4
Q3
Q2
sclk
Q7
d[0]
Command
Bit n-1
Write Data
Bit 1
Command
Bit n-2
Q8
Q6
Q6
Q6
Q6
Write Data
Bit 0
d[3:1]
SPRS91v_QSPI_03
Figure 5-52. QSPI Write (Clock Mode 3)
cs
Q5
PHA=0
POL=0
Q4
Q1
Q2
Q3
sclk
Q7
d[0]
Q9
Q6
Command Command
Bit n-1
Bit n-2
Q6
Q8
Q6
Write Data
Bit 1
Write Data
Bit 0
d[3:1]
SPRS91v_QSPI_04
Figure 5-53. QSPI Write (Clock Mode 0)
CAUTION
The I/O Timings provided in this section are valid only for some QSPI usage
modes when the corresponding Virtual I/O Timings or Manual I/O Timings are
configured as described in the tables found in this section.
232
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
NOTE
To configure the desired Manual IO Timing Mode the user must follow the steps described in
section Manual IO Timing Modes of the Device TRM.
The associated registers to configure are listed in the CFG REGISTER column. For more
information see the Control Module chapter in the Device TRM.
Manual IO Timings Modes must be used to ensure some IO timings for QSPI. See Table 5-30 Modes
Summary for a list of IO timings requiring the use of Manual IO Timings Modes. See Table 5-71 Manual
Functions Mapping for QSPI for a definition of the Manual modes.
Table 5-71 lists the A_DELAY and G_DELAY values needed to calculate the correct values to be set in
the CFG_x registers.
Table 5-71. Manual Functions Mapping for QSPI
BALL
BALL NAME
QSPI1_MANUAL1
CFG REGISTER
MUXMODE
A_DELAY (ps)
G_DELAY (ps)
L1
gpmc_a3
0
0
CFG_GPMC_A3_OUT
qspi1_cs2
1
K3
gpmc_a4
0
0
CFG_GPMC_A4_OUT
qspi1_cs3
H3
gpmc_a13
0
0
CFG_GPMC_A13_IN
qspi1_rtclk
H4
gpmc_a14
2247
1186
CFG_GPMC_A14_IN
qspi1_d3
K6
gpmc_a15
2176
1197
CFG_GPMC_A15_IN
qspi1_d2
K5
gpmc_a16
2229
1268
CFG_GPMC_A16_IN
qspi1_d0
qspi1_d0
K5
gpmc_a16
0
0
CFG_GPMC_A16_OUT
G2
gpmc_a17
2251
1217
CFG_GPMC_A17_IN
qspi1_d1
F2
gpmc_a18
0
0
CFG_GPMC_A18_OUT
qspi1_sclk
G4
gpmc_cs2
0
0
CFG_GPMC_CS2_OUT
qspi1_cs0
G3
gpmc_cs3
0
0
CFG_GPMC_CS3_OUT
qspi1_cs1
5.10.6.15 McASP
The multichannel audio serial port (McASP) functions as a general-purpose audio serial port optimized for
the needs of multichannel audio applications. The McASP is useful for time-division multiplexed (TDM)
stream, Inter-Integrated Sound (I2S) protocols, and intercomponent digital audio interface transmission
(DIT).
The device have integrated 8 McASP modules (McASP1-McASP8) with:
• McASP1 and McASP2 modules supporting 16 channels with independent TX/RX clock/sync domain
• McASP3 through McASP7 modules supporting 4 channels with independent TX/RX clock/sync domain
• McASP8 module supporting 2 channels with independent TX/RX clock/sync domain
NOTE
For more information, see the Serial Communication Interface section of the Device TRM.
CAUTION
The I/O Timings provided in this section are valid only for some McASP usage
modes when the corresponding Virtual I/O Timings or Manual I/O Timings are
configured as described in the tables found in this section.
Table 5-72, Table 5-73, Table 5-74 and Figure 5-54 present Timing Requirements for McASP1 to
McASP8
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
233
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
.
Table 5-72. Timing Requirements for McASP1(1)
NO.
1
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
tc(AHCLKX)
Cycle time, AHCLKX
MODE
20
ns
(2)
ns
20
ns
0.5R - 3
ns
ACLKR/X int
20.5
ns
ACLKR/X ext
in
ACLKR/X ext
out
4
ns
2
tw(AHCLKX)
Pulse duration, AHCLKX high or low
3
tc(ACLKRX)
Cycle time, ACLKR/X
4
tw(ACLKRX)
Pulse duration, ACLKR/X high or low
5
tsu(AFSRX-ACLK)
Setup time, AFSR/X input valid before ACLKR/X
6
7
8
th(ACLK-AFSRX)
0.35P
Setup time, AXR input valid before ACLKR/X
th(ACLK-AXR)
MAX
(3)
Hold time, AFSR/X input valid after ACLKR/X
tsu(AXR-ACLK)
MIN
Hold time, AXR input valid after ACLKR/X
UNIT
ACLKR/X int
-1
ns
ACLKR/X ext
in
ACLKR/X ext
out
1.7
ns
ACLKR/X int
21.6
ns
ACLKR/X ext
in
ACLKR/X ext
out
11.5
ns
ACLKR/X int
-1
ns
ACLKR/X ext
in
ACLKR/X ext
out
1.8
ns
(1) ACLKR internal: ACLKRCTL.CLKRM=1, PDIR.ACLKR = 1
ACLKR external input: ACLKRCTL.CLKRM=0, PDIR.ACLKR=0
ACLKR external output: ACLKRCTL.CLKRM=0, PDIR.ACLKR=1
ACLKX internal: ACLKXCTL.CLKXM=1, PDIR.ACLKX = 1
ACLKX external input: ACLKXCTL.CLKXM=0, PDIR.ACLKX=0
ACLKX external output: ACLKXCTL.CLKXM=0, PDIR.ACLKX=1
(2) P = AHCLKX period in ns.
(3) R = ACLKR/X period in ns.
Table 5-73. Timing Requirements for McASP2(1)
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
1
tc(AHCLKX)
Cycle time, AHCLKX
MODE
2
tw(AHCLKX)
Pulse duration, AHCLKX high or low
3
tc(ACLKX)
Cycle time, ACLKX
Any Other Conditions
tw(ACLKX)
Pulse duration, ACLKX high or low
tsu(AFSX-ACLK)
Setup time, AFSX input valid before ACLKX
ns
0.35P
ns
20
ns
ns
0.5R - 3
ns
0.38R
ns
ACLKX int
20.3
ns
ACLKX ext in
ACLKX ext out
4.5
ns
3
ns
Any Other Conditions
ACLKX ext in
ACLKX ext out "80M" Virtual IO
Timing Modes
234
UNIT
12.5
ACLKX/AFSX (In Sync Mode)
and AXR are all inputs "80M"
Virtual IO Timing Modes
5
MAX
20
(2)
ACLKX/AFSX (In Sync Mode)
and AXR are all inputs "80M"
Virtual IO Timing Modes
4
MIN
Specifications
(3)
(3)
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 5-73. Timing Requirements for McASP2(1) (continued)
NO.
6
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
th(ACLK-AFSX)
Hold time, AFSX input valid after ACLKX
MODE
MIN
tsu(AXR-ACLK)
Setup time, AXR input valid before ACLKX
ns
ACLKX ext in
ACLKX ext out
1.8
ns
3
ns
ACLKX int
21.1
ns
ACLKX ext in
ACLKX ext out
4.5
ns
3
ns
ACLKX int
-1
ns
ACLKX ext in
ACLKX ext out
1.8
ns
3
ns
ACLKX ext in
ACLKX ext out "80M" Virtual IO
Timing Modes
8
th(ACLK-AXR)
Hold time, AXR input valid after ACLKX
UNIT
-1
ACLKX ext in
ACLKX ext out "80M" Virtual IO
Timing Modes
7
MAX
ACLKX int
ACLKX ext in
ACLKX ext out "80M" Virtual IO
Timing Modes
(1) ACLKX internal: ACLKXCTL.CLKXM=1, PDIR.ACLKX = 1
ACLKX external input: ACLKXCTL.CLKXM=0, PDIR.ACLKX=0
ACLKX external output: ACLKXCTL.CLKXM=0, PDIR.ACLKX=1
(2) P = AHCLKX period in ns.
(3) R = ACLKX period in ns.
Table 5-74. Timing Requirements for McASP3/4/5/6/7/8(1)
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
1
tc(AHCLKX)
Cycle time, AHCLKX
2
tw(AHCLKX)
Pulse duration, AHCLKX high or low
3
tc(ACLKRX)
Cycle time, ACLKR/X
4
tw(ACLKRX)
Pulse duration, ACLKR/X high or low
5
tsu(AFSRX-ACLK)
Setup time, AFSR/X input valid before ACLKR/X
6
th(ACLK-AFSRX)
tsu(AXR-ACLK)
8
th(ACLK-AXR)
MODE
Hold time, AFSR/X input valid after ACLKR/X
Setup time, AXR input valid before ACLKX
Hold time, AXR input valid after ACLKX
MIN
MAX
UNIT
20
ns
0.35P
ns
(2)
20
ns
0.5R - 3
ns
ACLKR/X int
19.7
ns
ACLKR/X ext in
ACLKR/X ext out
5.6
ns
ACLKR/X int
-1.1
ns
ACLKR/X ext in
ACLKR/X ext out
2.5
ns
ACLKX int
(ASYNC=0)
20.3
ns
ACLKR/X ext in
ACLKR/X ext out
5.1
ns
ACLKX int
(ASYNC=0)
-0.8
ns
ACLKR/X ext in
ACLKR/X ext out
2.5
ns
(3)
(1) ACLKR internal: ACLKRCTL.CLKRM=1, PDIR.ACLKR = 1 (NOT SUPPORTED)
ACLKR external input: ACLKRCTL.CLKRM=0, PDIR.ACLKR=0
ACLKR external output: ACLKRCTL.CLKRM=0, PDIR.ACLKR=1
ACLKX internal: ACLKXCTL.CLKXM=1, PDIR.ACLKX = 1
ACLKX external input: ACLKXCTL.CLKXM=0, PDIR.ACLKX=0
ACLKX external output: ACLKXCTL.CLKXM=0, PDIR.ACLKX=1
(2) P = AHCLKX period in ns.
(3) R = ACLKR/X period in ns.
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
235
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
2
1
2
AHCLKX (Falling Edge Polarity)
AHCLKX (Rising Edge Polarity)
4
3
4
ACLKR/X (CLKRP = CLKXP = 0) (A)
ACLKR/X (CLKRP = CLKXP = 1) (B)
6
5
AFSR/X (Bit Width, 0 Bit Delay)
AFSR/X (Bit Width, 1 Bit Delay)
AFSR/X (Bit Width, 2 Bit Delay)
AFSR/X (Slot Width, 0 Bit Delay)
AFSR/X (Slot Width, 1 Bit Delay)
AFSR/X (Slot Width, 2 Bit Delay)
8
7
AXR[n] (Data In/Receive)
A0
A1
A30 A31 B0
B1
B30 B31 C0 C1
C2 C3
C31
SPRS906_TIMING_McASP_01
A.
B.
For CLKRP = CLKXP =
receiver is configured for
For CLKRP = CLKXP =
receiver is configured for
0, the McASP transmitter is configured for rising edge (to shift data out) and the McASP
falling edge (to shift data in).
1, the McASP transmitter is configured for falling edge (to shift data out) and the McASP
rising edge (to shift data in).
Figure 5-54. McASP Input Timing
Table 5-75, Table 5-76, Table 5-77 and Figure 5-55 present Switching Characteristics Over
Recommended Operating Conditions for McASP1 to McASP8.
Table 5-75. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for McASP1(1)
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
9
tc(AHCLKX)
Cycle time, AHCLKX
10
tw(AHCLKX)
Pulse duration, AHCLKX high or low
11
tc(ACLKRX)
Cycle time, ACLKR/X
12
tw(ACLKRX)
Pulse duration, ACLKR/X high or low
236
MODE
Specifications
MIN
MAX
UNIT
20
ns
0.5P 2.5 (2)
ns
20
ns
0.5P 2.5 (3)
ns
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 5-75. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for
McASP1(1) (continued)
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
13
td(ACLK-AFSXR)
Delay time, ACLKR/X transmit edge to AFSX/R output valid
MODE
MIN
MAX
ACLKR/X int
-0.9
6
ns
2
23.1
ns
-1.4
6
ns
2
24.2
ns
ACLKR/X ext in
ACLKR/X ext out
14
td(ACLK-AXR)
Delay time, ACLKR/X transmit edge to AXR output valid
ACLKR/X int
ACLKR/X ext in
ACLKR/X ext out
UNIT
(1) ACLKR internal: ACLKRCTL.CLKRM=1, PDIR.ACLKR = 1
ACLKR external input: ACLKRCTL.CLKRM=0, PDIR.ACLKR=0
ACLKR external output: ACLKRCTL.CLKRM=0, PDIR.ACLKR=1
ACLKX internal: ACLKXCTL.CLKXM=1, PDIR.ACLKX = 1
ACLKX external input: ACLKXCTL.CLKXM=0, PDIR.ACLKX=0
ACLKX external output: ACLKXCTL.CLKXM=0, PDIR.ACLKX=1
(2) P = AHCLKX period in ns.
(3) R = ACLKR/X period in ns.
Table 5-76. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for McASP2
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
MODE
9
tc(AHCLKX)
Cycle time, AHCLKX
10
tw(AHCLKX)
Pulse duration, AHCLKX high or low
11
tc(ACLKX)
Cycle time, ACLKX
12
tw(ACLKX)
Pulse duration, ACLKX high or low
13
td(ACLK-AFSX)
Delay time, ACLKX transmit edge to AFSX output valid
14
td(ACLK-AXR)
Delay time, ACLKX transmit edge to AXR output valid
MIN
(1)
MAX
UNIT
20
ns
0.5P 2.5 (2)
ns
20
ns
0.5P 2.5 (3)
ns
ACLKX int
-1
6
ns
ACLKX ext in
ACLKX ext out
2
23.2
ns
-1.3
6
ns
2
23.7
ns
ACLKX int
ACLKX ext in
ACLKX ext out
(1) ACLKX internal: ACLKXCTL.CLKXM=1, PDIR.ACLKX = 1
ACLKX external input: ACLKXCTL.CLKXM=0, PDIR.ACLKX=0
ACLKX external output: ACLKXCTL.CLKXM=0, PDIR.ACLKX=1
(2) P = AHCLKX period in ns.
(3) R = ACLKX period in ns.
Table 5-77. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for
McASP3/4/5/6/7/8(1)
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
MODE
9
tc(AHCLKX)
Cycle time, AHCLKX
10
tw(AHCLKX)
Pulse duration, AHCLKX high or low
11
tc(ACLKRX)
Cycle time, ACLKR/X
12
tw(ACLKRX)
Pulse duration, ACLKR/X high or low
13
td(ACLK-AFSXR)
Delay time, ACLKR/X transmit edge to AFSX/R output valid
14
td(ACLK-AXR)
Delay time, ACLKR/X transmit edge to AXR output valid
MIN
MAX
20
ns
0.5P 2.5 (2)
ns
20
ns
0.5P 2.5 (3)
ns
ACLKR/X int
-0.5
6
ns
ACLKR/X ext in
ACLKR/X ext out
1.9
24.5
ns
ACLKR/X int
-1.4
7.1
ns
ACLKR/X ext in
ACLKR/X ext out
1.1
24.2
ns
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
UNIT
237
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
(1) ACLKR internal: ACLKRCTL.CLKRM=1, PDIR.ACLKR = 1
ACLKR external input: ACLKRCTL.CLKRM=0, PDIR.ACLKR=0
ACLKR external output: ACLKRCTL.CLKRM=0, PDIR.ACLKR=1
ACLKX internal: ACLKXCTL.CLKXM=1, PDIR.ACLKX = 1
ACLKX external input: ACLKXCTL.CLKXM=0, PDIR.ACLKX=0
ACLKX external output: ACLKXCTL.CLKXM=0, PDIR.ACLKX=1
(2) P = AHCLKX period in ns.
(3) R = ACLKR/X period in ns.
10
10
9
AHCLKX (Falling Edge Polarity)
AHCLKX (Rising Edge Polarity)
12
11
12
ACLKR/X (CLKRP = CLKXP = 1) (A)
ACLKR/X (CLKRP = CLKXP = 0) (B)
13
13
13
13
AFSR/X (Bit Width, 0 Bit Delay)
AFSR/X (Bit Width, 1 Bit Delay)
AFSR/X (Bit Width, 2 Bit Delay)
13
13
13
AFSR/X (Slot Width, 0 Bit Delay)
AFSR/X (Slot Width, 1 Bit Delay)
AFSR/X (Slot Width, 2 Bit Delay)
14
15
AXR[n] (Data Out/T ransmit)
A0
A1
A30 A31 B0 B1
B30 B31 C0
C1 C2 C3
C31
SPRS906_TIMING_McASP_02
A.
B.
For CLKRP = CLKXP =
receiver is configured for
For CLKRP = CLKXP =
receiver is configured for
1, the McASP transmitter is configured for falling edge (to shift data out) and the McASP
rising edge (to shift data in).
0, the McASP transmitter is configured for rising edge (to shift data out) and the McASP
falling edge (to shift data in).
Figure 5-55. McASP Output Timing
Table 5-78 through Table 5-85 explain all cases with Virtual Mode Details for McASP1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8 (see
Figure 5-56 through Figure 5-63).
238
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 5-78. Virtual Mode Case Details for McASP1
No.
CASE
CASE Description
Virtual Mode Settings
Signals
Notes
Virtual Mode Value
IP Mode : ASYNC
1
COIFOI
CLKX / FSX: Output
CLKR / FSR: Input
AXR(Outputs)/CLKX/FSX
Default (No Virtual Mode)
AXR(Inputs)/CLKR/FSR
MCASP1_VIRTUAL2_ASYNC_RX
2
COIFIO
CLKX / FSR: Output
CLKR / FSX: Input
AXR(Outputs)/CLKX/FSX
Default (No Virtual Mode)
AXR(Inputs)/CLKR/FSR
MCASP1_VIRTUAL2_ASYNC_RX
CLKR / FSR: Output
CLKX / FSX: Input
AXR(Outputs)/CLKX/FSX
MCASP1_VIRTUAL2_ASYNC_RX
AXR(Inputs)/CLKR/FSR
Default (No Virtual Mode)
CLKR / FSX: Output
CLKX / FSR: Input
AXR(Outputs)/CLKX/FSX
MCASP1_VIRTUAL2_ASYNC_RX
AXR(Inputs)/CLKR/FSR
Default (No Virtual Mode)
3
CIOFIO
4
CIOFOI
See Figure 5-56
See Figure 5-57
See Figure 5-58
See Figure 5-59
IP Mode : SYNC (CLKR / FSR internally generated from CLKX / FSX)
5
CO-FO-
6
CLKX / FSX: Output
CI-FO-
AXR(Outputs)/CLKX/FSX
Default (No Virtual Mode)
AXR(Inputs)/CLKX/FSX
Default (No Virtual Mode)
FSX: Output CLKX:
Input
AXR(Outputs)/CLKX/FSX
MCASP1_VIRTUAL1_SYNC_RX
AXR(Inputs)/CLKX/FSX
MCASP1_VIRTUAL1_SYNC_RX
7
CI-FI-
CLKX / FSX: Input
AXR(Outputs)/CLKX/FSX
MCASP1_VIRTUAL1_SYNC_RX
AXR(Inputs)/CLKX/FSX
MCASP1_VIRTUAL1_SYNC_RX
8
CO-FI-
CLKX: Output FSX:
Input
AXR(Outputs)/CLKX/FSX
Default (No Virtual Mode)
AXR(Inputs)/CLKX/FSX
Default (No Virtual Mode)
See Figure 5-60
See Figure 5-61
See Figure 5-62
See Figure 5-63
Table 5-79. Virtual Mode Case Details for McASP2
No.
CASE
CASE
Description
Virtual Mode Settings
Signals
Notes
Virtual Mode Value
IP Mode : SYNC (CLKR / FSR internally generated from CLKX / FSX)
5
CO-FO-
CLKX / FSX:
Output
AXR(Outputs)/CLKX/FSX
AXR(Inputs)/CLKX/FSX
Default (No Virtual Mode)
6
CI-FO-
FSX: Output
CLKX: Input
AXR(Outputs)/CLKX/FSX
MCASP2_VIRTUAL3_SYNC_RX
AXR(Inputs)/CLKX/FSX
MCASP2_VIRTUAL3_SYNC_RX
CLKX / FSX:
Input
AXR(Outputs)/CLKX/FSX
MCASP2_VIRTUAL3_SYNC_RX(1)
AXR(Inputs)/CLKX/FSX
MCASP2_VIRTUAL3_SYNC_RX(1)
AXR(Inputs)/CLKX/FSX
MCASP2_VIRTUAL1_SYNC_RX_80M(2)
AXR(Outputs)/CLKX/FSX
Default (No Virtual Mode)
AXR(Inputs)/CLKX/FSX
Default (No Virtual Mode)
7
8
CI-FI-
CO-FI-
CLKX: Output
FSX: Input
Default (No Virtual Mode)
See Figure 5-60
See Figure 5-61
See Figure 5-62
See Figure 5-63
(1) Used up to 50MHz. Should also be used in a CI-FI- mixed case where AXR operate as both inputs and outputs (that is, AXR are
bidirectional).
(2) Used in 80MHz input only mode when AXR, CLKX and FSX are all inputs.
Table 5-80. Virtual Mode Case Details for McASP3
No.
CASE
CASE
Description
Virtual Mode Settings
Signals
Notes
Virtual Mode Value
IP Mode : ASYNC
1
COIFOI
CLKX /
FSX: Output
CLKR /
FSR: Input
AXR(Outputs)/CLKX/FSX
Default (No Virtual Mode)
AXR(Inputs)/CLKR/FSR
MCASP3_VIRTUAL2_SYNC_RX
See Figure 5-56
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
239
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 5-80. Virtual Mode Case Details for McASP3 (continued)
No.
2
3
4
CASE
COIFIO
CIOFIO
CIOFOI
CASE
Description
Virtual Mode Settings
Signals
Notes
Virtual Mode Value
CLKX /
FSR: Output
CLKR /
FSX: Input
AXR(Outputs)/CLKX/FSX
Default (No Virtual Mode)
AXR(Inputs)/CLKR/FSR
MCASP3_VIRTUAL2_SYNC_RX
CLKR /
FSR: Output
CLKX /
FSX: Input
AXR(Outputs)/CLKX/FSX
MCASP3_VIRTUAL2_SYNC_RX
AXR(Inputs)/CLKR/FSR
MCASP3_VIRTUAL2_SYNC_RX
CLKR /
FSX: Output
CLKX /
FSR: Input
AXR(Outputs)/CLKX/FSX
MCASP3_VIRTUAL2_SYNC_RX
AXR(Inputs)/CLKR/FSR
MCASP3_VIRTUAL2_SYNC_RX
See Figure 5-57
See Figure 5-58
See Figure 5-59
IP Mode : SYNC (CLKR / FSR internally generated from CLKX / FSX)
5
6
CO-FOCI-FO-
CLKX /
FSX: Output
AXR(Outputs)/CLKX/FSX
Default (No Virtual Mode)
AXR(Inputs)/CLKX/FSX
Default (No Virtual Mode)
FSX: Output
CLKX: Input
AXR(Outputs)/CLKX/FSX
MCASP3_VIRTUAL2_SYNC_RX
AXR(Inputs)/CLKX/FSX
MCASP3_VIRTUAL2_SYNC_RX
7
CI-FI-
CLKX /
FSX: Input
AXR(Outputs)/CLKX/FSX
MCASP3_VIRTUAL2_SYNC_RX
AXR(Inputs)/CLKX/FSX
MCASP3_VIRTUAL2_SYNC_RX
8
CO-FI-
CLKX:
Output FSX:
Input
AXR(Outputs)/CLKX/FSX
Default (No Virtual Mode)
AXR(Inputs)/CLKX/FSX
Default (No Virtual Mode)
See Figure 5-60
See Figure 5-61
See Figure 5-62
See Figure 5-63
Table 5-81. Virtual Mode Case Details for McASP4
No.
CASE
CASE
Description
Virtual Mode Settings
Signals
Notes
Virtual Mode Value
IP Mode : ASYNC
1
2
3
4
COIFOI
COIFIO
CIOFIO
CIOFOI
CLKX / FSX:
Output CLKR /
FSR: Input
AXR(Outputs)/CLKX/FSX
Default (No Virtual Mode)
AXR(Inputs)/CLKR/FSR
MCASP4_VIRTUAL1_SYNC_RX
CLKX / FSR:
Output CLKR /
FSX: Input
AXR(Outputs)/CLKX/FSX
Default (No Virtual Mode)
AXR(Inputs)/CLKR/FSR
MCASP4_VIRTUAL1_SYNC_RX
CLKR / FSR:
Output CLKX /
FSX: Input
AXR(Outputs)/CLKX/FSX
MCASP4_VIRTUAL1_SYNC_RX
AXR(Inputs)/CLKR/FSR
MCASP4_VIRTUAL1_SYNC_RX
CLKR / FSX:
Output CLKX /
FSR: Input
AXR(Outputs)/CLKX/FSX
MCASP4_VIRTUAL1_SYNC_RX
AXR(Inputs)/CLKR/FSR
MCASP4_VIRTUAL1_SYNC_RX
See Figure 5-56
See Figure 5-57
See Figure 5-58
See Figure 5-59
IP Mode : SYNC (CLKR / FSR internally generated from CLKX / FSX)
5
CO-FO-
CLKX / FSX:
Output
AXR(Outputs)/CLKX/FSX
Default (No Virtual Mode)
AXR(Inputs)/CLKX/FSX
Default (No Virtual Mode)
6
CI-FO-
FSX: Output
CLKX: Input
AXR(Outputs)/CLKX/FSX
MCASP4_VIRTUAL1_SYNC_RX
AXR(Inputs)/CLKX/FSX
MCASP4_VIRTUAL1_SYNC_RX
7
CI-FI-
CLKX / FSX:
Input
AXR(Outputs)/CLKX/FSX
MCASP4_VIRTUAL1_SYNC_RX
AXR(Inputs)/CLKX/FSX
MCASP4_VIRTUAL1_SYNC_RX
CLKX: Output
FSX: Input
AXR(Outputs)/CLKX/FSX
Default (No Virtual Mode)
AXR(Inputs)/CLKX/FSX
Default (No Virtual Mode)
8
240
CO-FI-
Specifications
See Figure 5-60
See Figure 5-61
See Figure 5-62
See Figure 5-63
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 5-82. Virtual Mode Case Details for McASP5
No.
CASE
CASE
Description
Virtual Mode Settings
Signals
Notes
Virtual Mode Value
IP Mode : ASYNC
1
2
3
4
COIFOI
COIFIO
CIOFIO
CIOFOI
CLKX / FSX:
Output CLKR /
FSR: Input
AXR(Outputs)/CLKX/FSX
Default (No Virtual Mode)
AXR(Inputs)/CLKR/FSR
MCASP5_VIRTUAL1_SYNC_RX
CLKX / FSR:
Output CLKR /
FSX: Input
AXR(Outputs)/CLKX/FSX
Default (No Virtual Mode)
AXR(Inputs)/CLKR/FSR
MCASP5_VIRTUAL1_SYNC_RX
CLKR / FSR:
Output CLKX /
FSX: Input
AXR(Outputs)/CLKX/FSX
MCASP5_VIRTUAL1_SYNC_RX
AXR(Inputs)/CLKR/FSR
MCASP5_VIRTUAL1_SYNC_RX
CLKR / FSX:
Output CLKX /
FSR: Input
AXR(Outputs)/CLKX/FSX
MCASP5_VIRTUAL1_SYNC_RX
AXR(Inputs)/CLKR/FSR
MCASP5_VIRTUAL1_SYNC_RX
See Figure 5-56
See Figure 5-57
See Figure 5-58
See Figure 5-59
IP Mode : SYNC (CLKR / FSR internally generated from CLKX / FSX)
5
6
7
8
CO-FOCI-FOCI-FICO-FI-
CLKX / FSX:
Output
AXR(Outputs)/CLKX/FSX
Default (No Virtual Mode)
AXR(Inputs)/CLKX/FSX
Default (No Virtual Mode)
FSX: Output
CLKX: Input
AXR(Outputs)/CLKX/FSX
MCASP5_VIRTUAL1_SYNC_RX
AXR(Inputs)/CLKX/FSX
MCASP5_VIRTUAL1_SYNC_RX
CLKX / FSX:
Input
AXR(Outputs)/CLKX/FSX
MCASP5_VIRTUAL1_SYNC_RX
AXR(Inputs)/CLKX/FSX
MCASP5_VIRTUAL1_SYNC_RX
CLKX: Output
FSX: Input
AXR(Outputs)/CLKX/FSX
Default (No Virtual Mode)
AXR(Inputs)/CLKX/FSX
Default (No Virtual Mode)
See Figure 5-60
See Figure 5-61
See Figure 5-62
See Figure 5-63
Table 5-83. Virtual Mode Case Details for McASP6
No.
CASE
CASE
Description
Virtual Mode Settings
Signals
Notes
Virtual Mode Value
IP Mode : ASYNC
1
2
3
4
COIFOI
COIFIO
CIOFIO
CIOFOI
CLKX / FSX:
Output CLKR
/ FSR: Input
AXR(Outputs)/CLKX/FSX
Default (No Virtual Mode)
AXR(Inputs)/CLKR/FSR
MCASP6_VIRTUAL1_SYNC_RX
CLKX / FSR:
Output CLKR
/ FSX: Input
AXR(Outputs)/CLKX/FSX
Default (No Virtual Mode)
AXR(Inputs)/CLKR/FSR
MCASP6_VIRTUAL1_SYNC_RX
CLKR / FSR:
Output CLKX
/ FSX: Input
AXR(Outputs)/CLKX/FSX
MCASP6_VIRTUAL1_SYNC_RX
AXR(Inputs)/CLKR/FSR
MCASP6_VIRTUAL1_SYNC_RX
CLKR / FSX:
Output CLKX
/ FSR: Input
AXR(Outputs)/CLKX/FSX
MCASP6_VIRTUAL1_SYNC_RX
AXR(Inputs)/CLKR/FSR
MCASP6_VIRTUAL1_SYNC_RX
See Figure 5-56
See Figure 5-57
See Figure 5-58
See Figure 5-59
IP Mode : SYNC (CLKR / FSR internally generated from CLKX / FSX)
5
CO-FO-
CLKX / FSX:
Output
AXR(Outputs)/CLKX/FSX
Default (No Virtual Mode)
AXR(Inputs)/CLKX/FSX
Default (No Virtual Mode)
6
CI-FO-
FSX: Output
CLKX: Input
AXR(Outputs)/CLKX/FSX
MCASP6_VIRTUAL1_SYNC_RX
AXR(Inputs)/CLKX/FSX
MCASP6_VIRTUAL1_SYNC_RX
7
CI-FI-
CLKX / FSX:
Input
AXR(Outputs)/CLKX/FSX
MCASP6_VIRTUAL1_SYNC_RX
AXR(Inputs)/CLKX/FSX
MCASP6_VIRTUAL1_SYNC_RX
8
CO-FI-
CLKX:
Output FSX:
Input
AXR(Outputs)/CLKX/FSX
Default (No Virtual Mode)
AXR(Inputs)/CLKX/FSX
Default (No Virtual Mode)
See Figure 5-60
See Figure 5-61
See Figure 5-62
See Figure 5-63
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
241
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 5-84. Virtual Mode Case Details for McASP7
No.
CASE
CASE
Description
Virtual Mode Settings
Signals
Notes
Virtual Mode Value
IP Mode : ASYNC
1
2
3
4
COIFOI
COIFIO
CIOFIO
CIOFOI
CLKX / FSX:
Output CLKR
/ FSR: Input
AXR(Outputs)/CLKX/FSX
Default (No Virtual Mode)
AXR(Inputs)/CLKR/FSR
MCASP7_VIRTUAL2_SYNC_RX
CLKX / FSR:
Output CLKR
/ FSX: Input
AXR(Outputs)/CLKX/FSX
Default (No Virtual Mode)
AXR(Inputs)/CLKR/FSR
MCASP7_VIRTUAL2_SYNC_RX
CLKR / FSR:
Output CLKX
/ FSX: Input
AXR(Outputs)/CLKX/FSX
MCASP7_VIRTUAL2_SYNC_RX
AXR(Inputs)/CLKR/FSR
MCASP7_VIRTUAL2_SYNC_RX
CLKR / FSX:
Output CLKX
/ FSR: Input
AXR(Outputs)/CLKX/FSX
MCASP7_VIRTUAL2_SYNC_RX
AXR(Inputs)/CLKR/FSR
MCASP7_VIRTUAL2_SYNC_RX
See Figure 5-56
See Figure 5-57
See Figure 5-58
See Figure 5-59
IP Mode : SYNC (CLKR / FSR internally generated from CLKX / FSX)
5
6
7
8
CO-FOCI-FOCI-FICO-FI-
CLKX / FSX:
Output
AXR(Outputs)/CLKX/FSX
Default (No Virtual Mode)
AXR(Inputs)/CLKX/FSX
Default (No Virtual Mode)
FSX: Output
CLKX: Input
AXR(Outputs)/CLKX/FSX
MCASP7_VIRTUAL2_SYNC_RX
AXR(Inputs)/CLKX/FSX
MCASP7_VIRTUAL2_SYNC_RX
CLKX / FSX:
Input
AXR(Outputs)/CLKX/FSX
MCASP7_VIRTUAL2_SYNC_RX
AXR(Inputs)/CLKX/FSX
MCASP7_VIRTUAL2_SYNC_RX
CLKX:
Output FSX:
Input
AXR(Outputs)/CLKX/FSX
Default (No Virtual Mode)
AXR(Inputs)/CLKX/FSX
Default (No Virtual Mode)
See Figure 5-60
See Figure 5-61
See Figure 5-62
See Figure 5-63
Table 5-85. Virtual Mode Case Details for McASP8
No.
CASE
CASE
Description
Virtual Mode Settings
Signals
Notes
Virtual Mode Value
IP Mode : ASYNC
1
2
3
4
COIFOI
COIFIO
CIOFIO
CIOFOI
CLKX / FSX:
Output CLKR
/ FSR: Input
AXR(Outputs)/CLKX/FSX
Default (No Virtual Mode)
AXR(Inputs)/CLKR/FSR
MCASP8_VIRTUAL1_SYNC_RX
CLKX / FSR:
Output CLKR
/ FSX: Input
AXR(Outputs)/CLKX/FSX
Default (No Virtual Mode)
AXR(Inputs)/CLKR/FSR
MCASP8_VIRTUAL1_SYNC_RX
CLKR / FSR:
Output CLKX
/ FSX: Input
AXR(Outputs)/CLKX/FSX
MCASP8_VIRTUAL1_SYNC_RX
AXR(Inputs)/CLKR/FSR
MCASP8_VIRTUAL1_SYNC_RX
CLKR / FSX:
Output CLKX
/ FSR: Input
AXR(Outputs)/CLKX/FSX
MCASP8_VIRTUAL1_SYNC_RX
AXR(Inputs)/CLKR/FSR
MCASP8_VIRTUAL1_SYNC_RX
See Figure 5-56
See Figure 5-57
See Figure 5-58
See Figure 5-59
IP Mode : SYNC (CLKR / FSR internally generated from CLKX / FSX)
5
CO-FO-
CLKX / FSX:
Output
AXR(Outputs)/CLKX/FSX
AXR(Inputs)/CLKX/FSX
Default (No Virtual Mode)
6
CI-FO-
FSX: Output
CLKX: Input
AXR(Outputs)/CLKX/FSX
MCASP8_VIRTUAL1_SYNC_RX
AXR(Inputs)/CLKX/FSX
MCASP8_VIRTUAL1_SYNC_RX
CLKX / FSX:
Input
AXR(Outputs)/CLKX/FSX
MCASP8_VIRTUAL1_SYNC_RX
AXR(Inputs)/CLKX/FSX
MCASP8_VIRTUAL1_SYNC_RX
CLKX:
Output FSX:
Input
AXR(Outputs)/CLKX/FSX
Default (No Virtual Mode)
AXR(Inputs)/CLKX/FSX
Default (No Virtual Mode)
7
8
242
CI-FICO-FI-
Default (No Virtual Mode)
Specifications
See Figure 5-60
See Figure 5-61
See Figure 5-62
See Figure 5-63
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
McASP
SoC IOs
CLKX
FSX
TXDATA
CLKR
FSR
RXDATA
SPRS906_MCASP_uc_01
Figure 5-56. McASP1-8 COIFOI – ASYNC Mode
McASP
SoC IOs
CLKX
FSX
TXDATA
CLKR
FSR
RXDATA
SPRS906_MCASP_uc_02
Figure 5-57. McASP1-8 COIFIO – ASYNC Mode
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
243
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
McASP
www.ti.com
SoC IOs
CLKX
FSX
TXDATA
CLKR
FSR
RXDATA
SPRS906_MCASP_uc_03
Figure 5-58. McASP1-8 CIOFIO – ASYNC Mode
McASP
SoC IOs
CLKX
FSX
TXDATA
CLKR
FSR
RXDATA
SPRS906_MCASP_uc_04
Figure 5-59. McASP1-8 CIOFOI – ASYNC Mode
244
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
SoC IOs
McASP
CLKX
FSX
TXDATA
CLKR
FSR
RXDATA
SPRS906_MCASP_uc_05
Figure 5-60. McASP1-8 CO-FO- – SYNC Mode
McASP
SoC IOs
CLKX
FSX
TXDATA
CLKR
FSR
RXDATA
SPRS906_MCASP_uc_06
Figure 5-61. McASP1-8 CI-FO- – SYNC Mode
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
245
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
McASP
www.ti.com
SoC IOs
CLKX
FSX
TXDATA
CLKR
FSR
RXDATA
SPRS906_MCASP_uc_07
Figure 5-62. McASP1-8 CI-FI- – SYNC Mode
McASP
SoC IOs
CLKX
FSX
TXDATA
CLKR
FSR
RXDATA
SPRS906_MCASP_uc_08
Figure 5-63. McASP1-8 CO-FI- – SYNC Mode
246
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
NOTE
To configure the desired virtual mode the user must set MODESELECT bit and
DELAYMODE bitfield for each corresponding pad control register.
The pad control registers are presented in Table 4-31 and described in Device TRM, Control
Module Chapter.
CAUTION
The I/O Timings provided in this section are valid only for some McASP usage
modes when the corresponding Virtual I/O Timings or Manual I/O Timings are
configured as described in the tables found in this section.
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
247
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Virtual IO Timings Modes must be used to ensure some IO timings for McASP1. See Table 5-30 Modes Summary for a list of IO timings requiring
the use of Virtual IO Timings Modes. See Table 5-86 Virtual Functions Mapping for McASP1 for a definition of the Virtual modes.
Table 5-86 presents the values for DELAYMODE bitfield.
Table 5-86. Virtual Functions Mapping for McASP1
BALL
Delay Mode Value
MUXMODE
MCASP1_VIRTUAL1_SYNC_RX
MCASP1_VIRTUAL2_ASYNC_RX
0
mcasp1_aclkx
15
14
mcasp1_aclkx
H21
gpio6_14
14
13
E17
mcasp1_axr13
15
14
mcasp1_axr13
A15
mcasp1_axr4
14
13
mcasp1_axr4
H24
xref_clk2
14
13
B17
mcasp1_axr9
15
14
mcasp1_axr9
A16
mcasp1_axr7
14
13
mcasp1_axr7
A19
mcasp1_axr12
15
14
mcasp1_axr12
K23
gpio6_16
14
13
mcasp1_axr10
K22
gpio6_15
14
13
mcasp1_axr9
H25
xref_clk3
14
13
A17
mcasp1_axr6
14
13
mcasp1_axr6
B16
mcasp1_axr10
15
14
mcasp1_axr10
D17
mcasp1_fsr
N/A
14
mcasp1_fsr
A18
mcasp1_axr8
15
14
mcasp1_axr8
B18
mcasp1_axr11
15
14
mcasp1_axr11
C14
mcasp1_axr2
14
13
mcasp1_axr2
C17
mcasp1_fsx
15
14
mcasp1_fsx
E16
mcasp1_axr14
15
14
mcasp1_axr14
C16
248
BALL NAME
2
mcasp1_axr8
mcasp1_axr6
mcasp1_axr7
F16
mcasp1_axr15
15
14
mcasp1_axr15
B14
mcasp1_axr1
15
14
mcasp1_axr1
D16
mcasp1_aclkr
N/A
14
mcasp1_aclkr
A14
mcasp1_axr5
14
13
mcasp1_axr5
J24
xref_clk1
15
14
D14
mcasp1_axr0
15
14
mcasp1_axr0
B15
mcasp1_axr3
14
13
mcasp1_axr3
J25
xref_clk0
15
14
Specifications
1
mcasp1_axr5
mcasp1_axr4
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Virtual IO Timings Modes must be used to ensure some IO timings for McASP2. See Table 5-30 Modes Summary for a list of IO timings requiring
the use of Virtual IO Timings Modes. See Table 5-87 Virtual Functions Mapping for McASP2 for a definition of the Virtual modes.
Table 5-87 presents the values for DELAYMODE bitfield.
Table 5-87. Virtual Functions Mapping for McASP2
BALL
BALL NAME
Delay Mode Value
MUXMODE
MCASP2_VIRTUAL1
_SYNC_RX_80M
MCASP2_VIRTUAL2
_ASYNC_RX
MCASP2_VIRTUAL3
_SYNC_RX
MCASP2_VIRTUAL4
_ASYNC_RX_80M
0
1
2
B22
mcasp3_axr0
15
14
10
9
D20
mcasp2_axr6
14
13
12
11
mcasp2_axr6
mcasp2_axr14
C19
mcasp2_axr5
14
13
12
11
mcasp2_axr5
D19
mcasp2_fsx
15
14
10
9
mcasp2_fsx
H24
xref_clk2
12
11
10
9
B21
mcasp2_axr3
15
14
10
9
A22
mcasp3_aclkx
15
14
10
9
E19
mcasp2_aclkx
15
14
10
9
mcasp2_aclkx
C20
mcasp2_axr7
14
13
12
11
mcasp2_axr7
H25
xref_clk3
12
11
10
9
B23
mcasp3_axr1
15
14
10
8
mcasp2_axr15
A23
mcasp3_fsx
15
14
10
9
mcasp2_axr13
A21
mcasp2_axr2
15
14
10
9
mcasp2_axr2
B20
mcasp2_axr4
14
13
12
11
mcasp2_axr4
J24
xref_clk1
10
9
8
6
B19
mcasp2_axr1
14
13
12
11
mcasp2_axr1
A20
mcasp2_axr0
14
13
12
11
mcasp2_axr0
J25
xref_clk0
10
9
8
6
mcasp2_axr10
mcasp2_axr3
mcasp2_axr12
mcasp2_axr11
mcasp2_axr9
mcasp2_axr8
Virtual IO Timings Modes must be used to ensure some IO timings for McASP3/4/5/6/7/8. See Table 5-30 Modes Summary for a list of IO timings
requiring the use of Virtual IO Timings Modes. See Table 5-88 Virtual Functions Mapping for McASP3/4/5/6/7/8 for a definition of the Virtual
modes.
Table 5-88 presents the values for DELAYMODE bitfield.
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
249
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 5-88. Virtual Functions Mapping for McASP3/4/5/6/7/8
BALL
BALL NAME
Delay Mode Value
MUXMODE
0
1
2
MCASP3_VIRTUAL2_SYNC_RX
B21
mcasp2_axr3
8
A22
mcasp3_aclkx
8
mcasp3_aclkx
mcasp3_axr3
B22
mcasp3_axr0
8
mcasp3_axr0
B23
mcasp3_axr1
6
mcasp3_axr1
A23
mcasp3_fsx
8
mcasp3_fsx
A21
mcasp2_axr2
8
B25
mcasp4_fsx
14
mcasp4_fsx
mcasp4_fsr
C23
mcasp4_aclkx
14
mcasp4_aclkx
mcasp4_aclkr
A24
mcasp4_axr0
14
mcasp4_axr0
D23
mcasp4_axr1
14
mcasp4_axr1
A14
mcasp1_axr5
12
mcasp4_axr3
A15
mcasp1_axr4
12
mcasp4_axr2
AC3
mcasp5_aclkx
14
mcasp5_aclkx
mcasp5_aclkr
U6
mcasp5_fsx
14
mcasp5_fsx
mcasp5_fsr
AC4
mcasp5_axr1
14
mcasp5_axr1
A17
mcasp1_axr6
12
AA5
mcasp5_axr0
14
A16
mcasp1_axr7
12
C14
mcasp1_axr2
12
mcasp6_axr2
B15
mcasp1_axr3
12
mcasp6_axr3
B16
mcasp1_axr10
10
mcasp6_aclkx
B17
mcasp1_axr9
10
mcasp6_axr1
A18
mcasp1_axr8
10
mcasp6_axr0
B18
mcasp1_axr11
10
mcasp6_fsx
mcasp3_aclkr
mcasp3_fsr
mcasp3_axr2
MCASP4_VIRTUAL1_SYNC_RX
MCASP5_VIRTUAL1_SYNC_RX
mcasp5_axr2
mcasp5_axr0
mcasp5_axr3
MCASP6_VIRTUAL1_SYNC_RX
mcasp6_aclkr
mcasp6_fsr
MCASP7_VIRTUAL2_SYNC_RX
250
A19
mcasp1_axr12
10
mcasp7_axr0
F16
mcasp1_axr15
10
mcasp7_fsx
mcasp7_fsr
E16
mcasp1_axr14
10
mcasp7_aclkx
mcasp7_aclkr
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 5-88. Virtual Functions Mapping for McASP3/4/5/6/7/8 (continued)
BALL
BALL NAME
Delay Mode Value
MUXMODE
E17
mcasp1_axr13
10
mcasp7_axr1
D16
mcasp1_aclkr
13
mcasp7_axr2
D17
mcasp1_fsr
13
mcasp7_axr3
0
1
2
MCASP8_VIRTUAL1_SYNC_RX
B20
mcasp2_axr4
10
mcasp8_axr0
C20
mcasp2_axr7
10
mcasp8_fsx
mcasp8_fsr
D20
mcasp2_axr6
10
mcasp8_aclkx
mcasp8_aclkr
C19
mcasp2_axr5
10
mcasp8_axr1
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
251
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
5.10.6.16 USB
SuperSpeed USB DRD Subsystem has four instances in the device providing the following functions:
• USB1: SuperSpeed (SS) USB 3.0 Dual-Role-Device (DRD) subsystem with integrated SS (USB3.0)
PHY and HS/FS (USB2.0) PHY.
• USB2: High-Speed (HS) USB 2.0 Dual-Role-Device (DRD) subsystem with integrated HS/FS PHY.
NOTE
For more information, see the SuperSpeed USB DRD section of the Device TRM.
5.10.6.16.1 USB1 DRD PHY
The USB1 DRD interface supports the following applications:
• USB2.0 High-Speed PHY port (1.8 V and 3.3 V): this asynchronous high-speed interface is compliant
with the USB2.0 PHY standard with an internal transceiver (USB2.0 standard v2.0), for a maximum
data rate of 480 Mbps.
• USB3.0 Super-Speed PHY port (1.8 V): this asynchronous differential super-speed interface is
compliant with the USB3.0 RX/TX PHY standard (USB3.0 standard v1.0) for a maximum data bit rate
of 5Gbps.
5.10.6.16.2 USB2 PHY
The USB2 interface supports the following applications:
• USB2.0 High-Speed PHY port (1.8 V and 3.3 V): this asynchronous high-speed interface is compliant
with the USB2.0 PHY standard with an internal transceiver (USB2.0 standard v2.0), for a maximum
data rate of 480 Mbps.
5.10.6.17 PCIe
The device supports connections to PCIe-compliant devices via the integrated PCIe master/slave bus
interface. The PCIe module is comprised of a dual-mode PCIe core and a SerDes PHY. Each PCIe
subsystem controller has support for PCIe Gen-II mode (5.0 Gbps /lane) and Gen-I mode (2.5 Gbps/lane)
(Single Lane and Flexible dual lane configuration).
The device PCIe supports the following features:
• 16-bit operation @250 MHz on PIPE interface (per 16-bit lane)
• Supports 2 ports × 1-lane or 1 port × 2-lanes configuration
• Single virtual channel (VC0), single traffic class (TC0)
• Single function in end-point mode
• Automatic width and speed negotiation
• Max payload: 128 byte outbound, 256 byte inbound
• Automatic credit management
• ECRC generation and checking
• Configurable BAR filtering
• Legacy interrupt reception (RC) and generation (EP)
• MSI generation and reception
• PCI Express Active State Power Management (ASPM) state L0s and L1 (with exceptions)
• All PCI Device Power Management D-states with the exception of D3cold / L2 state
The PCIe controller on this device conforms to the PCI Express Base 3.0 Specification, revision 1.0 and
the PCI Local Bus Specification, revision 3.0.
252
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
NOTE
For more information, see the PCIe Controller section of the Device TRM.
5.10.6.18 DCAN
The device provides two DCAN interfaces for supporting distributed realtime control with a high level of
security. The DCAN interfaces implement the following features:
• Supports CAN protocol version 2.0 part A, B
• Bit rates up to 1 MBit/s
• 64 message objects
• Individual identifier mask for each message object
• Programmable FIFO mode for message objects
• Programmable loop-back modes for self-test operation
• Suspend mode for debug support
• Software module reset
• Automatic bus on after Bus-Off state by a programmable 32-bit timer
• Direct access to Message RAM during test mode
• CAN Rx/Tx pins are configurable as general-purpose IO pins
• Two interrupt lines (plus additional parity-error interrupts line)
• RAM initialization
• DMA support
NOTE
For more information, see the DCAN section of the Device TRM.
NOTE
The Controller Area Network Interface x (x = 1 to 2) is also referred to as DCANx.
NOTE
Refer to the CAN Specification for calculations necessary to validate timing compliance. Jitter
tolerance calculations must be performed to validate the implementation.
Table 5-89 and Table 5-90 present timing and switching characteristics for DCANx Interface.
Table 5-89. Timing Requirements for DCANx Receive
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
-
f(baud)
Maximum programmable baud rate
-
td(DCANRX)
Delay time, DCANx_RX pin to receive shift register
MIN
NOM
MAX
UNIT
1
Mbps
15
ns
Table 5-90. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for DCANx Transmit
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
-
f(baud)
Maximum programmable baud rate
-
td(DCANTX)
Delay time, Transmit shift register to DCANx_TX pin(1)
MIN
MAX
UNIT
1
Mbps
23
ns
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
253
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
(1) These values do not include rise/fall times of the output buffer.
5.10.6.19 GMAC_SW
The three-port gigabit ethernet switch subsystem (GMAC_SW) provides ethernet packet communication
and can be configured as an ethernet switch. It provides the Gigabit Media Independent Interface (G/MII)
in MII mode, Reduced Gigabit Media Independent Interface (RGMII), Reduced Media Independent
Interface (RMII), and the Management Data Input/Output (MDIO) for physical layer device (PHY)
management.
NOTE
For more information, see the Ethernet Subsystem section of the Device TRM.
NOTE
The Gigabit, Reduced and Media Independent Interface n (n = 0 to 1) are also referred to as
MIIn, RMIIn and RGMIIn.
CAUTION
The I/O timings provided in this section are valid only if signals within a single
IOSET are used. The IOSETs are defined in Table 5-95, Table 5-98, Table 5103 and Table 5-110.
CAUTION
The I/O Timings provided in this section are valid only for some GMAC usage
modes when the corresponding Virtual I/O Timings or Manual I/O Timings are
configured as described in the tables found in this section.
Table 5-91 and Figure 5-64 present timing requirements for MIIn in receive operation.
5.10.6.19.1 GMAC MII Timings
Table 5-91. Timing Requirements for miin_rxclk - MII Operation
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
SPEED
MIN
1
tc(RX_CLK)
Cycle time, miin_rxclk
10 Mbps
400
100 Mbps
40
10 Mbps
140
2
tw(RX_CLKH)
Pulse duration, miin_rxclk high
3
tw(RX_CLKL)
Pulse duration, miin_rxclk low
4
254
tt(RX_CLK)
Transition time, miin_rxclk
Specifications
MAX
UNIT
ns
ns
260
ns
100 Mbps
14
26
ns
10 Mbps
140
260
ns
100 Mbps
14
26
ns
10 Mbps
3
ns
100 Mbps
3
ns
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
4
1
3
2
miin_rxclk
4
SPRS906_TIMING_GMAC_MIIRXCLK_01
Figure 5-64. Clock Timing (GMAC Receive) - MIIn operation
Table 5-92 and Figure 5-65 present timing requirements for MIIn in transmit operation.
Table 5-92. Timing Requirements for miin_txclk - MII Operation
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
SPEED
MIN
1
tc(TX_CLK)
Cycle time, miin_txclk
10 Mbps
400
ns
100 Mbps
40
ns
2
tw(TX_CLKH)
3
Pulse duration, miin_txclk high
tw(TX_CLKL)
4
Pulse duration, miin_txclk low
tt(TX_CLK)
Transition time, miin_txclk
MAX
UNIT
10 Mbps
140
260
ns
100 Mbps
14
26
ns
10 Mbps
140
260
ns
100 Mbps
14
26
ns
10 Mbps
3
ns
100 Mbps
3
ns
4
1
3
2
miin_txclk
4
SPRS906_TIMING_GMAC_MIITXCLK_02
Figure 5-65. Clock Timing (GMAC Transmit) - MIIn operation
Table 5-93 and Figure 5-66 present timing requirements for GMAC MIIn Receive 10/100Mbit/s.
Table 5-93. Timing Requirements for GMAC MIIn Receive 10/100 Mbit/s
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
MIN
MAX
UNIT
tsu(RXD-RX_CLK)
1
tsu(RX_DV-RX_CLK)
Setup time, receive selected signals valid before miin_rxclk
8
ns
Hold time, receive selected signals valid after miin_rxclk
8
ns
tsu(RX_ER-RX_CLK)
th(RX_CLK-RXD)
2
th(RX_CLK-RX_DV)
th(RX_CLK-RX_ER)
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
255
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
1
2
miin_rxclk (Input)
miin_rxd3−miin_rxd0,
miin_rxdv, miin_rxer (Inputs)
SPRS906_TIMING_GMAC_MIIRCV_03
Figure 5-66. GMAC Receive Interface Timing MIIn operation
Table 5-94 and Figure 5-67 present timing requirements for GMAC MIIn Transmit 10/100Mbit/s.
Table 5-94. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for GMAC MIIn Transmit
10/100 Mbits/s
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
MIN
MAX
0
25
UNIT
td(TX_CLK-TXD)
1
td(TX_CLK-TX_EN)
Delay time, miin_txclk to transmit selected signals valid
ns
td(TX_CLK-TX_ER)
1
miin_txclk (input)
miin_txd3 − miin_txd0,
miin_txen, miin_txer (outputs)
SPRS906_TIMING_GMAC_MIITX_04
Figure 5-67. GMAC Transmit Interface Timing MIIn operation
In Table 5-95 are presented the specific groupings of signals (IOSET) for use with GMAC MII signals.
Table 5-95. GMAC MII IOSETs
SIGNALS
IOSET5
BALL
IOSET6
MUX
BALL
MUX
GMAC MII1
256
mii1_txd3
E11
8
mii1_txd2
A13
8
mii1_txd1
A12
8
mii1_txd0
B12
8
mii1_rxd3
B10
8
mii1_rxd2
A10
8
mii1_rxd1
F10
8
mii1_rxd0
E10
8
mii1_col
E13
8
mii1_rxer
B13
8
mii1_txer
F11
8
mii1_txen
D13
8
mii1_crs
C13
8
mii1_rxclk
B11
8
mii1_txclk
C11
8
mii1_rxdv
D11
8
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 5-95. GMAC MII IOSETs (continued)
SIGNALS
IOSET5
IOSET6
BALL
MUX
BALL
MUX
mii0_txd3
P2
3
mii0_txd2
N1
3
mii0_txd1
N3
3
mii0_txd0
N4
3
mii0_rxd3
T4
3
mii0_rxd2
T5
3
mii0_rxd1
R2
3
mii0_rxd0
R1
3
mii0_txclk
N2
3
GMAC MII0
mii0_txer
L6
3
mii0_rxer
P3
3
mii0_rxdv
N5
3
mii0_crs
P4
3
mii0_col
L5
3
mii0_rxclk
N6
3
mii0_txen
P1
3
5.10.6.19.2 GMAC MDIO Interface Timings
CAUTION
The I/O Timings provided in this section are valid only for some GMAC usage
modes when the corresponding Virtual I/O Timings or Manual I/O Timings are
configured as described in the tables found in this section.
Table 5-96, Table 5-96 and Figure 5-68 present timing requirements for MDIO.
Table 5-96. Timing Requirements for MDIO Input
No
PARAMETER
MDIO1
tc(MDC)
MDIO2
DESCRIPTION
MIN
MAX
UNIT
Cycle time, MDC
400
ns
tw(MDCH)
Pulse Duration, MDC High
160
ns
MDIO3
tw(MDCL)
Pulse Duration, MDC Low
160
ns
MDIO4
tsu(MDIO-MDC)
Setup time, MDIO valid before MDC High
90
ns
MDIO5
th(MDIO_MDC)
Hold time, MDIO valid from MDC High
0
ns
Table 5-97. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for MDIO Output
NO
PARAMETER
MDIO6
tt(MDC)
MDIO7
td(MDC-MDIO)
DESCRIPTION
MIN
Transition time, MDC
Delay time, MDC low to MDIO valid
-150
MAX
UNIT
5
ns
150
ns
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
257
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
1
MDIO2
MDIO3
MDCLK
MDIO6
MDIO6
MDIO4
MDIO5
MDIO
(input)
MDIO7
MDIO
(output)
Figure 5-68. GMAC MDIO diagrams
In Table 5-98 are presented the specific groupings of signals (IOSET) for use with GMAC MDIO signals.
Table 5-98. GMAC MDIO IOSETs
SIGNALS
IOSET7
IOSET8
IOSET9
IOSET10
BALL
MUX
BALL
MUX
BALL
MUX
BALL
MUX
mdio_d
C10
3
L6
0
Y6
1
E25
5
mdio_mclk
D10
3
L5
0
Y5
1
E24
5
5.10.6.19.3 GMAC RMII Timings
The main reference clock REF_CLK (RMII_50MHZ_CLK) of RMII interface is internally supplied from
PRCM. The source of this clock could be either externally sourced from the RMII_MHZ_50_CLK pin of the
device or internally generated from DPLL_GMAC output clock GMAC_RMII_HS_CLK. Please see the
PRCM chapter of the Device TRM for full details about RMII reference clock.
CAUTION
The I/O Timings provided in this section are valid only for some GMAC usage
modes when the corresponding Virtual I/O Timings or Manual I/O Timings are
configured as described in the tables found in this section.
Table 5-99, Table 5-100 and Figure 5-69 present timing requirements for GMAC RMIIn Receive.
Table 5-99. Timing Requirements for GMAC REF_CLK - RMII Operation
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
MIN
MAX
Cycle time, REF_CLK
RMII2 tw(REF_CLKH)
Pulse duration, REF_CLK high
7
13
ns
RMII3 tw(REF_CLKL)
Pulse duration, REF_CLK low
7
13
ns
RMII4 ttt(REF_CLK)
Transistion time, REF_CLK
3
ns
258
Specifications
20
UNIT
RMII1 tc(REF_CLK)
ns
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 5-100. Timing Requirements for GMAC RMIIn Receive
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
RMII5
tsu(RXD-REF_CLK)
Setup time, receive selected signals valid before REF_CLK
MIN
4
MAX
UNIT
ns
Hold time, receive selected signals valid after REF_CLK
2
ns
tsu(CRS_DV-REF_CLK)
tsu(RX_ER-REF_CLK)
RMII6
th(REF_CLK-RXD)
th(REF_CLK-CRS_DV)
th(REF_CLK-RX_ER)
RMII1
RMII3
RMII4
RMII2
RMII6
RMII5
REF_CLK (PRCM)
rmiin_rxd1−rmiin_rxd0,
rmiin_crs, rmin_rxer (inputs)
SPRS906_TIMING_GMAC_RGMIITX_09
Figure 5-69. GMAC Receive Interface Timing RMIIn operation
Table 5-101, Table 5-101 and Figure 5-70 present switching characteristics for GMAC RMIIn Transmit
10/100Mbit/s.
Table 5-101. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for GMAC REF_CLK RMII Operation
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
MIN
MAX
20
UNIT
RMII7
tc(REF_CLK)
Cycle time, REF_CLK
ns
RMII8
tw(REF_CLKH)
Pulse duration, REF_CLK high
7
13
ns
RMII9
tw(REF_CLKL)
Pulse duration, REF_CLK low
7
13
ns
RMII10
tt(REF_CLK)
Transistion time, REF_CLK
3
ns
Table 5-102. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for GMAC RMIIn
Transmit 10/100 Mbits/s
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
td(REF_CLK-TXD)
RMII11
tdd(REF_CLK-TXEN)
td(REF_CLK-TXD)
RMIIn
MIN
MAX
UNIT
RMII0
2
13.5
ns
RMII1
2
13.8
ns
Delay time, REF_CLK high to selected transmit signals
valid
tdd(REF_CLK-TXEN)
RMII7
RMII8
RMII11
RMII9
RMII10
REF_CLK (PRCM)
rmiin_txd1−rmiin_txd0,
rmiin_txen (Outputs)
SPRS906_TIMING_GMAC_RMIITX_07
Figure 5-70. GMAC Transmit Interface Timing RMIIn Operation
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
259
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
In Table 5-103 are presented the specific groupings of signals (IOSET) for use with GMAC RMII signals.
Table 5-103. GMAC RMII IOSETs
SIGNALS
IOSET1
BALL
IOSET2
MUX
BALL
MUX
RMII_MHZ_50_CLK
P5
0
rmii0_txd1
N3
1
GMAC RMII1
RMII_MHZ_50_CLK
P5
0
rmii1_txd1
P2
2
rmii1_txd0
N1
2
rmii1_rxd1
T4
2
rmii1_rxd0
T5
2
rmii1_rxer
N6
2
rmii1_txen
N2
2
rmii1_crs
N5
2
GMAC RMII0
rmii0_txd0
N4
1
rmii0_rxd1
R2
1
rmii0_rxd0
R1
1
rmii0_txen
P1
1
rmii0_rxer
P3
1
rmii0_crs
P4
1
Manual IO Timings Modes must be used to ensure some IO timings for GMAC. See Table 5-30 Modes
Summary for a list of IO timings requiring the use of Manual IO Timings Modes. See Table 5-104 Manual
Functions Mapping for GMAC RMII0 for a definition of the Manual modes.
Table 5-104 lists the A_DELAY and G_DELAY values needed to calculate the correct values to be set in
the CFG_x registers.
Table 5-104. Manual Functions Mapping for GMAC RMII0
BALL
BALL NAME
GMAC_RMII0_MANUAL1
A_DELAY
(ps)
CFG REGISTER
G_DELAY
(ps)
MUXMODE
0
1
P5
RMII_MHZ_50_CLK
0
0
CFG_RMII_MHZ_50_CLK_IN
R1
rgmii0_txd0
2444
804
CFG_RGMII0_TXD0_IN
RMII_MHZ_50_CLK
rmii0_rxd0
R2
rgmii0_txd1
2453
981
CFG_RGMII0_TXD1_IN
rmii0_rxd1
P3
rgmii0_txd2
2356
847
CFG_RGMII0_TXD2_IN
rmii0_rxer
P4
rgmii0_txd3
2415
993
CFG_RGMII0_TXD3_IN
rmii0_crs
Manual IO Timings Modes must be used to ensure some IO timings for GMAC. See Table 5-30 Modes
Summary for a list of IO timings requiring the use of Manual IO Timings Modes. See Table 5-105 Manual
Functions Mapping for GMAC RMII1 for a definition of the Manual modes.
Table 5-105 list the A_DELAY and G_DELAY values needed to calculate the correct values to be set in
the CFG_x registers.
260
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 5-105. Manual Functions Mapping for GMAC RMII1
BALL
BALL NAME
GMAC_RMII1_MANUAL1
A_DELAY
(ps)
G_DELAY
(ps)
CFG REGISTER
MUXMODE
0
2
P5
RMII_MHZ_50_CLK
0
0
CFG_RMII_MHZ_50_CLK_IN
RMII_MHZ_50_CLK
T5
rgmii0_txctl
2450
909
CFG_RGMII0_TXCTL_IN
rmii1_rxd0
T4
rgmii0_txc
2327
926
CFG_RGMII0_TXC_IN
rmii1_rxd1
N6
uart3_txd
2553
443
CFG_UART3_TXD_IN
rmii1_rxer
N5
uart3_rxd
1943
1110
CFG_UART3_RXD_IN
rmii1_crs
5.10.6.19.4 GMAC RGMII Timings
CAUTION
The I/O Timings provided in this section are valid only for some GMAC usage
modes when the corresponding Virtual I/O Timings or Manual I/O Timings are
configured as described in the tables found in this section.
Table 5-106, Table 5-107 and Figure 5-71 present timing requirements for receive RGMIIn operation.
Table 5-106. Timing Requirements for rgmiin_rxc - RGMIIn Operation
NO.
1
2
3
4
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
SPEED
MIN
MAX
UNIT
tc(RXC)
Cycle time, rgmiin_rxc
10 Mbps
360
440
ns
tw(RXCH)
tw(RXCL)
tt(RXC)
100 Mbps
36
44
ns
1000 Mbps
7.2
8.8
ns
10 Mbps
160
240
ns
Pulse duration, rgmiin_rxc high
100 Mbps
16
24
ns
1000 Mbps
3.6
4.4
ns
10 Mbps
160
240
ns
Pulse duration, rgmiin_rxc low
100 Mbps
16
24
ns
1000 Mbps
3.6
4.4
ns
10 Mbps
0.75
ns
100 Mbps
0.75
ns
1000 Mbps
0.75
ns
Transition time, rgmiin_rxc
Table 5-107. Timing Requirements for GMAC RGMIIn Input Receive for 10/100/1000 Mbps
NO.
MIN
(1)
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
MODE
5
tsu(RXD-RXCH)
Setup time, receive selected signals valid before
rgmiin_rxc high/low
RGMII0/1
1
MAX
ns
6
th(RXCH-RXD)
Hold time, receive selected signals valid after
rgmiin_rxc high/low
RGMII0/1
1
ns
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
UNIT
261
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
(1) For RGMII, receive selected signals include: rgmiin_rxd[3:0] and rgmiin_rxctl.
1
4
2
rgmiin_rxc
4
3
(A)
5
1st Half-byte
6
2nd Half-byte
rgmiin_rxd[3:0]
rgmiin_rxctl
(B)
(B)
RGRXD[3:0]
RGRXD[7:4]
RXDV
RXERR
SPRS906_TIMING_GMAC_RGMIIRX_08
A.
B.
rgmiin_rxc must be externally delayed relative to the data and control pins.
Data and control information is received using both edges of the clocks. rgmiin_rxd[3:0] carries data bits 3-0 on the
rising edge of rgmiin_rxc and data bits 7-4 on the falling edge ofrgmiin_rxc. Similarly, rgmiin_rxctl carries RXDV on
rising edge of rgmiin_rxc and RXERR on falling edge of rgmiin_rxc.
Figure 5-71. GMAC Receive Interface Timing, RGMIIn operation
Table 5-108, Table 5-109 and Figure 5-72 present switching characteristics for transmit - RGMIIn for
10/100/1000Mbit/s.
Table 5-108. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for rgmiin_txctl RGMIIn Operation for 10/100/1000 Mbit/s
NO.
1
2
3
4
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
SPEED
MIN
MAX
UNIT
tc(TXC)
Cycle time, rgmiin_txc
10 Mbps
360
440
ns
tw(TXCH)
tw(TXCL)
tt(TXC)
Pulse duration, rgmiin_txc high
Pulse duration, rgmiin_txc low
Transition time, rgmiin_txc
100 Mbps
36
44
ns
1000 Mbps
7.2
8.8
ns
10 Mbps
160
240
ns
100 Mbps
16
24
ns
1000 Mbps
3.6
4.4
ns
10 Mbps
160
240
ns
100 Mbps
16
24
ns
1000 Mbps
3.6
4.4
ns
10 Mbps
0.75
ns
100 Mbps
0.75
ns
1000 Mbps
0.75
ns
Table 5-109. Switching Characteristics for GMAC RGMIIn Output Transmit for 10/100/1000 Mbps
NO.
5
262
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
tosu(TXD-TXC)
Output Setup time, transmit selected signals valid to
rgmiin_txc high/low
MODE
MIN
RGMII0, Internal Delay
Enabled, 1000 Mbps
1.05
ns
RGMII0, Internal Delay
Enabled, 10/100 Mbps
1.2
ns
RGMII1, Internal Delay
Enabled, 1000 Mbps
1.05
ns
RGMII1, Internal Delay
Enabled, 10/100 Mbps
1.2
ns
Specifications
(2)
(3)
MAX
(1)
UNIT
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 5-109. Switching Characteristics for GMAC RGMIIn Output Transmit for 10/100/1000 Mbps
(1)
(continued)
NO.
6
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
toh(TXC-TXD)
Output Hold time, transmit selected signals valid after
rgmiin_txc high/low
MODE
MIN
RGMII0, Internal Delay
Enabled, 1000 Mbps
1.05
MAX
UNIT
ns
RGMII0, Internal Delay
Enabled, 10/100 Mbps
1.2
ns
RGMII1, Internal Delay
Enabled, 1000 Mbps
1.05
ns
RGMII1, Internal Delay
Enabled, 10/100 Mbps
1.2
ns
(2)
(3)
(1) For RGMII, transmit selected signals include: rgmiin_txd[3:0] and rgmiin_txctl.
(2) RGMII0 requires that the 4 data pins rgmii0_txd[3:0] and rgmii0_txctl have their board propagation delays matched within 50pS of
rgmii0_txc.
(3) RGMII1 requires that the 4 data pins rgmii1_txd[3:0] and rgmii1_txctl have their board propagation delays matched within 50pS of
rgmii1_txc.
1
4
2
3
4
(A)
rgmiin_txc
[internal delay enabled]
5
(B)
1st Half-byte
rgmiin_txd[3:0]
2nd Half-byte
6
(B)
rgmiin_txctl
TXEN
TXERR
SPRS906_TIMING_GMAC_RGMIITX_09
A.
B.
TXC is delayed internally before being driven to the rgmiin_txc pin. This internal delay is always enabled.
Data and control information is transmitted using both edges of the clocks. rgmiin_txd[3:0] carries data bits 3-0 on the
rising edge of rgmiin_txc and data bits 7-4 on the falling edge of rgmiin_txc. Similarly, rgmiin_txctl carries TXEN on
rising edge of rgmiin_txc and TXERR of falling edge of rgmiin_txc.
Figure 5-72. GMAC Transmit Interface Timing RGMIIn operation
In Table 5-110 are presented the specific groupings of signals (IOSET) for use with GMAC RGMII signals.
Table 5-110. GMAC RGMII IOSETs
SIGNALS
IOSET3
BALL
IOSET4
MUX
BALL
MUX
GMAC RGMII1
rgmii1_txd3
C11
3
rgmii1_txd2
B12
3
rgmii1_txd1
A12
3
rgmii1_txd0
A13
3
rgmii1_rxd3
B13
3
rgmii1_rxd2
E13
3
rgmii1_rxd1
C13
3
rgmii1_rxd0
D13
3
rgmii1_rxctl
F11
3
rgmii1_txc
B11
3
rgmii1_txctl
D11
3
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
263
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 5-110. GMAC RGMII IOSETs (continued)
SIGNALS
IOSET3
BALL
IOSET4
BALL
MUX
P4
0
rgmii0_txd2
P3
0
rgmii0_txd1
R2
0
rgmii0_txd0
R1
0
rgmii0_rxd3
N1
0
rgmii0_rxd2
P1
0
rgmii0_rxd1
N3
0
rgmii0_rxd0
N4
0
rgmii1_rxc
E11
MUX
3
GMAC RGMII0
rgmii0_txd3
rgmii0_txc
T4
0
rgmii0_rxctl
P2
0
rgmii0_rxc
N2
0
rgmii0_txctl
T5
0
NOTE
To configure the desired Manual IO Timing Mode the user must follow the steps described in
section "Manual IO Timing Modes" of the Device TRM.
The associated registers to configure are listed in the CFG REGISTER column. For more
information please see the Control Module Chapter in the Device TRM.
264
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Manual IO Timings Modes must be used to ensure some IO timings for GMAC. See Table 5-30 Modes Summary for a list of IO timings requiring
the use of Manual IO Timings Modes. See Table 5-111 Manual Functions Mapping for GMAC RGMII0 for a definition of the Manual modes.
Table 5-111 lists the A_DELAY and G_DELAY values needed to calculate the correct values to be set in the CFG_x registers.
Table 5-111. Manual Functions Mapping for GMAC RGMII0
BALL
BALL NAME
GMAC_RGMII0_MANUAL1
CFG REGISTER
MUXMODE
A_DELAY (ps)
G_DELAY (ps)
N2
rgmii0_rxc
413
0
CFG_RGMII0_RXC_IN
rgmii0_rxc
P2
rgmii0_rxctl
27
2296
CFG_RGMII0_RXCTL_IN
rgmii0_rxctl
N4
N3
rgmii0_rxd0
3
1721
CFG_RGMII0_RXD0_IN
rgmii0_rxd0
rgmii0_rxd1
134
1786
CFG_RGMII0_RXD1_IN
rgmii0_rxd1
P1
rgmii0_rxd2
40
1966
CFG_RGMII0_RXD2_IN
rgmii0_rxd2
N1
rgmii0_rxd3
0
2057
CFG_RGMII0_RXD3_IN
rgmii0_rxd3
T4
rgmii0_txc
0
60
CFG_RGMII0_TXC_OUT
rgmii0_txc
T5
rgmii0_txctl
0
60
CFG_RGMII0_TXCTL_OUT
rgmii0_txctl
R1
rgmii0_txd0
0
60
CFG_RGMII0_TXD0_OUT
rgmii0_txd0
R2
rgmii0_txd1
0
0
CFG_RGMII0_TXD1_OUT
rgmii0_txd1
P3
rgmii0_txd2
0
60
CFG_RGMII0_TXD2_OUT
rgmii0_txd2
P4
rgmii0_txd3
0
120
CFG_RGMII0_TXD3_OUT
rgmii0_txd3
0
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
265
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Manual IO Timings Modes must be used to ensure some IO timings for GMAC. See Table 5-30 Modes Summary for a list of IO timings requiring
the use of Manual IO Timings Modes. See Table 5-112 Manual Functions Mapping for GMAC RGMII1 for a definition of the Manual modes.
Table 5-112 lists the A_DELAY and G_DELAY values needed to calculate the correct values to be set in the CFG_x registers.
Table 5-112. Manual Functions Mapping for GMAC RGMII1
BALL
BALL NAME
A_DELAY (ps)
G_DELAY (ps)
E11
vin2a_d18
530
F11
vin2a_d19
B13
E13
266
GMAC_RGMII1_MANUAL1
CFG REGISTER
MUXMODE
0
CFG_VIN2A_D18_IN
rgmii1_rxc
71
1099
CFG_VIN2A_D19_IN
rgmii1_rxctl
vin2a_d20
142
1337
CFG_VIN2A_D20_IN
rgmii1_rxd3
vin2a_d21
114
1517
CFG_VIN2A_D21_IN
rgmii1_rxd2
C13
vin2a_d22
171
1331
CFG_VIN2A_D22_IN
rgmii1_rxd1
D13
vin2a_d23
0
1328
CFG_VIN2A_D23_IN
rgmii1_rxd0
3
B11
vin2a_d12
0
0
CFG_VIN2A_D12_OUT
rgmii1_txc
D11
vin2a_d13
170
0
CFG_VIN2A_D13_OUT
rgmii1_txctl
C11
vin2a_d14
150
0
CFG_VIN2A_D14_OUT
rgmii1_txd3
B12
vin2a_d15
0
0
CFG_VIN2A_D15_OUT
rgmii1_txd2
A12
vin2a_d16
60
0
CFG_VIN2A_D16_OUT
rgmii1_txd1
A13
vin2a_d17
60
0
CFG_VIN2A_D17_OUT
rgmii1_txd0
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
5.10.6.20 eMMC/SD/SDIO
The Device includes the following external memory interfaces 4 MultiMedia Card/Secure Digital/Secure
Digital Input Output Interface (MMC/SD/SDIO)
NOTE
The eMMC/SD/SDIOi (i = 1 to 4) controller is also referred to as MMCi.
5.10.6.20.1 MMC1—SD Card Interface
MMC1 interface is compliant with the SD Standard v3.01 and it supports the following SD Card
applications:
• Default speed, 4-bit data, SDR, half-cycle
• High speed, 4-bit data, SDR, half-cycle
• SDR12, 4-bit data, half-cycle
• SDR25, 4-bit data, half-cycle
• UHS-I SDR50, 4-bit data, half-cycle
• UHS-I SDR104, 4-bit data, half-cycle
• UHS-I DDR50, 4-bit data
NOTE
For more information, see the eMMC/SD/SDIO chapter of the Device TRM.
5.10.6.20.1.1 Default speed, 4-bit data, SDR, half-cycle
Table 5-113 and Table 5-114 present Timing requirements and Switching characteristics for MMC1 Default Speed in receiver and transmitter mode (see Figure 5-73 and Figure 5-74).
Table 5-113. Timing Requirements for MMC1 - SD Card Default Speed Mode
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
DSSD5
tsu(cmdV-clkH)
Setup time, mmc1_cmd valid before mmc1_clk rising clock edge
DSSD6
th(clkH-cmdV)
Hold time, mmc1_cmd valid after mmc1_clk rising clock edge
DSSD7
tsu(dV-clkH)
Setup time, mmc1_dat[3:0] valid before mmc1_clk rising clock edge
DSSD8
th(clkH-dV)
Hold time, mmc1_dat[3:0] valid after mmc1_clk rising clock edge
MIN
MAX
UNIT
5.11
ns
20.46
ns
5.11
ns
20.46
ns
Table 5-114. Switching Characteristics for MMC1 - SD Card Default Speed Mode
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
MIN
MAX
UNIT
DSSD0
fop(clk)
Operating frequency, mmc1_clk
DSSD1
tw(clkH)
Pulse duration, mmc1_clk high
0.5 × P0.185 (1)
24
MHz
ns
DSSD2
tw(clkL)
Pulse duration, mmc1_clk low
0.5 × P0.185 (1)
ns
DSSD3
td(clkL-cmdV)
Delay time, mmc1_clk falling clock edge to mmc1_cmd transition
-14.93
14.93
ns
DSSD4
td(clkL-dV)
Delay time, mmc1_clk falling clock edge to mmc1_dat[3:0] transition
-14.93
14.93
ns
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
267
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
(1) P = output mmc1_clk period in ns
DSSD2
DSSD1
DSSD0
mmc1_clk
DSSD6
DSSD5
mmc1_cmd
DSSD8
DSSD7
mmc1_dat[3:0]
SPRS906_TIMING_MMC1_01
Figure 5-73. MMC/SD/SDIO in - Default Speed - Receiver Mode
DSSD2
DSSD1
DSSD0
mmc1_clk
DSSD3
mmc1_cmd
DSSD4
mmc1_dat[3:0]
SPRS906_TIMING_MMC1_02
Figure 5-74. MMC/SD/SDIO in - Default Speed - Transmitter Mode
5.10.6.20.1.2 High speed, 4-bit data, SDR, half-cycle
Table 5-115 and Table 5-116 present Timing requirements and Switching characteristics for MMC1 - High
Speed in receiver and transmitter mode (see Figure 5-75 and Figure 5-76).
Table 5-115. Timing Requirements for MMC1 - SD Card High Speed
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
MIN
MAX
UNIT
HSSD3
tsu(cmdV-clkH)
Setup time, mmc1_cmd valid before mmc1_clk rising clock edge
5.3
ns
HSSD4
th(clkH-cmdV)
Hold time, mmc1_cmd valid after mmc1_clk rising clock edge
2.6
ns
HSSD7
tsu(dV-clkH)
Setup time, mmc1_dat[3:0] valid before mmc1_clk rising clock edge
5.3
ns
HSSD8
th(clkH-dV)
Hold time, mmc1_dat[3:0] valid after mmc1_clk rising clock edge
2.6
ns
Table 5-116. Switching Characteristics for MMC1 - SD Card High Speed
NO.
HSSD1
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
fop(clk)
Operating frequency, mmc1_clk
MIN
MAX
UNIT
48
MHz
HSSD2H tw(clkH)
Pulse duration, mmc1_clk high
0.5 × P0.185 (1)
ns
HSSD2L tw(clkL)
Pulse duration, mmc1_clk low
0.5 × P0.185 (1)
ns
HSSD5
td(clkL-cmdV)
Delay time, mmc1_clk falling clock edge to mmc1_cmd transition
-7.6
3.6
ns
HSSD6
td(clkL-dV)
Delay time, mmc1_clk falling clock edge to mmc1_dat[3:0] transition
-7.6
3.6
ns
268
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
(1) P = output mmc1_clk period in ns
HSSD1
HSSD2H
HSSD2L
mmc1_clk
HSSD4
HSSD3
mmc1_cmd
HSSD7
HSSD8
mmc1_dat[3:0]
SPRS906_TIMING_MMC1_03
Figure 5-75. MMC/SD/SDIO in - High Speed - Receiver Mode
HSSD1
HSSD2H
HSSD2L
mmc1_clk
HSSD5
HSSD5
mmc1_cmd
HSSD6
HSSD6
mmc1_dat[3:0]
SPRS906_TIMING_MMC1_04
Figure 5-76. MMC/SD/SDIO in - High Speed - Transmitter Mode
5.10.6.20.1.3 SDR12, 4-bit data, half-cycle
Table 5-117 and Table 5-118 present Timing requirements and Switching characteristics for MMC1 SDR12 in receiver and transmitter mode (see Figure 5-77 and Figure 5-78).
Table 5-117. Timing Requirements for MMC1 - SD Card SDR12 Mode
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
MODE
SDR12 tsu(cmdV-clkH)
5
Setup time, mmc1_cmd valid before mmc1_clk rising
clock edge
SDR12 th(clkH-cmdV)
6
Hold time, mmc1_cmd valid after mmc1_clk rising
clock edge
SDR12 tsu(dV-clkH)
7
Setup time, mmc1_dat[3:0] valid before mmc1_clk
rising clock edge
SDR12 th(clkH-dV)
8
Hold time, mmc1_dat[3:0] valid after mmc1_clk rising
clock edge
MIN
MAX
UNIT
25.99
ns
Pad Loopback Clock
1.6
ns
Internal Loopback Clock
1.6
ns
25.99
ns
Pad Loopback Clock
1.6
ns
Internal Loopback Clock
1.6
ns
Table 5-118. Switching Characteristics for MMC1 - SD Card SDR12 Mode
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
SDR120
NO.
fop(clk)
Operating frequency, mmc1_clk
MIN
MAX
UNIT
24
MHz
SDR121
tw(clkH)
Pulse duration, mmc1_clk high
0.5 × P0.185 (1)
ns
SDR122
tw(clkL)
Pulse duration, mmc1_clk low
0.5 × P0.185(1)
ns
SDR123
td(clkL-cmdV)
Delay time, mmc1_clk falling clock edge to mmc1_cmd transition
-19.13
16.93
ns
SDR124
td(clkL-dV)
Delay time, mmc1_clk falling clock edge to mmc1_dat[3:0] transition
-19.13
16.93
ns
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
269
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
(1) P = output mmc1_clk period in ns
SDR122
SDR121
SDR120
mmc1_clk
SDR126
SDR125
mmc1_cmd
SDR128
SDR127
mmc1_dat[3:0]
SPRS906_TIMING_MMC1_05
Figure 5-77. MMC/SD/SDIO in - High Speed SDR12 - Receiver Mode
SDR122
SDR121
SDR120
mmc1_clk
SDR123
mmc1_cmd
SDR124
mmc1_dat[3:0]
SPRS906_TIMING_MMC1_06
Figure 5-78. MMC/SD/SDIO in - High Speed SDR12 - Transmitter Mode
5.10.6.20.1.4 SDR25, 4-bit data, half-cycle
Table 5-119 and Table 5-120 present Timing requirements and Switching characteristics for MMC1 SDR25 in receiver and transmitter mode (see Figure 5-79 and Figure 5-80).
Table 5-119. Timing Requirements for MMC1 - SD Card SDR25 Mode
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
MODE
MIN
MAX
UNIT
SDR25 tsu(cmdV-clkH)
3
Setup time, mmc1_cmd valid before mmc1_clk rising
clock edge
5.3
ns
SDR25 th(clkH-cmdV)
4
Hold time, mmc1_cmd valid after mmc1_clk rising
clock edge
1.6
ns
SDR25 tsu(dV-clkH)
7
Setup time, mmc1_dat[3:0] valid before mmc1_clk
rising clock edge
5.3
ns
SDR25 th(clkH-dV)
8
Hold time, mmc1_dat[3:0] valid after mmc1_clk rising
clock edge
Pad Loopback Clock
1.6
ns
Internal Loopback Clock
1.6
ns
Table 5-120. Switching Characteristics for MMC1 - SD Card SDR25 Mode
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
SDR251
NO.
fop(clk)
Operating frequency, mmc1_clk
SDR252
H
tw(clkH)
Pulse duration, mmc1_clk high
0.5 × P0.185 (1)
ns
SDR252L tw(clkL)
Pulse duration, mmc1_clk low
0.5 × P0.185 (1)
ns
SDR255
Delay time, mmc1_clk falling clock edge to mmc1_cmd transition
270
td(clkL-cmdV)
Specifications
MIN
-8.8
MAX
UNIT
48
MHz
6.6
ns
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 5-120. Switching Characteristics for MMC1 - SD Card SDR25 Mode (continued)
NO.
SDR256
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
MIN
MAX
td(clkL-dV)
Delay time, mmc1_clk falling clock edge to mmc1_dat[3:0] transition
-8.8
6.6
UNIT
ns
(1) P = output mmc1_clk period in ns
SDR251
SDR252L
SDR252H
mmc1_clk
SDR253
SDR254
mmc1_cmd
SDR257
SDR258
mmc1_dat[3:0]
SPRS906_TIMING_MMC1_07
Figure 5-79. MMC/SD/SDIO in - High Speed SDR25 - Receiver Mode
SDR251
SDR252H
SDR252L
mmc1_clk
HSSDR255
SDR255
mmc1_cmd
SDR256
SDR256
mmc1_dat[3:0]
SPRS906_TIMING_MMC1_08
Figure 5-80. MMC/SD/SDIO in - High Speed SDR25 - Transmitter Mode
5.10.6.20.1.5 UHS-I SDR50, 4-bit data, half-cycle
Table 5-121 and Table 5-122 present Timing requirements and Switching characteristics for MMC1 SDR50 in receiver and transmitter mode (see Figure 5-81 and Figure 5-82).
Table 5-121. Timing Requirements for MMC1 - SD Card SDR50 Mode
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
MODE
SDR50 tsu(cmdV-clkH)
3
Setup time, mmc1_cmd valid before mmc1_clk rising
clock edge
SDR50 th(clkH-cmdV)
4
MIN
MAX
UNIT
1.48
ns
Hold time, mmc1_cmd valid after mmc1_clk rising
clock edge
1.7
ns
SDR50 tsu(dV-clkH)
7
Setup time, mmc1_dat[3:0] valid before mmc1_clk
rising clock edge
1.48
ns
SDR50 th(clkH-dV)
8
Hold time, mmc1_dat[3:0] valid after mmc1_clk rising
clock edge
Pad Loopback Clock
1.7
ns
Internal Loopback Clock
1.6
ns
Table 5-122. Switching Characteristics for MMC1 - SD Card SDR50 Mode
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
MIN
MAX
SDR501
fop(clk)
Operating frequency, mmc1_clk
SDR502
H
tw(clkH)
Pulse duration, mmc1_clk high
0.5 × P0.185 (1)
ns
SDR502L tw(clkL)
Pulse duration, mmc1_clk low
0.5 × P0.185 (1)
ns
SDR505
td(clkL-cmdV)
Delay time, mmc1_clk falling clock edge to mmc1_cmd transition
SDR506
td(clkL-dV)
Delay time, mmc1_clk falling clock edge to mmc1_dat[3:0] transition
96
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
MHz
-8.8
6.6
ns
-3.66
1.46
ns
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
UNIT
271
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
(1) P = output mmc1_clk period in ns
SDR501
SDR502L
SDR502H
mmc1_clk
SDR503
SDR504
mmc1_cmd
SDR507
SDR508
mmc1_dat[3:0]
SPRS906_TIMING_MMC1_09
Figure 5-81. MMC/SD/SDIO in - High Speed SDR50 - Receiver Mode
SDR501
SDR502H
SDR502L
mmc1_clk
SDR505
SDR505
mmc1_cmd
SDR506
SDR506
mmc1_dat[3:0]
SPRS906_TIMING_MMC1_10
Figure 5-82. MMC/SD/SDIO in - High Speed SDR50 - Transmitter Mode
5.10.6.20.1.6 UHS-I SDR104, 4-bit data, half-cycle
Table 5-123 presents Timing requirements and Switching characteristics for MMC1 - SDR104 in receiver
and transmitter mode (see Figure 5-83 and Figure 5-84).
Table 5-123. Switching Characteristics for MMC1 - SD Card SDR104 Mode
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
MIN
MAX
UNIT
192
MHz
SDR1041 fop(clk)
Operating frequency, mmc1_clk
SDR1042 tw(clkH)
H
Pulse duration, mmc1_clk high
0.5 × P0.185 (1)
ns
SDR1042 tw(clkL)
L
Pulse duration, mmc1_clk low
0.5 × P0.185 (1)
ns
SDR1045 td(clkL-cmdV)
Delay time, mmc1_clk falling clock edge to mmc1_cmd transition
-1.09
0.49
ns
SDR1046 td(clkL-dV)
Delay time, mmc1_clk falling clock edge to mmc1_dat[3:0] transition
-1.09
0.49
ns
(1) P = output mmc1_clk period in ns
SDR1041
SDR1042L
SDR1042H
mmc1_clk
SDR1043
SDR1044
mmc1_cmd
SDR1047
SDR1048
mmc1_dat[3:0]
SPRS906_TIMING_MMC1_11
Figure 5-83. MMC/SD/SDIO in - High Speed SDR104 - Receiver Mode
272
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
SDR1041
SDR1042H
SDR1042L
mmc1_clk
SDR1045
SDR1045
mmc1_cmd
SDR1046
SDR1046
mmc1_dat[3:0]
SPRS906_TIMING_MMC1_12
Figure 5-84. MMC/SD/SDIO in - High Speed SDR104 - Transmitter Mode
5.10.6.20.1.7 UHS-I DDR50, 4-bit data
Table 5-124 and Table 5-125 present Timing requirements and Switching characteristics for MMC1 DDR50 in receiver and transmitter mode (see Figure 5-85 and Figure 5-86).
Table 5-124. Timing Requirements for MMC1 - SD Card DDR50 Mode
NO.
PARAME
TER
DESCRIPTION
MODE
DDR50 tsu(cmdV-clk)
5
Setup time, mmc1_cmd valid before mmc1_clk
transition
DDR50 th(clk-cmdV)
6
Hold time, mmc1_cmd valid after mmc1_clk transition
DDR50 tsu(dV-clk)
7
Setup time, mmc1_dat[3:0] valid before mmc1_clk
transition
DDR50 th(clk-dV)
8
Hold time, mmc1_dat[3:0] valid after mmc1_clk
transition
Pad Loopback
MIN
MAX
UNIT
1.79
ns
2
ns
Pad Loopback
1.79
ns
Internal Loopback
1.79
ns
2
ns
1.6
ns
Internal Loopback
Table 5-125. Switching Characteristics for MMC1 - SD Card DDR50 Mode
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
DDR500
NO.
fop(clk)
Operating frequency, mmc1_clk
MIN
MAX
UNIT
48
DDR501
tw(clkH)
Pulse duration, mmc1_clk high
0.5 × P0.185 (1)
MHz
ns
DDR502
tw(clkL)
Pulse duration, mmc1_clk low
0.5 × P0.185 (1)
ns
DDR503
td(clk-cmdV)
Delay time, mmc1_clk transition to mmc1_cmd transition
1.225
6.6
ns
DDR504
td(clk-dV)
Delay time, mmc1_clk transition to mmc1_dat[3:0] transition
1.225
6.6
ns
(1) P = output mmc1_clk period in ns
DDR500
DDR502
DDR501
mmc1_clk
DDR505
DDR506
mmc1_cmd
DDR507
DDR508
DDR507
DDR508
mmc1_dat[3:0]
SPRS906_TIMING_MMC1_13
Figure 5-85. SDMMC - High Speed SD - DDR - Data/Command Receive
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
273
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
DDR500
DDR501
DDR502
mmc1_clk
DDR503(max)
DDR503(min)
mmc1_cmd
DDR504(max)
DDR504(max)
DDR504(min)
DDR504(min)
mmc1_dat[3:0]
MMC1_14
Figure 5-86. SDMMC - High Speed SD - DDR - Data/Command Transmit
NOTE
To configure the desired virtual mode the user must set MODESELECT bit and
DELAYMODE bitfield for each corresponding pad control register.
The pad control registers are presented in Table 4-31 and described in Device TRM, Control
Module Chapter.
Virtual IO Timings Modes must be used to ensure some IO timings for MMC1. See Table 5-30 Modes
Summary for a list of IO timings requiring the use of Virtual IO Timings Modes. See Table 5-126 Virtual
Functions Mapping for MMC1 for a definition of the Virtual modes.
Table 5-126 presents the values for DELAYMODE bitfield.
Table 5-126. Virtual Functions Mapping for MMC1
BALL
BALL NAME
Delay Mode Value
MUXMODE
MMC1_
VIRTUAL1
MMC1_
VIRTUAL4
MMC1_
VIRTUAL5
MMC1_
VIRTUAL6
0
U3
mmc1_clk
15
12
11
10
mmc1_clk
V4
mmc1_cmd
15
12
11
10
mmc1_cmd
V3
mmc1_dat0
15
12
11
10
mmc1_dat0
V2
mmc1_dat1
15
12
11
10
mmc1_dat1
W1
mmc1_dat2
15
12
11
10
mmc1_dat2
V1
mmc1_dat3
15
12
11
10
mmc1_dat3
NOTE
To configure the desired Manual IO Timing Mode the user must follow the steps described in
section Manual IO Timing Modes of the Device TRM.
The associated registers to configure are listed in the CFG REGISTER column. For more
information see the Control Module chapter in the Device TRM.
Manual IO Timings Modes must be used to ensure some IO timings for MMC1. See Table 5-30 Modes
Summary for a list of IO timings requiring the use of Manual IO Timings Modes. See Table 5-127 Manual
Functions Mapping for MMC1 for a definition of the Manual modes.
Table 5-127 lists the A_DELAY and G_DELAY values needed to calculate the correct values to be set in
the CFG_x registers.
274
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 5-127. Manual Functions Mapping for MMC1
BALL
BALL NAME
MMC1_MANUAL1
MMC1_MANUAL2
CFG REGISTER
MUXMODE
CFG_MMC1_CLK_IN
mmc1_clk
A_DELAY (ps)
G_DELAY (ps)
A_DELAY (ps)
G_DELAY (ps)
mmc1_clk
588
0
-
-
V4
mmc1_cmd
1000
0
-
-
CFG_MMC1_CMD_IN
mmc1_cmd
V3
mmc1_dat0
1375
0
-
-
CFG_MMC1_DAT0_IN
mmc1_dat0
V2
mmc1_dat1
1000
0
-
-
CFG_MMC1_DAT1_IN
mmc1_dat1
W1
mmc1_dat2
1000
0
-
-
CFG_MMC1_DAT2_IN
mmc1_dat2
V1
mmc1_dat3
1000
0
-
-
CFG_MMC1_DAT3_IN
mmc1_dat3
U3
mmc1_clk
1230
0
520
320
CFG_MMC1_CLK_OUT
mmc1_clk
U3
0
V4
mmc1_cmd
0
0
0
0
CFG_MMC1_CMD_OUT
mmc1_cmd
V3
mmc1_dat0
56
0
40
0
CFG_MMC1_DAT0_OUT
mmc1_dat0
V2
mmc1_dat1
76
0
83
0
CFG_MMC1_DAT1_OUT
mmc1_dat1
W1
mmc1_dat2
91
0
98
0
CFG_MMC1_DAT2_OUT
mmc1_dat2
V1
mmc1_dat3
99
0
106
0
CFG_MMC1_DAT3_OUT
mmc1_dat3
V4
mmc1_cmd
0
0
51
0
CFG_MMC1_CMD_OEN
mmc1_cmd
V3
mmc1_dat0
0
0
0
0
CFG_MMC1_DAT0_OEN
mmc1_dat0
V2
mmc1_dat1
0
0
363
0
CFG_MMC1_DAT1_OEN
mmc1_dat1
W1
mmc1_dat2
0
0
199
0
CFG_MMC1_DAT2_OEN
mmc1_dat2
V1
mmc1_dat3
0
0
273
0
CFG_MMC1_DAT3_OEN
mmc1_dat3
5.10.6.20.2 MMC2 — eMMC
MMC2 interface is compliant with the JC64 eMMC Standard v4.5 and it supports the following eMMC applications:
• Standard JC64 SDR, 8-bit data, half cycle
• High-speed JC64 SDR, 8-bit data, half cycle
• High-speed HS200 JEDS84, 8-bit data, half cycle
• High-speed JC64 DDR, 8-bit data
NOTE
For more information, see the eMMC/SD/SDIO chapter of the Device TRM.
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
275
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
5.10.6.20.2.1 Standard JC64 SDR, 8-bit data, half cycle
Table 5-128 and Table 5-129 present Timing requirements and Switching characteristics for MMC2 - Standart SDR in receiver and transmitter
mode (see Figure 5-87 and Figure 5-88).
Table 5-128. Timing Requirements for MMC2 - JC64 Standard SDR Mode
NO.
276
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
SSDR5
tsu(cmdV-clkH)
Setup time, mmc2_cmd valid before mmc2_clk rising clock edge
MIN
SSDR6
th(clkH-cmdV)
Hold time, mmc2_cmd valid after mmc2_clk rising clock edge
SSDR7
tsu(dV-clkH)
Setup time, mmc2_dat[7:0] valid before mmc2_clk rising clock edge
SSDR8
th(clkH-dV)
Hold time, mmc2_dat[7:0] valid after mmc2_clk rising clock edge
Specifications
MAX
UNIT
13.19
ns
8.4
ns
13.19
ns
8.4
ns
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 5-129. Switching Characteristics for MMC2 - JC64 Standard SDR Mode
NO.
SSDR1
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
fop(clk)
Operating frequency, mmc2_clk
MIN
MAX
UNIT
24
MHz
SSDR2H tw(clkH)
Pulse duration, mmc2_clk high
0.5 × P0.172 (1)
ns
SSDR2L tw(clkL)
Pulse duration, mmc2_clk low
0.5 × P0.172 (1)
ns
SSDR3
td(clkL-cmdV)
Delay time, mmc2_clk falling clock edge to mmc2_cmd transition
-16.96
16.96
ns
SSDR4
td(clkL-dV)
Delay time, mmc2_clk falling clock edge to mmc2_dat[7:0] transition
-16.96
16.96
ns
(1) P = output mmc2_clk period in ns
SSDR2
SSDR2
SSDR1
mmc2_clk
SSDR6
SSDR5
mmc2_cmd
SSDR8
SSDR7
mmc2_dat[7:0]
SPRS906_TIMING_MMC2_01
Figure 5-87. MMC/SD/SDIO in - Standard JC64 - Receiver Mode
SSDR2
SSDR2
SSDR1
mmc2_clk
SSDR3
mmc2_cmd
SSDR4
mmc2_dat[7:0]
SPRS906_TIMING_MMC2_02
Figure 5-88. MMC/SD/SDIO in - Standard JC64 - Transmitter Mode
5.10.6.20.2.2 High-speed JC64 SDR, 8-bit data, half cycle
Table 5-130 and Table 5-131 present Timing requirements and Switching characteristics for MMC2 - High
speed SDR in receiver and transmitter mode (see Figure 5-89 and Figure 5-90).
Table 5-130. Timing Requirements for MMC2 - JC64 High Speed SDR Mode
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
MIN
MAX
JC643
tsu(cmdV-clkH)
Setup time, mmc2_cmd valid before mmc2_clk rising clock edge
5.6
ns
JC644
th(clkH-cmdV)
Hold time, mmc2_cmd valid after mmc2_clk rising clock edge
2.6
ns
JC647
tsu(dV-clkH)
Setup time, mmc2_dat[7:0] valid before mmc2_clk rising clock edge
5.6
ns
JC648
th(clkH-dV)
Hold time, mmc2_dat[7:0] valid after mmc2_clk rising clock edge
2.6
ns
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
UNIT
277
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 5-131. Switching Characteristics for MMC2 - JC64 High Speed SDR Mode
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
JC641
NO.
fop(clk)
Operating frequency, mmc2_clk
MIN
MAX
UNIT
48
JC642H
tw(clkH)
Pulse duration, mmc2_clk high
0.5 × P0.172 (1)
MHz
ns
JC642L
tw(clkL)
Pulse duration, mmc2_clk low
0.5 × P0.172 (1)
ns
JC645
td(clkL-cmdV)
Delay time, mmc2_clk falling clock edge to mmc2_cmd transition
-6.64
6.64
ns
JC646
td(clkL-dV)
Delay time, mmc2_clk falling clock edge to mmc2_dat[7:0] transition
-6.64
6.64
ns
(1) P = output mmc2_clk period in ns
JC641
JC642L
JC642H
mmc2_clk
JC643
JC644
mmc2_cmd
JC647
JC648
mmc2_dat[7:0]
SPRS906_TIMING_MMC2_03
Figure 5-89. MMC/SD/SDIO in - High Speed JC64 - Receiver Mode
JC641
JC642L
JC642H
mmc2_clk
JC645
JC645
mmc2_cmd
JC646
JC646
mmc2_dat[7:0]
MMC2_04
Figure 5-90. MMC/SD/SDIO in - High Speed JC64 - transmitter Mode
5.10.6.20.2.3 High-speed HS200 JEDS84 SDR, 8-bit data, half cycle
Table 5-132 presents Switching characteristics for MMC2 - HS200 in transmitter mode (see Figure 5-91).
278
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 5-132. Switching Characteristics for MMC2 - JEDS84 HS200 Mode
NO.
HS2001
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
fop(clk)
Operating frequency, mmc2_clk
MIN
MAX
UNIT
192
MHz
HS2002H tw(clkH)
Pulse duration, mmc2_clk high
0.5 × P0.172 (1)
ns
HS2002L tw(clkL)
Pulse duration, mmc2_clk low
0.5 × P0.172 (1)
ns
HS2005
td(clkL-cmdV)
Delay time, mmc2_clk falling clock edge to mmc2_cmd transition
-1.136
0.536
ns
HS2006
td(clkL-dV)
Delay time, mmc2_clk falling clock edge to mmc2_dat[7:0] transition
-1.136
0.536
ns
(1) P = output mmc2_clk period in ns
HS2001
HS2002H
HS2002L
mmc2_clk
HS2005
HS2005
mmc2_cmd
HS2006
HS2006
mmc2_dat[7:0]
MMC2_05
Figure 5-91. eMMC in - HS200 SDR - Transmitter Mode
5.10.6.20.2.4 High-speed JC64 DDR, 8-bit data
Table 5-133 and Table 5-134 present Timing requirements and Switching characteristics for MMC2 - High
speed DDR in receiver and transmitter mode (see Figure 5-92 and Figure 5-93).
Table 5-133. Timing Requirements for MMC2 - JC64 High Speed DDR Mode
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
MODE
MIN
MAX
UNIT
DDR3 tsu(cmdV-clk)
Setup time, mmc2_cmd valid before mmc2_clk
transition
1.8
ns
DDR4 th(clk-cmdV)
Hold time, mmc2_cmd valid after mmc2_clk
transition
1.6
ns
DDR7 tsu(dV-clk)
Setup time, mmc2_dat[7:0] valid before mmc2_clk
transition
1.8
ns
DDR8 th(clk-dV)
Hold time, mmc2_dat[7:0] valid after mmc2_clk
transition
Pad Loopback (1.8V and 3.3V),
Boot
1.6
ns
Internal Loopback (1.8V with
MMC2_VIRTUAL2)
1.86
ns
Internal Loopback (3.3V with
MMC2_VIRTUAL2)
1.95
ns
Internal Loopback (1.8V with
MMC2_MANUAL2)
ns
Internal Loopback (3.3V with
MMC2_MANUAL2)
1.6
ns
Table 5-134. Switching Characteristics for MMC2 - JC64 High Speed DDR Mode
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
MIN
MAX
UNIT
48
MHz
DDR1
fop(clk)
Operating frequency, mmc2_clk
DDR2H
tw(clkH)
Pulse duration, mmc2_clk high
0.5 × P0.172 (1)
ns
DDR2L
tw(clkL)
Pulse duration, mmc2_clk low
0.5 × P0.172 (1)
ns
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
279
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 5-134. Switching Characteristics for MMC2 - JC64 High Speed DDR Mode (continued)
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
MIN
MAX
UNIT
DDR5
NO.
td(clk-cmdV)
Delay time, mmc2_clk transition to mmc2_cmd transition
2.9
7.14
ns
DDR6
td(clk-dV)
Delay time, mmc2_clk transition to mmc2_dat[7:0] transition
2.9
7.14
ns
(1) P = output mmc2_clk period in ns
DDR1
DDR2H
DDR2L
mmc2_clk
DDR3
DDR4
mmc2_cmd
DDR8
DDR8
DDR7
DDR8
DDR7
DDR7
DDR7
mmc2_dat[7:0]
SPRS906_TIMING_MMC2_07
Figure 5-92. MMC/SD/SDIO in - High Speed DDR JC64 - Receiver Mode
DDR1
DDR2
DDR2
mmc2_clk
DDR5
DDR5
DDR5
DDR5
mmc2_cmd
DDR6
DDR6
DDR6
DDR6
DDR6
DDR6
mmc2_dat[7:0]
MMC2_08
Figure 5-93. MMC/SD/SDIO in - High Speed DDR JC64 - Transmitter Mode
NOTE
To configure the desired virtual mode the user must set MODESELECT bit and
DELAYMODE bitfield for each corresponding pad control register.
The pad control registers are presented in Table 4-31 and described in Device TRM, Control
Module Chapter.
Virtual IO Timings Modes must be used to ensure some IO timings for MMC2. See Table 5-30 Modes
Summary for a list of IO timings requiring the use of Virtual IO Timings Modes. See Table 5-135 Virtual
Functions Mapping for MMC2 for a definition of the Virtual modes.
Table 5-135 presents the values for DELAYMODE bitfield.
Table 5-135. Virtual Functions Mapping for MMC2
BALL
280
BALL NAME
Delay Mode Value
MUXMODE
MMC2_VIRTUAL2
1
A6
gpmc_cs1
13
mmc2_cmd
A4
gpmc_a19
13
mmc2_dat4
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 5-135. Virtual Functions Mapping for MMC2 (continued)
BALL
BALL NAME
Delay Mode Value
MUXMODE
MMC2_VIRTUAL2
1
E7
gpmc_a20
13
mmc2_dat5
D6
gpmc_a21
13
mmc2_dat6
C5
gpmc_a22
13
mmc2_dat7
B5
gpmc_a23
13
mmc2_clk
D7
gpmc_a24
13
mmc2_dat0
C6
gpmc_a25
13
mmc2_dat1
A5
gpmc_a26
13
mmc2_dat2
B6
gpmc_a27
13
mmc2_dat3
NOTE
To configure the desired Manual IO Timing Mode the user must follow the steps described in
section Manual IO Timing Modes of the Device TRM.
The associated registers to configure are listed in the CFG REGISTER column. For more
information see the Control Module chapter in the Device TRM.
Manual IO Timings Modes must be used to ensure some IO timings for MMC2. See Table 5-30 Modes
Summary for a list of IO timings requiring the use of Manual IO Timings Modes. See Table 5-136 Manual
Functions Mapping for MMC2 for a definition of the Manual modes.
Table 5-136 lists the A_DELAY and G_DELAY values needed to calculate the correct values to be set in
the CFG_x registers.
Table 5-136. Manual Functions Mapping for MMC2
BAL BALL NAME
L
MMC2_MANUAL1
A_DELAY G_DELAY
(ps)
(ps)
MMC2_MANUAL2
MMC2_MANUAL3
A_DELAY
(ps)
G_DELAY
(ps)
A_DELAY
(ps)
G_DELAY
(ps)
CFG REGISTER
MUXMODE
1
A4
gpmc_a19
0
0
0
14
-
-
CFG_GPMC_A19_IN
mmc2_dat4
E7
gpmc_a20
119
0
127
0
-
-
CFG_GPMC_A20_IN
mmc2_dat5
D6
gpmc_a21
0
0
22
0
-
-
CFG_GPMC_A21_IN
mmc2_dat6
C5
gpmc_a22
18
0
72
0
-
-
CFG_GPMC_A22_IN
mmc2_dat7
B5
gpmc_a23
894
0
410
4000
-
-
CFG_GPMC_A23_IN
mmc2_clk
D7
gpmc_a24
30
0
82
0
-
-
CFG_GPMC_A24_IN
mmc2_dat0
C6
gpmc_a25
0
0
0
0
-
-
CFG_GPMC_A25_IN
mmc2_dat1
A5
gpmc_a26
23
0
77
0
-
-
CFG_GPMC_A26_IN
mmc2_dat2
B6
gpmc_a27
0
0
0
0
-
-
CFG_GPMC_A27_IN
mmc2_dat3
A6
gpmc_cs1
0
0
0
0
-
-
CFG_GPMC_CS1_IN
mmc2_cmd
A4
gpmc_a19
152
0
152
0
285
0
CFG_GPMC_A19_OUT mmc2_dat4
E7
gpmc_a20
206
0
206
0
189
0
CFG_GPMC_A20_OUT mmc2_dat5
D6
gpmc_a21
78
0
78
0
0
120
CFG_GPMC_A21_OUT mmc2_dat6
C5
gpmc_a22
2
0
2
0
0
70
CFG_GPMC_A22_OUT mmc2_dat7
CFG_GPMC_A23_OUT
B5
gpmc_a23
266
0
266
0
730
360
D7
gpmc_a24
0
0
0
0
0
0
CFG_GPMC_A24_OUT mmc2_dat0
mmc2_clk
C6
gpmc_a25
0
0
0
0
0
0
CFG_GPMC_A25_OUT mmc2_dat1
A5
gpmc_a26
43
0
43
0
70
0
CFG_GPMC_A26_OUT mmc2_dat2
B6
gpmc_a27
0
0
0
0
0
0
CFG_GPMC_A27_OUT mmc2_dat3
A6
gpmc_cs1
0
0
0
0
0
120
CFG_GPMC_CS1_OUT mmc2_cmd
A4
gpmc_a19
0
0
0
0
0
0
CFG_GPMC_A19_OEN mmc2_dat4
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
281
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 5-136. Manual Functions Mapping for MMC2 (continued)
BAL BALL NAME
L
MMC2_MANUAL1
A_DELAY G_DELAY
(ps)
(ps)
MMC2_MANUAL2
MMC2_MANUAL3
A_DELAY
(ps)
G_DELAY
(ps)
A_DELAY
(ps)
G_DELAY
(ps)
CFG REGISTER
MUXMODE
1
E7
gpmc_a20
0
0
0
0
231
0
CFG_GPMC_A20_OEN mmc2_dat5
D6
gpmc_a21
0
0
0
0
39
0
CFG_GPMC_A21_OEN mmc2_dat6
C5
gpmc_a22
0
0
0
0
91
0
CFG_GPMC_A22_OEN mmc2_dat7
D7
gpmc_a24
0
0
0
0
176
0
CFG_GPMC_A24_OEN mmc2_dat0
C6
gpmc_a25
0
0
0
0
0
0
CFG_GPMC_A25_OEN mmc2_dat1
A5
gpmc_a26
0
0
0
0
101
0
CFG_GPMC_A26_OEN mmc2_dat2
B6
gpmc_a27
0
0
0
0
0
0
CFG_GPMC_A27_OEN mmc2_dat3
A6
gpmc_cs1
0
0
0
0
360
0
CFG_GPMC_CS1_OE
N
mmc2_cmd
5.10.6.20.3 MMC3 and MMC4—SDIO/SD
MMC3 and MMC4 interfaces are compliant with the SDIO3.0 standard v1.0, SD Part E1 and for generic
SDIO devices, it supports the following applications:
• MMC3 8-bit data and MMC4 4-bit data, SD Default speed, SDR
• MMC3 8-bit data and MMC4 4-bit data, SD High speed, SDR
• MMC3 8-bit data and MMC4 4-bit data, UHS-1 SDR12 (SD Standard v3.01), 4-bit data, SDR, half
cycle
• MMC3 8-bit data and MMC4 4-bit data, UHS-I SDR25 (SD Standard v3.01), 4-bit data, SDR, half cycle
• MMC3 8-bit data, UHS-I SDR50
NOTE
The eMMC/SD/SDIOj (j = 3 to 4) controller is also referred to as MMCj.
NOTE
For more information, see the MMC/SDIO chapter of the Device TRM.
5.10.6.20.3.1 MMC3 and MMC4, SD Default Speed
Figure 5-94 , Figure 5-95, and Table 5-137 through Table 5-140 present Timing requirements and
Switching characteristics for MMC3 and MMC4 - SD Default speed in receiver and transmitter mode.
Table 5-137. Timing Requirements for MMC3 - Default Speed Mode (1)
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
MIN
DS5
tsu(cmdV-clkH)
Setup time, mmc3_cmd valid before mmc3_clk rising clock edge
5.11
MAX
UNIT
ns
DS6
th(clkH-cmdV)
Hold time, mmc3_cmd valid after mmc3_clk rising clock edge
20.46
ns
DS7
tsu(dV-clkH)
Setup time, mmc3_dat[i:0] valid before mmc3_clk rising clock edge
5.11
ns
DS8
th(clkH-dV)
Hold time, mmc3_dat[i:0] valid after mmc3_clk rising clock edge
20.46
ns
(1) i in [i:0] = 7
Table 5-138. Switching Characteristics for MMC3 - SD/SDIO Default Speed Mode (2)
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
DS0
fop(clk)
Operating frequency, mmc3_clk
DS1
tw(clkH)
Pulse duration, mmc3_clk high
282
Specifications
MIN
0.5 × P0.270 (1)
MAX
UNIT
24
MHz
ns
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 5-138. Switching Characteristics for MMC3 - SD/SDIO Default Speed Mode (2) (continued)
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
DS2
tw(clkL)
Pulse duration, mmc3_clk low
MIN
MAX
DS3
td(clkL-cmdV)
Delay time, mmc3_clk falling clock edge to mmc3_cmd transition
-14.93
14.93
ns
DS4
td(clkL-dV)
Delay time, mmc3_clk falling clock edge to mmc3_dat[i:0] transition
-14.93
14.93
ns
MAX
UNIT
0.5 × P0.270 (1)
UNIT
ns
(1) P = output mmc3_clk period in ns
(2) i in [i:0] = 7
Table 5-139. Timing Requirements for MMC4 - Default Speed Mode (1)
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
MIN
DS5
tsu(cmdV-clkH)
Setup time, mmc4_cmd valid before mmc4_clk rising clock edge
5.11
ns
DS6
th(clkH-cmdV)
Hold time, mmc4_cmd valid after mmc4_clk rising clock edge
20.46
ns
DS7
tsu(dV-clkH)
Setup time, mmc4_dat[i:0] valid before mmc4_clk rising clock edge
5.11
ns
DS8
th(clkH-dV)
Hold time, mmc4_dat[i:0] valid after mmc4_clk rising clock edge
20.46
ns
(1) i in [i:0] = 3
Table 5-140. Switching Characteristics for MMC4 - Default Speed Mode (2)
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
DS0
fop(clk)
Operating frequency, mmc4_clk
MIN
MAX
UNIT
24
DS1
tw(clkH)
Pulse duration, mmc4_clk high
0.5 × P0.270 (1)
MHz
ns
DS2
tw(clkL)
Pulse duration, mmc4_clk low
0.5 × P0.270 (1)
ns
DS3
td(clkL-cmdV)
Delay time, mmc4_clk falling clock edge to mmc4_cmd transition
-14.93
14.93
ns
DS4
td(clkL-dV)
Delay time, mmc4_clk falling clock edge to mmc4_dat[i:0] transition
-14.93
14.93
ns
(1) P = output mmc4_clk period in ns
(2) i in [i:0] = 3
DS2
DS1
DS0
mmcj_clk
DS6
DS5
mmcj_cmd
DS8
DS7
mmcj_dat[i:0]
SPRS906_TIMING_MMC3_07
Figure 5-94. MMC/SD/SDIOj in - Default Speed - Receiver Mode
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
283
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
DS2
DS1
DS0
mmcj_clk
DS3
mmcj_cmd
DS4
mmcj_dat[i:0]
SPRS906_TIMING_MMC3_08
Figure 5-95. MMC/SD/SDIOj in - Default Speed - Transmitter Mode
5.10.6.20.3.2 MMC3 and MMC4, SD High Speed
Figure 5-96, Figure 5-97, and Table 5-141 through Table 5-144 present Timing requirements and
Switching characteristics for MMC3 and MMC4 - SD and SDIO High speed in receiver and transmitter
mode.
Table 5-141. Timing Requirements for MMC3 - SD/SDIO High Speed Mode (1)
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
MIN
MAX
UNIT
HS3
tsu(cmdV-clkH)
Setup time, mmc3_cmd valid before mmc3_clk rising clock edge
5.3
ns
HS4
th(clkH-cmdV)
Hold time, mmc3_cmd valid after mmc3_clk rising clock edge
2.6
ns
HS7
tsu(dV-clkH)
Setup time, mmc3_dat[i:0] valid before mmc3_clk rising clock edge
5.3
ns
HS8
th(clkH-dV)
Hold time, mmc3_dat[i:0] valid after mmc3_clk rising clock edge
2.6
ns
(1) i in [i:0] = 7
Table 5-142. Switching Characteristics for MMC3 - SD/SDIO High Speed Mode (2)
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
HS1
fop(clk)
Operating frequency, mmc3_clk
MIN
MAX
UNIT
48
HS2H
tw(clkH)
Pulse duration, mmc3_clk high
0.5 × P0.270 (1)
MHz
ns
HS2L
tw(clkL)
Pulse duration, mmc3_clk low
0.5 × P0.270 (1)
ns
HS5
td(clkL-cmdV)
Delay time, mmc3_clk falling clock edge to mmc3_cmd transition
-7.6
3.6
ns
HS6
td(clkL-dV)
Delay time, mmc3_clk falling clock edge to mmc3_dat[i:0] transition
-7.6
3.6
ns
(1) P = output mmc3_clk period in ns
(2) i in [i:0] = 7
Table 5-143. Timing Requirements for MMC4 - High Speed Mode (1)
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
HS3
tsu(cmdV-clkH)
Setup time, mmc4_cmd valid before mmc4_clk rising clock edge
MIN
5.3
MAX
UNIT
ns
HS4
th(clkH-cmdV)
Hold time, mmc4_cmd valid after mmc4_clk rising clock edge
1.6
ns
HS7
tsu(dV-clkH)
Setup time, mmc4_dat[i:0] valid before mmc4_clk rising clock edge
5.3
ns
HS8
th(clkH-dV)
Hold time, mmc4_dat[i:0] valid after mmc4_clk rising clock edge
1.6
ns
(1) i in [i:0] = 3
Table 5-144. Switching Characteristics for MMC4 - High Speed Mode (2)
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
HS1
fop(clk)
Operating frequency, mmc4_clk
HS2H
tw(clkH)
Pulse duration, mmc4_clk high
284
Specifications
MIN
0.5 × P0.270 (1)
MAX
UNIT
48
MHz
ns
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 5-144. Switching Characteristics for MMC4 - High Speed Mode (2) (continued)
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
HS2L
NO.
tw(clkL)
Pulse duration, mmc4_clk low
MIN
MAX
HS5
td(clkL-cmdV)
Delay time, mmc4_clk falling clock edge to mmc4_cmd transition
-8.8
6.6
ns
HS6
td(clkL-dV)
Delay time, mmc4_clk falling clock edge to mmc4_dat[i:0] transition
-8.8
6.6
ns
0.5 × P0.270 (1)
UNIT
ns
(1) P = output mmc4_clk period in ns
(2) i in [i:0] = 3
HS1
HS2H
HS2L
mmcj_clk
HS3
HS4
mmcj_cmd
HS7
HS8
mmcj_dat[i:0]
SPRS906_TIMING_MMC3_09
Figure 5-96. MMC/SD/SDIOj in - High Speed 3.3V Signaling - Receiver Mode
HS1
HS2H
HS2L
mmcj_clk
HS5
HS5
mmcj_cmd
HS6
HS6
mmcj_dat[i:0]
SPRS906_TIMING_MMC3_10
Figure 5-97. MMC/SD/SDIOj in - High Speed 3.3V Signaling - Transmitter Mode
5.10.6.20.3.3 MMC3 and MMC4, SD and SDIO SDR12 Mode
Figure 5-98, Figure 5-99, and Table 5-145, through Table 5-148 present Timing requirements and
Switching characteristics for MMC3 and MMC4 - SD and SDIO SDR12 in receiver and transmitter mode.
Table 5-145. Timing Requirements for MMC3 - SDR12 Mode (1)
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
SDR125
NO.
tsu(cmdV-clkH)
Setup time, mmc3_cmd valid before mmc3_clk rising clock edge
SDR126
th(clkH-cmdV)
Hold time, mmc3_cmd valid after mmc3_clk rising clock edge
SDR127
tsu(dV-clkH)
Setup time, mmc3_dat[i:0] valid before mmc3_clk rising clock edge
SDR128
th(clkH-dV)
Hold time, mmc3_dat[i:0] valid after mmc3_clk rising clock edge
MIN
MAX
UNIT
25.99
ns
1.6
ns
25.99
ns
1.6
ns
(1) i in [i:0] = 7
Table 5-146. Switching Characteristics for MMC3 - SDR12 Mode (2)
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
SDR120
fop(clk)
Operating frequency, mmc3_clk
SDR121
tw(clkH)
Pulse duration, mmc3_clk high
MIN
MAX
UNIT
24
MHz
0.5 × P0.270 (1)
ns
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
285
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 5-146. Switching Characteristics for MMC3 - SDR12 Mode (2) (continued)
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
SDR122
NO.
tw(clkL)
Pulse duration, mmc3_clk low
MIN
MAX
SDR123
td(clkL-cmdV)
Delay time, mmc3_clk falling clock edge to mmc3_cmd transition
-19.13
16.93
ns
SDR124
td(clkL-dV)
Delay time, mmc3_clk falling clock edge to mmc3_dat[i:0] transition
-19.13
16.93
ns
MAX
UNIT
0.5 × P0.270 (1)
UNIT
ns
(1) P = output mmc3_clk period in ns
(2) i in [i:0] = 7
Table 5-147. Timing Requirements for MMC4 - SDR12 Mode (1)
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
SDR125
NO.
tsu(cmdV-clkH)
Setup time, mmc4_cmd valid before mmc4_clk rising clock edge
MIN
SDR126
th(clkH-cmdV)
Hold time, mmc4_cmd valid after mmc4_clk rising clock edge
SDR127
tsu(dV-clkH)
Setup time, mmc4_dat[i:0] valid before mmc4_clk rising clock edge
SDR128
th(clkH-dV)
Hold time, mmc4_dat[i:0] valid after mmc4_clk rising clock edge
25.99
ns
1.6
ns
25.99
ns
1.6
ns
(1) j in [i:0] = 3
Table 5-148. Switching Characteristics for MMC4 - SDR12 Mode (2)
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
SDR120
NO.
fop(clk)
Operating frequency, mmc4_clk
MIN
MAX
UNIT
24
SDR121
tw(clkH)
Pulse duration, mmc4_clk high
0.5 × P0.270 (1)
MHz
ns
SDR122
tw(clkL)
Pulse duration, mmc4_clk low
0.5 × P0.270 (1)
ns
SDR125
td(clkL-cmdV)
Delay time, mmc4_clk falling clock edge to mmc4_cmd transition
-19.13
16.93
ns
SDR126
td(clkL-dV)
Delay time, mmc4_clk falling clock edge to mmc4_dat[i:0] transition
-19.13
16.93
ns
(1) P = output mmc4_clk period in ns
(2) j in [i:0] = 3
SDR122
SDR121
SDR120
mmcj_clk
SDR126
SDR125
mmcj_cmd
SDR128
SDR127
mmcj_dat[i:0]
SPRS906_TIMING_MMC3_11
Figure 5-98. MMC/SD/SDIOj in - SDR12 - Receiver Mode
286
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
SDR122
SDR121
SDR120
mmcj_clk
SDR123
mmcj_cmd
SDR124
mmcj_dat[i:0]
SPRS906_TIMING_MMC3_12
Figure 5-99. MMC/SD/SDIOj in - SDR12 - Transmitter Mode
5.10.6.20.3.4 MMC3 and MMC4, SD SDR25 Mode
Figure 5-100, Figure 5-101, and Table 5-149, through Table 5-152 present Timing requirements and
Switching characteristics for MMC3 and MMC4 - SD and SDIO SDR25 in receiver and transmitter mode.
Table 5-149. Timing Requirements for MMC3 - SDR25 Mode (1)
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
MIN
MAX
UNIT
SDR253
tsu(cmdV-clkH)
Setup time, mmc3_cmd valid before mmc3_clk rising clock edge
5.3
ns
SDR254
th(clkH-cmdV)
Hold time, mmc3_cmd valid after mmc3_clk rising clock edge
1.6
ns
SDR257
tsu(dV-clkH)
Setup time, mmc3_dat[i:0] valid before mmc3_clk rising clock edge
5.3
ns
SDR258
th(clkH-dV)
Hold time, mmc3_dat[i:0] valid after mmc3_clk rising clock edge
1.6
ns
(1) i in [i:0] = 7
Table 5-150. Switching Characteristics for MMC3 - SDR25 Mode (2)
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
SDR251
NO.
fop(clk)
Operating frequency, mmc3_clk
MIN
MAX
UNIT
48
SDR252
H
tw(clkH)
Pulse duration, mmc3_clk high
0.5 × P0.270 (1)
MHz
ns
SDR252L tw(clkL)
Pulse duration, mmc3_clk low
0.5 × P0.270 (1)
ns
SDR255
td(clkL-cmdV)
Delay time, mmc3_clk falling clock edge to mmc3_cmd transition
-8.8
6.6
ns
SDR256
td(clkL-dV)
Delay time, mmc3_clk falling clock edge to mmc3_dat[i:0] transition
-8.8
6.6
ns
MIN
MAX
(1) P = output mmc3_clk period in ns
(2) i in [i:0] = 7
Table 5-151. Timing Requirements for MMC4 - SDR25 Mode (1)
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
SDR255
NO.
tsu(cmdV-clkH)
Setup time, mmc4_cmd valid before mmc4_clk rising clock edge
5.3
UNIT
ns
SDR256
th(clkH-cmdV)
Hold time, mmc4_cmd valid after mmc4_clk rising clock edge
1.6
ns
SDR257
tsu(dV-clkH)
Setup time, mmc4_dat[i:0] valid before mmc4_clk rising clock edge
5.3
ns
SDR258
th(clkH-dV)
Hold time, mmc4_dat[i:0] valid after mmc4_clk rising clock edge
1.6
ns
(1) i in [i:0] = 3
Table 5-152. Switching Characteristics for MMC4 - SDR25 Mode (2)
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
SDR251
NO.
fop(clk)
Operating frequency, mmc4_clk
SDR252
H
tw(clkH)
Pulse duration, mmc4_clk high
MIN
MAX
UNIT
48
MHz
0.5 × P0.270 (1)
ns
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
287
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 5-152. Switching Characteristics for MMC4 - SDR25 Mode (2) (continued)
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
MIN
MAX
0.5 × P0.270 (1)
UNIT
SDR252L tw(clkL)
Pulse duration, mmc4_clk low
ns
SDR255
td(clkL-cmdV)
Delay time, mmc4_clk falling clock edge to mmc4_cmd transition
-8.8
6.6
ns
SDR256
td(clkL-dV)
Delay time, mmc4_clk falling clock edge to mmc4_dat[i:0] transition
-8.8
6.6
ns
(1) P = output mmc4_clk period in ns
(2) i in [i:0] = 3
SDR251
SDR252L
SDR252H
mmcj_clk
SDR253
SDR254
mmcj_cmd
SDR257
SDR258
mmcj_dat[i:0]
SPRS906_TIMING_MMC3_13
Figure 5-100. MMC/SD/SDIOj in - SDR25 - Receiver Mode
SDR251
SDR252H
SDR252L
mmcj_clk
SDR255
SDR255
mmcj_cmd
SDR256
SDR256
mmcj_dat[i:0]
SPRS906_TIMING_MMC3_14
Figure 5-101. MMC/SD/SDIOj in - SDR25 - Transmitter Mode
5.10.6.20.3.5 MMC3 SDIO High-Speed UHS-I SDR50 Mode, Half Cycle
Figure 5-102, Figure 5-103, Table 5-153, and Table 5-154 present Timing requirements and Switching
characteristics for MMC3 - SDIO High speed SDR50 in receiver and transmitter mode.
Table 5-153. Timing Requirements for MMC3 - SDR50 Mode (1)
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
MIN
MAX
UNIT
SDR503
tsu(cmdV-clkH)
Setup time, mmc3_cmd valid before mmc3_clk rising clock edge
1.48
ns
SDR504
th(clkH-cmdV)
Hold time, mmc3_cmd valid after mmc3_clk rising clock edge
1.6
ns
SDR507
tsu(dV-clkH)
Setup time, mmc3_dat[i:0] valid before mmc3_clk rising clock edge
1.48
ns
SDR508
th(clkH-dV)
Hold time, mmc3_dat[i:0] valid after mmc3_clk rising clock edge
1.6
ns
(1) i in [i:0] = 7
Table 5-154. Switching Characteristics for MMC3 - SDR50 Mode (2)
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
SDR501
NO.
fop(clk)
Operating frequency, mmc3_clk
SDR502
H
tw(clkH)
Pulse duration, mmc3_clk high
0.5 × P0.270 (1)
ns
Pulse duration, mmc3_clk low
0.5 × P0.270 (1)
ns
SDR502L tw(clkL)
288
Specifications
MIN
MAX
UNIT
64
MHz
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 5-154. Switching Characteristics for MMC3 - SDR50 Mode (2) (continued)
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
MIN
MAX
UNIT
SDR505
NO.
td(clkL-cmdV)
Delay time, mmc3_clk falling clock edge to mmc3_cmd transition
-3.66
1.46
ns
SDR506
td(clkL-dV)
Delay time, mmc3_clk falling clock edge to mmc3_dat[i:0] transition
-3.66
1.46
ns
(1) P = output mmc3_clk period in ns
(2) i in [i:0] = 7
SDR501
SDR502L
SDR502H
mmcj_clk
SDR504
SDR503
mmcj_cmd
SDR507
SDR508
mmcj_dat[7:0]
SPRS906_TIMING_MMC3_05
Figure 5-102. MMC/SD/SDIOj in - High Speed SDR50 - Receiver Mode
SDR501
SDR502H
SDR502L
mmcj_clk
SDR505
SDR505
mmcj_cmd
SDR506
SDR506
mmcj_dat[7:0]
SPRS906_TIMING_MMC3_06
Figure 5-103. MMC/SD/SDIOj in - High Speed SDR50 - Transmitter Mode
NOTE
To configure the desired Manual IO Timing Mode the user must follow the steps described in
section Manual IO Timing Modes of the Device TRM.
The associated registers to configure are listed in the CFG REGISTER column. For more
information see the Control Module chapter in the Device TRM.
Manual IO Timings Modes must be used to ensure some IO timings for MMC3. See Table 5-30 Modes
Summary for a list of IO timings requiring the use of Manual IO Timings Modes. See Table 5-155 Manual
Functions Mapping for MMC3 for a definition of the Manual modes.
Table 5-155 lists the A_DELAY and G_DELAY values needed to calculate the correct values to be set in
the CFG_x registers.
Table 5-155. Manual Functions Mapping for MMC3
BALL
BALL NAME
MMC3_MANUAL1
CFG REGISTER
A_DELAY (ps)
G_DELAY (ps)
MUXMODE
0
Y2
mmc3_clk
1085
21
CFG_MMC3_CLK_IN
Y2
mmc3_clk
1269
0
CFG_MMC3_CLK_OUT
mmc3_clk
mmc3_clk
Y1
mmc3_cmd
0
0
CFG_MMC3_CMD_IN
mmc3_cmd
Y1
mmc3_cmd
128
0
CFG_MMC3_CMD_OEN
mmc3_cmd
Y1
mmc3_cmd
98
0
CFG_MMC3_CMD_OUT
mmc3_cmd
Y4
mmc3_dat0
0
0
CFG_MMC3_DAT0_IN
mmc3_dat0
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
289
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 5-155. Manual Functions Mapping for MMC3 (continued)
BALL
BALL NAME
MMC3_MANUAL1
CFG REGISTER
A_DELAY (ps)
G_DELAY (ps)
MUXMODE
0
Y4
mmc3_dat0
362
0
CFG_MMC3_DAT0_OEN
mmc3_dat0
Y4
mmc3_dat0
0
0
CFG_MMC3_DAT0_OUT
mmc3_dat0
AA2
mmc3_dat1
7
0
CFG_MMC3_DAT1_IN
mmc3_dat1
AA2
mmc3_dat1
333
0
CFG_MMC3_DAT1_OEN
mmc3_dat1
AA2
mmc3_dat1
0
0
CFG_MMC3_DAT1_OUT
mmc3_dat1
AA3
mmc3_dat2
0
0
CFG_MMC3_DAT2_IN
mmc3_dat2
AA3
mmc3_dat2
402
0
CFG_MMC3_DAT2_OEN
mmc3_dat2
AA3
mmc3_dat2
0
0
CFG_MMC3_DAT2_OUT
mmc3_dat2
W2
mmc3_dat3
203
0
CFG_MMC3_DAT3_IN
mmc3_dat3
W2
mmc3_dat3
549
0
CFG_MMC3_DAT3_OEN
mmc3_dat3
W2
mmc3_dat3
1
0
CFG_MMC3_DAT3_OUT
mmc3_dat3
Y3
mmc3_dat4
121
0
CFG_MMC3_DAT4_IN
mmc3_dat4
Y3
mmc3_dat4
440
0
CFG_MMC3_DAT4_OEN
mmc3_dat4
Y3
mmc3_dat4
206
0
CFG_MMC3_DAT4_OUT
mmc3_dat4
AA1
mmc3_dat5
336
0
CFG_MMC3_DAT5_IN
mmc3_dat5
AA1
mmc3_dat5
283
0
CFG_MMC3_DAT5_OEN
mmc3_dat5
AA1
mmc3_dat5
174
0
CFG_MMC3_DAT5_OUT
mmc3_dat5
AA4
mmc3_dat6
320
0
CFG_MMC3_DAT6_IN
mmc3_dat6
AA4
mmc3_dat6
443
0
CFG_MMC3_DAT6_OEN
mmc3_dat6
AA4
mmc3_dat6
0
0
CFG_MMC3_DAT6_OUT
mmc3_dat6
AB1
mmc3_dat7
2
0
CFG_MMC3_DAT7_IN
mmc3_dat7
AB1
mmc3_dat7
344
0
CFG_MMC3_DAT7_OEN
mmc3_dat7
AB1
mmc3_dat7
0
0
CFG_MMC3_DAT7_OUT
mmc3_dat7
NOTE
To configure the desired virtual mode the user must set MODESELECT bit and
DELAYMODE bitfield for each corresponding pad control register.
The pad control registers are presented in Table 4-31 and described in Device TRM, Control
Module Chapter.
5.10.6.21 GPIO
The general-purpose interface combines eight general-purpose input/output (GPIO) banks. Each GPIO
module provides up to 32 dedicated general-purpose pins with input and output capabilities; thus, the
general-purpose interface supports up to 186 pins.
These pins can be configured for the following applications:
• Data input (capture)/output (drive)
• Keyboard interface with a debounce cell
• Interrupt generation in active mode upon the detection of external events. Detected events are
processed by two parallel independent interrupt-generation submodules to support biprocessor
operations
• Wake-up request generation in idle mode upon the detection of external events
NOTE
For more information, see the General-Purpose Interface chapter of the Device TRM.
290
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
NOTE
The general-purpose input/output i (i = 1 to 8) bank is also referred to as GPIOi.
5.10.6.22 PRU-ICSS
The device Programmable Real-Time Unit Subsystem and Industrial Communication Subsystem (PRUICSS) consists of dual 32-bit Load / Store RISC CPU cores - Programmable Real-Time Units (PRU0 and
PRU1), shared, data, and instruction memories, internal peripheral modules, and an interrupt controller
(PRU-ICSS_INTC). The programmable nature of the PRUs, along with their access to pins, events and all
SoC resources, provides flexibility in implementing fast real-time responses, specialized data handling
operations, customer peripheral interfaces, and in off-loading tasks from the other processor cores of the
system-on-chip (SoC).
The each PRU-ICSS includes the following main features:
• 21x Enhanced GPIs (EGPIs) and 21x Enhanced GPOs (EGPOs) with asynchronous capture and serial
support per each PRU CPU core
• One Ethernet MII_RT module (PRU-ICSS_MII_RT) with two MII ports and configurable connections to
PRUs
• 1 MDIO Port (PRU-ICSS_MII_MDIO)
• One Industrial Ethernet Peripheral (IEP) to manage/generate Industrial Ethernet functions
• 1 x 16550-compatible UART with a dedicated 192 MHz clock to support 12Mbps Profibus
• 1 Industrial Ethernet timer with 7/9 capture and 8 compare events
• 1 Enhanced Capture Module (ECAP)
• 1 Interrupt Controller (PRU-ICSS_INTC)
• A flexible power management support
• Integrated switched central resource with programmable priority
• Parity control supported by all memories
CAUTION
The I/O timings provided in this section are valid only if signals within a single
IOSET are used. The IOSETs are defined in the Table 5-178 and Table 5-179.
NOTE
For more information about PRU-ICSS subsystems interfaces, please see the Device TRM.
NOTE
To configure the desired virtual mode the user must set MODESELECT bit and
DELAYMODE bitfield for each corresponding pad control register.
The pad control registers are presented in Table 4-31 and described in Device TRM, Control
Module Chapter.
5.10.6.22.1 Programmable Real-Time Unit (PRU-ICSS PRU)
5.10.6.22.1.1 PRU-ICSS PRU Direct Input/Output Mode Electrical Data and Timing
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
291
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 5-156. PRU-ICSS PRU Timing Requirements - Direct Input Mode
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
1
tw(GPI)
Pulse width, GPI
MIN
2
tsk(GPI)
Skew between GPI[20:0] signals
2×P
MAX
(1)
UNIT
ns
4.5
ns
(1) ICSS_CLK clock period
1
GPI[m:0]
2
SPRS91x_TIMING_PRU_01
Figure 5-104. PRU-ICSS PRU Direct Input Timing
(1) m in GPI[m:0] = 20
Table 5-157. PRU-ICSS PRU Switching Requirements – Direct Output Mode
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
1
tw(GPO)
Pulse width, GPO
MIN
2
tsk(GPO)
Skew between GPO[20:0] signals
2×P
MAX
(1)
UNIT
ns
4.5
ns
(1) ICSS_CLK clock period
1
GPO[n:0]
2
SPRS91x_TIMING_PRU_02
Figure 5-105. PRU-ICSS PRU Direct Output Timing
(1) n in GPO[n:0] = 20
5.10.6.22.1.2 PRU-ICSS PRU Parallel Capture Mode Electrical Data and Timing
Table 5-158. PRU-ICSS PRU Timing Requirements - Parallel Capture Mode
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
1
tw(CLOCKIN)
Cyle time, CLOCKIN
MIN
2
tw(CLOCKIN_L)
Pulse duration, CLOCKIN low
3
tw(CLOCKIN_H)
Pulse duration, CLOCKIN high
4
tsu(DATAIN-CLOCKIN)
Setup time, DATAIN valid before CLOCKIN
5
th(CLOCKIN-DATAIN)
Hold time, DATAIN valid after CLOCKIN
MAX
20
UNIT
ns
9
11
ns
9
11
ns
4.5
ns
0
ns
1
3
2
CLOCKIN
DATAIN
4
5
SPRS91x_TIMING_PRU_03
Figure 5-106. PRU-ICSS PRU Parallel Capture Timing - Rising Edge Mode
292
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
1
3
2
CLOCKIN
DATAIN
5
4
SPRS91x_TIMING_PRU_04
Figure 5-107. PRU-ICSS PRU Parallel Capture Timing - Falling Edge Mode
5.10.6.22.1.3
PRU-ICSS PRU Shift Mode Electrical Data and Timing
Table 5-159. PRU-ICSS PRU Timing Requirements – Shift In Mode
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
1
tc(DATAIN)
Cycle time, DATAIN
MIN
2
tw(DATAIN)
Pulse width, DATAIN
MAX
UNIT
10.00
ns
0.45 × P
ns
(1)
(1) P = 10.00ns
1
2
DATAIN
SPRS91x_TIMING_PRU_05
Figure 5-108. PRU-ICSS PRU Shift In Timing
Table 5-160. PRU-ICSS PRU Switching Requirements - Shift Out Mode
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
1
tc(CLOCKOUT)
Cycle time, CLOCKOUT
MIN
2
tw(CLOCKOUT)
Pulse width, CLOCKOUT
3
td(CLOCKOUT-DATAOUT)
Delay time, CLOCKOUT to DATAOUT Valid
MAX
UNIT
10.00
ns
0.45 × P
ns
(1)
-3.00
3.60
ns
(1) P = 10.00ns
1
2
CLOCKOUT
DATAOUT
3
SPRS91x_TIMING_PRU_06
Figure 5-109. PRU-ICSS PRU Shift Out Timing
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
293
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
5.10.6.22.1.4
www.ti.com
PRU-ICSS PRU Sigma Delta and EnDAT Modes
Table 5-161. PRU-ICSS PRU Timing Requirements - Sigma Delta Mode
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
MIN
1
tw(SDx_CLK)
Pulse width, SDx_CLK
2
tsu(SDx_D-SDx_CLK) Setup time, SDx_D valid before SDx_CLK active edge
3
th(SDx_CLK-SDx_D)
MAX
UNIT
20
ns
10
ns
5
ns
Hold time, SDx_D valid before SDx_CLK active edge
1
SDx_CLK
SDx_D
2
3
SPRS91x_TIMING_PRU_07
Figure 5-110. PRU-ICSS PRU SD_CLK Falling Active Edge
1
SDx_CLK
SDx_D
2
3
SPRS91x_TIMING_PRU_08
Figure 5-111. PRU-ICSS PRU SD_CLK Rising Active Edge
Table 5-162. PRU-ICSS PRU Timing Requirements - EnDAT Mode
NO.
1
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
tw(ENDATx_IN)
Pulse width, ENDATx_IN
MIN
MAX
40
UNIT
ns
Table 5-163. PRU-ICSS PRU Switching Requirements - EnDAT Mode
NO.
294
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
2
tw(ENDATx_CLK)
Pulse width, ENDATx_CLK
3
td(ENDATx_OUTENDATx_CLK)
Delay time, ENDATx_CLK fall to ENDATx_OUT
4
td(ENDATx_OUT_EN- Delay time, ENDATx_CLK Fall to ENDATx_OUT_EN
ENDATx_CLK)
Specifications
MIN
MAX
20
UNIT
ns
-10
10
ns
-10
10
ns
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
ENDATx_IN
1
2
ENDATx_CLK
ENDATx_OUT
3
ENDATx_OUT_EN
4
SPRS91x_TIMING_PRU_09
Figure 5-112. PRU-ICSS PRU EnDAT Timing
5.10.6.22.2
PRU-ICSS EtherCAT (PRU-ICSS ECAT)
5.10.6.22.2.1 PRU-ICSS ECAT Electrical Data and Timing
Table 5-164. PRU-ICSS ECAT Timing Requirements – Input Validated With LATCH_IN
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
1
tw(EDIO_LATCH_IN)
Pulse width, EDIO_LATCH_IN
2
tsu(EDIO_DATA_IN-
3
MIN
MAX
UNIT
100.00
ns
20.00
ns
EDIO_LATCH_IN)
Setup time, EDIO_DATA_IN valid before EDIO_LATCH_IN active
edge
th(EDIO_LATCH_IN-
Hold time, EDIO_DATA_IN valid after EDIO_LATCH_IN active edge
20.00
ns
EDIO_DATA_IN)
EDIO_LATCH_IN
1
2
3
EDIO_DATA_IN[7:0]
SPRS91x_TIMING_PRU_ECAT_01
Figure 5-113. PRU-ICSS ECAT Input Validated with LATCH_IN Timing
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
295
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 5-165. PRU-ICSS ECAT Timing Requirements – Input Validated With SYNCx
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
1
tw(EDC_SYNCx_OUT)
Pulse width, EDC_SYNCx_OUT
2
tsu(EDIO_DATA_INEDC_SYNCx_OUT)
th(EDC_SYNCx_OUT-
3
MIN
MAX
UNIT
100.00
ns
Setup time, EDIO_DATA_IN valid before EDC_SYNCx_OUT active
edge
20.00
ns
Hold time, EDIO_DATA_IN valid after EDC_SYNCx_OUT active edge
20.00
ns
EDIO_DATA_IN)
EDC_SYNCx_OUT
1
2
3
EDIO_DATA_IN[7:0]
SPRS91x_TIMING_PRU_ECAT_02
Figure 5-114. PRU-ICSS ECAT Input Validated With SYNCx Timing
Table 5-166. PRU-ICSS ECAT Timing Requirements – Input Validated With Start of Frame (SOF)
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
1
tw(EDIO_SOF)
Pulse duration, EDIO_SOF
MIN
2
tsu(EDIO_DATA_IN-
Setup time, EDIO_DATA_IN valid before EDIO_SOF active edge
20.00
ns
Hold time, EDIO_DATA_IN valid after EDIO_SOF active edge
20.00
ns
4×P
(1)
MAX
5×P
(1)
UNIT
ns
EDIO_SOF)
3
th(EDIO_SOFEDIO_DATA_IN)
(1) ICSS_IEP_CLK clock period
EDIO_SOF
1
2
3
EDIO_DATA_IN[7:0]
SPRS91x_TIMING_PRU_ECAT_03
Figure 5-115. PRU-ICSS ECAT Input Validated With SOF
Table 5-167. PRU-ICSS ECAT Timing Requirements - LATCHx_IN
NO.
1
296
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
tw(EDC_LATCHx_IN)
Pulse duration, EDC_LATCHx_IN
Specifications
MIN
3×P
(1)
MAX
UNIT
ns
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
(1) ICSS_IEP_CLK clock period
EDC_LATCHx_IN
1
SPRS91x_TIMING_PRU_ECAT_04
Figure 5-116. PRU-ICSS ECAT LATCHx_IN Timing
Table 5-168. PRU-ICSS ECAT Switching Requirements - Digital IOs
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
1
tw(EDIO_OUTVALID)
Pulse duration, EDIO_OUTVALID
2
td(EDIO_OUTVALID-
Delay time, EDIO_OUTVALID to EDIO_DATA_OUT
MIN
MAX
(1)
32 × P
(1)
ns
0.00 18 × P
(1)
ns
8
ns
14 × P
UNIT
EDIO_DATA_OUT)
1
tsk(EDIO_DATA_OUT)
EDIO_DATA_OUT skew
(1) ICSS_IEP_CLK clock period
5.10.6.22.3 PRU-ICSS MII_RT and Switch
5.10.6.22.3.1 PRU-ICSS MDIO Electrical Data and Timing
Table 5-169. PRU-ICSS MDIO Timing Requirements – MDIO_DATA
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
MIN
1
tsu(MDIO-MDC)
Setup time, MDIO valid before MDC high
2
th(MDIO-MDC)
Hold time, MDIO valid from MDC high
MAX
UNIT
90
ns
0
ns
1
2
MDIO_CLK (Output)
MDIO_DATA (Input)
SPRS91x_TIMING_PRU_MII_RT_01
Figure 5-117. PRU-ICSS MDIO_DATA Timing - Input Mode
Table 5-170. PRU-ICSS MDIO Switching Characteristics - MDIO_CLK
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
MIN
1
tc(MDC)
Cycle time, MDC
400
MAX
ns
2
tw(MDCH)
Pulse duration, MDC high
160
ns
3
tw(MDCL)
Pulse duration, MDC low
160
4
tt(MDC)
Transition time, MDC
ns
5
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
UNIT
ns
297
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
4
1
3
2
MDIO_CLK
4
SPRS91x_TIMING_PRU_MII_RT_02
Figure 5-118. PRU-ICSS MDIO_CLK Timing
Table 5-171. PRU-ICSS MDIO Switching Characteristics – MDIO_DATA
NO.
1
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
td(MDC-MDIO)
Delay time, MDC high to MDIO valid
MIN
MAX
UNIT
0
390
ns
1
MDIO_CLK (Output)
MDIO_DATA (Output)
SPRS91x_TIMING_PRU_MII_RT_03
Figure 5-119. PRU-ICSS MDIO_DATA Timing – Output Mode
5.10.6.22.3.2 PRU-ICSS MII_RT Electrical Data and Timing
NOTE
In order to ensure the MII_RT IO timing values published in the device data manual, the
ICSS_CLK clock must be configured for 200MHz (default value) and the TX_CLK_DELAY
bitfield in the PRUSS_MII_RT_TXCFG0/1 register must be set to 6h (non-default value).
Table 5-172. PRU-ICSS MII_RT Timing Requirements – MII[x]_RXCLK
NO.
1
2
3
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
tc(RX_CLK)
Cycle time, RX_CLK
tw(RX_CLKH)
tw(RX_CLKL)
Pulse duration, RX_CLK high
Pulse duration, RX_CLK low
SPEED
MIN
MAX
UNIT
10 Mbps
399.96
400.04
ns
100 Mbps
39.996
40.004
ns
10 Mbps
140
260
ns
100 Mbps
14
26
ns
10 Mbps
140
260
ns
100 Mbps
14
26
ns
4
1
3
2
MII_RXCLK
4
SPRS91x_TIMING_PRU_MII_RT_04
Figure 5-120. PRU-ICSS MII[x]_RXCLK Timing
298
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 5-173. PRU-ICSS MII_RT Timing Requirements - MII[x]_TXCLK
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
SPEED
MIN
MAX
1
tc(TX_CLK)
Cycle time, TX_CLK
10 Mbps
399.96
400.04
ns
100 Mbps
39.996
40.004
ns
2
tw(TX_CLKH)
Pulse duration, TX_CLK high
10 Mbps
140
260
ns
100 Mbps
14
26
ns
10 Mbps
140
260
ns
100 Mbps
14
3
tw(TX_CLKL)
Pulse duration, TX_CLK low
4
tt(TX_CLK)
Transition time, TX_CLK
UNIT
26
ns
10 Mbps
3
ns
100 Mbps
3
ns
4
1
3
2
MII_TXCLK
4
SPRS91x_TIMING_PRU_MII_RT_05
Figure 5-121. PRU-ICSS MII[x]_TXCLK Timing
Table 5-174. PRU-ICSS MII_RT Timing Requirements - MII_RXD[3:0], MII_RXDV, and MII_RXER
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
SPEED
MIN
1
tsu(RXD-RX_CLK)
Setup time, RXD[3:0] valid before RX_CLK
10 Mbps
8
ns
tsu(RX_DV-RX_CLK)
Setup time, RX_DV valid before RX_CLK
tsu(RX_ER-RX_CLK)
Setup time, RX_ER valid before RX_CLK
tsu(RXD-RX_CLK)
Setup time, RXD[3:0] valid before RX_CLK
100 Mbps
8
ns
tsu(RX_DV-RX_CLK)
Setup time, RX_DV valid before RX_CLK
tsu(RX_ER-RX_CLK)
Setup time, RX_ER valid before RX_CLK
th(RX_CLK-RXD)
Hold time RXD[3:0] valid after RX_CLK
10 Mbps
8
ns
th(RX_CLK-RX_DV)
Hold time RX_DV valid after RX_CLK
th(RX_CLK-RX_ER)
Hold time RX_ER valid after RX_CLK
th(RX_CLK-RXD)
Hold time RXD[3:0] valid after RX_CLK
100 Mbps
8
ns
th(RX_CLK-RX_DV)
Hold time RX_DV valid after RX_CLK
th(RX_CLK-RX_ER)
Hold time RX_ER valid after RX_CLK
2
MAX
UNIT
1
2
MII_MRCLK (Input)
MII_RXD[3:0],
MII_RXDV,
MII_RXER (Inputs)
SPRS91x_TIMING_PRU_MII_RT_06
Figure 5-122. PRU-ICSS MII_RXD[3:0], MII_RXDV, and MII_RXER Timing
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
299
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 5-175. PRU-ICSS MII_RT Switching Characteristics - MII_TXD[3:0] and MII_TXEN
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
SPEED
MIN
MAX
1
td(TX_CLK-TXD)
Delay time, TX_CLK high to TXD[3:0] valid
10 Mbps
5
25
UNIT
ns
td(TX_CLK-TX_EN)
Delay time, TX_CLK to TX_EN valid
td(TX_CLK-TXD)
Delay time, TX_CLK high to TXD[3:0] valid
100 Mbps
5
25
ns
td(TX_CLK-TX_EN)
Delay time, TX_CLK to TX_EN valid
1
MII_TXCLK (input)
MII_TXD[3:0],
MII_TXEN (outputs)
SPRS91x_TIMING_PRU_MII_RT_07
Figure 5-123. PRU-ICSS MII_TXD[3:0], MII_TXEN Timing
5.10.6.22.4 PRU-ICSS Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter (PRU-ICSS UART)
Table 5-176. Timing Requirements for PRU-ICSS UART Receive
NO.
3
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
tw(RX)
Pulse duration, receive start, stop, data bit
MIN
MAX
(1)
1.05U(1)
0.96U
UNIT
ns
(1) U = UART baud time = 1/programmed baud rate.
Table 5-177. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for PRU-ICSS UART
Transmit
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
MIN
1
ƒbaud(baud)
Maximum programmable baud rate
2
tw(TX)
Pulse duration, transmit start, stop, data bit
U-2
MAX
UNIT
0
12
MHz
(1)
U + 2(1)
ns
(1) U = UART baud time = 1/programmed baud rate.
2
1
UART_TXD
Start
Bit
Data Bits
3
4
UART_RXD
Start
Bit
Data Bits
SPRS961_TIMING_UART_01
Figure 5-124. PRU-ICSS UART Timing
5.10.6.22.5 PRU-ICSS IOSETs
In Table 5-178 are presented the specific groupings of signals (IOSET) for use with PRU-ICSS1.
300
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 5-178. PRU-ICSS1 IOSETs
SIGNALS
IOSET1
BALL
IOSET2
MUX
BALL
MUX
PRU-ICSS 1
pr1_pru1_gpi20
D13
12
pr1_pru1_gpi19
C13
12
pr1_pru1_gpi18
E13
12
pr1_pru1_gpi17
B13
12
pr1_pru1_gpi16
F11
12
pr1_pru1_gpi15
E11
12
pr1_pru1_gpi14
A13
12
pr1_pru1_gpi13
A12
12
pr1_pru1_gpi12
B12
12
pr1_pru1_gpi11
C11
12
pr1_pru1_gpi10
D11
12
pr1_pru1_gpo20
D13
13
pr1_pru1_gpo19
C13
13
pr1_pru1_gpo18
E13
13
pr1_pru1_gpo17
B13
13
pr1_pru1_gpo16
F11
13
pr1_pru1_gpo15
E11
13
pr1_pru1_gpo14
A13
13
pr1_pru1_gpo13
A12
13
pr1_pru1_gpo12
B12
13
pr1_pru1_gpo11
C11
13
pr1_pru1_gpo10
D11
13
pr1_pru1_gpi9
B11
12
pr1_pru1_gpi8
C10
12
pr1_pru1_gpi7
D10
12
pr1_pru1_gpi6
E10
12
pr1_pru1_gpi5
B10
12
pr1_pru1_gpi4
A10
12
pr1_pru1_gpi3
F10
12
pr1_pru1_gpi2
A11
12
pr1_pru1_gpi1
A8
12
pr1_pru1_gpi0
A9
12
pr1_pru1_gpo9
B11
13
pr1_pru1_gpo8
C10
13
pr1_pru1_gpo7
D10
13
pr1_pru1_gpo6
E10
13
pr1_pru1_gpo5
B10
13
pr1_pru1_gpo4
A10
13
pr1_pru1_gpo3
F10
13
pr1_pru1_gpo2
A11
13
pr1_pru1_gpo1
A8
13
pr1_pru1_gpo0
A9
13
pr1_mii1_crs
D13
11
pr1_mii1_rxlink
E13
11
pr1_mii1_col
C13
11
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
301
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 5-178. PRU-ICSS1 IOSETs (continued)
SIGNALS
IOSET1
IOSET2
BALL
MUX
BALL
MUX
pr1_edio_data_out7
A7
13
pr1_edio_data_out6
B9
13
pr1_edio_data_out5
C8
13
pr1_edio_data_out4
B8
13
pr1_edio_data_out3
E8
13
pr1_edio_data_out2
C7
13
pr1_edio_data_out1
B7
13
pr1_edio_data_out0
D8
13
pr1_edio_data_in7
A7
12
pr1_edio_data_in6
B9
12
pr1_edio_data_in5
C8
12
pr1_edio_data_in4
B8
12
pr1_edio_data_in3
E8
12
pr1_edio_data_in2
C7
12
pr1_edio_data_in1
B7
12
pr1_edio_data_in0
D8
12
pr1_edio_sof
A11
11
pr1_edc_latch0_in
A9
11
pr1_edc_sync0_out
A8
11
pr1_mii0_col
L5
11
pr1_mii0_rxlink
L6
11
pr1_mii0_crs
P4
11
pr1_uart0_cts_n
E8
11
pr1_uart0_rts_n
B8
11
pr1_uart0_txd
B9
11
pr1_uart0_rxd
C8
11
pr1_ecap0_ecap_capin_apwm
_o
A7
11
pr1_mii1_txd3
B10
11
pr1_mii1_txd2
E10
11
pr1_mii1_txd1
B11
11
pr1_mii1_txd0
D11
11
pr1_mii1_rxd3
A12
11
pr1_mii1_rxd2
A13
11
pr1_mii1_rxd1
E11
11
pr1_mii1_rxd0
F11
11
pr1_mii1_rxdv
B12
11
pr1_mii1_txen
A10
11
pr1_mii1_rxer
B13
11
pr1_mii_mr1_clk
C11
11
pr1_mii_mt1_clk
F10
11
pr1_mii0_txd3
P2
11
pr1_mii0_txd2
N1
11
pr1_mii0_txd1
N3
11
pr1_mii0_txd0
N4
11
pr1_mii0_rxd3
T4
11
PRU-ICSS 1 MII
302
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 5-178. PRU-ICSS1 IOSETs (continued)
SIGNALS
IOSET1
IOSET2
BALL
MUX
pr1_mii0_rxd2
T5
11
pr1_mii0_rxd1
R2
11
pr1_mii0_rxd0
R1
11
pr1_mii0_rxdv
N5
11
pr1_mii0_txen
P1
11
pr1_mii0_rxer
P3
11
pr1_mii_mt0_clk
N2
11
pr1_mii_mr0_clk
N6
11
pr1_mdio_mdclk
D10
11
pr1_mdio_data
C10
11
BALL
MUX
In Table 5-179, Table 5-180 and Table 5-181 are presented the specific groupings of signals (IOSET) for
use with PRU-ICSS2.
Table 5-179. PRU-ICSS2 IOSETs
SIGNALS
IOSET1
BALL
IOSET2
MUX
BALL
MUX
PRU-ICSS 2
pr2_pru1_gpi16
N4
12
E16
12
pr2_pru1_gpi15
N3
12
E17
12
pr2_pru1_gpi14
P1
12
A19
12
pr2_pru1_gpi13
N1
12
B18
12
pr2_pru1_gpi12
P2
12
B16
12
pr2_pru1_gpi11
N2
12
B17
12
pr2_pru1_gpi10
R1
12
A18
12
pr2_pru1_gpi9
R2
12
B14
12
pr2_pru1_gpi8
P3
12
D14
12
pr2_pru1_gpi7
P4
12
C16
12
pr2_pru1_gpi6
T5
12
J24
12
pr2_pru1_gpi5
T4
12
J25
12
pr2_pru1_gpi4
N6
12
AC4
12
pr2_pru1_gpi3
N5
12
AA5
12
pr2_pru1_gpi2
P5
12
U6
12
pr2_pru1_gpi1
L6
12
AC3
12
pr2_pru1_gpi0
L5
12
D23
12
pr2_pru1_gpo16
N4
13
E16
13
pr2_pru1_gpo15
N3
13
E17
13
pr2_pru1_gpo14
P1
13
A19
13
pr2_pru1_gpo13
N1
13
B18
13
pr2_pru1_gpo12
P2
13
B16
13
pr2_pru1_gpo11
N2
13
B17
13
pr2_pru1_gpo10
R1
13
A18
13
pr2_pru1_gpo9
R2
13
B14
13
pr2_pru1_gpo8
P3
13
D14
13
pr2_pru1_gpo7
P4
13
C16
13
pr2_pru1_gpo6
T5
13
J24
13
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
303
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 5-179. PRU-ICSS2 IOSETs (continued)
SIGNALS
304
IOSET1
IOSET2
BALL
MUX
BALL
MUX
pr2_pru1_gpo5
T4
pr2_pru1_gpo4
N6
13
J25
13
13
AC4
pr2_pru1_gpo3
13
N5
13
AA5
13
pr2_pru1_gpo2
P5
13
U6
13
pr2_pru1_gpo1
L6
13
AC3
13
pr2_pru1_gpo0
L5
13
D23
13
pr2_pru0_gpi20
F16
12
pr2_pru0_gpi19
D19
12
pr2_pru0_gpi18
E19
12
pr2_pru0_gpi17
B21
12
pr2_pru0_gpi16
A21
12
pr2_pru0_gpi15
B23
12
pr2_pru0_gpi14
B22
12
pr2_pru0_gpi13
A23
12
pr2_pru0_gpi12
A22
12
pr2_pru0_gpi11
AB1
12
pr2_pru0_gpi10
AA4
12
pr2_pru0_gpi9
AA1
12
pr2_pru0_gpi8
Y3
12
pr2_pru0_gpi7
W2
12
pr2_pru0_gpi6
AA3
12
pr2_pru0_gpi5
AA2
12
pr2_pru0_gpi4
Y4
12
pr2_pru0_gpi3
Y1
12
pr2_pru0_gpi2
Y2
12
pr2_pru0_gpi1
Y6
12
pr2_pru0_gpi0
Y5
12
pr2_pru0_gpo20
F16
13
pr2_pru0_gpo19
D19
13
pr2_pru0_gpo18
E19
13
pr2_pru0_gpo17
B21
13
pr2_pru0_gpo16
A21
13
pr2_pru0_gpo15
B23
13
pr2_pru0_gpo14
B22
13
pr2_pru0_gpo13
A23
13
pr2_pru0_gpo12
A22
13
pr2_pru0_gpo11
AB1
13
pr2_pru0_gpo10
AA4
13
pr2_pru0_gpo9
AA1
13
pr2_pru0_gpo8
Y3
13
pr2_pru0_gpo7
W2
13
pr2_pru0_gpo6
AA3
13
pr2_pru0_gpo5
AA2
13
pr2_pru0_gpo4
Y4
13
pr2_pru0_gpo3
Y1
13
pr2_pru0_gpo2
Y2
13
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 5-179. PRU-ICSS2 IOSETs (continued)
SIGNALS
IOSET1
IOSET2
BALL
MUX
BALL
MUX
pr2_pru0_gpo1
Y6
13
pr2_pru0_gpo0
Y5
13
pr2_mii1_crs
J24
11
pr2_mii1_rxlink
B23
11
pr2_mii0_crs
A22
11
pr2_mii0_rxlink
B21
11
pr2_mii0_col
A23
11
pr2_mii1_col
J25
11
PRU-ICSS 2 MII
pr2_mii1_txd3
Y2
11
pr2_mii1_txd2
Y1
11
pr2_mii1_txd1
Y4
11
pr2_mii1_txd0
AA2
11
pr2_mii1_rxd3
Y3
11
pr2_mii1_rxd2
AA1
11
pr2_mii1_rxd1
AA4
11
pr2_mii1_rxd0
AB1
11
pr2_mii_mr1_clk
AA3
11
pr2_mii1_rxer
B22
11
pr2_mii_mt1_clk
Y5
11
pr2_mii1_rxdv
W2
11
pr2_mii1_txen
Y6
11
pr2_mii0_txd3
B17
11
pr2_mii0_txd2
B16
11
pr2_mii0_txd1
B18
11
pr2_mii0_txd0
A19
11
pr2_mii0_rxd3
F16
11
pr2_mii0_rxd2
E19
11
pr2_mii0_rxd1
D19
11
pr2_mii0_rxd0
A21
11
pr2_mii_mr0_clk
E17
11
pr2_mii0_rxer
D14
11
pr2_mii_mt0_clk
B14
11
pr2_mii0_rxdv
E16
11
pr2_mii0_txen
A18
11
pr2_mdio_mdclk
C16
11
AA5
11
pr2_mdio_data
C17
11
AC4
11
Table 5-180. PRU-ICSS2 IOSETs (EnDAT)(1)
SIGNALS
IOSET3
BALL
IOSET4
MUX
BALL
MUX
L5
13
D23
13
PRU-ICSS 2 EnDAT
pr2_pru1_endat0_clk
pr2_pru1_endat0_out
L6
13
AC3
13
pr2_pru1_endat0_out_en
P5
13
U6
13
pr2_pru1_endat1_clk
N5
13
AA5
13
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
305
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 5-180. PRU-ICSS2 IOSETs (EnDAT)(1) (continued)
SIGNALS
IOSET3
IOSET4
BALL
MUX
BALL
MUX
pr2_pru1_endat1_out
N6
13
AC4
13
pr2_pru1_endat1_out_en
T4
13
J25
13
pr2_pru1_endat2_clk
T5
13
J24
13
pr2_pru1_endat2_out
P4
13
C16
13
pr2_pru1_endat2_out_en
P3
13
D14
13
pr2_pru1_endat0_in
R2
12
B14
12
pr2_pru1_endat1_in
R1
12
A18
12
pr2_pru1_endat2_in
N2
12
B17
12
(1) These signals are internally muxed with the PRU GPI/GPO signals. Refer to the PRU chapter in the TRM for more details about the
PRU-ICSS internal wrapper multiplexing.
Table 5-181. PRU-ICSS2 IOSETs (Sigma Delta)(1)
SIGNALS
IOSET4
BALL
MUX
pr2_pru0_sd0_clk
Y5
12
PRU-ICSS 2 SD
pr2_pru0_sd0_d
Y6
12
pr2_pru0_sd1_clk
Y2
12
pr2_pru0_sd1_d
Y1
12
pr2_pru0_sd2_clk
Y4
12
pr2_pru0_sd2_d
AA2
12
pr2_pru0_sd3_clk
AA3
12
pr2_pru0_sd3_d
W2
12
pr2_pru0_sd4_clk
Y3
12
pr2_pru0_sd4_d
AA1
12
pr2_pru0_sd5_clk
AA4
12
pr2_pru0_sd5_d
AB1
12
pr2_pru0_sd6_clk
A22
12
pr2_pru0_sd6_d
A23
12
pr2_pru0_sd7_clk
B22
12
pr2_pru0_sd7_d
B23
12
pr2_pru0_sd8_clk
A21
12
pr2_pru0_sd8_d
B21
12
(1) These signals are internally muxed with the PRU GPI/GPO signals. Refer to the PRU chapter in the TRM for more details about the
PRU-ICSS internal wrapper multiplexing.
5.10.6.22.6 PRU-ICSS Manual Functional Mapping
NOTE
To configure the desired Manual IO Timing Mode the user must follow the steps described in
section "Manual IO Timing Modes" of the Device TRM.
The associated registers to configure are listed in the CFG REGISTER column. For more
information see the Control Module Chapter in the Device TRM.
Manual IO Timings Modes must be used to ensure some IO timings for PRU-ICSS1 PRU1 Direct Input
mode. See Table 5-30 Modes Summary for a list of IO timings requiring the use of Manual IO Timings
Modes. See Table 5-182 Manual Functions Mapping for PRU-ICSS1 PRU1 Direct Input mode for a
definition of the Manual modes.
306
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 5-182 lists the A_DELAY and G_DELAY values needed to calculate the correct values to be set in
the CFG_x registers.
Table 5-182. Manual Functions Mapping for PRU-ICSS1 PRU1 Direct Input mode
BALL
BALL NAME
PR1_PRU1_DIR_IN_MANUAL
A_DELAY (ps)
G_DELAY (ps)
CFG REGISTER
MUXMODE
12
D10
vin2a_d10
0
800
CFG_VIN2A_D10_IN
pr1_pru1_gpi7
C10
vin2a_d11
0
0
CFG_VIN2A_D11_IN
pr1_pru1_gpi8
B11
vin2a_d12
0
200
CFG_VIN2A_D12_IN
pr1_pru1_gpi9
D11
vin2a_d13
0
0
CFG_VIN2A_D13_IN
pr1_pru1_gpi10
C11
vin2a_d14
0
0
CFG_VIN2A_D14_IN
pr1_pru1_gpi11
B12
vin2a_d15
0
400
CFG_VIN2A_D15_IN
pr1_pru1_gpi12
A12
vin2a_d16
0
300
CFG_VIN2A_D16_IN
pr1_pru1_gpi13
A13
vin2a_d17
0
400
CFG_VIN2A_D17_IN
pr1_pru1_gpi14
E11
vin2a_d18
0
900
CFG_VIN2A_D18_IN
pr1_pru1_gpi15
F11
vin2a_d19
0
1500
CFG_VIN2A_D19_IN
pr1_pru1_gpi16
B13
vin2a_d20
0
100
CFG_VIN2A_D20_IN
pr1_pru1_gpi17
E13
vin2a_d21
0
500
CFG_VIN2A_D21_IN
pr1_pru1_gpi18
C13
vin2a_d22
0
500
CFG_VIN2A_D22_IN
pr1_pru1_gpi19
D13
vin2a_d23
0
600
CFG_VIN2A_D23_IN
pr1_pru1_gpi20
A9
vin2a_d3
0
900
CFG_VIN2A_D3_IN
pr1_pru1_gpi0
A8
vin2a_d4
0
100
CFG_VIN2A_D4_IN
pr1_pru1_gpi1
A11
vin2a_d5
0
600
CFG_VIN2A_D5_IN
pr1_pru1_gpi2
F10
vin2a_d6
0
200
CFG_VIN2A_D6_IN
pr1_pru1_gpi3
A10
vin2a_d7
0
400
CFG_VIN2A_D7_IN
pr1_pru1_gpi4
B10
vin2a_d8
0
500
CFG_VIN2A_D8_IN
pr1_pru1_gpi5
E10
vin2a_d9
0
600
CFG_VIN2A_D9_IN
pr1_pru1_gpi6
Manual IO Timings Modes must be used to ensure some IO timings for PRU-ICSS1 PRU1 Direct Output
mode. See Table 5-30 Modes Summary for a list of IO timings requiring the use of Manual IO Timings
Modes. See Table 5-183 Manual Functions Mapping for PRU-ICSS1 PRU1 Direct Output mode for a
definition of the Manual modes.
Table 5-183 lists the A_DELAY and G_DELAY values needed to calculate the correct values to be set in
the CFG_x registers.
Table 5-183. Manual Functions Mapping for PRU-ICSS1 PRU1 Direct Output mode
BALL
BALL NAME
PR1_PRU1_DIR_OUT_MANUAL
A_DELAY (ps)
G_DELAY (ps)
CFG REGISTER
MUXMODE
13
D10
vin2a_d10
0
1000
CFG_VIN2A_D10_OUT
pr1_pru1_gpo7
C10
vin2a_d11
0
1300
CFG_VIN2A_D11_OUT
pr1_pru1_gpo8
B11
vin2a_d12
0
2300
CFG_VIN2A_D12_OUT
pr1_pru1_gpo9
D11
vin2a_d13
0
2200
CFG_VIN2A_D13_OUT
pr1_pru1_gpo10
C11
vin2a_d14
0
1800
CFG_VIN2A_D14_OUT
pr1_pru1_gpo11
B12
vin2a_d15
0
1800
CFG_VIN2A_D15_OUT
pr1_pru1_gpo12
A12
vin2a_d16
0
1600
CFG_VIN2A_D16_OUT
pr1_pru1_gpo13
A13
vin2a_d17
0
2000
CFG_VIN2A_D17_OUT
pr1_pru1_gpo14
E11
vin2a_d18
0
700
CFG_VIN2A_D18_OUT
pr1_pru1_gpo15
F11
vin2a_d19
0
700
CFG_VIN2A_D19_OUT
pr1_pru1_gpo16
B13
vin2a_d20
0
500
CFG_VIN2A_D20_OUT
pr1_pru1_gpo17
E13
vin2a_d21
0
400
CFG_VIN2A_D21_OUT
pr1_pru1_gpo18
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
307
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 5-183. Manual Functions Mapping for PRU-ICSS1 PRU1 Direct Output mode (continued)
BALL
BALL NAME
PR1_PRU1_DIR_OUT_MANUAL
A_DELAY (ps)
CFG REGISTER
G_DELAY (ps)
MUXMODE
13
C13
vin2a_d22
0
0
CFG_VIN2A_D22_OUT
pr1_pru1_gpo19
D13
vin2a_d23
0
400
CFG_VIN2A_D23_OUT
pr1_pru1_gpo20
A9
vin2a_d3
0
2200
CFG_VIN2A_D3_OUT
pr1_pru1_gpo0
A8
vin2a_d4
540
2800
CFG_VIN2A_D4_OUT
pr1_pru1_gpo1
A11
vin2a_d5
0
400
CFG_VIN2A_D5_OUT
pr1_pru1_gpo2
F10
vin2a_d6
0
1500
CFG_VIN2A_D6_OUT
pr1_pru1_gpo3
A10
vin2a_d7
0
2200
CFG_VIN2A_D7_OUT
pr1_pru1_gpo4
B10
vin2a_d8
0
2600
CFG_VIN2A_D8_OUT
pr1_pru1_gpo5
E10
vin2a_d9
0
2300
CFG_VIN2A_D9_OUT
pr1_pru1_gpo6
Manual IO Timings Modes must be used to ensure some IO timings for PRU-ICSS1 PRU1 Parallel
Capture Mode. See Table 5-30 Modes Summary for a list of IO timings requiring the use of Manual IO
Timings Modes. See Table 5-184 Manual Functions Mapping for PRU-ICSS1 PRU1 Parallel Capture
Mode for a definition of the Manual modes.
Table 5-184 lists the A_DELAY and G_DELAY values needed to calculate the correct values to be set in
the CFG_x registers.
Table 5-184. Manual Functions Mapping for PRU-ICSS1 PRU1 Parallel Capture Mode
BALL
BALL NAME
PR1_PRU1_PAR_CAP_MANUAL
A_DELAY (ps)
G_DELAY (ps)
CFG REGISTER
MUXMODE
12
D10
vin2a_d10
1535
0
CFG_VIN2A_D10_IN
pr1_pru1_gpi7
C10
vin2a_d11
1151
0
CFG_VIN2A_D11_IN
pr1_pru1_gpi8
B11
vin2a_d12
1173
0
CFG_VIN2A_D12_IN
pr1_pru1_gpi9
D11
vin2a_d13
970
0
CFG_VIN2A_D13_IN
pr1_pru1_gpi10
C11
vin2a_d14
1196
0
CFG_VIN2A_D14_IN
pr1_pru1_gpi11
B12
vin2a_d15
1286
0
CFG_VIN2A_D15_IN
pr1_pru1_gpi12
A12
vin2a_d16
1354
0
CFG_VIN2A_D16_IN
pr1_pru1_gpi13
A13
vin2a_d17
1331
0
CFG_VIN2A_D17_IN
pr1_pru1_gpi14
E11
vin2a_d18
2097
0
CFG_VIN2A_D18_IN
pr1_pru1_gpi15
F11
vin2a_d19
0
453
CFG_VIN2A_D19_IN
pr1_pru1_gpi16
A9
vin2a_d3
1566
0
CFG_VIN2A_D3_IN
pr1_pru1_gpi0
A8
vin2a_d4
1012
0
CFG_VIN2A_D4_IN
pr1_pru1_gpi1
A11
vin2a_d5
1337
0
CFG_VIN2A_D5_IN
pr1_pru1_gpi2
F10
vin2a_d6
1130
0
CFG_VIN2A_D6_IN
pr1_pru1_gpi3
A10
vin2a_d7
1202
0
CFG_VIN2A_D7_IN
pr1_pru1_gpi4
B10
vin2a_d8
1395
0
CFG_VIN2A_D8_IN
pr1_pru1_gpi5
E10
vin2a_d9
1338
0
CFG_VIN2A_D9_IN
pr1_pru1_gpi6
Manual IO Timings Modes must be used to ensure some IO timings for PRU-ICSS2 PRU0 IOSET2 Direct
Input mode. See Table 5-30 Modes Summary for a list of IO timings requiring the use of Manual IO
Timings Modes. See Table 5-185 Manual Functions Mapping for PRU-ICSS2 PRU0 IOSET2 Direct Input
mode for a definition of the Manual modes.
Table 5-185 lists the A_DELAY and G_DELAY values needed to calculate the correct values to be set in
the CFG_x registers.
308
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 5-185. Manual Functions Mapping for PRU-ICSS2 PRU0 IOSET2 Direct Input mode
BALL
BALL NAME
PR2_PRU0_DIR_IN_MANUAL2
A_DELAY (ps)
G_DELAY (ps)
CFG REGISTER
MUXMODE
12
Y5
gpio6_10
1000
3300
CFG_GPIO6_10_IN
pr2_pru0_gpi0
Y6
gpio6_11
1000
3400
CFG_GPIO6_11_IN
pr2_pru0_gpi1
F16
mcasp1_axr15
0
1300
CFG_MCASP1_AXR15_IN
pr2_pru0_gpi20
E19
mcasp2_aclkx
0
800
CFG_MCASP2_ACLKX_IN
pr2_pru0_gpi18
A21
mcasp2_axr2
0
1900
CFG_MCASP2_AXR2_IN
pr2_pru0_gpi16
B21
mcasp2_axr3
0
1400
CFG_MCASP2_AXR3_IN
pr2_pru0_gpi17
D19
mcasp2_fsx
0
1400
CFG_MCASP2_FSX_IN
pr2_pru0_gpi19
B22
mcasp3_axr0
0
1400
CFG_MCASP3_AXR0_IN
pr2_pru0_gpi14
B23
mcasp3_axr1
0
1000
CFG_MCASP3_AXR1_IN
pr2_pru0_gpi15
A23
mcasp3_fsx
0
1300
CFG_MCASP3_FSX_IN
pr2_pru0_gpi13
Y2
mmc3_clk
1000
3700
CFG_MMC3_CLK_IN
pr2_pru0_gpi2
Y1
mmc3_cmd
1000
3500
CFG_MMC3_CMD_IN
pr2_pru0_gpi3
Y4
mmc3_dat0
1000
3500
CFG_MMC3_DAT0_IN
pr2_pru0_gpi4
AA2
mmc3_dat1
1000
4000
CFG_MMC3_DAT1_IN
pr2_pru0_gpi5
AA3
mmc3_dat2
1000
3300
CFG_MMC3_DAT2_IN
pr2_pru0_gpi6
W2
mmc3_dat3
1000
3900
CFG_MMC3_DAT3_IN
pr2_pru0_gpi7
Y3
mmc3_dat4
1000
3500
CFG_MMC3_DAT4_IN
pr2_pru0_gpi8
AA1
mmc3_dat5
1000
3600
CFG_MMC3_DAT5_IN
pr2_pru0_gpi9
AA4
mmc3_dat6
1000
3500
CFG_MMC3_DAT6_IN
pr2_pru0_gpi10
AB1
mmc3_dat7
1000
3100
CFG_MMC3_DAT7_IN
pr2_pru0_gpi11
A22
mcasp3_aclkx
0
0
CFG_MCASP3_ACLKX_IN
pr2_pru0_gpi12
Manual IO Timings Modes must be used to ensure some IO timings for PRU-ICSS2 PRU0 IOSET2 Direct
Output mode. See Table 5-30 Modes Summary for a list of IO timings requiring the use of Manual IO
Timings Modes. See Table 5-186 Manual Functions Mapping for PRU-ICSS2 PRU0 IOSET2 Direct Output
mode for a definition of the Manual modes.
Table 5-186 lists the A_DELAY and G_DELAY values needed to calculate the correct values to be set in
the CFG_x registers.
Table 5-186. Manual Functions Mapping for PRU-ICSS2 PRU0 IOSET2 Direct Output mode
BALL
BALL NAME
PR2_PRU0_DIR_OUT_MANUAL2
A_DELAY (ps)
G_DELAY (ps)
CFG REGISTER
MUXMODE
13
Y5
gpio6_10
1800
1900
CFG_GPIO6_10_OUT
Y6
gpio6_11
2500
2100
CFG_GPIO6_11_OUT
pr2_pru0_gpo0
pr2_pru0_gpo1
F16
mcasp1_axr15
0
400
CFG_MCASP1_AXR15_OUT
pr2_pru0_gpo20
E19
mcasp2_aclkx
0
400
CFG_MCASP2_ACLKX_OUT
pr2_pru0_gpo18
A21
mcasp2_axr2
0
500
CFG_MCASP2_AXR2_OUT
pr2_pru0_gpo16
B21
mcasp2_axr3
0
500
CFG_MCASP2_AXR3_OUT
pr2_pru0_gpo17
D19
mcasp2_fsx
0
0
CFG_MCASP2_FSX_OUT
pr2_pru0_gpo19
A22
mcasp3_aclkx
0
500
CFG_MCASP3_ACLKX_OUT
pr2_pru0_gpo12
B22
mcasp3_axr0
0
0
CFG_MCASP3_AXR0_OUT
pr2_pru0_gpo14
B23
mcasp3_axr1
0
200
CFG_MCASP3_AXR1_OUT
pr2_pru0_gpo15
A23
mcasp3_fsx
0
300
CFG_MCASP3_FSX_OUT
pr2_pru0_gpo13
Y2
mmc3_clk
2100
2200
CFG_MMC3_CLK_OUT
pr2_pru0_gpo2
Y1
mmc3_cmd
2300
2300
CFG_MMC3_CMD_OUT
pr2_pru0_gpo3
Y4
mmc3_dat0
2000
1600
CFG_MMC3_DAT0_OUT
pr2_pru0_gpo4
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
309
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 5-186. Manual Functions Mapping for PRU-ICSS2 PRU0 IOSET2 Direct Output mode (continued)
BALL
BALL NAME
PR2_PRU0_DIR_OUT_MANUAL2
A_DELAY (ps)
G_DELAY (ps)
CFG REGISTER
MUXMODE
13
AA2
mmc3_dat1
2000
1700
CFG_MMC3_DAT1_OUT
pr2_pru0_gpo5
AA3
mmc3_dat2
2050
2200
CFG_MMC3_DAT2_OUT
pr2_pru0_gpo6
W2
mmc3_dat3
2000
2000
CFG_MMC3_DAT3_OUT
pr2_pru0_gpo7
pr2_pru0_gpo8
Y3
mmc3_dat4
2150
2600
CFG_MMC3_DAT4_OUT
AA1
mmc3_dat5
2400
2600
CFG_MMC3_DAT5_OUT
pr2_pru0_gpo9
AA4
mmc3_dat6
2200
2300
CFG_MMC3_DAT6_OUT
pr2_pru0_gpo10
AB1
mmc3_dat7
1800
2400
CFG_MMC3_DAT7_OUT
pr2_pru0_gpo11
Manual IO Timings Modes must be used to ensure some IO timings for PRU-ICSS2 PRU1 IOSET1 Direct
Input mode. See Table 5-30 Modes Summary for a list of IO timings requiring the use of Manual IO
Timings Modes. See Table 5-187 Manual Functions Mapping for PRU-ICSS2 PRU1 IOSET1 Direct Input
mode for a definition of the Manual modes.
Table 5-187 lists the A_DELAY and G_DELAY values needed to calculate the correct values to be set in
the CFG_x registers.
Table 5-187. Manual Functions Mapping for PRU-ICSS2 PRU1 IOSET1 Direct Input mode
BALL
BALL NAME
PR2_PRU1_DIR_IN_MANUAL1
CFG REGISTER
MUXMODE
A_DELAY (ps)
G_DELAY (ps)
P5
RMII_MHZ_50_CL
K
1400
1200
CFG_RMII_MHZ_50_CLK_IN
pr2_pru1_gpi2
L6
mdio_d
1300
L5
mdio_mclk
1400
1600
CFG_MDIO_D_IN
pr2_pru1_gpi1
800
CFG_MDIO_MCLK_IN
N2
rgmii0_rxc
pr2_pru1_gpi0
1400
500
CFG_RGMII0_RXC_IN
pr2_pru1_gpi11
P2
rgmii0_rxctl
1400
1800
CFG_RGMII0_RXCTL_IN
pr2_pru1_gpi12
N4
rgmii0_rxd0
1400
1300
CFG_RGMII0_RXD0_IN
pr2_pru1_gpi16
N3
rgmii0_rxd1
1400
1650
CFG_RGMII0_RXD1_IN
pr2_pru1_gpi15
P1
rgmii0_rxd2
1400
1400
CFG_RGMII0_RXD2_IN
pr2_pru1_gpi14
N1
rgmii0_rxd3
1400
1650
CFG_RGMII0_RXD3_IN
pr2_pru1_gpi13
T4
rgmii0_txc
1400
900
CFG_RGMII0_TXC_IN
pr2_pru1_gpi5
T5
rgmii0_txctl
1400
1300
CFG_RGMII0_TXCTL_IN
pr2_pru1_gpi6
R1
rgmii0_txd0
1400
900
CFG_RGMII0_TXD0_IN
pr2_pru1_gpi10
R2
rgmii0_txd1
1300
1400
CFG_RGMII0_TXD1_IN
pr2_pru1_gpi9
P3
rgmii0_txd2
1300
1100
CFG_RGMII0_TXD2_IN
pr2_pru1_gpi8
P4
rgmii0_txd3
1300
1300
CFG_RGMII0_TXD3_IN
pr2_pru1_gpi7
N5
uart3_rxd
1300
1000
CFG_UART3_RXD_IN
pr2_pru1_gpi3
N6
uart3_txd
1300
800
CFG_UART3_TXD_IN
pr2_pru1_gpi4
12
Manual IO Timings Modes must be used to ensure some IO timings for PRU-ICSS2 PRU1 IOSET2 Direct
Input mode. See Table 5-30 Modes Summary for a list of IO timings requiring the use of Manual IO
Timings Modes. See Table 5-188 Manual Functions Mapping for PRU-ICSS2 PRU1 IOSET2 Direct Input
mode for a definition of the Manual modes.
Table 5-188 lists the A_DELAY and G_DELAY values needed to calculate the correct values to be set in
the CFG_x registers.
310
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 5-188. Manual Functions Mapping for PRU-ICSS2 PRU1 IOSET2 Direct Input mode
BALL
BALL NAME
PR2_PRU1_DIR_IN_MANUAL2
A_DELAY (ps)
G_DELAY (ps)
CFG REGISTER
MUXMODE
12
C16
mcasp1_aclkx
400
0
CFG_MCASP1_ACLKX_IN
pr2_pru1_gpi7
D14
mcasp1_axr0
700
200
CFG_MCASP1_AXR0_IN
pr2_pru1_gpi8
B14
mcasp1_axr1
600
300
CFG_MCASP1_AXR1_IN
pr2_pru1_gpi9
B16
mcasp1_axr10
600
500
CFG_MCASP1_AXR10_IN
pr2_pru1_gpi12
B18
mcasp1_axr11
700
500
CFG_MCASP1_AXR11_IN
pr2_pru1_gpi13
A19
mcasp1_axr12
500
0
CFG_MCASP1_AXR12_IN
pr2_pru1_gpi14
E17
mcasp1_axr13
600
200
CFG_MCASP1_AXR13_IN
pr2_pru1_gpi15
E16
mcasp1_axr14
600
0
CFG_MCASP1_AXR14_IN
pr2_pru1_gpi16
A18
mcasp1_axr8
800
0
CFG_MCASP1_AXR8_IN
pr2_pru1_gpi10
B17
mcasp1_axr9
600
300
CFG_MCASP1_AXR9_IN
pr2_pru1_gpi11
D23
mcasp4_axr1
500
0
CFG_MCASP4_AXR1_IN
pr2_pru1_gpi0
AC3
mcasp5_aclkx
2100
1959
CFG_MCASP5_ACLKX_IN
pr2_pru1_gpi1
AA5
mcasp5_axr0
2300
2000
CFG_MCASP5_AXR0_IN
pr2_pru1_gpi3
AC4
mcasp5_axr1
2300
1800
CFG_MCASP5_AXR1_IN
pr2_pru1_gpi4
U6
mcasp5_fsx
2100
1780
CFG_MCASP5_FSX_IN
pr2_pru1_gpi2
J25
xref_clk0
0
0
CFG_XREF_CLK0_IN
pr2_pru1_gpi5
J24
xref_clk1
0
0
CFG_XREF_CLK1_IN
pr2_pru1_gpi6
Manual IO Timings Modes must be used to ensure some IO timings for PRU-ICSS2 PRU1 IOSET1 Direct
Output mode. See Table 5-30 Modes Summary for a list of IO timings requiring the use of Manual IO
Timings Modes. See Table 5-189 Manual Functions Mapping for PRU-ICSS2 PRU1 IOSET1 Direct Output
mode for a definition of the Manual modes.
Table 5-189 lists the A_DELAY and G_DELAY values needed to calculate the correct values to be set in
the CFG_x registers.
Table 5-189. Manual Functions Mapping for PRU-ICSS2 PRU1 IOSET1 Direct Output mode
BALL
BALL NAME
PR2_PRU1_DIR_OUT_MANUAL1
CFG REGISTER
MUXMODE
CFG_RMII_MHZ_50_CLK_OUT
pr2_pru1_gpo2
2000
CFG_MDIO_D_OUT
pr2_pru1_gpo1
1100
CFG_MDIO_MCLK_OUT
pr2_pru1_gpo0
2000
1200
CFG_RGMII0_RXC_OUT
pr2_pru1_gpo11
A_DELAY (ps)
G_DELAY (ps)
RMII_MHZ_50_CLK
2306
100
L6
mdio_d
1900
L5
mdio_mclk
2000
N2
rgmii0_rxc
P5
13
P2
rgmii0_rxctl
2000
1700
CFG_RGMII0_RXCTL_OUT
pr2_pru1_gpo12
N4
rgmii0_rxd0
2000
1000
CFG_RGMII0_RXD0_OUT
pr2_pru1_gpo16
N3
rgmii0_rxd1
2200
1000
CFG_RGMII0_RXD1_OUT
pr2_pru1_gpo15
P1
rgmii0_rxd2
2200
1300
CFG_RGMII0_RXD2_OUT
pr2_pru1_gpo14
N1
rgmii0_rxd3
2250
1100
CFG_RGMII0_RXD3_OUT
pr2_pru1_gpo13
T4
rgmii0_txc
2350
1000
CFG_RGMII0_TXC_OUT
pr2_pru1_gpo5
T5
rgmii0_txctl
2000
1200
CFG_RGMII0_TXCTL_OUT
pr2_pru1_gpo6
R1
rgmii0_txd0
2000
1500
CFG_RGMII0_TXD0_OUT
pr2_pru1_gpo10
R2
rgmii0_txd1
1850
1000
CFG_RGMII0_TXD1_OUT
pr2_pru1_gpo9
P3
rgmii0_txd2
2100
1100
CFG_RGMII0_TXD2_OUT
pr2_pru1_gpo8
P4
rgmii0_txd3
2200
1000
CFG_RGMII0_TXD3_OUT
pr2_pru1_gpo7
N5
uart3_rxd
2000
1600
CFG_UART3_RXD_OUT
pr2_pru1_gpo3
N6
uart3_txd
2000
1000
CFG_UART3_TXD_OUT
pr2_pru1_gpo4
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
311
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Manual IO Timings Modes must be used to ensure some IO timings for PRU-ICSS2 PRU1 IOSET2 Direct
Output mode. See Table 5-30 Modes Summary for a list of IO timings requiring the use of Manual IO
Timings Modes. See Table 5-190 Manual Functions Mapping for PRU-ICSS2 PRU1 IOSET2 Direct Output
mode for a definition of the Manual modes.
Table 5-190 lists the A_DELAY and G_DELAY values needed to calculate the correct values to be set in
the CFG_x registers.
Table 5-190. Manual Functions Mapping for PRU-ICSS2 PRU1 IOSET2 Direct Output mode
BALL
BALL NAME
PR2_PRU1_DIR_OUT_MANUAL2
A_DELAY (ps)
CFG REGISTER
MUXMODE
G_DELAY (ps)
13
C16
mcasp1_aclkx
200
800
CFG_MCASP1_ACLKX_OUT
pr2_pru1_gpo7
D14
mcasp1_axr0
200
1000
CFG_MCASP1_AXR0_OUT
pr2_pru1_gpo8
B14
mcasp1_axr1
0
1110
CFG_MCASP1_AXR1_OUT
pr2_pru1_gpo9
B16
mcasp1_axr10
0
2500
CFG_MCASP1_AXR10_OUT
pr2_pru1_gpo12
B18
mcasp1_axr11
0
1900
CFG_MCASP1_AXR11_OUT
pr2_pru1_gpo13
A19
mcasp1_axr12
0
2300
CFG_MCASP1_AXR12_OUT
pr2_pru1_gpo14
E17
mcasp1_axr13
200
1200
CFG_MCASP1_AXR13_OUT
pr2_pru1_gpo15
E16
mcasp1_axr14
200
1100
CFG_MCASP1_AXR14_OUT
pr2_pru1_gpo16
A18
mcasp1_axr8
200
1600
CFG_MCASP1_AXR8_OUT
pr2_pru1_gpo10
B17
mcasp1_axr9
0
1900
CFG_MCASP1_AXR9_OUT
pr2_pru1_gpo11
D23
mcasp4_axr1
0
700
CFG_MCASP4_AXR1_OUT
pr2_pru1_gpo0
AC3
mcasp5_aclkx
1400
4000
CFG_MCASP5_ACLKX_OUT
pr2_pru1_gpo1
AA5
mcasp5_axr0
1500
3000
CFG_MCASP5_AXR0_OUT
pr2_pru1_gpo3
AC4
mcasp5_axr1
1500
1900
CFG_MCASP5_AXR1_OUT
pr2_pru1_gpo4
U6
mcasp5_fsx
1300
2700
CFG_MCASP5_FSX_OUT
pr2_pru1_gpo2
J25
xref_clk0
0
160
CFG_XREF_CLK0_OUT
pr2_pru1_gpo5
J24
xref_clk1
0
0
CFG_XREF_CLK1_OUT
pr2_pru1_gpo6
Manual
Parallel
Manual
Parallel
IO Timings Modes must be used to ensure some IO timings for PRU-ICSS2 PRU0 IOSET2
Capture Mode. See Table 5-30 Modes Summary for a list of IO timings requiring the use of
IO Timings Modes. See Table 5-191 Manual Functions Mapping for PRU-ICSS2 PRU0 IOSET2
Capture Mode for a definition of the Manual modes.
Table 5-191 lists the A_DELAY and G_DELAY values needed to calculate the correct values to be set in
the CFG_x registers.
Table 5-191. Manual Functions Mapping for PRU-ICSS2 PRU0 IOSET2 Parallel Capture Mode
312
BALL
BALL NAME
PR2_PRU0_PAR_CAP_MANUAL2
A_DELAY (ps)
G_DELAY (ps)
Y5
gpio6_10
4125
481
CFG REGISTER
MUXMODE
CFG_GPIO6_10_IN
pr2_pru0_gpi0
12
Y6
gpio6_11
3935
997
CFG_GPIO6_11_IN
pr2_pru0_gpi1
A21
mcasp2_axr2
0
0
CFG_MCASP2_AXR2_IN
pr2_pru0_gpi16
A22
mcasp3_aclkx
571
0
CFG_MCASP3_ACLKX_IN
pr2_pru0_gpi12
B22
mcasp3_axr0
1570
0
CFG_MCASP3_AXR0_IN
pr2_pru0_gpi14
B23
mcasp3_axr1
1405
0
CFG_MCASP3_AXR1_IN
pr2_pru0_gpi15
A23
mcasp3_fsx
1946
0
CFG_MCASP3_FSX_IN
pr2_pru0_gpi13
Y2
mmc3_clk
4093
1066
CFG_MMC3_CLK_IN
pr2_pru0_gpi2
Y1
mmc3_cmd
4043
921
CFG_MMC3_CMD_IN
pr2_pru0_gpi3
Y4
mmc3_dat0
4010
864
CFG_MMC3_DAT0_IN
pr2_pru0_gpi4
AA2
mmc3_dat1
3817
1643
CFG_MMC3_DAT1_IN
pr2_pru0_gpi5
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 5-191. Manual Functions Mapping for PRU-ICSS2 PRU0 IOSET2 Parallel Capture Mode (continued)
BALL
BALL NAME
PR2_PRU0_PAR_CAP_MANUAL2
A_DELAY (ps)
CFG REGISTER
G_DELAY (ps)
MUXMODE
12
AA3
mmc3_dat2
4040
673
CFG_MMC3_DAT2_IN
pr2_pru0_gpi6
W2
mmc3_dat3
3923
1478
CFG_MMC3_DAT3_IN
pr2_pru0_gpi7
Y3
mmc3_dat4
4096
729
CFG_MMC3_DAT4_IN
pr2_pru0_gpi8
AA1
mmc3_dat5
3926
1271
CFG_MMC3_DAT5_IN
pr2_pru0_gpi9
AA4
mmc3_dat6
4004
929
CFG_MMC3_DAT6_IN
pr2_pru0_gpi10
AB1
mmc3_dat7
3963
666
CFG_MMC3_DAT7_IN
pr2_pru0_gpi11
Manual
Parallel
Manual
Parallel
IO Timings Modes must be used to ensure some IO timings for PRU-ICSS2 PRU1 IOSET1
Capture Mode. See Table 5-30 Modes Summary for a list of IO timings requiring the use of
IO Timings Modes. See Table 5-192 Manual Functions Mapping for PRU-ICSS2 PRU1 IOSET1
Capture Mode for a definition of the Manual modes.
Table 5-192 lists the A_DELAY and G_DELAY values needed to calculate the correct values to be set in
the CFG_x registers.
Table 5-192. Manual Functions Mapping for PRU-ICSS2 PRU1 IOSET1 Parallel Capture Mode
BALL
BALL NAME
PR2_PRU1_PAR_CAP_MANUAL1
A_DELAY (ps)
G_DELAY (ps)
CFG REGISTER
MUXMODE
12
P5
RMII_MHZ_5
0_CLK
1717
0
CFG_RMII_MHZ_50_CLK_IN
pr2_pru1_gpi2
L5
mdio_d
2088
0
CFG_MDIO_D_IN
pr2_pru1_gpi1
L6
mdio_mclk
1321
0
CFG_MDIO_MCLK_IN
pr2_pru1_gpi0
N2
rgmii0_rxc
1287
0
CFG_RGMII0_RXC_IN
pr2_pru1_gpi11
P2
rgmii0_rxctl
2456
0
CFG_RGMII0_RXCTL_IN
pr2_pru1_gpi12
N4
rgmii0_rxd0
0
0
CFG_RGMII0_RXD0_IN
pr2_pru1_gpi16
N3
rgmii0_rxd1
2157
0
CFG_RGMII0_RXD1_IN
pr2_pru1_gpi15
P1
rgmii0_rxd2
2008
0
CFG_RGMII0_RXD2_IN
pr2_pru1_gpi14
N1
rgmii0_rxd3
2271
0
CFG_RGMII0_RXD3_IN
pr2_pru1_gpi13
T4
rgmii0_txc
1851
0
CFG_RGMII0_TXC_IN
pr2_pru1_gpi5
T5
rgmii0_txctl
1875
0
CFG_RGMII0_TXCTL_IN
pr2_pru1_gpi6
R1
rgmii0_txd0
1685
0
CFG_RGMII0_TXD0_IN
pr2_pru1_gpi10
R2
rgmii0_txd1
2131
0
CFG_RGMII0_TXD1_IN
pr2_pru1_gpi9
P3
rgmii0_txd2
1734
0
CFG_RGMII0_TXD2_IN
pr2_pru1_gpi8
P4
rgmii0_txd3
1764
0
CFG_RGMII0_TXD3_IN
pr2_pru1_gpi7
N5
uart3_rxd
1654
0
CFG_UART3_RXD_IN
pr2_pru1_gpi3
N6
uart3_txd
1242
0
CFG_UART3_TXD_IN
pr2_pru1_gpi4
Manual
Parallel
Manual
Parallel
IO Timings Modes must be used to ensure some IO timings for PRU-ICSS2 PRU1 IOSET2
Capture Mode. See Table 5-30 Modes Summary for a list of IO timings requiring the use of
IO Timings Modes. See Table 5-193 Manual Functions Mapping for PRU-ICSS2 PRU1 IOSET2
Capture Mode for a definition of the Manual modes.
Table 5-193 lists the A_DELAY and G_DELAY values needed to calculate the correct values to be set in
the CFG_x registers.
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
313
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 5-193. Manual Functions Mapping for PRU-ICSS2 PRU1 IOSET2 Parallel Capture Mode
BALL
BALL NAME
PR2_PRU1_PAR_CAP_MANUAL2
A_DELAY (ps)
G_DELAY (ps)
CFG REGISTER
MUXMODE
12
C16
mcasp1_aclkx
1928
0
CFG_MCASP1_ACLKX_IN
pr2_pru1_gpi7
D14
mcasp1_axr0
2413
0
CFG_MCASP1_AXR0_IN
pr2_pru1_gpi8
B14
mcasp1_axr1
2523
25
CFG_MCASP1_AXR1_IN
pr2_pru1_gpi9
B16
mcasp1_axr10
2607
0
CFG_MCASP1_AXR10_IN
pr2_pru1_gpi12
B18
mcasp1_axr11
2669
92
CFG_MCASP1_AXR11_IN
pr2_pru1_gpi13
A19
mcasp1_axr12
2225
0
CFG_MCASP1_AXR12_IN
pr2_pru1_gpi14
E17
mcasp1_axr13
2315
0
CFG_MCASP1_AXR13_IN
pr2_pru1_gpi15
E16
mcasp1_axr14
0
0
CFG_MCASP1_AXR14_IN
pr2_pru1_gpi16
A18
mcasp1_axr8
2201
0
CFG_MCASP1_AXR8_IN
pr2_pru1_gpi10
B17
mcasp1_axr9
2293
278
CFG_MCASP1_AXR9_IN
pr2_pru1_gpi11
D23
mcasp4_axr1
1759
0
CFG_MCASP4_AXR1_IN
pr2_pru1_gpi0
AC3
mcasp5_aclkx
3732
1810
CFG_MCASP5_ACLKX_IN
pr2_pru1_gpi1
AA5
mcasp5_axr0
3776
2255
CFG_MCASP5_AXR0_IN
pr2_pru1_gpi3
AC4
mcasp5_axr1
3886
1923
CFG_MCASP5_AXR1_IN
pr2_pru1_gpi4
U6
mcasp5_fsx
3800
1449
CFG_MCASP5_FSX_IN
pr2_pru1_gpi2
J25
xref_clk0
1375
21
CFG_XREF_CLK0_IN
pr2_pru1_gpi5
J24
xref_clk1
1320
0
CFG_XREF_CLK1_IN
pr2_pru1_gpi6
314
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
5.10.6.23 System and Miscellaneous interfaces
The Device includes the following System and Miscellaneous interfaces:
• Sysboot Interface
• System DMA Interface
• Interrupt Controllers (INTC) Interface
5.10.7 Emulation and Debug Subsystem
The Device includes the following Test interfaces:
• IEEE 1149.1 Standard-Test-Access Port (JTAG)
• Trace Port Interface Unit (TPIU)
5.10.7.1 IEEE 1149.1 Standard-Test-Access Port (JTAG)
The JTAG (IEEE Standard 1149.1-1990 Standard-Test-Access Port and Boundary Scan Architecture)
interface is used for BSDL testing and emulation of the device. The trstn pin only needs to be released
when it is necessary to use a JTAG controller to debug the device or exercise the device's boundary scan
functionality. For maximum reliability, the device includes an internal Pulldown (IPD) on the trstn pin to
ensure that trstn is always asserted upon power up and the device's internal emulation logic is always
properly initialized. JTAG controllers from Texas Instruments actively drive trstn high. However, some
third-party JTAG controllers may not drive trstn high but expect the use of a Pullup resistor on trstn. When
using this type of JTAG controller, assert trstn to initialize the device after powerup and externally drive
trstn high before attempting any emulation or boundary-scan operations.
The main JTAG features include:
• 32KB embedded trace buffer (ETB)
• 5-pin system trace interface for debug
• Supports Advanced Event Triggering (AET)
• All processors can be emulated via JTAG ports
• All functions on EMU pins of the device:
– EMU[1:0] - cross-triggering, boot mode (WIR), STM trace
– EMU[4:2] - STM trace only (single direction)
5.10.7.1.1 JTAG Electrical Data/Timing
Table 5-194, Table 5-195 and Figure 5-125 assume testing over the recommended operating conditions
and electrical characteristic conditions below.
Table 5-194. Timing Requirements for IEEE 1149.1 JTAG
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
MIN
MAX
UNIT
1
tc(TCK)
Cycle time, TCK
62.29
ns
1a
tw(TCKH)
Pulse duration, TCK high (40% of tc)
24.92
ns
1b
tw(TCKL)
Pulse duration, TCK low (40% of tc)
24.92
ns
tsu(TDI-TCK)
Input setup time, TDI valid to TCK high
6.23
ns
tsu(TMS-TCK)
Input setup time, TMS valid to TCK high
6.23
ns
th(TCK-TDI)
Input hold time, TDI valid from TCK high
31.15
ns
th(TCK-TMS)
Input hold time, TMS valid from TCK high
31.15
ns
3
4
Table 5-195. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for IEEE 1149.1 JTAG
NO.
2
PARAMETER
td(TCKL-TDOV)
DESCRIPTION
Delay time, TCK low to TDO valid
MIN
MAX
UNIT
0
30.5
ns
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
315
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
1
1a
1b
TCK
2
TDO
3
4
TDI/TMS
SPRS906_TIMING_JTAG_01
Figure 5-125. JTAG Timing
Table 5-196, Table 5-197 and Figure 5-126 assume testing over the recommended operating conditions
and electrical characteristic conditions below.
Table 5-196. Timing Requirements for IEEE 1149.1 JTAG With RTCK
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
MIN
MAX
UNIT
1
tc(TCK)
Cycle time, TCK
62.29
ns
1a
tw(TCKH)
Pulse duration, TCK high (40% of tc)
24.92
ns
1b
tw(TCKL)
Pulse duration, TCK low (40% of tc)
24.92
ns
tsu(TDI-TCK)
Input setup time, TDI valid to TCK high
6.23
ns
tsu(TMS-TCK)
Input setup time, TMS valid to TCK high
6.23
ns
th(TCK-TDI)
Input hold time, TDI valid from TCK high
31.15
ns
th(TCK-TMS)
Input hold time, TMS valid from TCK high
31.15
ns
3
4
Table 5-197. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for
IEEE 1149.1 JTAG With RTCK
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
MIN
MAX
0
27
UNIT
5
td(TCK-RTCK)
Delay time, TCK to RTCK with no selected subpaths (i.e. ICEPick is
the only tap selected - when the Arm is in the scan chain, the delay
time is a function of the Arm functional clock).
6
tc(RTCK)
Cycle time, RTCK
62.29
ns
7
tw(RTCKH)
Pulse duration, RTCK high (40% of tc)
24.92
ns
8
tw(RTCKL)
Pulse duration, RTCK low (40% of tc)
24.92
ns
ns
5
TCK
6
7
8
RTCK
SPRS906_TIMING_JTAG_02
Figure 5-126. JTAG With RTCK Timing
316
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
5.10.7.2 Trace Port Interface Unit (TPIU)
CAUTION
The I/O timings provided in this section are valid only if signals within a single
IOSET are used. The IOSETs are defined in Table 5-199.
5.10.7.2.1 TPIU PLL DDR Mode
Table 5-198 and Figure 5-127 assume testing over the recommended operating conditions and electrical
characteristic conditions below.
Table 5-198. Switching Characteristics for TPIU
NO.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
MIN
MAX
UNIT
TPIU1
tc(clk)
Cycle time, TRACECLK period
5.56
TPIU4
td(clk-ctlV)
Skew time, TRACECLK transition to TRACECTL transition
-1.61
1.98
ns
ns
TPIU5
td(clk-dataV)
Skew time, TRACECLK transition to TRACEDATA[17:0]
-1.61
1.98
ns
TPIU1
TPIU2
TPIU3
TRACECLK
TPIU4
TPIU4
TRACECTL
TPIU5
TPIU5
TRACEDATA[X:0]
SPRS906_TIMING_TIMER_01
Figure 5-127. TPIU—PLL DDR Transmit Mode(1)
(1) In d[X:0], X is equal to 15 or 17.
In Table 5-199 are presented the specific groupings of signals (IOSET) for use with TPIU signals.
Table 5-199. TPIU IOSETs
SIGNALS
IOSET1
IOSET2
BALL
MUX
emu19
E10
5
emu18
B10
5
emu17
A10
5
emu16
F10
5
emu15
A11
5
emu14
A8
5
emu13
A9
5
emu12
A7
5
emu11
B9
5
emu10
C8
5
emu9
B8
5
emu8
E8
5
emu7
C7
5
emu6
B7
5
BALL
MUX
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
317
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 5-199. TPIU IOSETs (continued)
SIGNALS
318
IOSET1
IOSET2
BALL
MUX
BALL
MUX
emu5
D8
5
emu1
C22
emu0
C21
0
C22
0
0
C21
0
Specifications
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
6 Detailed Description
6.1
Description
AM570x Sitara™ processors are Arm applications processors built to meet the intense processing needs
of modern embedded products.
AM570x devices bring high processing performance through the maximum flexibility of a fully integrated
mixed processor solution. The devices also combine programmable video processing with a highly
integrated peripheral set.
Programmability is provided by a single-core Arm Cortex-A15 RISC CPU with Neon extensions and TI
C66x VLIW floating-point DSP cores. The Arm processor lets developers keep control functions separate
from vision algorithms programmed on the DSP and coprocessors, thus reducing the complexity of the
system software.
Additionally, TI provides a complete set of development tools for the Arm and C66x DSP, including C
compilers, a DSP assembly optimizer to simplify programming and scheduling, and a debugging interface
for visibility into source code execution.
Cryptographic acceleration is available in all devices. All other supported security features, including
support for secure boot, debug security and support for trusted execution environment are available on
High-Security (HS) devices. For more information about HS devices, contact your TI representative.
6.2
Functional Block Diagram
Figure 6-1 is functional block diagram for the device.
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
319
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
AM570x
Display Subsystem
MPU
IVA HD
(1x Arm
Cortex–A15)
1080p Video
Co-Processor
1x GFX Pipeline
LCD2
GPU
BB2D
3x Video Pipeline
LCD3
(1x SGX544 3D)
(GC320 2D)
Blend / Scale
HDMI 1.4a
DSP
(1x C66x
Co-Processor)
IPU1
(2x Cortex–M4)
IPU2
EDMA
VIP x1
MMU x2
sDMA
Secure Boot
Debug
Security
TEE
CSI2 x1
CAL
(2x Cortex–M4)
VPE
(HS devices)
High-Speed Interconnect
System
Spinlock
Connectivity
Timers x16
USB 3.0
Mailbox x13
WDT
PWM SS x3
Dual Mode FS/HS/SS
w/ PHY
GPIO x8
KBD
HDQ
USB 2.0
Dual Mode FS/HS
PHY
PCIeSS x2
GMAC_SW
PRU-ICSS x2
Program/Data Storage
Serial Interfaces
UART x10
QSPI
McSPI x4
McASP x8
DCAN x2
I2C x5
MMC / SD x4
512-KB
OCMC_RAM
w/ ECC
DMM
GPMC / ELM
(NAND/NOR/
Async)
EMIF
1x 32-bit
DDR3(L)
intro-001
Figure 6-1. AM570x Block Diagram
320
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
6.3
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
MPU
The Cortex®-A15 microprocessor unit (MPU) subsystem serves the applications processing role by
running the high-level operating system (HLOS) and application code.
The MPU subsystem incorporates one Cortex-A15 MPU core (MPU_C0), individual level 1 (L1) caches,
level 2 (L2) cache (MPU_L2CACHE) shared between them, and various other shared peripherals. To aid
software development, the processor core can be kept cache-coherent with the L2 cache.
The MPU subsystem provides a high-performance computing platform with high peak-computing
performance and low memory latency.
The Arm subsystem supports the following key features:
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
321
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
•
322
www.ti.com
Arm Cortex-A15 MP Core™ (MPU_CLUSTER)
– One Cortex-A15 MPU core (revision r2p2) which has the following features:
• Superscalar, dynamic multi-issue technology
– Out-of-order (OoO) instruction dispatch and completion
– Dynamic branch prediction with branch target buffer (BTB), global history buffer (GHB), and
48-entry return stack
– Continuous fetch and decoding of three instructions per clock cycle
– Dispatch of up to four instructions and completion of eight instructions per clock cycle
– Provides optimal performance from binaries compiled for previous Arm processors
– Five execution units handle simple instructions, branch instructions, Neon and floating point
instructions, multiply instructions, and load and store instructions.
– Simple instructions take two cycles from dispatch, while complex instructions take up to 11
cycles.
– Can issue two simple instructions in a cycle
– Can issue a load and a store instruction in the same cycle
• Integrated Neon processing engine to include the Arm Neon Advanced SIMD (single instruction,
multiple data) support for accelerated media and signal processing computation
• Includes VFPv4-compatible hardware to support single- and double-precision add, subtract,
divide, multiply and accumulate, and square root operations
• Extensive support to accelerate virtualization using a hypervisor
• 32-KiB L1 instruction (L1I) and 32-KiB L1 data (L1D) cache:
– 64-byte line size
– 2-way set associative
• Memory management unit (MMU):
– Two-level translation lookaside buffer (TLB) organization
– First level is an 32-entry, fully associative micro-TLB implemented for each of instruction
fetch, load, and store.
– Second level is a unified, 4-way associative, 512-entry main TLB
– Supports hardware TLB table-walk for backward-compatible and new 64-bit entry page table
formats
– New page table format can produce 40-bit physical addresses
– Two-stage translation where first stage is HLOS-controlled and the second level may be
controlled by a hypervisor. Second stage always uses the new page table format
– Integrated L2 cache (MPU_L2CACHE) and snoop control unit (SCU):
• 1-MiB of unified (instructions and data) cache organized as 16 ways of 1024 sets of 64-byte
lines
• Redundant L1 data (cache) tags to perform snoop filtering (L1 instruction cache tags are not
duplicated)
• Operates at Cortex-A15 MPU core clock rate
• Integrated L2 cache controller (MPU_L2CACHE_CTRL):
– Sixteen 64-byte line buffers that handle evictions, line fills and snoop transfers
– One 128-bit AMBA4 Coherent Bus (AXI4-ACE) port
– Auto-prefetch buffer for up to 16 streams and detecting forward and backward strides
– Generalized interrupt controller (GIC, also referred to as MPU_INTC): An interrupt controller
supplied by Arm. The single GIC in the MPU_CLUSTER routes interrupts to the MPU core. The
GIC supports:
• Number of shared peripheral interrupts (SPI): 160
• Number of software generated interrupts (SGI): 16
• Number of CPU interfaces: 1
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Virtual CPU interface for virtualization support. This allows the majority of guest operating
system (OS) interactions with the GIC to be handled in hardware, but with physical interrupts
still requiring hypervisor intervention to assign them to the appropriate virtual machine.
– Integrated timer counter and one timer block
– Arm CoreSight™ debug and trace modules. For more information, see chapter On-Chip Debug
Support of the Device TRM.
MPU_AXI2OCP bridge (local interconnect):
– Connected to Memory Adapter (MPU_MA), which routes the non-EMIF address space transactions
to MPU_AXI2OCP
– Single request multiple data (SRMD) protocol on L3_MAIN port
– Multiple targets:
• 64-bit port to the L3_MAIN interconnect. Interface frequency is 1/4 or 1/8 of core frequency
• MPU_ROM
• Internal MPU subsystem peripheral targets, including Memory Adapter LISA Section Manager
(MA_LSM), wake-up generator (MPU_WUGEN), watchdog timer (MPU_WD_TIMER), and local
PRCM module (MPU_PRCM) configuration
• Internal AXI target, CoreSight System Trace Module (CS_STM)
Memory adapter (MPU_MA): Helps decrease the latency of accesses between the MPU_L2CACHE
and the external memory interface (EMIF1) by providing a direct path between the MPU subsystem
and EMIF1:
– Connected to 128-bit AMBA4 interface of MPU_CLUSTER
– Direct 128-bit interface to EMIF1
– Interface speed between MPU_CLUSTER and MPU_MA is at half-speed of the MPU core
frequency
– Quarter-speed interface to EMIF
– Uses firewall logic to check access rights of incoming addresses
Local PRCM (MPU_PRCM):
– Handles MPU_C0 power domain
– Supports SR3-APG (SmartReflex3 Automatic Power Gating) power management technology inside
the MPU_CLUSTER
– MPU subsystem has five power domains
Wake-up generator (MPU_WUGEN)
– Responsible for waking up the MPU core
Standby controller: Handles the power transitions inside the MPU subsystem
Realtime (master) counter (COUNTER_REALTIME): Produces the count used by the private timer
peripheral in the MPU_CLUSTER
Watchdog timer (MPU_WD_TIMER): Used to generate a chip-level watchdog reset request to global
PRCM
On-chip boot ROM (MPU_ROM): The MPU_ROM size is 48-KiB, and the address range is from
0x4003 8000 to 0x4004 3FFF. For more information about booting from this memory, see chapter
Initialization of the Device TRM.
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
323
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
•
www.ti.com
Interfaces:
– 128-bit interface to EMIF1
– 64-bit master port to the L3_MAIN interconnect
– 32-bit slave port from the L4_CFG_EMU interconnect (debug subsystem) for configuration of the
MPU subsystem debug modules
– 32-bit slave port from the L4_CFG interconnect for memory adapter firewall (MPU_MA_NTTP_FW)
configuration
– 32-bit ATB output for transmitting debug and trace data
– 160 peripheral interrupt inputs
For more information, see section Arm Cortex-A15 Subsystem in chapter Processors and Accelerators of
the Device TRM.
6.4
DSP Subsystem
The device includes a single instance (DSP1) of a digital signal processor (DSP) subsystem, based on the
TI's standard TMS320C66x DSP CorePac core.
The TMS320C66x DSP core enhances the TMS320C674x™ core, which merges the C674x™ floating
point and the C64x+™ fixed-point instruction set architectures. The C66x DSP is object-code compatible
with the C64x+/C674x DSPs.
For more information on the TMS320C66x core CPU, see the TMS320C66x DSP CPU and Instruction Set
Reference Guide, (SPRUGH7).
The DSP subsystem integrated in the device includes the following components:
• A TMS320C66x CorePac DSP core that encompasses:
– L1 program-dedicated (L1P) cacheable memory
– L1 data-dedicated (L1D) cacheable memory
– L2 (program and data) cacheable memory
– Extended Memory Controller (XMC)
– External Memory Controller (EMC)
– DSP CorePac located interrupt controller (INTC)
– DSP CorePac located power-down controller (PDC)
• Dedicated enhanced data memory access engine - EDMA, to transfer data from/to memories and
peripherals external to the DSP subsystem and to local DSP memory (most commonly L2 SRAM). The
external DMA requests are passed through DSP system level (SYS) wakeup logic, and collected from
the DSP1 dedicated outputs of the device DMA Events Crossbar for the subsystem.
• A level 2 (L2) interconnect network (DSP NoC) to allow connectivity between different modules of the
subsystem or the remainder of the device via the device L3_MAIN interconnect.
• Two memory management units (on EDMA L2 interconnect and DSP MDMA paths) for accessing the
device L3_MAIN interconnect address space
• Dedicated system control logic (DSP_SYSTEM) responsible for power management, clock generation,
and connection to the device power, reset, and clock management (PRCM) module
The TMS320C66x Instruction Set Architecture (ISA) is the latest for the C6000 family. As with its
predecessors (C64x, C64x+ and C674x), the C66x is an advanced VLIW architecture with 8 functional
units (two multiplier units and six arithmetic logic units) that operate in parallel. The C66x CPU has a total
of 64 general-purpose 32-bit registers.
Some features of the DSP C6000 family devices are:
• Advanced VLIW CPU with eight functional units (two multipliers and six ALUs) which:
– Executes up to eight instructions per cycle for up to ten times the performance of typical DSPs
– Allows designers to develop highly effective RISC-like code for fast development time
324
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Instruction packing
– Gives code size equivalence for eight instructions executed serially or in parallel
– Reduces code size, program fetches, and power consumption
Conditional execution of most instructions
– Reduces costly branching
– Increases parallelism for higher sustained performance
Efficient code execution on independent functional units
– Industry's most efficient C compiler on DSP benchmark suite
– Industry's first assembly optimizer for fast development and improved parallelization
8-/16-/32-bit/64-bit data support, providing efficient memory support for a variety of applications
40-bit arithmetic options which add extra precision for vocoders and other computationally intensive
applications
Saturation and normalization to provide support for key arithmetic operations
Field manipulation and instruction extract, set, clear, and bit counting support common operation found
in control and data manipulation applications.
The C66x CPU has the following additional features:
• Each multiplier can perform two 16 × 16-bit or four 8 × 8 bit multiplies every clock cycle.
• Quad 8-bit and dual 16-bit instruction set extensions with data flow support
• Support for non-aligned 32-bit (word) and 64-bit (double word) memory accesses
• Special communication-specific instructions have been added to address common operations in errorcorrecting codes.
• Bit count and rotate hardware extends support for bit-level algorithms.
• Compact instructions: Common instructions (AND, ADD, LD, MPY) have 16-bit versions to reduce
code size.
• Protected mode operation: A two-level system of privileged program execution to support highercapability operating systems and system features such as memory protection.
• Exceptions support for error detection and program redirection to provide robust code execution
• Hardware support for modulo loop operation to reduce code size and allow interrupts during fullypipelined code
• Each multiplier can perform 32 × 32 bit multiplies
• Additional instructions to support complex multiplies allowing up to eight 16-bit multiply/add/subtracts
per clock cycle
The TMS320C66x has the following key improvements to the ISA:
• 4x Multiply Accumulate improvement for both fixed and floating point
• Improvement of the floating point arithmetic
• Enhancement of the vector processing capability for fixed and floating point
• Addition of domain-specific instructions for complex arithmetic and matrix operations
On the C66x ISA, the vector processing capability is improved by extending the width of the SIMD
instructions. The C674x DSP supports 2-way SIMD operations for 16-bit data and 4-way SIMD
operations for 8-bit data. C66x enhances this capabilities with the addition of SIMD instructions for 32-bit
data allowing operation on 128-bit vectors. For example the QMPY32 instruction is able to perform the
element to element multiplication between two vectors of four 32-bit data each.
C66x ISA includes a set of specific instructions to handle complex arithmetic and matrix operations.
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
325
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
•
•
•
•
326
www.ti.com
TMS320C66x DSP CorePac memory components:
– A 32-KiB L1 program memory (L1P) configurable as cache and/or SRAM:
• When configured as a cache, the L1P is a 1-way set-associative cache with a 32-byte cache
line
• The DSP CorePac L1P memory controller provides bandwidth management, memory
protection, and power-down functions
• The L1P is capable of cache block and global coherence operations
• The L1P controller has an Error Detection (ED) mechanism, including necessary SRAM
• The L1P memory can be fully configured as a cache or SRAM
• Page size for L1P memory is 2KB
– A 32-KiB L1 data memory (L1D) configurable as cache and / or SRAM:
• When configured as a cache, the L1D is a 2-way set-associative cache with a 64-byte cache
line
• The DSP CorePac L1D memory controller provides bandwidth management, memory
protection, and power-down functions
• The L1D memory can be fully configured as a cache or SRAM
• No support for error correction or detection
• Page size for L1D memory is 2KB
– A 288-KiB (program and data) L2 memory, only part of which is cacheable:
• When configured as a cache, the L2 memory is a 4-way set associative cache with a 128-byte
cache line
• Only 256 KiB of L2 memory can be configured as cache or SRAM
• 32 KiB of the L2 memory is always mapped as SRAM
• The L2 memory controller has an Error Correction Code (ECC) and ED mechanism, including
necessary SRAM
• The L2 memory controller supports hardware prefetching and also provides bandwidth
management, memory protection, and power-down functions.
• Page size for L2 memory is 16KB
The External Memory Controller (EMC) is a bridge from the C66x CorePac to the rest of the DSP
subsystem and device. It has :
– a 32-bit configuration port (CFG) providing access to local subsystem resources (like DSP_EDMA,
DSP_SYSTEM, and so forth) or to L3_MAIN resources accessible via the CFG address range.
– a 128-bit slave-DMA port (SDMA) which provides accesses of system masters outside the DSP
subsystem to resources inside the DSP subsystem or C66x DSP CorePac memories, i.e. when the
DSP subsystem is the slave in a transaction.
The Extended Memory Controller (XMC) processes requests from the L2 Cache Controller (which
are a result of CPU instruction fetches, load/store commands, cache operations) to device resources
via the C66x DSP CorePac 128-bit master DMA (MDMA) port:
– Memory protection for addresses outside C66x DSP CorePac generated over device L3_MAIN on
the MDMA port
– Prefetch, multi-in-flight requests
A DSP local Interrupt Controller (INTC) in the DSP C66x CorePac, interfaces the system events to
the DSP C66x core CPU interrupt and exceptions inputs. The DSP subsystem C66x CorePac interrupt
controller supports up to 128 system events of which 64 interrupts are external to DSP subsystem,
collected from the DSP1 dedicated outputs of the device Interrupt Crossbar.
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Local Enhanced Direct Memory Access (EDMA) controller features:
– Channel controller (CC) : 64-channel, 128 PaRAM, 2 Queues
– 2 x Third-party Transfer Controllers (TPTC0 and TPTC1):
• Each TC has a 128-bit read port and a 128-bit write port
• 2KiB FIFOs on each TPTC
– 1-dimensional/2-dimensional (1D/2D) addressing
– Chaining capability
DSP subsystem integrated MMUs:
– Two MMUs are integrated:
• The MMU0 is located between DSP MDMA master port and the device L3_MAIN interconnect
and can be optionally bypassed
• The MMU1 is located between the EDMA master port and the device L3_MAIN interconnect
A DSP local Power-Down Controller (PDC) is responsible to power-down various parts of the DSP
C66x CorePac, or the entire DSP C66x CorePac.
The DSP subsystem System Control logic provides:
– Slave idle and master standby protocols with device PRCM for powerdown
– OCP Disconnect handshake for init and target busses
– Asynchronous reset
– Power-down modes:
• "Clockstop" mode featuring wake-up on interrupt event. The DMA event wake-up is managed in
software.
The device DSP subsystem is supplied by a PRCM DPLL, but DSP1 has integrated its own PLL
module outside the C66x CorePac for clock gating and division.
The device DSP subsystem has following port instances to connect to remaining part of the
device. See also :
– A 128-bit initiator (DSP MDMA master) port for MDMA/Cache requests
– A 128-bit initiator (DSP EDMA master) port for EDMA requests
– A 32-bit initiator (DSP CFG master) port for configuration requests
– A 128-bit target (DSP slave) port for requests to DSP memories and various peripherals
C66x DSP subsystem (DSPSS) safety aspects:
– Above mentioned memory ECC/ED mechanisms
– MMUs enable mapping of only the necessary application space to the processor
– Memory Protection Units internal to the DSPSS (in L1P, L1D and L2 memory controllers) and
external to DSPSS (firewalls) to help define legal accesses and raise exceptions on illegal
accesses
– Exceptions: Memory errors, various DSP errors, MMU errors and some system errors are detected
and cause exceptions. The exceptions could be handled by the DSP or by a designated safety
processor at the chip level. Note that it may not be possible for the safety processor to completely
handle some exceptions
Unsupported features on the C66x DSP core for the device are:
• The Extended Memory Controller MPAX (memory protection and address extension) 36-bit addressing
is NOT supported
Known DSP subsystem powermode restrictions for the device are:
• "Full logic / RAM retention" mode featuring wake-up on both interrupt or DMA event (logic in “always
on” domain). Only OFF mode is supported by DSP subsystem, requiring full boot.
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
327
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Fore more information about:
• C66x debug/trace support, see chapter On-Chip Debug of the Device TRM.
6.5
PRU-ICSS
The device Programmable Real-Time Unit and Industrial Communication Subsystem (PRU-ICSS) consists
of dual 32-bit Load / Store RISC CPU cores - Programmable Real-Time Units (PRU0 and PRU1), shared,
data, and instruction memories, internal peripheral modules, and an interrupt controller (PRU-ICSS_INTC).
The programmable nature of the PRUs, along with their access to pins, events and all SoC resources,
provides flexibility in implementing fast real-time responses, specialized data handling operations,
customer peripheral interfaces, and in off-loading tasks from the other processor cores of the system-onchip (SoC).
The each PRU-ICSS includes the following main features:
• 21x Enhanced GPIs (EGPIs) and 21x Enhanced GPOs (EGPOs) with asynchronous capture and serial
support per each PRU CPU core
• One Ethernet MII_RT module (PRU-ICSS_MII_RT) with two MII ports and configurable connections to
PRUs
• 1 MDIO Port (PRU-ICSS_MII_MDIO)
• One Industrial Ethernet Peripheral (IEP) to manage/generate Industrial Ethernet functions
• 1 x 16550-compatible UART with a dedicated 192 MHz clock to support 12Mbps Profibus
• 1 Industrial Ethernet timer with 7/9 capture and 8 compare events
• 1 Enhanced Capture Module (ECAP)
• 1 Interrupt Controller (PRU-ICSS_INTC)
• A flexible power management support
• Integrated switched central resource with programmable priority
• Parity control supported by all memories
For more information, see chapter Programmable Real-Time Unit Subsystem and Industrial
Communication Subsystem (PRU-ICSS) of the Device TRM.
328
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
6.6
6.6.1
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Memory Subsystem
EMIF
The EMIF module provides connectivity between DDR memory types and manages data bus read/write
accesses between external memory and device subsystems which have master access to the L3_MAIN
interconnect and DMA capability.
The EMIF module has the following capabilities:
• Supports JEDEC standard-compliant DDR3/DDR3L-SDRAM memory types
• 2-GiB SDRAM address range over one chip-select. This range is configurable through the dynamic
memory manager (DMM) module
• Supports SDRAM devices with one, two, four or eight internal banks
• Supports SDRAM devices with single or dual die packages
• Data bus widths:
– 128-bit L3_MAIN (system) interconnect data bus width
– 128-bit port for direct connection with MPU subsystem
– 32-bit SDRAM data bus width
– 16-bit SDRAM data bus width used in narrow mode
• Supported CAS latencies:
– DDR3: 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 and 11
• Supports 256-, 512-, 1024-, and 2048-word page sizes
• Supported burst length: 8
• Supports sequential burst type
• SDRAM auto initialization from reset or configuration change
• Supports self refresh and power-down modes for low power
• Partial array self-refresh mode for low power.
• Output impedance (ZQ) calibration for DDR3
• Supports on-die termination (ODT) DDR3
• Supports prioritized refresh
• Programmable SDRAM refresh rate and backlog counter
• Programmable SDRAM timing parameters
• Write and read leveling/calibration and data eye training for DDR3.
The EMIF module does not support:
• Burst chop for DDR3
• Interleave burst type
• Auto precharge because of better Bank Interleaving performance
• DLL disabling from EMIF side
• SDRAM devices with more than one die, or topologies which require more than one chip select on a
single EMIF channel
For more information, see section DDR External Memory Interface (EMIF) in chapter Memory Subsystem
of the Device TRM.
6.6.2
GPMC
The General Purpose Memory Controller (GPMC) is an external memory controller of the device. Its data
access engine provides a flexible programming model for communication with all standard memories.
The GPMC supports the following various access types:
• Asynchronous read/write access
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
329
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
www.ti.com
Asynchronous read page access (4, 8, and 16 Word16)
Synchronous read/write access
Synchronous read/write burst access without wrap capability (4, 8 and 16 Word16)
Synchronous read/write burst access with wrap capability (4, 8 and 16 Word16)
Address-data-multiplexed (AD) access
Address-address-data (AAD) multiplexed access
Little- and big-endian access
The GPMC can communicate with a wide range of external devices:
• External asynchronous or synchronous 8-bit wide memory or device (non burst device)
• External asynchronous or synchronous 16-bit wide memory or device
• External 16-bit non-multiplexed NOR flash device
• External 16-bit address and data multiplexed NOR Flash device
• External 8-bit and 16-bit NAND flash device
• External 16-bit pseudo-SRAM (pSRAM) device
The main features of the GPMC are:
• 8- or 16-bit-wide data path to external memory device
• Supports up to eight CS regions of programmable size and programmable base addresses in a total
address space of 1 GiB
• Supports transactions controlled by a firewall
• On-the-fly error code detection using the Bose-ChaudhurI-Hocquenghem (BCH) (t = 4, 8, or 16) or
Hamming code to improve the reliability of NAND with a minimum effect on software (NAND flash with
512-byte page size or greater)
• Fully pipelined operation for optimal memory bandwidth use
• The clock to the external memory is provided from GPMC functional clock divided by 1, 2, 3, or 4
• Supports programmable autoclock gating when no access is detected
• Independent and programmable control signal timing parameters for setup and hold time on a per-chip
basis. Parameters are set according to the memory device timing parameters, with a timing granularity
of one GPMC functional clock cycle.
• Flexible internal access time control (WAIT state) and flexible handshake mode using external WAIT
pin monitoring
• Support bus keeping
• Support bus turnaround
• Prefetch and write posting engine associated with to achieve full performance from the NAND device
with minimum effect on NOR/SRAM concurrent access
For more information, see section General-Purpose Memory Controller (GPMC) in chapter Memory
Subsystem of the Device TRM.
6.6.3
ELM
In the case of NAND modules with no internal correction capability, sometimes referred to as bare NAND,
the correction process can be delegated to the error location module (ELM) used in conjunction with the
GPMC.
The ELM supports the following features:
• 4, 8, and 16 bits per 512-byte block error location based on BCH algorithm
• Eight simultaneous processing contexts
• Page-based and continuous modes
330
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
•
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Interrupt generation when error location process completes:
– When the full page has been processed in page mode
– For each syndrome polynomial (checksum-like information) in continuous mode
For more information, see section Error Location Module (ELM) in chapter Memory Subsystem of the
Device TRM.
6.6.4
OCMC
There is one on-chip memory controller (OCMC) in the device.
The OCM Controller supports the following features:
• L3_MAIN data interface:
– Used for maximum throughput performance
– 128-bit data bus width
– Burst supported
• L4 interface (OCMC_RAM only):
– Used for access to configuration registers
– 32-bit data bus width
– Only single accesses supported
– The L4 associated OCMC clock is two times lower than the L3 associated OCMC clock
• Error correction and detection:
– Single error correction and dual error detection
– 9-bit Hamming error correction code (ECC) calculated on 128-bit data word which is concatenated
with memory address bits
– Hamming distance of 4
– Enable/Disable mode control through a dedicated register
– Single bit error correction on a read transaction
– Exclusion of repeated addresses from correctable error address trace history
– ECC valid for all write transactions to an enabled region
– Sub-128-bit writes supported via read modify write
• ECC Error Status Reporting:
– Trace history buffer (FIFO) with depth of 4 for corrected error address
– Trace history buffer with depth of 4 for non correctable error address and also including double
error detection
– Interrupt generation for correctable and uncorrectable detected errors
• ECC Diagnostics Configuration:
– Counters for single error correction (SEC), double error detection (DED) and address error events
(AEE)
– Programmable threshold registers for exeptions associated with SEC, DED and AEE counters
– Register control for enabling and disabling of diagnostics
– Configuration registers and ECC status accessible through L4 interconnect
• Circular buffer for sliced based VIP frame transfers:
– Up to 12 programmable circular buffers mapped with unique virtual frame addresses
– On the fly (with no additional latency) address translation from virtual to OCMC circular buffer
memory space
– Virtual frame size up to 8 MiB and circular buffer size up to 1 MiB
– Error handling and reporting of illegal CBUF addressing
– Underflow and Overflow status reporting and error handling
– Last access read/write address history
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
331
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
•
www.ti.com
Two Interrupt outputs configured independently to service either ECC or CBUF interrupt events
The OCM controller does not have a memory protection logic and does not support endianism conversion.
For more information, see section On-Chip Memory (OCM) in chapter Memory Subsystem of the Device
TRM.
6.7
6.7.1
Interprocessor Communication
MailBox
Communication between the on-chip processors of the device uses a queued mailbox-interrupt
mechanism.
The queued mailbox-interrupt mechanism allows the software to establish a communication channel
between two processors through a set of registers and associated interrupt signals by sending and
receiving messages (mailboxes).
The device implements the following mailbox types:
• System mailbox:
– Number of instances: 13
– Used for communication between: MPU, DSP1, IPU1, and IPU2 subsystems
– Reference name: MAILBOX(1..13)
• IVA mailbox:
– Number of instances: 1
– Used for communication between: IVA local user (ICONT1, or ICONT2) and three external users
(selected among MPU, DSP1, IPU1, and IPU2 subsystems)
– Reference name: IVA_MBOX
Each mailbox module supports the following features:
• Parameters configurable at design time
– Number of users
– Number of mailbox message queues
– Number of messages (FIFO depth) for each message queue
• 32-bit message width
• Message reception and queue-not-full notification using interrupts
• Support of 16-/32-bit addressing scheme
• Power management support
For more information, see chapter MailBox of the Device TRM.
6.7.2
Spinlock
The Spinlock module provides hardware assistance for synchronizing the processes running on multiple
processors in the device:
• Cortex®-A15 microprocessor unit (MPU) subsystem
• Digital signal processor (DSP) subsystem – DSP1
• Dual Cortex-M4 image processing unit (IPU) subsystems – IPU1 and IPU2
The Spinlock module implements 256 spinlocks (or hardware semaphores), which provide an efficient
way to perform a lock operation of a device resource using a single read-access, avoiding the need of
a readmodify- write bus transfer that the programmable cores are not capable of.
For more information, see chapter Spinlock Module of the Device TRM.
6.8
Interrupt Controller
332
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
The device has a large number of interrupts to service the needs of its many peripherals and subsystems.
The MPU, DSP, and IPU (x2) subsystems are capable of servicing these interrupts via their integrated
interrupt controllers. In addition, each processor's interrupt controller is preceded by an Interrupt Controller
Crossbar (IRQ_CROSSBAR) that provides flexibility in mapping the device interrupts to processor
interrupt inputs. For more information about IRQ crossbar, see chapter Control Module of the Device
TRM.
Cortex®-A15 MPU Subsystem Interrupt Controller (MPU_INTC)
The MPU_INTC module (also called Generalized Interrupt Controller [GIC]) is a single functional unit that
is integrated in the Arm® Cortex-A15 multiprocessor core (MPCore) alongside Cortex-A15 processor. It
provides:
• 160 hardware interrupt inputs
• Generation of interrupts by software
• Prioritization of interrupts
• Masking of any interrupts
• Distribution of the interrupts to the target Cortex-A15 processor(s)
• Tracking the status of interrupts
The Cortex-A15 processor supports three main groups of interrupt sources, with each interrupt source
having a unique ID:
• Software Generated Interrupts (SGIs): SGIs are generated by writing to the Cortex-A15 Software
Generated Interrupt Register (GICD_SGIR). A maximum of 16 SGIs (ID0–ID15) can be generated for
the CPU interface. An SGI has edge-triggered properties. The software triggering of the interrupt is
equivalent to the edge transition of the interrupt signal on a peripheral input.
• Private Peripheral Interrupts (PPIs): A PPI is an interrupt generated by a peripheral that is specific to
the processor. Although interrupts ID16–ID31 are dedicated to PPIs in general, only seven PPIs are
actually used for the CPU interface (ID25–ID31). Interrupts ID16–ID24 are reserved (not used).
• Shared Peripheral Interrupts (SPIs): SPIs are triggered by events generated on associated interrupt
input lines. In this device, the GIC is configured to support 160 SPIs corresponding to its external
IRQS[159:0] signals.
For detailed information about this module and description of SGIs and PPIs, see the Arm Cortex-A15
MPCore Technical Reference Manual (available at infocenter.arm.com/help/index.jsp).
C66x DSP Subsystem Interrupt Controller (DSP1_INTC)
The DSP1 subsystem integrates an interrupt controller - DSP1_INTC, which interfaces the system events
to the C66x core interrupt and exceptions inputs. It combines up to 128 interrupts into 12 prioritized
interrupts presented to the C66x CPU.
For detailed information about this module, see chapter DSP Subsystem of the Device TRM.
Dual Cortex-M4 IPU Subsystem Interrupt Controller (IPUx_Cx_INTC, where x = 1, 2)
There are two Image Processing Unit (IPU) subsystems in the device - IPU1, and IPU2. Each IPU
subsystem integrates two Arm Cortex-M4 cores.
A Nested Vectored Interrupt Controller (NVIC) is integrated within each Cortex-M4. The interrupt mapping
is the same (per IPU) for the two cores to facilitate parallel processing. The NVIC supports:
• 64 external interrupts (in addition to 16 Cortex-M4 internal interrupts), which are dynamically prioritized
with 16 levels of priority defined for each core
• Low-latency exception and interrupt handling
• Prioritization and handling of exceptions
• Control of the local power management
• Debug accesses to the processor core
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
333
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
For detailed information about this module, refer to Arm Cortex-M4 Technical Reference Manual (available
at infocenter.arm.com/help/index.jsp).
6.9
EDMA
The primary purpose of the Enhanced Direct Memory Access (EDMA) controller is to service userprogrammed data transfers between two memory-mapped slave endpoints on the device.
Typical usage of the EDMA controller includes:
• Servicing software-driven paging transfers (for example, data movement between external memory
[such as SDRAM] and internal memory [such as DSP L2 SRAM])
• Servicing event-driven peripherals, such as a serial port
• Performing sorting or sub-frame extraction of various data structures
• Offloading data transfers from the main device CPUs, such as the C66x DSP CorePac or the Arm
CorePac
The EDMA controller consists of two major principle blocks:
• EDMA Channel Controller
• EDMA Transfer Controller(s)
The EDMA Channel Controller (EDMACC) serves as the user interface for the EDMA controller. The
EDMACC includes parameter RAM (PaRAM), channel control registers, and interrupt control registers.
The EDMACC serves to prioritize incoming software requests or events from peripherals and submits
transfer requests (TR) to the EDMA transfer controller.
The EDMA Transfer Controller (EDMATC) is responsible for data movement. The transfer request packets
(TRP) submitted by the EDMACC contain the transfer context, based on which the transfer controller
issues read/write commands to the source and destination addresses programmed for a given transfer.
There are two EDMA controllers present on this device:
• EDMA_0, integrating:
– 1 Channel Controller, referenced as: EDMACC_0
– 2 Transfer Controllers, referenced as: EDMACC_0_TC_0 (or EDMATC_0) and EDMACC_0_TC_1
(or EDMATC_1)
• EDMA_1, integrating:
– 1 Channel Controller, referenced as: EDMACC_1
– 2 Transfer Controllers, referenced as: EDMACC_1_TC_0 (or EDMATC_2) and EDMACC_1_TC_1
(or EDMATC_3)
The two EDMA channel controllers (EDMACC_0 and EDMACC_1) are functionally identical. For
simplification, the unified name EDMACC shall be regularly used throughout this chapter when referring to
EDMA Channel Controllers functionality and features.
The four EDMA transfer controllers (EDMACC_0_TC_0, EDMACC_0_TC_1, EDMACC_1_TC_0 and
EDMACC_1_TC_1) are functionally identical. For simplification, the unified name EDMATC shall be
regularly used throughout this chapter when referring to EDMA Transfer Controllers functionality and
features.
Each EDMACC has the following features:
• Fully orthogonal transfer description
– 3 transfer dimensions:
• Array (multiple bytes)
• Frame (multiple arrays)
• Block (multiple frames)
– Single event can trigger transfer of array, frame, or entire block
– Independent indexes on source and destination
334
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Flexible transfer definition
– Increment or constant addressing modes
– Linking mechanism allows automatic PaRAM set update
– Chaining allows multiple transfers to execute with one event
64 DMA channels
– Channels triggered by either:
• Event synchronization
• Manual synchronization (CPU write to event set register)
• Chain synchronization (completion of one transfer triggers another transfer)
– Support for programmable DMA Channel to PaRAM mapping
8 Quick DMA (QDMA) channels
– QDMA channels are triggered automatically upon writing to PaRAM set entry
– Support for programmable QDMA channel to PaRAM mapping
512 PaRAM sets
– Each PaRAM set can be used for a DMA channel, QDMA channel, or link set
2 transfer controllers/event queues
– 16 event entries per event queue
Interrupt generation based on:
– Transfer completion
– Error conditions
Debug visibility
– Queue water marking/threshold
– Error and status recording to facilitate debug
Memory protection support
– Proxied memory protection for TR submission
– Active memory protection for accesses to PaRAM and registers
Each EDMATC has the following features:
• Supports 2-dimensional (2D) transfers with independent indexes on source and destination (EDMACC
manages the 3rd dimension)
• Up to 4 in-flight transfer requests (TR)
• Programmable priority levels
• Support for increment or constant addressing mode transfers
• Interrupt and error support
• Supports only little-endian operation in this device
• Memory mapped register (MMR) bit fields are fixed position in 32-bit MMR
For more information chapter EDMA Controller of the Device TRM.
6.10 Peripherals
6.10.1 VIP
The VIP module provides video capture functions for the device. VIP incorporates a multi-channel raw
video parser, various video processing blocks, and a flexible Video Port Direct Memory Access (VPDMA)
engine to store incoming video in various formats. The device uses a single instantiation of the VIP
module giving the ability of capturing up to two video streams.
A VIP module includes the following main features:
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
335
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
336
www.ti.com
Two independently configurable external video input capture slices (Slice 0 and Slice 1) each of which
has two video input ports, Port A and Port B, where Port A can be configured as a 24/16/8-bit port, and
Port B is a fixed 8-bit port.
Each video Port A can be operated as a port with clock independent input channels (with interleaved or
separated Y/C data input). Embedded sync and external sync modes are supported for all input
configurations.
Support for a single external asynchronous pixel clock, up to 165MHz per port.
Pixel Clock Input Domain Port A supports up to one 24-bit input data bus, including BT.1120 style
embedded sync for 16-bit and 24-bit data.
Embedded Sync data interface mode supports single or multiplexed sources
Discrete Sync data interface mode supports only single source input
24-bit data input plus discrete syncs can be configured to include:
– 8-bit YUV422 (Y and U/V time interleaved)
– 16-bit YUV422 (CbY and CrY time interleaved)
– 24-bit YUV444
– 16-bit RGB565
– 24-bit RGB888
– 12/16-bit RAW Capture
– 24-bit RAW capture
Discrete sync modes include:
– VSYNC + HSYNC (FID determined by FID signal pin or HSYNC/VSYNC skew)
– VSYNC + ACTVID + FID
– VBLANK + ACTVID (ACTVID toggles in VBLANK) + FID
– VBLANK + ACTVID (no ACTVID toggles in VBLANK) + FID
Multichannel parser (embedded syncs only)
– Embedded syncs only
– Pixel (2x or 4x) or Line multiplexed modes supported
– Performs demultiplexing and basic error checking
– Supports maximum of 9 channels in Line Mux (8 normal + 1 split line)
Ancillary data capture support
– For 16-bit or 24-bit input, ancillary data may be extracted from any single channel
– For 8-bit time interleaved input, ancillary data can be chosen from the Luma channel, the Chroma
channel, or both channels
– Horizontal blanking interval data capture only supported when using discrete syncs (VSYNC +
HSYNC or VSYNC + HBLANK)
– Ancillary data extraction supported on multichannel capture as well as single source streams
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
•
•
•
•
•
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Format conversion and scaling
– Programmable color space conversion
– YUV422 to YUV444 conversion
– YUV444 to YUV422 conversion
– YUV422 to YUV420 conversion
– YUV444 Source: YUV444 to YUV444, YUV444 to RGB888, YUV444 to YUV422, YUV444 to
YUV420
– RGB888 Source: RGB888 to RGB888, RGB888 to YUV444, RGB888 to YUV422, RGB888 to
YUV420
– YUV422 Source: YUV422 to YUV422, YUV422 to YUV420, YUV422 to YUV444, YUV422 to
RGB888
– Supports RAW to RAW (no processing)
– Scaling and format conversions do not work for multiplexed input
Supports up to 2047 pixels wide input - when scaling is engaged
Supports up to 3840 pixels wide input - when only chroma up/down sampling is engaged, without
scaling
Supports up to 4095 pixels wide input - without scaling and chroma up/down sampling
The maximum supported input resolution is further limited by:
– Pixel clock and feature-dependent constraints
– For RGB24-bit format (RAW data), the maximum frame width is limited to 2730 pixels
For more information, see chapter Video Input Port of the Device TRM
6.10.2 DSS
Display Port Interfaces (DPI) is available in DSS named DPI Video Output (VOUT).
VOUT interface consists of:
• 24-bit data bus (data[23:0])
• Horizontal synchronization signal (HSYNC)
• Vertical synchronization signal (VSYNC)
• Data enable (DE)
• Field ID (FID)
• Pixel clock (CLK)
For more information, see section Display Subsystem (DSS) of the Device TRM.
6.10.3 Timers
The device includes several types of timers used by the system software, including 16 general-purpose
(GP) timers, one watchdog timer, and a 32-kHz synchronized timer (COUNTER_32K).
6.10.3.1 General-Purpose Timers
The device has 16 GP timers: TIMER1 through TIMER16.
• TIMER1(1ms tick): has its event capture pin tied to 32KHz clock and can be used to gauge the system
clock input and detects its frequency among 19.2, 20, or 27 MHz. It includes a specific functions to
generate accurate tick interrupts to the operating system and it belongs to the PD_WKUPAON domain
• TIMER2 and TIMER10: (1ms tick timers): they include a specific functions to generate accurate tick
interrupts to the operating system, TIMER2 and TIMER10 belong to the PD_L4PER domain
• TIMER3/4/9/11/13/14/15/16: they belongs to the PD_L4PER domain
• TIMER12 belongs to the PD_WKUPAON power domain
• TIMER5 trough TIMER8: belong to the PD_IPU module
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
337
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Each timer (except TIMER12) can be clocked from the system clock (19.2, 20, or 27 MHz) or the 32-kHz
clock. The selection of clock source is made at the power, reset, and clock management (PRCM) module
level. TIMER12 can be clocked only from the internal oscillator (on-die oscillator)
The following are the main features of the GP timer controllers:
• Level 4 (L4) slave interface support:
– 32-bit data bus width
– 32-/16-bit access supported
– 8-bit access not supported
– 10-bit address bus width
– Burst mode not supported
– Write nonposted transaction mode supported
• Interrupts generated on overflow, compare, and capture
• Free-running 32-bit upward counter
• Compare and capture modes
• Autoreload mode
• Start/stop mode
• Programmable divider clock source (2n, where n = [0:8])
• Dedicated input trigger for capture mode and dedicated output trigger/PWM signal
• Dedicated GP output signal for using the TIMERi_GPO_CFG signal
• On-the-fly read/write register (while counting)
• 1-ms tick with 32.768-Hz functional clock generated (only TIMER1, TIMER2, and TIMER10)
For more information, see section Timers of the Device TRM.
6.10.3.2 32-kHz Synchronized Timer (COUNTER_32K)
The 32-kHz synchronized timer (COUNTER_32K) is a 32-bit counter clocked by the falling edge of the 32kHz system clock.
The main features of the 32-kHz synchronized timer controller are:
• L4 slave interface (OCP) support:
– 32-bit data bus width
– 32-/16-bit access supported
– 8-bit access not supported
– 16-bit address bus width
– Burst mode not supported
– Write nonposted transaction mode not supported
• Only read operations are supported on the module registers; no write operation is supported (no
error/no action on write).
• Free-running 32-bit upward counter
• Start and keep counting after power-on reset
• Automatic roll over to 0; highest value reached: 0xFFFF FFFF
• On-the-fly read (while counting)
For more information, see section Timers of the Device TRM.
6.10.3.3 Watchdog Timer
The device includes one instance of the 32-bit watchdog timer: WD_TIMER2.
338
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
The watchdog timer is an upward counter capable of generating a pulse on the reset pin and an interrupt
to the device system modules following an overflow condition. The WD_TIMER2 timer serves resets to the
PRCM module (its interrupt outputs are unused).
WD_TIMER2 is located in the PD_WKUPAON power domain, and can run when the device is in lowest
power state (all power domains are off except always-on (AON) and WKUP).
The watchdog timer can be accessed, loaded, and cleared by registers through the L4_WKUP interface.
The watchdog timer has the 32-kHz clock for its timer clock input. WD_TIMER2 directly generates a warm
reset condition on overflow.
WD_TIMER2 connects to a single target agent port on the L4_WKUP interconnect.
The main features of the watchdog timer controllers are:
• L4 slave interface support:
– 32-bit data bus width
– 32-/16-bit access supported
– 8-bit access not supported
– 11-bit address bus width
– Burst mode not supported
– Write nonposted mode supported
• Free-running 32-bit upward counter
• Programmable divider clock source (2n where n = [0:7])
• On-the-fly read/write register (while counting)
• Subset programming model of the GP timer
• The watchdog timer is reset either on power on or after a warm reset before it starts counting.
• Reset or interrupt actions when a timer overflow condition occurs
• The watchdog timer generates a reset or an interrupt in its hardware integration.
For more information, see section Timers of the Device TRM.
6.10.4 I2C
The device contains five multimaster high-speed (HS) inter-integrated circuit (I2C) controllers (I2Ci
modules, where i = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5) each of which provides an interface between a local host (LH), such as a
digital signal processor (DSP), and any I2C-bus-compatible device that connects through the I2C serial
bus. External components attached to the I2C bus can serially transmit and receive up to 8 bits of data to
and from the LH device through the 2-wire I2C interface.
Each multimaster HS I2C controller can be configured to act like a slave or master I2C-compatible device.
I2C1 and I2C2 controllers have dedicated I2C compliant open drain buffers, and support Fast mode (up to
400Kbps).
I2C3, I2C4 and I2C5 controllers are multiplexed with standard LVCMOS IO and connected to emulate open
drain. I2C emulation is achieved by configuring the LVCMOS buffers to output Hi-Z instead of driving high
when transmitting logic 1. These controllers support HS mode (up to 3.4Mbps).
For more information, see section Multimaster High-Speed I2C Controller (I2C) in chapter Serial
Communication Interfaces of the Device TRM.
6.10.5 UART
The UART is a simple L4 slave peripheral that utilizes the DMA_SYSTEM or EDMA for data transfer or
IRQ polling via CPU. There are 10 UART modules in the device. Only one UART supports IrDA features.
Each UART can be used for configuration and data exchange with a number of external peripheral
devices or interprocessor communication between devices.
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
339
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
6.10.5.1 UART Features
The UARTi (where i = 1 to 10) include the following features:
• 16C750 compatibility
• 64-byte FIFO buffer for receiver and 64-byte FIFO for transmitter
• Programmable interrupt trigger levels for FIFOs
• Baud generation based on programmable divisors N (where N = 1…16,384) operating from a fixed
functional clock of 48 MHz or 192 MHz
Oversampling is programmed by software as 16 or 13. Thus, the baud rate computation is one of two
options:
• Baud rate = (functional clock / 16) / N
• Baud rate = (functional clock / 13) / N
• This software programming mode enables higher baud rates with the same error amount without
changing the clock source
• Break character detection and generation
• Configurable data format:
– Data bit: 5, 6, 7, or 8 bits
– Parity bit: Even, odd, none
– Stop-bit: 1, 1.5, 2 bit(s)
• Flow control: Hardware (RTS/CTS) or software (XON/XOFF)
• The 48 MHz functional clock option allows baud rates up to 3.6Mbps
• The 192 MHz functional clock option allows baud rates up to 12Mbps
• UART1 module has extended modem control signals (DCD, RI, DTR, DSR)
• UART3 supports IrDA
6.10.5.2 IrDA Features
UART3 supports the following IrDA key features:
• Support of IrDA 1.4 slow infrared (SIR), medium infrared (MIR), and fast infrared (FIR)
communications:
– Frame formatting: Addition of variable beginning-of-frame (xBOF) characters and end-of-frame
(EOF) characters
– Uplink/downlink cyclic redundancy check (CRC) generation/detection
– Asynchronous transparency (automatic insertion of break character)
– Eight-entry status FIFO (with selectable trigger levels) to monitor frame length and frame errors
– Framing error, CRC error, illegal symbol (FIR), and abort pattern (SIR, MIR) detection
6.10.5.3 CIR Features
The CIR mode uses a variable pulse-width modulation (PWM) technique (based on multiples of a
programmable t period) to encompass the various formats of infrared encoding for remote-control
applications. The CIR logic transmits data packets based on a user-definable frame structure and packet
content.
The CIR (UART3 only) includes the following features to provide CIR support for remote-control
applications:
• Transmit mode only (receive mode is not supported)
• Free data format (supports any remote-control private standards)
• Selectable bit rate
• Configurable carrier frequency
• 1/2, 5/12, 1/3, or 1/4 carrier duty cycle
340
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
For more information, see section Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART) in chapter Serial
Communication Interfaces of the Device TRM.
6.10.6 McSPI
The McSPI is a master/slave synchronous serial bus. There are four separate McSPI modules (McSPI1,
McSPI2, McSPI3, and McSPI4) in the device. All these four modules support up to four external devices
(four chip selects) and are able to work as both master and slave.
The McSPI modules include the following main features:
• Serial clock with programmable frequency, polarity, and phase for each channel
• Wide selection of McSPI word lengths, ranging from 4 to 32 bits
• Up to four master channels, or single channel in slave mode
• Master multichannel mode:
– Full duplex/half duplex
– Transmit-only/receive-only/transmit-and-receive modes
– Flexible input/output (I/O) port controls per channel
– Programmable clock granularity
– McSPI configuration per channel. This means, clock definition, polarity enabling and word width
• Single interrupt line for multiple interrupt source events
• Power management through wake-up capabilities
• Enable the addition of a programmable start-bit for McSPI transfer per channel (start-bit mode)
• Supports start-bit write command
• Supports start-bit pause and break sequence
• Programmable timing control between chip select and external clock generation
• Built-in FIFO available for a single channel
For more information, see section Serial Peripheral Interface (McSPI) in chapter Serial Communication
Interfaces of the Device TRM.
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
341
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
6.10.7 QSPI
The quad serial peripheral interface (QSPI™) module is a kind of SPI module that allows single, dual, or
quad read access to external SPI devices. This module has a memory mapped register interface, which
provides a direct interface for accessing data from external SPI devices and thus simplifying software
requirements. The QSPI works as a master only.
The QSPI supports the following features:
• General SPI features:
– Programmable clock divider
– Six pin interface
– Programmable length (from 1 to 128 bits) of the words transferred
– Programmable number (from 1 to 4096) of the words transferred
– 4 external chip-select signals
– Support for 3-, 4-, or 6-pin SPI interface
– Optional interrupt generation on word or frame (number of words) completion
– Programmable delay between chip select activation and output data from 0 to 3 QSPI clock cycles
– Programmable signal polarities
– Programmable active clock edge
– Software-controllable interface allowing for any type of SPI transfer
– Control through L3_MAIN configuration port
• Serial flash interface (SFI) features:
– Serial flash read/write interface
– Additional registers for defining read and write commands to the external serial flash device
– 1 to 4 address bytes
– Fast read support, where fast read requires dummy bytes after address bytes; 0 to 3 dummy bytes
can be configured.
– Dual read support
– Quad read support
– Little-endian support only
– Linear increment addressing mode only
The QSPI supports only dual and quad reads. Dual or quad writes are not supported. In addition, there is
no "pass through" mode supported where the data present on the QSPI input is sent to its output.
For more information, see section Quad Serial Peripheral Interface (QSPI) in chapter Serial
Communication Interfaces of the Device TRM.
6.10.8 McASP
The MCASP functions as a general-purpose audio serial port optimized to the requirements of various
audio applications. The McASP module can operate in both transmit and receive modes. The McASP is
useful for time-division multiplexed (TDM) stream, Inter-IC Sound (I2S) protocols reception and
transmission as well as for an intercomponent digital audio interface transmission (DIT). The McASP has
the flexibility to gluelessly connect to a Sony/Philips digital interface (S/PDIF) transmit physical layer
component.
Although intercomponent digital audio interface reception (DIR) mode (i.e. S/PDIF stream receiving) is not
natively supported by the McASP module, a specific TDM mode implementation for the McASP receivers
allows an easy connection to external DIR components (for example, S/PDIF to I2S format converters).
The device have integrated 8 McASP modules (McASP1-McASP8) with:
• McASP1 and McASP2 supporting 16 channels with independent TX/RX clock/sync domain
• McASP3 through McASP7 modules supporting 4 channels with independent TX/RX clock/sync domain
342
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
•
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
McASP8 supporting 2 channels with independent TX/RX clock/sync domain
For more information, see section Multichannel Audio Serial Port (McASP) in chapter Serial
Communication Interfaces of the Device TRM.
6.10.9 USB
SuperSpeed USB DRD Subsystem has three instances in the device providing the following functions:
• USB1: SuperSpeed (SS) USB 3.0 Dual-Role-Device (DRD) subsystem with integrated SS (USB3.0)
PHY and HS/FS (USB2.0) PHY
• USB2: High-Speed (HS) USB 2.0 Dual-Role-Device (DRD) subsystem with integrated HS/FS PHY
SuperSpeed USB DRD Subsystem has the following features:
• Dual-role-device (DRD) capability:
– Supports USB Peripheral (or Device) mode at speeds SS (5Gbps)(USB1 only), HS (480 Mbps),
and FS (12 Mbps)
– Supports USB Host mode at speeds SS (5Gbps)(USB1 only), HS (480 Mbps), FS (12 Mbps), and
LS (1.5 Mbps)
– USB static peripheral operation
– USB static host operation
– Flexible stream allocation
– Stream priority
– External Buffer Control
• Each instance contains single xHCI controller with the following features:
– Internal DMA controller
– Descriptor caching and data prefetching
– Interrupt moderation and blocking
– Power management USB3.0 states for U0, U1, U2, and U3
– Dynamic FIFO memory allocation for all endpoints
– Supports all modes of transfers (control, bulk, interrupt, and isochronous)
– Supports high bandwidth ISO mode
• Connects to an external charge pump for VBUS 5 V generation
• USB-HS PHY (USB2PHY1 and USB2PHY2 for USB1 and USB2, respectively): contain the USB
functions, drivers, receivers, and pads for correct D+/D– signalling
For more information, see section SuperSpeed USB DRD (USB) in chapter Serial Communication
Interfaces of the Device TRM.
6.10.10 PCIe
The Peripheral Component Interconnect Express (PCIe) module is a multi-lane I/O interconnect that
provides low pin-count, high reliability, and high-speed data transfer at rates of up to 5.0 Gbps per lane,
per direction, for serial links on backplanes and printed wiring boards. It is a 3-rd Generation I/O
Interconnect technology succeeding PCI and ISA bus that is designed to be used as a general-purpose
serial I/O interconnect. It is also used as a bridge to other interconnects like USB2/3.0, GbE MAC, and so
forth.
The PCI Express standard predecessor - PCI, is a parallel bus architecture that is increasingly difficult to
scale-up in bandwidth, which is usually performed by increasing the number of data signal lines. The PCIe
architecture was developed to help minimize I/O bus bottlenecks within systems and to provide the
necessary bandwidth for high-speed, chip-to-chip, and board-to-board communications within a system. It
is designed to replace the PCI-based shared, parallel bus signaling technology that is approaching its
practical performance limits while simplifying the interface design.
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
343
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
The device instantiates two PCIe subsystems (PCIe_SS1 and PCIe_SS2). The PCIe controller is capable
to operate either in Root Complex (RC) or in End Point (EP) PCIe mode. The device PCIe_SS1 controller
supports up to two 16-bit data lanes on its PIPE port. The device PCIe_SS2 controller supports only one
16-bit data lane on its PIPE port.
When the PCIe_SS1 controller PIPE port is configured to operate in a single-lane mode, it operates on a
single pair of PCIe PHY serializer and deserializer - PCIe1_PHY_TX/PCIe1_PHY_RX. When PCIe_SS1
PIPE is configured to operate in dual-lane mode, it operates on two pairs of PCIe PHY serializer and
deserializer - PCIe1_PHY_TX/PCIe1_PHY_RX and PCIe2_PHY_TX/PCIe2_PHY_RX, respectively. The
single-lane PCIe_SS2 controller PIPE port (if enabled) can operate only on the
PCIe2_PHY_TX/PCIe2_PHY_RX pair. Hereby, if PCIe_SS2 controller is used, the PCIe_SS1 can operate
only in a single-lane mode on the PCIe1_PHY_TX/PCIe1_PHY_RX. In addition, PCIe PHY subsystem
encompasses a PCIe PCS (physical coding sublayer), a PCIe power management logic, APLL, a DPLL
reference clock generator and an APLL clock low-jitter buffer.
• The PCIe Controller implements the transport and link layers of the PCIe interface protocol.
• PCIe PCS (a physical coding sublayer component) converts a 8-bit portion of parallel data over a PCIe
lane to a 10-bit parallel data to adapt the process of serialization and deserialization in the TX/RX
PHYs to various requirements. At the same time it transforms the transmission rate to maintain the
PCIe Gen2 bandwidth (5 Gbps) on both sides (PCIe controller and PHY).
• A multiplexer logic which adds flexibility to connect a PCIe controller hardware mapped PCS logic
output to a single (for the single-lane PCIe_SS2 controller) or to a couple (for the 2-lane PCIe_SS1
controller) of PHY ports at a time
• Physical layer (PHY) serializer/deserializer components with associated power control logic, building
the so called PMA (physical media attachment) part of the PCIe_PHY transceiver, as follows:
– PCIe physical port 0 associated serializer (TX) - PCIe1_PHY_TX and deserializer (RX) PCIe1_PHY_RX
– PCIe physical port 1 associated serializer (TX) - PCIe2_PHY_TX and deserializer (RX) PCIe2_PHY_RX
• DPLL_PCIe_REF is a DPLL clock source, controlled from the device PRCM, that provides a 100-MHz
clock to the PCIe PHY serializer/deserializer components reference clock inputs.
• Both the PCIe_SS1 and PCIe_SS2 share the same APLL (APLLPCIe) which by default multiplies the
DPLL_PCIe_REF (typically 100 MHz or 20 MHz) clock to 2.5 GHz.
• The APLLPCIe low-jitter buffer (ACSPCIE) and additional logic takes care to provide the PCIe APLL
reference input clock.
PCIe module supports the following features:
• PCI Local Bus Specification revision 3.0
• PCI Express Base 3.0 Specification, revision 1.0.
At system level the device supports PCI express interface in the following configurations:
• Each PCIe subsystem controller has support for PCIe Gen2 mode (5.0 Gbps per lane) and Gen1 mode
(2.5 Gbps per lane).
• One PCIe (PCIe_SS1) operates as Gen2 2-lanes supporting in either root-complex (RC) or end-point
EP.
• Two PCIe (PCIe_SS1 and PCIe_SS2) operates Gen2 1-lane supporting either RC or EP with the
possibility of one operating in Gen1 and one in Gen2.
• PCIe_SS1 can be configured to operate in either 2-Lane (dual lane) or 1-Lane (single lane) mode, as
follows:
– Single Lane - lane 0 mapped to the PCIe port 0 of the device
– Flexible dual lane configuration - lanes 0 and 1 can be swapped on the two PCIe ports
344
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
•
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
PCIe_SS2 can only operate in 1-Lane mode, as follows:
– Single Lane - lane 0 mapped to the device PCIe port 1
When PCIe_SS1 is configured to operate in dual-lane mode, PCIe_SS2 is in-operable as both
PCIe1_PHY_RX/TX and PCIe2_PHY_RX/TX are assigned to PCIe_SS1, and thereby NOT available to
PCIe_SS2.
The main features of a device PCIe controller are:
• 16-bit operation at 250 MHz on PIPE interface (per 16-bit lane)
• One master port on the L3_MAIN supporting 32-bit address and 64-bit data bus.
• PCIe_SS1 master port dedicated MMU (device MMU2) on L3_MAIN path, to which PCIe traffic can be
optionally mapped.
• One slave port on the L3_MAIN supporting 29-bit address and 64-bit data bus.
• Maximum outbound payload size of 64 Bytes (the L3 Interconnect PCIe1/2 target ports split bursts of
size >64 Bytes to the into multiple 64 Byte bursts)
• Maximum inbound payload size of 256 Bytes (internally converted to 128 Byte - bursts)
• No remote read request size limit: implicit support for 4 KiB-size and greater
• Support of EP legacy mode
• Support of inbound I/O accesses in EP legacy mode
• PIPE interface features fixed-width (16-bit data per lane) and dynamic frequency to switch between
PCIe Gen1 and Gen2.
• Ultra-low transmit and receive latency
• Automatic Lane reversal as specified in the PCI Express Base 3.0 Specification, revision 1.0 (transmit
and receive)
• Polarity inversion on receive
• Single Virtual Channel (VC0) and Single Traffic Class (TC0)
• Single Function in End point mode
• Automatic credit management
• ECRC generation and checking
• All PCI Device Power Management D-states with the exception of D3cold/L2 state
• PCI Express Active State Power Management (ASPM) state L0s and L1 (with exceptions)
• PCI Express Link Power Management states except for L2 state
• PCI Express Advanced Error Reporting (AER)
• PCI Express messages for both transmit and receive
• Filtering for Posted, Non-Posted, and Completion traffic
• Configurable BAR filtering, I/O filtering, configuration filtering and completion lookup/timeout
• Access to configuration space registers and external application memory mapped registers through
ECAM mechanism.
• Legacy PCI Interrupts reception (RC) and generation (EP)
• 2 x hardware interrupts per PCIe_SS1 and PCIe_SS2 controller mapped via the device Interrupt
Crossbar (IRQ_CROSSBAR) to multiple device host (MPU, DSP, and so forth) interrupt controllers in
the device
• MSIs generation and reception
• PCIe_PHY Loopback in RC mode
For more information, see section PCIe Controller in chapter Serial Communication Interfaces of the
Device TRM.
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
345
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
6.10.11 DCAN
The Controller Area Network (CAN) is a serial communications protocol which efficiently supports
distributed real-time applications. CAN has high immunity to electrical interference and the ability to selfdiagnose and repair data errors. In a CAN network, many short messages are broadcast to the entire
network, which provides for data consistency in every node of the system.
The device provides two DCAN interfaces for supporting distributed realtime control with a high level of
security. The DCAN interfaces implement the following features:
• Supports CAN protocol version 2.0 part A, B
• Bit rates up to 1 MBit/s
• 64 message objects
• Individual identifier mask for each message object
• Programmable FIFO mode for message objects
• Programmable loop-back modes for self-test operation
• Suspend mode for debug support
• Software module reset
• Automatic bus on after Bus-Off state by a programmable 32-bit timer
• Direct access to Message RAM during test mode
• CAN Rx/Tx pins are configurable as general-purpose IO pins
• Two interrupt lines (plus additional parity-error interrupts line)
• RAM initialization
• DMA support
For more information, see section Controller Area Network Interface (DCAN) in chapter Serial
Communication Interfaces of the Device TRM.
6.10.12 GMAC_SW
The three-port gigabit ethernet switch subsystem (GMAC_SW) provides ethernet packet communication
and can be configured as an ethernet switch. It provides the gigabit media independent interface (G/MII) in
MII mode, reduced gigabit media independent interface (RGMII), reduced media independent interface
(RMII), and the management data input output (MDIO) for physical layer device (PHY) management.
The GMAC_SW subsystem provides the following features:
• Two Ethernet ports (port 1 and port 2) with selectable RGMII, RMII, and G/MII (in MII mode only)
interfaces plus internal Communications Port Programming Interface (CPPI 3.1) on port 0
• Synchronous 10/100/1000 Mbit operation
• Wire rate switching (802.1d)
• Non-blocking switch fabric
• Flexible logical FIFO-based packet buffer structure
• Four priority level Quality Of Service (QOS) support (802.1p)
• CPPI 3.1 compliant DMA controllers
• Support for Audio/Video Bridging (P802.1Qav/D6.0)
• Support for IEEE 1588 Clock Synchronization (2008 Annex D and Annex F)
– Timing FIFO and time stamping logic embedded in the subsystem
• Device Level Ring (DLR) Support
• Energy Efficient Ethernet (EEE) support (802.3az)
• Flow Control Support (802.3x)
346
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Address Lookup Engine (ALE)
– 1024 total address entries plus VLANs
– Wire rate lookup
– Host controlled time-based aging
– Multiple spanning tree support (spanning tree per VLAN)
– L2 address lock and L2 filtering support
– MAC authentication (802.1x)
– Receive-based or destination-based multicast and broadcast rate limits
– MAC address blocking
– Source port locking
– OUI (Vendor ID) host accept/deny feature
– Remapping of priority level of VLAN or ports
VLAN support
– 802.1Q compliant
• Auto add port VLAN for untagged frames on ingress
• Auto VLAN removal on egress and auto pad to minimum frame size
Ethernet Statistics:
– EtherStats and 802.3Stats Remote network Monitoring (RMON) statistics gathering (shared)
– Programmable statistics interrupt mask when a statistic is above one half its 32-bit value
Flow Control Support (802.3x)
Digital loopback and FIFO loopback modes supported
Maximum frame size 2016 bytes (2020 with VLAN)
8k (2048 × 32) internal CPPI buffer descriptor memory
Management Data Input/Output (MDIO) module for PHY Management
Programmable interrupt control with selected interrupt pacing
Emulation support
Programmable Transmit Inter Packet Gap (IPG)
Reset isolation (switch function remains active even in case of all device resets except for POR pin
reset and ICEPICK cold reset)
Full duplex mode supported in 10/100/1000 Mbps. Half-duplex mode supported only in 10/100 Mbps.
IEEE 802.3 gigabit Ethernet conformant
For more information, see section Gigabit Ethernet Switch (GMAC_SW) in chapter Serial Communication
Interfaces of the Device TRM.
6.10.13 eMMC/SD/SDIO
The eMMC/SD/SDIO host controller provides an interface between a local host (LH) such as a
microprocessor unit (MPU) or digital signal processor (DSP) and either eMMC, SD® memory cards, or
SDIO cards and handles eMMC/SD/SDIO transactions with minimal LH intervention.
Optionally, the controller is connected to the L3_MAIN interconnect to have a direct access to system
memory. It also supports two direct memory access (DMA) slave channels or a DMA master access (in
this case, slave DMA channels are deactivated) depending on its integration.
The eMMC/SD/SDIO host controller deals with eMMC/SD/SDIO protocol at transmission level, data
packing, adding cyclic redundancy checks (CRCs), start/end bit, and checking for syntactical correctness.
The application interface can send every eMMC/SD/SDIO command and poll for the status of the adapter
or wait for an interrupt request, which is sent back in case of exceptions or to warn of end of operation.
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
347
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
The application interface can read card responses or flag registers. It can also mask individual interrupt
sources. All these operations can be performed by reading and writing control registers. The
eMMC/SD/SDIO host controller also supports two DMA channels.
There are four eMMC/SD/SDIO host controllers inside the device. gives an overview of the
eMMC/SD/SDIOi (i = 1 to 4) controllers.
Each controller has the following data width:
• eMMC/SD/SDIO1 - 4-bit wide data bus
• eMMC/SD/SDIO2 - 8-bit wide data bus
• eMMC/SD/SDIO3 - 8-bit wide data bus
• eMMC/SD/SDIO4 - 4-bit wide data bus
The eMMC/SD/SDIOi controller is also referred to as MMCi.
Compliance with standards:
• Full compliance with MMC/eMMC command/response sets as defined in the JC64 MMC/eMMC
standard specification, v4.5.
• Full compliance with SD command/response sets as defined in the SD Physical Layer specification
v3.01
• Full compliance with SDIO command/response sets and interrupt/read-wait suspend-resume
operations as defined in the SD part E1 specification v3.00
• Full compliance with SD Host Controller Standard Specification sets as defined in the SD card
specification Part A2 v3.00
Main features of the eMMC/SD/SDIO host controllers:
• Flexible architecture allowing support for new command structure
• 32-bit wide access bus to maximize bus throughput
• Designed for low power
• Programmable clock generation
• Dedicated DLL to support SDR104 mode (MMC1 only)
• Dedicated DLL to support HS200 mode (MMC2 only)
• Card insertion/removal detection and write protect detection
• L4 slave interface supports:
– 32-bit data bus width
– 8/16/32 bit access supported
– 9-bit address bus width
– Streaming burst supported only with burst length up to 7
– WNP supported
• L3 initiator interface Supports:
– 32-bit data bus width
– 8/16/32 bit access supported
– 32-bit address bus width
– Burst supported
• Built-in 1024-byte buffer for read or write
• Two DMA channels, one interrupt line
• Support JC 64 v4.4.1 boot mode operations
• Support SDA 3.00 Part A2 programming model
• Support SDA 3.00 Part A2 DMA feature (ADMA2)
348
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
•
•
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Supported data transfer rates:
– MMCi supports the following SD v3.0 data transfer rates:
• DS mode (3.3V IOs): up to 12 MBps (24 MHz clock)
• HS mode (3.3V IOs): up to 24 MBps (48 MHz clock)
• SDR12 (1.8V IOs): up to 12 MBps (24 MHz clock)
• SDR25 (1.8V IOs): up to 24 MBps (48 MHz clock)
• SDR50 (1.8V IOs): up to 48 MBps (96 MHz clock) - MMC1 and MMC3 only
• DDR50 (1.8V IOs): up to 48 MBps (48 MHz clock) - MMC1 only
• SDR104 (1.8V IOs) cards can be supported up to 192 MHz clock (96 MBps max) - MMC1 only
– MMCi supports the Default SD mode 1-bit data transfer up to 24Mbps (3MBps)
– Only MMC2 supports also the following JC64 v4.5 data transfer rates:
• Up to 192 MBps in eMMC mode, 8-bit SDR mode (192 MHz clock frequency)
• Up to 96 MBps in eMMC mode, 8-bit DDR mode (48 MHz clock frequency)
All eMMC/SD/SDIO controllers are connected to 1.8V/3.3V compatible I/Os to support 1.8V/3.3V
signaling
NOTE
eMMC functionality is supported fully by MMC2 only. The other MMC modules are capable of
eMMC functionality, but are not timing-optimized for eMMC.
The differences between the eMMC/SD/SDIO host controllers and a standard SD host controller defined
by the SD Card Specification, Part A2, SD Host Controller Standard Specification, v3.0 are:
• The clock divider in the eMMC/SD/SDIO host controller supports a wider range of frequency than
specified in the SD Memory Card Specifications, v3.0. The eMMC/SD/SDIO host controller supports
odd and even clock ratio.
• The eMMC/SD/SDIO host controller supports configurable busy time-out.
• ADMA2 64-bit mode is not supported.
• There is no external LED control.
NOTE
Only even ratios are supported in DDR mode.
For more information, see chapter eMMC/SD/SDIO of the Device TRM.
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
349
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
6.10.14 GPIO
The general-purpose interface combines eight general-purpose input/output (GPIO) banks.
Each GPIO module provides 32 dedicated general-purpose pins with input and output capabilities; thus,
the general-purpose interface supports up to 256 (8 × 32) pins. Since some of the pins are reserved in this
Device, general-purpose interface supports up to 186 pins.
These pins can be configured for the following applications:
• Data input (capture)/output (drive)
• Keyboard interface with a debounce cell
• Interrupt generation in active mode upon the detection of external events. Detected events are
processed by two parallel independent interrupt-generation submodules to support biprocessor
operations.
• Wake-up request generation in idle mode upon the detection of external events
For more information, see section General-Purpose Interface (GPIO) of the Device TRM.
6.10.15 ePWM
An effective PWM peripheral must be able to generate complex pulse width waveforms with minimal CPU
overhead or intervention. It needs to be highly programmable and very flexible while being easy to
understand and use. The ePWM unit described here addresses these requirements by allocating all
needed timing and control resources on a per PWM channel basis. Cross coupling or sharing of resources
has been avoided; instead, the ePWM is built up from smaller single channel modules with separate
resources and that can operate together as required to form a system. This modular approach results in
an orthogonal architecture and provides a more transparent view of the peripheral structure, helping users
to understand its operation quickly.
Each ePWM module supports the following features:
• Dedicated 16-bit time-base counter with period and frequency control
• Two PWM outputs (EPWMxA and EPWMxB) that can be used in the following configurations:
– Two independent PWM outputs with single-edge operation
– Two independent PWM outputs with dual-edge symmetric operation
– One independent PWM output with dual-edge asymmetric operation
• Asynchronous override control of PWM signals through software.
• Programmable phase-control support for lag or lead operation relative to other ePWM modules.
• Hardware-locked (synchronized) phase relationship on a cycle-by-cycle basis.
• Dead-band generation with independent rising and falling edge delay control.
• Programmable trip zone allocation of both cycle-by-cycle trip and one-shot trip on fault
conditions.
• A trip condition can force either high, low, or high-impedance state logic levels at PWM
outputs.
• Programmable event prescaling minimizes CPU overhead on interrupts.
• PWM chopping by high-frequency carrier signal, useful for pulse transformer gate drives.
For more information, see section Enhanced PWM (ePWM) Module in chapter Pulse-Width Modulation
Subsystem of the Device TRM.
6.10.16 eCAP
Uses for eCAP include:
• Sample rate measurements of audio inputs
• Speed measurements of rotating machinery (for example, toothed sprockets sensed via Hall sensors)
• Elapsed time measurements between position sensor pulses
350
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
•
•
•
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
4 stage sequencer (Mod4 counter) which is synchronized to external events (ECAPx pin edges)
Period and duty cycle measurements of pulse train signals
Decoding current or voltage amplitude derived from duty cycle encoded current/voltage sensors
The eCAP module includes the following features:
• 32-bit time base counter
• 4-event time-stamp registers (each 32 bits)
• Edge polarity selection for up to four sequenced time-stamp capture events
• Interrupt on either of the four events
• Single shot capture of up to four event time-stamps
• Continuous mode capture of time-stamps in a four-deep circular buffer
• Absolute time-stamp capture
• Difference (Delta) mode time-stamp capture
• All above resources dedicated to a single input pin
• When not used in capture mode, the ECAP module can be configured as a single channel PWM output
For more information, see section Enhanced Capture (eCAP) Module in chapter Pulse-Width Modulation
Subsystem of the Device TRM.
6.10.17 eQEP
A single track of slots patterns the periphery of an incremental encoder disk, as shown in Figure 6-2.
These slots create an alternating pattern of dark and light lines. The disk count is defined as the number
of dark/light line pairs that occur per revolution (lines per revolution). As a rule, a second track is added to
generate a signal that occurs once per revolution (index signal: QEPI), which can be used to indicate an
absolute position. Encoder manufacturers identify the index pulse using different terms such as index,
marker, home position, and zero reference.
QEPA
QEPB
QEPI
eqep-001
Figure 6-2. Optical Encoder Disk
To derive direction information, the lines on the disk are read out by two different photo-elements that
"look" at the disk pattern with a mechanical shift of 1/4 the pitch of a line pair between them. This shift is
realized with a reticle or mask that restricts the view of the photo-element to the desired part of the disk
lines. As the disk rotates, the two photo-elements generate signals that are shifted 90 degrees out of
phase from each other. These are commonly called the quadrature QEPA and QEPB signals. The
clockwise direction for most encoders is defined as the QEPA channel going positive before the QEPB
channel.
The encoder wheel typically makes one revolution for every revolution of the motor or the wheel may be at
a geared rotation ratio with respect to the motor. Therefore, the frequency of the digital signal coming from
the QEPA and QEPB outputs varies proportionally with the velocity of the motor. For example, a 2000-line
encoder directly coupled to a motor running at 5000 revolutions per minute (rpm) results in a frequency of
166.6 KHz, so by measuring the frequency of either the QEPA or QEPB output, the processor can
determine the velocity of the motor.
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
351
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
For more information, see section Enhanced Quadrature Encoder Pulse (eQEP) Module in chapter PulseWidth Modulation Subsystem of the Device TRM.
6.11 On-chip Debug
Debugging a system that contains an embedded processor involves an environment that connects highlevel debugging software running on a host computer to a low-level debug interface supported by the
target device. Between these levels, a debug and trace controller (DTC) facilitates communication
between the host debugger and the debug support logic on the target chip.
The DTC is a combination of hardware and software that connects the host debugger to the target system.
The DTC uses one or more hardware interfaces and/or protocols to convert actions dictated by the
debugger user to JTAG® commands and scans that execute the core hardware.
The debug software and hardware components let the user control multiple central processing unit (CPU)
cores embedded in the device in a global or local manner. This environment provides:
• Synchronized global starting and stopping of multiple processors
• Starting and stopping of an individual processor
• Each processor can generate triggers that can be used to alter the execution flow of other processors
System topics include but are not limited to:
• System clocking and power-down issues
• Interconnection of multiple devices
• Trigger channels
For more information, see chapter On-chip Debug of the Device TRM.
The device deploys Texas Instrument's CTools debug technology for on-chip debug and trace support. It
provides the following features:
• External debug interfaces:
– Primary debug interface - IEEE1149.1 (JTAG) or IEEE1149.7 (complementary superset of JTAG)
• Used for debugger connection
• Default mode is IEEE1149.1 but debugger can switch to IEEE1149.7 via an IEEE1149.7
adapter module
• Controls ICEPick (generic test access port [TAP] for dynamic TAP insertion) to allow the
debugger to access several debug resources through its secondary (output) JTAG ports (for
more information, see ICEPick Secondary TAPs section of the Device TRM).
– Debug (trace) port
• Can be used to export processor or system trace off-chip (to an external trace receiver)
• Can be used for cross-triggering with an external device
• Configured through debug resources manager (DRM) module instantiated in the debug
subsystem
• For more information about debug (trace) port, see Debug (Trace) Port and Concurrent Debug
Modes sections of the Device TRM.
• JTAG based processor debug on:
– Cortex-A15 in MPU
– C66x in DSP1
– Cortex-M4 (x2) in IPU1, IPU2
– Arm968 (x2) in IVA
• Dynamic TAP insertion
– Controlled by ICEPick
– For more information, see , Dynamic TAP Insertion.
352
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
•
•
•
•
•
•
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Power and clock management
– Debugger can get the status of the power domain associated to each TAP.
– Debugger may prevent the application software switching off the power domain.
– Application power management behavior can be preserved during debug across power transitions.
– For more information, see Power and Clock Management section of the Device TRM.
Reset management
– Debugger can configure ICEPick to assert, block, or extend the reset of a given subsystem.
– For more information, see Reset Management section of the Device TRM.
Cross-triggering
– Provides a way to propagate debug (trigger) events from one processor, subsystem, or module to
another:
• Subsystem A can be programmed to generate a debug event, which can then be exported as a
global trigger across the device.
• Subsystem B can be programmed to be sensitive to the trigger line input and to generate an
action on trigger detection.
– Two global trigger lines are implemented
– Device-level cross-triggering is handled by the XTRIG (TI cross-trigger) module implemented in the
debug subsystem
– Various Arm® CoreSight™ cross-trigger modules implemented to provide support for CoreSight
triggers distribution
• CoreSight Cross-Trigger Interface (CS_CTI) modules
• CoreSight Cross-Trigger Matrix (CS_CTM) modules
– For more information about cross-triggering, see Cross-Triggering section of the Device TRM.
Suspend
– Provides a way to stop a closely coupled hardware process running on a peripheral module when
the host processor enters debug state
– For more information about suspend, see Suspend section of the Device TRM.
MPU watchpoint
– Embedded in MPU subsystem
– Provides visibility on MPU to EMIF direct paths
– For more information, see MPU Memory Adaptor (MPU_MA) Watchpoint section of the Device
TRM.
Processor trace
– Cortex-A15 (MPU) and C66x (DSP) processor trace is supported
– Program trace only for MPU (no data trace)
– MPU trace supported by a CoreSight Program Trace Macrocell (CS_PTM) module
– Three exclusive trace sinks:
• CoreSight Trace Port Interface Unit (CS_TPIU) – trace export to an external trace receiver
• CTools Trace Buffer Router (CT_TBR) in system bridge mode – trace export through USB
• CT_TBR in buffer mode – trace history store into on-chip trace buffer
– For more information, see Processor Trace section of the Device TRM.
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
353
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
•
•
www.ti.com
System instrumentation (trace)
– Supported by a CTools System Trace Module (CT_STM), implementing MIPI System Trace
Protocol (STP) (rev 2.0)
– Real-time software trace
• MPU software instrumentation through CoreSight STM (CS_STM) (STP2.0)
• System-on-chip (SoC) software instrumentation through CT_STM (STP2.0)
– OCP watchpoint (OCP_WP_NOC)
• OCP target traffic monitoring: OCP_WP_NOC can be configured to generate a trigger upon
watchpoint match (that is, when target transaction attributes match the user-defined attributes).
• SoC events trace
• DMA transfer profiling
– Statistics collector (performance probes)
• Computes traffic statistics within a user-defined window and periodically reports to the user
through the CT_STM interface
• Embedded in the L3_MAIN interconnect
• 10 instances:
– 1 instance dedicated to target (SDRAM) load monitoring
– 9 instances dedicated to master latency monitoring
– IVA instrumentation (hardware accelerator [HWA] profiling)
• Supported through a software message and system trace event (SMSET) module embedded in
the IVA subsystem
– Power-management events profiling (PM instrumentation [PMI])
• Monitoring major power-management events. The PM state changes are handled as generic
events and encapsulated in STP messages.
– Clock-management events profiling (CM instrumentation [CMI])
• Monitoring major clock management events. The CM state changes are handled as generic
events and encapsulated in STP messages.
• Two instances, one per CM
– CM1 Instrumentation (CMI1) module mapped in the PD_CORE_AON power domain
– CM2 Instrumentation (CMI2) module mapped in the PD_CORE power domain
– For more information, see System Instrumentation section of the Device TRM.
Performance monitoring
– Supported by subsystem counter timer module (SCTM) for IPU
– Supported by performance monitoring unit (PMU) for MPU subsystem
For more information, see chapter On-Chip Debug Support of the Device TRM.
354
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
7 Applications, Implementation, and Layout
NOTE
Information in the following Applications section is not part of the TI component specification,
and TI does not warrant its accuracy or completeness. TI's customers are responsible for
determining suitability of components for their purposes. Customers should validate and test
their design implementation to confirm system functionality.
7.1
Power Supply Mapping
TPS659163 or LP8733 are the Power Management IC (PMIC) that should be used for Device designs. TI
requires use of this PMIC for the following reasons:
• TI has validated their use with the Device
• Board level margins including transient response and output accuracy are analyzed and optimized for
the entire system
• Support for power sequencing requirements (refer to Section 5.10.3, Power Supply Sequences)
• Support for Adaptive Voltage Scaling (AVS) Class 0 requirements, including TI provided software
Whenever we allow for combining of rails mapped on any of the SMPSs, the PDN guidelines that are the
most stringent of the rails combined should be implemented for the particular supply rail. It is possible that
some voltage domains on the device are unused in some systems. In such cases, to ensure device
reliability, it is still required that the supply pins for the specific voltage domains are connected to some
core power supply output.
These unused supplies though can be combined with any of the core supplies that are used (active) in the
system. For example, if DSP domain is not used, they can be combined with the CORE domain, thereby
having a single power supply driving the combined CORE and DSP domains.
For the combined rail, the following relaxations do apply:
• The AVS voltage of active rail in the combined rail needs to be used to set the power supply
• The decoupling capacitance should be set according to the active rail in the combined rail
Table 7-1 illustrates the approved and validated power supply connections to the Device for the SMPS
outputs of the TPS659163 PMIC.
Table 7-1. TPS659163 Power Supply Connections(1)
Valid Combination
TPS659163 Current Limitation (2) (3)
SMPS1
VD_CORE
3.5A
SMPS2
Free (DDR Memory)
3.5A
SMPS
SMPS3
VD_DSP
3A
SMPS4
VDDS18V
1.5A
(1) Power consumption is highly application-specific. Separate analysis must be performed to ensure output current ratings (average and
peak) is within the limits of the PMIC for all rails of the device.
(2) Refer to the PMIC data manual for the latest TPS659163 specifications.
(3) A product’s maximum ambient temperature, thermal system design & heat spreading performance could limit the maximum power
dissipation below the full PMIC capacity in order to not exceed recommended SoC max Tj.
Table 7-2 illustrates the approved and validated power supply connections to the Device for the SMPS
outputs of the LP8733 PMIC.
Table 7-2. LP8733 Power Supply Connections
SMPS
Valid Combination
LP8733 Current Limitation(1) (2) (3)
SMPS1
VD_CORE
3A
SMPS2
VD_DSP
3A
Applications, Implementation, and Layout
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
355
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
(1) Refer to the LP8733 Data Manual for exact current rating limitations, including assumed VIN and other parameters. Values provided in
this table are for comparison purposes.
(2) Power consumption is highly application-specific. Separate analysis must be performed to ensure output current ratings (average and
peak) is within the limits of the PMIC for all rails of the device.
(3) A product’s maximum ambient temperature, thermal system design & heat spreading performance could limit the maximum power
dissipation below the full PMIC capacity in order to not exceed recommended SoC max Tj.
7.2
DDR3 Board Design and Layout Guidelines
7.2.1
DDR3 General Board Layout Guidelines
To
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
7.2.2
help ensure good signaling performance, consider the following board design guidelines:
Avoid crossing splits in the power plane.
Minimize Vref noise.
Use the widest trace that is practical between decoupling capacitors and memory module.
Maintain a single reference.
Minimize ISI by keeping impedances matched.
Minimize crosstalk by isolating sensitive bits, such as strobes, and avoiding return path discontinuities.
Use proper low-pass filtering on the Vref pins.
Keep the stub length as short as possible.
Add additional spacing for on-clock and strobe nets to eliminate crosstalk.
Maintain a common ground reference for all bypass and decoupling capacitors.
Take into account the differences in propagation delays between microstrip and stripline nets when
evaluating timing constraints.
DDR3 Board Design and Layout Guidelines
7.2.2.1
Board Designs
TI only supports board designs using DDR3 memory that follow the guidelines in this document. The
switching characteristics and timing diagram for the DDR3 memory controller are shown in Table 7-3 and
Figure 7-1.
Table 7-3. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for DDR3 Memory
Controller
NO.
1
PARAMETER
tc(DDR_CLK)
Cycle time, DDR_CLK
MIN
MAX
UNIT
1.5
2.5(1)
ns
(1) This is the absolute maximum the clock period can be. Actual maximum clock period may be limited by DDR3 speed grade and
operating frequency (see the DDR3 memory device data sheet).
1
DDR_CLK
SPRS906_PCB_DDR3_01
Figure 7-1. DDR3 Memory Controller Clock Timing
7.2.2.2
DDR3 EMIF
The processor contains one DDR3 EMIF.
7.2.2.3
DDR3 Device Combinations
Because there are several possible combinations of device counts and single- or dual-side mounting,
Table 7-4 summarizes the supported device configurations.
356
Applications, Implementation, and Layout
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 7-4. Supported DDR3 Device Combinations
NUMBER OF DDR3 DEVICES
DDR3 DATA DEVICE WIDTH
(BITS)
1
2
2
2
MIRRORED?
DDR3 EMIF WIDTH (BITS)
16
N
16
8
Y(1)
16
16
N
32
16
Y(1)
32
3
16
N(3)(4)
32
4
8
N
32
4
8
Y(2)
32
5
8
N
(3)(4)
32
(1) Two DDR3 devices are mirrored when one device is placed on the top of the board and the second device is placed on the bottom of
the board.
(2) This is two mirrored pairs of DDR3 devices.
(3) Three or five DDR3 device combination is not available on this device, but combination types are retained for consistency with the
AM57xx family of devices.
(4) The DDR memory connected to the DDR ECC bus does NOT need to be the same part number as the DDR memories connected to the
DDR data bus. However, some constraints do apply. When selecting a memory for the DDR ECC bus, the following restrictions must be
adhered to as compared to the DDR memories on the data bus:
– Match the same DDR3 speed grade
– Have an equal number of internal banks
– Have an equal number of columns
– Have a greater or equal number of rows
7.2.2.4
DDR3 Interface Schematic
7.2.2.4.1 32-Bit DDR3 Interface
The DDR3 interface schematic varies, depending upon the width of the DDR3 devices used and the width
of the bus used (16 or 32 bits). General connectivity is straightforward and very similar. 16-bit DDR
devices look like two 8-bit devices. Figure 7-2 and Figure 7-3 show the schematic connections for 32-bit
interfaces using x16 devices.
7.2.2.4.2 16-Bit DDR3 Interface
Note that the 16-bit wide interface schematic is practically identical to the 32-bit interface (see Figure 7-2
and Figure 7-3); only the high-word DDR memories are removed and the unused DQS inputs are tied off.
When not using all or part of a DDR interface, the proper method of handling the unused pins is to tie off
the ddrx_dqsi pins to ground via a 1k-Ω resistor and to tie off the ddrx_dqsni pins to the corresponding
vdds_ddrx supply via a 1k-Ω resistor. This needs to be done for each byte not used. Although these
signals have internal pullups and pulldowns, external pullups and pulldowns provide additional protection
against external electrical noise causing activity on the signals.
The vdds_ddrx and ddrx_vref0 power supply pins need to be connected to their respective power supplies
even if ddrx is not being used. All other DDR interface pins can be left unconnected. Note that the
supported modes for use of the DDR EMIF are 32-bits wide, 16-bits wide, or not used.
Applications, Implementation, and Layout
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
357
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
32-bit DDR3 EMIF
16-Bit DDR3
Devices
ddr1_d31
DQ15
8
ddr1_d24
DQ8
ddr1_dqm3
ddr1_dqs3
ddr1_dqsn3
UDM
UDQS
UDQS
ddr1_d23
DQ7
8
ddr1_d16
ddr1_dqm2
ddr1_dqs2
ddr1_dqsn2
D08
LDM
LDQS
LDQS
ddr1_d15
DQ15
8
ddr1_d8
DQ8
ddr1_dqm1
ddr1_dqs1
ddr1_dqsn1
ddr1_d7
UDM
UDQS
UDQS
DQ7
8
ddr1_d0
ddr1_dqm0
ddr1_dqs0
ddr1_dqsn0
ddr1_ck
ddr1_nck
ddr1_odt0
ddr1_csn0
ddr1_odt1
ddr1_csn1
ddr1_ba0
ddr1_ba1
ddr1_ba2
ddr1_a0
ODT
CS
ODT
CS
BA0
BA1
BA2
A0
BA0
BA1
BA2
A0
A15
CAS
RAS
WE
CKE
RST
ZQ
VREFDQ
VREFCA
A15
CAS
RAS
WE
CKE
RST
Zo
0.1 µF
DDR_1V5
Zo
NC
16
ZQ
ddr1_vref0
0.1 µF
Zo
CK
CK
NC
ddr1_a15
ddr1_casn
ddr1_rasn
ddr1_wen
ddr1_cke
ddr1_rst
ZQ
DQ0
LDM
LDQS
LDQS
CK
CK
0.1 µF
DDR_VTT
Zo
Zo
DDR_VREF
ZQ
VREFDQ
VREFCA
ZQ
0.1 µF
Termination is required. See terminator comments.
Value determined according to the DDR memory device data sheet.
SPRS906_PCB_DDR3_02
Figure 7-2. 32-Bit, One-Bank DDR3 Interface Schematic Using Two 16-Bit DDR3 Devices
358
Applications, Implementation, and Layout
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
32-bit DDR3 EMIF
8-Bit DDR3
Devices
8-Bit DDR3
Devices
ddrx_d31
DQ7
8
ddrx_d24
ddrx_dqm3
DQ0
NC
ddrx_dqs3
ddrx_dqsn3
DM/TQS
TDQS
DQS
DQS
ddrx_d23
DQ7
8
ddrx_d16
ddrx_dqm2
DQ0
NC
ddrx_dqs2
ddrx_dqsn2
ddrx_d15
DM/TQS
TDQS
DQS
DQS
DQ7
8
ddrx_d8
ddrx_dqm1
NC
ddrx_dqs1
ddrx_dqsn1
ddrx_d7
DQ0
DM/TQS
TDQS
DQS
DQS
DQ7
8
ddrx_d0
ddrx_dqm0
ddrx_dqs0
ddrx_dqsn0
ddrx_ck
ddrx_nck
ddrx_odt0
ddrx_csn0
ddrx_odt1
ddrx_csn1
ddrx_ba0
ddrx_ba1
ddrx_ba2
ddrx_a0
NC
16
ZQ
ddrx_vref0
0.1 µF
ZQ
CK
CK
ODT
CS
CK
CK
ODT
CS
CK
CK
ODT
CS
BA0
BA1
BA2
A0
BA0
BA1
BA2
A0
BA0
BA1
BA2
A0
BA0
BA1
BA2
A0
A15
CAS
RAS
WE
CKE
RST
ZQ
VREFDQ
VREFCA
A15
CAS
RAS
WE
CKE
RST
A15
CAS
RAS
WE
CKE
RST
ZQ
VREFDQ
VREFCA
A15
CAS
RAS
WE
CKE
RST
Zo
0.1 µF
DDR_1V5
Zo
NC
NC
ddrx_a15
ddrx_casn
ddrx_rasn
ddrx_wen
ddrx_cke
ddrx_rst
Zo
DQ0
TDQS
DM/TQS
DQS
DQS
CK
CK
ODT
CS
0.1 µF
ZQ
VREFDQ
VREFCA
0.1 µF
ZQ
ZQ
0.1 µF
ZQ
VREFDQ
VREFCA
DDR_VTT
Zo
Zo
DDR_VREF
ZQ
0.1 µF
Termination is required. See terminator comments.
Value determined according to the DDR memory device data sheet.
SPRS906_PCB_DDR3_03
Figure 7-3. 32-Bit, One-Bank DDR3 Interface Schematic Using Four 8-Bit DDR3 Devices
Applications, Implementation, and Layout
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
359
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
7.2.2.5
www.ti.com
Compatible JEDEC DDR3 Devices
Table 7-5 shows the parameters of the JEDEC DDR3 devices that are compatible with this interface.
Generally, the DDR3 interface is compatible with DDR3-1333 devices in the x8 or x16 widths.
Table 7-5. Compatible JEDEC DDR3 Devices (Per Interface)
NO.
1
PARAMETER
CONDITION
JEDEC DDR3 device speed grade(1)
MIN
MAX
DDR clock rate = 400MHz
DDR3-800
DDR3-1600
400MHz < DDR clock rate ≤ 533MHz
DDR3-1066
DDR3-1600
533MHz < DDR clock rate ≤ 667MHz
DDR3-1333
DDR3-1600
UNIT
2
JEDEC DDR3 device bit width
x8
x16
Bits
3
JEDEC DDR3 device count(2)
2
4
Devices
(1) Refer to Table 7-3 Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for DDR3 Memory Controller for the range of
supported DDR clock rates.
(2) For valid DDR3 device configurations and device counts, see Section 7.2.2.4, Figure 7-2, and Figure 7-3.
7.2.2.6
PCB Stackup
The minimum stackup for routing the DDR3 interface is a six-layer stack up as shown in Table 7-6.
Additional layers may be added to the PCB stackup to accommodate other circuitry, enhance SI/EMI
performance, or to reduce the size of the PCB footprint. Complete stackup specifications are provided in
Table 7-7.
Table 7-6. Six-Layer PCB Stackup Suggestion
360
LAYER
TYPE
DESCRIPTION
1
Signal
Top routing mostly vertical
2
Plane
Ground
3
Plane
Split power plane
4
Plane
Split power plane or Internal routing
5
Plane
Ground
6
Signal
Bottom routing mostly horizontal
Applications, Implementation, and Layout
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 7-7. PCB Stackup Specifications
NO.
PARAMETER
MIN
PS1
PCB routing/plane layers
6
PS2
Signal routing layers
3
PS3
Full ground reference layers under DDR3 routing region(1)
TYP
MAX
1
(1)
PS4
Full 1.5-V power reference layers under the DDR3 routing region
PS5
Number of reference plane cuts allowed within DDR routing region(2)
0
PS6
Number of layers between DDR3 routing layer and reference plane(3)
0
PS7
PCB routing feature size
4
PS8
PCB trace width, w
4
PS9
Single-ended impedance, Zo
PS10
UNIT
1
50
(5)
Impedance control
Z-5
Z
Mils
Mils
75
Ω
Z+5
Ω
(1) Ground reference layers are preferred over power reference layers. Be sure to include bypass caps to accommodate reference layer
return current as the trace routes switch routing layers.
(2) No traces should cross reference plane cuts within the DDR routing region. High-speed signal traces crossing reference plane cuts
create large return current paths which can lead to excessive crosstalk and EMI radiation.
(3) Reference planes are to be directly adjacent to the signal plane to minimize the size of the return current loop.
(4) An 18-mil pad assumes Via Channel is the most economical BGA escape. A 20-mil pad may be used if additional layers are available
for power routing. An 18-mil pad is required for minimum layer count escape.
(5) Z is the nominal singled-ended impedance selected for the PCB specified by PS9.
7.2.2.7
Placement
Figure 7-4 shows the required placement for the processor as well as the DDR3 devices. The dimensions
for this figure are defined in Table 7-8. The placement does not restrict the side of the PCB on which the
devices are mounted. The ultimate purpose of the placement is to limit the maximum trace lengths and
allow for proper routing space. For a 16-bit DDR memory system, the high-word DDR3 devices are
omitted from the placement.
Figure 7-4. Placement Specifications
Applications, Implementation, and Layout
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
361
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Table 7-8. Placement Specifications DDR3
MAX
UNIT
KOD31
NO.
X1
PARAMETER
MIN
500
Mils
KOD32
X2
600
Mils
KOD33
X3
600
Mils
KOD34
Y1
1800
Mils
KOD35
Y2
600
Mils
KOD36
DDR3 keepout region (1)
KOD37
Clearance from non-DDR3 signal to DDR3 keepout region (2) (3)
4
W
(1) DDR3 keepout region to encompass entire DDR3 routing area.
(2) Non-DDR3 signals allowed within DDR3 keepout region provided they are separated from DDR3 routing layers by a ground plane.
(3) If a device has more than one DDR controller, the signals from the other controller(s) are considered non-DDR3 and should be
separated by this specification.
7.2.2.8
DDR3 Keepout Region
The region of the PCB used for DDR3 circuitry must be isolated from other signals. The DDR3 keepout
region is defined for this purpose and is shown in Figure 7-5. The size of this region varies with the
placement and DDR routing. Additional clearances required for the keepout region are shown in Table 78. Non-DDR3 signals should not be routed on the DDR signal layers within the DDR3 keepout region.
Non-DDR3 signals may be routed in the region, provided they are routed on layers separated from the
DDR signal layers by a ground layer. No breaks should be allowed in the reference ground layers in this
region. In addition, the 1.5-V DDR3 power plane should cover the entire keepout region. Also note that the
two signals from the DDR3 controller should be separated from each other by the specification in Table 78, (see KOD37).
Figure 7-5. DDR3 Keepout Region
362
Applications, Implementation, and Layout
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
7.2.2.9
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Bulk Bypass Capacitors
Bulk bypass capacitors are required for moderate speed bypassing of the DDR3 and other circuitry.
Table 7-9 contains the minimum numbers and capacitance required for the bulk bypass capacitors. Note
that this table only covers the bypass needs of the DDR3 controllers and DDR3 devices. Additional bulk
bypass capacitance may be needed for other circuitry.
Table 7-9. Bulk Bypass Capacitors
NO.
PARAMETER
MIN
MAX
UNIT
1
vdds_ddrx bulk bypass capacitor count(1)
1
Devices
2
vdds_ddrx bulk bypass total capacitance
22
μF
(1) These devices should be placed near the devices they are bypassing, but preference should be given to the placement of the highspeed (HS) bypass capacitors and DDR3 signal routing.
7.2.2.10 High-Speed Bypass Capacitors
High-speed (HS) bypass capacitors are critcal for proper DDR3 interface operation. It is particularly
important to minimize the parasitic series inductance of the HS bypass capacitors, processor/DDR power,
and processor/DDR ground connections. Table 7-10 contains the specification for the HS bypass
capacitors as well as for the power connections on the PCB. Generally speaking, it is good to:
1. Fit as many HS bypass capacitors as possible.
2. Minimize the distance from the bypass cap to the pins/balls being bypassed.
3. Use the smallest physical sized capacitors possible with the highest capacitance readily available.
4. Connect the bypass capacitor pads to their vias using the widest traces possible and using the largest
hole size via possible.
5. Minimize via sharing. Note the limites on via sharing shown in Table 7-10.
Table 7-10. High-Speed Bypass Capacitors
NO.
PARAMETER
MIN
TYP
MAX
UNIT
0201
0402
10 Mils
1
HS bypass capacitor package size(1)
2
Distance, HS bypass capacitor to processor being bypassed(2)(3)(4)
3
Processor HS bypass capacitor count per vdds_ddrx rail
See Section 7.4 and (11)
Devices
4
Processor HS bypass capacitor total capacitance per vdds_ddrx rail
See Section 7.4 and (11)
μF
400
Mils
(5)
5
Number of connection vias for each device power/ground ball
6
Trace length from device power/ground ball to connection via(2)
Vias
7
Distance, HS bypass capacitor to DDR device being bypassed(6)
8
DDR3 device HS bypass capacitor count(7)
9
DDR3 device HS bypass capacitor total capacitance(7)
0.85
μF
10
Number of connection vias for each HS capacitor(8)(9)
2
Vias
11
Trace length from bypass capacitor connect to connection via(2)(9)
35
70
Mils
150
12
(10)
12
Number of connection vias for each DDR3 device power/ground ball
13
Trace length from DDR3 device power/ground ball to connection via(2)(8)
Mils
Devices
35
100
35
60
1
Mils
Vias
Mils
(1) LxW, 10-mil units, that is, a 0402 is a 40x20-mil surface-mount capacitor.
(2) Closer/shorter is better.
(3) Measured from the nearest processor power/ground ball to the center of the capacitor package.
(4) Three of these capacitors should be located underneath the processor, between the cluster of DDR_1V5 balls and ground balls,
between the DDR interfaces on the package.
(5) See the Via Channel™ escape for the processor package.
(6) Measured from the DDR3 device power/ground ball to the center of the capacitor package.
(7) Per DDR3 device.
(8) An additional HS bypass capacitor can share the connection vias only if it is mounted on the opposite side of the board. No sharing of
vias is permitted on the same side of the board.
Applications, Implementation, and Layout
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
363
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
(9) An HS bypass capacitor may share a via with a DDR device mounted on the same side of the PCB. A wide trace should be used for the
connection and the length from the capacitor pad to the DDR device pad should be less than 150 mils.
(10) Up to a total of two pairs of DDR power/ground balls may share a via.
(11) The capacitor recommendations in this data manual reflect only the needs of this processor. Please see the memory vendor’s
guidelines for determining the appropriate decoupling capacitor arrangement for the memory device itself.
7.2.2.10.1 Return Current Bypass Capacitors
Use additional bypass capacitors if the return current reference plane changes due to DDR3 signals
hopping from one signal layer to another. The bypass capacitor here provides a path for the return current
to hop planes along with the signal. As many of these return current bypass capacitors should be used as
possible. Because these are returns for signal current, the signal via size may be used for these
capacitors.
7.2.2.11 Net Classes
Table 7-11 lists the clock net classes for the DDR3 interface. Table 7-12 lists the signal net classes, and
associated clock net classes, for signals in the DDR3 interface. These net classes are used for the
termination and routing rules that follow.
Table 7-11. Clock Net Class Definitions
CLOCK NET CLASS
CK
Processor PIN NAMES
ddrx_ck/ddrx_nck
DQS0
ddrx_dqs0 / ddrx_dqsn0
DQS1
ddrx_dqs1 / ddrx_dqsn1
DQS2(1)
ddrx_dqs2 / ddrx_dqsn2
(1)
ddrx_dqs3 / ddrx_dqsn3
DQS3
(1) Only used on 32-bit wide DDR3 memory systems.
Table 7-12. Signal Net Class Definitions
SIGNAL NET CLASS
ASSOCIATED CLOCK
NET CLASS
ADDR_CTRL
CK
DQ0
DQS0
ddrx_d[7:0], ddrx_dqm0
DQ1
DQS1
ddrx_d[15:8], ddrx_dqm1
DQ2
(1)
DQS2
ddrx_d[23:16], ddrx_dqm2
DQ3(1)
DQS3
ddrx_d[31:24], ddrx_dqm3
Processor PIN NAMES
ddrx_ba[2:0], ddrx_a[14:0], ddrx_csnj, ddrx_casn, ddrx_rasn, ddrx_wen,
ddrx_cke, ddrx_odti
(1) Only used on 32-bit wide DDR3 memory systems.
7.2.2.12 DDR3 Signal Termination
Signal terminators are required for the CK and ADDR_CTRL net classes. The data lines are terminated by
ODT and, thus, the PCB traces should be unterminated. Detailed termination specifications are covered in
the routing rules in the following sections.
7.2.2.13 VREF_DDR Routing
ddrx_vref0 (VREF) is used as a reference by the input buffers of the DDR3 memories as well as the
processor. VREF is intended to be half the DDR3 power supply voltage and is typically generated with the
DDR3 VDDS and VTT power supply. It should be routed as a nominal 20-mil wide trace with 0.1 µF
bypass capacitors near each device connection. Narrowing of VREF is allowed to accommodate routing
congestion.
364
Applications, Implementation, and Layout
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
7.2.2.14 VTT
Like VREF, the nominal value of the VTT supply is half the DDR3 supply voltage. Unlike VREF, VTT is
expected to source and sink current, specifically the termination current for the ADDR_CTRL net class
Thevinen terminators. VTT is needed at the end of the address bus and it should be routed as a power
sub-plane. VTT should be bypassed near the terminator resistors.
7.2.2.15 CK and ADDR_CTRL Topologies and Routing Definition
The CK and ADDR_CTRL net classes are routed in a fly-by topology. They are routed in a similar manner
and are length matched to minimize skew between them. CK is a bit more complicated because it runs at
a higher transition rate and is differential. The following subsections show the topology and routing for
various DDR3 configurations for CK and ADDR_CTRL. The figures in the following subsections define the
terms for the routing specification detailed in Table 7-13. Balanced-T routing is not recommended.
7.2.2.15.1 Four DDR3 Devices
Four DDR3 devices are supported on the DDR EMIF consisting of four x8 DDR3 devices arranged as one
bank (CS). These four devices may be mounted on a single side of the PCB, or may be mirrored in two
pairs to save board space at a cost of increased routing complexity and parts on the backside of the PCB.
7.2.2.15.1.1 CK and ADDR_CTRL Topologies, Four DDR3 Devices
Figure 7-6 shows the topology of the CK net classes and Figure 7-7 shows the topology for the
corresponding ADDR_CTRL net classes.
+ –
+ –
+ –
+ –
AS+
AS-
AS+
AS-
AS+
AS-
AS+
AS-
DDR Differential CK Input Buffers
Clock Parallel
Terminator
DDR_1V5
Rcp
A1
Processor
Differential Clock
Output Buffer
A2
A3
A4
A3
AT
Cac
+
–
Rcp
A1
A2
A3
A4
A3
0.1 µF
AT
Routed as Differential Pair
SPRS906_PCB_DDR3_06
Figure 7-6. CK Topology for Four x8 DDR3 Devices
Applications, Implementation, and Layout
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
365
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
Processor
Address and Control
Output Buffer
A1
A3
A2
AS
AS
AS
AS
DDR Address and Control Input Buffers
A3
A4
Address and Control
Terminator
Rtt
VTT
AT
SPRS906_PCB_DDR3_07
Figure 7-7. ADDR_CTRL Topology for Four x8 DDR3 Devices
7.2.2.15.1.2 CK and ADDR_CTRL Routing, Four DDR3 Devices
A1
A1
Figure 7-8 shows the CK routing for four DDR3 devices placed on the same side of the PCB. Figure 7-9
shows the corresponding ADDR_CTRL routing.
DDR_1V5
A3
A3
=
A4
A4
A3
A3
Rcp
Cac
Rcp
0.1 µF
AT
AT
AS+
AS-
A2
A2
SPRS906_PCB_DDR3_08
Figure 7-8. CK Routing for Four Single-Side DDR3 Devices
366
Applications, Implementation, and Layout
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
A1
www.ti.com
Rtt
A3
=
A3
A4
AT
VTT
AS
A2
SPRS906_PCB_DDR3_09
Figure 7-9. ADDR_CTRL Routing for Four Single-Side DDR3 Devices
A1
A1
To save PCB space, the four DDR3 memories may be mounted as two mirrored pairs at a cost of
increased routing and assembly complexity. Figure 7-10 and Figure 7-11 show the routing for CK and
ADDR_CTRL, respectively, for four DDR3 devices mirrored in a two-pair configuration.
DDR_1V5
=
A4
A4
A3
A3
Rcp
Cac
Rcp
0.1 µF
AT
AT
AS+
AS-
A3
A3
A2
A2
SPRS906_PCB_DDR3_10
Figure 7-10. CK Routing for Four Mirrored DDR3 Devices
Applications, Implementation, and Layout
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
367
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
A1
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Rtt
A3
=
A3
A4
AT
VTT
AS
A2
SPRS906_PCB_DDR3_11
Figure 7-11. ADDR_CTRL Routing for Four Mirrored DDR3 Devices
7.2.2.15.2 Two DDR3 Devices
Two DDR3 devices are supported on the DDR EMIF consisting of two x8 DDR3 devices arranged as one
bank (CS), 16 bits wide, or two x16 DDR3 devices arranged as one bank (CS), 32 bits wide. These two
devices may be mounted on a single side of the PCB, or may be mirrored in a pair to save board space at
a cost of increased routing complexity and parts on the backside of the PCB.
7.2.2.15.2.1 CK and ADDR_CTRL Topologies, Two DDR3 Devices
Figure 7-12 shows the topology of the CK net classes and Figure 7-13 shows the topology for the
corresponding ADDR_CTRL net classes.
+ –
+ –
AS+
AS-
AS+
AS-
DDR Differential CK Input Buffers
Clock Parallel
Terminator
DDR_1V5
Rcp
A1
Processor
Differential Clock
Output Buffer
A2
A3
AT
Cac
+
–
Rcp
A1
A2
A3
0.1 µF
AT
Routed as Differential Pair
SPRS906_PCB_DDR3_12
Figure 7-12. CK Topology for Two DDR3 Devices
368
Applications, Implementation, and Layout
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Processor
Address and Control
Output Buffer
A1
AS
AS
DDR Address and Control Input Buffers
A3
A2
Address and Control
Terminator
Rtt
VTT
AT
SPRS906_PCB_DDR3_13
Figure 7-13. ADDR_CTRL Topology for Two DDR3 Devices
7.2.2.15.2.2 CK and ADDR_CTRL Routing, Two DDR3 Devices
A1
A1
Figure 7-14 shows the CK routing for two DDR3 devices placed on the same side of the PCB. Figure 7-15
shows the corresponding ADDR_CTRL routing.
DDR_1V5
A3
A3
=
Rcp
Cac
Rcp
0.1 µF
AT
AT
AS+
AS-
A2
A2
SPRS906_PCB_DDR3_14
Figure 7-14. CK Routing for Two Single-Side DDR3 Devices
Applications, Implementation, and Layout
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
369
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
A1
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Rtt
A3
=
VTT
AT
AS
A2
SPRS906_PCB_DDR3_15
Figure 7-15. ADDR_CTRL Routing for Two Single-Side DDR3 Devices
A1
A1
To save PCB space, the two DDR3 memories may be mounted as a mirrored pair at a cost of increased
routing and assembly complexity. Figure 7-16 and Figure 7-17 show the routing for CK and ADDR_CTRL,
respectively, for two DDR3 devices mirrored in a single-pair configuration.
DDR_1V5
=
Rcp
Cac
Rcp
0.1 µF
AT
AT
AS+
AS-
A3
A3
A2
A2
SPRS906_PCB_DDR3_16
Figure 7-16. CK Routing for Two Mirrored DDR3 Devices
370
Applications, Implementation, and Layout
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
A1
www.ti.com
Rtt
A3
=
VTT
AT
AS
A2
SPRS906_PCB_DDR3_17
Figure 7-17. ADDR_CTRL Routing for Two Mirrored DDR3 Devices
7.2.2.15.3 One DDR3 Device
A single DDR3 device is supported on the DDR EMIF consisting of one x16 DDR3 device arranged as
one bank (CS), 16 bits wide.
7.2.2.15.3.1 CK and ADDR_CTRL Topologies, One DDR3 Device
Figure 7-18 shows the topology of the CK net classes and Figure 7-19 shows the topology for the
corresponding ADDR_CTRL net classes.
DDR Differential CK Input Buffer
AS+
AS-
+ –
Clock Parallel
Terminator
DDR_1V5
Rcp
A1
Processor
Differential Clock
Output Buffer
A2
AT
Cac
+
–
Rcp
A1
A2
0.1 µF
AT
Routed as Differential Pair
SPRS906_PCB_DDR3_18
Figure 7-18. CK Topology for One DDR3 Device
Applications, Implementation, and Layout
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
371
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
AS
DDR Address and Control Input Buffers
Processor
Address and Control
Output Buffer
A1
Address and Control
Terminator
Rtt
AT
VTT
A2
SPRS906_PCB_DDR3_19
Figure 7-19. ADDR_CTRL Topology for One DDR3 Device
7.2.2.15.3.2 CK and ADDR/CTRL Routing, One DDR3 Device
A1
A1
Figure 7-20 shows the CK routing for one DDR3 device placed on the same side of the PCB. Figure 7-21
shows the corresponding ADDR_CTRL routing.
DDR_1V5
Rcp
Cac
Rcp
0.1 µF
AT
AT
=
AS+
AS-
A2
A2
SPRS906_PCB_DDR3_20
Figure 7-20. CK Routing for One DDR3 Device
372
Applications, Implementation, and Layout
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
A1
www.ti.com
Rtt
AT
=
VTT
AS
A2
SPRS906_PCB_DDR3_21
Figure 7-21. ADDR_CTRL Routing for One DDR3 Device
7.2.2.16 Data Topologies and Routing Definition
No matter the number of DDR3 devices used, the data line topology is always point to point, so its
definition is simple.
Care should be taken to minimize layer transitions during routing. If a layer transition is necessary, it is
better to transition to a layer using the same reference plane. If this cannot be accommodated, ensure
there are nearby ground vias to allow the return currents to transition between reference planes if both
reference planes are ground or vdds_ddr. Ensure there are nearby bypass capacitors to allow the return
currents to transition between reference planes if one of the reference planes is ground. The goal is to
minimize the size of the return current loops.
7.2.2.16.1 DQS and DQ/DM Topologies, Any Number of Allowed DDR3 Devices
DQS lines are point-to-point differential, and DQ/DM lines are point-to-point singled ended. Figure 7-22
and Figure 7-23 show these topologies.
Processor
DQS
IO Buffer
DQSn+
DQSn-
DDR
DQS
IO Buffer
Routed Differentially
n = 0, 1, 2, 3
SPRS906_PCB_DDR3_22
Figure 7-22. DQS Topology
Processor
DQ and DM
IO Buffer
Dn
DDR
DQ and DM
IO Buffer
n = 0, 1, 2, 3
SPRS906_PCB_DDR3_23
Figure 7-23. DQ/DM Topology
Applications, Implementation, and Layout
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
373
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
7.2.2.16.2 DQS and DQ/DM Routing, Any Number of Allowed DDR3 Devices
Figure 7-24 and Figure 7-25 show the DQS and DQ/DM routing.
DQS
DQSn+
DQSn-
Routed Differentially
n = 0, 1, 2, 3
SPRS906_PCB_DDR3_24
Figure 7-24. DQS Routing With Any Number of Allowed DDR3 Devices
Dn
DQ and DM
n = 0, 1, 2, 3
SPRS906_PCB_DDR3_25
Figure 7-25. DQ/DM Routing With Any Number of Allowed DDR3 Devices
7.2.2.17 Routing Specification
7.2.2.17.1 CK and ADDR_CTRL Routing Specification
Skew within the CK and ADDR_CTRL net classes directly reduces setup and hold margin and, thus, this
skew must be controlled. The only way to practically match lengths on a PCB is to lengthen the shorter
traces up to the length of the longest net in the net class and its associated clock. A metric to establish
this maximum length is Manhattan distance. The Manhattan distance between two points on a PCB is the
length between the points when connecting them only with horizontal or vertical segments. A reasonable
trace route length is to within a percentage of its Manhattan distance. CACLM is defined as Clock Address
Control Longest Manhattan distance.
374
Applications, Implementation, and Layout
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Given the clock and address pin locations on the processor and the DDR3 memories, the maximum
possible Manhattan distance can be determined given the placement. Figure 7-26 and Figure 7-27 show
this distance for four loads and two loads, respectively. It is from this distance that the specifications on
the lengths of the transmission lines for the address bus are determined. CACLM is determined similarly
for other address bus configurations; that is, it is based on the longest net of the CK/ADDR_CTRL net
class. For CK and ADDR_CTRL routing, these specifications are contained in Table 7-13.
(A)
A1
A8
CACLMY
CACLMX
A8
(A)
A8
(A)
A8
(A)
A8
(A)
Rtt
A3
=
A4
A3
AT
VTT
AS
A2
SPRS906_PCB_DDR3_26
A.
It is very likely that the longest CK/ADDR_CTRL Manhattan distance will be for Address Input 8 (A8) on the DDR3
memories. CACLM is based on the longest Manhattan distance due to the device placement. Verify the net class that
satisfies this criteria and use as the baseline for CK/ADDR_CTRL skew matching and length control.
The length of shorter CK/ADDR_CTRL stubs as well as the length of the terminator stub are not included in this
length calculation. Non-included lengths are grayed out in the figure.
Assuming A8 is the longest, CALM = CACLMY + CACLMX + 300 mils.
The extra 300 mils allows for routing down lower than the DDR3 memories and returning up to reach A8.
Figure 7-26. CACLM for Four Address Loads on One Side of PCB
Applications, Implementation, and Layout
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
375
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
(A)
A1
A8
www.ti.com
CACLMY
CACLMX
A8
(A)
A8
(A)
Rtt
A3
=
AT
VTT
AS
A2
SPRS906_PCB_DDR3_27
A.
It is very likely that the longest CK/ADDR_CTRL Manhattan distance will be for Address Input 8 (A8) on the DDR3
memories. CACLM is based on the longest Manhattan distance due to the device placement. Verify the net class that
satisfies this criteria and use as the baseline for CK/ADDR_CTRL skew matching and length control.
The length of shorter CK/ADDR_CTRL stubs as well as the length of the terminator stub are not included in this
length calculation. Non-included lengths are grayed out in the figure.
Assuming A8 is the longest, CALM = CACLMY + CACLMX + 300 mils.
The extra 300 mils allows for routing down lower than the DDR3 memories and returning up to reach A8.
Figure 7-27. CACLM for Two Address Loads on One Side of PCB
Table 7-13. CK and ADDR_CTRL Routing Specification(2)(3)
NO.
PARAMETER
MAX
UNIT
500(1)
ps
A1+A2 skew
29
ps
A3 length
125
ps
CARS34
A3 skew(4)
6
ps
CARS35
(5)
A3 skew
6
ps
CARS36
A4 length
125
ps
CARS37
A4 skew
6
ps
CARS38
AS length
17(1)
ps
(1)
ps
CARS31
A1+A2 length
CARS32
CARS33
CARS39
AS skew
CARS310
AS+/AS- length
CARS311
AS+/AS- skew
MIN
TYP
5
1.3
5
(6)
14
12
ps
1
ps
CARS312
AT length
75
CARS313
AT skew(7)
14
CARS314
AT skew(8)
CARS315
CK/ADDR_CTRL trace length
1020
ps
CARS316
Vias per trace
3(1)
vias
CARS317
Via count difference
1(15)
vias
CARS318
Center-to-center CK to other DDR3 trace spacing(9)
4w
CARS319
Center-to-center ADDR_CTRL to other DDR3 trace spacing(9)(10)
4w
CARS320
Center-to-center ADDR_CTRL to other ADDR_CTRL trace
spacing(9)
3w
376
ps
ps
1
Applications, Implementation, and Layout
ps
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
Table 7-13. CK and ADDR_CTRL Routing Specification(2)(3) (continued)
NO.
PARAMETER
CARS321
CK center-to-center spacing(11) (12)
CARS322
CK spacing to other net(9)
CARS323
Rcp(13)
CARS324
Rtt(13)(14)
MIN
TYP
MAX
UNIT
Zo-1
Zo
Zo+1
Ω
Zo-5
Zo
Zo+5
Ω
4w
(1) Max value is based upon conservative signal integrity approach. This value could be extended only if detailed signal integrity analysis of
rise time and fall time confirms desired operation.
(2) The use of vias should be minimized.
(3) Additional bypass capacitors are required when using the DDR_1V5 plane as the reference plane to allow the return current to jump
between the DDR_1V5 plane and the ground plane when the net class switches layers at a via.
(4) Non-mirrored configuration (all DDR3 memories on same side of PCB).
(5) Mirrored configuration (one DDR3 device on top of the board and one DDR3 device on the bottom).
(6) While this length can be increased for convenience, its length should be minimized.
(7) ADDR_CTRL net class only (not CK net class). Minimizing this skew is recommended, but not required.
(8) CK net class only.
(9) Center-to-center spacing is allowed to fall to minimum 2w for up to 1250 mils of routed length.
(10) The ADDR_CTRL net class of the other DDR EMIF is considered other DDR3 trace spacing.
(11) CK spacing set to ensure proper differential impedance.
(12) The most important thing to do is control the impedance so inadvertent impedance mismatches are not created. Generally speaking,
center-to-center spacing should be either 2w or slightly larger than 2w to achieve a differential impedance equal to twice the singleended
impedance, Zo.
(13) Source termination (series resistor at driver) is specifically not allowed.
(14) Termination values should be uniform across the net class.
(15) Via count difference may increase by 1 only if accurate 3-D modeling of the signal flight times – including accurately modeled signal
propagation through vias – has been applied to ensure all segment skew maximums are not exceeded.
7.2.2.17.2 DQS and DQ Routing Specification
Skew within the DQS and DQ/DM net classes directly reduces setup and hold margin and thus this skew
must be controlled. The only way to practically match lengths on a PCB is to lengthen the shorter traces
up to the length of the longest net in the net class and its associated clock. As with CK and ADDR_CTRL,
a reasonable trace route length is to within a percentage of its Manhattan distance. DQLMn is defined as
DQ Longest Manhattan distance n, where n is the byte number. For a 32-bit interface, there are four
DQLMs, DQLM0-DQLM3. Likewise, for a 16-bit interface, there are two DQLMs, DQLM0-DQLM1.
NOTE
It is not required, nor is it recommended, to match the lengths across all bytes. Length
matching is only required within each byte.
Given the DQS and DQ/DM pin locations on the processor and the DDR3 memories, the maximum
possible Manhattan distance can be determined given the placement. Figure 7-28 shows this distance for
four loads. It is from this distance that the specifications on the lengths of the transmission lines for the
data bus are determined. For DQS and DQ/DM routing, these specifications are contained in Table 7-14.
Applications, Implementation, and Layout
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
377
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
www.ti.com
DQLMX0
DB0
DB1
DQ[0:7]/DM0/DQS0
DQ[8:15]/DM1/DQS1
DQLMX1
DQ[16:23]/DM2/DQS2
DB2
DQLMY0
DQLMX2
DQLMY3
DQLMY2
DB3
DQLMY1
DQ[23:31]/DM3/DQS3
DQLMX3
3
2
1
0
DB0 - DB3 represent data bytes 0 - 3.
SPRS906_PCB_DDR3_28
There are four DQLMs, one for each byte (32-bit interface). Each DQLM is the longest Manhattan distance of the
byte; therefore:
DQLM0 = DQLMX0 + DQLMY0
DQLM1 = DQLMX1 + DQLMY1
DQLM2 = DQLMX2 + DQLMY2
DQLM3 = DQLMX3 + DQLMY3
Figure 7-28. DQLM for Any Number of Allowed DDR3 Devices
Table 7-14. Data Routing Specification(2)
NO.
PARAMETER
MIN
TYP
MAX
UNIT
DRS31
DB0 length
340
ps
DRS32
DB1 length
340
ps
DRS33
DB2 length
340
ps
DRS34
DB3 length
340
ps
DRS35
(3)
DBn skew
5
ps
DRS36
DQSn+ to DQSn- skew
1
ps
DRS37
DQSn to DBn skew(3)(4)
5(10)
ps
(1)
vias
vias
DRS38
Vias per trace
2
DRS39
Via count difference
0(10)
DRS310
Center-to-center DBn to other DDR3 trace spacing(6)
4
w(5)
DRS311
Center-to-center DBn to other DBn trace spacing(7)
3
w(5)
4
w(5)
(8) (9)
DRS312
DQSn center-to-center spacing
DRS313
DQSn center-to-center spacing to other net
(1) Max value is based upon conservative signal integrity approach. This value could be extended only if detailed signal integrity analysis of
rise time and fall time confirms desired operation.
(2) External termination disallowed. Data termination should use built-in ODT functionality.
(3) Length matching is only done within a byte. Length matching across bytes is neither required nor recommended.
(4) Each DQS pair is length matched to its associated byte.
(5) Center-to-center spacing is allowed to fall to minimum 2w for up to 1250 mils of routed length.
(6) Other DDR3 trace spacing means other DDR3 net classes not within the byte.
(7) This applies to spacing within the net classes of a byte.
(8) DQS pair spacing is set to ensure proper differential impedance.
(9) The most important thing to do is control the impedance so inadvertent impedance mismatches are not created. Generally speaking,
center-to-center spacing should be either 2w or slightly larger than 2w to achieve a differential impedance equal to twice the singleended
impedance, Zo.
(10) Via count difference may increase by 1 only if accurate 3-D modeling of the signal flight times – including accurately modeled signal
propagation through vias – has been applied to ensure DBn skew and DQSn to DBn skew maximums are not exceeded.
378
Applications, Implementation, and Layout
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
AM5706, AM5708
www.ti.com
7.3
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
High Speed Differential Signal Routing Guidance
The High-Speed Interface Layout Guidelines Application Report provides guidance for successful routing
of the high speed differential signals. This includes PCB stackup and materials guidance as well as routing
skew, length and spacing limits. TI supports only designs that follow the board design guidelines
contained in the application report.
7.4
Power Distribution Network Implementation Guidance
The Sitara Processor Power Distribution Networks: Implementation and Analysis provides guidance for
successful implementation of the power distribution network. This includes PCB stackup guidance as well
as guidance for optimizing the selection and placement of the decoupling capacitors. TI supports only
designs that follow the board design guidelines contained in the application report.
7.5
Thermal Solution Guidance
The Thermal Design Guide for DSP and Arm Application Processors Application Report and the AM572x
Thermal Considerations Application Report provide guidance for successful implementation of a thermal
solution for system designs that contain an AM57xx application processor. They provide background
information on common terms and methods related to thermal solutions. Test data and thermal
calculations are also provided for a sample design. TI supports only designs that follow the system design
guidelines contained in the application reports. Devices must be operated within their rated temperature
ranges at all times to maintain proper function and rated Power On Hours.
7.6
7.6.1
Single-Ended Interfaces
General Routing Guidelines
The following paragraphs detail the routing guidelines that must be observed when routing the various
functional LVCMOS interfaces.
• Line spacing:
– For a line width equal to W, the spacing between two lines must be 2W, at least. This minimizes the
crosstalk between switching signals between the different lines. On the PCB, this is not achievable
everywhere (for example, when breaking signals out from the device package), but it is
recommended to follow this rule as much as possible. When violating this guideline, minimize the
length of the traces running parallel to each other (see Figure 7-29).
W
D+
S = 2 W = 200 µm
SPRS906_PCB_SE_GND_01
Figure 7-29. Ground Guard Illustration
Applications, Implementation, and Layout
Copyright © 2016–2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: AM5706 AM5708
379
AM5706, AM5708
SPRS961F – AUGUST 2016 – REVISED NOVEMBER 2019
•
•
•
7.6.2
www.ti.com
Length matching (unless otherwise specified):
– For bus or traces at frequencies less than 10 MHz, the trace length matching (maximum length
difference between the longest and the shortest lines) must be less than 25 mm.
– For bus or traces at frequencies greater than 10 MHz, the trace length matching (maximum length
difference between the longest and the shortest lines) must be less than 2.5 mm.
Characteristic impedance
– Unless otherwise specified, the characteristic impedance for single-ended interfaces is
recommended to be between 35-Ω and 65-Ω.
Multiple peripheral support
– For interfaces where multiple peripherals have to be supported in the star topology, the length of
each branch has to be balanced. Before closing the PCB design, it is highly recommended to verify
signal integrity based on simulations including actual PCB extraction.
QSPI Board Design and Layout Guidelines
The following section details the routing guidelines that must be observed when routing the QSPI
interfaces.
• The qspi1_sclk output signal must be looped back into the qspi1_rtclk input.
• The signal propagation delay from the qspi1_sclk ball to the QSPI device CLK input pin (A to C) must
be approximately equal to the signal propagation delay from the QSPI device CLK pin to the
qspi1_rtclk ball (C to D).
• The signal propagation delay from the QSPI device CLK pin to the qspi1_rtclk ball (C to D) must be
approximately equal to the signal propagation delay of the control and data signals between the QSPI
device and the SoC device (E to F, or F to E).
• The signal propagation delay from the qspi1_sclk signal to the series terminators (R2 = 10 Ω) near the
QSPI device must be < 450pS (~7cm as stripline or ~8cm as microstrip)
• 50 Ω PCB routing is recommended along with series terminations, as shown in Figure 7-30.
• Propagation delays and matching:
– A to C = C to D = E to F.
– Matching skew: < 60pS
– A to B < 450pS
– B to C = as small as possible (
工商网监
湘ICP备2023018690号
